A GRAMMAR
OF
ATTIC AiND IONIC GREEK
BY
FRANK COLE BABBITT, PH.D. (HARVARD)
PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
IN TRIXITY COLLEGE, HARTFORD
NEW YORK : CINCINNATI : CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
FREDERICK DEFOREST ALLEN
ON August 4, 1897, occurred the sudden death of FREDERICK
DEFOREST ALLEN, Ph.D., Professor of Classical Philology in
Harvard University. Of the loss which classical scholarship
has suffered by his death I need not speak here. His thor-
oughness and accuracy, his intrepid regard for the truth, and
his keen, unbiased judgment are well known both to his
former pupils and to the larger world which has read his
published writings.
Shortly before his death he invited me to join with him in
compiling a small Greek Grammar. During the two weeks
immediately preceding his death we had worked together as far
as the third declension, and had discussed somewhat the general
plan of the book. After his death the publishers expressed a
desire that I should complete the work which had been thus
begun a desire with which I could not refuse to comply.
The task has been one of sadness and of joy : of sadness,
because at every turn I missed the strong counsel of a con-
summate scholar; of joy, at the thought that I might thus,
even in some slight measure, help to perpetuate the memory
of a man whose name will always stand for what is highest
and best in scholarship.
To the memory of FREDERICK DEFOREST ALLEN this book
is affectionately inscribed.
COPYRIGHT, 1902, BY
FEANK COLE BABBITT.
AT. AND ION. GREEK.
W. P. I
PREFACE
THIS grammar has for its purpose to state the essential
facts and principles of the Greek language in concise
form, with only so much discussion as may reasonably be
demanded for a clear understanding of the subject.
While in recent years the ability to read a language
has rightly come to be regarded as the proper test of a
real knowledge of it, this point of view, so far from be-
littling the study of formal grammar, more than ever
insists that a thorough knowledge of the essentials of the
grammar is the most important part of the equipment of
him who would read a language with ease. By essen-
tials is meant no antiquated lore about the vocative of
#eo? or of aSeX^o'?, but the recurrent facts of inflection
and syntax, nominative %fc>/>a, genitive ^o>joa?, and so
forth, with such side lights as can be brought to bear
to make these facts easier of acquisition and comprehen-
sion. A considerable experience in elementary teaching
has convinced me that explanations are extremely useful,
even to very young pupils ; and I am persuaded that an
occasional appeal to the reason rather than to the sheer
memory of the pupil will not always prove futile.
The work was begun in collaboration with the late Pro-
fessor Frederick de Forest Allen, and, in justice to his
memory, it is proper to state that pages 13-36 and 40-46
stand practically as they were composed by Professor
Allen and myself working together. For the remainder
I am solely responsible,
3
4 PREFACE
It was the intention at the beginning to prepare a
grammar for use in the secondary schools. As the work
progressed, however, I found that, with but a slight in-
crease of bulk, it would be possible to include also as
much grammatical information as is usually required by
students in college. With these additions, this work
meets the needs of secondary schools, and at the same
time is sufficient for all ordinary demands of the college
course.
The book incorporates the results of the more recent
philological studies. The doctrine of the Ablaut is stated
untechnically, and it is given proper prominence in inflec-
tion and word formation. Due regard is paid to the fact
that analogy plays an important part in language, and
that the context is not to be neglected in determining
the exact significance of mode and tense.
Ionic forms are given in footnotes instead of being
combined with Attic forms, and this arrangement is fol-
lowed also in the Syntax and the verb list ; the reason for
so doing is apparent to anybody who has ever taught
Greek prose composition.
Contract forms are given in the contracted form fol-
lowed by the uncontracted form (which is often purely
theoretical) in parentheses, and it is hoped that pupils will
realize that the Attic Greeks said TTOLCO, and not Trote'co.
In the examples under Inflection and Word Formation
the letter or syllable to which attention is directed is
made prominent by full-faced type ; in the Syntax the
same result is accomplished by spacing the word.
The paradigms have been written to conform to our
present knowledge, although some matter has been re-
tained solely because it has become so engrafted in cur-
rent texts that it could not be omitted.
PREFACE 5
So, also, in the matter of Homeric forms, I have, I trust,
given due consideration to the vulgate. A few things I
have omitted entirely ; others I have recorded for the
reason given in the preceding paragraph. Yet I am
convinced that if our schools should adopt a fairly con-
servative text of the Homeric poems like that of Cauer,
from which assimilated verbs and forms like AtoXou, o-Triji,
and the like, have been banished, it would lighten the
task of instruction, and the time given to explaining
unnecessary forms could be better devoted to other
purposes.
In selecting examples to illustrate the chapter on Syn-
tax, I have given preference to those from authors and
works commonly read at the earlier stages of the pupil's
progress. By printing the examples in the same type as
the rest of the matter, the number of pages in the chapter
011 Syntax has been considerably increased, but the gain
in clearness, and in the prominence of the examples, more
than offsets the apparent increase in bulk.
In the treatment of Syntax I have been conservative,
although I have allowed myself some license in changing
the conventional arrangement of the material.
In addition to the books mentioned on pages 6 and 7,
I have found helpful also the two well-known grammars
of this country, as well as those of Sonnenschein, Kaegi,
Lattmann-Muller, and Hahne's G-rieehische Syntax.
'Space does not permit me to enumerate all the friends
who by advice or suggestion have given me help, but I
desire in particular to express my gratitude to Professor
George Edwin Howes of the University of Vermont, who
has read at least twice every portion of the proofs. To
his scholarship and sound common sense I am indebted
for many helpful suggestions and corrections. Likewise
6 PREFACE
to Professor Clifford H. Moore and Mr. William Fen-
wick Harris of Harvard University, who have also read
the proofs, I am indebted for numerous corrections and
helpful suggestions. Others whom I should like to men-
tion also by name I am obliged to include in a general
acknowledgment.
I shall be grateful for corrections and suggestions from
any source.
FRANK COLE BABBITT.
HARTFORD, CONNECTICUT,
March, 1901.
No conscientious teacher will find answered in this
book all of the many perplexing questions which will
arise in his mind. The following list contains the titles
of the most important modern works on Greek Grammar,
in which such questions are fully discussed (and some-
times answered):
KUHNER, R. Ausfiihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache. 3te
Auflage in neuer Bearbeitung besorgt von Friedrich Blass. Han-
nover, 1890-1898. 8vo.
Teil I. 1, 2. Elementar- und Formenlehre. S. xxiii + 645, xi +
652. Teil II. 1. Satzlehre. In neuer Bearbeitung besorgt von
Bernhard Gerth. S. ix + 666.
(The most comprehensive work on Greek grammar. A model of
careful and accurate scholarship. Thoroughly conservative.)
MEYER, GUSTAV. Griechische Grammatik. 3te Auflage. S. xviii +
715. Leipzig, 1896. 8vo. (Bibliothek indogermanischer Grain-
matiken. Bd. III.)
(Deals with the sounds and inflections only, from the point of view
.of Comparative Grammar. Full, accurate, and moderately conserva-
tive.)
PREFACE 7
BRUGMANN, KARL. Griechische Grammatik. (Lautlehre, Stamm-
bildungs- und Flexionslehre und Syntax.) 3te Auflage. S. xix +
632. Miinchen, 1900. 8vo. (In Miiller, I. von. Handbuch der
Klassischen Altertums-Wissenschaft. Bd. II. Abt. 1.)
(Written from the point of view of Comparative Grammar. Briefer
than Meyer, and more radical.)
MEISTERHANS, K. Grammatik der attischen Inschriften. 3te Auflage.
S. XIV. + 288. Berlin, 1900. 8vo.
(Deals with inscriptions only. Most of the results are embodied
in Kiihner-Blass.)
GILDERSLEEVE, B. L. Syntax of Classical Greek from Homer to
Demosthenes. Pt. I. N. Y., 1900. Svo.
(Clear and accurate in statement, and remarkable for the excellent
collection and arrangement of examples.)
GOODWIN, WM. WATSON. Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the
Greek Verb. Rewritten and enlarged, pp. xxxii + 464 + 8.
Boston, U.S.A., 1890. Svo.
(Deals fully and thoroughly with the syntax of the verb.)
BLASS, FRIEDRICH. Pronunciation of Ancient Greek. Tr. from the
3d German ed. by W. J. Purton. Cambridge, Eng., 1890. Svo.
(A careful collection and consideration of the evidence relating to
the pronunciation of ancient Greek.)
SMYTH, HERBERT WEIR. The Sounds and Inflections of the Greek
Dialects. Ionic, pp. xxviii + 668. Oxford, 1894. Svo.
(Thoroughly accurate and reliable. Contains a full treatment of
the dialect of Herodotus.)
VAN LEEUWEN, J. Enchiridium Dictionis Epicae. pp. Ixxii + 606.
Lugd. Batavorum, 1892-1894. Svo.
(Entirely radical, but invaluable for the very full collection of
material which it contains.)
MONRO, D. B. A Grammar of the Homeric Dialect. 2d ed. pp.
xxiv + 436. Oxford, 1891. Svo.
(Deals more particularly with Homeric syntax. Accurate, reliable,
but very conservative.)
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
The Greek Language
WRITING AND SOUND
Alphabet .....
Vowels .....
Diphthongs ....
Breathings ....
Consonants ....
Interchange of Vowels
Contraction of Vowels
Omission of Vowels .
Consonant Changes .
Consonants with Vowels .
Rejection or Transfer of Aspi-
ration .....
Hiatus (Crasis and Elision)
Movable Consonants
Final Consonants
Syllables and Quantity .
Accent .....
Proclitics and Enclitics
Punctuation
INFLECTION
NOUNS .....
Case Endings ....
Substantives ....
First Declension .
Second Declension
Attic Second Declension .
Third Declension .
Consonant Stems
Vowel Stems
Irregular Declension
Adjectives ....
First and Second Declensions
Third Declension .
First and Third Declensions .
Irregular Declension
Declension of Participles
Comparison of Adjectives
Adverbs .....
Pronouns
Numerals .....
PAGE
11
PAGE
VERBS 96
Voice 96
Mode 97
Tense 98
Person and Number . . . 100
Personal Endings . . .101
Inflection (-w Form and -/xt
Form) . . . .102
Augment . . . . . 105
Reduplication . . . .108
Accent of the Verb . . .110
Formation of Tense Steins . 110
The Present System . .113
The First Aorist System . 118
The Second Aorist System . 120
The Future System . . 123
The First Perfect System . 124
The Second Perfect System . 125
The Pluperfects Active . 126
The Perfect Middle System . 127
The Future Perfect . . 129
The First Aorist Passive Sys-
tem 129
The Second Aorist Passive . 130
The Futures Passive . .131
The Verbal Adjectives . .132
Synopsis of -n-aidevw . . . 133
Paradigms of -w Verbs . .135
Paradigms of -/ Verbs . . 145
Second Perfect without Suffix . 151
Irregular Verbs in -/u . .152
FORMATION OF WORDS
Derivative Words . . .158
Formation of Substantives .161
Formation of Adjectives . 166
Formation of Adverbs . .168
Formation of Verbs . .169
Compound Words . . . 171
Meaning of Compound Words 174
SYNTAX
The Sentence . . . .175
Agreement .... 178
Syntax of Substantives . .180
The Cases . . . .182
The Nominative and Vocative . 183
The Accusative . . .184
Direct Object . . .184
8
CONTENTS
PAGE
The Cognate Accusative . 184
Adverbial Uses of the Ac-
cusative .... 186
Two Accusatives with One
Verb . . . .188
The Genitive . . . .190
The True Genitive . . 191
The Partitive Genitive . 193
The Ablative Genitive . .197
The Dative . . . .202
The True Dative . . . 202
Dative of the Indirect Ob-
ject .... 203
The Dative of Interest . 204
The Locative Dative . . 206
The Instrumental Dative . 207
Place and Time (Summary) . 211
Prepositions with the Cases . 212
Use and Meanings of the
Prepositions . . .213
Improper Prepositions . . 224
Syntax of Adjectives . . 225
Syntax of Adverbs . . .229
The Adverbs ov and ^ . 230
The Adverb &v 232
Conjunctions .... 234
The Definite Article, 6, 77, r6 . 235
Position of the Article . . 238
Syntax of Pronouns . . .241
Personal and Reflexive . . 243
The Intensive Pronoun aur6s 245
Possessive Pronouns . . 247
Demonstrative Pronouns . 248
Relative Pronouns . . 249
Interrogative Pronouns . . 252
Indefinite Pronouns . . 253
fiXXos and ^repos . . . 253
Syntax of the Verb . . . 254
Agreement of Verbs . . 255
The Voices .... 257
Use of the Tenses . . . 263
The Tenses of the Indicative 264
Tenses of Other Modes . . 272
Uses of the Finite Modes . .277
Statements . . . .281
Questions .... 2S<5
Direct Questions . . 280
Indirect Questions . . 290
Commands and Exhortations 291
Wishes ... .292
Final Clauses . . . 294
Purpose . . . .294
Object Clauses . . . 296
Clauses of Fearing . . 297
Result . . . .298
Causal Clauses . . . 299
Conditions . . . .300
Concessive Clauses . .311
Relative and Temporal Clauses 311
The Infinitive . . . .315
Subject of the Infinitive . 315
Uses of the Infinitive . . 317
The Infinitive as a Substan-
tive .... 318
The Infinitive in Indirect
Discourse . . . 323
The Participle . . . .324
The Attributive Participle . 324
The Circumstantial Participle 325
Genitive and Accusative
Absolute . . .330
The Supplementary Participle 332
not in Indirect Discourse . 332
in Indirect Discourse . 334
The Verbal Adjectives . . 336
Indirect Discourse . . .338
APPENDICES
A.
347
352
353
355
357
359
Versification
Trochaic Rhythms .
Iambic Rhythms
Dactylic Rhythms .
Anapaestic Rhythms
Lyric Rhythms
Lyric Rhythms in f Time 360
Dactylo - Epitritic
Rhythms . . .364
Other Lyric Rhythms . 365
Table of Vowel Contractions 367
The Pronunciation of Greek
Proper Names in English 368
Some Additional Grammati-
cal Terms . . .369
Weights, Measures, and
Time .... 372
List of Verbs . . 377
INDICES
English 422
Greek
437
10
ABBREVIATIONS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
ace. = accusative,
act. = active, actively,
adj. = adjective,
advb. = adverb,
aor. = aorist.
cf. = compare.
D = dual,
dat. = dative,
decl. = declension,
e.g. = for example.
encl. = enclitic,
etc. = and so forth,
f . , ff . = following,
fern. = feminine,
fut. = future,
gen. = genitive.
i.e. = that is.
impf . = imperfect,
impv. = imperative,
indie. = indicative,
infin. = infinitive.
KT\. = KO.I TO. XoiTTtt (aild
the rest).
lit. = literal, literally,
masc. = masculine,
mid. = middle.
Mss. = manuscripts,
neut. = neuter.
nom.'= nominative,
opt. = optative.
P. = plural,
partic. = participle.
pass. = passive,
pers. = person,
perf . , pf . = perfect,
plur., pi. = plural,
plupf. = pluperfect,
pres. = present,
q.v. = which see.
sc. = scilicet.
S. , sing. = singular,
subj. = subjunctive,
viz. = namely,
voc. = vocative.
, = section, sec-
tions.
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN CITING EXAMPLES FROM
GREEK AUTHORS
Aesch. = Aeschylus.
Ag. = Agamemnon.
Pr. Prometheus.
Aeschin. = Aeschines.
Ar. = Aristophanes.
Ach. = Acharnenses.
Eq. Equites.
Nub. = Nubes.
San. = Sanae.
V. = Vespae.
Dem. = Demosthenes.
Hm. = Homer; A, B, T,
etc. are used in refer-
ring to the books of
the Iliad, and a, /3, 7,
etc. in referring to the
books of the Odyssey.
Hdt. = Herodotus.
Hes. = Hesiod.
O.D. = Opera et Dies.
E. = Euripides.
Ale. = Alcestis.
And. = Andromache.
El. = Electra.
Hec. = Hecuba.
Hel. = Helena.
H.F.=Hercules Furens.
Hipp. = Hippolylus.
I. T. = Iphigenia Tau-
rica.
Med. = Medea.
Supp. = Supplices.
Tro. = Troades.
Isoc. Isocrates.
Lys. = Lysias.
PI. = Plato.
Ap. = Apology.
Grit. = Crito.
Go. = Gorgias.
Leg. = Leges.
Menex. = Menexenus.
Phaed. = Phaedo.
Phaedr. = Phaedrus.
Hep. = Republic.
S. = Sophocles.
Aj. = Ajax.
Ant. = Antigone.
El. = Electra.
O.T. = Oedipus lyran-
nus.
Th. = Thucydides.
Xn. Xenophon.
A. = Anabasis.
Ages. = Agesilaus.
Cy. = Cyropaedia.
Hell. = Hellenica.
Hier. = Hiero.
Mem. = Memorabilia.
Oec. Oeconomicus.
Symp. = Symposium.
GREEK GRAMMAR
INTRODUCTION
THE GREEK LANGUAGE
GREEK is the language of a people inhabiting not
only the mainland of Greece, but also the islands of the
Aegean Sea and the adjacent shores, together with a small
part of Italy. The Greeks called themselves Hellenes
("EXX^e?), but the Romans called them G-raeci, and hence
the English word Greek.
The Greek language belongs to the Indo-European
group of languages, and is related to Sanskrit, Latin,
Persian, Slavonic, Celtic, and Germanic. Hence comes
the relation which exists between many English and
Greek words. A greater number of English words,
however, are derived directly from Greek words. For
example, English know is the same as Greek yi-yva)-crKa),
but the English words gnomic and arithmetic are derived
from the Greek yvco/jiitcos and apiO^TLKri.
For over twenty-five hundred years Greek has been
spoken and written, with such changes as are inevitable
in the growth and development of any language, but
the masterpieces of Greek literature were written some
centuries before the Christian era. In the neighborhood
of 400 B.C. Greek may be said to have reached its highest
development, and it is customary to take the language of
that time as a sort of standard.
In ancient times the Greek people did not all speak
their language just alike, but each little country had its
11
12 INTRODUCTION
own dialect, which often differed considerably from the
dialect of a neighboring country only a few miles away.
All the dialects may be roughly divided into three dif-
ferent groups ; namely, Aeolic, Doric, and Ionic. To the
Ionic group belongs the Ionic dialect proper, together with
the dialect of Attica, which is known as Attic.
In the Ionic dialect were written, among other things,
the poems of Homer and Hesiod, and the history of He-
rodotus. In the Attic dialect were written nearly all the
other great works of Greek literature which have come
down to us, and which, either directly, or through the
medium of their Latin imitations, have influenced to such
a vast extent the literature of the world. The dramatic
poets Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, and Aristophanes,
the historians Thucydides and Xenophon, the orators
Lysias and Demosthenes, and the philosopher, Plato, all
wrote in the Attic dialect.
Attic, the most elegant and refined of all the Greek
dialects, finally superseded the others in literary use. At
the same time it began to lose some of its earlier purity
and refinements, and after about 330 B.C. it is known as
the HOMY) or Common Greek. From this Common Greek
there was evolved in the long course of years, with a con-
siderable admixture of foreign elements, the present lan-
guage of the Greek people, Romaic or Modern Greek.
Modern Greek differs so considerably from Ancient
Greek, that, although a knowledge of it is helpful, yet
one can soonest learn to comprehend the great works of
Greek literature by studying directly the language of
Ancient Greece.
This grammar deals only with the Attic and Ionic
dialects of Ancient Greek.
WHITING AND SOUND
ALPHABET
1. Greek
is written with
the following twenty-four
letters :
LATIN
FORM
NAME
EQUIVALENT
A a
a\<f>a
alpha
a
B
fifjra
beta
b
T 7
ydp/JM
gamma
g
A 3
&e\ra
delta
d
E
el (e yfrlXdv)
ei (epsilon)
e
Z f
tyra
zeta
z
H 1?
rjra
eta
e
/ -v /Jr.
vy (/ GF
Orjra
theta
th
I l
ItoTa
iota
i
K *
KaTnra
kappa
c,k
A X
\d/38a (Xd/Jifll
a) labda (lambda)
1
M p
fW
mil
in
N i;
vv
nil
n
H f
{el (P)
xei (xl)
X
o
OU (o jJLiKpOV)
ou (6 micron)
II TT
Tret (w*3
pei (pi)
p
P P
pw
rho
r
2 <T?
o-iyfjLa
sigma
s
T T
rav
tau
t
T u
v (v ijri\dv)
u (iipsilon)
y
O (f>
fal (c/>t)
phei (phi)
P h
X ^
%et (^t)
chei (chi)
eh
^ -v/r
i/ret (^t)
psei (psi)
ps
fl w
& (&> /xeya)
o (timega)
1. The names in parentheses came into use in the Middle
Ages, but are now commonly employed.
14 VOWELS
2. Sigma at the end of a word has the form 5 ; in any
other place the form a. Thus o-rda-is faction.
2. The letter F, p , called van or digamma, early ceased
to be used in Attic and Ionic Greek. It had the sound of
English w, and stood in the alphabet between e and . For
other obsolete letters see 156.
VOWELS
3. The vowels e and o are always short, 77 and &> are
always long. The vowels a, t, u, are short in some words
and long in others. In this grammar they are marked
a, Z, L>, when long. The unmarked a, i, u, are, therefore,
understood to be short.
The mark of length is omitted over circumnexed vowels
(58).
4. The Attic sounds of the vowels, at about 400 B.C.,
are believed to have been nearly as follows:
LONG VOWELS SHORT VOWELS
a as a in par. a as a in papa.
7] as in French fete. e as e in pet.
1 as i in machine. i as i in pit.
w as in prone. o as o in obey.
as ti in French s$r. t> as u in French bwtte.
2 a. Vau, although not written in the received text of the Homeric
poems, must, from evidence of the metre and of early inscriptions, have
been a live sound when these poems were composed. Thus it appears to
have been sounded at the beginning of about forty words, the most impor-
tant of which are : &<TTV town, &va.% lord, dvSavu please, eiKo<ri twenty (cf.
Lat. mginti), &>, of, e himself, 2 six, root tir- (e?ros word, elirov said),
epyov icork, root e<r- (Zvvvjjit clothe, tvd-rjs clothing ; cf. Lat. vestis), eros
year (cf. Lat. veins'}, ydus sweet (see 36 a), root Id- (Ideiv see, oUa know;
cf. Lat. vid-ere), olxos house (cf. Lat. vicus), oivos wine (cf. Lat. vimim),
fa, J), 6V his. See also 36 a and 172, 2.
DIPHTHONGS 15
1. The sounds of v and v are midway between English oo
and ee. They are exemplified also in the German w, as in
Fwsse, Briicke.
DIPHTHONGS
5. A diphthong is a combination of two vowels in one
syllable. The latter vowel is always i or v. The diph-
thongs are
at, et, 01, vi, af, eu, ou,
a, 77, a>, Tju.
1. In the diphthongs a, 77, a>, the t is written below the
first vowel, and is called iota subscript. When, however,
the first vowel is written as a capital letter, i stands on the
line : thus 2 Ai^? Hades. The ancients always wrote i in
these diphthongs on the line.
6. The sounds of the principal diphthongs, at about
400 B.C., were very nearly as follows:
ai like ai in aisle. av like ou in our.
t like ei in rein, eu like eu in feud.
01 like oi in toil. ov like ou in yew.
vt like m' in quit.
1. In a, 77, &), the i was originally sounded. But later
(about 100 B.C.) it became silent, and these diphthongs
have since been pronounced like simple a, 77, a>.
2. The sound of 771; cannot be exemplified from English,
but may be represented as eh-oo, pronounced quickly to-
gether.
3. In the earliest times, the diphthongs et and ov had,
in some words at least, actual double sounds, such as their
composition would indicate, and differed in pronunciation
5 a. In Ionic (Herodotus) a diphthong wu occurs ; thus wirros for 6
the same. This diphthong uv is almost unknown in Attic Greek.
16 DIAERESIS
from the apparent diphthongs et and ou, which arise from
contraction of e-e, o-o, o-e, or e-o (see 18, 3 and 5) or from
compensative lengthening (see 16). Thus, et in <yevei is
made up of e + i (see 18, 1 and 106), but in #i? for
*9tvT<$ (see 16, 1) et is merely lengthened from e. In
early inscriptions the real diphthongs et and ov were
written El and OT, while the apparent diphthongs were
written with simple E and O. Later (soon after 400 B.C.)
both kinds of diphthongs came to be pronounced and
written alike.
DIAERESIS
7. The mark of diaeresis (") is sometimes written over
an i or v, to show that it does not combine with the
preceding vowel to form a diphthong : thus ySot, pro-
nounced in two syllables, bo-i.
BREATHINGS
8. A vowel at the beginning of a word always has a
breathing, either rough or smooth.
The rough breathing (') shows that the vowel was pro-
nounced with the sound of h preceding. Thus, ejrrd seven
is pronounced heptd.
The smooth breathing (') shows that the vowel was
pronounced with no sound of h. Thus, CLTTO from is pro-
nounced ap6.
1. The mark of breathing is written over small letters
and in front of capitals : thus dX?7#f?? true, 'Ap/cds Ar-
cadian.
2. In a diphthong, however, the breathing is written
over the second vowel: thus AU'eia? Aeneas, a/uro'? self.
8 a. Ionic sometimes has a smooth breathing where Attic has the
rough : thus T|^\IOS sun, Attic T]Xtos ; ov/oos boundary, Attic o/>os.
CONSONANTS
17
NOTE. But in the diphthongs a, y, a>, the breathing never stands
over the i, even when this is written on the line : thus "AiSr/s Hades,
w'Sij song.
9. The consonant p at the beginning of a word always
has the rough breathing (p) : thus ptfrcop orator (Lat.
rhetor).
10. It happens also that all words beginning with the
letter v have the rough breathing.
CONSONANTS
11. The consonants were thus pronounced:
/8 like b in 5ad.
7 u g in go ( see also
S " d in do.
TT " p in pin..
K " k in &eg.
T " t in top.
< " ph in
like >A in graphic.
X " M in inMorn, later
like cA in German
maeAen.
like A in ho^ouse, later
like th in thin..
X " Z in Zip.
/LI " m in mix.
v " n in wow.
p " r in red (see also
later
a s m see.
f " English zd, later like
English z.
f " 2; in mia;.
-v/r " j9s in gypsum.
1. Gamma (7) before /e, 7, %, f, represented the sound
of n in mk, and is called gamma nasal : thus ayKwv (pro-
nounced ankdii) elbow, ayye\os (pronounced dngelos) mes-
senger.
2. Rho (/?) at the beginning of a word had a sound
somewhat like hr (compare 9).
NOTE. In Greek every consonant was sounded. Thus KTUTIS a
founding, <$>0i<ns decay, i/^vSos falsehood, were pronounced respectively
ktisis, phthisis, pseudos.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 2
18 INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS
12. The consonants may be divided into three classes,
Semivowels, Mutes, and Double Consonants.
1. The semivowels are, X, p, v, p, cr, and 7-nasal ( 11, 1).
Of these
cr is called a Sibilant,
\, fji, v, and p are called Liquids,
p, v, and 7-nasal ( 11, 1) are called Nasals.
2. The mutes may be classified as follows :
SMOOTH MIDDLE ROUGH
LABIAL TT /3 cf)
LINGUAL T
PALATAL tc 7 %
Those in the same horizontal line are said to be Cog-
nate, because they are produced by the same organ of
speech (lips, tongue, or palate). Those in the same per-
pendicular line are said to be Co-ordinate, because they
have the same degree of aspiration (or vocalization).
3. The double consonants are f, f, ^. Of these, f is
written for KCT, 7*7, or p^er, and ty for TTCT, flcr, or <j>cr.
INTEECHANGE OF VOWELS
13. In the inflection and formation of words, short
and long vowels of similar sound often interchange : thus
Si-So-fjiev we give, i-co-//-t I give ; \ipi\v harbor, Xt/^e^-o? of a
harbor.
NOTE. The long vowel corresponding to a is often 77 (see 15).
13 a. In Homer a long vowel or a diphthong sometimes stands for a
short vowel, especially in words which would otherwise be excluded from
the verse : thus i\yd6eos very holy for ayddeos, ov\6fj.evos accursed for 6X6-
JJ.CVOS.
INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS 19
1. The corresponding short and long forms may be
seen from the following table :
SHORT a e i o v
LONG a or rj 77 I co v
14. The same root or suffix often appears with a different
short vowel, as, for example, \ty-co speak, \07-o? speech;
\v-o-fjLev we loose, Xv--re you loose. Three different forms
of this appearance are recognized, but the same root or
suffix does not always present all three forms.
Tliese forms are, (i) with o, (2) with e, (3) with no vowel.
Thus TTOr-aw? able to fly, Trir-o^ai fly, I-TT T-O/JLTJV fleiv.
1. But in case the third form (without the vowel)
brings together a combination of consonants hard to pro-
nounce, there is developed from the adjacent consonants in
pronunciation a vowel sound, a. Thus, instead of *e-r/o $-riv,
we have erpa^rjv was nourished, so that the series (of 14)
becomes (i) o, ( 2 ) e, (3) a: thus re-rpo^-a have nourished,
Tp(j)-(0 nourish, e-rpaiffr-Tjv was nourished. (Compare English
sing, sang, sung, and German sterben, starb, gestorben.*)
NOTE. An a sometimes appears as the vowel-equivalent of v :
'thus 7rd#os (for *TrvOo<s) experience, suffering.
2. In combination with i or v the vowels e and o, of
course, make the corresponding diphthongs, so that we
seem to have, on the one hand, an interchange of (i) ot,
(2) et, and (3) i, and on the other, an interchange of (i) ov
(rare), (2) ev, and (3) v ; but it will be seen at once that
this apparent " interchange " is really the same phenome-
non which has been described above ( 14) : thus
Xe-Xoi7r-a have left XeiTr-ft) leave e-\nr-ov left
haste o-7r\iSa> hasten
<f)t\)y-co flee, e-(f)vy-ov fled
20 COMPENSATIVE LENGTHENING
3. The following table and examples may serve to make
this principle clearer :
i. 2. 3.
O
c (a)
01 1 I
ov tv v
<f>6p-o<s tribute <f>tp-d> bear &i-<f> p-os chariot
turning T^TT-M turn e-r/aaTr-o/x^v turned
-a trust Trei'0-w persuade TT L0-av6s persuasive
)->j ( 21) -^(v)-a ( 21) e~x v-Oyv was poured
a pouring
15. In Attic, original a becomes 77 unless it is preceded
by e, i, or p. Thus, original (Doric) <a/-td report becomes
(pT\jjLT] ; but yeveo. generation, CTO^LQ, wisdom, Tr/oa/y/ua deed
retain a.
1. But a arising from contraction ( 18) or compensa-
tive lengthening ( 16) remains unchanged.
COMPENSATIVE LENGTHENING
16. A short vowel is sometimes lengthened, to make up
for the loss of a following consonant. Thus, for
we have /-te'Xd-? black.
1. In this process, e becomes et (not 77), and o becomes
of (not w). Thus, *6tvT-s gives #i<? having placed, *oovr-s
gives Soij? having given.
INTERCHANGE OF QUANTITY
17. The combinations do and 770 often change to ea>, and
rja to ea. Thus, mo? temple becomes z^eco?, ySao-^Xfja king
becomes y
15 a. Ionic regularly has 77 for original a, even after e, i, and p : thus
, <ro<^T], Trpr\y^a. Not so, however, in the cases covered by 15, 1.
CONTRACTION OF VOWELS 21
CONTRACTION OF VOWELS
18. Contraction unites into one long vowel or diphthong
vowels which stand next each other in different syllables.
The following are the most important rules for contrac-
tion. (Many of them admit occasional exceptions, 715.)
1. A vowel v or i unites with the preceding vowel to
form a diphthong. Thus, yevt-i gives yevti, 7rei06-i gives
7ret#oi, 777x0-1 gives 717x0.
2. Two like vowels unite in the common long. Thus,
yepa-a gives 76^00,, c^Xe-T^re gives c^iX^re.
3. But e-e gives et, and o-o gives ov ( 6, 3). Thus,
</uX- gives <tX6i, TrXo-o? gives TrXov?.
4. An o sound absorbs a, e, or ?;, and becomes o>. Thus,
6pa.-OfjLev gives o/xo/nez', (/uXe-oxrt gives <f>i\G>cn, S^Xo-T^re gives
5. But e-o and o-e both give ov ( 6, 3). Thus,
gives 7eVou?, S^Xo-c gives StjXov.
6. When a and e or 77 come together, the first in order
absorbs the second, and becomes long. Thus, 7eW-a gives
7eVrj, 6pa.-T\Te give^ Spare.
19. A vowel standing before a diphthong is often con-
tracted with the first vowel of the diphthong. The last
vowel of the diphthong is regularly retained in the con-
tracted form, but the apparent diphthongs ei and ov ( 6, 3)
are contracted^ like simple e and o. Thus, rZ//,a-i gives
r^a (cf. 5, 1), </>tX-i gives <tXL, TtAta-oi/u gives
\vr\-ai gives XT/TJ, but rl^a-^iv gives rt/id^, Ti/za-ov gives
(since ei and of here are not real diphthongs ; see 6, 3).
18 a. In Ionic, contraction is much less frequent than in Attic. Thus,
we have TrXoos for Attic vrXovs, y^vto. for Attic yevi\. Eo, ecu, if contracted,
give ev (Troiev/iev we do for Trote'-o/xei', Troiewi i/iey t?o for Trote'-owri) , but
often remain uncontracted. *
22 OMISSION OF VOWELS
1. But e or o is absorbed before 01. Thus, ^>t\-oi gives
<tXol, 77X6-01 gives 77X01.
2. The contraction of both o-ei and 0-97 gives ot. Thus,
77X6-61 and 77X6-1] both contract into SrjXol : but 77X6-61^
gives 8r)\oHV) since et here is not a real diphthong ( 6, 3).
NOTE 1. When three successive vowels are contracted, the last
two are first contracted, and with the resulting diphthong the first
vowel is then contracted. Thus, ert/Aaeo (for *ert/>uxe-o-o) you were
being honored contracts first into eri/xciou, and this in turn contracts
into ert/xw.
NOTE 2. Synizesis. Sometimes in poetry two vowels, without
being regularly contracted, were so far united in pronunciation as
to form one syllable. Thus, TroAews might be pronounced as a word
of two syllables, -eco- sounding somewhat like -yd-. This is called
synizesis {setting together}.
OMISSION OF VOWELS
20. Between two consonants a short vowel is sometimes
dropped. (This is called Syncope.) Thus ea-rai shall be,
for crrat ; rf\.9ov came, for tfXvOov.
21. Between two vowels the vowels * and v are some-
times dropped. Thus, TrXei-oov more becomes TrXeW ; */3a<rt-
\\)-cov becomes (Baai\eo)v of kings.
CONSONANT CHANGES
DOUBLED CONSONANTS
22. Attic regularly has TT in place of Ionic ao-.
The Ionic form, however, is adopted by some of the
Attic poets and earlier writers of prose.
22 a. Doubled Consonants in Homer. In Homer we frequently find
a doubled consonant where Attic would have a single consonant : thus
took (Attic e'\ae), aydvvHpos snowy, eSSeiae feared (Attic
CONSONANT CHANGES 23
23. Whenever initial p, by inflection or composition,
has a single vowel brought before it, the p is doubled :
thus peo> flow, eppet was flowing. A diphthong, however,
does not cause the p to be doubled : thus eu-poo? fair-
flowing.
24. The pa of earlier Attic later assimilates to pp.
Thus, 0ap(j-o<? courage later becomes #appo?.
MUTES BEFORE MUTES
25. Before a lingual mute a labial or a palatal mute
becomes coordinate (see 12, 2).
For example, *<ye r Ypa$-rai becomes ^eypaTrrat has been
written, *\e\ey-Tai becomes XeXeKrat has been said, *e\enr-
0r)v becomes eXefyBrjv was left, *$rpif-0i)V becomes erptyOvv
was rubbed.
26. A lingual mute before another lingual mute is
changed to o-. Thus, */8-Te becomes tare you know, *eVet0-
0fjv becomes eTrcfoQrjv was persuaded.
MUTES BEFORE LIQUIDS
27. 1. Before p a labial mute becomes //.. Thus,
*\e\ei,Tr-fjiat, becomes \e\ei\Lfjiai, have been left.
2. Before /-i a palatal mute becomes 7. Thus, *7re7rXeK-
/xat becomes 7r7r\eyfJLai have been twisted.
3. Before p a lingual mute becomes er. Thus, *7re7ret9-
pai becomes 7re7reto>iai have been persuaded.
In many cases this doubling is to be explained by the assimilation of
another consonant. Thus, dydvvi(f>os is for *dya-( < <r)vi(pos and e55etcre is for
*e5( / r)ere.
In some words Homer has both the single and double forms : thus
and 6iri<ru backward, 'AxiXXetfs and 'A^tXf^s Achilles.
24 CONSONANT CHANGES
MUTES BEFORE cr
28. A labial mute before cr unites with it to form i/r
(cf. 12, 3). Thus, *Xenr-(T60 becomes XeA|/a> shall leave,
*c/>Xep-s becomes c/>Xe\|; vein, *ypa^-(Tco becomes <ypd\\rco shall
write.
29. A palatal mute before cr unites with it to form f
(cf. 12, 3). Thus, *tcopaK-s becomes Kopa% raven,
becomes c/>Xo| flame, */3?7X~ s becomes yS?j| cough.
30. A lingual mute before cr is dropped. Thus,
crt becomes crco/^acrt bodies (dat.), *e'X7rt8-crt becomes e\7rfoi
hopes (dat.), *bpvi-(n becomes opvla-i birds (dat.).
N BEFORE OTHER CONSONANTS
31. When v comes before a labial mute it changes to p.
Thus, *e'v-7m/>o9 becomes e|i7ret/30? experienced, *ev-c/>az'?7?
becomes e'[juaz^? visible, *ev-^i/^o? becomes e'jj^rt^o? living.
32. When v comes before a palatal mute it changes to
7-nasal. Thus, *crvv- r yevr]<; becomes a-v^ev^ akin, *crvv-%e&>
becomes o-v^^eo) pour together.
33. When v comes before X, fi, or p it is assimilated.
Thus, *ev-\ei7Tco becomes eXXetTna leave in, ^ev-pevo) becomes
e^evw abide, *o-vv-peco becomes crvppew floiv together.
34. When v comes before cr it is dropped (likewise vr,
, and i/0; see 30) and the preceding vowel is lengthened
30 a. More properly a lingual mute before a- is first assimilated to
the a, and the two sigmas later become one. In Homer we often find
the older form with <r<r : thus troa--a-t feet (dat.), Attic TTOO-I (from *7ro5-cri).
DISAPPEARANCE OF <r 25
in compensation (see 16). Thus, VeXav-9 becomes
Hack, *\vo-vcn becomes Xvovcri they loose ( 16, 1). Cf. 99.
DISAPPEARANCE OF <T
35. When or comes between two consonants, it is regu-
larly dropped, and when two sigmas are brought together
by inflection one of them is dropped. Thus, *ecrraA,-(r#e
becomes earaXOe you have been sent, and *rei%e<r-o-t becomes
rer^ecn walls (dat.).
36. When cr stands before a vowel at the beginning of
a word, it is often changed to the rough breathing: thus
set, for *o~fc-<JT7?/u (Latin sisto).
37. When a comes between two vowels, it is regularly
dropped : thus 7eWo? (contracted 761/01/9) of a race for
*7ez'ecr-o9 (Latin generis).
CONSONANTS WITH VOWELS
METATHESIS
38. A vowel and a liquid are sometimes transposed.
Thus 0dp<ro9 and flpdcro? boldness.
1. Sometimes the vowel, standing after the liquid, has its
long form ( 13) : r^-vco cut, perfect Te-r\M\-fca have cut.
CONSONANTS BEFOKE I
39. The vowel i (which may sometimes have the value
of a consonant), following certain consonants, gives rise
to several changes. Thus :
35 a. In Homer the older form with <ra- is frequently kept. Thus
e7re<r-<ri words (dat.), Attic eTreo-i.
36 a. At the beginning of several of the words enumerated in 2 a,
ff as well as van has been lost: thus in ijSvs sweet, formerly *<rpadvs
(cf. English sweet, Latin sua(d}vis} ; 6's his, formerly *<rp>s (cf. Latin situs).
26 CONSONANTS WITH VOWELS
1. With K, %, r, or 9, an i unites to form TT (Ionic crcr,
22) : thus (/>uXaTT6> guard, for *</>fXaK-io) ; z/rjTTa duck,
for *^r-ia ; Odrrtov quicker, for *rax-ia)z; ( 41).
2. With 7 or 8 an t unites to form f : neCtpv greater,
for *fJLey-icov ; e\7ri J Aope, for *eX7rt8-u.
3. With X an i forms XX : /3aX-X&> throw, for */3aX-ia>.
4. With z^ or />, an i goes over to the preceding vowel
and unites with it by contraction : yuaivo/>tcu am mad, for
REJECTION OR TRANSFER OF ASPIRATION
40. The Greeks tried to avoid beginning two successive
syllables with a rough mute (or a rough breathing). Thus,
e-re-Brjv and e-Tv-Oyv (instead of *e-Qe-0r)v and *e-Qv-Orjv)
are the aorists passive of riOr)^ put and 9vw sacrifice.
For the imperative ending -6i (changed to -TI) see 233,
3 ; for the change of a rough mute to smooth in redupli-
cation see 178.
41. For the same reason, a few roots beginning with 6,
and ending in $ or ^, preserve the rough mute only at the
beginning or the end. So, when, in the process of inflec-
tion, the rough mute at the end disappears, the smooth
mute at the beginning becomes rough. For example,
T/ot^-o? hair, gen. sing., has for its nominative 9/oif ; Tpefyw
nourish has for its future Qptyco ; the root racf)- becomes
0a7T- in OaTT-ra) bury.
HIATUS
42. Hiatus occurs when a word ending in a vowel is
followed by a word beginning with a vowel.
41 a. In Ionic we sometimes find a transfer of aspiration :
there, for Attic
CRASIS 27
Hiatus was usually avoided in Greek by means of
(1) Crasis, (2) Elision, or (3) the addition of a Movable
Consonant.
CRASIS
43. Crasis (mingling') is the contraction of a vowel or
diphthong at the end of a word with a vowel or diphthong
at the beginning of the next word. It is indicated by the
coronis ( ' ) written over the contracted syllable.
Crasis in general follows the rules for contraction
( 18 and 19): thus TOvvavTiov the contrary for TO tvavriov,
I suppose for eyo) otyu.at, Ool/JidrLov the cloak for TO
(cf. 44, 4). But some exceptions occur: thus
TaxTo for TO ax>To.
NOTE 1. If the first word ends in a diphthong, its final vowel is
dropped before contraction : thus Kaya0o? for /cal dya#oV
NOTE 2. Synizesis between Two Words. In poetry a crasis, not
indicated in writing, sometimes occurs between two words, and is called
synizesis (see 19, note 2).- This happens only when the first word ends
in a long vowel or diphthong : thus p.rj ov, pronounced as one syllable.
NOTE 3. Apocope is the cutting off of a final short vowel before a
consonant. Thus Trap, KOLT, for -rrapd, Kara. It affects chiefly prepo-
sitions, and is nearly confined to poetry.
ELISION
44. Elision is the cutting off of a short vowel at the end
of a word when the next word begins with a vowel. In
place of the missing vowel an apostrophe (') is written:
thus e?r* ejjioi in my power, for ewl e/W; TTT fjaav were
seven, for eTTTCi rjcrav. (For the accent of enV see 66.)
1. Elision is most frequent in prepositions, conjunctions,
and familiar adverbs: for example, the final vowel in
76, oV, Trapd, a\\d, /jid\a, rd^a, is frequently elided.
28 MOVABLE CONSONANTS
2. The vowel v is never elided, nor is -i in the dative of
the third declension, nor the vowels of ra, r(, TO.
3. In the ' formation of compound words, elision occurs,
but without being indicated by the apostrophe : thus
aTT-e^o) keep away, from cnro and e^w; eTr-dvco on top, from
eVi and avco ; aTT-eprjv went away, aorist of a7ro-j3aiva>.
4. Whenever by elision a smooth mute and a rough
breathing are brought together, the smooth mute becomes
the cognate rough mute ( 12, 2) : thus a<|>' &v from which,
for CLTTO &v\ KaQ-fyfju let down, from /card and ir
MOVABLE CONSONANTS
45. v Movable. All words ending in -en, all verbs of
the third person singular ending in -e, and eo-ri is, when
they stand before a word beginning with a vowel, or at
the end of a clause, regularly add a v at the end. This v
is called v movable : thus ire/movcri rov dvSpa they send
the man, but TrejjLTrovcnv dvSpa they send a man; elSe TTJV
Bd\arrav he saw the sea, but el&ev 6\jriv he saw a vision.
46. The adverb ov before a vowel with the smooth
breathing becomes OVK : thus OUK el&ov did not see. Before
a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes ou% (cf.
44, 4) : so ov\ elXo/jirjv did not choose.
47. The preposition ef out of appears as ef before words
beginning with a vowel, and e'/e before words beginning
with a consonant : thus e| acrreco? from toivn, but eK -n}?
from the city.
44 a. Final cu in the verb endings -yiicu, -<rcu, -rat, -o-0cu, are occasionally
elided in Homer ; so also final 01 in pot and vol.
44, 2 a. Rarely Homer elides -i in the dative singular of the third de-
clension ; oftener in the dative plural.
44, 4 a. Herodotus retains the smooth mute : air oJj>, /car-^/xt.
FINAL CONSONANTS 29
FINAL CONSONANTS
48. The only consonants allowed to stand at the end of
a Greek word are i>, p, and 9.
NOTE. ^Observe that words ending in if/ (= TTS) or (= K ) do not
violate this rule.
SYLLABLES
49. In Greek, as in Latin, each single vowel or diph-
thong makes a separate syllable. For example, v^Uia, has
four syllables.
50. In dividing a word into syllables a single consonant
or any combination of consonants that can begin a word
is customarily written with the following vowel : thus
i~Ka-vd$ suitable, o-tyo-fjiai shall see, pd-/3$os ivand, /cd-^vco
labor.
Other combinations of consonants are divided : thus
I'TT-TTO? horse, e\-7rt? hope.
51. The last syllable of a word is called the Ultima, the
next to the last the Penult, and the one before the penult
the Antepenult.
QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES
52. A syllable is long by Nature when it has a long
vowel or a diphthong. Thus, in Kpl-voi-^-qv all the syllables
are long.
53. A syllable is long by Position (or Convention) when
its vowel is followed by two consonants or a double con-
52 a. Epic Shortening, or Half Elision. In Homer a diphthong or
a long vowel at the end of a word is usually treated as a short syllable
before a vowel at the beginning of the next word : thus
scanned \^ ^ w ; eyw ou, scanned w w
30 ACCENT
sonant ( 12, 3). Thus, in op-rvj; quail both syllables are
long by position.
Of the two consonants one or both may be in the next
word. Thus, in aAAos TO'TTO? another place and a'XXo <n6iJ,a
another mouth the last syllable of the first word is long by
position.
NOTE. Observe, however, that the quantity of the vowel is not
affected by position. The in A.&jxo is short, although the syllable in
which it stands is long by " position."
54. When a vowel naturally short is followed by a
mute and a liquid ( 12) the length of the syllable is
Common, that is, the syllable is used in verse either as
long or short. Thus, in rewov child, TIK|>X.O? blind, ri yjpr)
ivhat is to be done ? the first syllable is common.
NOTE. The mute and the liquid must be in the same word ;
otherwise the syllable is long by position.
ACCENT
55. The Greek accent consisted in a raising of the
pitch of the accented syllable. It was not a stress
accent like that of English.
53 a. In Homer even before a single liquid at the beginning of some
words a syllable with a short vowel is long.
&irb peydpoio (\^> w w w ) from the hall.
8pei vi(f>6evTi. (ww ww w) snowy mountain (dat.).
A good many of these instances are to be explained by the loss of
another consonant. Thus vrfbevTi. stands for *(^<T')vi(f)oevTt (cf. 22 a).
b. In Homer one of the consonants that make the preceding syllable
long may be the unwritten vau (f ) (see 2 a). So Ka.nbv e?ros evil word
= KO.KOV p^TTOS ^\j W w)-
54 a. In Homer a mute and a liquid almost always make the preceding
syllable long : thus TO. irpwra ( w ) the first.
ACCENT 31
56. In Greek there are three kinds of accent, the
Acute ('), the Grave ( N ), and the Circumflex (~);
the last being made up of the acute and the grave.
1. Every syllable of a Greek word had an accent, but, as
the grave accent is of such frequent occurrence (standing
on every syllable which has not the acute or circumflex),
it was not written except in the case mentioned under 67.
2. The marks of accent were not used in early times.
They were invented about 200 B.C. for the help of for-
eigners and of others who were studying the Greek
language.
57. The marks of accent are written over the vowel
of the accented syllable.
1. In case of a diphthong the accent stands over the
second vowel, unless the second vowel is i subscript :
thus aurofc, avrovs ; but avry (cf. 8, 2 and note).
2. When both breathing and accent belong to the same
vowel, the acute or the grave accent is written after the
breathing : thus 0X05 whole, 09 ecrrat who shall be. But
the circumflex accent is written above the breathing :
thus rjye was leading.
3. When breathing and accent belong to a capital
letter they are placed before it: thus "EXX^ Greek,
*HXt? Elis, -'A^T?? Hades (cf. 8, 1).
RULES FOR ACCENT
58. The circumflex accent can stand only on a syllable
long by nature ( 52) ; the acute may stand on a long or
a short syllable.
59. The circumflex accent may stand only on one of
the last two syllables of a word ; the acute may stand
only on one of the last three syllables.
32 RULES FOR ACCENT
60. Moreover, if the last syllable is long by nature
( 52), the circumflex may stand only on the last syllable,
and the acute only on one of the last two syllables.
61. A long penult followed by a short final syllable
must, if it has a written accent, have the circumflex.
NOTE. Some further special rules of accent will be given under
Inflection, but the position of the accents on Greek words must, in
general, be learned by observation.
62. Examples of accented words are :
Acute on the ultima (called oxytone) o&o?.
" " " penult (called paroxytone) a
" " " antepenult (called proparoxytone) a
Circumflex on the ultima (called perispomenon)
" " " penult (called properispomen on)
63. The diphthongs at and 01 at the end of a word have
the effect of short vowels on the accent, except in the
optative mood and in the adverb OIKOI : thus x&pai lands,
av6po)7roi men ; but TratSeuot, optative of 7rateua> educate.
64. Recessive Accent. A word is commonly said to
have Recessive Accent when the written accent stands
as far from the end of the word as the laws of accent
( 58-61) will allow. Thus, eXvOrjv was loosed, e\vov was
loosing, Oearpov theater, have recessive accent.
ACCENT OF CONTRACTED SYLLABLES
65. When two syllables contract into one, in case either
of the original syllables had a written accent (that is,
the acute or the circumflex), the syllable resulting from
the contraction retains a written accent ; otherwise it
ACCENT OF ELIDED WORDS 33
has the unwritten grave ( 56, 1). Thus, rlpd-ei gives
rlfjia, but rffjia-e gives rt^a.
1. If the first of the two syllables originally had the
acute, the acute combines with the unwritten grave
( 56, 1) of the second syllable to form the circumflex.
Thus, rlpd-co (i.e. rifta-co) gives TI/JLCO.
2. But if the second of the two syllables had the acute,
the syllable resulting from the contraction also has the
acute (since it is plain that v ' will not combine into A ).
Thus, eo-ra-o)? (i.e. <7Ta-<5) gives ecrra)?.
ACCENT OF ELIDED WORDS
66. In elision ( 44) oxytone ( 62) prepositions and
conjunctions lose their written accent : thus aXX' e^rj but he
said, for aXXa efyrj ; other words retain it, but on the pre-
ceding syllable : thus ITTT* rja-av were seven, for evrra rjGav.
NOTE. In crasis ( 43) the first of the two words loses its written
accent.
CHANGE OF ACUTE TO GRAVE
67. Wherever a word having the acute accent on the
last syllable is followed by another word in close con-
nection, its acute changes to the grave : thus Trapa
beside, TOV the ; but Trapa TOV jSacriKea to the side of the
king. (For rt? see 148, 1.)
68. Anastrophe. A preposition of two syllables having
the acute accent on the last syllable, when it follows the
substantive with which it is used, or when it does the
duty of a verb, shifts its written accent "from the last
68 a. In Homer (and lyric poetry) ev, e/s, #, and is, if they follow
the words they modify, take an acute accent : thus /ca/ccDi/ e from the
base, 0e6s us as a god.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 3
34 PROCLITICS
syllable to the first : thus TOVTWV jrepi about this ; Trdpa,
for Trdpecm, it is allowed.
PROCLITICS
69. A few words of one syllable attach themselves so
closely to the following word that they lose their own
written accent. They are called Proclitics (from TT/?O-
K,\ivo) lean forward) . The} r are :
The forms o, rj, ol, al, of the article the;
The conjunctions el if, o>9 as;
The prepositions ev in, et? (e?) into, ef (e/c, 47) out of, a>9 to;
The adverb ou (OVK, ov%, 46) not.
1. When, however, a proclitic stands at the end of a sen-
tence, or is followed by an enclitic ( 70, 8), it receives
a written accent. Thus </>#9, f) ov; do you say yes or no?
ov (f)r)fjLL I say no.
ENCLITICS
70. Some words of one or two syllables attach them-
selves so closely to the preceding word that they give up
their own written accent. These words are called Enclitics
(from ey/c\fvci) lean upon). They are :
The pronouns /LtoO, JJLOI, pe ; croO, crot, <je; ou, ol, e, and a^icn.
See however 139, 2;
The indefinite pronoun rt?, rl in all its forms, and the in-
definite adverbs Trot), irrj, irol, iroOev, Trore, TTW, TTW? ;
The present indicative of elpt am and <?7/u say, except the
second persons singular, el, $779. (For the accent of
eW see 262, 1) ;
The particles 76, re, rot,
1. If the word preceding an enclitic has the acute
accent on either of the last two syllables, or the circumflex
ENCLITICS 35
on the last syllable, its accent remains unchanged : thus
avrjp rt? a man, \6ycov TLV&V ( 71,4) of some words, %c0pwv
rivtov of some lands.
2. If the word preceding an enclitic has the acute
accent on the antepenult, or the circumflex on the penult,
it adds an acute accent on the last syllable : thus avOpco-
TTOL -nz/'e? some men, <y\a>TTd TLS a tongue.
3. A proclitic ( 69) before an enclitic takes an acute
accent : thus et rt? if anybody, ov fyadt, they deny (see
69, 1).
4. If several enclitics follow each other, the last alone
remains without written accent ; each of the others re-
ceives an acute accent from the following enclitic : thus
ei TTOV Ti5 riva [I'Sot] if anybody [should see~\ anybody any-
where.
71. Accent of Enclitics Retained. Enclitics retain their
own accent :
1. When they begin a sentence, as elcr\v avSpes there are
men;
2. When they are emphatic, as aXXa ae \eja) but you I
mean ;
3. When the vowel which would be affected by the
enclitic has been elided ( 44), as ravr earl, for
ravra e'crrt, this is ;
4. When an enclitic of two sjdlables follows a word
which has the acute accent on the penult, as
av0p(t)7rov TWOS of a man.
NOTE. Some words are so frequently combined with an enclitic
that the combination comes to be regarded as one word. Thus, wore so
that (ok + re), KCUTOI although (/cat + rot), ovrtvos of ivhomsoever (ov +
TIVOS), are not exceptions to the rule of accent given in 59 and 61.
36
PUNCTUATION
PUNCTUATION
72. The Greek marks of punctuation are the period ( . ),
colon (), comma (,), and mark of interrogation (;).
The colon is a point above the line, and it takes the
place of the English colon and semicolon.
NOTE. The ancient Greeks seldom used any marks of punctua-
tion, but wrote their words continuously. Thus EAOSENTHI
BOYAHIKAITOIAHMm = 28oev rrj /3ov\rj /ecu TO> %ia> It was
voted by the Senate and the People.
ANCIENT GREEK WRITING ON STONE
(Of the Fifth Century B.C.)
FYNAIKOS AFAGHSMN HMATOAE
yvvaitcbs ayaOrjs
a good wife 's monument (is)
INFLECTION
73. Inflection is a change in the form of a word to indi-
cate its relation to other words.
1. In inflection a part of the word remains the same,
and is called the Stem. Thus, the stem of avdpwiros man is
av0po)7ro-, and -? is the ending of the nominative case; in
e-\ve he was loosing, \ve- is a stem of the present system,
and e- is a prefix denoting past time. (See also 163.)
Some words, in their inflection, show more than one form
of stem.
2. The inflection of Nouns (Substantives and Adjec-
tives) and Pronouns is called Declension ; the inflection
of Verbs is called Conjugation.
NOUNS
(SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES)
74. Gender, Number, and Case. There are in Greek
Three GENDERS : Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter;
Three NUMBERS : Singular, Dual, and Plural;
Five CASES : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative,
and Vocative.
NOTE 1. The dual number refers to two objects. It has but two
forms, one for the nominative, accusative, and vocative, the other for
the genitive and dative.
NOTE 2. The vocative in the plural is always like the nominative ;
in the singular it is often so.
NOTE 3. Neuter words always have the nominative and vocative
like the accusative; in the plural these cases always end in -a (at
least before contraction).
37
38
NOUNS
75. Declensions. There are in Greek three declensions
of nouns, classed according to the endings of the stems.
The First Declension has steins ending in -a, the Second
Declension has stems ending in -o. These two together
are sometimes called the Vowel Declension. The Third
Declension has mostly stems ending in a consonant (see
93) and is called the Consonant Declension.
76. Case Endings. The case endings of the vowel and
the consonant declension have many points in common, as
may be seen from the following table :
VOWEL DECLENSION
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
CONSONANT DECLENSION
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Sing-
JNom. -s
none
-v
-s or none
none
Gen. -10
-s
-10
-OS
-OS
Dat.
i
-I
-i
-I
Ace.
-V
-V
-v or -a
none
Voc.
none
-V
none
none
Dual
N.A.V.
none
none
-
-6
G.D.
-IV
-IV
-oiv
-OIV
Plur.
N.V.
-i
-a.
-6S
-a
Gen.
-V
-cov
-WV
-<ov
Dat.
-i<ri, -is
-l(Tl, -IS
-o-t
-o-i
Ace.
-vs
-a
-vs or -as
-a
76 a. Homer sometimes uses also -9ev as an ending of the genitive
singular: thus airb Tpoiv)6ei>from Troy, t a\66ei> out of the sea.
b. For the dative plural of the consonant declension Homer uses also
the ending -e<r<ri. (See 99 a.)
c. Epic Case Ending -c|>i(v). Epic poetry has a peculiar case end-
ing, -0t(> which serves as genitive or dative either singular or plural :
thus piy-pc with violence, air" 1 #x e<7 "-0' from the car, napa vav-<f>iv beside
the ships. *
SUBSTANTIVES 39
NOTE. Locative Case. There are in Greek some relics of a
Locative Case, confined mostly to names of places. The ending of
the locative in the singular is -t and in the plural -<n : thus YLvOol at
Pytho (Delphi), OIKOI at home,"Apyei at Aryos, 'AOrjvrjvL at Athens.
77. Accent in Declension. 1. The written accent of a
noun, throughout its declension, remains on the same syl-
lable as in the nominative singular, or as near that syllable
as the general laws of accent will allow : thus avQpcoTros
man, ace. sing. avOpwirov, nom. plur. avOpcoTroi, but gen.
sing. av0pa)7rov ( 60), dat. plur. av6p(i)7roi<s\ ovo/jia name,
gen. sing, bvoparos ( 59), gen. plur. wopa-rav ( 60).
2. In the genitive and dative of all numbers a long
final syllable, if it has written accent, has the circumflex:
thus TTOTa/409 river, dat. sing, irora^w ; TTOU? foot, gen.
plur. TTO&COV.
SUBSTANTIVES
GENERAL RULES FOR GENDER
78. 1. MASCULINE are names of Males, of Winds, of
Rivers, and of Months.
2. FEMININE are names of Females, and most names of
Lands, Islands, Towns, Trees, and Abstract Ideas.
3. NEUTER are most Diminutives ( 283) and most
names of Fruits.
NOTE. Common Gender. Some names of beings may be used
either as masculine or feminine, as occasion requires. Thus, Trats
child may be masculine or feminine, and may mean boy or girl.
79. It is customary to indicate the gender of Greek
words by means of the article ( 144): 6 for masculine,
77 for feminine, and TO for neuter.
40
FIRST DECLENSION
FIRST DECLENSION
(THE -a DECLENSION)
80. Words of the first declension are feminine or mas-
culine. They have stems ending in a. In many of the
forms this a is shortened or disguised.
A. FEMININES
81. The feminines form two classes : (1) those ending
in -a or -77, and (2) those ending in short -a.
They are declined as follows :
FIRST CLASS
ij X"P* land. -q Tifxrfj honor.
(stem X W P*-) (stem rind-)
SINGULAR
Nom. X"P a ^H- 1 ^
Gen.
Dat.
Ace. x^P*" v TIJX^-V
Voc.
SECOND CLASS
TJ ye'cjjxipa bridge, ij -yXwTTa tongue.
(stem -ye^vpd-) (stem -yXwrrd-)
SINGULAR
yfyvpa-v
yX.wrra-v
DUAL
N.A.V.
G.D.
Tijjiatv
PLURAL
N.V. x^P aL Ti|ia
Gen. x w P" v TIJIWV
Dat. x^P aL 5 Tijxais
Acc. x^P as Tipids
DUAL
ye<)>vpd
-y<j>iupaiv
PLURAL
-y({>vpai
ytfyvp&v
-yXwrTaiv
-yXwrrais
-ye^vpas
Other examples of the first class are: rj^epd day (gen.
sing, fjnepas, nom. plur. ^/xe/jat), GKICL shadow (gen. sing.
cr/cta9, nom. plur. o-/aou), TTV\TJ gate (gen. sing.
nom. plur. TruXat), yvcofjLT] judgment (gen. sing.
nom. plur.
FIRST DECLENSION 41
Other examples of the second class are : paipa fate
(gen. sing, poppas, nom. plur. /notpat), $da opinion (gen.
sing. Sdj-rj?, nom. plur. Sofat), rpdire^a table (gen. sing.
, nom. plur.
82. Observe that the second class has short -a in the
final syllable of three cases of the singular nominative,
accusative, and vocative. The first class, on the other
hand, has a long vowel (a or 77) in the final syllable
throughout the singular.
83. All words of the first class originally ended in -a.
This a is retained if immediately preceded by e, t, or p
(cf. 15); thus 7ewa, cro^t'd, %ft>/>a. Otherwise it is
changed to tj throughout the singular: thus TI/JLT\ (for-
merly Ttjua).
1. In the genitive and dative singular of words of the
second class, the use of a or 77 is determined by the same
rule : thus yetyvpa.? (because p precedes the a), but 7\o)TTT|9.
84. The Genitive Plural of the first declension always
has the circumflex accent on the last syllable, because -&v
is contracted from -d-wv (originally *-d-cra)v ; cf . 37, and
the Latin ending -arum in stellarum): thus ^pav for
NOTE. In the accusative plural -as is for -avg ( 34).
83 a. In Ionic long a of the singular of the first declension is always
changed to 77 : e.g., x^P^i 7^^ <n>0rj, /ji,oipi\s, for Attic x^/ad, 7ered,
fwlpa.^ (see 15 a).
84 a. In the genitive plural Homer has the older form -duv
and rarely the Ionic -twv (irv\uv). Cf. 17.
b. In the dative plural Ionic has -|7<n (yXAa-ff-gai) ; Homer uses also,
though rarely, -T?S (71-^77)77$ to rocks).
42 FIRST DECLENSION
B. MASCULINES
85. The masculines have the case ending -9 in the
nominative singular. They are declined as follows :
o vedvias young man. d iroXiTTjs citizen. d 'ArptiStjs son of Atreus.
(stem vcdvid-) (stem iroXird-) (stem '
SINGULAR
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
veavia-s
veuviou
veavia
veavia-v
veavia
iroXiTT]-s
iroXtrov
TToXlTTJ
iroXiTTj-v
-iroXira
'ArpeCS-qs
'ArpeLSov
'ArpeCSTj
'ArpeiSTj-v
DUAL
N.A.V.
veavia
iroXfrd
'ArpsCSa
G.D.
vcdvCaiv
iroXiraiv
'ArpeiSaiv
PLURAL
N.V.
Gen.
veaviai
vtaviwv
iroXirai
iroXtTtov
'ArpeiSai
'ArpeiSwv
Dat.
Ace.
vedvCais
vcdvids
n-oXirats
iroXfrds
'ArpeiSais
'ArpciSds
Other examples for declension are ra/ua? steward (like
^ecma?), crr/oartcoT?;? soldier (like TroXtr?;?),
(gen. sing. KpLTOv, voc. Kpird, nom. plur. /cpiTai),
son of Kronos (like 'Ar^et^?, but nom. plur.
86. In the last syllable of the singular d is retained
after e, t, and p ( 15); otherwise it changes to 77. Com-
pare 83.
87. The vocative singular of words in -779, like '
ends in -77 ; but all words in -Ti?9, and compound nouns
85 a. In some masculine words Homer has -TO. for -TTJS, e.g. ITTTTOTO, =
horseman (cf. Latin poeta, Greek
FIRST DECLENSION 43
and names of nationality in -77? have short -a in the voca-
tive : thus TroXmi, voc. of TroXtrr;? citizen ; o-troTroiXa, voc.
of oiroTretfA,??? grain seller ; ITepcra, voc. of Tlepcrr)? Persian.
NOTE. The ending -ov of the genitive singular is borrowed bodily
from the second declension (cf. 87 a).
88. In some words -ea (or -aa) is contracted to -a or -77.
All cases then have the circumflex ( 65, 1). Such words
are declined as follows :
T) jiva mina. TJ yfj land. 6 'Ep|rfjs Hermes.
(stem (Jtva- for (ivad-) (stem yi\- for yea. or -yaa) (stem 'Epjit]- for 'Epjua-)
SINGULAR
Nom. jJLva -yf^
Gen. fivds -y*is
Dat. n v ^ W
Ace. jiva-v yT\-v 'Epp-fj-v
Voc. xva
DUAL
N.A.V. jtva ^a 'Epjia
G.D. fjivaiv y a ^ v 'Epjxaiv
PLURAL
N.V. jtvat ya.1 'Epjiat
Gen. (xvwv y< v 'Epjxwv
Dat. p-vais "yais *Epp.ais
Ace. (JLvols y >s
So also is declined Bo/>pa? (for Bo/aea? with irregular -/o/>-)
, in the singular only.
87 a. In the genitive singular masculine, Homer has the earlier (and
proper) form -do ('ArpetSdo), and sometimes the Ionic form 'Arpe/ocw, the
accent remaining as in the original form (see 17).
88 a. The Ionic generally has the uncontracted forms ; thus
for Attic Boppas, '
44 SECOND DECLENSION
SECOND DECLENSION
89. Words of the Second Declension are nearly all
masculine or neuter. The few feminines are declined
like the masculines. The stems end in o.
The nominative singular of masculines and feminines
ends in -09. The nominative, vocative, and accusative of
neuters are alike, and they end in the singular in -ov, and
in the plural in -a.
90. Words of the second declension are inflected as
follows :
6 Xo^os word. 6 (or fj) avOpwiros man. f] 686s road. TO Swpov gift.
(stem Xo-yo-) (stem dvOpwiro-) (stem 680-) (stem 8wpo-)
SINGULAR
Nom.
Xo-yo-s
avOpcairo-s
666-s
8wpo-v
Gen.
Xo-yov
dvOptoirov
6Sov
Swpov
Dat.
X6-yo>
dvOpcoiro)
66a>
Stopu)
Ace.
Xo'yo-v
d'v0pwiro-v
686-v
Swpo-v
Voc.
Xo-ye
a'v9pwTT
681
8uipo-v
DUAL
N.A.V.
Xo'yo)
dvGpwirw
68(6
Supa>
G.D.
Xo-yoiv
dvOpcoiroiv
oSoiv
Supoiv
PLURAL
N.V.
Xo^oi
dvOpCOTTOl
68oC
Sa>pa
Gen.
Xo-ywv
dvOpcoirtov
68v
Supwv
Dat.
Xo-yois
dvOpwirois
68015
ScapoiS
Ace.
Xoyovs
dvOpwTrovs
65ovs
Scopa
90 a. In the genitive singular Homer has -oio, -oo (rarely), and -ov :
thUS TTOX^/XOIO, TTOX^UOO, TToX^/iOU Of WttT.
b. In the genitive and dative dual Hoiner has -ouv for Attic otv : thus
linrouv, from ITTTTOS horse.
c. In the dative plural Homer usually has -oio-i; Herodotus always has
it : thus av6p<jTroi(Ti to men.
SECOND DECLENSION
45
So also are declined vopos law (gen. sing, vopov, nom.
plur. vofjioi), KLV&VVOS danger, ravpos bull (nom. plur. -ravpoi),
Trora/io? river, o-rpaT^o? general, z^cro? (fern.) island,
measure, 'i^dnov cloak.
CONTRACT SUBSTANTIVES OF THE SECOND DECLENSION
91. Words which have stems ending in -oo and -eo un-
dergo contraction in accordance with the rules given in
18 and 19. They are thus declined :
6 vovs mind.
(stem voo-)
Nom. vov-s (vdo-s)
Gen. vov (i/oov)
Dat. vw (voo>)
Ace. vov-v (i/do-v)
Voc. vov (voe)
N.A.V. vc& (vo'w)
G.D. votv (i/ootv)
N.V. VOt (V006)
Gen. vwv (vowv)
Dat. vots (voots)
Ace. vovs (vdovs)
6 ircpiirXovs voyage around,
circ umnavigation.
(stem irepiirXoo-)
SINGULAR
irepiirXov
irepiirXo)
-ircpiirXou-v
DUAL
irpirXa>
irepiirXoiv
PLURAL
irepfirXoi (TreptTrAooi)
irepCirXois
irepiirXous
TO OO-TOVV bone.
(stem 00-T60-)
OCTTOV-V (o<TTO-v)
OO"TOV (OO"TOV)
OCTTW (oCTTCO))
oo-Tov-v (ooreo-v)
OO-TOV-V (ocrreo-v)
CKTTCO (oO"TO))
CKTTOIV (ocrre'otv)
oo-Ta (oorea)
OO-TWV (ocrrewv)
OO-TOIS (oo-reots)
oo-Ta (oo-rea)
So also are declined o poO? (poo?) stream, TO /cavovv
(xdveov, cf. 118, 3) basket.
1. Observe that the contraction of ocrra is contrary to
the rule of 18, 6.
2. Observe that the nominative dual, if it has written
accent on the last syllable, has the acute (contrary to
65, 1) : thus vcb (irregularly from vdo>).
46 SECOND DECLENSION
3. Observe that contracted compounds have recessive
accent ( 64) in spite of the contraction : thus TrepiirXw
(for 7re/>t7rXoo>), evvoi (for evvooi) kindly disposed. But
the written accent almost never goes back of the syllable
on which it stood in the nominative singular ( 77):
thus Tre/KTrXot (not
STEMS IN -co-
ATTic SECOND DECLENSION
92. To the second declension belong also a few words
whose stems end in co. They are thus declined :
o vs temple, (stem vw-)
SINGULAR DUAL PLURAL
Nom. vew-s Nom. v
Gen. vcw N.A.V. ve<& Gen. vtwv
Dat. ve4 G.D. vv Dat. vt&$
ACC. V6W-V ACC. V6S
Voc. vews Voc. vew
So also Xeo>? people, tfa'Xw? cable.
1. Observe that the genitive and dative, when they have
written accent on the last syllable, take the acute, con-
trary to 77, 2.
2. Many of these words were produced by an inter-
change of quantity ( 17), do becoming ea> : thus Xea>?
from Xao'?. In such words the long vowel at the end
does not affect the position of the accent (cf . 60) : thus
Mei>eXe&)5 Menelaus (from Mez^eXao?).
3. Some words have no v in the accusative singular.
Thus Xa7Q>? hare has ace. sing. \a<ya> and Xaycov ; ew?
dawn has only eco.
92 a. This form of declension is confined almost wholly to Attic. In
Ionic most of these words follow the ordinary second declension. So, for
Attic Xet6s, pecs, KiiXws, Xa7cis, Ionic has Adds, vrjbs, /c<f Aos, \ayu6s or \ay6s.
THIRD DECLENSION 47
THIRD DECLENSION
93. Words of the Third (or Consonant) Declension
have stems ending in a consonant, or in a vowel (i or u)
which may sometimes be sounded as a consonant. A few
stems appear to end in o (but see 112, 113).
1. The stem of words of this declension may usually be
found by dropping the ending -o? of the genitive singular.
94. Gender. The gender of words of the third declen-
sion must usually be learned by observation, but a few
general rules may be given.
1. Stems ending in a labial or a palatal mute are never
neuter.
2. MASCULINE are stems ending in et>, VT, rjr (except
those in -TTJT-), COT, and p (except those in -a/o-).
3. FEMININE are stems ending in rijr, , 0, i (with
nom. in -t?), and v (with nom. in -i>?).
4. NEUTER are stems ending in ap, acr, ar, e<r (with
nom. in -09), and v (with nom. in -u).
FORMATION OF CASES
95. Neuters. Neuter words of the third declension
regularly have the nominative, accusative, and vocative
singular like the simple stem. A final T is dropped
( 48) : thus aco/jia (stem o^^ar) body.
96. Masculine and Feminine Nominative Singular. -
Most masculine and feminine words of the third declen-
sion form the nominative by adding -9 to the stem. For
the euphonic change which may follow, see 2830, 34 :
thus K\l/JLa% (for */cX^aK:-9) ladder (cf. Latin dux, ducis).
1. But stems in -v-, -p-, -<r-, and -ovr- regularly have in
the nominative only the simple stem with a long vowel
48 THIRD DECLENSION. FORMATION OF CASES
( 13) : thus \ifJLijv (\ifjiev-) harbor, ptjrcop (/^ro/?-) orator,
l^wKpdr^ (J2a)fcpaTe<r-~) Socrates, XeW (\eovr-) lion ( 48).
NOTE. Some of these words retain the long vowel of the nomi-
native throughout their declension : thus "EAAryi/ Greek, gen.
vos, etc. ; xa/xwv winter, gen. ^et/xwi/os, etc.
97. Accusative Singular. The accusative singular of
masculine and feminine words adds -a to consonant stems
and -v to vowel stems : thus TTOV? foot (stem TroS-), accus.
sing. 7ro'S-a ; but Tro'Xt? city (stem TroXi-), accus. sing.
TToXiv. (Cf. 14, 2 note.)
1. But stems of more than one syllable ending in tr or
i&, without written accent on the last syllable, almost
always drop the final mute and take the ending v : thus
epis strife (stem e/?tS-), accus. sing. epiv.
98. Vocative Singular. The vocative singular is regu-
larly the mere stem : thus Safawv divinity, voc.
(stem SaifJLoit-')', yepcov old man, voc. <yepov (stem
see 48).
1. But masculine and feminine words which form their
nominative singular without 9 ( 96, 1), when they have
written accent on the last syllable, and all other mute
stems (except those in -*S-), use the nominative singular
as vocative : thus TTOL^V (stem 7rot/-tei>-) shepherd, voc.
TTOI/JLIJV ; <f>v\aj; (stem </>i>Xa/c-) watchman, voc.
(but \7rt9 (stem eXvrtS-), voc.
99. Dative Plural. When v alone is dropped before
the ending -at of the dative plural ( 34), the preceding
99 a. In the dative plural Homer has -<ri(j') and -eo-o-i^), sometimes
-cro-i 0) after vowels. Thus he has TTOO-O-/ (*7ro-o-t), iroffl, and 7r65e<ro-i with
feet, v^Kv-(T<TL to corpses. Very rarely we find -e<ri : xetp-eo-t with hands.
b. In the genitive and dative dual Homer has -ouv for Attic -oiv.
Thus Trodouv of or with two feet.
CONSONANT STEMS 49
vowel remains unchanged, contrary to 34 : thus Trot/zeo-t to
shepherds, for *7roifjLev-crL ; Bai/jLOai to divinities, for *&aifjiov-cn.
1. But when vr is dropped, the preceding vowel is
lengthened : thus Xeoucn to lions, for *\eovT-<n ; 7rd<rt to
all, for *7ravT-ai.
100. Special Rule of Accent. Words with stems of one
syllable in the third declension regularly have the written
accent on the last syllable of the genitive and dative of all
numbers. If the last syllable is long, it receives the circum-
flex ( 77, 2): thus TTOVS foot, gen. sing. TTO^O?, gen. plur.
TToSwv, dat. plur. TTOCTI.
NOTE. For exceptions see 8as ( 115, 5), 8/xws ( 115, 7), ov?
( 115, 18), TTCUS ( 115, 19), iras ( 125, 2), Tpws ( 115, 23), and
<w(129, 3).
CONSONANT STEMS
101. Labial and Palatal Stems. Stems ending in a
labial or palatal mute are thus declined :
64>u\ag f|<f>d\<r/i J|e P ( 6 K \cty ^ 4>Xe'4/
watchman. phalanx. hair. thief. vein.
(stem <j>v\aK-) (stem <j>a\ayy-) (stem rpix~) (stem K\WIT-) (stem
4>\P-)
SINGULAR
Xom. <J>v\a <j>d\a^ 0pC K\WX|/ <}>Xe'v|/
Gen. 4>vi\aK-os (jxxXa-yy-os rpix-os K\ir-6s <j>\ep-6s
Dat. 4>v\aK-L 4>x\a-yy- 1 T P 1 X~' K\fl>ir-i $\t$-L
Ace. <J>v\aK-a <j>d\a-yy-a
Voc. <>vXa
DUAL
N.A.V. <}>iiXaK-e <t>dXa-Y^-
G.D. 4>vXaK-oiv <j>aXd-yy- lv
PLURAL
N.V. 4>vXa.K-S <f>dXa^-s
Gen. 4>vXa.K-wv ^aXd-y-y-wv rpix-wv KXwir-aiv <J>X|3-(ov
Dat. <J)vXa^ cj>dXa-y^i 0pi^i KXwxjn <|>X\(/
Ace. <|)vXaK-as <|>dXa^-as rpix-as KXwir-as <j)Xp-as
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 4
50
THIRD DECLENSION
So also are declined 6 AWioty (stem A0to7r-) Aethio-
pian, 6 xaKvty (stem ^aXf/3-) steel, fj /eXt/>iaf (stem K\l-
-*) ladder, rj IICLGTI^ (stem /jLaarly-^) whip, 6 6vv (stem
1. For the f and ^r in the nominative singular and
dative plural see 28 and 29. For the vocative singu-
lar see 98, 1. For the change of to T in 0/n'f see 41.
102. Lingual Stems. Stems ending in a lingual mute
are thus declined :
MASCULINE AND FEMININE
serf.
hope.
strife.
night.
old man.
(stem 0iyr-)
(stem IXiriS-)
(stem ipi8-)
(stem VVKT-) (stem -yepovT-)
SINGULAR
Nom. 0T|9 eXirts
P IS
VV^
^e'pcov
Gen.
OTJT-OS
IX^rCS-os
cpiS-os
VUKT-OS
ycpovT-os
Dat.
0T]T-i
4XirC8-i
cpiS-i
VVKT-C
yepovT-i
Ace.
0i)T-a
IXirCS-a
epiv
VVKT-tt
yepovr-a
Voc.
e^js
IXiri
IfK
vv|
ye'pov
DUAL
N.A.
V. 0T\T-
eXm8-e
cpiS-c
VVKT-
yp VT ~ 6
G.D.
0TJT-OIV
Xir(8-oiv
cpiS-oiv
VVKT-OIV
yepovT-oiv
PLURAL
N.V
. 0TJT-S
4Xiri8- S
epi8-es
VVKT-6S
yepovT-es
Gen.
0T|T-WV
eXir(8-(ov
cpi8-a>v
VVKT-WV
yepovr-wv
Dat.
Qi\<rl
IXirio-i
epicri
vv|
^e'pouo-L
Ace.
0fir-as
eXmS-as
epiSas
VVKT-aS
ye'povr-as
So also are declined o epw (stem epcor-) love, rj eaBrfs
(stem eadrjr-, gen. sing. ecrOfjros') clothing, rj Xa/^Tra? (stem
\a/jL7raS-, gen. sing. Xa//.7raSo?) torch, r] x^P^ (stem X a P iT ~)
102 a. In Ionic a few stems in -wr- have forms without r (cf. 103, 2 a).
Thus XP&S skin, gen. sing. x/> 0< ^> dat. xph acc - X/' a > tSpws sweat, dat.
sing.
CONSONANT STEMS 51
favor, o 7</ya<? (stem yiyavr-) giant, 6 XeW (stem \eovr-*)
lion, 6 oSou? (stem O&OVT-, gen. sing. oSoWo?) tooth (the
nominative singular is formed contrary to 96, 1).
1. For" the dropping of T (and vr), S, or before a in
the nominative singular and dative plural see 30. For
the dative plural of stems in -vr- (like yepovo-i*) see 99, 1.
For the vocative singular see 98, 1. For the accusative
singular of stems in -IT- and -tS- (^dpiv, epuv) see 97, 1.
103. NEUTER
TO <ra>|ia body (stem arwjjiaT-)
SINGULAR DUAL PLURAL
Nora. <rwp.a Norn.
Gen. <rco[iaT-os N.A.V. o-wnar-e Gen.
Dat. o-wp-ar-i G.D. <rw|xaT-oiv Dat.
Ace. o~w|jLa Ace. <rwjxaT-a
Voc. o-w|ia Voc.
So also are declined (rrofia (stem aro^ar-) mouth, OVO/JLCI
(stem ovoiAaT-} name, /-teXt (stem />teXtr-) honey, ydXa (stem
yaXaKT-*) milk ( 48).
1. A few words form their nominative from a stem in
-p- ( 73, 1) : thus rjTrap (gen. sing, ^vrar-o?) liver, fj/JLap
(gen. sing. ^/lar-o?) c?a# (poetic).
2. Four words, Trepas, Tre/oaro?, ewe?; repas, re/jaro?,
prodigy ; /cepas, fceparos, horn ; ^>w? (contracted from
$a'o?), </)ft)To'?, /^A^, form their nominatives singular from
a stem ending in a ( 73, 1). (For the full declension
of icepas see 115, 10.)
103, 2 a. In Ionic /cfyas and r<?/>as have no forms with T. Thus,
Homer has dat. sing, /cfyat, nom. plur. /cfya, gen. plur. Kepdwv, dat. plur.
K^ao-i and Kepdefffft. Herodotus changes a to e before a vowel (cf. 106 c),
but does not contract : thus rfyeos, K^ei", /cfyea, Keptuv. Of 0tDs ZtgrA* Homer
uses only the uncontracted form <f>dos (sometimes wrongly written 06ws),
dat. </>det, plur.
52
THIRD DECLENSION
104. Liquid Stems. Stems ending in a liquid are thus
declined :
6 XlfJLTJV
6 SaifJtcov
6 d-ywv
6 pT)T W p
harbor.
divinity.
contest.
orator.
(stem Xin-ev-)
(stem 8ai|xov-)
(stem d-ywv-)
(stem pr]Top-)
SINGULAR
Nom
Xi^v
8aifia>v
d^uv
p^TCDp
Gen.
XlJl,V-OS
SaifJiov-os
d/ycov-os
p^|TOp-OS
Dat.
Xl|XV-l
8ai|xov-i
d-ywv-i
P^JTOp-l
Ace.
Xi|iv-a
8aip,ov-a
d-ywv-a
p^JTOp-tt
Voc.
XIHTJV
8fU|AOV
d-ywv
pV]TOp
DUAL
N.A.
V. XIU6V-6
Sai(j,ov-e
d-yv-
p^|TOp-
G.D.
Xtjxev-oiv
8ai|xov-oiv
d-ywv-oiv
pTJTOp-OlV
PLURAL
N.V.
Xip.v-S
5cujjLov-es
d-ywv-S
p^TOp-S
Gen.
Xifxe'v-cov
8ai|x6v-a>v
d-ywv-wv
pT]TOp-0)V
Dat.
Xi|A<ri
Saip-oo-i
d-ywo-i
pt|Top<ri
Ace.
Xifxe'v-as
Safjiov-as
d-ywv-as
prfjrop-as
So also are declined 6 JJL^V (stem firjv-') month, 6 aiwv
(stem alcov-) age, 6 /cpdrijp (stem /cpdrrfp-) mixing bowl,
6 $cbp (stem <^>ft)/>-) thief, 6 Orjp (stem Orjp-^) wild beast.
1. For the dative plural see 99.
NOTE. In the vocative singular three words, o-wrrjp savior,
*A7roAAa)v Apollo, and IlcxreiSaiv Poseidon, have a short vowel ( 13)
in the last syllable of the stem (contrary to 98, 1) and throw the
written accent back upon the first syllable : thus acurep, ""ATroAAov,
Hoo-etSov (cf. 105, 2).
105. Five substantives of the third declension with
stems ending in p show in their inflection two forms of
the stem, one with e, and the other with no vowel (or
with a). See 14 and 73, 1.
These are : irarr^p father, ^rrjp mother, Ovydrrjp daugh-
ter, <ya(TTr)p belly, avr)p man. In avf]p, a B is developed
CONSONANT STEMS
53
between the v and p whenever they come together. These
words are thus declined :
6 irar^p father. f|
(stein irarep- or (stem
iraTp-) (MfjTp-)
mother. TJ OirydTtjp daughter. 6 dv^jp man.
or (stem Ovyarep- or (stem dvep-
Ov-yarp-)
or dv(6)p-)
SINGULAR
Nom. ira-nrjp
Gen. irarp-os
Dat. irarp-C
Ace. irarep-a
Voc. irdrep
N.A.V. irem'p-e
G.D. irarep-oiv
N.V. iraiVcs
Gen. irarcp-wv
Dat. iraTpd-o-t
Ace. ira,T'p-as
p.TlTp-6s
|lT,T P -
Ov-yarp-os
Ou-yarp-f
0vyaTp-a
Ov-yarep
dv8p-6s
dvSp-C
avSp-a
DUAL
PLURAL
Ov-yarcp-oiv
|JtTJTp-WV
(i-qxpa-o-i
avSp-e
dvSp-oiv
av8p-s
dvSp-cov
dvSpd-(ri
avSp-as
Like iraTrjp is declined jacrr^p belli/. (See also 115, 2.)
1. Observe that in the genitive and dative the shorter
forms take their written accent on the last syllable, after
the analogy of stems of one syllable ( 100): thus Trar/oo?,
avSpwv (but Trareptov, avSpdai).
2. Observe that the vocative singular of these words
has recessive accent (cf. 104, note).
3. For the a in the dative plural see 14, 1.
106. Stems in -a-. Stems ending in cr lose their final
a- whenever it comes between two vowels ( 37) and the
vowels thus brought together usually contract.
105 a. In Homer the form of the stem with e is more frequently used
than in Attic : thus iraripos^ Trartpi ; avepa, avipes, etc. (Attic 7rar/j6s, etc.).
In dvyaT-rjp, however, we sometimes find dtiyarpa, dvyarpes, and always
From av/ip he has in the dative plural both avdpavi and &i>8pe<r<ri.
54
THIKD DECLENSION
Such stems are thus inflected :
NEUTER
TO -yevos race.
(stem -yevoo--, -yeveo--)
SINGULAR
Nom. -y^vos
Gen. -yevovs (*yeveo--os, yeVe-o?)
Dat. -yevci (*yeve(T-i, yeve-'t)
Ace. -ycvos
Voc. -yevos
TO -ye'pas prize.
(stem -yepacr-)
(*yepa(T-os, ycpa-os)
(*yepao--t, yepa-t)
-yepas
DUAL
N.A.V. -yc'vei (*yeveo--e, yeVe-e)
G.D. -yevoiv (*yei/(T-oti/,
(*yepa<r-a, yepa-a)
ycpwv (*yepa<r-a>v, yepa-wv)
ye'paon ( ye'pao--(7t)
(*yepacr-a, yepa-a)
TO ap0o9 flower, TO
PLURAL
N.V. Y* vt l (*yeve<r-a, yeVe-a)
( -yeve'wv (*yei/eo-a>v)
( -yevwv
Dat. -yeveon ( yeVecr-ori)
Ace. -yevrj (*yei/(r-a, yeVe-a)
So also are declined TO Tet%o?
eVo5 ?/ear, TO yfjpas old age, TO icepas horn, wing (with other
forms from a stem tcepar-', see 115, 10).
1. Observe that neuters ending in -05 form their nomi-
native, accusative, and vocative singular from the stem in
-oo--. (See 14 and 73, 1.)
106 a. Homer and Herodotus regularly have the uncontracted forms.
Thus, 8dp<reos of courage, dapve'i with courage. The accusative plural
K\<fa, which sometimes occurs in Homer, is probably for K\te.
b. In the dative plural Homer has three different forms : thus fie\t-
<T<TI (for */3e\e(T-e<7<ri, 76 b), |8<?Xe<r-<rt, and /SAeeri ( 35) from /SAos
missile.
c. In Homer and Herodotus words with stems in -a<r- are usually
uncontracted: thus 777/3005 of old age. A few words have e instead of a
in the stem, except in the nominative: thus o55a5 ground, gen. sing.
otfSeos ; /ccDas fleece, dat. plur. /cce<n. In the nominative and accusative
plural Homer has -a short: thus 5<?7ra cups. In the dative plural he has
three forms, 5e7rd-e<r<ri (for *5e7ra<r-e0-0-j, 37), 5ewa<r-<ri, and dtiravi ( 35).
CONSONANT STEMS 55
2. In the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural
of neuters in -09, -ea after e contracts into a. Thus %/oea
for xpee-a (*^/oeecr-a) from %/3eo? debt, stem
107. MASCULINE AND FEMININE
2a>Kpa.TT]s Socrates.
(stem 2a>KpaT<r-)
NOR!. ZcOKp<XTr|S
Gen. 2wKpa,Tous (*2<oKpaT<r-os,
Dat. DcoKparei (*2(OKparecr-t,
Ace. SwKpaTt] (*2o>Kparecr-a,
Voc.
So also are declined Ay poo-Bevy? Demosthenes,
Diogenes.
1. Observe that the vocative singular of names like
has recessive accent.
108. Proper names in -K\er)$, of which the last part is
the stem /cXeecr- (/cXeo? fame), are doubly contracted in
the dative. HepifcXfjs (stem Ile/^/eXeeo--) Pericles is thus
declined :
_ T (
Norn, -j
(
Gen. IIcpiK\Eovs (*nptKXeecr-os,
Dat. rhpiKXti (*IIeptKXeeo--t, IlepiKXee-t,
Ace. IlpiK\cd (*Ilept/<Xee(r-a, IlepiKXee-a)
Voc. Il6p(K\is ( IleptKXee?)
109. Stems in -oo--. There is one stem in -ocr- (^
alBws shame) which is thus inflected : nom. at'Sa)?, gen.
alSov? (*cu'Soa--o?, at'So-o?), dat. alSol (*al$oa--i, at'So-i),
ace. alSa) (*at'Socr-a, at'So-a), voc. at'Sco?. The dual and
plural are not found.
108 a. In Homer proper names in -K\er)s should probably have the
uncontracted forms. Thus 'HpaicX^eos gen. sing. 'H/aa/cX^ea ace. sing, of
'HpaKX^s Heracles, but these are usually written with T;, 'HpaK\rjos, 'HpaK\7ja.
109 a. In Ionic yds dawn is declined like
56
THIRD DECLENSION
VOWEL STEMS
110. Stems in -i- and -D-. Stems ending in i or v are
thus declined :
f) iroXis city. 6 irf\\vs forearm. TO d'cm) town. 6 i\Qv<$ fish.
(stem iroXi-) (stem TTTIXV-) (stem do--) (stem l\Qv-}
SINGULAR
Nom. ir6Xi-s
Gen. iroXe-cos
Dat. iroXci (TrdAe-t)
Ace. ir6Xt-v
Voc. iroXi
DUAL
N.A.V. iroXei (TTo'Ae-e)
G.D. -iroXeotv
N.V. ir6Xs (7roAe-e?)
Gen. iroXe-wv
Dat. iroXs-o-i
Ace. iroXeis
PLURAL
ao-Tv
d'o-T-ws
(ao-re-t) l\Qv-'i
ao-Tv
a<TTl
do-T6-OlV
IXOV-C
I x 0v-oiv
ao-TT] (aore-a) lx0v-S
ao-T-wv l\Qv-otv
d'o-T-<ri
dVrr] (aorc-a)
110 a. In Homer steins in -i- are thus declined : sing. nom. 7r6Xts,
gen. TroXios, dat. 7r6Xt, rarely TroXet (which doubtless stands for 7r6Xu), ace.
?r6Xtv, voc. TrdXt ; plur. nom. ?r6Xtes, gen. iro\lwv, dat. TroXi'ecnri ( 76 b) or
(rarely) TroXecrt (which perhaps stands for 7r6Xt<rt), ace. 7r6Xts and ?r6Xias.
b. From TrdXis Homer has also four forms with 77: sing. gen. 7r6X?7os,
dat. 7r6X?7i ; plur. nom. TrdXT/es, ace. 7rdX7?as.
c. In Herodotus stems in -t- are thus inflected : sing. 7r6Xis, TTO'XIOS,
TTO'XI (rarely ?r6Xei), TroXir, TTO'XI ; plur. Tro'Xies, iro\i<av, TroXtat, WXis (rarely
Tro'Xtas) .
d. In Ionic, words with stems in -v- regularly have the uncontracted
forms : thus #<rrei', #<rrea, Traces, except that Homer sometimes con-
tracts the dative singular : thus Tr\T]dvT to a multitude. In the genitive
singular Ionic has always -os (not -ws) : thus Tnfoe-os, fore-os. The geni-
tive plural has its regular accent (cf. 110, 2): thus TTT^WP aar^uv.
e. In the accusative plural Homer has -us or -uas, as the meter may
demand: thus tx&vs or t-^dvas.
VOWEL STEMS 57
So also are declined 77 Svvafiis power, o /na'zm? seer, o Tre-
\ercvs axe (like TTT/^U?), o or 77 0-1)5 ^0*7 (like %#u<?, gen.
sing, oW?), /3oVjOU5 cluster of grapes (like fc%0i$5, but with
short f ) . Most of these words are masculine or feminine ;
the only neuter in frequent use is darv town.
NOTE. It is probable that in words like TroAis and Trfjxys we
have, as we have seen elsewhere ( 105, 1), two forms of the same stem
existing side by side, TroAi- and TroAa- (see 14, 2 and 73, 1). Thus
the nominative is formed from the shorter stem (TTO'AI-S, TH^-?)* but
the genitive was originally from the longer stem (*7roAet-o?, *7rr)xtv-os) .
These latter forms, however, are not found, for the t or v at once went
over into the corresponding consonant form (/ or ^ ), and disappeared
( 21). In compensation the preceding vowel was sometimes length-
ened ( 16), and thus we have TrdAry-os (in Homer) and *7rryx^-?-
Then, by an interchange of quantity ( 17), we get the usual Attic
forms TroAeo)? and TT^CWS. Observe that the interchange of quantity
does not affect the position of the accent ( 60).
1. Most steins in -v- keep the v throughout and are
declined like l^dfe. Stems of one syllable have the
circumflex accent in the nominative, accusative, and
vocative.
2. Proper names in -t? usually retain the i of the stem
throughout their inflection : thus SveWeo-w Syennesis,
gen. 2fezWcrt-o5, etc. So also is declined /a? weevil, gen.
/ao?, etc.
3. Observe that the accent of the genitive plural is
irregularly made like that of the genitive singular.
4. The accusatives plural, Tro'Xet? and Tr^et?, are irregu-
larly made like the nominatives plural.
111. Stems ending in a diphthong lose the final vowel
of the stem before all endings beginning with a vowel
( 21). They are thus declined :
58
THIRD DECLENSION
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
N.A.V.
G.D.
N.V.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
6 paonXevs
king.
(stem paoaXcv-)
pao-iXev-s
pao-iXc-cos
pao-iXe-d
pao-iXev
pcuriXc'-oiv
pao-iXtis later -eis
pao-iXe-wv
pao-iXc-ds
6, f, povs
ox, cow.
old woman.
(stem POV-) (stem
DUAL
PO-OIV
PLURAL
po-wv
POV-O-C
POVS
ypd-oiv
-ypd-wv
ypav-a-i
f] vavs
ship.
(stem vav-)
SINGULAR
pov-s
-ypav-s
vav-s
Po-6s
ypd-os
ve-ws
po-t
ypd-t
VT,-t
POV-V
ypav-v
vav-v
POV
ypav
vav
vti-e
V6-OIV
v-wv
vav-erC
vavs
So also are declined o ITTTTCV^ horseman, 6 lepevs priest,
6 %o09 three-quart measure (but w. ace. sing. %oa, ace.
plur. %oa9).
NOTE. Many of the forms from stems in -ev- are to be explained
similarly to those from TT^X V ? an( i TroXts. Thus, the genitive singular
comes by an interchange of quantity ( 17), from
111 a. In Ionic, words with stems in -ev- regularly have the uncon-
tracted form. Homer has TJ instead of e wherever v has disappeared
( 111 and note). Thus, jSaaiX^os, jSao-iXiyt, etc. (but /3a<n\euy, /Sao-tXeDtrt).
In proper names, however, he sometimes has e, as in n^X^os of Peleus
(also 1177X1705).
b. For ypavs and vavs Homer has ypyvs and vrjvs. The latter he thus
declines : sing. nom. y^Gs, gen. VTJO'S or reos, dat. viji, ace. rija, via. ; plur.
nom. vfjes or v^es, gen. vrjuv or recDi/, dat. vqvffi, vf)e<r<n or v^etro-t, ace. y?}as
or v^as. Herodotus has sing, vrjvs, vrjds or /eo's, rift, via. ; plur. y^es, vewv,
vrjval, v^a.
c. For the dative plural of /Sous Homer has povo-L and /So'eo-crt, and for
the accusative plural oOs and /3o'as (cf. 110 a and e).
VOWEL STEMS 59
(in Homer), and this, in turn, is for *(3a<n\r)f:-o<> ( 21). So also the
accusatives singular and plural have -e'-d and -e-d?, for earlier -77-01
and -fj-a<s.
1. Observe that the nominative, accusative, and vocative
dual (ySacrtX?)), and the older form of the nominative
plural (/SacrtXi}?), are contracted from fiacriXfj-e and
fiacnXri-es. (See note.)
2. When the final -ev- of the stem follows a vowel or
diphthong, contraction usually takes place in the genitive
and accusative. Thus, Heipcuevs Peiraeus usually has for
its genitive Tletpatw? (for Ileijocuea)?), and for its accusative
Heipaia (for Heipaiea) .
112. Stems in -01-. Stems ending in 01 (found in the
singular only) lose their final i in all cases except the
vocative ( 21). They are thus declined :
TJ -rreiGw persuasion.
(stem
Nom.
Gen.
Dat. imOoi
ACC. 1Tl6<&
Voc. ireiOoi
So also are declined 77 77^0) echo, r) A^rw Leto. All
words which follow this declension have their written
accent on the last syllable.
113. Stems in -co- (or cop). A few words of the third
declension appear to have stems ending in o>, but this
could not have been the original ending. Possibly
112 a. Herodotus often has the accusative singular of ot- steins in
ow: thus i lovv ace. of ~I6 lo.
60 IRREGULAR DECLENSION
such stems ended originally in -o>/r-. They are thus
declined :
6 Tipws hero.
(stem Tjpft)+?)
SINGULAR DUAL PLURAL
Nom. tjpws Nom. -npw-es, Tjpws
Gen. T]p-os N.A.V. -npw-e Gen. fjpw-wv
Dat. -fipo) (77/00)-';) G.D. rjpw-oiv Dat. t]p&>-<ri
Ace. 4jpco-a, TJpw Ace. -qpw-as, fjpws
Voc. 4ips Voc.
So also are declined o /A^T/OW? mother's brother, 6
father's brother.
SUBSTANTIVES OF PECULIAR OR, IRREGULAR
DECLENSION
114. 1. The Greeks sometimes declined the same word
in different ways, especially when two different stems
would give the same nominative singular. Thus, the
stems CTKOTO- and a/corecr- both give a nominative singu-
lar er/coTO? darkness, genitive singular O-/COTOV (2d decl.)
or O-KOTOVS (3d decl.). So also stems of proper names in
-779, like ^coKparea- (nom. sing. ^wKpdrrjs, gen. sing. 2to-
/cpdrovs, ace. sing. ^(DKpdrrf), have sometimes an accusative
singular in -771; (^wKpar-qv), as if of the first declension.
2. Again, certain cases may have been formed from stems
of wholly different words : thus o oveipos dream (2d decl.
113 a. Homer has only the uncontracted forms : thus
(7//3w'), 77/>ci>es, recocts.
114, 2 a. So Homer has 6 5e<7/i6s bond, plur. ol de<r/j.oi and ra
n.a.TpoK\os (gen. -ou, 2d decl.) has also forms from a stem
thus gen. narpo/cXeeos (Ilar/ao/cX^os ?), etc. (See 108 a.)
From T)VIOXO-S charioteer, declined regularly, Homer has also
TivLoxyes (stem yvioxev-, 111); cf. At'0io7ras and At^ioTr^as, ace. plur. of
Al8io\f/.
IRREGULAR DECLENSION 61
regular), but gen. sing, also ovetparo?, dat. oveipari, nom.
plur. oveipara, gen. oveipdrcov, dat. bveipaai. See also 103,
1 and 2.
3. Again, words sometimes have different genders in
the different numbers. Thus, airo? grain (masc.) has for
its plural alra (neuter) ; TO o-rdSiov stade has for its plural
usually ol araBiai.
115. The peculiarities of substantives irregularly declined
can best be learned from a lexicon, but some of the more
important of these will be found in the following list :
1. 6 "Apt|s (stem 'A/oecr-) Ares, gen. v A/>ea>5 (poetic
"A/Deo?), dat. "A/oei, voc. "A/oe?.
2. [o, 97 apjv] (stem apev-, apv-, apva-) lamb, of the same
kind of declension as Trarrjp ( 105) : thus apv-6s, apv-i,
dpv-a, apv-es, apvd-a-i. The nominative singular is supplied
by a/wo?, 2d decl., regular.
3. TO "yovu knee (Lat. genu), nom. ace. voc. sing. All
other cases are formed from stem <yovar- ( 73, 1) : 70-
mr-o?, rydvar-i, etc.
4. T] -yuvTi woman. All other forms come from a stem
yvvaiK-: the genitives and datives have their written accent
on the last syllable : gen. sing. yvvaiKos, dat. yvvaiKi, ace.
ryvvai/ca, voc. yvvai ; dual yvvalKe, yvvaiKoiv ; plur. <yvvalices,
<yvva,LKwv, ytoveu^t, ryvvaitcas. (Cf. 73, 1.)
5. T| 8as (SaS-) ^or^A, 3d decl., regular, but the genitive
plural Sa&cov is an exception to the rule of accent for stems
of one syllable ( 100).
6. TO 86p\j spear, nom. ace. voc. sing. All other cases
115, 1 a. "ApTjs: Homer has gen/ApT/os and'Apeos, dat. "Ap-rji and'Apei',
ace. "Aprja ; Herodotus, "A/oeos, "A/set, "Apect.
115, 3 a. "yovv : Ionic and poetic yotivaros, yotivaTi, yotivara,
Epic also *yovy6s, 'youv/, *you^a, yotivuv, yotivecro'i ( 76 b)
62 SUBSTANTIVES OF PECULIAR
from stem Sopar- (cf. ydvv, 115, 3) : Sdpar-os, Sdpar-i, etc.
(cf. 73, 1). Poetic gen. 80/005, dat. Soptaiid So'/oet.
7. 6 Sfjuos (SyLto)-) stoe (poetic); 3d decl., regular, but
the genitive plural (Sfjubav) is an exception to the rule
of accent for stems of one syllable ( 100).
8. Zexis (cf. 39, 2) Zeus, gen. Ato?, dat. A; ace. Ata,
voc. ZeO.
9. TO Kapd (/ca/oar-, /cpdr-, 73, 1) Aead (poetic), gen.
Kpdr-os, dat. /cpdr-i or /capa, ace. /ca/?a (or even fcpara),
voc. Kapd; ace. plur. (rare) rou? Kparas.
10. TO Kpas Aor?i, wing, has forms from two different
stems, /cepao-- and tcepar-. See 103, 2, and a. Sing. nom.
ace. voc. /cepa<?, gen. /ce/jar-o? or /cqoa)? (for *A:6jOa(cr)-o?),
dat. icepdr-i or /ce/?a ; dual nom. ace. voc. tcepdre or #e/)a,
gen. dat. Kepdroiv or /cepwv, plur. nom. ace. voc. tcepdra
or /ce^a, gen. Kepcurwv, dat. icepdcri. In the meaning wing,
forms from the stem tcepacr- are usually employed.
12. 6, T| K-UCOV c?o^, voc. sing. #tW. All other cases from a
stem ;uz>- : #1^05, /cvi/t, /cuz/a ; plur. /ewe?, KVV&V, KVCTL, /cvvas.
115, 6 a. 86pv: Ionic Sotfparos, Sotfpan, Sahara, SovpdTwv, dotipacri.
Epic also 8ovp6s, Soup/, 5oG/>e, SoGpa, So^pwv, 5otf/>e(r<ri ( 76 b).
115, 8 a. Zevs : poetic also Z-rjvfc, Zrjvt, Zijva.
115, 9 a. Kdpot: Homer has forms from four different stems,
Kaprjr-, and /cpaar-, K par. SINGULAR
N.A. /c</)77 also Kdp
Gen. Kap^aTos KdpijTos tcpdaros
Dat. Ka.pria.TL KdprjTi Kpdari KpaTi
PLURAL
N.A. Ka.p~fja.TO. Kapd fcpdara KpaTa
Gen. KpaTuv
Dat.
For the plural Homer usually has Kdprjva, Kap-f/vuv, from another word,
115, 11 a. In K6/w (Kopvd-} helmet Homer sometimes has an accusative
w (cf. 115, 17).
OR IRREGULAR DECLENSION 63
13. 6 Xds stone (poetic), contracted from Xaa-?, gen.
Xa-o?, dat. Xa-t, ace. \aa-v, Xa-z^ ; plur. Xa-e?, \d-cov,
Xa-ecrcrt or Xa-ecrt.
14. 6, r fidpTus (papTvp-) witness, gen. yua^rf/o-o?, etc.,
regular, except dat. plur. fjidprvcri.
15. OlSnrous Oedipus, gen. OlSiTroSos or OlSiTrov ( 114, 1),
dat. OlSiTroSi, ace. OlSiTrovv, voc. OtSwrov? or OlBiTrov.
16. T| ots sheep (stem ot- for o/rt-, cf. Lat. ovis), sing.
oZ-9, ot-o?, ot-if', oZ-z; ; plur. ol-e?, ol-cov, ol-ai, ot?.
17. 6, fj opvls (opvlO-) bird, declined regularly ( 102),
but ace. sing, both opvWa and o/3i/Z^ ( 97, 1).
18. TO oils ear, sing. nom. ace. voc. o?, all other forms
from a stem ear- (contracted from ovar- (*o(/r)ar-), see
115, 18 a): thus OJT-O'?, twr-t; plur. w-ra, w-rw^, oW.
The genitive plural is an exception to the rule of accent
for stems of one syllable ( 100).
19. 6, T| TTCIIS (TratS-) child, gen. TratSo?, etc., regular,
but voc. sing. iral. The genitive and dative dual (jrai-
&oiv~) and the genitive plural (TraiScov) are exceptions to
the rule of accent for stems of one syllable ( 100).
20. TI IIv\>! Pnyx (ttvv/c-, Uvtcv-, 38), Hv/cvos, UVKVI,
Tlvtcva.
21. 6 irpeorpcuTqs (7r/oeo-/3efra-) embassador, rare in the
plural. Instead, the plural of the poetic 7r/>ecr/3u9
old man is commonly used : thus
7rpe'cr{3ecn,
115, 14 a. fidprvs: Homer has always sing, /j-dprvpos (2d decl.), plur.
115, 15 a. OlSiirous : Homer has a genitive Ot'5t7r65ao ; Herodotus,
Oi'3i7r65ea>. Doric forms found in the lyrics of tragedy are gen. 05t7r65a,
ace. Oldnr65dv, VOC. Qldtirbda.
115, 16 a. ols : Ionic usually leaves the stem uncontracted : thus 8is,
6ibs, etc.
115, 18 a. ovs : Homer has gen. sing, ouaros, plur. ouara, dat. ouao-i.
64 ADJECTIVES
22. TO iT-up (stem TTU/O-) fire, gen. Trvpos, etc., 3d decl.;
but plural ra Trvpd watch-fires, dat. Trvpols, 2d decl.
23. 6 Tp<os (stem T/3o>-) Trojan; the genitive plural
(Tpcbcov') is an exception to the rule of accent for stems
of one syllable ( 100).
24. TO o58o)p (Sar-) water, gen. vSaro?, etc.
25. 6 vlos (wo- and sometimes vo-, 21) soft, 2d decl.,
regular ; also many 3d decl. forms from a stem vlv- or
vv Q, being usually dropped between the two vowels, 21).
These are: sing. gen. v(/)eo9, dat. u(t)e ; dual f(t)e,
v(l)4owi plur. f(t)et?, f(t)eW, u(t)eVt, u(t)et9.
26. T x*ip (% et /~) ^wd, 3d decl., regular, but dat. plur.
and sometimes dat. dual %e/?oti>.
ADJECTIVES
116. The declension of adjectives in Greek is like that
of substantives, and the general statements given under
the three declensions of substantives will apply also to the
declension of adjectives.
FIKST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS
(VOWEL DECLENSION)
117. Most adjectives of the first and second declensions
have three endings, masc. -o?, fern, -a or -77 ( 15), neut.
-ov (cf. 81 and 90). The masculine and neuter follow
115, 25 a. vlos: besides the stems vlo- (2d decl.) and vlv- (3d decl.),
Homer has also a stem vi- which gives the following forms : sing. gen. ufos,
dat. uft, ace. via; dual vie; plur. nom. vtes, dat. uicio-i, ace. vlas. Herod-
otus has only the forms from ui6s (2d decl.).
115, 26 a. xip : poetic x e /^ s > X e P^> Homer has dat. plur. x e P"^ X et ' -
i, and (once)
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS
65
the second declension ; the feminine follows the first
declension. They are inflected as follows :
4>X.ios friendly.
d-yaOos good.
SINGULAR
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.
Nom.
cryaOos
d-yaOrj
d-yaOov
Gen.
d<ya6ov
d^yaGfts
<vya6ov
Dat.
d-yaOw
d-yaOfj
d-yaOw
Ace.
d<ya06v
dya0TJv
dya06v
Voc.
<rya8e'
d-ya.0^
d^yaOov
MASC.
<f>l\lOS
FEM.
NEUT.
(}>i\lOV
4>i\Cas
cjuXta
4>iXiov <f>i\iav
<{>i\toiv <{>iXaiv 4>iXCoiv
<j>C\i
<|>i\Cais
DUAL
N.A.V. d-yaOw d-yaOd d-ya8w
G.D. d-yaOoiv d-yaOaiv d-yaOoiv
PLURAL
N.~V.. d/yaOoi d*ya.OaC d-yaOa,
Gen. d-yaOwv d-yaGwv d-yaOwv
Dat. d-yaOots d-yaOais d-yaOots <J>i\iois
Ace. d*ya0ovs d-yaOas d-yadd <)>i\ous
So also are declined o-o<o?, 0-0^77, ao<f>6v wise, pa/epos,
jjLa/cpd, fjicucpov long, afto?, afia, aiov worthy.
1. Observe that the feminine always has a long vowel,
either a or 77. After e, i, or p the d is retained, otherwise
it is changed to 77 ( 83). After o an 77 follows, unless the
o is preceded by p ; then d is employed : thus 078077 (fern.)
eighth, but aOpod (fern.) collected.
2. Observe that, in regard to accent, the feminine
follows the masculine rather than its own nominative
singular. Thus, <]>{\iai nom. plur. and $i\fa>v gen. plur.
(contrary to 77 and 84).
3. In the dual the masculine forms are often used
instead of the feminine. Thus, <f>t\a> Kopd two dear girls.
117, 1 a. Ionic has 77 instead of a in the feminine (see 83 a). In the
genitive plural of the feminine Homer has -dwv (sometimes -^wi'), Herod-
otus has -twv (cf. 84 a).
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 5
66 ADJECTIVES
118. Many adjectives in -eo<? and -009 are contracted.
They are thus declined :
Xpvo-ovs (xpvcreos) golden.
SINGULAR
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
N.V.
Gen.
Dat. XP^"<? (XP 1 ' "^) XP^"Q (XP^"*)
Ace.
DUAL
N.A.V. xpv<rw
G.D.
PLURAL
N.V. XP^"^ (XP^" l ) XP^ * 01 ^ (XP^" ecu ) XP^"*
Gen. XP'"^'"'^' (\pvcr0)v) xp^^'**' (vpvcrfwi') %fv<r&v
Dat. xP v<r fe (xpw<rois) xP V(ra ^ (xpi'O'tais) xP uoro ^s
Ace. XP^ " ^ 5 (xp^cr 'o^s) XP^ "*? (xpuo"ds) XP^"*
dp-yvpovs (dpyvpeos) silver.
SINGULAR
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
N.V. dp-yvpovs (dpyvpco?) dp-yvpd (dpyvpsd) dp-yvpovv (dpyvpeov)
Gen. dp-yvpov (dpyvpeov) dp^vpas (dpyvpeds) dp-yvpov (dpyupeov)
Dat. dp-yvpw (dpyvpew) dp-yvpqi (dpyvped) dp-yvpw (dpyvpew)
Acc. dp-yvpovv (dpyvpeov) dp^vpav (dpyvpedv) dpyvpovv (dpyvpeov)
DUAL
N.A.V. dpYvpw (dpyupew) dpyvpa (dpyuped) dp-yvpw (dpyvpe'w)
G.D. dp-yvpoiv (dpyvpeotv) dpyvpaiv (dpyvpeatv) dp-yvpoiv (dpyvpe'oiv)
PLURAL
N.V. dp-yvpoi (dpyvpeoi) dp-yvpat (dpyvpeai) dp-yvpa (dpy^pea)
Gen. dp-yvpuv (dpyvpewv) dp-yvpwv (dpyupecov) dp-yupwv (dpyvpecuv)
Dat. dp-yupois (dpyupeots) dp-yupais (dpyvpeais) dpYupois (dpyvpeot?)
Acc. dp-yvpovs (dpyupeov?) dp-yvpds (dpyvped?) dp-yvpd (dpyvpea)
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS
67
dirXovs (ciTrXdos) simple.
MASC.
N.V. dirXovs
Gen. dirXov (ciTrXdov)
Dat. dirXw (ctTrXdo))
Acc. dirXovv (ciTrXdoi/)
N.A.V. dirXw (otTrXdo))
G.D. dirXolv (dirXooiv)
N.V. dirXoi (aVXo'oi)
Gen. dirXaiv (aTrXdwv)
Dat. dirXois (ciTrXdois)
Acc. dirXovs (ciTrXdous)
SINGULAR
FEM.
dirXij (ciTrXed)
dirXfjs (ciTrAed?)
dirXrj (ciTrAea)
DUAL
dirXd (ciTrAed)
dirXatv
PLURAL
clirXai (ciTrAeai)
dirXuv
dirXais
dirXds
NEUT.
dirAovv (ctTrAoov)
dirXov (ciTrAoov)
dirXw (a7rAda))
airXovv (oiTrAdoi/)
dirXw (aTrAdw)
dirXotv (a7rAdoii>)
dirXd (aVAcwx)
dirXwv ((XTrAdwv)
dirXois (ctTrAdots)
dirXd (aVAda)
1. Observe that in contraction a short vowel before a
is absorbed. Thus, %pvaecus becomes xpva-ais and a?rAoa
a-TrAa. In the feminine singular, however, this takes place
only after p : apyvped, apyvpa, but aTrXea, a?rAr} (cf. 83).
2. Observe that adjectives in -005 form their contracted
feminine from a stem in -ea-.
3. Adjectives of material in -eo? irregularly have their
written accent on their contract syllables. Thus, ^puo-eo?,
when contracted, becomes xpvaovs. For the accent of the
nominative dual (^/oucrco) cf. 91, 2.
ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS IN THE VOWEL
DECLENSION
119. By an adjective of two endings we mean one that
uses the masculine form also for the feminine. Thus,
masc. and fern. 1701^09, neut. rja-v%ov quiet.
Compound adjectives, as a rule, have only two endings :
so a-Xo70?, a-\oyov irrational, ei^ou?, ev-vovv well-disposed.
They are thus declined :
68 ADJECTIVES
quiet. I'Xews propitious.
SINGULAR
MASC. & FEM. NEUT. MASC. & FEM. NEUT.
Nom. tjo-vxos TJO-VXOV t'Xews tfXewv
Gen. TJO'VXOV Tj<rvx ov tXeco t'Xcco
Dat. TJOTVXW < H"*'X < { ) tXecp iXeu>
Ace. T]<rux ov r\<rv\ov ifXcwv iXeoov
Voc. T]<rx>x ti<rvxov t'Xews fc'Xewv
DUAL
N.A.V. TJ<TVX<> TI<TVX W tXew tXeco
G.D. i\a"v\oiv T)<rvx lv tXewv tXewv
PLURAL
XT TT " *' i\ 1^\
jN . V . t|<rvxoi Ti<rvxa- tA.fa> tAca
Gen. Tj(riix w v Tj(rvx<>v tXewv tXewv
Dat. T)rtxo i s fi<rvx oi s tXcws t'Xews
Ace. TICTVYOVS Ti(rvxci iiXews iXea
So also are declined /3ap/3apo9, fidpftapov barbarian,
77^-0^0^09, 7TL-<l>0ovov envious, a-T6/cz^o9, a-reicvov childless :
so also with contraction (see 91, 3), eu-z'ou? (eu-z'oo?),
ev-vovv well-disposed.
1. For the accent of TXew? see 92, 2.
2. One adjective, 7rXeo>9/WZ, has a feminine 7r\ed.
THIED DECLENSION
(CONSONANT DECLENSION)
120. Adjectives belonging wholly to the consonant
declension have only two endings, the masculine being
the same as the feminine.
Most of these have stems ending in eo- or ov. They
are thus declined :
119 a. Homer has tXaos and TrXeios for Attic I'Xews and TrX^ws (see 92, a).
120 a. Homer rarely, if ever, contracts adjectives in -rjs. Thus,
nom. plur. of dv<r/j.ev^s hostile.
THIRD DECLENSION
69
MASC. & FEM.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
N.A.V.
G.D. dXT,00lV (dXiy0-
N.V. dXt]0is
Gen.
Dat.
Ace. dXTj0is
true.
SINGULAR
NEUT.
dXT]0 S
dXr^ovs (d\iy0-<
dXT)0l
DUAL
dXr)0oiv
PLURAL
cv8aifjt(Dv happy
MASC. & FEM. NEUT.
ev'8aifj.ov
vSai|iovos etiSaijiovos
v8aCfiovi vSaip.ovi
ev5ai(xova vSai(iov
v'8ai|j.ov v'Saip.ov
V)8ai(JLOV
vSaip.6voiv v8aip.6voiv
v8ai|j.ova
fivSaijjiovwv v8ai|iova>v
tvSaifioo-L v8ai(ioo-i
cv8ai|iovas v8ap.ova
So also are declined O-CK^TJ?, cra^e? clear ; e
needy (see 120, 3); aa)(j)p(i)v, o-wcfrpov discreet; apprjv, appev
male. For fuller information about stems in -e<r- see
106-107.
1. Observe that the accent of the neuter evSaifjiov is
recessive.
2. Compound adjectives in -77?, without written accent
on the last syllable, have recessive accent even in con-
tracted forms : thus, masc. and fern. avrdpKTj<; self-sufficient,
neut. avrap/ces, gen. plur. avrdp/ccov (instead of avrapicwv
from avTapKe(a}-G)v.
3. The contraction of ea following an e (and sometimes
an L or v) gives a (cf. 118, 1): thus evSea for e
from ev&eijs needy.
121. Declension of Comparatives in -<ov. To this form
of declension belong also comparatives in -cov, which in
some cases are often formed on a stem in -oa- ( 73, 1)
70 ADJECTIVES
(cf. Lat. mel-ior-is for *mel-ios-is), and so suffer contraction.
They are thus declined :
pgXrtwv better.
SINGULAR
MASC. & FEM. NEUT.
Nom. peXrtwv pc'Xriov
Gen. peXrfov-os pcXrtov-os
Dat. pcXrfov-1 p\rfov-t
or
Ace
'{ pcXria) (for * / 8eATlo((r)-a)
Voc. P\TIOV P\TIOV
DUAL
N.A.V. P\TTOV- P\TIOV-
G.D. pe\Ti6v-oiv P\TIOV-OIV
PLURAL
^ p\rtov-S, or } peXrtov-a, or
* | p \Tfovs (for */3eATlo((r)-s) "1 peXrtw (for */2eATZo((r)-a)
Gen. P\TIOV-CDV p\Tl6v-wv
Dat. peXTtoo-i p\Tto<ri
\ peXrfov-as, or ( pcXrfov-a, or
' 1 peXrtovs ( peXriw (for */?e\TZo(o-)-a)
So also are declined pei^tov greater (neut.
rcaXXtcov more beautiful, Odrrcov swifter.
1. Observe that the neuter (J3^\rlov) is recessive in accent.
2. The accusative fieXrtovs (which should properly be
for /SeXrZo(o-)-a?) is imitated from the nominative.
OTHER ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS IN THE
CONSONANT DECLENSION
Some other adjectives of two endings are made by
compounding substantives with a prefix. Such, for exam-
ple, are :
eu-eXTU?, ev-\7TL of good hope, gen. sing. ei)eX7rtS-o9, ace.
sing. masc. and fern. eveKinv ( 97, 1), a-Trdrcop, a-irarop
fatherless, gen. sing, airdrop-os, etc.
THREE ENDINGS OF FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS 71
ADJECTIVES OF THREE ENDINGS OF THE FIRST
AND THIRD DECLENSIONS
122. Adjectives of the consonant declension which have
a separate form for the feminine always inflect the femi-
nine like the second class of substantives of the first
declension ( 81, 82).
1. The feminine is formed from the stem of the mas-
culine by adding -ta, but the i regularly combines with
the preceding letter (see 18, 1, and 39).
2. The genitive plural of the feminine always has the
circumflex accent on the last syllable ( 84).
123. Stems in -v-. Adjectives with stems ending in
v are thus declined :
swift.
SINGULAR
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
DUAL
N.A.V.
G.D.
PLURAL
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace. Tdxis Tdxid9 Tdxe'd
123 a. For the feminine -e?a, -e/as, etc., Herodotus has -&t, -^s, ^, -^av,
etc., and Homer sometimes has them : thus fiadta, ^Sa^s, etc. (Attic
/3a0eia). In the accusative singular Homer sometimes has -fa for Attic
-6v : thus efy>ea irbvTov broad sea.
72
ADJECTIVES
So also are declined y\vicv<i sweet, ffpaBvs sloiv, evpvs
wide.
1. Observe that the genitive singular masculine and
neuter ends in -09, and that the neuter plural is uncon-
tracted. Compare the declension of Trfjxvs and CLCTTV
( no).
NOTE. The feminine ra^eta is for *rax^v-ia (cf. 14, 2 and
21).
124. Stems in -av-. Adjectives with steins ending in
av are thus declined :
MASC.
black.
SINGULAR
FEM.
NEUT.
p-e'Xav
fieXavos
[xeXavi
(xcXav
p.e'Xav
lie'Xave
peXdvoiv
pe'Xava
p.eXdvcov
p.e'Xaa-1
p.eXava
Like /^eXa? is declined only raXa? wretched.
NOTE. The feminine /xeAatva is for */x,eA.av-ia (see 39, 4) .
1. The nominative singular masculine is formed with 5,
contrary to 96, 1. Observe that the nominative singular
masculine (/tteXa?) has long a according to 34, while the
short a of the dative plural (/-te'Xao-t) is in accordance
with 99.
Nom.
plXds
[xeXaiva
Gen.
p-e'Xavos
(jieXaCvT^s
Dat.
[xcXavi
p.eXa(vp
Ace.
p.t'Xava
(xeXaivav
Voc.
p-t'Xav
p-tXaiva
DUAL
N.A.V.
H-eXave
p,eXaiva
G.D.
p.eXdvoLv
p-eXaivaiv
PLURAL
N.V.
p.e'Xav69
|ie'Xcuvcu
Gen.
(j-eXdvcov
fxeXaivwv
Dat.
fitXacru
fxeXaivais
Ace.
(xe'Xavas
p-eXaivas
THREE ENDINGS OF FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS 73
125. Stems in -in--. Stems in -IT- are thus declined :
pleasing.
MASC.
FEM.
No in.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Yoc.
N.A.V.
G.D.
N.V.
Gen. x a P l * VTa)V
Dat.
Acc.
SINGULAR
NEUT.
\aplev
MASC.
irds
irds all.
FEM. NEUT.
irdo-a irdv
iravri
irdvTct
irav
-rrcwrT) iravri
irdcrav irdv
ird<ra irdv
DUAL
Xapievroiv
PLURAL
x a P l * VTWV
\api6crt
trcri
iravras
Like %apieis are inflected Trre/ooet? winged,
irdo-ai iravra
-irdo-wv iravTcov
irdo-ais irdcrt
irdo-ds iravra
voiced.
NOTE 1. The feminine -rraa-a is for *7ravr-/a, *7ravr-o-a ( 34), while
Xapt'eo-o-a (-erra, see 125, 1) is for *x<xpieT-ia ( 39, 1), from a shorter
form of the stem (papier-). The dative plural ^apt'co-i (for *xapieT-<n,
30) also comes from this stem.
NOTE 2. The nominatives singular masculine xapUis and 7ras are
for *x a P tJ/T "? an d *7rai/T-?. See 34.
1. The feminine of adjectives like %a/nei? occurs only in
poetic diction, and so the feminine ^apieo-cra has o-a instead
of TT ( 22). The Attic prose form of this word would be
%ap terra .
2. Observe that the genitives and datives Trdvrwv, Trdcn
are accented contrary to 100.
3. Observe that the neuter singular irav irregularly has
a, imitated from the masculine.
74
ADJECTIVES
ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING
126. A few adjectives from their meaning have no
neuter, and the masculine and feminine are inflected
alike : so a-7rais childless, gen. sing. a7raiS-o$, etc. ;
poor, gen. sing. TrevrjT-os, etc.
ADJECTIVES OF IRREGULAR DECLENSION
127. The irregular adjectives /-te^a? great (stems
and fjieyaXo-, 73, 1) and TroXu? much, many (stems TTO\V
and TroXXo-, 73, 1) are thus declined :
great.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
MASC.
pfyas
(Jic'ydXou
(le-ydXco
|xyav
[ic-yas
SINGULAR
FEM. NEUT.
p.*ydXr|s fxe*ya.\o
|A-y<*Ml
jie-ydXT]
N.A.V.
G.D. fie-ydXoiv
N.V.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
(xe-yaXoi fi-ydXai
jx-ydXwv p,-ydX<ov
p.-ydXois
DUAL
PLURAL
iroXvs much, many.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
iroXvs iroXX^j iro\v
iroXXov iroXXtis iroXXov
iroXX^ iroXXfj iroXXw
iroXtiv iroXXv iroXv
iroXXoi iroXXai iroXXd
iroXXwv iroXXwv iroXXwv
iroXXois iroXXais iroXXois
iroXXovs iroXXas iroXXd
NOTE. In TroAv? two stems are to be seen ( 73, 1), one with
and one without o: thus (1) TTO\V- and (2) TroAvo-, i.e. TTOA/TO, and
by assimilation TroAAo.
127 a. Herodotus has 7ro\X6s, TroXX?^, Tro\\6v, declined like &ya66s.
Homer also frequently uses this form, as well as other 3d declension
forms (not Attic), from the stem TTO\V- : thus gen. sing. 7roX6>s, nom. plur.
gen. TroX&oj', dat. 7roX^eo-<rt ( 76 b), 7roX6r(ri, and TroX^o-i, ace.
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 75
128. Declension of irpaos. Tr/oao? mild (stem Trpao-)
forms its feminine and usually most of its plural from a
stem Trpdv- ( 73, 1). Thus, nom. sing. fern. Trpdela (for
*7rpdev-ia ; cf. ra%eta, 123, note), nom. plur. masc. irpaoi
or Tr/oaefc, gen. plur. masc. Trpacov or (usually) Trpde&v, etc.
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES
129. All participles of the middle voice, together with
the participle of the future passive, are inflected like
ay a06<; ( 117).
All other participles, namely, the participles of the
active voice, together with the participle of the aorist
passive, belong to the first and third declensions ( 122).
The stems of all of these, with the exception of the perfect
active participle, end in in. Such participles are thus
declined :
povXeuwv planning, (stem povXevovr-) oiv being, (stem OVT-)
SINGULAR
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. povXevwv povXevovo-a pouXcvov wv ov<ra 6'v
Gen. POV\OVTOS pov\evov<rT]s POU\VOVTOS OVTOS ow<rr]s OVTOS
Dat. POV\VOVTI povXevovo-r) POU\VOVTI ovrt ouVr) O'VTI
Acc. povXevovra povXevovcrav povXvov 6'vra ovo-av 6'v
Voc. pouXevwv povXevouo-a povXevov wv ovcra 6'v
DUAL
N.A.V. povXevovre povXcvovo-d povXevovrc ovrt ov<rd OVT
G.D. povXcv6vTOiv povXtvoxio-aiv povXevovroiv O'VTOIV ovcraiv O'VTOIV
PLURAL
N.V. povXcvovrcs povXevovo-at pouXevovra O'VTCS ovo-at 6'vra
Gen. pouXtuovTwv povXevovo-wv povXevovrwv O'VTWV ov<rwv OVTWV
Dat. pouXcvovo-i pouXevovo-ais pouXevovo-i ovo-i ovVais overt
Acc. pouXevovras povXwov<rds povXevovra 6'vras ovVds 6 / vra
76
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES
SiSovs giving (SiSovr-)
SCIKVVS showing
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
MASC.
SiSovs
8l86 VTOS
8iS6vri
8186 vra
SiSovs
N.A.V. 8186 VT6
G.D. SiSovroiv
8i86vTs
SiSovrwv
SiSovcri
SiSovras
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
FEM. NEUT.
SciKvvcra SCIKVVV
8eiKvvcri]s Seucvvvros
SeiKvxJCTT] SEIKVVVTI
SeiKvvcrav Seiicvvv
SeiKvvv
SINGULAR
FEM. NEUT. MASC.
SiSovcra SiSov SCIKV^S
8i8ovo-T]s 8i86vTos SIKVVVTO<
8i8ovo-T| 8i86vri SIKVVVTI
8i8ovo-av 8i86v 8eiKvvvra
8i8ovo-a 8iS6v SCIKVVS
DUAL
SiSovcra SiSovrc SCIKVVVTC SeiKwcra SCIKVVVTC
SiSovcraiv SiSovroiv SCIKVVVTOIV SciKVvcraiv SCIKVVVTOIV
PLURAL
SiSovcrai SiSovra SCIKVVVTCS SeiKVvcrai Scivvvra
SiSovcriov SiSovTwv SCIKVVVTWV SCIKVVCTWV SIKVVVTWV
SiSovcrais SiSovcri SCIKVVO-I SiKvv<rais SCIKVVCTI
SiSovcrds SiSovra SciKvvvras SeiKvvcrds SeiKvvvra
Xvcrds having loosed (Xvcravr-)
SINGULAR
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC.
Xvcrds XvVacra Xvcrav XvGeis
Xvcravros XvcrdcrTjs Xvcravros Xv0vros
Xvcravri XvcrdcrTj Xvoravn Xv0c-vTi
Xvcravra Xvcrdcrav Xvcrav Xv0evra
Xvcras Xvcracra Xvcrav
Xv0is loosed (Xv9vr-)
FEM.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
DUAL
N.A.V. Xijtravre Xvcrdo-d Xv<ravr XvOc'vre
G.D. Xv<rdvToiv Xvcracraiv XVO-OLVTOIV
XvOeio-T)
Xv0icrav
Xv0eicra
Xv0icrd
Xv0icraiv
NEUT.
XV0V
Xv0VTOS
Xv0VTl
Xv0V
XV0'V
Xv0VTOlV
PLURAL
N.V. Xvo-avTS Xv<rd(rai Xvcravra XvOevres XvOeicrai XvOcvra
Gen. Xvo-avrcov Xvo-do-wv XVO-OLVTWV XvOt'vTwv Xv0io-<Sv XvOeVrwv
Dat. Xvo-do-t Xiio-aorais Xvo-d<ri Xv0icrt Xv0io-ais Xv0io-i
Acc. XiJo-avras Xv<rd(ras Xvcravra XvOe'vras Xu0i(rds XvOe'vra
So also are declined TraiSevcov educating (like
\nrd)v (2d aor.) having left (like wi^), kic&v willing (like wz^),
having educated (like Xwcrd?), tVra? erecting (like
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES 77
, TraiSevOek educated (like \u#etV), TiOek putting (like
1. Observe that all stems in -OVT-, except those of -\ii
verbs ( 170), form their nominative singular masculine
without -9, according to 96, 1. All other stems in -vr-
form their nominative by adding -9.
2. Observe that the accent of the neuter singular fol-
IOAVS that of the masculine (/SouXeOo^, unlike evSaifjiov,
120, 1).
3. Observe that participles of one syllable keep their
written accent on the first syllable in the genitive and
dative, contrary to 100.
4. Observe that the vocative singular is like the nomi-
native (cf. 98, 1).
130. The present participle of verbs in - (-ao>, -e'&>, and
-GO)) and the future participle of liquid verbs ( 213) are
contracted. They are declined as follows :
honoring (contracted from
SINGULAR
MASC. FEM.
Tifiwcra (-aoiKra)
TIJJK&O-TIS (-aoixrr/s)
TIJJLWCTTI (-OOWTJ)
Tifj.t3<rav (-aovcrai/)
Tijjiwcra (-aou(ra)
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
Voc.
TIJIWV
(-awv)
TIJJLWVTOS (-aovros)
TIJXWVTI (-aoj/rt)
rinwvra (-aoi/ra)
TIJJIWV (-awv)
XEUT.
TIJJLWV (-
Ttp.covTos (-aovros)
TIJJLWVTI
Ti(j.c5v
Ti|j.(5v
(-aoi'Tt)
(-aov)
(-aov)
DUAL
N.A.Y. TiftwvT (-aorre)
G.D. TIJJIWVTOIV (-adi/TOtv) Tifxc6(raiv (-aoixrcuv)
PLURAL
N.V. TinvTs (-aovres) Tijiwo-at (-aovcrai)
Gen. TipnovTcav (-aovrwv) Tificao-wv (-aovfraiv)
Dat. TIJJLWO-I (-aovcri) rijicoo-ais (-aouo-at?)
Acc. TifJiwvTas (-aovras) Tino-as (-aovcras)
TtjjLwvTC (-aoi/re)
TIJIWVTOIV (-advrotv)
TijAtovra (-aovra)
TIJXWVTWV (-advrwv)
Tijiwiri (-aovcrt)
TifiwvTct (-aovra)
78
DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
<j>iXv loving (contracted from </>iA.eW)
SINGULAR
FEM.
<|uXov<ra
MASC.
(JuXtov (
cjuXovvros (
<}>I\OVVTI (-eoi/Ti)
<|uXovvTa (-eoi/ra)
4>iXwv (-<ov)
N.A.V. <|>iXovvT (-t'ovre)
G.D. <|>i\ovvToiv (-eoi/Toiv)
N.V.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
<|>lXovVTS (-OVTS)
<|>i\ov<ri
<j>i\oiivTas (-eWras)
4>lXoV(TT)
<f>iXov<rav (-<
<}>iXov(ra
DUAL
4>LXovcrd (-eov(ra)
<j>iXovo-aLv (-coverall/)
PLURAL
4>iXovarcu (-eovcrai)
<j>iXovo-wv (-covo-wv)
4>iXovcrais (-eovaats)
<|)iXovo-as (-covcrds)
NEUT.
4>l\OVV (-
<j)l\OVVTOS (-
<J>i\ovvTi (-e'oi/ri)
<j>l\OVV (-OV)
4>l\OVV (-OV)
<|)lXoi)VT
4>iXovvroiv (-eoVroiv)
4>iXovvTa (-eovra)
<|)lXovivTft)V
<|>iXovo-i
ijuXovvra
1. The present participle of STJ\W (-o'&)), ^Xwz/ (for ?;-
, is inflected exactly like fyik&v. The uncontracted
forms do not occur.
131. Perfect Active Participles. The stem of the perfect
active participle ends in or or o<r ( 73, 1). The declen-
sion is as follows :
X\VKCO$ having loosed (stem XeXvKor-jXtXvKoo--)
SINGULAR
FEM. NEUT.
XeXvKuia XeXvKOs
XeXvKoros
MASC.
Nom.
XcXvKUS
Gen.
XeXvKoros
Dat.
XeXvKon
Ace.
XeXvKOra
Voc.
XeXvKcos
N.A.V.
XcXvKorc
G.D.
XtXvKOTOlV
N.V.
XcXvKOTCS
Gen.
XeXvKOTCOV
Dat.
XXvK6(Tl
Ace.
XeXvKoras
XcXuKviav
DUAL
XeXvKXHCUV
PLURAL
XeXvKOTOLV
XeXvKora
XeXxJKOcri
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 79
So also are inflected TreTrai&ev/ccos, -/cvia, -/co? having
educated; ecrrco?, eo-Tcocra, ea-ro'? standing (stem eo-Twr-
(eo-raxr-), contracted from eo-raor-).
XOTE. The neuter of eorws is usually written CCTTOS, probably to
distinguish it from the masculine, since otherwise both would be
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
132. Comparison by -Tpos, -TCITOS. Most adjectives
form the comparative degree by adding -re/ao?, -re/oa, -repov
(declined like /-ta/e/xfc, 117) to the masculine stem of the
positive. The superlative is formed by adding -raro?,
-rax?;, -Ta-Tov (declined like ayaOos, 117) to the same
stem. Thus :
POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
/cov(f)o<> light /covcfro-Tepos
bitter Trucpo-repos
sharp o%v-repos ofu-raro?
black /-leXa^-re/oo?
(Ta(f>r)$ clear a-afyea-Tepos
^a/)iet9 pleasing ^apiecr-repo^ (for *%a-
piT-Tepo<; see 26
and 125, note 1)
1. Stems in -o- lengthen the final o of the stem unless
the preceding syllable is long (either by nature or posi-
tion, 52, 53). Thus:
POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
cro(/>o? ivise <ro^)(o-Te/309 o-oc/xo-raro?
afio? worthy afico-repo? a^oa-raro?
2. A few words usually drop the final o of the stem :
thus 7epai09 old, comparative 7e/oatrepo9 ; 0t x Xo9 friendly,
comparative <^tXrepo9, superlative 0t / Xraro9.
80 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
133. Adjectives in -wv and -ou? (-009) are compared as if
their stems ended in ecr : thus aaxfrpcov discreet, compara-
tive awcfrpovecr-Tepos, etc. ; evvovs well disposed, comparative
etc. (for *evvoecr-Tpos~).
134. Comparison by -LOV, -UTTOS. A few adjectives
are compared by adding to the root of the positive the
endings -Icov, -lov to form the comparative, and -tcrro?,
-UTT7), -UTTOV to form the superlative. The superlative is
declined like ayaOos ( 117) ; for the declension of the
comparative see 121. Thus :
POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
jyS-v-s pleasant (cf. 178-0/10.1 ^S-tcov ^S-tcrro?
am pleased)
ra^-v-s swift (cf. ra^-os OOLTTIOV (for *Ta^-tcov, ra^-icrro?
swiftness) 39, 1 and 41)
jU.ey-o.-s great (cf. /u.y-$os ju,eia>v (for
greatness) 39, 2)
o-s liostile(c,L ^-05
>9 shameful (cf. ato^-os
135. Comparison by (idXXov, [iaXurra. Adjectives are
sometimes compared by means of the adverbs iia\\ov more
and fjid\ia-Ta most. Thus, c^uXo? friendly, ^a\\ov (^tXo?
more friendly, fidXiara ^t'Xo? most friendly.
134 a. In Epic poetry the comparative ending -uav has short t.
b. In poetry the forms in -uav, -IO-TOS occur much more frequently than
in prose. Homer has several comparatives and superlatives that are not
usual in Attic : thus icvdurros most glorious, (fttprepos more excellent,
OTT \6repos younger; all these will be found in the lexicon.
ADVERBS
81
136. Irregular Comparison. The following list contains
the most important adjectives of irregular comparison :
POSITIVE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE
dya0os good d/xetVcov
aptoTos (cf. dp-err; virtue)
bad
small
v? much,
many
KaAos beautiful
paSios easy
KOLKltoV
(deterior)
(inferior)
/ztKprepos
eAdrra>i/ (for *eAa^-
tcuv, 39,1)
TrAeuov, TrAeojv (see
21)
KaAAtwv
Kparicrros (cf. Kpdr-os strength)
Awcrro?
KaKKTTOS
r)Ki(TTa adv. /eas^ q/*a^
/xiKporaros
dAyetvos painful dAytwv
TrAeccrros
KaAAtcrro; (cf. /cdAA-os beauty)
pacrros
dAyioro? (cf . aAy-os pain)
ADVERBS
137. Form of Adverbs. Most Adverbs end in -a)<?, and
are regularly derived from adjectives. Their form is in
all respects like the genitive plural, except that the last
letter is ? instead of v.
Their form can always be determined by substituting 5
for the final v of the genitive plural.
Thus, o-o(w? wisely (cro^d? wise, gen. plur. aofywv),
vra^Tft)? wholly (TTO,? whole, gen. plur. Trdwrwv), ra^ew?
quickly (ra^u? quick, gen. plur. ra^eW), crac/xw? clearly
(e7a(?j? clear, gen. plur. contracted ( 120) o-a^wz^).
NOTE. The adverb corresponding to dya#o? good is ev z^eZZ.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 6
82 ADVERBS
1. Besides the regularly formed adverbs many nouns
(some of them obsolete) and some pronominal stems are
used in certain cases adverbially.
Thus, TTO\V much ( 336), O-TTOU&J earnestly ( 389),
olicoL at home (see 76, note), Trpw early, a^a^ei without
a battle, Trot whither, TTOV where (cf. 358), ov&a/jiov
nowhere (cf. 358).
2. Certain local endings of the nature of case-endings
( 76) are used to form adverbs of place. These are : -61,
Place Where, as in d\\o-6i elsewhere ; -Oev, Place Whence,
as in olico-Oev from home, Trdvro-Oev from all sides ; -Se,
Place Whither, as in oiica-Be homeward, 'AOrjvd^e (for
?-8e toward Athens.
138. Comparison of Adverbs. Adverbs in -o>? employ
for their comparative the neuter singular of the compara-
tive of their adjective ; for their superlative they employ
the neuter plural of the superlative.
Thus, cro(a>? wisely, ao^corepov more wisely, o-o^corara
most wisely ; paSio)<? easily, paov more easily, paara most
easily.
1. Adverbs in -co have the comparative and superlative
ending in -co. Thus, ava> above, avcorepco higher, avcordra)
highest.
2. The adverb /LtaXa very has for its comparative /jia\\ov
(for fjLa\-iov, 39, 3), and for its superlative
137, 2 a. The local endings are naturally much more frequent in
Homer : thus ofrcofli at home, ovpavbdev from heaven, T)fj.eTp6vde to our
(house), irbXivde to the city, etc.
PRONOUNS
83
PRONOUNS
139. The Personal Pronouns. The pronouns of the
first, second, and third person are thus declined :
FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON
SINGULAR
Nona. i^yw / orv you him, her, it
Gen. (iov; p,ov (enclitic) <rov ; <rou (enclitic) ov; ov (enclitic)
Dat. jio ; JJ.QI (enclitic) <ro; o-oi (enclitic) ol; ol (enclitic)
Ace. fie' ; |i (enclitic) <r ; o- (enclitic) 4'; I (enclitic)
Voc. o-v
DUAL
o-<j> you two
o-<bwv
N.A.(V.) vi& we two
G.D. vv
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Voc.
TJH.WV
TJJJ.IV
PLURAL
VJJL61S yOU
VfJLWV
VJXIV
<r<j>is
o-cjncri
<r<j>as
P:. The stems of the pronoun of the first person are (e)/xe-
(the nominative eyw being of different formation), vco-, and ly/w-e-
(from <l/>t)U,e-) ; of the second person <rv- (for TV-), ere (for *r/re-) cr^xo-,
and v/xe- (from v/x/xe-) ; of the third person e- (originally *cr/re-, 36 a),
ce- (for *cre/re-), and cr<^>e-. From the shorter stem TV- of the second
person comes only the nominative crv (cf. TroXvs, 127, note). From
the longer form of the stem of the third person ee- (*oref e-) conies the
Homeric form ee, ace.
1. The enclitic ( 70) forms are used when there is no
emphasis on the pronoun. Thus, Sofcel /-tot it seems (t,o me).
But when the pronoun is emphatic the forms with written
accent (and in the first person the longer forms e/toi), etc.)
are employed : thus etVe Kal e'/W tell even me. This is
regularly the case when prepositions are used with
8-4 PRONOUNS
the pronouns : thus irap e/Jiov from beside me, Trepl crov
about you.
2. The pronoun of the third person o, ot, e, when used
as a direct reflexive ( 470), is never enclitic.
139 a. Homer has the following forms of the personal pronouns :
SINGULAR
Nom. e*7<6, eytbv vv, rvvrj
( l/xe?o, e/i^o, e"/xeO, o-eto, cr^o, <reO, eto, 0, eo (end.),
Gen. -J fj, ev (encl.), e/j.edev (rev (encl.), aedev ei', eu (encl.),
Wev, Mtv (encl.)
Dat. tfjiot, pot (encl.) croi, TOI (encl.), retv eo?, of, oi (encl.)
Ace. ^, fjif (encl.) 0-e", <re (encl.) e^, ^, fj.iv (encl.)
DUAL
N.A. j/wi, i/c6 0-0(31', o-0c6 o-0o>^ (encl.)
G.D. v&'iv o-0 wiV, o-04)j' (5 62) <r<j>uitv (encl.)
PLURAL
Nom. ^/>te?s, &fA/j.es 6/ie?s, vfj.fj.es
PP ^ TjfJ.eiwv, tfneuv vfj.elwv, vpttav (rcftetuv, (r^ewv^
<7(f>euv (encl.), (T(p(tJv
Dat | ^"' ^^C") ^'"' ^/"C") <r<t>lffi(v\ (?(f>L<ri(v) (encl.),
' i o-0ti' (encl.)
Ace / ^^^ as ' ^/*Me u/x^as, u/u^e o-0^os, o-0e<is (encl.),
" 1 o-0<f (encl.)
The forms of the plural in d^u- and vpn- are Aeolic in origin.
b. In Herodotus the personal pronouns have the following inflection :
SINGULAR
Nom. f^(S) <rv
Gen. ^o, e(j.ev, jju-v (encl.) o-fo, o-eu, o-eu (encl.) ev (encl.)
Dat. efwi, /ML (encl.) o-o/, TOI (encl.) ot (encl.)
Ace. e>?, /j.e (encl.) <re, ae (encl.) e (encl.), /UP (encl.)
PLURAL
Nom. ijfj.eis ifj.e?s <r(f>eis
Gen. iineuv v/jiewv vtyewv, <T(f>ewv (encl.)
Dat. Tjfjuv vfj.iv (rfylffi, o-0t(j-i (encl.)
Ace { ^ as Was o-0^as, o-0eas (encl.),
neut. <r0ea (encl.)
PRONOUNS
85
NOTE 1. The Tragedians for the accusative of the third personal
pronoun use VLV (encl.) and oxe (encl.) for all genders both singular
and plural.
NOTE 2. The genitive, dative, and accusative plural of the first
and second persons sometimes throw their written accent to the first
syllable (often shortening at the same time the final syllable) : thus
The pronoun
140. The Intensive Pronoun a/Ore's.
self, same is thus inflected :
MASC.
Nom. avros
Gen. avrov
Dat. avrw
Ace. avrov
SINGULAR
FEM.
NEUT.
avro
avrov
avrw
avro
avrci
avroiv
avrdl
avruv
avrois
avrd
Like auro? is inflected also a'XXo?, a\\rj, a\\o other.
1. In Attic the oblique cases of ai/nfc are usually employed
instead of the pronoun of the third person oft, ot, e, etc.
141. Reflexive Pronouns. The reflexive pronouns are
formed from the stems of the personal pronouns com-
pounded with auro?. From their meaning they can have
no nominative case. The third person has also a neuter.
In the plural both stems are declined together, yet the
DUAL
N.A.
avrw
aura
G.D.
avroiv
avraiv
PLURAL
Nom.
0.1JTOL
airat
Gen.
avTaiv
avraiv
Dat.
avrois
avrais
Ace.
avrovs
avrds
140 a. Herodotus has avrtuv for the genitive plural feminine of aur6s
(cf. 84 a). For the crasis wuros, see 5 a.
86
PRONOUNS
third person plural has also the compound form. They
are thus declined :
SINGULAR
myself. thyself.
Gen. IfJiavTov, -ijs creavrov, -TJS
Dat. efxauTo), -fj creauTw, -fj
Acc. ejiavrdv, -^jv creavrov, -i\v
himself, herself, itself.
lav-rov, -tis, -ov
lavr, -fj, -w
lavrov, -^jv, -6
ourselves.
Gen. Tfiwv avrwv
PLURAL
yourselves.
avrwv
themselves.
lavrwv
or <r<j>tov avTwv
Dat. T)|iiv avroiS) -ais vfxtv avrots, -ats lavrois, -ais, -ols
or <r<{>i(riv avTois, -ais
Acc. T)nds avrovs, -as VJJL&S avrovs, -as lavrovs, -as, -a.
or <r<j>as avroiis, -as
1. creavrov and eavrov are often contracted : aavrov,
; auroO, aur^?, etc.
It is thus
142. Reciprocal Pronoun. The reciprocal pronoun,
meaning one another, from its meaning has no singular
number, and no nominative or vocative case
declined :
Stem d\\T!\o- (for *d\\-aX\o-)
DUAL
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.
G.D.
Acc.
dXX^Xoiv
dXX^Xw
dXXVjXaiv
dXXiiXa
dXXrjXoiv
dXX^jXa)
PLURAL
Gen.
Dat.
Acc.
dXX^Xcov
dXXrjXois
dXX^Xovs
dXX^Xwv
dXX^Xais
dXX^Xds
dXXT)Xcov
dXX^Xois
aXX-qXa
141 a. In Homer the personal pronouns alone are sometimes used
reflexively ; often the reflexive meaning is made more clear by the addi-
tion of atfrds, but the two pronouns have not yet combined, as in Attic,
into one word. Thus, Homer has Itfdev avrrjs myself (gen. fern.), ol oury
himself (dat.), avrbv fj.iv himself (ace.), etc.
PRONOUNS 87
143. Possessive Pronouns. The possessive pronouns
are formed from the stems of the personal pronouns.
They are :
e/xd? fj.ij fj.6v my, mine. ^/xeVepos -d -ov our, ours.
(TO? atj (TOV thy, thine. v/tere/oo? -d -ov your, yours.
os 17 ov his (Jier, its) own. o-^eVepos -d -ov their own.
1. The possessive o? is not used in Attic prose, but its
place is taken by the genitive of auro? ( 4778).
144. Demonstrative Pronouns. The definite article
o, 77, TO, is thus inflected :
Stems TO- and 6 (for <ro-, 36)
SINGULAR
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.
Norn.
6
*
TO
Gen.
TOV
Tfjs
TOV
Dat.
TO,
T ii
TW
Ace.
r6v
Tf,V
TO
DUAL
N.A.
rt>
TW
T(6
G.D.
TOIV
TOIV
TOIV
PLURAL
Nom.
ol
at
Td
Gen.
TWV
TWV
TWV
Dat.
TOIS
Tats
TOIS
Ace.
TOVS
TOS
Td
143 a. Beside the forms given above ( 143) Homer has also re6s
(Latin tuus) thy, eos his (her, its), o/xos our, vfj.6s your, o-06s their; also,
from the dual stems vu-, o-0w-, vwirepos belonging to us two, and <r0wtrepos
belonging to you two.
The possessive 8s, eos,in Homer appears sometimes to be used without
reference to the third person, in the sense of own : thus rjs yai-rjs (my} oicn
land (gen.), 5t6juacri oTcn (your) own house (dat.).
144 a. Homer almost always uses 6, i], TO, as a demonstrative pronoun.
Beside the forms given above ( 144) Homer has also nom. sing. masc.
3s (found also in Attic in the phrases Kal os f^tj and he said, and ^ 5' 8s
88
PRONOUNS
145. The demonstrative pronouns oSe, %$, ro'Se this, and
euro?, avrrj, rovro this, that, are thus declined :
MASC.
Nom. 6'Se
Gen. Tov8
Dat. Tw8
Ace.
TTJ86
N.A.
G.D. TotvSe
Nom. ol'8c
Gen. TwvSe
Dat. Toto-Se
a'iSe
TwvSc
Taio-8
Ace.
o-Se Tao-Se
SINGULAR
NEUT.
MASC.
roSe
OVTOS
TovSe
TOVTOV
TW8
TOVTW
ToSe
TOVTOV
DUAL
TwSe
TOVTW
TOivSe
TOVTOIV
PLURAL
ToLSe
OVTOl
TwvSe
TOVTWV
TowrSe
TOVTOIS
Td8
TOVTOVS
FEM.
avi-q
TaVTT)
TdVTTJV
TOVTW
TOVTOIV
avrai
TOVTWV
TttVTCUS
TavTas
NEUT.
TOVTO
TOVTOV
TOVTW
TOVTO
TOVTW
TOVTOIV
TOVTWV
TOVTOIS
1. Observe that the use of ov or av in ouro? depends
on the character of the last syllable, ov being used to
correspond to an o-sound, and av to correspond to an
a (?;)-sound.
146. 'EKCIVOS, e/ceiV7), e/celvo that, is declined like auro?
( wo).
147. The demonstrative pronouns are sometimes made
more emphatic by adding -t: thus ovrocri, TOVTOVL. In
said he}, gen. sing. masc. and neut. roio ( 90 a), gen. and dat. dual roil'v
( 90 b), nom. plur. masc. rot, nom. plur. fern, rat, gen. plur. fern. rd<av
( 84 a), dat. plur. masc. TOIO-I ( 90 c), dat. plur. fern, rrjo-i or rfjs ( 84 b).
144 b. Herodotus also uses 6, 17, r6, as a demonstrative pronoun, but not
so frequently as Homer does. In the dative plural he has rotcri and TTJO-I.
145 a. For the dative plural of 55e Homer sometimes has rotffdeji or
Tolffdeo-ffi, Herodotus has rot<ri'5e.
146 a. For eiceivos Homer and other poets often have Keivos ; Herodotus
also uses both forms.
PRONOUNS
89
such case a preceding short vowel is dropped : thus 6Bf,
Tavrt.
148. Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns. The inter-
rogative pronoun is rt?, TL who? what? The indefinite
pronoun is ri?, rl, enclitic ( 70), some, any. They are
thus declined :
INTERROGATIVE
INDEFINITE
SINGULAR
MASC. & FEM.
NEUT.
MASC. & FEM.
NEUT.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
TlS
TIVOS, TOV
rCvi, TO>
riva
Tl
TIVOS, TOV
TlVl, TW
Tt
TlS
TIVOS, TOV
TIVC, T<p
Tivd
Tl
TIVOS, TOV
TlvC, T^
Tl
N.A.
G.D.
rive
TIVOIV
DUAL
rfve
rivoiv
TIV
TIVOIV
TIVC
TtVOlV
PLURAL
Norn.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
TIVS
TlVttV
T(O-I
Tivas
T (va
TCVWV
Tto-l
Tiva
TIVWV
TLO-l
Tivds
Tivd
TIVWV
Tivd
1. The acute accent of the interrogative, TI?, rt, never
changes to the grave ( 67).
NOTE 1. The form arm is sometimes used for the indefinite nva.
NOTE 2. Actva. Another indefinite pronoun, used in familiar
speech, is Setva " Mr. what's his name" always with the article : 6 (17, TO)
Seiva. Sometimes it is not declined, but when declined it is inflected
as follows : 6 Sava, TOV Sdvos, TCU Setn, TOV Sea/a, 01 Seii/es, TOJI/ oeivwv,
TOVS
148 a. Of the interrogative and indefinite pronouns Homer and Herod-
otus have the following additional forms : gen. sing, r^o, reu, reo, rev
dat. sing, r^y, rey, gen. plur. rtwv, rewj', dat. plur. T&WI, neut. plur.
(Homer) &<r<ra (cf. 148 note 1 and 22).
90 PRONOUNS
149. Relative Pronouns. The relative pronoun o?, ij, o
who, which, is thus inflected :
SINGULAR
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. os ti o
Gen. ov tjs ov
Dat. fj a)
Ace. ov ijv o
DUAL
N.A. <3 <3 c3
G.D. otv olv otv
PLURAL
Nom. oi at a
Gen. iSv *5v cSv
Dat. ots ats ols
Ace. ovs as a
150. The indefinite relative pronoun, o<rm, #m, o Ti
(sometimes written o, rt) whoever, whichever, is made by
joining o? and -m, both parts being declined.
149 a. Beside the forms given above ( 149) Homer has also gen. sing.
masc. and neut. 6'o ( 90 a), often wrongly written 6W, and fern, trjs (!).
In Homer the demonstrative pronoun, 6, ^, r6 ( 144 a), is often used
as a relative referring to a definite antecedent (cf. English that). When
so used the forms with r- (rot, TCU, 144 a) are employed in the nomina-
tive plural.
b. Herodotus has from the relative the forms 6's, r), oi', and at. For
all other forms he employs the demonstrative [6, ^] r6, roO, rrjs, etc. (cf.
149 a), except after certain prepositions (mostly prepositions of two
syllables, of which the last syllable may suffer elision) : thus yuer' 775 with
whom, air wv from which ( 44, 4 a).
150 a. Homer has several forms of the indefinite relative in which the
stem 6- is not declined : thus sing. nom. &Yts, neut. 6Vn, gen. 6'rreo,
and dVeu, dat. oYey, ace. 6'rtva, neut. O'TTI ; plur. gen. Sreuv, dat. 6
ace. Snvas. For the neuter plural he uses a<r<ra, nom. and ace.
b. Herodotus has gen. sing. oVev, dat. sing. 6'rey, gen. plur.
dat. plur. oT&>i<n, neut. plur. nom. and ace.
SINGULAR
MASC.
FEM.
Norn.
OO-TIS
TVTIS
Gen.
OVTIVOS, OTOV
TJO~TIVOS
Dat.
WTLVL, OTO)
fiTlVl
Ace.
ovTiva
tjvTiva
PRONOUNS 91
NEUT.
OTl
OVTIVOS, OTOV
Jmvi, OTU>
OTl
DUAL
N.A. WTIV <OTIV U>TIV
G.D. olvTIVOlV OIVTIVOIV otVTIVOlV
PLURAL
Nom. OITIV6S OITIV6S &TlVa
Gen. WVTIVWV, orwv WVTIVWV WVTIVWV, OTOIV
Dat. olo-Tio-i, OTOIS ato-Tio-i olo-Tio-i, OTOIS
Ace. ovo-Tivas currivas &riva
1. The shorter forms OTOU, OTW are more common than
, WTIVL.
NOTE. The indefinite TIS may be added also to other relatives to
make them more indefinite : thus OTTOIOS ris of whatsoever kind.
151. Correlation of Pronouns. In Greek certain pro-
nominal adjectives and adverbs show a regular correspon-
dence in form and meaning. Thus the interrogative form
begins with TTO-, the indefinite has the same form but is
enclitic, the demonstrative has TO-, and the relative o- or
(general relative) OTTO-. This may best be seen from the
following list :
151 a. Homer often doubles the IT of the general relatives : thus 6iriro?os,
oirirore, etc. (Attic oirolbs, 6ir6Te).
b. Herodotus has K instead of IT at the beginning of interrogative and
indefinite pronominal adjectives and adverbs : thus ic6cros, Kotos, KOU. Kodev,
KWS, KOT^, etc. (Attic iroo-os, irotos, etc.); so also in the general relatives he
has K for TT : thus 6ic6(ros, OKCHOS, &'KOV. oKotfei/, SKWS, etc. (Attic 6ir6(7os, oirotoj,
etc.).
92
INTERROGATIVE
TTOO-OS how
great.
TTOIOS of what
kind.
Trif)\LKO<S Of
what age.
PRONOUNS
INDEFINITE DEMONSTRATIVE
(enclitic)
ADJECTIVES
Troops of some (roVos)
size. Too-dcr8e
TOO-OVTOS
TTOtds of some
kind.
T0to ^ e
TOtOVTOS
kind.
TT/XlKOVTOS
age.
ADVERBS
TTOv where. TTOV somewhere.
7rd0ev whence. iroOev from [roOev (poetic)
some place.
Trol whither. TTOI to some
place.
7TOT sometime. TOTC
what time. T^viKaSe
TrjviKavTa )
Try which ivay. TTTJ someway. rrj-St this ivay.
TTCOS how. TTCOS somehow. [TWS (poetic) thus.]
RELATIVE
ocros } as great
oTToVos j as.
otos | of such
OTTOIOS J kind as.
fj\iKos | of such
oTnyAiKos J age as.
ov, OTTOV where.
oQev, OTTO^CV
whence.
ot, oTTOt whither.
ore,
jyvtKa, OTrrjviKa, at
which time.
^, OTTT; which way.
ws, OTTWS as.
1. Observe that some correlative forms are lacking,
having been supplanted by other words. Thus, evQdSe or
evravda is the usual word for here; o>Se and oimw? thus
have crowded out the earlier (Epic and poetic) TO>?.
NOTE. The indefinite relative pronouns, adjectives, and adverbs
may be made more indefinite by adding ow, 817, or SYJ TTOTC- thus
GKTTIS ow (or OOTIO-OW), 6oTto--8r;-7roTe, or even cxTTLa-Brj-TTOT-ovv who-
so-ever.
NUMERALS
NUMERALS
152. The Greek numerals are as follows :
SIGN
CARDINAL
ORDINAL
ADVERB
1
a'
els, fJiCa, ev, one
irpwros, first
aira^, once
2
P'
8t)o, two
Sevrepos, second
Sis, twice
3
Y'
rpeis, Tpta
rpiros
rpis
4
8'
TTTapS, TTTttpa
rerapTOs
TcrpaKis
5
e'
1TVT
TT^HTTTOS
ITCVTCIKIS
6
$'
||
6KTOS
e^aKis
'7
r
lirrd
epSo^os
lirraKis
8
t]'
OKTtO
6-ySoos
OKTO.KIS
9
e'
Ivvea
varos
4vdKlS
10
i'
Sfaa
ScKaros
SCKUKIS
11
ia'
cvSeKa
evSe'Karos
IvSeKUKlS
12
1 P'
8w8cKa
Sa)8eKaros
SwScKaKis
13
l-y'
Tpeis Kal 8Ka (or
rpiros Kal ScKaros
.etc.
Tpl(TKaiSKa)
14
18'
TTTaps Kal 8Ka (or
Te'rapros Kal SCKUTOS
15
ie'
7rVTKai8eKa
ir(jnrTOS Kal 8cKaros
16
iS'
KKaC8eKa
CKTOS Kal ScKaros
17
'
lirraKaiSeKa
epSofjios Kal ScKaros
18
IT,'
OKTtOKaiSfKtt
6*y8oos Kal Se'KdTos
19
16'
evveaKaiScKa
cvaros Kal 8eKaros
20
K'
t'KO<Tl(v)
elKOCTTOS
etKoa-aKis
30
\'
rpiaKOvra
TpiaKOO-TOS
rpiaKovraKis
40
n'
TTTap(XKOVTa
TTTapaKOO-TOS
TCTTapaKovraKis
50
v'
irevTf^KOVTa
TrVTT)KO(rT6s
irevTTjKOVTaKis
60
r
^KOVTO.
I^TJKO(TT6s
4|T,KOVTdKlS
70
o'
e(38o(jiT|KovTa
lp8op.T|KO(rT6s
IpSofJiriKovraKis
80
ir'
o-y8oT|KOVTa
o-ySoriKoarTOS
6-y8<>T|KOVTa.KlS
90
q'
VV<]KOVTa
VVTJKO<TT6s
VVT|KOVTaKlS
100
p'
KttTOV
KaTO(TT6s
CKaTovraKis
200
<r'
SiaKocrioi, ai, a
SiaKOCTlOCTTOS
SiaKocriaKis
300
T'
TpLaKOCTLOL, ai, a
rpiaKoa-ioo-TOs
etc.
400
v'
TerpaKocrLoi, ai, a
TCTpaKOOTlOO-TOS
500
f
irVTaKO(rioi, ai, a
irevraKocrioo-TOS
94
NUMERALS
SIGN
CARDINAL
ORDINAL
600
700
800
900
1000
2000
3000
10000
20000
100000
/y
,P
cu, a
farrcucdotoi, at, a
OKTdKoo-ioi, ai, a
vai<6<rioi, at, a
xtXioi, ai, a
SiorxtXioi, ai, a
rpio-xtXioi, ai, a
p.upioi, ai, a
Si<r|xvpioi
OKTdKOO-lOO-TOS
vaKO(rio<TT6s
fiVplOO-TOS
ADVERB
XiXiaKis
etc.
(xvpiaKis
etc.
153. For 21, 22, etc., 31, 32, etc., we have et? teal
teal el? or elicocriv et?, etc. In the ordinals we have
for 22d, etc., 32d, etc., Seure/oo? KOI eltcoo-rds and el/coo-rbs
KOI Sevre/x)?, etc., but for 21st, 31st, etc., always el? /cal
et/cocrro?, el? /cal TpidicocrTos, etc.
154. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, 38, 39, etc., are com-
monly expressed by ez>o? (or Svolv) SeWre? (ivanting) el'/coert,
etc.: thus vavvl ftta? Seoixrais TrevTrjfcovra with 49 ships.
155. Declension of Numerals. The cardinal numbers
from 5 to 100 inclusive are indeclinable. The cardinals
from 200 upwards and all the ordinals are declined regu-
( 22) and
(Aeolic), and
152 a. Homer has for four
for nine times etvaKis.
b. Herodotus has rfoo-epes (4), dvtideKO. (12), Tpi^Kovra (30),
(80), 5i77-6(Tioi (200), rpi77/c6(Ttoi (300), and efvaros, e/vd/cts (Attic ci/aros,
155 a. Beside the feminine pia Homer has also fa, i'^s, t'f/, Tav, and once
the dat. sing. neut. 1$. He uses 5tfo, or 5tfo>, indeclinably, and he has
also a longer adjective form, dual 5oiw, plur. 5oto/, -a/, -a, declined like
the plural of dya66s ( 117).
b. Herodotus often uses dto indeclinably. If declined, he has gen.
Suwv, dat.
NUMERALS 95
larly like adjectives in -09 ( 117). The cardinal num-
bers from 1 to 4 are declined as follows :
one
?wo
three
four
X.
els
p.Ca
eV
N.A.
Svo
N.
rpeis
rpia
rerrapes
re'TTapa
G.
evos
p.ias
evos
G.D.
Svoiv
G.
rpiwv
rpicov
TTTap(OV
TTTdpO)V
1).
evC
fjua
M
sc
al
imetimes
so used
D.
TpKTl
rpio-i
T6TTapO-(,
re'TTapo-i
A.
'eVa
[xiav
g v indeclinably
A.
rpeis
rpia
Terrapas
rerrapa
1. Like el? are declined otSet? and ^Set? wo owe. These
are sometimes declined also in the plural : thus
156. Notation. Observe that in notation the letters
of the alphabet (including the three obsolete letters,
= p vau ( 2 a), 9=9 koppa, and ^ sampi) are employed
in order, the first nine for units, the second nine for tens,
and the remaining nine for hundreds. For thousands the
same characters are used again but with the stroke under
the letter : thus avira '= 1481.
NOTE. The books of Homer are usually numbered by using the
letters of the ordinary alphabet consecutively, the capitals being
employed for the Iliad and the small letters for the Odyssey. Thus,
K stands for Book 10 of the Iliad, A for Book 11 of the Odyssey.
96 VERBS
VERBS
157. The verb distinguishes in its inflection Voice,
Mode, Person, Number, and Tense.
1. By its Voice it indicates whether the subject acts
(active), acts for himself (middle), or is acted upon
(passive).
2. By its Mode it indicates the manner in which the
action is thought of : for example, as a fact or as a
possibility.
3. By its Person it indicates whether its subject is the
speaker, or some second person spoken to, or some third
person or thing spoken of.
4. By its Number it indicates how many persons or
things are concerned in its action.
5. By its Tense it indicates the time of the action.
VOICE
158. The Greek verb has three voices, Active, Middle,
and Passive (see 236).
1. The passive voice has a separate form of inflection
only in the aorist and future ; elsewhere the middle form
is used both for the middle and passive.
2. Many verbs, from their meaning, are used only in
the active.
3. Deponent Verbs. Likewise many verbs have only a
middle (or passive) form. Such verbs are called Depo-
nent. Those which have the middle form throughout
are called Middle Deponents ; those which have the
passive form for the aorist (and future) are called Passive
Deponents.
MODE 97
MODE
159. Greek has four modes : the Indicative (the mode
of fact), the Subjunctive and Optative (the modes of
possibility), and the Imperative (the mode of command).
These modes are called the Finite Modes.
1. Beside the four finite modes are the Infinitive and Par-
ticiple, which are properly verbal nouns (although some-
times called modes). The infinitive represents the action
of the verb as a substantive : thus elvai to 50, the act of
being. The participle represents the action of the verb
as an adjective : thus o Trapwv /caipos the present occasion.
2. To these must be added the Verbal Adjectives in -TO?
and -reo9, of which the former denotes what has been or
may be done (thus Xvro? loosed or loosable), and the lat-
ter, what needs doing (thus Xfre'o? needing to be loosed).
160. Mode Suffix. The subjunctive and the optative
have a special mode suffix. The subjunctive has a long
vowel -co- or -77- ; the optative has -i- or -in-.
1. The use of o> or 77 is determined by the same rules
as that of o and e ( 169). The mode sign -in- is regularly
used in the singular active of -pi verbs and contract verbs ;
elsewhere -L- is used. In the third plural of the optative
-te- appears as the mode sign.
NOTE. In the singular active of contract verbs -t- very rarely is
found as mode sign, while in classical Greek -try- was probably never
used in the optative dual or plural of any verbs. (See also 199,
note, and 233, note.)
2. Verbs whose stem ends in a vowel usually contract
the mode suffix with the final vowel of the stem ( 170,
2-3 ; 200, 1 ; 211, 1-2 ; 233, 1-2).
160 a. Homer often forms the subjunctive with a short vo-wel (o or e),
especially in the aorist ; never, however, in the present of -o> verbs ( 169).
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 7
98 VERBS
TENSE
161. Greek has seven tenses :
Present, Imperfect,
Future, Aorist,
Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect.
NOTE. The Greek aorist corresponds closely to the English past
tense : thus ciroirpra did. The other tenses correspond to the same
tenses in English or Latin.
1. The tenses of the indicative are divided into :
(1) Primary (or Principal) tenses, expressing present
or future time : the present, future, perfect, and future
perfect.
(2) Secondary (or Past) tenses, expressing past time :
the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect.
TENSE SYSTEMS .
162. The various forms of the Greek verb group them-
selves into certain Tense Systems, each of which is formed
on a common Tense Stem. The tense systems of the Greek
verb are as follows :
the Present system including the Present and Imperfect,
the Future system " Future Active and Middle,
the First Aorist system " 1st Aorist Active and Middle,
the Second Aorist system " 2d Aorist Active and Middle,
the First Perfect system " 1st Perf. and 1st Plup. Act.,
the Second Perfect system " 2d Perf. and 2d Plup. Act.,
the Perfect Middle system " Perf., Plup., and Fut. Perf. Mid:,
the First Passive system " 1st Aor. and 1st Fut. Pass.,
the Second Passive system " 2d Aor. and 2d Fut. Pass.
1. The tenses called second differ from the correspond-
ing first tenses in form, but they usually have like meaning,
TENSE 99
unless, as rarely happens, the same verb has both first and
second forms of the same tense in use at the same time.
(See 207, note 3.)
2. Principal Parts. The " principal parts " of a verb
are the first person singular indicative of every system
used in it. Thus,
TraiSevco educate, TraiSeva-a), e7rai$evo-a, TreTraiSevtca, vre-
eTraiSevOrjv. See 236.
leave, A,en/r&), eXmov, \e\oL7ra, \e\eijJLfjiai, ItefyOijv.
{3ov\o/jLai wish, f3ov\r)<ro[jLai, /3e/3ouA,?7/<teu, e^ov\rjOr]v (pas-
sive deponent, 158, 3).
yfrfVOfjuu become, yevqa-ofjiai, eyevdfjirjv, yejevrjfjiaL (middle
deponent, 158, 3).
163. Theme. That part of the Greek verb which is
common to all its forms is called the Theme (or by some
the Verb Stem). From this theme the various tense-stems
are formed : thus ice\evu> order, theme /ce\ev-, present stem
K\ev%:, future stem /ceXei/crg:, aorist stem /ee\eu<ra-, etc.
For the formation of the various tense-systems see
186-234.
1. According as the verb theme ends in a vowel, a mute,
or a liquid ( 12), verbs are classed as Vowel Verbs, Mute
Verbs, or Liquid Verbs.
164. Irregular Verbs. Sometimes, when two or more
verbs happen to coincide in meaning, each is used only in
certain tenses, usually in such a way as to supplement
each other.
Thus, Tpe%(D run is used only in the present system ;
in the other tenses another verb from the theme Bpa/jL-
corresponds in meaning to rpe^co ; so Bpafjiovfiai, shall run,
ran, etc. In the same way, corresponding in
100 VERBS
meaning to o/xw see (theme o/aa-), we have otyofiai shall see
(theme OTT-), and el&ov saw (theme -). Such verbs are
often called Irregular Verbs.
165. Primitive and Denominative Verbs. A Primitive
verb forms its tense stems from a root ; a Denominative
verb from a longer theme, originally a noun stem ( 269).
Thus, rto) (root rt-) give what is due is a primitive verb,
while TL/jLa> (-ao>) honor is a denominative verb, derived
from a noun, rlpr) honor.
XOTE. Most primitive verbs have themes of one syllable. (See
270, note.)
PERSON AND NUMBER
166. There are three persons : First, Second, and
Third.
The Greek verb, like the Greek noun, has three num-
bers ( 74) : Singular, Dual, and Plural.
In the inflection of the verb, the person and number
are shown by certain endings, attached to the tense stem,
which are called Personal Endings.
1. The active and the middle voice have each a different
set of personal endings.
The passive voice has no endings of its own, but in the
aorist it employs the ending of the active, and in the
future those of the middle.
2. The indicative mood has two sets of endings in each
voice, one for primary tenses and the other for secondary
tenses ( 161, 1).
3. The subjunctive mood employs the same endings as
the primary tenses of the indicative.
4. The optative mood has the same endings as the
secondary tenses of the indicative.
PERSON AND NUMBER 101
167. The forms of the personal endings may be seen
from the following table :
Active Middle
INDICATIVE INDICATIVE INDICATIVE INDICATIVE
(primary tenses) (secondary tenses) (primary tenses) (secondary tenses)
AND AND AND AND
SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE OPTATIVE
Sing. 1. -|u -v -|j.ai -jiT)v
2. -s (for -<ri), -<r0a, -0a -s, -<r8a -<rai -<ro
3. -<ri (for -TI) -rat -TO
Dual 2. -TOV -TOV -<r0ov -<r0ov
3. -TOV -TTJV -0-00V -OT0T]V
. 1. -|16V (for -/ue) -J16V -H.600, -)160a
2. -T6 -T6 -0-06 -0-06
3. -VO-l (for -vri) -V, -Q-ttV -VTttl -VTO
Active Middle
IMPERATIVE
-<ro
-0-00)
-0-00V
-0-0WV
-(T06
Sing. 2.
None or -0i
3.
-Ttt
Dual 2.
-TOV
3.
-TWV
Plur. 2.
-T
3.
-VTCOV
INFINITIVE
(-vcu) -ev, -vai -o-0ai
PARTICIPLE
-VT- (perfect -OT- and -oo--) -|i6vo-
For the declension of participles see 129-131.
VERBALS
TO- and -T6o-
NOTE 1. For the first person dual the first person plural is almost
always used. A special ending, -//,e0oi/, in the middle, is rarely found.
NOTE 2. The poets often have -/xecr0a for -/xe0a : thus e'Aawo/xea&x
we are being driven.
102 VERBS
NOTE 3. The present third plural active of -/xt verbs has the
ending -avert: thus riOe-acri they put (for *n-0e-av<n), tcrracrt they erect
(for *i-oTa-avcri).
NOTE 4. An ending of the third plural imperative rarely found
is -Toxrav (middle -o-0to<rav) : thus i-Taxrav let them go. In later Greek
this ending often occurs.
INFLECTION
168. There are in Greek two slightly different ways of
inflecting verbs, called respectively (from the ending of the
first person singular active) the -co form and the -jit form.
169. The -co Form of Inflection. In the -co form of
inflection the stem ends in the variable vowel ( 14).
Before p or v, and in the optative mode, o is employed,
elsewhere e : thus \vQpev we loose, Xure you loose, Xvoi/jiev
optative ; so also \VOVCTL, for *\vovcn, they loose.
1. To the -co form of inflection belong all futures and
the present, the imperfect, and the second aorist with
variable vowel ( 210).
167 a. In Homer -<r0a is more frequent than in Attic : thus
from Tl0T)/j.i put; 0?7-<r0a, from <f>rjnl say ; so sometimes in the subjunc-
tive: eet\r)-<rda (Attic etfAfls), from <?0e?Xw wish.
b. Homer sometimes has -rov for -Tt]v and -<r6ov for -ad-rjv in the third
person dual of secondary tenses.
c. Homer often has -v for -<rav as an ending of the third plural
active, before which the preceding vowel is always short: thus epa-v
they went, %<f)a-v they said, erpafa-v they were reared (Attic e/3r)-<ra.i',
d. Ionic often has the endings -arat, -aro, for -VTCU, -VTO (cf. 14, 2, note).
In the optative these endings are always found ; often in the perfect and
pluperfect indicative, and sometimes in the present and imperfect of -/
verbs : thus ^ov\ol-aro (Attic /SouXot-iro), from /SotfXo/xcu wish ; rerpd0-arai
( 226 a), from r/>^0w nourish ; rifle-area (Attic n'tfe-vrcu), from r/077/u put.
e. For an ending of the infinitive Homer has also -pevai or (usually
before vowels) -fj.ev (for the accent see 185, 1 a): thus 7re/x7re'-yue/>cu or
', as well as irtfjiTreiv to send.
FORMS OF INFLECTION (GENERAL) 103
170. The -|u Form of Inflection. In the -/u form of
inflection (which is older than the -co form) the endings
are added directly to the stem without the variable
vowel . The endings retain more nearly their original
form than in the -co form of inflection.
1. A final vowel of the stem usually has its long form
in the singular of the indicative active ; elsewhere the
short form: thus Ti0i\-fu I put, riOe-pep we put; tVrr|-/LU
I cause to stand, torfe-fte? we cause to stand.
2. In the subjunctive a final a, e, or o of the stem is
contracted with the mode suffix : thus Ti08>, ri0r\s, etc.,
for T4#io, ( n#'Q9. In contraction, arj (a?;) gives rj (77) and
077 gives ft> (contrary to 18, 6 and 19, 2): thus larr^ai
for laTO,T\Tai and St&o? for StSor)?.
3. In the optative the i of the mode suffix contracts
with the final vowel of the stem ( 160, 2) : thus TiO^v,
TiOtlpev, from TiQj]^i put.
4. In a few forms -pi verbs have the inflection of con-
tract verbs in -eco or -oco : thus regularly impf. act. eS&ovv,
e&ibovs, eoYSou, from BiSco/jLi give, and ertfets, eriOei, from
TiQripi put ; so also impv. SiBov, ridei. Sometimes also 2d
sing. nOels, and opt. TiQolro, nOolvro, Oolro.
NOTES ox THE PERSONAL ENDINGS
NOTE 1. Primary Endings of the Active. The endings -/xt and -at
(for -rt) are found only in -fja verbs. In tenses of the -w inflection the
first person singular active of primary tenses ends in -co (Avoo loose).
170 a. Homer often retains the endings -/ (1st per.) and -o-t (3d per.) in
the subjunctive : thus ^0Ao>/u, edeXyri (Attic ^0Aw, &?Arj), from e0Aw wish.
b. In the third plural Homer often has -v for -aav ( 167 c); the
preceding vowel is always short : thus &v-ie-v they gave heed, eQa-v they
said (Attic ^vv-ie-aav^ e^Tj-o-ai').
170, 4 a. In Ionic, -m verbs follow the contract system of inflection in
a few more forms than iu Attic : thus 5i5o?s, 5t5o?, r^et, ret.
104 VERBS
The second person singular was probably originally *Ave-o-i, which
became *Auet ( 37), and later -s was added from the secondary tenses,
making Avets, to distinguish this form from the third singular Avet,
for Ave-o-t (originally *Aue-ri, 37).
In -van, the primary ending of the third person plural active, v is
regularly dropped before <r ( 34), and the preceding vowel is length-
ened : thus Avov<rt they loose is for *Xvo-vcn (-VTI), AeAvKdor they have
loosed is for *Ae-AvKa-ixn, Ti0e'd(ri they put is for *Ti0e-av(n ( 167,
note 3).
In the second singular of the imperative an ending -s is sometimes
found : thus o^t's from ef^w have, 8o's from 8i'8w/u.i, give.
NOTE 2. Secondary Endings of the Active. Of the secondary
endings, -v (3d plural) belongs regularly to the -co form of inflection,
and -o-av to the -fu form. The first person singular active of the
optative mode uses the primary ending -pi when the mode sign is -i-
( 160, 1) : thus Xvoifu, Avcrat/xt.
NOTE 3. The Endings of the Middle. In the endings -<rai and -cro
of the second person singular middle the a- is regularly dropped ( 37),
and the vowels contracted. Thus, from Avco loose we have pres. indie.
AUT; or Auet (for *Ave-<Ttu), pres. subj. Xvy (for *Ai5?;-o-at), imperf. indie.
eAuov (for *eAi)e-(ro), aor. indie. eXvcra) (for *eAvo-a-o-o).
In the optative the a- is dropped, but the vowels do not contract :
thus XVOL-O for *Auoi-<ro. In the present and imperfect of the -JJ.L verbs,
the <T of these endings is usually retained : thus riOe-o-ai, ert'^e-cro,
from TiOqfU put.
NOTE 4. If we place side by side the presents indicative of early
Greek (Doric) <d-/ju (Attic <>T-/X,I ) say and Latin inquam, we shall
see how closely the present endings of Greek and Latin agree.
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. <d-/u inqua-m
<f>a.-p.cs
inqui-mus
2. <f>d-o-i inqui-s
(j>a-T
inqui-tis
3. (j>d-TL inqui-t
<f>0.-VTL
inqui-unt
170 c. (note 3). In Ionic the second person middle drops the a- of the
ending, but the vowels usually remain uncontracted : thus X&recu, eXi-eo,
Awrao, etc., from Xuw loose. Herodotus contracts -17011 to -77, and some-
times -eo to -cu: thus Trei8r\ (2d pers. subj. mid.), from 7rei'0w persuade;
(impv. mid.), from d^x w hold up.
AUGMENT 105
AUGMENT
171. The augment is the sign of past time. It belongs
therefore only to the past or secondary tenses of the
indicative ; namely, imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect.
The augment has two forms, Syllabic and Temporal.
172. Syllabic Augment. Verbs beginning with a con-
sonant augment by prefixing e-. Such augment is called
syllabic, since it increases the number of syllables in the
word: thus \vco loose, imperf. '<i-\vov was loosing; ypd^co
write, aor. t-ypatya wrote ; pluperf . i-ye-ypd(f>ri had written.
1. Words beginning with p double it after the augment
( 23) : thus e-pprTTToy, imperfect of pLTrra) throw.
2. A few verbs which originally began with a con-
sonant, but which now begin with a vowel, still have
syllabic augment. The most common of these are :
break, aor. eaa (for *e-/raa).
avSdv(0 please, aor. e-aSov (for *e-o-/ra8oi/).
av-oiya) open, impf. av-epyov (for *di/-e-/:oiyoi>) .
ea> (-aoj) permit, impf. etcov (for *e-o-e/raov?).
accustom, impf. eWi^ov (for
roll, aor. et'Atfa (for
\KCO draw, impf. el\/cov (for *e-o-eAKoi/).
follow, impf. elTro^v (f or *c-o-7ro/xr;i/) .
L tvork, impf. elpya^d/jLTjv (for *e-/re/3ya^o/xr;
creep, impf. elp^rov (for *e-o-ep7roi/) .
171 a. In Homer and in lyric poetry the augment is often omitted :
thus (Bijv went, eXacre drove, e%e held (Attic e/^j/, ^Xatre, e!%e).
b. In Herodotus the temporal augment is often omitted ; the syllabic
augment only in the pluperfect and in iteratives ( 191 b).
172, 1 a. In Homer other liquids besides p may be doubled after the
syllabic augment: thus e\\aj3e took, f \i\ia0e learned (cf. 22 a).
106 VERBS
(-ao>), entertain, impf. e/ariW (for *e-/re<rriaov).
have, hold, impf. el^oi/ (for *-o-exoi/).
let go, aor. (dual) elroz/ (for *e-o--rov).
(-a<) see, impf. ecopwv (for
(-eo)) push, impf. e&dovv " (for
-eoyu.6u) 5l^, impf. eayvov/JLrjv (for
(eX-) to&e, aor. etXoz; (for *-yrcAoj/?).
(18-) sea, aor. etcra ( 30) (for *e-o-S-o-a).
(t'S-) see, aor. el&ov (for
NOTE 1. Observe that 6pw (-aw) and avofyw, in addition to the
syllabic augment, lengthen the first vowel of the stem.
NOTE 2. The consonants at the beginning of most of these words
may still be seen in other languages. For example, with e&^w, eAKw,
CTTO/XCU, e8-, IB-, may be compared Latin suesco, sulcus, sequor, sedeo,
video.
173. Temporal Augment. Verbs beginning with a
vowel augment by lengthening the first vowel. Such
augment is called temporal, since it usually increases the
time occupied in pronouncing the syllable : thus r\\avvov,
imperf. from t\avvw drive ; oS/^oo-a, aor. from Ofjivv/ju swear;
i/cerevov, impf. from i/cereva) supplicate. The vowels a and d
become rj : thus ^70^, impf. from ajco lead; r\0\ovv, impf.
from d#Xft) (-eco) contend. The other long vowels remain
unchanged : thus T\yov/jirjv, impf. from i\joii/jLac (-e'o//.eu)
lead.
1. Diphthongs lengthen the first vowel : thus r^o-6avo-
, impf. from diaOdvo^aL perceive ; TJtfabz>, impf. from
guess; a/crlpov, impf. from ol/crfpco pity ; T\\>pio-/cov,
impf. from typicr/co) find. But ov-, and a- when it is an
apparent diphthong ( 6, 3), remain unchanged : thus
ovra&v, impf. of ovrd^co wound, AKOV, impf. of uca>
yield.
AUGMENT 107
174. Augment of Compound Verbs. Verbs compounded
with a preposition take their augment after the preposi-
tion: thus elcr-tfapov impf. of ela-^epco brine/ in; Trpoa-r^ov
impf. of Trpoa-dya) lead to.
1. But sometimes compounds, of which the simple verb
is not commonly used, are augmented at the beginning,
as if they were not compounds at all : thus ij^tWa, aor. of
clothe : so often i/caOrjfjirjv, impf. of /cdO-rj/jiaL sit.
175. Denominative verbs formed from nouns already
compounded take their augment at the beginning. Thus,
the imperfect of ol/coSopco (-eo>) build (from ot'/co-So'yuo? house-
builder) is toKobofjiovv ; the imperfect of evavnovfjiaL (-doyiiat)
oppose (from eWzmo? opposite) is i\vaimov^r]v.
1. But since there are so many verbs compounded with
prepositions, some confusion arises in the case of verbs
derived from compound nouns whose first part is a prepo-
sition. Thus, the imperfect of eTnararw (-eo>) oversee is
eTreo-Tdrovv, and of /cartjjopa) (-e<a>) accuse is /carT]y6povv,
although both of these are denominative verbs, derived
respectively from eTna-raV??? overseer and Karrjyopos accuser.
NOTE. A few verbs even have two augments, one before and one
after the preposition : thus cu>-e'xo/Aai endure, imperfect I^-CI^O'/AT/I/.
176. Augment of the Pluperfect. The pluperfect takes
no augment except the syllabic : thus i-\e\v/cr) (perf .
Xe'Xu/ca), pluperfect of \va) loose. When the perfect stem
begins with a vowel, the pluperfect has no augment : thus
eardX/crj (perf. ecrraX/ca), pluperfect of crre\\ay send;
el\tj<j)r) (perf. et'X^a), from Xa/u/SaVa) take ; w^eXrj/c^ (perf.
&(f)e\r]Ka), from &><eXw (-e<) help.
NOTE. But verbs with "Attic Reduplication" ( 179) regularly
take augment in the pluperfect : thus TI/O^KO^, plup. of aKrJKoa have heard.
176 a. In Herodotus the Attic reduplication is never augmented.
108 VERBS
REDUPLICATION
177. Reduplication belongs regularly to the perfect
system (including the pluperfect and future perfect),
where it denotes completed action. It is sometimes found
in the present and the second aorist systems. It consists
in doubling the sound at the beginning of the word.
178. Reduplication of the Perfect. In the perfect, verbs
beginning with a consonant repeat that consonant with e :
thus \v-co loose, perf. Ae-Ai^a. A rough mute in redupli-
cation is changed to the corresponding smooth ( 40):
thus Ovco sacrifice, perf. fi-Ovica.
1. In verbs beginning with two consonants (except a
mute and a liquid), a double consonant, or p, the redupli-
cation consists of e- merely : thus e-^eva/jLai, perf. of
tyevSofjLai, lie; e-crraXica, perf. of o-reAAo) send; <i-ppi<f>a ( 23),
perf. of piTTTQ) tlirow ; but "yi-ypafya, perf. of ypd^w write.
NOTE. But yv- is usually reduplicated in the perfect by means
of e : thus e-yi/ooKa, perf. of yi-yi/wo-Kw know.
2. Five verbs reduplicate with et-. These are :
\afjL/3dvco take, perf. et-
\ayxdvo) get by lot, "
\eyco (only in composition) collect, "
(/*/>-) " e't-fJLaprai it is fated.
(<?/>-, prj-) say " et-prjica.
NOTE. The explanation of this reduplication is very uncertain.
See, however, et/aw and /mpojuat in the Verb List, 729.
3. Verbs beginning with a short vowel reduplicate by
lengthening the vowel ; a diphthong lengthens the first
vowel ; a long vowel remains unchanged : thus ^%a, perf.
REDUPLICATION 109
of o/yo) lead; r\prj/ca, of aipa> (-eeo) take; ox^eX^/ca, of
179. * Attic Reduplication.* A few verbs beginning
with a, 6, or o, followed by a single consonant, reduplicate
by repeating the first vowel and consonant, and length-
ening the first vowel of the theme : thus aX-rjXupa, aX-
ri\ifjLfiaL^ perf. of aXe^xu anoint; eX-^Xa/ca, e\-rf\.a^aL^
of eXavvco drive; op-a)pv%a, op-copvy/jLai, of opvrra) dig.
180. Reduplication with e- before a Vowel. The appar-
ently vowel verbs, mentioned in 172, 2, which originally
began with a consonant reduplicate regularly, but the
disappearance of the consonant leaves only e- (which is
often contracted with the following vowel) : thus edya
(originally *pe-pd/a), perf. of ayvv/ju break; elfca (for
*0-e-ere/<;a), perf. of ny/u send, etc.
181. Reduplication of Compound Verbs. In compound
verbs, and in verbs derived from compound nouns, the
reduplication has the same place as the augment ( 174-
175): thus ctTro-Kt-Kpi/ca, perf. of a7ro-/cpfvco separate;
a, perf. of %eipo-Tov(o (-eo>) elect.
182. Reduplication of the Present. A few verbs redu-
plicate in the present ( 193, 3 ; 197, 1) by repeating the
first consonant with i : thus yi-yvcoa-KO) knoiv, ri-OijfjiL put.
183. Reduplication of the Second Aorist. Sometimes
in Attic (often in Homer) the second aorist is formed by
reduplication. See 208, 1 and a.
179 a. In Homer the "Attic" reduplication is found in more verbs
than in Attic, sometimes without lengthening the first vowel of the theme :
thus ep-tpnrro, from tpelirw overthrow ( 219, note 2). Cf. in Attic
(infin. dy-ayeiv'), 2d aor. of #70? lead.
110 VERBS
ACCENT OF THE VERB
184. The accent of verbs (both simple and compound)
is regularly recessive ( 64).
1. But in compound verbs the written accent cannot
recede beyond the augment : thus irdpeL^i be present, Traprj
was present.
185. Infinitives, participles, and verbal adjectives, since
they are in reality nouns ( 159, 1 and 2), do not come
under the rule of accent for verbs.
1. The accent of the infinitive and participle in each
tense and voice must usually be learned by observation ;
but present and future infinitives and participles of the -co
form ( 169, 1) are recessive in accent, and all infinitives
in -vai take their written accent on the penult.
2. The verbal adjective in -TO? takes its written accent
on the final syllable : thus Xfro?, \vrrj, \vrov loosed, gen.
\vrov, etc. The verbal adjective in -reo? always has the
acute accent on the penult : thus Xureo?, \vred, \vreov
needing to be loosed, gen. \vreov, etc.
NOTE. Contract verbs ( 199) are not an exception to the rule of
184, since their accent in the uncontracted form was recessive. Some
other apparent exceptions in accent are to be explained by contraction.
See 200,1; 210, 1-2; 233, 1-2.
FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS
186. The various tense stems are formed from the theme
by means of a tense suffix (or prefix, sometimes both).
In primitive verbs ( 165) we usually find also a variation
185, 1 a. The epic infinitive in -/wri/cu or -/j.ev ( 167 e) always has its
written accent on the syllable preceding the ending : thus 56/ievcu to give,
to lead.
FORMATION OF TENSE STEMS
111
in the vowel of the theme ( 13-14): thus pres. TT\K-CO
melt, aor. pass. e-raK-rjv ; Trcr-o^iat fly, 2d aor. e ITT-O^V ;
Xi7r-&> leave, perf. Xe-Xoi7r-a, 2d aor. e-XiTT-oz'.
1. Verbs which show a variation between long and
short vowels (13) usually have the short vowel in the
second aorist ; elsewhere the long form : thus TTJ/C-O), TTJ<W,
etc. melt, but 2d aor. pass. e-roiK-ijv.
2. Verbs which show the vowel variation o, e, (a) ( 14)
regularly have in the second aorist, and often in the
perfect middle (cf. 224, note), the form with no vowel
or with a ( 14, 1), in the second perfect the form with o,
and elsewhere the form with e. Examples are :
PRESENT
/eX7T-T< steal
2o AORIST
FUTURE 2D PERFECT
K\tyco K-ic\0(f>-a
kill tcTtv-a) e-KTOv-a (Epic) e-i
(for *KTCV-IO>, 39, 4)
leave Xcn/ro) Xe-Xot?r-a e-Xnr-ov
( 14, 2)
Qtipa) destroy fyOtp-G) e-<f)0op-a
(for .*V. 39, 4) PERFECT MJDDLE
187. Vowel Verbs. In most verbs whose theme ends
in a vowel, this vowel is long outside of the present
system. After e, i, or p, an a becomes a, otherwise rj (15):
thus Tl/JLw (-act)) honor, rl^aw, ert/zT|o"a, re-Ti^ica, re-
, eTl/JLr\07]v ; <tX<w (-<u) love, <^tXT|cra), e(>i\i\a-a, etc.;
(-dfo) show, S^Xaxro), eSrfXwcra, etc. ; e'w (-aw) permit,
edcro), etc. ; Spw (-da)) do, Spaao), etc.
188. But some apparently vowel verbs had originally
themes ending in a consonant. Such verbs naturally pre-
112 VERBS
serve the short vowel throughout all their tenses, and, by
analogy, some real vowel verbs do the same : thus reXw
(-, for *Te\o--tft), cf. re'Xo? end) finish, fut. reXo), aor. eYe-
Xcra, perf. re-reXc/ea, etc. : 7eX&> (-cuw), 7eXdo-o/>tat, e^e'Xacra.
1. A few verbs have the short vowel only in certain
tenses : thus alpco (-&>), alpi\crco, etc., but aor. pass.
189. Most verbs which keep the short vowel in all their
tenses ( 188), and, by analogy, some others, have in the
perfect middle and aorist passive (and verbals, 235)
a a at the end of the theme : thus reXw (-<w) finish,
perf. mid. rereXecr-yLtat, aor. pass. ereXccr-^T;^ ; so also
a/covco hear has r)fcov<y/jLai, and r}tcova-0r)v ; /eeXeuo) order has
and e/ce\eva'0r)v.
NOTE. As most of these verbs originally had themes ending in o-
or a lingual mute ( 26 ; 27, 3), there is nothing strange about the a
in the perfect middle and aorist passive.
190. in Tense Formation. Some verbs vary between
themes with e (77) and themes without e (77). Usually
both themes are not found together in the same tense, but
even this sometimes happens : thus /3ouXo/*at (/3ot>X-) ivish,
fut. {3ov\r\(TOfjLai (ySofXc-), aor. e/3ov\r\6ijv ; /JLCVCO (/-te^-)
remain, perf. yue/-teVr|/ea (/-tez'C-) ; aladdvqjjiai (euV0-) per-
ceive, fut. al<jQi\cropai (alcrdt-), aor. yaOdfJuiv (atV0-) ;
So/ceo (-eo)) (So/cc-), fut. Sofft) (So/o). No rules in this
matter can be laid down, but the eccentricities of such
verbs may be learned from the Verb List, 729.
191 a. 9 in Tense Formation. In Homer, and sometimes in the Attic
poets (very rarely in prose), a few verbs have forms from a present (or
aorist) stem made with the suffix -6- (-e0g: or -a0i:): thus <?-5iwK-a6o-i>
(5tw/coj pursue), /xe-r-e-/cf-a0o-j' (xiw 0o), 0Xe7-'6w (0X^yw burn), e-crx-0o-f
(e X a> hold).
191 b. Iterative Forms. In Homer and Herodotus iterative forms
THE PRESENT SYSTEM 113
THE PRESENT SYSTEM
(PRESENT AND IMPERFECT)
192. Verbs may be divided into five classes, according
to the way in which they form their present stem. These
classes are : (1) the simple class, (2) the r class,
(3) the i class, (4) the v class, (5) the O-K class.
193. The Simple Class. The simple class employs for
the present stem the simple theme, with or without the
variable vowel ( 169). Verbs with the variable vowel
show -ft> in the first person singular of the present indica-
tive active: thus Xeyo> (theme Xey-, present stem Xe7;).
Verbs without the variable vowel are -pi verbs ( 170):
thus (?7/u say (theme $77-, </>a-, present stem $77-, ca-).
1. Primitive verbs whose themes show the interchange
of long and short vowels ( 13) usually have in the present
the form with the long vowel ( 186, 1): thus rr[/ca) melt
(theme rrj/c- and ra/c-), Xu&> loose (theme Xi>, Xu-). The -pi
verbs, however, have the long vowel only in the singular
of the indicative active (see 170, 1).
2. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel varia-
tion o, e(a) ( 14), usually have in the present the form
with e (or et or eu, 14, 2) : thus TT^TTCO send (theme 7re//,7r-,
-, present stem 7reyii7r:), Xe/7r&> leave (theme
-, Xi?r-, present stem Xet7r:), favyco flee (theme
-, present stem 0euy;). See 186, 2.
of the imperfect and aorist are found, to denote a repeated past action.
They are formed by adding the iterative suffix -aKe- to the tense stem of
the imperfect or aorist: thus ^ve-a-Ko-v kept remaining (/JL^VU remain),
-v kept doing (71-010) (-^w) do), <j>vye-<rKo-v used to flee, aorist
w flee) . These forms are inflected like the imperfect, and seldom
have an augment ( 171 a-b}.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 8
114 VERBS
NOTE. Here belong also the verbs TrXew sail, ^eco pour, Oea) run,
i/co swim, TTVCW breathe, pcwjlow, whose themes end in -ev- (for *7rXev-o>,
etc. See 21).
3. A few verbs, mostly -/-u verbs, have reduplication in
the present system ( 182) : thus Ti-drjfii (0e-, #??-) put,
(70^-, yev-, 7^-) become. (CL Latin gi-gno.')
194. The T Class. Some verbs, with stems in TT, /3, or
<, form the present tense stem by adding -T: to the theme
(cf . Latin flee-to) : thus TVTT-TO) strike (theme TUTT-, present
stem Tf7TT:), /ca\v7r-rct) cover (theme /eaXu/3-, 25),
dig (theme 0-/ca<-, 25).
195. The i Class. Many mute and liquid verbs form
their present stem by adding the suffix -t: to the theme
(cf. Latin fac-io), but this suffix almost always combines
in some way with the preceding letters. See 39, and
cf. 292.
1. With K, %, T, 6, the i unites to form TT (Ionic crcr,
22) : thus /crjpvTTO) proclaim (theme fcqpvtc-, present stem
tf7?puTT?:) for */cr)pvK-io) : rapdrrw disturb (theme rapa 1 ^) for
*Tapa X -iu. (See 39, 1.)
2. With 7 and B the i unites to form f ( 39, 2): thus
<r(f)d(i) slay (theme o-<f)ay-) for * a^ay-io) : Trai^co play (theme
for *7rat-ft>.
NOTE 1. Themes in -yy- lose the first y: thus /cAaco (theme
/cAayy-) for */cAayy-i<o.
NOTE 2. In a number of verbs y-t seems to combine into TT :
thus TaTTo) arrange (theme Tay-, cf. Tay-os commander), but a good
many of these words can be shown to have had parallel themes in -K-,
and these probably influenced the rest.
195, 2 a. This form of the present in -f- sometimes gives rise to
uncertainty about the aorist and future. In Homer verbs in -w not
infrequently have in the aorist and future: thus TroXe/ufaJ (7roXe/5-),
THE PRESENT SYSTEM 115
3. With X the i assimilates to form \\ ( 39, 3): thus
ayye\\a) (theme a<yje\-^) for *ayyeX-ico.
4. With v and p the i goes over to the preceding vowel
and unites with it by contraction ( 39, 4) : thus fyaivw show
(theme (f>av-) for *(f)av-io) : /cpfvco distinguish (theme
for *Kpiv-ia) : aTreipo) sow (theme <TTT/O-) for *o"7re/3-t&>.
NOTE. A few apparently vowel verbs form their present with
this suffix: thus K<UO> (for *Ka/r-t-w, theme /cav-, 21) burn, KAauo (for
*/cAa/r-i-<o, theme K\av, 21) weep.
196. The v Class. A number of verbs form their
present stem by adding to the theme a suffix containing v
(cf. Latin cer-n-o^).
1. Suffix -i. Some verbs add i alone : thus re^-vco
cut (theme re/>t-).
2. Suffix -a^e-- A good many verbs add -ai>T- : thus
alaO-dvofjiai perceive (theme alo-0-).
If the last syllable of the theme is short, a sympathetic
nasal (y with a lingual, JJL with a labial, 7 with a palatal)
appears in the theme : thus ^avO-dvw learn (theme fta#-),
take (theme Xa/3-), \ay%-dva) get by lot (theme
3. Suffix -ra-, -VT}- ( 170, 1). A very few verbs, mostly
poetic, take a suffix -z>a-, -vrj- ; thus irep-vri-^i sell (irep-va-
pev we sell, theme 7re/>) .
4. Suffix -i*. A few verbs take a suffix -vet ( 190) :
thus itc-vov-pai (-^6o-/>tat) arrive (theme IK-).
5. Suffix -w-. Several verbs have a suffix -w-: thus
SeiK-vv-/j,L shoiv (theme Seitc-*).
NOTE. After a vowel this suffix appears as -wv-, but in most of
these cases the extra v comes from the assimilation of another con-
sonant in which the theme originally ended : thus Zwv/u clothe (theme
originally f (7-, cf. Latin vestis) for *ecr-vv/xt.
116 VERBS
197. The O-K Class. Several verbs form their present
stem by adding to the theme -ovce- or -KTK~ (cf. Latin
gno-sco) ; (regularly, vowel themes take -cncll, and consonant
themes -uric ^): thus ape-a-Kco please (theme ape-), evp-Lcr/ca)
find (theme eu/o-).
1. Some of these verbs have also reduplication in the
present system ( 182) : thus yi-yvw-a-KQ) know (theme 7^0)-).
INFLECTION OP THE PBESENT AND IMPERFECT
198. The -co Form. For the paradigm see 237 ; for
an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 13.
199. Contract Verbs. Verbs in <w (-aa>, -ea>, -oew) contract
the final vowel of the stem with the variable vowel ;
for the paradigms see 248-250.
1. In the optative, contract verbs almost always have
-IT?- for the mode sign in the singular and -i- in the dual
and plural.
NOTE. Rarely -t- is found as mode sign in the singular, while -irf
seldom, if ever, appears in the dual and plural (cf . 160, note) .
199 a. Contract Verbs in Homer. In Homer verbs in -tu and -dw are
sometimes contracted as in Attic, but often remain uncontracted : thus
reX^ei and reXetrai, from reXw (-^w) finish, vaterdw dwell, pevoivq,?, from
fjivoivu> (-du) be eager. Rarely verbs in -du have the inflection of verbs
in -tu : thus /j-evoiveov (from nevoivu (-dw) be eager}. Cf. 199 e.
b. "ASSIMILATION." Verbs in -dw, when uncontracted, not infre-
quently have the regular uncontracted form, as stated in 199 a, but
more often they show in the manuscripts a peculiar assimilation, an o
sound prevailing over an adjacent a sound, and an a sound over an e sound :
thus O/DOW for opdw, opdas for opdeis (opa) (-dw) see). A long syllable in
the original form is represented by a long vowel (or improper diphthong)
in the assimilated form : thus opootvres for opdoires, 6pdo>/u for opdoi/u,
6/>6a><ra for opdovcra. Two long vowels in succession are regularly avoided,
unless they are necessary to preserve the meter: thus iip&ovTes (not
i]P<!o)i>Tes') for Tr^aovTes, ^/Swoi/u (not ^^Sww^ii) for
INFLECTION OF THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT 117
2. Verbs of two syllables in -eo> (originally -et/&>, 193,
note) contract only when the contraction will give et ;
otherwise they remain uncontracted : thus TrXeiw sail,
vrXet?, TrXet, 7r\eiTOV, 7r\elrov, TrXeo/Lte^, TrXetre, irXeovcn.
NOTE. But 8o> (for 8ew, *Se-io>) bind is contracted throughout,
and eo> (for *<ro)) scrape is usually contracted throughout.
3. A few verbs seem to have stems in -77-, and so
have 77 wherever the ordinary contract verbs have a:
thus fo> live, 779, ?ij $}TOI/, Joyie^, V?Te, fwo-i ; subj. Jw,
g?, etc. ; opt. ?<piyy, o>7?9, etc. ; impv. ??, etc. ; infin. ?> ;
partc. a>v. The most common of these verbs are f<w
live and ^pu^ai wse; for the others see the Verb List,
729.
for (jLcvoivcuta, rjpuxaaa for ^ooixra, since otherwise the original quantities
would not be preserved.
199 c. Verbs in -6w hardly ever remain uncontracted, but if uncon-
tracted they show an "assimilation" precisely as if they were verbs in
-da : thus apbuKii. for apoov<ri (ap& (-dw) plow}.
NOTE. There can be little doubt that these "assimilated" forms are
spurious forms dating from Alexandrine times, produced from the con-
tracted forms 6/><2, op^s, etc., which were the only forms of such verbs in
use at the time. Observe that the "assimilated" form has exactly the
same quantities as the uncontracted form, and the latter can be every-
where restored to the text.
d. AEOLIC FORMS. Homer sometimes treats contract verbs in -ew
as if they were -pi verbs like rtfq/u : thus ^opTj-vai, <j>opri-/jLevai (cf . 200 a),
infinitive from <f>opC) (-60) bear, aireiK-fi-T-riv (cf. 200 a), imperfect dual
from diri\u> (-&>) threaten.
e. Contract Verbs in Herodotus. Verbs in -do> in Herodotus are
often contracted as in Attic, but sometimes when the a comes before
an o sound it is changed to e, and the form then remains uncontracted:
thus 6/)o>, 6/)Wi, 6/)oi'Ts, Attic opcD (-aw), etc. see.
Verbs in -&j are usually uncontracted except when the e is preceded
by a vowel ; then eo and eou usually contract into eu ( 18 a): thus
eirolfvv (for Attic TrotoOo-t, eirolovv), from TTOIW (-&;) do.
Verbs in -6w are regularly contracted as in Attic.
118
VERBS
200. The -[XL Form. For the paradigms see 251-
254. Observe that the end vowel of the stem is long
in the singular of the indicative active ( 170, 1) ; else-
where short.
1. In the subjunctive and optative the mode sign is
regularly contracted with the final vowel of the theme
( 170, 2-3); thus -ndfe (subj.) for rttfe-fl?, nOeirfv (opt.)
for TiOe-fyv, from TiQj]^i put.
NOTE. Three deponent verbs, Bvvafjuu. can, eirt'orafiai understand,
Kpe/xa/xat hang, are accented in the subjunctive and optative as if
utiGOntracted : Swoo/xcu, CTrtVrw/xat, Kpe/xto/xcu ; opt. 3d sing. Svvairo,
/cpe/xairo.
THE FIRST AORIST SYSTEM
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)
201. The first aorist stem is formed by adding -era- to
the theme : thus TrcuSeva) educate (theme 7rat8ef-), aor.
v-aa (aorist stem TraiBevaa-) .
200 a. Homer sometimes has the end vowel of -/At verbs long in forms
other than those of the singular of the indicative active : thus ri6-f)-ijjeva.i,
infinitive active of rt'^/xt put.
b. Homer and Herodotus have in the third plural rt0e?<rt, 5i5oC<ri. etc.,
for * nde-vai, * 5ido-v<ri, etc. (the accent is irregular) ; but regular forms
tdffi, from eljui go ( 261), and ed<ri, from dpi be ( 262 a).
c. Homer sometimes has -61 in the imperative : thus 8iSudi give.
Herodotus in the third plural of the middle has forms with -OTCU, -a.ro
(Attic -VTO.I, -VTO, 167 d) : Tidtarai eridtaro.
201 a. In Homer the first aorist (and future, 212) of a good many
verbs has era-, but in nearly all such cases the theme of the verb originally
ended in <r or a lingual mute (cf. 80 a): thus <?-TAe<r-<ra, from reXw (ew)
Jininh (theme reXeo--, cf. rt\os end) ; e-Ko/uo'-cra (for *e-Ko,cu5-<ra) , from
KOfjiifa carry (theme /co.utS-).
b. Homer has forms of the first aorist with a variable vowel f:
instead of a : thus e/3?J0-6To went, from jSaiVa; ; lov came, from i/cw
lead (impv.), from ayu.
THE FIRST AORIST SYSTEM 119
1. The theme of primitive verbs usually appears in the
first aorist with e or with the long vowel (see 186, 1-2):
thus erp^a turned, eri\t;a melted.
202. Vowel Verbs. Most vowel verbs show a long
vowel before the aorist suffix ( 187): thus e (-a'o)) allow,
aor. eta-era ( 15) ; Tt/i<w (-a<w) honor, aor. l-rt^-aa
( 15) ; 7TOLO) (-e'&>) do, aor. e-TroiTj-cra ; S??A,c5 (-oa>)
show, aor. e'-S^Xto-cra. For some apparent exceptions see
188.
203. Mute Verbs. A labial or palatal mute at the
end of the stem combines with the a- of the suffix, and
forms i/r or (see 28 and 29): thus e-icotya, from KOTTTCO
cut (/C07T-) ; e-ypatya, from rypd^a) write (jypa(f)~) ; e-c/>uXa|a,
from (puXarTO) guard ($fXa/e-) ; e-cr(/>a|a, from cnaa> slay
A lingual mute is dropped before the cr of the suffix
( 30) : thus e-7reicra, from TreiOw persuade (7re#-) ; e-GTreiva
(see 34), from <77reVS< jt?owr (o-Tre^S-).
204. Liquid Verbs. Liquid verbs lose the cr of the
aorist suffix, and in compensation ( 16) lengthen the
preceding vowel : thus <paivo) shoiv (theme 0ai>-), aor.
e(f)T\va ; crreXXcw send (theme crreX-), aor. ecrrciXa ; tcptvo)
distinguish (theme Kpuv-), aor. eKplva.
NOTE 1. The <r of the suffix was first assimilated to the liquid,
and later, when the two liquids became one, the preceding vowel was
lengthened in compensation ( 16). Thus, *e-/xev-cra became ef/xcvra
(which is the Aeolic form), and finally l/xciva.
NOTE 2. After i or p the lengthened form of a is always a ; after
other letters r) sometimes appears, contrary to 15, 1 : thus TrepcuW
(ircpav-) finish, aor. 7repdva ; so also KepSatVoo (/cepSav-) gain, aor.
but <cuW (<av-) show, aor. I^Tjra.
204 a. Homer sometimes keeps o- in the aorist after a liquid : thus
-<ra, from dpaptVfcw (dp-) fit ; e-/cep-<ra, from ndpw (/cep-) shear.
120 VERBS
205. Three verbs StS&fAi (80-, See-') give, '(rjfjn, (!-, 17-)
send, riOrj/jii (#e-, Or)-) put form the singular of their
aorists active with the suffix -/ca : thus eBco/ca, rjica,
edrfKa. See 211, 3. Very rarely this form intrudes
elsewhere : thus sometimes eSco/cav (= e-So-crav, 3d plur.)
they gave.
INFLECTION OP THE FIRST AORIST
206. The first aorist middle differs from the active only
in the personal endings : thus active e-Tra&ev-cra, middle
For the paradigms see 240.
NOTE. In the third singular of the indicative active -a changes to
-c : CTratSevcre. The imperatives Trcu'Sevtroi/, Trcu'Sevcrai, and the infinitive
are irregular, and cannot be satisfactorily explained.
THE SECOND AORIST SYSTEM
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)
207. A considerable number of primitive verbs form
their aorists without any suffix, and employ only the
simple theme of the verb. These aorists fall into two
classes, those with, and those without the variable
vowel.
1. Consonant themes are inflected with the variable
vowels ; vowel themes follow the -pi form of inflection.
NOTE 1. A very few second aorists go over to the inflection of
the first aorist : so c-^e-a (t^eva) poured (for *l%ev-v, 14, 1, note).
NOTE 2. The stem of the second aorist always differs from the
present stem, since otherwise its forms would be confused with those
of the imperfect.
207 a. In Homer the second aorist is found much more frequently
than in Attic, and consonant themes are often inflected in the middle
without the variable vowel : thus t-dty-wv, from S^X-O/ACU receive ; -/UK-TO,
from neiy-vv-fjii mix. Liquid themes sometimes undergo metathesis ( 38) :
thus p\i)-To was hit, from /3dXXw (theme /3a\-).
THE SECOND AORIST SYSTEM 121
NOTE 3. Few verbs have both a first and a second aorist in use
at the same time. In such case, however, the two aorists always
differ in meaning, the first aorist being transitive, and the second
intransitive : thus eorryo-e caused to stand, erected, IOTT/I/ stood.
208. Second Aorist of the -co Form. The second aorist
of the -ft> form has regularly that form of the stem with
no vowel or with a (see 14; 186, 2): thus e-7rr-6pr)v,
from Trer-opcu fly ; e-rpa/rr-ofiriv, from Tpew-co turn; so also
e-\i7r-ov, from XeiV-ft) leave ( 14, 2) ; e-(f)vy-ov, from (pevy-w
flee ( 14, 2).
1. The verb dyco lead has a reduplicated ( 183) second
aorist tfyayov (infin. ay-ay-elv, 179); so also elirov said,
probably for *e-pe-pe r jr-ov (from root f7r-).
209. Second Aorist of the -ju Form. In the second
aorist of the -pi form the stem is the simple theme of the
verb : thus e-crrrj-v (era-, err?;-) stood, e-So-fjiev (So-, &>-)
gave (1st person plural).
INFLECTION OF THE SECOND AORIST
210. The -co Form. The second aorist of the -co form
is inflected with the variable vowel ~. For the paradigm
see 241.
NOTE. The following imperatives active of the second aorist
have irregular accent : eiTre say, eA0e come, tvpifind, iSe see, \a(3e take ;
but not when compounded : thus aTr-eAfle be off!
211. The -\LI Form. In the -pi form the endings are
attached directly to the stem, the final vowel of which is
long in the indicative, infinitive, and imperative (except
208, 1 a. In Homer reduplicated second aorists are rather frequent :
thus t-Trt-<()pa5~ov, from 0pdfw declare, ire-ind-ov, from ireidw persuade,
ire-(f>v-ov slew (cf. 06^-os murder}, etc.
210 a. In Homer the same verb sometimes has forms with and without
the variable vowel : thus e/cXvo-v heard, imperative K\v-6i.
122 VERBS
the impv. 3d plur.): thus e<m\v stood, e/3T\v went, infin.
ftfyai, but opt. ftafyv, 3d plur. impv. fiavrwv.
1. The subjunctive contracts a final a, e, or o of the
theme with the a> or 77 of the mode sign ( 170, 2) : thus
0TJ5 for #-T|S (ri6r]^i put), &o for Sd-a> (Sta>/u give).
2. In the optative the i of the mode sign contracts with
the final vowel of the theme ( 170, 3) : thus Otiyv,
put).
NOTE. But two deponent verbs, eTrpia/Ariv bought ( 257) and
received profit, are accented as if uncontracted (cf. 200, note).
3. Three verbs, SiScofju give, LTJ/JLL send, TiQj]^L put, keep the
vowel of their stems short throughout the second aorist ; in
the singular of the indicative active they have forms with
-/ca ( 205); and in the infinitive and imperative they are
slightly peculiar. For their conjugation see 255, 256, 260.
211 a. Properly, in the second aorist, as in the present, of -fj.i verbs,
the long form should be found only in the singular of the indicative active
(see 200). So we should have sing, ejS-rjv, e/Sr/s, fprj, dual e/Sarov, etc.,
plur. ej3a.fj.ev, etc. But in Attic the long vowel of the singular has crowded
into the dual and plural, except in 5i'5w/, fy/xi, Tld-rj^i. In Homer, as
might be expected, we sometimes find forms with the short vowel : thus
Parriv they (two} went, e-%v-ro was poured (exva).
211, 1 a. In Homer the subjunctive of the second aorist of -/j.i form is
usually uncontracted : thus dt-wpev, d0-^-7?. But in such case the root
vowel usually appears in its long form: thus di\--g (Attic #775, for 0^-7?s),
d(St-r]-(Ti or 6(0-77 (Attic 6(p, for 56-rj). Before the endings -TOV, -/j.ei>, -re
of the active, and in most forms of the middle, the mode vowel is then
short ( 160 a): thus ar-h-t-Tov, 5(b-o-/j.ev, /SX^-e-rat (from /SdXXw throw},
<t>6i-6-/jLeo-8a (from <t>Qivw waste away}.
211, 1 b. In Herodotus -aw and -eo> remain uncontracted in the sub-
junctive, -aw as elsewhere becoming -ew ( 199 e): thus (rri-w-iJiev (for
(TTa-w-/ti', Attic ffT&ij.ev}.
211, 2 a. In Attic no second aorist optative of themes in -u- or -t-
happens to occur. In Homer such an optative is sometimes found : thus
Sfoj (for *5i>iT/), dvfj.ev (for *8vi(ji.ev}, from dvw enter, <{>di wv (for *<j)OuiJ.i]v},
(for *00uro) from <t>9ivu waste away, perish.
THE FUTURE SYSTEM 123
THE FUTURE SYSTEM
(ACTIVE AND MIDDLE)
212. The stem of the future is, in general, the same as
that of the first aorist ( 201), except that the variable
vowel el appears in the suffix instead of a : thus Trai&ev-w
educate, aor. e-Trat'Seu-cra, fut. TratSev-ao) (stem 7rai$evar) .
1. Some few verbs in -<w (-e&>) and -aa> drop the a- of
the future and contract. This happens only when the
<j of the tense sign is preceded by a short vowel (a or e)
which in turn is preceded by a short syllable : thus reXw
(-eo>) finish, fut. reX<w (for reXe-ao), reXeo)); /3t/3ao) make
go, fut. fiiftto for (/3t/3a-o-o>, /3/3aa)) ; so also e'Xw (for eXa-crco),
future of eXavvco drive. These futures are usually reck-
oned among the Attic futures of 215.
213. Liquid Verbs. Liquid verbs form their futures
with the suffix -ea> (for -ecro>, 37); the e is contracted
with the following vowel, as in the present of <tX<w (-eV),
199, 249 : thus fyaivw show (theme $az>-), fut. (f>avco,
for </>az>ea>.
XOTE. The e here is probably a mere help vowel, generated in the
pronunciation of a liquid before o- : thus *<av-o-ou (regularly formed
like Xv-cra>) soon became *<cu/o-o>, then <ai/e'co, and finally <avo>.
214. Doric Future. A few verbs form their future with
a suffix -o-e~, which undergoes the regular contraction.
This is found only in verbs which employ the future middle
in an active meaning ; such verbs have also the regular
future in -vo^ai : thus Trveco breathe, fut. Trveuo-cv/jiai or
Trvevcro/jiai ; <eiryo) flee, fut. cj)ev^ov pai or 0eufo/uat. This
213 a. A few liquid verbs in Homer and the Attic poets have a future
in -aw (cf. 204 a) : thus opvvtu rouse, fut. 6p<ru.
124
VERBS
is the regular form of the future in the Doric dialect, and
so it is usually called the Doric Future.
215. Attic Future. Verbs in -%co also take the future
suffix -<7e?I, but drop the <r between the two vowels ( 37),
which then contract : thus VOJJL^CO think, fut. vopiti (for
*vojMcrec!), %o//.ea>) . This is usually called the Attic Future.
216. Four or five verbs have no future suffix, so that
their future tense has the form of a present : thus eBo^ai
shall eat, Trtb/zat shall drink.
NOTE. These forms are really old subjunctives with a short mode
sign ( 160 a), which have come to be used as futures (cf. 555, note).
INFLECTION OF THE FUTURE
217. The future belongs to the -co form of inflection ;
for the paradigms see 238-239.
THE FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE)
(PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT)
218. The stem of the first perfect is formed by redu-
plicating ( 178) the theme and adding the suffix -/ca :
thus \e-\v-fca, from \vco loose.
1. A lingual mute is dropped before -tea : thus ire-irei-ica,
from 7ret6-ft) persuade. A v either disappears or is changed
to 7-nasal : thus Ke-/cpL-/ca, from iepiva> distinguish, but Tre-
(fray-ica, from (frawco show.
2. Vowel verbs usually have a long vowel ( 187)
before the suffix -/ca : thus re-ri^-Ka, from rlfjia) (-ao>)
honor ; 7re-7roLi\-/ca, from TTOLCO (-ea>) do.
3. Some liquid themes undergo metathesis ( 38), and
so are treated as vowel themes ( 163, 1) : thus {3e-@\r]-Ka,
218 a. In Homer the first perfect is found only in vowel verbs.
THE SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE) 125
from {3d\\co (/3a\-) throw; ted- tc pi) -tea*, from /cdjAvco
labor.
4. Stems of one syllable with the vowel variation o, e, (a)
( 14, 1) have in the first perfect the form with a,
borrowed, probably, from the perfect middle ( 224, 1,
note) : thus eVraX/ca, from o-reXXa) (<rreX-, crraX-) send ;
e(f)@aip/ca, from <f)0eipct> ($0o/3-, <j>6ep-, fydap-) destroy.
THE SECOND PERFECT SYSTEM (ACTIVE)
(PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT)
219. The stem of the second perfect (confined almost
wholly to primitive verbs) is formed by reduplicating
( 178) the theme, and adding the suffix -a : thus 76-
<ypa(f>-a, from ypd(f)a) (7/oa0-) write.
1. Most stems ending in TT, /3, AC, or 7 change the last
letter into the corresponding rough mute ( 12, 2): thus
/3e-/3Xa<|>-a, from /SXaTrra) (/3Xap-) injure ; ^X" a ' f rom ^7^
(a-y-) lead.
2. Verbs whose themes show the variation of long and
short vowels ( 13) have in the second perfect the long
vowel ( 186, 1): thus re'-r^ic-a, from TT^KW (TTJK-, ra/c-)
melt.
219 a. Properly in the perfect system (which really belongs to the -/it
form of inflection) we should have in the singular of the indicative active
the* form of the theme with o, and elsewhere the form with no vowel or
with a ( 14). (Compare the inflection of o?5a, 259.) Many peculiar
forms in Homer are made clear by this simple fact: thus ^KTIJI/, from
eoiKa am like; ^7r^7ri0/iej>, from W-Troitf-a trust; yeydr^v (for *ye-yv-T-r)i>,
14, 1, note), from 7^-70^-0 have become; 7r<?-7rcur0e (for *7re-7ra0-re, 26),
from -n-t-TTovd-a have suffered. So also 7re-0u7-/ic^os, perfect middle parti-
ciple of fatiyw flee. So also in Attic T^-rpa/x-/xat, r^-0/>a/*-/xcu, e-<7rpa^-/xat,
etc. ( 224, 1, note).
219, 1 a. Homer never makes rough a labial or palatal mute in the
perfect active.
126 VERBS
3. Verbs whose themes show the vowel variation o, e,
(a) ( 14) have in the second perfect the form with o
(or ot) ( 186, 2): thus Te-rpocfr-a, from Tpecfxo (r/3o<-,
rpe(f>-, r/>a(/>-) nourish ; Xe-XotTT-a, from XetVa) (XotTr-,
Xetvr-, XTT-) leave.
NOTE 1. Themes with the variation ov, ev, v ( 14, 2) should also
have (o) ov in the second perfect, but the only example of this regu-
lar form is the Epic l\r)\ovOa have come. All others have cv, as
7T-^)vy-a, from <evya> (<evy-, <vy-) flee.
NOTE 2. Verbs with Attic reduplication ( 179) regularly have
the short form of the root: thus aX-^\\.<f>-a, from dAeC^xu anoint.
220. A few second perfects are formed without any
suffix, the endings being added directly to the redupli-
cated theme : thus e-ara-fjiev we stand, re-Ovd-vai, to be
dead. Such forms are never found in the singular of
the indicative (cf. 219 a and 258).
INFLECTION OF THE PERFECTS ACTIVE
(FIRST AND SECOND)
221. The first and second perfect systems are alike in
their inflection. For the paradigms see 242-243.
NOTE. In the third singular of the indicative active -a changes
to -e : 7T7rai8evK (cf. 206, note).
1. For the subjunctive and optative the perfect parti-
ciple with the corresponding form of el fit am is very often
used : thus TreTratSeu/co)? a>, TreTratSef/cco? eirjv (cf. 227)..
2. The imperative is hardly ever found except in per-
fects with present meaning : thus eo-raOi, stand.
THE PLUPERFECTS ACTIVE
(FIRST AND SECOND PLUPERFECTS)
222. The stem of the pluperfect active is the same
as that of the perfect active, with the substitution of e or
THE PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM 127
77 for the a of the suffix : thus 1st perf. \\v/ca, 1st plup.
e-\e-\v-tcrj ; 2d perf. yeypacJMi, 2d plup. e-
INFLECTION OF THE PLUPERFECTS ACTIVE
(FIRST AND SECOND)
223. For the inflection of the pluperfects active, see the
paradigms 242-243. For the augment see 176.
THE PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM
PERFECT, PLUPERFECT, AND FUTURE PERFECT
224. The stem of the perfect middle is the reduplicated
theme, to which the endings are attached directly : thus
Xe-Xf-fiat, from \vco loose.
1. The perfect middle in general agrees with the first
perfect active in vowel changes of the theme and the
retention or rejection of v. Examples are :
T-Tf/jLj\-fJLai, from TL^W (-ao>) honor.
7re-7rotT|-yLtat, from TTOLCO (-ea>), do.
7re-7ricr-/Licu ( 27, 3), from ireiO-a) persuade.
e-crraX-yiiat, from (rre'XXa) (o-reX-, <rraX-) send.
from /cptva) (^ptv-) distinguish.
t ( 38, 1), from /3aXX&> (/3aX-) throw.
NOTE. Properly the perfect middle of primitive verbs with the
vowel variation o, e, (a) ( 14, 1 and 186, 2), should have the form of
the theme with no vowel or a: thus re'-0pa/x-/u.at (rpe^w nourish), TC-
Tpa/x-/Aou (rpeVa) turn), t-crrpa/x-jaai (crrpe^w (urn), |-cr7rap-yaat ((77rtpw
(crTrep-) sow), T-ra-/xat (for *T-Tv-/xat ( 14, 1, note), from recVw
(rev-) stretch), 7re-7rvcr-pxxi (TTW&IVO/JUH (wevO-, TTV@-) learn) ; but the
form of the theme with e has often intruded : thus Tre-rre/x-puxi (Tre/xTr-oo
send), 7re-7ricr-/xat (7reiQ-<o persuade).
For a- at the end of the stem in the perfect middle of some verbs
see 189.
222 a. Ionic usually has the uncontracted forms -ea, -ea-s, -ee in the
singular of the pluperfect : thus ireiroldea trusted, Tjdee(v) knew.
128 VERBS
INFLECTION OF THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT MIDDLE
225. 1. The inflection of the perfect middle system of
vowel verbs may be seen in 244. In mute or liquid
verbs the final consonant of the theme before the personal
endings- is subject to the euphonic changes mentioned in
25-31 and 35. These may be seen from the paradigms
247.
2. When the cr at the end of the perfect middle stem
of some verbs ( 189) comes before cr in a personal
ending, the two sigmas are reduced to one ( 35) : thus
re-reXed-fiai, re-reXecrat (for *re-reXecr-crafc), from reXa> (-e'a>)
finish; see 247.
226. In the third person plural of the indicative middle
consonant stems employ the perfect participle with el<ri
they are for the perfect, and with rjo-av they were for the
pluperfect, since the endings -vrai, -vro are regularly used
only after a vowel : thus ^pevoi elai, they have been led.
227. The perfect middle subjunctive and optative (like
the third plural of the indicative) are periphrastic. They
are made by combining the perfect participle with the
subjunctive and optative of et/u am (cf. Latin amatus sim,
amatus essem)', thus TreTraiBevfjievos o>, TreTraibev/jLevos eirjv.
226 a. In Ionic the endings -arcu, -a.ro (Attic -PTCU, -VTO, 167 d), are
employed in the third plural with consonant themes, and sometimes even
with vowel themes ; before these endings TT, 0, /c, 7, are usually changed
to the corresponding rough mutes : thus re-rdx-arat, e-re-rdx-aro, from
rdTTb) (T<ry-) arrange (Attic Teray^voi eiV, reray^voi ?j<rav'). So also
/3e-/S\T7-aTo, from /SdXXw (/3aX-) throw. Herodotus is very fond of these
endings, and uses them often with vowel verbs (the vowel before them
being always made short): thus ot'/c^-arai (Attic ^/CTJ-J/TCU), from
-<?w inhabit.
THE FIRST AOKIST PASSIVE SYSTEM 129
NOTE. A few perfects middle that have a present meaning form
their subjunctive and optative directly from the stem : so /xe/avry/xat
remember, from /xt/xv>/crK(o remind; subj. /xe/xvio/ixu, opt. /xc/uv>/ pyv or
, 2d pers. /xe/xi/jj-o, for */xe-/w,vr;-i-((7)o, etc.
THE FUTURE PERFECT
228. The stem of the future perfect is formed by adding
-cri- to the stem of the perfect middle. A vowel before
-cr~_ is always long, although in the perfect middle it may
have been short : thus \e-\v-cr o-pai (perf. mid. Xe-Xu-yucu)
from \vw loose; Se-frrj-cro-ftat (perf. mid. Se-&-/-tcu) from
So) (Sew) bind.
INFLECTION OF THE FUTURE PERFECT
229. The future perfect is inflected with the middle
endings. It differs from the future middle only in having
reduplication. Its meaning is almost always passive.
For the paradigm see 244.
230. Future Perfect Active. Most verbs form their
future perfects active periphrastically by combining the
perfect participle with ecrofjiai shall be : thus 76-7 pantos
ecro/nai shall have written (cf. in Latin the corresponding
passive form scriptus ero). But two perfects with present
meaning, in frequent use, have developed a special future
perfect active. These are redvr^ica am dead {(a7ro)6vr)(ric(D
die), fut. perf. TeOvijgco shall be dead; and earrjKa stand
(fomjfu set up), fut. perf. ear^a) shall stand.
THE FIRST AORIST PASSIVE SYSTEM
231. The stem of the first aorist passive is formed by
adding to the theme of the verb the suffix -6e-, the e of
which appears as 77 in the indicative, infinitive, and imper-
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 9
130 VERBS
ative (except the 3d plur. impv., cf. 211): thus e-\v-0r)-v,
from \v(o loose.
1. Before the 6 of the suffix a labial or palatal mute
(TT, ft K, 7) becomes coordinate ( 25) ; a lingual mute
becomes a ( 26): thus e-Trpd^-Oij-v (Trpcry-), from Trpdrrco
do ; e-\efy-07)-v (Xenr-), from XetVo) leave ; eTrefo-Orj-v (7ret6-),
from TreiBo) persuade.
2. Vowel verbs show a vowel of the same length as in
the perfect middle : thus e-rl/JL^-Orj-v (perf. mid. Te-Ti'/-n]-//,at),
from rZ/zw (-a&>) honor; e-S6-0r)-v (perf. mid. 8e-o-/-iat),
from SiSwfjLi give; -/cpi-0r)-v, perf. mid. ice-tcpi-paL, from
tcptvco distinguish.
3. For the cr before the suffix of some verbs (ereX&lipK,
r)/cov<T07)v, etc.) see 189.
4. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel varia-
tion o, e, (a) ( 14) usually have in the first aorist passive
the form with e : thus e-Tptcfr-Orj-v, from r/oeVo) (T/OOTT-,
rpeTT-, T/>a7r-) turn; e-Xct^)-^?;^, from \ei7rco (\oi7r-, Xe^TT-,
Xt?r-) leave.
SECOND AORIST PASSIVE
232. The stem of the second aorist passive is formed
by adding the suffix -e- to the theme of the verb. This e
appears as 77 in the indicative, infinitive, and imperative
(except the 3d plur. impv., cf . 211) : thus e-cfrdv-rj-v, from
(f)aLV(0 (<ai>-) shoiv.
1. Primitive verbs whose themes show the variation
between a short and a long vowel ( 13) have in the
second aorist passive the form with the short vowel
( 186, 1) : thus e-TCiK-rj-v, from Trj/c-a (T^/C-, ra/c-')
melt.
2. Primitive verbs whose themes show the vowel varia-
tion o, e, (a) ( 14) have in the second aorist passive
THE FUTURES PASSIVE 131
the form with a ( 186, 2) : thus -crTa.\-rj-v, from crriXXco
(crreX-, <rra\-) send.
INFLECTION OF THE AORISTS PASSIVE
(FIRST AXD SECOND)
233. The first and second aorists passive are alike in
their inflection. They take the active endings ( 166, 1),
and closely resemble the second aorist of the -fit form.
For the paradigms see 245-246.
1. The subjunctive contracts the e of the passive suffix
with the co or rj of the mode sign ( 160, 2): thus \vO&
for \u-0-o> (\vco loose).
2. The optative has for mode sign -irj- in the singular
and i in the plural ( 160, 1). The i of the mode sign
is contracted with the e of the suffix ( 160, 2): thus
\v0tirjv, \v6tifjLev (\vco loose).
NOTE. In the dual and plural -nq- sometimes is found as the
mode sign, but there is little doubt that this is due to errors of
copyists, who were influenced by the analogy of the singular.
3. The imperative ending -0i in the first aorist passive
becomes -n to avoid rough mutes at the beginning of two
successive syllables ( 40): thus \v0rj-ri (for *\v6j]-6C).
THE FUTURES PASSIVE
(FIRST AND SECOND FUTURES PASSIVE)
234. The stem of the future passive is formed by
adding -<rjl to the stem of the aorist passive (cf. 212;
233 a. In the third plural indicative Homer often has the ending -v
for -<rai', always with a short vowel preceding ( 167 c) : thus e-rpaQ-e-v
were reared, Attic ^-Tpd^-tj-ffav.
233, 1 a. In Homer the subjunctive of the second aorist passive has
the same peculiar form as the second aorist active of the -/M form (see
211, 1 a): thus 001/77-77 (Attic <t>avri, for ^a^-rj) from <f>a.Lvu shoiv,
( 160 a) from dd/j.vrnju subdue.
132 VERBS
228): thus XvOrf-ao- pai (aor. pass. e-\v0rj-v~), from \vco
loose; <j)avij-cro-/jLai, (aor. pass. e-(f)dvrj-v^, from <f>aiva) show.
1. The future passive is inflected like the future middle.
For the paradigms see 245; 246, 1.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES
235. The stems of the verbal adjectives are formed by
adding -TO- and -reo- to the theme, which usually has the
same form as in the first aorist passive, except that a rough
mute is made coordinate before the r of the suffix ( 25) :
thus,
AORIST PASSIVE VERBALS
Xuo> loose e-\v-6rjv
(-a&)) honor e-rlfjLrj-Qrjv
) persuade e-Treia-Orjv 7raa--ro'?,
distinguish e-Kpi-Orjv Ac/34-rd?, tcpi-reos
arrange (ray-) e rd^-Orjv ra/c-ro?, ra/c-reo?
rp(f>co nourish e-dpe^-Orjv
1. The verbal adjectives belong to the first and second
declensions of adjectives (XuroV, -r), -6v ; Xureo?, -a, -ov).
See 117. For the accent see 185, 2.
2. The verbal in -TO? expresses what has been done or
may be done ; that in -Teo? what needs doing : thus XUTO?
loosed or loosable ; Xtn-eo? needing to be loosed.
236. The meanings of the different persons, numbers,
modes, tenses, and voices, may be seen from the following
paradigm and synopsis of TratSevco educate. The meanings
of the subjunctive and optative have no brief equivalent in
English, and they must be learned from the chapter on
Syntax.
SYNOPSIS OF 7raL&ev(0
133
PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE OF ircuSevw educate
SINGULAR
1. ircuSevb) / educate
2. irai8uis you educate
3. iraiSeuei he educates
t you (two)
\ educate
educate
PLURAL
iraiSvo|tv ice educate
educate
irai$tvov<rithey educate
SYNOPSIS OF THE VERB iraiSevw educate
THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT
Indie.
Active
iraiScvco I edu-
cate (or am
educating)
ciraiScvov I was
educating
Subj. iraiSevco
Opt. iraiScvoifii
luipv. iraCSeue educate
Infin. iraiScvciv to edu-
cate
Partic. irai8vwv edu-
cating
Middle
itai8vio|iai I educate for
myself, get educated
(or am getting edu-
cated}
TTcuSev6p.r|v I was get-
ting educated
TTCuScVWfJLCU
iraiStvov get educated
iraiS6Va-6ai to get edu-
cated
ircuScuoficvos getting
educated
Passive
The present middle is
used also as passive
( 158, 1)
THE FUTURE
Indie. iraiScv<ro> I shall
educate
Opt. iraiSevcroifju.
Infin. iraiSevo-civ to be
about to edu-
cate
Partic. ircuSevcroov about
to educate
educated
/ shall get
irai8evo-<r0ai to be about
to get educated
cuSv0r|cro|iai / shall
be educated
irai8u0T|(rtr0ai to be
about to be educated
iraiSvo-6(ivos about to ircu8u0T]or6[ivos about
get educated to be educated
134
VERBS
SYNOPSIS OF ircuSevw educate (continued}
THE AORISTS
Active
Indie. liraiScvo-a I edu-
cated
Subj. iraiSgvo-tt
Opt. TTCuSeucraifu
Impv. -iraCScuo-ov edu-
cate
Infin. iraiSeva*ai to
educate
Partic. ircuSevo-ds hav-
ing educated
Middle
iirai8euo-d(j.T]v / got edu-
cated
ircuSevcrcu get educated
irai8v<ra<r0ai to get edu-
cated
iraiScvo-djAcvos having
got educated
Passive
C7rcu5eu0r|v icas edu-
cated
irat8ev0iT|v
be educated
irat8v0T]vcu to be edu-
cated
iraiSevdei's having been
educated
THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT
Indie.
Subj.
Opt.
Impv.
Infin.
Partic.
have educated
reirouScvKT] /
had educated
have educated
having . edu-
cated
irirai8Ufj.ai I have got
(or am, 534) educated
iireirai8cv}j.T]v / had got
(ortcas, 534) educated
ireirai8ev|ivos w
irirai8V(ivos el'tjv
irirai8V(ro be educated
ireircuSevo-Ocu to have got
(ortobe,53)educated
ireiraiSevpe'vos having
got educated, or simply
educated ( 534)
THE FUTURE PERFECT
The perfect middle is
'used also as passive
( 158, 1)
Active. See 230.
Indie. irircuSeuKb>s eVojicu / shall
have educated
Opt.
Infin.
Partic.
e'cr<r9ai to be
about to have educated etc.
(Middle and) Passive. See 229.
jTTrai8v<ro|Aai I shall have (got or)
been educated, or shall be edu-
cated (cf. 538)
7reirai8eu<roifXT|v
irTrai8v<reo-0ai to be about to have
(got or) been educated
< ir < irai8ixr6|ivos about to have (got
or) been educated
VERBAL ADJECTIVES
educated or capable of being educated
needing to be educated
PARADIGMS OF -&) VERBS
135
237. Present System
7rai8ev-<o,
educate
ACTIVE
MIDDLE (PASSIVE)
Present Imperfect
Present
Imperfect
S. 1 ircuScvw e-iraCSevo-v
iraiSvo-|i.ai
-Trai8ex)6-|j.T|v
2 1T(u8eVI.S -irai8V-S
-iraiSevT], or -et
-irai8evov
a5 3 ircu8Vi e-iraiSeve
iraiSV-rai
e-iraiSevc-TO
' D. 2 irai8V-TOv e-iraiSeve-TOv
iraiSfivf-o-Oov
-TTai8l)-0-001
3 ITCuStvie-TOV -irCu8U'-TT]V
irai8V-<r0ov
-irai8V-o-0T]i
P. 1 iraiSevo-fUv i-irai8vo-|JLV
irai8ev6-fjt0a
l-irai8v6-(Jt0o
2 irai8V-T -irai8V-T
irai8ev-cr0
-irai8ev-o-06
( 3 irai8vov<ri f-iraiSfuo-v
irai8vo-vrai
c-iraiSevo-vro
S. 1 iraiSevea
TraiStvcu-Hiai
2 iraiSevT)S
iraiSfVT)
3 iraiSev-g
irai8VT)-rai
"g D, 2 irai8vt]-Tov
irai8vr]-<r0ov
.^, 3 iraiSexiTj-TOv
irai8VT]-(r0ov
d P. 1 iraiScvw-^ev
irai8vw-fi0a
2 iraiSev-q-TC
irai8vt]-(r06
3 iraiSevaxri
iraiSfvw-vrai
S. 1 irai8cvoi-p.i
irai8uoi-|iT)v
2 iraiSexioi-s
iraiSfvoi-o
dj 3 iraiSevoi
TTaiStTJOL-TO
j3 D. 2 iraiSevoi-rov
irai8voi-a-0ov
3 irai8voi-TT]v
irai8voi-cr0T|v
^ P. 1 irai8voi-fiv
irai8voi-|i0a
'2 irai8tioi-T
irai8voi-(T0
3 irai8evoic-v
irai8voi-vro
S. 2 iraiScve
iraiSfvov
| 3 irai8v^-T
irai8V-<r0a)
5 D. 2 iraiStwe-TOv
irai8cve-(T0ov
3 iraiStve'-Twv
Trai8V-o-0a>v
S^ P. 2 irai8V-T6
irai,8ev-o-0
[ 3 iraiSevo-vTwv
iraiSeve'-o-Owv
Infin. iraiScveiv
TraiSev^-o-Oai
Part. ircuSeiJcov.
irai8ev6-fj.vo-s,
-ovcra, -ov
-TJ, -OV
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
136
PARADIGMS OF -ft) VERBS
s.
Future System.
238. Vowel Verbs. 239. Liquid Verbs.
7raiSev-a> educate.
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Future.
iraiSevcro-|iai
(f>aiv(i) ((av-) show.
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Future (contracted).
3 ircuScvo-ci
D. 2 irai8vo--Tov
3
P. 1
2
3
4>aveis (-&is"
<f>av6i (-&i)
<{>avei-Tov (-<
irai8vo--o-0ov <|>avi-TOv (-t
<f>avov-fjkcv (-
4 >av T1 or ~ ^ (
>avetTCU -
<f>avi(T0ov (-^e-
4>avot'fi0a
irai8euo--<r0 <}>avi-T (-&-) <|)avior0 (--]
<(>avov(ri
<j>avovvrai (-
No
Subjunctive
No
Subjunctive
^
c
S. 1 ircuSevo-oi-fu irai8v<roi-}XT]v
2 irai8v<roi-s iraiStvo-oi-o
3 irai8ev<roi iraiScvo-oi-ro
D. 2 irai8vo-oi-TOv iratSevo-oi-o-Oov
3 irai8ev(roi-TT]v irai8U(roi-<r0T]v
P. 1 irai,8V(roi-(JL6v
2 ircuSevcroi-TC
3 iraiSevtroie-v irai8V(roi-vTO
<j>avoiT]-v (-
<j>avoii]-s (-601775) <})avoi-o (^oto)
<f>avoiT] (-foirj} 4>avoi-ro (-eoi-)
<|>avoi-Tov (Woi-) <|>avoi-(r0ov (-^01-)
4>avoi-Tt]v (-co/-) <j>avoi-<r0T]v (-eo/-)
<j>avoi-[JLv (-eoi-) <j>avoi-|i0a (-eo/-)
<j>avoi-T (-^ot-) <J>avoi-cr0 (-^01-)
<j>avoi-v (-^ot-) <j>avoi-vTO (-^ot-)
No
Imperative
No
Imperative
Infin. iraiScvo-civ irai86t<r-(T0ai <J>aviv (-^eiz/) 4>avei-cr0ai (-^e-)
Part. iraiScvo-wv, irai8v<r6-|JLvos, <|>avwv (-^wi/), <j>avov-(Jivos(-e(S-),
-oxxra, -ov -T], -ov -oii<ra, -ovv -TJ, -ov
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3,
PARADIGMS OF -a) VERBS
137
240. First Aorist System. 241. Second Aorist System.
TrcuSev-o) educate. AetVo) (AoiTr-, ACITT-, AITT-, 14, 2)
ACTIVE.
leave.
MIDDLE.
ACTIVE.
MIDDLE.
1st Aorist.
2d Aorist.
S. 1
-ircu8vo-a
-irai8vo-d-|iT]v
-Xiiro-v
-Xnr6-|XT]v
2
-iraC8u<ra-s
-ircu8v<ra>
-Xlir-S
4-Xiirov
9
3
l-iraC8v<r
6- < irai8vi<ra-TO
-Xiir
-Xl1T-TO
1
D.2
1-iraiSfivo-a-TOv
-irai8V(ra-o*0ov
-Xl1T-TOV
-Xl1T-0-00V
J '
3
i-ircu8vard-TT]v
-irai8vo-d-(T0Tiv
-Xnr-TT]v
-Xlir-0-0T]V
d
P. 1
-irai8v<ra-|J.v
e-irai8vo-d-)i.0a
4-Xiiro-|iv
4-Xnr6-|X0a
2
6-ircu8xi(ra-T6
!-irai8v<ra-<r0
-XlT-T
4-Xiir-<r0
3
i-iraiSfvcra-v
e-iraiSfiuo-a-VTO
-Xl1TO-V
-Xiro-vTO
S. 1
-rraiSevcrco
iraiSeva-w-fJiat
XTT(0
Xiira>-|iai
2
ircu8VO-T|S
iraiSevo-T)
XCiqiS
XlITT]
I'
O
7rai8v<rr|
irai8evcrr|-TaL
Xiirrj
Xiirr]-Tai
o
D.2
irat8V(r'!]-Tov
7raiSV(TT)-(r0ov
XCirrj-TOv
Xitrt]-o-0ov
tf
3
irai8vi<rT]-TOv
irai8v<rT] -o*0o v
Xiirt]-Tov
Xiirt]-o-0ov
*
P. 1
irai8V(ra)-|iV
irai8V(rw - |i0a
Xiiro)-p,v
Xiirw-p.0a
CC
2
irai8v<ni-T
jrai8v(TT]-(r06
Xl1TT]-T
Xl1TT]-O-0
I 3
irai8tio-a)<ri
iraiSevcrw-vTai
Xiirwo-i
Xiir(o-vrai
r s. i
irai8V(rai-(i.i
ircu8V(rcu-|iT]v
X(iroi-|u
Xnro(-(j.T]v
2
irai8cvo-6ias, -oxus
iraiScva-ai-o
Xiiroi-s
X(iroi-o
oJ
3
irai8v'(ri, -<rai
iraiSfv'o-ai-TO
XCiroi
XlTTOl-TO
D.2
iraiSfivVai-TOv
TraiSevVai-o-Oov
XITTOI-TOV
Xiiroi-<r0ov
i
3
iraiSfivo-ai-TTjv
rrai8u<rai-or0i]v
XiiroC-TT]v
Xnroi'-or0r]v
P. 1
VfluSctMTOt-fUV
iraiSevo-at-fxeSa
Xl1TOl-(JLV
Xi<7roi-|i0a
2
irai8tJ(rai-T
irai8V(rai-ar0
XITTOI-TC
Xiiroi-o-0
i o
irai8v<riav, -ai-v
iraiSfuVai-vTO
Xiiroi-v
XITTOI-VTO
S. 2
iraiSfvo-ov
iraiSevcrai
XlT6
Xiirov
c
3
iraiSfivo-d-TW
irai8u<rd -0-0(0
Xlir-T<0
Xnr-o-0a)
'"i
D.2
iraiSfivcra-Tov
irai8vo-a-o-0ov
Xl1T-TOV
X(ir-o-0ov
O>
3
irai8v<rd-Tv
iraiSfivo-d-o-Owv
XlTTfi-TWV
Xnr-<r0ft)v
5"
P. 2
iraiSfivVa-Tfi
irai8vo-a-<r0
XlTT-T
Xl1T-a-0
H I 3
irai8u<rd-vTwv
irai8vo > d-o-0(ov
Xiiro-VTwv
XlTT 0-0WV
Infin.
iraiSfvo-ai
irai8v<ra-o-0ai
Xl1TlV
Xnr-or0ai
Part.
iraiSevcrds,
irai8vcrd-(Xvos,
Xiirwv,
Xtiro-fifivos,
-o-d<ra, -<rav -TJ, -ov -ov<ra, -6v -i], -ov
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
The first aorist infinitive active Trai8ev<rai is irregular in accent ( 185).
In the second aorist the 2d singular of the imperative middle, the infinitives
active and middle, and the participle active are irregular in accent ( 185).
138
PARADIGMS OF -a) VERBS
D.
P.
242. First Perfect System.
TrcuSev-to educate.
ACTIVE.
1st Perfect. 1st Pluperfect.
1 jre-iraiSevKO, l-irt-iraiSewKt]
2 ire-iraiSevica-s -ir-irai8VKTj-s
3 ire-iraiSeuKe -'ir-irai8VKi(v)
2 ir-irai8evKa-TOv l-ire-iraiSevKe-TOv
3 ire-iraiSevKa-TOv l-i
1 irc-iraiSevKa-fjtev -;
2 ir-irai8VKa-T -1
243. Second Perfect System.
AdVa) (AoiTr-, ACITT-, AITT-, 14, 2)
leave.
ACTIVE.
2d Perfect. 2d Pluperfect,
XcXoiira c-XcXoiirrj
XcXoiira-s e-XeXoiirt]-s
Xc'Xoiire 4-XXoiim(v)
XeXoiira-rov 4-XeXoiire TOV
XeXotira-rov 6-XeXoiirc-riiv
-ir-Trai8cvK-(rav XcXoiircuri -XcXoire-(rav
S. 1 ire-iraiSevKw (See also
2 1T-ir(uSVKT|S 221, 1.)
3 -,
D.2 i
XeXoiirti) (See also
XeXoCiqis 221, 1.)
XeXoiir-q-Tov
P. 1 Tr-irai&VKci>-(Xv
2 ire-iraiSevKTi-Te XeXoiirq-re
3 ire-iraiSevKcixri XcXoiirbxri
S. 1 ire-iraiSevKoi-ixt or -oii\-v (See also XeXoiiroi-p.1 or -oli\-v (See
2 ire-iraiSevKoi-s '* -O(TJ-S 221, 1.) XeXotiroi-s " -oit]-s also
3 ire-iratStvKOi
D. 2 ire-iraiSevKoi-TOv
3 ire-iraiStvKoi-Tqv
P. 1 ir-'irai8TJKOi-fi.v
2
3
-OITJ
XtXoiiroi '
XeXoCiroi-rov
-oCr,
221
I-)
f S. 2 [ire-iraC8VK (See also
3 ire-ircuSevKe'-Tco 221,2.)
3 7T-ir<u8VK-Ta>V
P. 2 1T-irai5VK-T
3 ire-iraiSevKo-vTtov]
Infin. ire-iraiSeuKe'-vai
V
XXoi1TOl-T
XeXoiiroie-v
[Xe'Xoiirc (See also
XeXonre'-Tw 221, 2.)
XeXoiire-TOV
XcXonre-Twv
XXoiir6-vTwv]
Part. ire-iraiSevKws, -Kvia, -KOS XeXoiirws, -via, -6s
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170. notes 1-3.
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent ( 185).
PARADIGMS OF -&> VERBS
139
244. Perfect Middle System
7raiSev-<D educate
MIDDLE (PASSIVE)
Perfect Pluperfect
Future Perfect
' S. 1 ir-irai8v-p.cu -ir-irai8ev-(i.t]v
ireircuSevo-o-pai
2 < ir-irai8v-<rai -ir-irai8v-o~o
ireiraiStvo-T) or -6t
1
3 irc-iraiSev-Tai e-irc-iraiSev-TO
ireircuSevo-c-Tai
D. 2 ir-irai8v-<r0ov l-ire-iraiSev-o-Oov
ireiraiSevo-e-o-Oov
1 '
3 ir-ira8v-a0ov 6-ir-irai8v-<r0t]v
irirai8vi(r -o-0o v
P. 1 < rr-irai8v-fji0a l-irc-iraiScv-iieOa
irirai8vo-6-)ie0a
2 irc-iraiScu-o-Oe e-ire-'jraiSev-o'Oe
irirai86vo--o-0
3 irc-iraiScv-VTai e-ire-TraiSeu-VTO
TrciraiScvo-o-vrai
S. 1 ire-ircuSevfJLe'vos (-^i -ov) w
2 " r\<5
<D
3 tt
^[|
O
- <
D. 2 ir-irai8V[iva> (-a, -a>) -qrov
No
"o*
3 " ^TOV
Subjunctive
1*2
QQ
P. 1 ire-iraiSevncvoi (-ai, -a) wjwv
2 " ^T
31 t *
wo-i
S. 1 ir-irai8V|jivos (-t|, -ov) et^v
irirai8cv<ro-nT,v
2 ctrjs
ircTraiSevo-oi-o
.
3 eiT]
ireiraiScvo-oi-TO
1
D. 2 irc-iraiScvpicvft) (-a, -<o) etrov or ettirov
irirai86vio-oi-o-0ov
^
3 " i'TT]V " 6lTJTT]V
ireiraiSevo-o i- o-0T) v
c
P. 1 Tr6-irai8V(ji6voi (-at, -a) t|iev " ti'T^xev
7Tirai8evo*o C- p.0a
2 " tire " l'r]T
irirai8vo-oi-o-0
3 etev " tT]o-av
ireiraiSeva-oi-vTO
S. 2 ire-iraiSev-o-o
gj
3 ire-iraiSeu-o-Ow
'
D. 2 ir-irai8eu-or0ov
No
f?
H
3 ir-irai8v-o-0wv
Imperative
5
P. 2 ir-irai8v-<r0e
3 ir-irai8v-o-0wv
Infin. ir--irai8ev-o-0ai
^TraiScvo-i-creai
Part. irt-iraiScv-ncvos, -T], -ov
7rirai8euo-6-(ivos,
NOTE. The infinitive and participle of the perfect middle are irregu-
lar in accent ( 185).
140
PARADIGMS OF -o> VERBS
245. First Passive System
TTcuSev-o) educate
246.
1st Aorist
S. 1 e-ir<u8v0T]-v
2 i-irai8v0T)-s
D. 2 -irai8cv0ii-TOv
3 4-irai8v0T|-TT]v
P. 1 -1T<u8V0Tl-|WV
2 6-1
3 4-i
f S. 1 iraiSev0a>
2 irai8ev0fjs
3 ircu8v9fj
D. 2 ircuSevOi] TOV
3 irai8ev0T]-Tov
P. 1 ircu8v9a>-|iv
2
3
S. 1 irai8v0iTi-v
2
3
D.2
3 ircuSevOci-TTiv [-CITJTTJV]
P. 1 irai8U0l-|JLV [-lT]p,v]
2 irai8V0l-T [-ll]T]
3 irai8u0i-v [-tT]<rav]
S. 2 iraiSev'Ori-Ti
1st Future
ircuSu0ifjaro-|Aai
or
Second Passive System
<f>aiva} (<^>av-) appear
2d Aorist
-<j>dvT]-v
No
Subjunctive
< irai8v9if|(roi-TO
D. 2 irai8u0T]-TOv
3 irai8v0T|-Ta)v
P. 2 rrai8v0t]-T
3 irai8v0-vTwv
Infin. irai8eu0fi-vai
iraiSevOeis,
No
Imperative
Part.
-i<ra, -
Trai8\)0T)o-6-fUvos.
-T], -OV
irai,8u0^(r6-<r0ov 4-<j>dvTj-TOv
-<|>dvT]-flCV
4-<|)dvT]-T
-<|>dvTj <rav
<|>ava>
<j>avfjs
<|>avfi-TOv
<f>avfi-TOv
<j>aviT)-s
4>aviT]
<|>aVl-TOV [-IT]TOV]
<J>aVl-TT]V [-l^)T^v]
4>aVCl-|lV [-lT]fJlvJ
4>avei-T [-IT]T]
4>av6i-v [-eiTjcrav]
<j>dvTj-0i
4>avr|-Ta)
CJ>dvt]-TOV
<}>dvT]-T
<j>av-VTWV
4>avf]-vai
-etcra. -ei
1. The future passive of <f)aivw
ai) is inflected exactly like
XOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
For the accent of the aorist subjunctive and optative see 233, 1-2. The
infinitive and participle of the aorist are irregular in accent ( 185).
PARADIGMS OF -ft) VERBS 141
247. In the perfect and pluperfect middle of stems end-
ing in a consonant various euphonic changes occur ( 225).
AetTTOJ (AeiTT-, 14, 2) ayoo (ay-) 7ret$(u (jruO-, 14, 2) <ati/a> (<av)
leave. lead. persuade. show.
PERFECT INDICATIVE.
S. 1 Xe'-Xein-ficu q-y-p.cu ire'-imcr-p.cu ire'-4>acr-|iai
2 Xe-Xeitj/ai < ni aL ire-irewrai [ire-<J>av-o-ai]
3 Xe-Xeiir-T<H -rjK-Tai ire-ireio'-Tai ire-<|>av-Tai
D. 2 \-\ei<j>-0ov -rjx" ov ire'-ireio-0ov ire'-<f>av-0ov
3 \-Xet4>-0ov ^x~^ ov ire-ireio-0ov ir-<})av-0ov
P. 1 \-Xei|i-[Jt0a rf-y-H-eOa ire-ire io--|i6a -^ ir-<j>do--(ie0a
2 \e'-\i<|>-0 ^X~ ire-ireio-06 ire'-(j)av-0
3 Xe-XeifJi-fie'voi etcri T]-y-[j.e'voL etcri ire-ire io*-p.voi ettri Tre-c^acr-fj-e'voi elo*C
PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE.
S. 1 l-Xe-Xe((JL-}JLT|v TJ'Y-IXTIV e-ire-ireio'-ji'rjv e-ire-<f>do--|iT|v
2 i-Xe'-XeixJ/o -rj^o -ire'-ireio-o [e-ire'-<})av-o-o]
D. 2 e-Xe-Xei<|)-0ov -qx~ ov e-ir-ireio-0ov e-ire-<})av-0ov
3 ^-Xe-Xe(<j)-0T|v 'HX~" T I^' -ire-ireio"0T|v -ire-<p(xv-0T]v
P. 1 -Xe-Xeip.-|ie0a TJf-|ie0a e-ire-ireio--p,e0a e-ire-4>do--|i0a
2 -Xe'-Xei<j)-0e 'HX' 6 e-ire'-ireio-Oe -ire-j>av-0
3 Xe-Xei(i-fievoi rjo-av rcy-jJievoi rjaav ire-ireia-jxe'voi rjaav ire-^aa-fjte'vot -qorav
PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE.
Xe-Xeip.-|ievos w TJ-yF t ' vos * ire-ireio--(Ji'vos w ire-<j>ao--|jL'vos w
PERFECT IMPERATIVE.
S. 2 Xe'-Xei\(;o ^o ire' ireio-o [ire-<J>av-o-o]
3 Xe-Xei<|>-0a) -rjx'Ow ire-ire(o-0a> ir-<f>dv-0o
D. 2 Xe-Xei<|>-0ov TJX~^ OV ire-ireio-0ov ire'-<j>av-0ov
3 Xe-Xei<f>-0a>v TJx-0<>v ire-ire io-0a>v ire-<|>dv-0a)v
P. 2 Xe-Xei<)>-0e 'HX" 6 ire-ireio-0e ire-<|)av-0e
3 Xe-Xei4>-0o)v j\\-Qo)v ire-ire io-0o>v ire-<j>dv-0wv
PERFECT INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE.
Xe-Xei<j>-0ai ^X~^ at ire-ireto--0ai ire-(j>dv-0ai
Xe-Xeiji-jjie'vos TJY"r l * vos ire-irio--(JLe'vos
1. Like \e\ifjifj.ai are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending
in a labial mute. But stems in -/J.TT- lose the TT before all endings begin-
ning with /JL: thus 7r^7re,u//,cu (for *7re-7re/Liir-/iai), TrtTrefji^ai, etc., from TT^UTTCJ
(TTC/XTT-) send.
2. Like %y/j.a.i are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending in a
palatal mute. But stems in -77- or -7%- lose a final mute before all end-
ings beginning with ^ : thus tX-fiXey-fj-ai (for *e\r)\ey)( r fj.ai^ from tXeyx 1 **
(Ae?*-) convict ( 179).
3. Like 7r^7rei<r/icu are inflected all stems of the perfect middle ending
in a- or a lingual mute.
142
PARADIGMS OF -a) VERBS
Present System of Contract Verbs in -aw
248.
TLfJi.il)
ACTIVE
Present Imperfect
S. 1 Tip,w (-do>) crfjiw-v (-aov)
2 Tinas (-dets) Irtjid-s (-aes)
3 Tlp4(-dei) 6Ttp.d(-ae)
D. 2 Tip,d-Tov (-de-) Irip-d-Tov (-de-)
3 Tip,d-Tov (-de-) Ti|xd-Tt]v (-ae"-)
P. 1 Tlp.W-|iV (-do-) Tl|JLW-|lV (-do-)
2 rlfid-re (-de-) Tip,d-T (-de-)
3 Tijjtw<ri (-dof-) crtp-wv (-aov)
S. 1 Tip.a (-da>)
2
3
D. 2 Tijid-Tov
3 Tl|ld-TOV (
P. 1 Tlfl-}JlV ( ~~r
2 Tip,d-T (-dTjre)
3 Tip,w<ri (-dwo"tj
S. 1 Tip,wT]-v(-ao{-)
2 Tip,wr]-s (-aof-) [TIJJLWS (-dots) ]
3 Ttp,wT| (-aot-) [Tip,w (-dot)]
I). 2 TIJJ.W-TOV (-dOLTOv)
3 Tl|A-TT]V (-OO^Tiyi')
P. 1 Tl(JLW-|X6V (-dot/*ei')
2 Tip,-T6 (-dotre)
3 Ti|A-v (-doiei')
S. 2 rffia (-ae)
, ^onor
D. 2 Ti(id-Tov (-
3 Tifid-Tcov (
P. 2 rind-re (-dere)
3 TIJJUO-VTWV (-
MIDDLE (PASSIVE)
Present Imperfect
11 (-do-) Ti|xw-nt]v (-a6-)
rijia (-drj or -det) TI|JLCO (-dot;)
Tip,a-Tai (-de-) 6Ti(jia-TO (-de-)
Tip.d-<r0ov (-de-) Tiptd-o-0ov (-de-)
Tip.d-or0ov (-de-) 6Tip.d-o-0T]v (-a^-)
Tl|id-(T0 (-ae-) lTtp.d-o-0 (-de-)
Tlp,(b-VTai (-do-) Tlp.(0-VTO (-do-)
(-dwyicai)
ri|ia (-dy)
Tip.d-o-0ov
(-dcovrat)
(-doto)
TlfJLW-TO (-doiT
TijJtw-<r0T]v
rip.w-p.e0a (-a.oLfj.eda)
Infin.
rijjtd
Tip,d-(T0(o (-aecrdwi)
Tip.d-cr0ov (-dea-^oj'
Tip,d-<r0a)v (-aea-0ui>
Tip.a-<r0 (-decree)
Tip,d-<r0fa)v (-
Tifid-<r0ai (-
Part.
, -<ra, -wv
Tl(lW-p,VOS (~a6), -TJ, -OV
PARADIGMS OF -a) VERBS
143
249.
Present System of Contract Verbs in -
ACTIVE
Present Imperfect
f S.
2 (fnXeis (-^
3 <juXt (-&
D. 2 <|>i\i-TOv
3
P. 1
2 <>i\i-T (-
3 <|>i\ov<ri (-
etfnXei-s (-ees)
iffta (-ee)
<i)i\6t-TOv (-^e
4<)i\o
S. 1 <fu\a> (-^w)
2 <J>iXTJs (-^s)
3 <j>iXfj (-^T?)
D. 2 <|>iXfi-TOv (-^77x01')
3 4>tXf]-Tov {-
P. 1 (fuXw-
2 <j>iXri-T (-
3 <j)iXwcri (-
S. 1 4>iXo(T)-v (-eo/-) [<(>iXoi-(jii (
2 <j>iXotT]-s (-eo/-) [4>tXot-s
D. 2 <JnXoi-TOv (-
3 <j>iXo-TT]v (-
P. 1 <jnXoi-[J.v (-
2 <|>iXoi-T (-^
[ 3 <}>iXoi-v
S. 2 4>CXi (-ee)
3 4>lXl-TO) (-
D. 2 <JnXei-TOv (
3 cjuXei-TttJ' (-eeYwj')
P. 2 <juXi-T (-^ere)
3 <|>iXov-vT<tfv(-e6i>Ta>i')
Infin. <f>iXciv (-^eii')
Part. 4>iXwv (-^wi'), -overa, -ovv
) love
MIDDLE (PASSIVE)
Present Imperfect
<|>iXov-n<u (-&>-) 6<t>iXov-(iT]v (-
cjnXei (-^77 or -eVt) e<j>i\ov (-e'en)
<|>iXei-T<u (-^e-) l<fiXC-TO (-^e
cjuXet-o-Oov (-^6-) 4>i\6i-<r0ov (
<j>i\t-<r0ov (-^e-
(-ee-) I<|>i\t-<r06 (-^
<|>i\ov-vTai (-eo-) <JI\OV-VTO (-
<}>iXT]-Tai (-
<}>iXti-o-0ov {-
4>iXfj-(r6ov (-
<{>iX(6-p.eOa (-ew
4>iX<o-VTai (-eWrat)
<f>iXoi-fit]v (-
<|>iXot-o (-eoio)
<|>iXoi-TO (-eoiro)
<|)iXot-<r6ov (-
<{>iXoi-(rOr|v
cf>iXoi-(i0a (-
<|>iXot-<r0
4>iXoi-vro (-eW-ro)
<JnXov (-^ou)
<|>iXi-<r0a> (-
<j>iXi-<r0ov (-
<>iXi-cr0 (-
<j>iXei-o-0a>v (-
4>iXi-<r0at (-
<|>iXov-(Jivos (-e6-), -t], -ov
144 PARADIGMS OF -co VERBS
250. Present System of Contract Verbs in -o
o\?Aa> (877X0-0)) manifest
ACTIVE MIDDLE (PASSIVE)
Present Imperfect Present Imperfect
S. 1 8r]Xa> (-6w) 48^|XOV-V (-OOP) 8T)XoV-|iai (-OO-) 8T]XoV-fl.T]V (-06-)
2 6ri\ots (-6eis) cSrjXov-s (-oes) 8^X01 (-677 or -6ei) 48ii\ov (-6ov)
3 8ti\oi (-6ei) iS^Xov (-oe) StjXov-Tai (-6e-) eStiXov-ro (-6e-)
D. 2 8r]Xov-TOv(-6e-) 8T]Xov-TOv (-6e-) 8t|Xov-<r0ov (-6e-) eSiiXov-o-Oov (-oe-)
3 8T]Xov-TOv(-6e-) 8T]Xov-TT]v(-o^-) 8rjXov-o-0ov (-oe-
P. 1 8rjXov-|Xv (-60-) l8T]Xov-p,6v(-6o-) 8t]Xov-|X60a(-o6-) l8TjXov-|Jt60a(-o6-)
2 STjXoO-T (-6e-) 48T)Xov-T6 (-6e-
3 StjXovo-i (-6ou-) eSrjXovv (-ooi') 8t]Xov-vTai (-60-) ISTjXov-vro (-60-)
S.
2 SrjXois (-6rjs) 8t]XoE (-677)
3 StjXoi (-677) SrjXw-Tai (-677x04)
D. 2 SrjXw-TOv (-677x0?') 8T)Xa>-o"0ov (-6Tj<rdov^)
3 SijXw-Tov (-677x01') 8t]X-o*9ov (-6770"0oi')
P.
2 8TjXw-T (-677Tc) 8riXw-<r0 (-6770-06)
3 8r]Xwcri (-6wo-i) 8-qXw-vrai (-6wi'rat)
S. 1 8T]Xoiti-v (-00^-) [8TiXoi-fu(-6oi-)] 8tiXoi-|XT]v (-
2 8r]XoiTi-s (-oof-) [SrjXoi-s (-6ois)] 8^X01-0 (-6oto)
3 8r]Xoiri (-oof-) [8^X01 (-6ot)] 8r]Xoi-TO (-6oiro)
D. 2 SrjXoi-TOv (-6oiro') 8T)Xoi-<r0ov (-6oto"0o')
3 StiXoi-TTjv (-001x771') 8T]Xoi-o-0T]v (-ooladriv)
P. 1 8r]Xoi-(Jiev (-boifj.ev') 8r]Xoi-}JL0a (-ool/meda)
2 8tjXot-T (-6oire) 87]Xoi-<r0 (-6oio-0e)
3 S-qXoie-v (-6otei/) SriXoi-vro (-6otj^ro)
S. 2 SrjXov (-oe) 8-qXov (-6ou)
3 8i]Xov-Ta> (-o^xw) 8i]Xov-or0w (-
D. 2 8i]XoO-TOv (-6exo^) 8r]Xov-<r0ov (-
3 SrjXov-Twv (-o^xw^) 8r]Xov-or0fc)v (-
P. 2 8t]XoO-T (-6exe) 8r]Xov-or0
3 8t]Xov-vTtov (-o6i'xwj') 8t]Xov-o-0a)v (-
Infin. SrjXovv (-6eti') 8t]Xov-o-0ai (-
Part. SijXwv (-6wi/), -oiio-a, -ovv SriXov'-^vos (-06-), -TJ, -ov
PARADIGMS OF -yu VERBS
145
251.
Present System.
TL@r][j.i (0e-, 6rj) put.
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE).
Present.
Imperfect.
Present.
Imperfect.
S.
1
Tl-0T]-|ll
i-Ti-Ql\-V
Ti-0-)iai
e-Ti-Qe-[Lr\v
2
TI-0TJ-S, Tl0tS 6-r-0lS
Tl-0-O"ai
e-Ti-0-<ro
to
3
TI-0TJ-0-1
iri-0a
Tl-0-TCU
4-TI-06-TO
D.
2
Tl-0-TOV
4-TI-06-TOV
Tt-0-(T00V
-r-0-o-0ov
1
3
Tl'-0-TOV
-Tl-0-TT]V
Tt-0e-<r0ov
-Tl-0-(T0T]V
P.
1
Tl-0-fJlV
-Tl-0-JJLV
Tt-0e'-jie0a
e-TL-0e-fi0a
2
TC-06-T6
|- T -0-T
T(-0-<T0
4-T-0-(T0
8
Tt-0e-da-t
6-Ti-0-o-av
rC-06-vrai
4-TI-0C-VTO
'S.
1
TI-0W
Tl-0W-fJLat
2
TI-0TJ-S
TI-0T)
j?
3
Tl-0^
Ti-0fj-rai
o
D.
2
Tl-Ofj-TOV
Ti-0fj-<r0ov
^5
3
Tl-OtJ-TOV
Ti-0f]-<r0ov
,c
P.
1
Tl-0CO-(JLCV
TL-e^-^Ga
2
Tl-0f]-T6
TI-0T1 (T0
3
Tl-0W-(Tl
Tl-0d)-VTat
S.
1
Tl-0lT]-V
Ti-0ei-|iT]v or
Tl-0o-(11]V
2
Tl-0frrj-S
Tl-061-0
Tl-001-0
.
3
Tl-0lT]
Tl-0l-TO
TI-001-TO
S
D.
2
TI-061-TOV
[Tl-0(t]-TOv]
Tl-0l-(T00V
TI-001-0-00V
e '
8
Tl-0l-TT]V
[TI-0IT)-TTJV]
Tl-0l-0-0T]V
Tt-0Ol-(T0T)V
P.
1
Tl-0l-p.V
[Tl-0lT|-flv]
Tl-0l-|i0a
Tl-0Ol-|l0a
2
Tl-0l-T6
[Tl-0lt]-T]
Tl-0l-0-0
TI-001-OT06
3
Tl-0l-V
[ri-OeCti-o-av]
Tl-0l-VTO
TI-001-VTO
TS.
2
TI-0H
Tt-0-OTO
t
3
Tl-0-TO>
Tl-0-<T00)
ti
D.
2
TI-0C-TOV
TI-06-0-00V
8,'
8
Tl-0-TO>V
Tl-0-0-0(OV
5
P.
2
TI-06-T6
Tl-0-(T06
hH .
3
Tl-0-VTWV
Tt-0-<T0a)V
Infin.
Tl-0-Vttl
Tl-06-(T0at
Part.
n-0is, -cicra, -ev
Tl-0-|lVOS, -
q, -ov
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see 200, 1. For
the third person plural of the present indicative active see 167, note 3.
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent ( 185). For
r0ei, n'0ei, and the optative Titfofyirp, see 170, 4.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 10
146
PARADIGMS OF -/u VERBS
252.
Present System.
8i'8(0ju,t (80-,
8a>-) give.
ACTIVE.
MIDDLE
(PASSIVE).
Present.
Imperfect.
Present.
Imperfect.
( S. 1 8l-8-|u
-8-8ovv
St-So-fica
-8l-86-(JLT]V
2 8i-8-s
e-8-8ovs
8i-8o-<rai
6-8-8o-<ro
3 8i-8w-ori
4-8-8ov
Si-So-rai
e-Si-So-ro
| D. 2 Si-So-rov
-8l-8o-TOV
Si-So-cr0ov
e-8i-8o-o-0ov
| 1 3 SI-SO-TOV
-8l-86-TT]V
8i-8o-cr0ov
-8l-86-0-0T]V
P. 1 8-8o-nv
!-8-So-|iv
8l-86-fJL0a
i-Si-86-(i0a
2 8-8o-T
-8-8o-T
SC-8o-o-0
-8-8o-(T0
3 8i-86-do-i
-81-80 crav
8i-8o-vrai
-8l-8o-VTO
S. 1 8i-8
8i-Sa>-}uu
2 8i-8w-s
Si-Sw
| 3 fc-S*
8i-8w-rai
o D. 2 Si-Sw-rov
S s
8l-8-<T00V
.^ 3 Si-8o>-TOv
8i-8w-<r0ov
% P. 1 8i-8<S-nv
8i-8(&-fw0a
2 8l-8-T6
8l-8tO-CT0
3 Si-Sw-o-i
8i-8(o-vrai
S. 1 8i-8oiTj-v
8l-8oL-|JLTlV
2 8i-8oiT]-s
81-801-0
^ 3 Si-Sou]
8i-8oi-ro
g D. 2 8i-8oi-Tov
[8i-8oiri-Tov]
8l-8oi-(T0OV
3 8i-8o-Tt]v
[Si-Soi^j-TTiv]
8l-Soi-(T0T)V
O P. 1 8i-8oi-Hi6v
[8l-8oiT]-fJLv]
8L-8oi-fi0a
2 8i-8oi-T
[8l-8oiT]-T]
8i-8oi-o-0
3 8i-8oi-v
[8i-8oii]-<rav]
8i-8ol-vTo
S. 2 8C-8ov
81-80-0-0
g 3 Si-86-TO)
81-86-0-00)
' D. 2 81-So-rov
8i-8o-o-0ov
3 8i-86-TO)v
8i-86-o-0wv
S P. 2 8-8o-T
8C-So-o-0
3 8l-86-VTQ)V
8i-86-o-0o)v
Infin. 8i-86-vai
8i-8o-o-0ai
Part. 8i-8ov's, -oOtra, -6v
8i-86-(ivos,
-TJ, -0V
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see 200, 1. For
the third person plural of the present indicative active see 167, note 3.
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent ( 185). For
<?5t5ovs, <?5t5ov, and 5/5ov, see 170, 4.
PARADIGMS OF -/xt VERBS
147
253.
Present System.
KTTTfJfJil (cTTtt-j O"T
77-) se/.
ACTIVE.
MIDDLE
(PASSIVE).
Present.
Imperfect.
Present.
Imperfect.
f S. 1 I-O-TTJ-H.I
i-<rrt\-v
i-o-ra-jjiai
t-0-T<X-|JL1]V
2 'i-<TTT]-S
t'-o-Tii-s
I'-a-ra-crai
fc'-o-ra-cro
i
3 i-o"TT]-cri
t-CTTt]
i-o-Ta-rai
fc'-<TTa-TO
D. 2 !'-<rra-TOv
H-o-ra-TOv
i'-o-Ta-<r0ov
t'-<TTa-(T0OV
1
3 I'-arTa-TOv
t-O*Td-TT]V
i-<TTa-(r0ov
t-<TTd-0-0T]V
$
P. 1 -<TTa-p.V
-0-Ta-|AV
t-o-Td-(i0a
t-<TTa-[jL0a
2 1-<TTCI-T
t-<rra-T
i-o-ra-o-Oe
i!-o-Ta-<r0
3 l-<TTa<ri
t-crra-crav
i-o"Ta-vTai
t'-o-ra-vTO
S. '1 l-O-TW
I-O-TW-K.CU
2 l-0-TTJ-S
l-o-rfi
|
3 l-O-TTJ
l-(TTT]-Tai
1 <
D. 2 l-0-TTJ-TOV
l-(TT11-<r00V
3 l-0-TTl-TOV
l-<TTt]-(r0OV
oo
P. 1 1-0-TW-fUV
l-<TTW-Hl0a
2 l-o-Tfj-Te
l-O-TTl-0-06
1 3 l-O-TW-OTl
l-(TT(0-VTai
S. 1 i-<rra.Li\-v
l-o-rat-^v
2 l-o-TaCT]-s
i-o-rai-o
3 t-o-raiT]
l-trrai-TO
,
D. 2 l-O-TCU-TOV
[l-o-raCii-TOv]
l-(TTai-<T0OV
5
3 l-<TTa(-TTJV
[l-(TTai'<]-TTJv]
i-o-rai-o-Oriv
o
P. 1 l-<TTai-(xev
[l-(TTaiT]-Hv]
t-(TTa(-|j.0a
2 t-<TTai-T
[l-<TTaCT]-T6]
l-<TTai-o-0e
3 l-0-T<U6-V
[l-<TTaCT]-(rav]
I-O-TCU-VTO
f C3 O V
O. ^w l"(FTT|
I'-o-ra-o-o
CD
3 i-o-rd-Tft)
l-o-rd-trOa)
1
D. 2 i-o-ra-TOv
l'-<TTa-o-0ov
o
3 l-o-rd-Tttv
l-<TTd-(r0a)v
S
P. 2 V'-o-ra-TC
t-<TTa-<r0
3 t-o-rd-vTwv
t-o-rd-o-Owv
Infin. l-o-rd-vai
i-o-Ta-o-0ai
Part. l-o"Tas, -ara, -dv
l-<TTd-JXVOS 5
-T), -0V
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see 200, 1. For
the third person plural of the present indicative active see 167, note 3.
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent ( 185).
148 PARADIGMS OF -fjii VERBS
254. Present System
SeiKviifU (Set*-, present stem Se
iKw- 9 196, 5) sAow
ACTIVE
MIDDLE (PASSIVE)
Present Imperfect
Present
Imperfect
S. 1 8lKVV-Jll 6-8lKVV-V
SeiKvu-fxai
i-Scticrv-fU)v
2 SCIKVV-S 4-SciKvv-s
SciKw-crai
-86lKVV-(TO
C 3 SciKVV-O-l -SlKVV
'3 D. 2 8IKVV-TOV e-8lKVV-TOV
SEIKVV-TCU
8etKvv-cr0ov
-8eiKW-TO
6-8eiKvu-o-0ov
P. 1 8IKVV-(16V -8lKVV |1CV
SeiKvv-ar0ov
8lKVV-[X0a
4-8lKVV-<r0t]V
2 8lKVV-T6 -8lKVV-T
8IKVU-(T0
-8lKVU-<r0
3 8iKvv-o<ri 4-8iKvv-<rav
8eiKVV-VT<U
e-SeiKvv-VTO
S. 1 SciKvtla)
8eiKvv'wp,ai
2 8dKVVT|S
43 3 SeiKvvT] etc.,
from
',5 s deiKvtib) show,
& inflected like
8IKVVT)
8eiKvvT]rai etc.,
from
Seutvto) show,
inflected like
-
TratSei^w, 237.
TraiSeiJa;, 237.
S. 1 8lKVVOl|U
8lKWOl(LT]V
2 SCIKVVOIS
8IKVVOIO
^* 3 SeiKw'oi etc.,
SeiKvvoiro etc.,
tl \ from
*3
&* oeiKvvw show.
from
deiKvtik) show
inflected like
inflected like
7TCtl56f(tJ Q 2oT
TrcuSetfaj, 237.
S. 2 S(KVV
SeiKVV-OTO
3 SeiKvv-Tw
StlKVV (T0O)
' D. 2 8IKVU-TOV
8lKVV-(T00V
3 SciKVV-TWV
S P. 2 8eiKVV-T
SeiKvv-o-0a)v
6eiKvu-cr0
3 SCIKVV-VTWV
8lKVV-OT0(i)V
Infill. SeiKvv-vai
SeiKvv-o-0ai
Part. SCIKVVS, -v<ra, -vv
8KVV'-^VOS, -t|,
-ov
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
For the third person plural of the present indicative active see 167, note 3.
The infinitive and participle active are irregular in accent ( 185).
PARADIGMS OF -p,i VERBS
149
255. Second Aorist System 256.
TiOrjfJU (0e-, Or]-) put
8t'8o)/x,t (So-, 8<o-^
i give
ACTIVE
MIDDLE
ACTIVE
MIDDLE
r S. 1 (0T)Ka)
I-06-HLT1V
('5coKa)
-86-p.l]V
2 (0TjKas)
-00V
(eSwKas)
-8ov
g
3/g_ K \
6-06-TO
(fi'SwKfi)
-8o-TO
>
D.2 -0-TOV
-0-<T00V
6-80-TOV
-8o-o-0ov
3 -0-TT|V
6-0-0-0T]V
6-86-TTJV
l-So-o-O^v
jQ
P. 1 i(-0-HV
l-0e'-jie0a
-8o-fJ.V
6-S6-fi0a
2 6--06-T6
-0-0-0
-8o-T
-8o-0-0
3 6-0-o-av
-0-VTO
6-8o-<rav
-8o-VTO
S. 1 0<S
0w-Hai
8a>
6co-(JLaL
2 0fj-s
0fj
6w-s
8J>
1
ts
3 0f|
Ofj-rat
So)
Sw-rai
o
D. 2 0T1-TOV
0t]-o-0ov
8w-TOV
8w-cr0ov
,
3 0f]-TOV
0tl-(r0ov
Su)-TOV
8di-o-0ov
"
P. 1 0W-[JtV
0w-fj.0a
S(0-(1CV
8w-fjLe0a
cc
2 0T1-T
0fi-(T0
8-T6
8w-cr0e
3 0-<ri
0w-vrat
Sw-o-i
Sw-vrai
S. 1 0Ct|-V
06l-HT]V
8oiT]-V
5oi fa.T]v
2 0t]-s
0CI-0
So^-s
Soi-o
.
3 0(t|
0l-TO, 001TO
8017]
8ot-ro
>
D. 2 0l-TOV [0lT]-TOv]
0CI-CT00V
8oi-TOV [8oiT]-TOv]
8oi-o-0ov
*
3 0l-TT]V [0l^-TT]v]
061-0-0T1V
8oC-TT]V [8oiTJ-TT]v]
8ot-O"0T]V
CO
P. 1 0t-(JLV [0IT1-|XV]
0l-|JL0a, 00l|JL0a
8oi-(XV [8oiT]-|lv]
8oi-{i0a
2 0l-T [0IT]-T]
0l-0-0, 0010-06
8oi-T [8oil]-T]
Soi-o-06
3 0ie-v [0iT]-o-av]
0l-VTO, 001VTO
8oi-v [8oit]-o-av]
8oi-VTO
S. 2 '-s
00V
S6-s
Sov
S
3 06-TW
0-(T0CO .
86-Tw
86-(r0w
1 -
D. 2 0-TOV
06-0-00V
86-rov
86-O"0OV
1
3 0'-TCOV
0-(T0ft)V
86-Twv
86-<r0wv
P. 2 06-T6
0-(T0
86-T6
86-<T0
3 06-VTWV
0-(T0<OV
SO-VTWV
86-o-0ci>v
Infin. 0i-vcu
06-0-0CU
Sov-vai
86-o-0ai
Part. 0ts, 0i<ra,
0-HVOS,
8ovs, 5ovcra.
OO~ LL6VOS.
0-V
-T), -0V
86-v
-T|, -OV
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative see 211, 1-2. For
the singular of the indicative active see 205 and 211, 3.
150
PARADIGMS OF -u VERBS
257.
Second Aorist System
loriy/xi (ora-, crrry-) set
8tJ-a) en^er
evrpia/x^v bought
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
MIDDLE
S. 1 -<TTT)-V Stood
-8i-V
irpid-)XT]v
2 -<rrr]-s
-8v-s
lirpio)
6
3 C-O-TTJ
e-Sv
irpia-To
"el '
D.2 e-o-Tti-Tov
-8v-TOV
irp(a-<r0ov
_0
3 -(TTT]-Tt]V
4-8v-TT]V
irpid-(T0T|v
d
I-H
P. 1 6-<TTT]-|iev
-8{l-fJLV
eirpid-)Ji0a
2 -<TTTJ-T6
-8v-T
irpia-or0
3 e-o-TTj-a-av
6-8v-<rav
irpa-vTO
S. 1 0-TW
Sva>
irpia>-[icu
2 o-rfj-s
SlJT]S
-rrpiT]
0)
3 <TTTJ
8tlT|
irp(T]-Tat
+3
o
D.2 0-TT1-TOV
8T]TOV
irpiT]-(r0ov
B
3 CTT^-TOV
8vT]TOV
irpii]-cr0ov
S
P. 1 <TT(0-|X6V
8ti(OfJ.V
irpiw-{jL0a
2 O"TTJ-T6
8\)t]T
irpiT]-(r0
3 (TTtO-CTl
Svucri
irpCw-vrai
S. 1 <rraiT]-v
irpia(-|XTjv
2 o-raiTj-s
n-piai-o
.
3 o-raiT]
No optative
irpiai-TO
5
D. 2 O-TCU-TOV [<rTait]-TOvJ
is found in
irpiai-o-0ov
Pi
3 <TT(Xl-TT]V [_O"TCIITJ-TTJVJ
Attic. Cf.
irpia(-(r0T]v
P. 1 CTTai-|lV [(TTaiT]-(Xv]
211, 2 a.
irpLai-fJL0a
2 <TTai-T [<TTa(l]-T]
irpiai-cr0
3 <TTai-v [<TTa(Tj-<rav]
irpiai-VTO
S. 2 (TTTl-01
8v-0i
irpiw
j
3 (TT^-TW
Sv-Tft)
irptd-o-0a)
1
D.2 0-TT1-TOV
8v-TOV
irpia-or0ov
I
3 <TTT|-T(OV
Sv-TWV
irpid-<r0to)v
S
P. 2 0-TTJ-T6
80-T
irpia-<r0
[ 3 o-rd-vTcov
Sv-VTCDV
irpid-(T0a)v
Infin. crrq-vcu
Sv-VCH
irpia-cr0ai
Part. (rrds, <rTO,<ra, trrd-v
8vs, 8v<ra, 8v-v
irpid-fxevos
NOTE. For an explanation of some of the forms see 170, notes 1-3.
For the contraction in the subjunctive and optative of ^<rrrjv see 211, 1-2.
The subjunctive and optative of tirpidfj.'rjv are accented as if uncontracted
( 211, 2, note).
PARADIGMS OF fJii VERBS
151
258. Second Perfect System without Suffix ( 220)
IOT77/AI (ora-, orr^) set
SECOND PERFECT ACTIVE
Indicative Subjunctive
S. 1 (2o-TT]Ka) stand
2 (Slo-TTjicas)
3 (&TTT|ICC)
D. 2 2-crra-TOv
SECOND PLUPERFECT ACTIVE
Indicative
TT, etc.
(like <TTW, 257)
Optative
4-<rTaiT]-v, etc.
3 2-o-ra-Tov (like <TTaCt]v, 257)
P. 1 -o-ra-nv Imperative
~ ~<TTCl~T O ~(TTCl-wL
3 I-O-TOIO-I 3 e-o-rd-Ttt, etc.
Infinitive Participle
eo-rd-vcu eo-Ts, c-a-Two-a, I-CTTOS ( 131, note)
(l<TTi]Kl)
2-arTa-fwv
(l-<TTa-T6
<t-<TTa-a - av
259. Ot8a (for */ro^a ( 2 a), stem oi*-, e*8-, t^-, 14, 2),
a perfect with present meaning, is formed without redupli-
cation. Its inflection (somewhat irregular) is as follows :
SECOND PLUPERFECT
Imperative Indicative
TJ'STJ [fj'Seiv]
SECOND PERFECT
Indicative Subjunctive Optative
1 o!Sa ciSw
2 oicrSa elSfjs
otSe clSfj
tTTOV 6l8f|TOV
tCTTOV l8f\TOV
3
D.2
3
P. 1
2
3
to-rov
f|8(v)
TJ<TTOV
UT|UV
t<TT6
brcurt
Infinitive
etScvai
ct8eirT]v
etSei|iv |
ctSeire [-ir]T] t(rr
ctScicv [-iT](rav] I'o-rwv ^<rav,
Participle
is, etSxria, tS6s ; gen. etSoros, etc. ( 131)
259 a. Ionic occasionally has other (regular) forms from the stem
olda- : thus otSas, o?5a/uej>, orSacrt.
b. Homer has perf. 1st plur. td/j.ev ; pluperf. rfSea, fj8r)<rda (^e/5?;s),
7?5ee or y5ei (^etSet). 3d plur. foav: subj. 1st sing. ei'S^w, et'Su), t'Sew ; plur.
efSoAtey ( 160 a), eftere ( 160 a), ei5<ri : infin. W/iewt, f5/tej/ ( 167 e) : fern,
participle idv?a. Future efcro/xat and fl5ri<ro/j.a.i..
c. Herodotus has 1st plur. ?5/aej/: pluperf. 1st sing. g5eo, 3d sing. ySee,
2d plur. ^S^are ; future e/57?<7w.
152
IRREGULAR VERBS IN -
260. ~!T\\LI (theme e-, 77-) send is inflected nearly like
Tidrj/jLi ( 251, 255). The present and second aorist sys-
tems are inflected as follows :
ACTIVE
PRESENT IMPERFECT
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative
MIDDLE (PASSIVE)
PRESENT IMPERFECT
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative
S 1 T||U
tft> t'tJV
Cquu
twfiai >T]V
2 frjs, tcts
tfjs t'eis
t'ccrai
tfj t'eo-o
3 tT]<ri
t-Q, etc. t'ei
ttrcu
t-qTai, etc. t'ero
I). 2 fcWov
3 &TOV
Optative ^ TOV
1TT1V
LT00V
Optative t ' , <r90
teiTJV
tlp.T)V
P. 1 fc|lV
tetrjs ^K-'v
tefieOa
t io tcVeOc
2 fere
teCt] T
brti
teiTO t'<T0
3 ta<ri
teirov iccrav
t'tvrai
teio-Oov t'VTO
Imperative
teijtev, etc.
Imperative
teip-eOa, etc.
En
t'eo-o
WTW, etc.
tco-Oo), etc.
Infinitive
Participle
Infinitive
Participle
fc'vcu
tefs, teio-a, tcv
brfcu
te'jjtevos, -TJ, -ov
SECOND AORIST
SECOND AORIST
Indicative
Subjunctive
Indicative
Subjunctive
S. 1 (TJK<X)
?
to
ClflTIV
T
2 fi?ica.c^
*
l(TO
g
3 tflCf)
if, etc.
clro
ifrai, etc.
D. 2 drov
Optative.
cto-Oov
Optative.
P. 1 dflCV
i!
rfptfe
do
2 tire
(i'T)
eto-Oc
dro
3 clo-av
elrov
elvro
clo-0ov
ITT]V
iV9Tiv
Imperative
cl|i6v, etc.
Imperative
i'HOa. etc.
Is
ov
erw, etc.
<r6w, etc.
Infinitive
Participle
Infinitive
Participle
slveu
t't's, clcra. ev
Irfoi
C|XVOS, -T], -OV
IRREGULAR VERBS IN -p.L 153
In the optative, forms of the -w inflection (i'orre, totey, olro) are some-
times found ( 170, 4).
The future of irjfju is rjo-w ; perfect e?/ca, efytcu ; aorist passive eWrjv. The
aorists and the perfect hardly ever occur except in compounds.
261. Etju (theme Z-, el- ; Latin eo, z're) #0 has only the
present system.
PRESENT. IMPERFECT
Indicative.
Indicative
Subjunctive
Optative Imperative
S. 1 ct|u
to
\IOLfJLL. tol
:r]v
2 et
fgt
Co is
tec
3 etcri
<T1
tot
l'T
D. 2 trov
trjrov
toiTOV
trov
3 trov
ttJTOV
IOTT]V
t'rwv
P. 1 tfi v
ta>|icv
Coifuv
2 tT6
?T]T
toire
tT
3 ltd<ri
tw<ri
toitv
IOVTWV, trw
Infinitive
Participle
U'vcu lv,
loucra, lov ;
gen. IOVTOS,
lovo-T]s, etc. t'
ijo-av, f|<rav
Verbal Adjectives
lT&>S (lTT]TOS,
from ITW (-dw) go
1. Compounds of el/ut have recessive accent in the pres-
ent except in the infinitive and participle : thus ird^i^i
approach, Trdpei, etc. Imperf. Trapfja ( 184, 1), etc., but
infin. irapievai, participle Traptwv.
2. The present indicative of et/u, in prose (and almost
always in poetry), has a future meaning shall go (cf . 524,
note).
260 a. Homer almost always has fy/u with short t. For t'et (3d singular)
and Ufa (3d plural) see 170, 4 a, and 200 b. In the aorist indicative
he has rji<a and ZrjKa (with irregular augment). In the aorist subjunctive he
has ty and rjy (cf. 211, 1 a). For the imperfect indicative 1st singular
the Mss. give I'eiv, but this must be a mistake for IV-
261 a. Homer has also present indicative 2d sing, eiada. Imperfect
1st sing, rfi'a, T]iov\ 3d sing, r/i'e, i?e, fe; 3d dual (TTJV, 1st plur. r/ofj-ev;
3d plur. yio-av, taav, rj'iov. Subjunctive 2d sing, tyada ; 3d sing. ?/<rt;
1st plur. to/j.ev ( 160 a). Optative 3d sing, ieirj. Infinitive fytercu, i/j-ev
( 167 e). Future ei<ro/j.ai.
b. Herodotus has iinpf. 1st sing. Tj'ia ; 3d sing, ^i'e, 3d plur. r)'iva.v.
154 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -/xt
262. Elju (theme ea- ; Latin es-se) be has only the
present and future systems.
PRESENT. IMPERFECT
Indicative Subjunctive Optative Imperative Indicative
S. 1 ftjJLl CO IT]V TJ, TJV
2 el TJS C^TJS tcrOi rjcrGa
3 lorrC V[ eft] eo-rw -qv
D. 2 CTT6v TJTOV ctrOV, ei'fJTOV <TTOV TJCTTOV
3 <TTOV T|TOV etrTjv, elTJTTjv rTa>v
P. 1 <T(Jtv aifjiev etfiev, dr\\itv
2 <TT6 T|T tire, tt]T <TT ^T, -qO-TC
3 cUrt cocri eiev, eiTjcrav tcrrtov. eVrcocrav rjcrav
Infin. elvai Partic. wv, ovcra, 6v, gen. OVTOS, o\5<rt]s, etc. ( 129)
FUTURE indicative eVo/zcu, etc. (3d sing. eVrcu (20)); optative foolfiriv,
etc. ; infinitive eVeo-flcu ; participle ^o-6/xej/os, -?;, -oi/.
NOTE. The present indicative et'/u is for *e<r-/>ii ( 16) ; et is for *eVt
(originally ecr-cn ) ; eV-rt retains the original ending rt. The sub-
junctive (5 is for <o, from *eo--o>; the optative efyv is for *eV-t>;-v. The
infinitive eli/at is for *eo--vat ; the participle on/ is for ewy, from *ecr-coi'.
1. All forms of the present indicative, except the second
person singular el, are enclitic ( 70). But the third person
262 a. Homer has
Present indicative 2d sing. *Wi', e!s ; 1st plur. d/j^v ; 3d plur. etV/, edVi.
Imperfect 1st sing, ^a, ea, eoi/ (?); 2d sing, e^o-^a, ^a^a; 3d sing, ^e^,
eT/i/, ^T;I/, Ijv; 3d plur. ^<rai', eaai'. Iterative e<TKoi> ( 191 b).
Subjunctive 1st sing, ew, -et'w; 3d sing. eTjo-i, ^<rt, CT/, efy^); 3d plur.
ewcrt.
Optative also eots, eot. Imperative e<ro-o (middle). ,
Infinitive also f/j./j.evat (for *eV-/*ei'cu) , e/ie^ot, e/x/xej', e/xe^ ( 167 e).
Participle ewp, ^oOo-a, eoi', etc.
Future also eV-o-o/wu, etc.; 3d sing. eV-o-ercu, eo-erat ( 35), etrrai ( 20),
and (Doric future, 214) <?<r<mrcu.
b. Herodotus has
Present indicative 2d sing, els; 1st pi. efyceV.
Imperfect ea; 2d sing, eas; 2d plur. eare. Iterative <TKOI> (191 b).
Subjunctive ew, ecu<rt. Optative (once) eWoi. Participle &v.
IRREGULAR VERBS IN -/xt 155
singular eVrt takes its written accent on the first syllable
When it stands at the beginning of a sentence ; as
Be TI? ouro? / but who is this f
When it expresses existence or possibility ; as aol pev
eanv IBelv it is possible for you to see ;
When it follows the conjunctions et, /cat, or aXXa, or
the adverbs ou/e, /-IT;, or o>? ; as ou/c eanv is not.
NOTE. In composition the participle is accented as in the simple
verb : thus 7rap-wv present. In the subjunctive and optative, Tra/o-oi
(for -co, 170, 2), Trap-ei/xei/, etc., the accent is not irregular. See
170, 2-3 and 185, note.
263. $T|[ii (<a-, <f)ij- ; Latin fa-ri) say is inflected in the
present system as follows :
PRESENT IMPERFECT
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative .
S. 1 tout {>, <j>fj s , <|>fj, etc. Hv
2 <}>TIS (like <TTW, 257) e^o-ea or e^s
3 <}>T]<rC fyr\
Optative
D. 2 <f>arov ?4>aTov
3 cfHxrov c|>a(T,v, j,a^s, etc. .^
(like o-rairjv, 257)
P. 1 4>a.[iv c4>a(Jicv
2 <j>aT Imperative. g^art
3 (JXXCTL <j>d6i or 4>a0i, <}>a.T(o, etc. <(>a(rav
Infinitive Participle Verbal Adjectives
<j>dvai 4>ds, 4>a<ra, <f>dv, but in Attic <j>ar6s, <f>ar'os
<j>do-Kwv is used instead.
The future is 0^0-w, etc. ; aorist e^Tjo-a, etc.
1. All forms of the present indicative, except the second
person singular $77'?, are enclitic ( 70).
263 a. Homer has subj. 3d sing. 07777 ( 211, 1 a). For f<t>av (imperfect
3d plural) see 167 c. He often uses the middle forms of <t>-r)/j.l, which are
seldom or never found in Attic : thus imperf. e0ci / u77J>, e0aro ; impv. 0do,
a7, etc. ; infin. (frdcrdai ; participle 0ci^evos.
b. Herodotus often uses the middle participle <f>d[j.ei>os.
156 IRREGULAR VERBS IX -JJLL
264. Kcijicu (/cet-) lie, am laid (regularly used as the
perfect passive of TiOrj^i pu).
PRESENT IMPERFECT
Indicative Subjunctive Indicative
S. 1 K61JJ.CU K(0|iai, Kt'fl, KlfJLT]V
2 Kei<rai Kt]Tcu, etc. CKCKTO
3 KClTttl KLTO,
D.2 mfarOov Optative.
3 K t<reov MOIRV, KIOIO, , v
KCOITO, etc.
P. 1 KfCpda Kifj.e0a
2 K6 io-0e Imperative. eKcio-Oe
3 KtLVTUL KCIO-O, Kl<r0CO, 6tC. CKCIVTO
Infinitive Participle
KetcrOat (so also in composition : Ki|ievos
Ka.Ta.Kl<r6a, contrary to 184)
The future is Kel<ro/j.ai, etc., regular.
265. T HjjLat (*}<r-) sit retains the cr of its stem only before
the endings -rat, and -TO. It is found only in the present
system :
PRESENT IMPERFECT
Indicative Indicative
if-fiou. i]<r<u, ij<r-TCU ; rjcrOov, TJ<r0ov TJ'-(JIT]V, if(ro, iftr-ro
fj (i0a, T](r0, T]-VTCH rf<r0ov, Tf<r0T]v
Imperative Infinitive Participle T]-^0a, i|o-0, rf-vro
, etc. i]o-0ai
The subjunctive and optative of the simple verb are
not found.
264 a. Homer has pres. indie. 3d plur. KetVrcu, Ktarai ( 167 d), KeLarai.
; impf. 3d plur. e/cetj/ro, KO.TO ( 167 d), /ceiaro ; subj. 3d sing, /c^rat,
iterative 3d sing. ( 191 b) ^^-(r/cero.
b. Herodotus usually has -ee- for ei- in the 3d sing. (K&TCU) ; sometimes
perhaps in e/ceiro, Kei<r6ai (^/c&ro, /c^e<r^ai). He always has K^arai (= KeivTai)
and ^aro (= eKetj/ro). See 167 d.
265 a. For the 3d plur. Homer has rfarcu (elarat in some editions),
&ZTCU, and T?OTO (ei'aro in some editions), ^'aro (Attic ^rat, ^I/TO). He-
rodotus always has arcu, ^aro. See 167 d.
IRREGULAR VERBS IN -
157
For rjfjLai, Attic almost always uses the compound
rjfiai (properly sit down), which loses the <r of its stem
everywhere except in the form /caOfjvTo of the imperfect.
It is inflected as follows :
IMPERFECT
Indicative
Ka0TJ|n]v or
CK(X01]0-0
6Kd0T)TO KO,0T]CrTO
Ka0T|(r0ov Ka0f|cr0ov
K<X0T|<r0T]V K0.0T|0-0T]V
CKa0T)(r0 Ka0f|cr0e
o Ka0f|vTO
PRESENT
Indicative
Subjunctive
8. 1 Ka0i]|iai
Ka0w[icu. Ka0fj,
2 Ka0T)(rai
Ka0f]Tai, etc.
3 KC10T]TCU
D. 2 Ka07i<r0ov
Optative.
KCL0OLULT1V KOlOoiO
3 Kd0T)<T00V
Ka0oiro, etc.
P. 1 Ka0T)|i0a
2 K<X0T)0-0
Imperative.
3 Kd0T]vrai
KO,0T]<ro, Ka0T|(r0a), etc.
Infinitive
Participle
Ka0f)<r0ai
K(X0rjp.VOS
For the augment (
^/ca^/xTji/) see 174, 1
[.
266. ^HJJLI (cf. Latin a-io) say, is used only in present
1st singular fjfju, and imperfect 1st and 3d singular fy, rj
(jjv 8' eyco said I, rj 8' o? said lie).
267. Xpt] it is necessary is really a substantive with
which eVrt zs, is to be supplied ( 308). Outside of the
present indicative it unites (cf. 43, note 2) with the
forms of el/JLi into a single word : so impf. %/or?z> (for %prj
ty), and even with augment exprjv'. subj. ^py (for %pr] 77);
opt. XP 6l/r l (^ or XPV e ^)5 infin. xprjvai (for ^77
partic. %pe(t)v, indeclinable (for xprj 6v, 17).
FORMATION OF WORDS
268. Words are formed in two ways : (1) by Derivation
and (2) by Composition.
1. Derived words are formed by means of suffixes
(which are not themselves separate words) either from
roots or from the stems of other words. Thus, BLK-TJ right
(from the root &#-), St/ca-to? just (from the stem &/ea-) are
derived words.
2. Compound words are formed by combining two or
more words or stems of words into one. Thus, tVTro'-Sa/uo?
horse-tamer, neyd-Ov/ios great-hearted, are compound words.
Of course derived words may be formed from stems of
compound words. Thus, ol/coSopw (-eo>) build a house,
from ot'/co-So'/io? house-builder, is a derived word.
DERIVATIVE WORDS
269. Primitive and Denominative Words. A Primitive
Word is formed directly from a root by means of a suffix;
a Denominative Word is formed from the stem of a noun.
Thus, &y-o-v yoke is a primitive word, being formed from
the root &y- by means of the suffix -o-. From the stem
158
DERIVATIVE WORDS 159
of &<ydv (fi^o-) is formed the denominative verb ^vyco
(-oft)) yoke, join together.
NOTE, Less correctly the terra Primitive Word is sometimes
applied to a word formed by means of a suffix from the theme of
a verb.
270. Roots. The root of a word, like the perfume of
a flower, has no separate, tangible existence. It merely
suggests the meaning of a word or group of words. Only
when united with inflectional endings (and usually a
suffix as well) does it receive definite form and meaning,
and become a full-blown word.
NOTE. Roots consist usually of only one syllable. From roots
steins are formed by means of suffixes, and from stems words are
formed by means of inflectional endings. (Very few words are formed
directly from roots without any suffix.) Thus :
Stems Words sfea
Aoy- ( Aoyo- ( Aoyos speech
271. Word-Groups. The same root often appears in
many different words which are formed from it in various
ways. Such words are commonly said to form a Word-
Group.
Thus, from the root <ypa<f)- are derived (directly or
indirectly)
ypd(f)-ci) mark, write, ^pap-fAr) (f or *ypa(f)-/jiv, 27, 1)
writing, line,
? painter, 7/oa/-i-/-ia letter,
-t? style, pencil, 7/5a/-t-/uareu? clerk, secretary,
fypa<f)-itc6s suited for writing <ypafjL-fjiarei>cD be secretary,
or painting, ^pa^-^ariKri grammar,
writing tablet.
160 DERIVATIVE WORDS
From the root oltc- are derived (directly or indirectly)
oZtf-o? dwelling, ol/c-eiorrj^ relationship, friend-
olfc-id house, ship,
olic-iov, olic-iaKOS, ol/c-iSiov olfc-eia) (-00)) make one's oivn,
(diminutives, 283) lit- olic-eiooa'is making ones own,
tie house, appropriation,
oltc-eTrjs house-slave (masc.), ol/c-a> (-e<w) dwell,
olie-ens house-slave (fern.), ol/c-rjTos inhabited,
olic-eTiic6^ pertaining to OIK-TJO-IS habitation,
house-slaves, OLK-rjfjua dwelling place,
olic-elos belonging to the olfc-ijrwp inhabitant,
household, oltc-ifa colonize,
ol/c-iartfs colonist.
These examples are enough to show the importance, for
a ready understanding of Greek, of a thorough knowledge
of derivation.
272. Changes of Roots in Derivation. In the formation
of words from roots, Greek has a very clear method of
differentiation by means of the vowel variation (o, e, (a)),
spoken of in 14: thus Aey-&> speak, Xo7-o? speech;
Xt7r-fi> leave, XotTr-o? left; o-TrevB-co hasten, crTrovB-tj haste.
See below, 277, 1-3 and 280, 1.
273. Changes of Stems in Derivation. When suffixes
are added to stems the usual euphonic changes take place ;
that is, vowels thus brought together usually contract,
and consonants, and consonants and vowels, undergo the
changes described in 25-39. Examples are:
a/o^alo? old (for *a/)^a-io-?), /SacrtXeia kingdom (for
*/3acrtXD-ia, 21), a\r)0tia truth (for *a\7)0e<r-ia, 37),
ojJL/^a eye (for *oir-fta, 27, 1), o\|? look, vision (for *oir-crt9,
28), Sifcaa-Trjs judge (for *&A;a8-T??9, 26), \7rta> hope
(for *\7rt8-ifi), 39, 2).
FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES 161
274. A noun stem may vary its final vowel before the
suffix, or, before a suffix beginning with a vowel, may
drop it altogether (cf . 44, 3) : thus ol/ct-Trjs house-slave,
from ottfo? (stem otVo-) house ; ovpdv-ios heavenly, from
ovpavd? (stein oupavo-) heaven.
NOTE. Before a suffix beginning with a consonant the end vowel
of a stem usually, but not always, has its long form ( 13): thus
7rotT]-cris a making, TTOIW (-o) make.
275. Formation by Analogy. In Greek, as in other
languages, many words were formed by analogy. Thus,
iTTTrev-co be a horseman is formed from iV-Treu-s horseman;
but since ITTTT- is common to more words (tTTTT-o?, mir-i/cos,
etc.) than is iTnrev-, the letters -eva came to be felt as a sort
of suffix, which formed iTTTrevco from ITTTT-, and so could be
used to form other denominative verbs from various stems :
thus SouX-eu&> be a slave (SoOXo-9 slave), /3ov\-evco plan
(/3oLX?7 plan*), Trai^-evco educate (?rat?, TratS-o? child).
In the formation of verbs analogy plays a great part,
and the important verb endings of this sort are given
in 292.
So also sometimes in the formation of nouns, endings
such as -ato? and -etc?, for -a-to-<? and -e-io-9, formed by
adding the suffix -to- to a stem ending in a- or e- (eu-, e<7-)
(see 287, 5, 'A^mto?, ot'/ceto?, /3a<nXeo?), are used in
similar fashion : thus oveoT-ato? (cr/co'ro?) dark, avSp-elos
(avrip, cbSp-o?) brave (for examples of such formations see
283,1; 284,1; 287,5).
FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES
276. A very few substantives are formed from roots
without any suffix : thus <Xo' (<Xo7-) flame
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 11
162 DERIVATIVE WORDS
277. The following are the most important suffixes in
the formation of substantives :
1. -o-. Masculine in -05 (agent) and -09, neuter in -ov.
(Roots with the vowel variation o, e, (a) ( 14), usually show o.)
rpo<-o-s nurse (rpe<-w nourish) TTO/XTT-O-S escort (Tre/MTT-o) send, es-
\6y-o-<s speech (A.ey-oo speak) cort)
Ipy-o-v work (pca> (p e y~> *PV~> po-o-s stream (pz-wflow)
38) do} vy~6-v yoke (cvy-vv[U yoke)
2. -a-. Nominative in -a or -77 ; all feminine.
(Roots with the vowel variation o, e, (a) ( 14), regularly show o.)
Tpo(j>-irj nurture (rpe^-w nourish) <f>op-a bearing (<e'p-to bear)
\oifi-ripouring (XetyS-w pour) aTrovB-trj haste (oTrev'S-w hasten)
3. -co--. Nominative in -o? ( 106, 1): neuter.
(Roots with the vowel variation o, e, (a) ( 14), regularly show e.)
ye'v-os race (ytyvo/xat (yov-, yev-, evy-o? pair (evy-i/u/u
yv-) &e born) V 7~) ^oA:e, ^om)
ct8-os form (018-, eiS-, 18- see) cvp-o M;i6?^ (cvpv? w;t
278. AGENT
1. -u-. Nominative in -eu? : masculine.
ypa<f>-ev-s painter (ypa<-o> write, ITTTT-CV-S horseman (tTTTros horse)
paint) tep-ev-s priest (tepds sacred)
2. -Tip-. Nominative in -r^/o : masculine.
o-tD-T-qp savior (<r<ou> saye) 8o-rrjp giver (StSco/xi (So-, 8o>-)
3. -Top-. Nominative in -TO)/? : masculine.
orator (ep-, pe-, p?y- speak-) oiKy-Ttop dweller (OIKOJ (-eco) dwell)
FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES 163
(-rd-. Nominative in -T?;? : masculine.
-Ti8-. Nominative in -rt? :
native in -rt? : )
c XT . ,. , > feminine.
-Tpio-. Nominative in -rpx : j
OlK-TT/-5 (6), OIK-TIS (^) hoUSC- OLV\r]-Tr]-<; (6), ttvA-ty-T/MS (17)
lave (OIKO-S house') flute-player (auAw (-e<o)
(6), 7roA?-Tis (17) citizen the flute)
279. ACTION
1. -TI-. Nominative in -rt? : feminine.
ret^w (7T010-, irei^-, TTt^-) persuade, 26)
2. -0*1- (weakened from -rt-). Nominative in -crt?: feminine.
Kpi-(n-s judgment (KpfvwjufJge) 7rpai-s action (Trparrw
c^, 28)
3. -aid-. Nominative in -<na: feminine.
ise (yv/xva<o (yv/u- SoKi/xa-cri'a examination
am, 30) (8oKi/xa8-) examine, 30)
280. RESULT OF ACTION
1. -p-aT-. Nominative in -/ia : neuter. A great many
substantives are formed from verb stems by
this suffix.
(Roots with the vowel variation o, e, (a) ( 14), regularly have e.)
TTpay-fML deed (Trpdrro) (Trpay-) pev-/xa stream (po (pov-, pev-,
(/o) pv-) flow)
2. -[io-. Nominative in -^09 : masculine.
o-s wailing (oSup-o/xai Aoyr-/xo-5 calculation (Aoyti^o-
/xcu (AoyiS-) calculate)
164 DERIVATIVE WORDS
3. -[id-. Nominative in -fJLrj : feminine.
yvw-fjLr) opinion (yi-yi/<o-o"Kto know) ypa/n.-/ji,rj line (ypa<^>-(o mark,
27, 1)
281. MEANS OK INSTRUMENT
1. -Tpo-. Nominative in -rpov : neuter (cf . Latin claus-
tru-m).
apo-Tpov plow (dpu) (-do)) plow) <epc-rpoi/ bier (<ep<D carry)
282. QUALITY (ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES)
1. -id-. Nominative in -id : feminine (cf. Latin memor-ia).
This suffix (cf. 287, 5) is the one most
frequently employed to form abstract sub-
stantives.
cro<t>-La wisdom (<ro<o-s wise) TrcuSeta (for *7rai8ev-td, 21) ed-
evSat/aov-i'a happiness (ev8at/xcov ucation (7rai8ev-a> educate)
happy)
2. -ia-. Nominative in -ia : feminine (mostly from adjec-
tives in -779).
(*a\.r)0e(T-La, 37) truth evi/oia(cf. 133) good will (cwovs
Xry^eo--) frwe) well-disposed)
This suffix forms also a few concrete feminines corre-
sponding to masculines : thus
oxoretpa (for *<ra)Tep-ia, 39, 4) upeia (f or *tepev-ia, 21) priestess
savior (fern.) (o-to-r^p savior, (tep-ev-s priest, 278, 1)
278, 2)
3. -TT|T-. Nominative in -TT?? : feminine (cf . Latin veritds,
-tdt-is).
swiftness (ra^u-s swift) veo-rrys ?/ow/A (veo-s young)
FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES 165
4. -auvd-. Nominative in -crvvrj : feminine.
8iK(Uo-(Tvvr) justice (Si'/oxio-s <T(D<j>po-crvvr) discretion (creo<pu>v,
just) discreet, 34)
283. DIMINUTIVES
(Often used as pet names.)
1. -LO (-tS-to-, -ap-io-, 275). Nominative in -tov : neuter.
TrcuS-ib-v 7rcuS-apio-v little child oiK-tSio-v little house (OIKO-S
(TTCUS (;rai8-) child) house)
2. -KTKO-, -lo-Kd-. Nominative in -tcr/eo? (masc.) or -
(fern.).
OIK-ICTKO-S little house (OIKO-? TraiS-ia-KO-s little boy} (wais
house) TraiS-t'cTKr; /i'W/e </&W / child)
284. PLACE (OR MEANS)
1. -io-. From substantives in -TT;^ ( 278, 2, mostly obso-
lete) and -eu? ( 278, 1). Nominative in
-Trjpiov and -eoz> (for *-ef-ioz>, 21): neuter.
SiKao-rr^p-io-v courthouse (Si/ccur- Kov/oetov barber shop (Kovp-ev-s
Ti^p (= St/cao-TTJ?) judge) barber}
BtajjiwTTfjp-io-v prison (*8ecr/x(jo-r^p r;o-etov temple of Theseus (77-
= SeoyxwT^s prisoner) <rv-s Theseus)
So, by analogy (see 275),
arj/Ji-eLov signal (cf. cn}/xa s?'(/w) ju,ov<r-aov sea< q/" ^/ie muses (cf .
fjiovara muse)
2. -cov-. Nominative in -o>z>: masculine (place only).
dv8p-wv men's room (dvr/p (dvSp-) ITTTT-WV stable (?7nro-s horse)
man)
166 DERIVATIVE WORDS
285. PATRONYMICS (descendant of)
J-i8d-. Nominative in -tSrjs : masculine.
' 1 -18-. Nominative in -19 : feminine.
MASCULINE FEMININE
y-s son of Tantalus TavraA-is from Tai/raAo-s
son of Danaus Aava-ts from Aavao-s
( 21) son of Peleus from Ilr/Aev-s
. Nominative in -a8?99 : masculine.
2. i
-a8-. Nominative in -ok : feminine.
MASCULINE FEMININE
Bope-aSrj-s son of Boreas Bope-a? from Bope'a-s
efrrt-aSr/s son of Thestius ecrri-as from e'cmo-s
286. GENTILE OR PLACE NAMES
!-v-. Nominative in -et? (cf. 278, 1): masculine.
-18-. Nominative in -/9 (cf. 285, 1): feminine.
MASCULINE FEMININE
Meyap-ev-s a Megarian Meyap-t? (Meyapa Megara)
> I-ri-
"1-T18-.
Nominative in -r?;<? (cf. 278, 4): masculine.
Nominative in -rt? (cf . 278, 4) : feminine.
MASCULINE FEMININE
Teycd-Tij-s a Tegean Teyea-ns (Teyc'a Tegea)
FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES
287. The following are the most important suffixes
forming adjectives :
1. -\)-. Nominative in -u?, -eta, -v ( 123) (from roots only).
178-^-5 sweet (cf. ^8-o/xat am ra^-v-s s?0{/j! (cf. ra^-o? swift-
pleased) ness)
FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES 167
2. -0--. Nominative in -779, -e? ( 120) (mostly compounds).
rys clear (<ra<-) i/^evS-rys false (cf. i^evS-o/xat h'e)
3. -jiov-. Nominative in -pav, -pav ( 120).
mindful (cf. /xi-tti/j/o-Ka) remind)
4. -o-. Nominative in -09, -a (-77), -oi> ( 117).
AOITT-O-S remaining (cf. AetV-w (XoiTr-, ACITT-, AITT-) leave)
5. -io-. Nominative in -to?, -to, -tov (sometimes -to?, -tov,
119). This is the most common adjective-
suffix.
ovpav-io-5 heavenly (ovpai/o-s OIKCIOS (for *oiKC-to-s, 274) do-
heaven) mestic (OLKO-S house)
TrAow-io-s (for *7rAovr-to-s) /Sacrt'Aetos (f or *^8a(nXev-io-s, 21)
wealthy (TrXovro-s wealth) kingly (^ao-iAev-s fa'n^r)
'AOrjvaios (for *'A^r;va-io-s) o-wr^p-io-s (cf. 283, 1) preserv-
Athenian (*A^vat ^4^ens) tn^r (crooTTyp savior)
So, by analogy (see 275),
(TKOT-CUOS tn darkness (O-KOTO? dvSp-eio? manly (dn;p,
darkness) man)
6. -iKO- (-/co-). Nominative in -o?, -/CTJ, -/coV. Next to -io-,
this is the most frequent adjective-suffix.
/xovcr-iKO-5 musical (fj.ov<Ta muse) O"/CCTTT-IKO-S reflective (O-KCTTTO-?,
<^v(r-tKO-s natural (<f>v(Tt-<s nature) verbal of (TKeV-ro/xat investi-
iroXe/x-tKO-s warlike (TroAe/xo-s war)
7. -vo-. Nominative in -i>o9, -^, -vdv.
$tL-v6-s terrible (ci. -BeL-(ra feared) orvy-vo-s 7<a^erf (cf . crrvy-S) (-o>)
oAyeii/o-s (for *dAye<r-vo-s) pain- hate)
ful (aXyos pain)
168 DERIVATIVE WORDS
8. -po- (-e/jo-, -u/30-). Nominative in -/oo?, -/>a, -pov.
eX$-po-s hateful (cf . l^0-o<shatred) (3Xaj3-ep6-<s injurious (cf.
Aa/xTT-po-s bright (cf. Aa/X7r-a) injury)
shine) e;(-vpo-s secure (f *X~
9. -Xo- (-eXo-, -aXeo-). Nominative in -Xo?, -X?;, -Xoi/ (-aXeo?,
-aXe'a, -a\eov).
oei-Xo-s timid (cf. -8ei-cra feared) et/c-eAo-s //A'e (cf. eiK-ws Z/^e)
cnwTny-Ao-s stYen^ (o-iwTny silence) Kep8-aAeo-s shrewd (cf. KepS-os
jjratn)
288. MATERIAL OR SOURCE
1. -o- (for -to-, the. same as -to- in 287, 5).
Xpvcrov? golden, for ^pvc-c-o?, XP^" " IO " S (Homer), from xpvcro-s #0W.
2. -LVO-. Nominative in -tz>o?, -ti/iy, -ti/oi/ (cf. 287, 7).
Ai'0-ivo-s o/ sfone (At^o-s stone) avOpwtr-ivo-s human (av0po>7ro-s
289. FULLNESS OR ABUNDANCE
1. -VT- (for earlier -pevr-}. Nominative in -et?, -ecrcra, -e
(mostly poetic).
graceful (^api-s grace) dve/xo-s windy (ave/xo-s wind)
FORMATION OF ADVERBS
290. Beside the adverbs regularly formed from adjectives
( 137) and from pronominal stems ( 137, 1), and the
nouns used adverbially ( 137, 1), adverbs are formed
also by means of certain endings approaching the nature of
suffixes (cf. 137, 2). Of these the more important are:
1. -86v.
o-^-8ov nearly (cf. e^w (*(re^-, ofJio6vfj.-a.-S6v with one accord
o- X e-, 38) hold)
FORMATION OF VERBS 169
2. -S-qv.
/SoL-Syv on foot (cf. flaivd) (/?a-) Kpv/S-fyv secretly (cf. Kpv7rra>
go) (Kpvfi-) hide)
3. -T.
aAAo-T aZ another time (aAAo-s TTOLVTO-TC. at all times (?ras all)
other)
4. -dias.
Terp-a/as ybwr ft'mes (re'i-rapes TroAA-a/a? many times (?roAAot
NOTE. Some adverbs end also in -a: thus yuaXa very, ra^a quickly.
FORMATION OF VERBS
291. Primitive verbs (such as (^rj-^i or \ey-a) say) are
formed directly from roots ( 165), while denominative
verbs are formed from the stems of nouns.
292. The Suffix -i?_~- The suffix by which nearly all
denominative verbs were originally formed is -i ~ (or more
properly -/I), but between vowels the i disappeared ( 21),
and with consonants it combined to form other letters
( 39). Thus arose several classes of denominative verbs,
their form depending on the form of the noun from which
they were derived, then by analogy ( 275) the endings
of these verbs were used to form other similar verbs from
various noun stems. The most important of these classes
(as seen in the present indicative) are given below :
1. (-O-OD). From stems in -o- By analogy ( 275) -oco.
(mostly causative).
(4?7/Ai-o<jo) punish
877X0) (S^Xo-co) make plain, from penalty)
ain dvSpw (dvSp-oo>) make a man
of (di/ryp, dySp-os man)
170 DERIVATIVE WORDS
2. (--(o). From stems in -o- By analogy ( 275) -ea>.
(see 274) and -eo--. Tn X f.ipS> (e7rixp-eV) attempt
OIKW (otfce-(i>) e/weW, from OIKO-? (x et P nan d)
house oAyoi (dAy-ew) be pained (aAyos
TeAu>(TeAe'-a>,for*TeAe<r-ia>,37) pam), fut. dAyTJo-w, cf. 188.
Jinish, from TAos(TeAe<r-)ene?
3. (-a-io). From stems in -a- By analogy ( 275) -a&>.
(a becomes a from anal- yo ^ ( yo -aco) lament (yoos
ogy with -eft) and -oft>). m^)
Tt/xw (rl/xa-w) ^onor, from ri/xiy avriw (dvri-aco) meet
(rt/xd-) Aonor opposite)
4. (-cxi-co). From stems in By analogy ( 275) -<
ySao-iAev-w be king, from /3acri- (TOOV bow)
Aev-s
5. (-TT-O)). From stems in
-*-> -%> -T-, -^- (see
195, 1).
Kr)pvTT-(o proclaim, from
- herald
6. (-^-o)) (-<&>, -afo)). From By analogy ( 275) -ift> and
steins in -8- or -7- (see -afco.
iy5, 2). Tei^-i'^w fortify (ret^os ?ra/Z)
eATTt'^-o) ^ope, from eATrt's /xr/S-i^w/ai'or Me Medes (M>}8os
stone, from At^a? 8iKa-^a) judge ($iKr) right)
eady (eroi/xo?
292, 2 a. From stems in -e<r- Homer often has the older form of the
verb in -ew : thus reXe/w (for *TeXecr-tw) finish.
292. 3 a. Homer has d in some verbs in -dw : thus nevoivdw be eager,
rjpdw be in one's prime (see 199 b).
COMPOUND WORDS 171
7. (-XX-co). From stems in
-X- (see 195, 3).
dyye'AA-o) announce, from ayye-
Aos messenger
J -IV-CD (for -v-ioi) |P_ By analogy ( 275) -atvw.
'1-lp-O) (for -p-ui)j KepSWvco gain (KepSo? gain)
Stems in -z^- (especially X aAe7r-cuW am angry (xoAcTrds
-az^-) and -p- (see 195, hard)
4>
/u-eAcuV-to blacken, from /ue'Ads
(/xeAav-) WacA:
TK/xatp-o/xat determine from
signs, from re/c/xap s?^?i
NOTE. Many verbs in -/xaiixo are formed from substantives in -/>ux
(gen. -/WIT-OS) which originally had stems in -/xav- (compare Latin
no-men with Greek wo-/xa, ovo-^txar-os, name) : thus o-rj/Miiva) (for
*crrjfJiav-Lw) indicate, from a^/xa, <r>y/>iar-os s/^n.
9. (-ijv-o); (suffix -We-? cf. By analogy ( 275) -
196, 1). From ad- dtAy-vvw ;>am
jective Stems in -V-. /xeyaA-wco
ijSu-v-o) sweeten, from i}Sv-s
293. Desideratives. Verbs expressing a desire to do
something are usually formed by tbe ending -creteo : thus
7eXa-o"eift) desire to laugh (7eA<w (-aa>) laugh*).
COMPOUND WORDS
FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS
294. Compound words are formed by combining two
or more separate words, or stems of words, into one word.
Their accent is usually recessive ( 64) : thus
172 COMPOUND WORDS
) long-lived, 7rpo-^ov\rj (jrp6 + ftov\rf) fore-
thought.
1. The compound word thus formed often follows the
inflection of its last part, as in the examples above, or it
may go over into a different form of inflection : thus
c/>iXo-rZ/i09 (TI/JLTJ) honor-loving, eu-yevrjs (761/05) well-born,
0eo-cf)i\r}S (<i A,o?) dear to the gods, TroXv-Trpdy/jiwv (jrpdyiJLa,
Trpdy/jLar-os) greatly active, meddlesome, ev-^pav (<$>pr)v)
glad-hearted.
295. When the first part of a compound word is an
inflected word, only its stem is used : thus \oyo-y pdfos
(Xo70-5) speech-writer, Treid-ap^os (jreid-di) obedient to
command.
1. A final short vowel (a or o) is elided if the second
part began with a vowel (but see 2 a) : thus xP~ 1 l r i^
(^0/30-5) chorus-leader (but Oeo-ei&rjs (0eo5 + /reZo?, 2)
god -like.
2. Stems other than -o- stems, when used to form the
first part of a compound word, have a strong tendency to
take the form of -o- stems : thus Atyx>-7roo? (\vpa) lyre-
maker, Trarpo-tcrovos (Trarrjp, 7rar/?-o?) father-slayer, par-
ricide, (f)V(no-\6yos (<u<7-5) natural philosopher, l%dvo-Tra)\r)<;
(t'^#i>5) fish-seller.
NOTE. Sometimes other letters (usually e, t, or <n) appear between
the parts of a compound word : thus 8aK^-^u/xos soul-consuming, aly-L-
/?OTOS grazed by goats, Sa-o-i-Sat'/xcoi/ god-fearing. This seldom happens
except when the first part of the compound is a verb stem, and such
compounds are usually to be explained as formations from earlier
(mostly verbal) noun stems which ended in this way. Analogy ( 275)
also probably played some part in such formations.
296. In compound nouns a, e, or o, at the beginning of
the last part often becomes long (TI or CD), unless the syl-
lable in which it stands is already long by position ( 53) :
FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS 173
thus <TT/oaT-T]7o? (a/ya>) army -leader, general, av-^vv^o^
(oVo/-ia) nameless (cf. 132, 1).
297. Apparent Compounds. Sometimes words often
used together come to be written as one word (cf. 71,
note): thus Aiocr-xopoi sons of Zeus (i.e. the Dioscuri,
Castor and Pollux), a7ro-7re)ii7r&> send away. Such words,
although they are usually classed among compound words,
are not real compounds, but only apparent.
298. Compound Verbs. Verbs can be compounded (see
297) only with prepositions (which were originally ad-
verbs modifying the verb) : thus eVt-/3a\Xo> throw on.
NOTE. It must be noticed that in denominative verbs formed
from compound nouns the verb is not compounded. Thus, 7ret#o/xcu
means obey, but disobey is not *d-7rei0o/Mat but aTreiftu (-e'eo), a denomi-
native verb formed from a-TrtiOrjs disobedient.
299. Inseparable Prefixes. Certain words used to form
the first part of compound words have no separate exist-
ence. The most important are :
1. civ- (before a consonant a-, usually called alpha priva-
tive) not, like Latin in-, English un- : thus av-aiSrjs
shameless, a-#eo? godless.
2. d- conjunctive : thus a-Xo^o? bed-fellow.
3. 8t)<r- (the opposite of eu well), ill, difficult: thus Bvcr-
TTOT/AO? ill-starred, Sva-^ep^ hard to handle.
4. T|ju- half- : thus r)pi-6eos demigod.
298 a. In Homer, and often in other writers, this adverbial use of the
prepositions can be clearly seen, for the preposition is often separated by
one or more words from the verb which it modifies: thus KO.I eirl nvtyas
^\0e and darkness came on (A 475), ava 5t Kpelwv 'Aya/j.t/j.i>wv \ CO-TV
and lordly Agamemnon stood up (B 100). This is often improperly called
Tmesis (cutting}.
299 a. The poets have also vrj- not and apt-, fyi-, fa- intensive : thus
unpunished, tpi-Ki>5i?is very famous.
174 MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS
MEANING OF COMPOUND WORDS
300. The meaning of most compound words is at once
evident from the meaning of their parts.
In nearly all of them the first part limits or determines
the meaning of the second part : thus ^rev^
prophet, o>o-Sou\o9 fellow-slave, a-ypa(f>os unwritten, a
Oearpov round theater, ^et/oo-TroirjTO? hand-made, apyvpo-Tot;os
silver-bowed = having a silver bow, fyXavK-wTris bright-eyed.
1. Observe that compound nouns may be either sub-
stantives or adjectives, and that often a verbal element
in a compound word may have either an active or a
passive meaning : thus compare \oyo-y p a $ 09 speech-writer
with a-ypa<f)0<; unwritten.
NOTE. In compound words whose last part is a verbal formed
by the suffix -o- the written accent regularly stands on that part of
the word which indicates the agent (or instrument) : thus /^T/OO-KTWOS
mother-slayer, matricide, /A^T/OO-KTOVOS mother-slain, i.e. slain by a mother ;
Ai0o-/:?oA.os stone-throwing, \L66-j3o\os struck by stones. When the written
accent is on the last part of the word, it stands on the penult if that
is short, otherwise "on the ultima: thus \oyo-ypd<j>os speech-writer, but
Xoyo-TTOios speech-maker, orpaT-r/yos army-leader, general.
SYNTAX
301. Syntax (o-iWaft? arrangement) treats of the re-
lations of words to one another.
302. Attributive and Predicate. An attributive word,
it is taken for granted, modifies another word ; a predi-
cate word is stated to modify another word. Thus, in
o dyaObs dvrjp the good man, dyaObs is an Attributive
adjective ; in o dvrjp dyaOos lariv the man is good, ayaOos
is a Predicate adjective.
In Greek, attributive and predicate words are usually
distinguished by their position with reference to the
article (see 451 and 453).
1. An attributive may be an adjective, a limiting
genitive ( 348-355), an adverb with adjective force
( 429, 1), or a prepositional phrase.
THE SENTENCE
303. A sentence expresses a thought, and contains a
Subject and a Predicate.
304. The Subject. The subject must be a substantive,
or some word or words having the value of a substantive :
thus o TTOU? ypdfai the child is writing, eyco ypd<p(t> I am
writing, ol TO re dvSpeioi rjcrav the men of that time were
brave, efyvyov . . . Trepl 6/cTafcocriovs about eight hun-
dredfledX.il. Hell. 6,5, 10.
175
176 SYNTAX
305. Subject not Expressed. The subject is not usually
expressed when it is clearly indicated by the verb ending or
by the context : thus a/covco I hear, a/covaare hear ye, eVaX-
Triyge he (i.e. the trumpeter) sounded the trumpet Xn. A.
1, 2, 17. vei it (i.e. Zeu? or 6 #eo?) rains, fydai they (i.e.
people) say, TOV XayUTrr/Jpa 6771)9 ^poo-evey/cara) let him
(i.e. the servant) bring the light close Xn. Symp. 5, 2.
NOTE. The origin of the so-called impersonal use of the verb
(which is comparatively rare in Greek) is probably to be explained
in this way ( 305): thus Set /xax^s (the condition of affairs) needs
a battle, Trapta-nevao-rac JJLOI (things) have been made ready by me.
306. The Predicate. The predicate is a verb or some
word or words equivalent to a verb : thus kdpelos r^adevei
Darius was ill, KO/oo? ftacn\ev<s TJV Cyrus was king, KO/oo?
r^v Cyrus was brave.
307. Copula. When a verb like et/u am,
become, fyaivopai appear, etc., is used merely to connect a
predicate noun with the subject, it is called a Copula (cf.
rjv in the last two examples above).
308. Omission of the Verb. The verb is sometimes
omitted when it can be easily understood ; especially the
copula of the third person eari is or elcrL are : as e^Opwv
abwpa Swpa foes' gifts no gifts S. Aj. 665. wpa \eyeiv (it's)
time to speak, rc5 VO^JLW Treiareov obedience (is) to be rendered
to the law. rt a\\o ovroi T) eTreftovKevaav ; what else (did)
these men than plot against us ? Th. 3, 39.
NOTE. Omission of the copula of the first or second person is
rarely found : eyo> . . . erot/xos / (am) ready Dem. 4, 29. av amos
you (are) to blame Xn. Symp. 6, 7.
THE SENTENCE 177
THE SIMPLE SENTENCE
309. A simple sentence contains but one subject and
one predicate, as Ar/peto? r)<r6evei Darius was ill.
310. Enlargement of the Simple Sentence. The subject
of a sentence may be enlarged by an attributive ( 302, 1)
or appositive ( 317) TO Mevcovos crrpdrev/jLa a^tfcero
Menon'' s army arrived, Aa/aeto? o /3a<rtXeu<? ycrdevei Darius
the king was ill.
311. The predicate of a sentence may be enlarged by
an object (direct or indirect, 329 and 375) or cognate
accusative ( 331), or by adverbial words or phrases :
thus rrf (TTparia aTreSajfce KOpo? fjaadov Cyrus paid the
army wages, evftcrja-e rrjv fjid^rjif he won the battle, ev
Xeyet? Trepl rovrcov you speak well about this matter.
THE COMPOUND SENTENCE
312. A compound sentence consists of two or more
coordinate simple sentences : thus rovSe Tre/jL-^ro^ev . . .
crv 8e Oavy him we'll send, and you shall die E. /. T. 614.
1. The subject or predicate of a compound sentence is
not needlessly repeated : thus o Se TreiOerai /cal o-v\\a/j,/3 ci-
vet Kvpov he was persuaded ( 525), and (he) arrested
Cyrus Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. el%e TO fiev Se^iov MeWz/ /cal ol
(rvv avru) Menon occupied the right wing, and those with him
(occupied it) Xn. A. 1, 2, 15. av re yap f/ E\\7jv el /cat
for you are a G-reek, and (so are) we Xn. A. 2, 1, 16.
NOTE. Here belongs the phrase KOL ovros and he, and tins, com-
monly found in the neuter plural /ecu TO.VTO. and that too : thus Mei/on/a
Se OVK e^T6, Kat ravra Trap' 'Apiaiot; wi/ rov MeVwvo? e'vov he did not
ask for Menon, and that too (he didn't do) although he was from Ariaeus,
Menon's guest-friend Xn. A. 2, 4, 15.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 12
178 SYNTAX
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE
313. A complex sentence consists of a main and a sub-
ordinate sentence: thus KOI /3ao-t,\ev<; /jiev Brj, eTrel rj/cova-e
TiacrcKfrepvovs TOV Kvpou aro\ov, CLVTI Trapecrfcevd^ero and
the King, of course, when he had heard from Tissaphernes of
Cyrus move, made counter-preparations Xn. A. 1, 2, 5.
e I ^ev Srj Si tea i a TTOirfaw OVK olSa whether I shall do
right I know not Xn. A. 1, 3, 5. eTropevofjLrjv r iva . . .
a)<t>6\oi7]v avrov I marched to help him Xn. A. 1, 3, 4.
NOTE. A complex sentence may include more than one subordi-
nate sentence, and a subordinate sentence may in turn have other
subordinate sentences dependent on it : thus 6 8' MS aTrfjXOe . . ., (3ov-
Aeverai OTTW? /xr/Trore T6 carat CTTI T<3 d8eA<a>, aAAa, yjv Suv^rat, /3(i(n-
\tvcru avr eKctVoi) wlien he came back . . ., he planned to be no longer in
the power of his brother, but, if possible, to be king in his stead. Subor-
dinated to the main sentence, fiovXevtrai, are the sentences o>s
aTT^X^e, OTTCOS . . . ecrrai, and . . . /JamAeixrei, while . . . /JacnAewrei
has dependent on it another subordinate sentence, rjv SWITCH Xn. A.
1, 1, 4.
AGREEMENT
314. General Principles of Agreement. The inflected
parts of speech, in general, indicate their relations with
other words by agreeing, so far as possible, in gender,
number, case, and person, with the words they modify.
So a word in apposition with another word stands in the
same case ( 317), an adjective agrees with its substan-
tive in gender, number, and case ( 420), a pronoun takes
the number and gender (and sometimes the person) of
its antecedent ( 462), and a finite verb agrees with its
subject in number and person ( 495).
NOTE. Observe that as verbs have no distinction of gender, so
substantives (and some pronouns, 462) have no distinction of person,
and may be used with any person (although most frequently with the
AGREEMENT 179
third), as: e/uoTOKA.^? rJKWTrapa <re(I), Themistocles, have come to you
Th. 1, 137. ei /?ovAe<r0e /xoc ot re orpaTT/yot Kat ot Xo^ayot eA.$eiv . . .
if (you) generals and captains are willing to come and see me Xn. A. 2,
5, 25. os ye KeAevas (you) w#o bid Xn. J/em. 2, 3, 15.
315. Construction according to Sense. A word not
infrequently violates the formal rules of grammar by
agreeing with the real gender or number of the word it
modifies.
So a collective substantive often has a verb or participle
in the plural ( 321, 500) ; neuter words or circumlocu-
tions (like J3ij] ( HpaK\r)Lr] mighty Heracles, lit. the might
of Heracles') denoting persons often have participles or
relative pronouns agreeing with their real gender ( 422,
464). .
316. Attraction. Sometimes a word, owing to the in-
fluence of other neighboring or preceding words, takes
different number, gender, case, or mode, from that ex-
pected, or even demanded, by the construction of the
clause in which it stands ; this is called Attraction.
So an adjective standing with an infinitive may be at-
tracted into the accusative, although the word it really
modifies is in the genitive or dative ( 681, 1) ; a pronoun
may be attracted to the case of its antecedent ( 484)
or to the gender of its predicate substantive ( 465) ; a
verb may be attracted to the number of its predicate sub-
stantive ( 501) or to the mode or tense of another verb
on which it depends ( 590, notes 1 and 4).
SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES
AGREEMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES
APPOSITION
317. A substantive used to describe another substantive
word, if it denotes the same thing, agrees with it in case
(Apposition) ; if possible, it agrees also in number and
gender, but this cannot always be: thus KOpo? *6
Xev? Cyrus, the king, KOpo? KOI Kpotcro? ol
Cyrus and Croesus, the kings (cf. 421), o E
Trora/io? the river Euphrates, but IleXrat Tro'Xt?
Peltae an inhabited city.
318. Apposition to a Sentence. A substantive (in the
nominative or accusative case) may stand in apposition to
the thought expressed by a sentence. KOL, TO neyicrrov,
efyofSelro on o^OJcrecrOai, e/^eXXe and most important of
all he was afraid because he was likely to be seen Xn.
Cy. 3, 1, 1. evSai/jLovolrjs, fjucrOov ifiicrTwv Xoywv happi-
ness be yours reward for sweetest words E. El. 231.
XOTE. A word in apposition with a sentence may acquire an
adverbial force: thus Sevrepov av 2oAv/xoun /xaxeWaro and secondly
317 a. In Homer the demonstrative o (5e) at the beginning of a sen-
tence is often explained by an appositive further on : thus 77 5' MKOVV a^a
rotcrt ywij Kiev and she unwilling with them icent, the woman A 348.
TO 5' vTrepTTTOLTo xaXfeov eyx * but it flew over (him), the brazen spear
X275.
180
AGREEMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES 181
(lit. the second thing) he battled ivith the Solymi Z 184. (For x^P lv f or
the sake of see 336.)
319. Partitive Apposition. A word in apposition may
describe only in part the word to which it refers : thus
oltciai a i fJLV 7ro\\al eTreTTTCotcea'av, o\lyat Be Trepirjaaif
the houses mostly had fallen, but a few were still left Th. 1,
89. OVTOL . . . a XX 09 d\\a \eyei these say one one thing,
another another Xn. A. 2, 1, 15.
PREDICATE SUBSTANTIVE
320. A substantive used as a predicate (cf. 326, 341)
agrees in case (often also in number and gender, cf. 317)
with the word it describes : thus avepes ecrre, (f>i\oi be men,
my friends O 734. Aa/oeto? (3acri\v<s rjv Darius was king.
77 TToXt? . . . <f>povpiov /carearrj the city turned itself into
a fortress Th. 7, 28. avrov o-aTpaTrrjv eTrotrjae he made
him satrap Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. TOVTOIS xptovrat, Bopvtydpois
these they use as body-guards Xn. Hier. 5, 3.
NOTE. Observe the difference between the construction of the
predicate substantive and that of the direct object ( 329). Words
meaning be, become, appear, choose, regard, name, and the like, can
have a predicate substantive.
PECULIARITIES IN THE MEANING OF SUBSTANTIVES
321. Collectives. A collective substantive, while sin-
gular in form, may really have a plural meaning (cf.
315) : so (77) ITTTTO? cavalry, 8^05 people, TrXr/^o? mul-
titude, etc. Tpoidv \6vT<s 'Apyeiwv crroXo? the Arrives
army (which had} taken Troy Aesch. Ag. 577.
322. Abstract for Concrete. An abstract substantive
is often used with concrete meaning (Antonomasia) : thus
/ucro? hateful thing (lit. hate), o\e6po<s baneful person
182 SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES
(lit. destruction), rcrj&evpa relative (lit. relationship) ; so,
by a similar process, ra oir\a (lit. arms) = camp, l%6ves
(lit. fish) = fish market, etc.
THE CASES
323. In earlier times Greek (or, at any rate, its parent
language) possessed three other cases besides those in regu-
lar classical use. These were : (1) Ablative (separation),
(2) Instrumental (including accompaniment), and (3) Loca-
tive (place where). The ablative has become one with
the genitive, and the instrumental has been absorbed by
the dative. Of the locative some traces still remain (see
76, note), but most of its forms and functions have been
absorbed by the dative.
324. The Greeks had a keen sense of the finer shades
of meaning conveyed by the different cases, and did not
hesitate to use different constructions with the same
word: thus atcoveiv \oyov to hear a speech ( 356),
a/covens \6yov to hear (the whole of) a speech ( 356
note 1), aKoveiv \6yw to hearken (i.e. be obedient) to a
speech ( 376).
1. Often a combination of words may demand the use
of a certain case which no one of them alone could
command: as e/jLavrfj Bia \6yayv a^HKo/JLrjv (= e/^avrf} Bi-
ekfyOijv) I have held converse with myself (lit. come through
words with myself) E. Med. 872.
2. So verbs compounded with a preposition are thereby
(either with the help of the preposition alone, or from the
general meaning of the compound) enabled to take a case
which the simple verb could not command. (See 345,
370, and 394.)
THE NOMINATIVE CASE 183
3. For practical purposes it becomes necessary to clas-
sify these various usages, and in the following pages the
various uses of the cases are given in detail, but in the
use of the cases, as elsewhere, analogy is at work, and it
must be remembered that not every use of a case can
be put into the grammatical pigeon holes here provided.
(As a rule, only the general principles are here stated,
and the exact usage with any particular word is always to
be learned from the lexicons.)
THE NOMINATIVE
325. The subject of a finite verb is in the nominative
case : thus r)<rdevei Adpeios Darius was ill, ocrrt? a<f)i-
KVOLTO whosoever came, fj,r)$els vo/jLicrdra) let nobody think.
326. A noun in the predicate ( 320) agreeing with the
subject of a finite verb is also in the nominative case :
thus Kvpo? /Sao-tXeu? rjv Cyrus was king.
NOTE. The nominative is not infrequently used in address and
exclamations where we might expect the vocative : thus Zev Trdrep
'HeAios B\ os TTCXVT' e<opa9 Father Zeus and the Sun who lookest on
all things F 277, KAeapxe *at Ilpo^eve KO! ol aAAoi ot Tra/ooi/res
"EAA^ve? Clearchus, Proxenus, and you other Greeks here present Xn.
A. 1, 5, 16, OVTOS, TL Trai<T\u<* Here you, ivhat's the matter? Ar. V. 1,
hard of heart! E 403.
THE VOCATIVE
327. The person (or thing) addressed stands in the
vocative case, often preceded by w : thus av Op wire, ri
man, what are you doing? Xn. Cy. 2, 2, 7. &>
Adrjvaloi men of Athens. (Cf. 326, note.)
184 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE
THE ACCUSATIVE
328. The function of the Accusative is to modify closely
and directly the meaning of the verb.
DIRECT OBJECT
329. The direct object of a transitive verb stands in
the accusative case: thus rbv av&pa 6pw I see the man
Xn. A. 1, 8, 26.
1. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek have no
transitive equivalent in English. The following are note-
worthy: bfivvvai TOU? #cou? to swear by the gods, \av-
Odveiv Tivd to escape the notice of anybody, alSelo-dat or
ai<T"vve<jQai riva to feel ashamed before anybody.
2. On the other hand, many Greek intransitive verbs
which are followed by a genitive or dative can be rendered
into English by transitive verbs. See 356 and 376.
330. Circumlocutions equivalent to a transitive verb
may, of course, take an object in the accusative (cf . 324,
1) : thus eVto-r^/xo^e? r^aav ra 7rpocri]Kovra they under-
stood their duties Xn. Cy. 3, 3, 9. o-vvOrjfcas e^apvos
jijverat he denies the agreement Dem. 23, 171. ecrri . . . ra
per e co pa (frpovricrrris he is a student of things above PI. Ap.
18 b. So the verbs \eyo) say and TTOLCO (-ew) do, with the
help of an adverb or cognate accusative ( 331), are enabled
to take a direct object of the person : as v or fcafccos \eyeiv
Tiva to speak good or ill of anybody (cf . 340) .
THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE
331. In Greek, almost any verb, intransitive or transi-
tive, may be followed by an accusative of kindred meaning
with the verb, to define it more closely: thus
THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE 185
to run a race, apta-Trjv ftov\7]v /3ov\eveiv to plan
the best plan, I 74, tjvrv^rjo-av rovro TO e u r v ^77 yu- a they
had this good luck Xn. A. 6, 3, 6, owtyvye rrjv (frvyrjv
ravrrjv he had his share in this banishment PI. Ap. 21 a.
332. Circumlocutions equivalent to a verb may, of
course, take a cognate accusative (cf. 330) : thus croc^o?
wv rrjv e/cLV(0v aofyiav being wise in their wisdom PI.
Ap. 22 e.
333. The Greeks were very fond of the construction of
the cognate accusative, and used it with astonishing free-
dom. Often the kindred meaning of the accusative is
only implied in the verb. The following examples will
serve better than explanation to make the matter clear :
Vw jBiov /jio^drjpov I live a grievous life S. El. 599. CLTTO-
\o)\ /ca/cov popov he has perished (by} an evil fate, a 166.
rjycovl&vTo . . . o-rdSiov they competed in foot-racing Xn.
A. 4, 8, 27. ra Av/caia eOvcre he celebrated by sacrifice the
Lycaean (festival) Xn. A. 1, 2, 10. So eX/co? ovrdaai,
to make a wound, 6$bv TropeveaOcu to make a journey,
7T\elv Od\arrav to sail the sea, e^e\avvei . . . o-raO /AOVS
r/oet? he marches three days'" journey, jrvp Trvelv to breathe
(forth) fire, TTV/O . . . BeSoprca)? looking fire r 446. 7; /3ov\rj
. . . e/3\ei/re vanrv the Senate looked mustard Ar. Eq. 631.
Seiz^o? el/Jii ravrrjv rrjv re^v^v I am clever at this business
(cf. 330) Xn. Cy. 8, 4, 18.
334. A neuter adjective or pronoun is often used as a
cognate accusative, since the substantive with which it
would agree is already implied in the verb: thus ovSev
tyevberai lie's telling no lie (i.e. ovSev -v/reOSo? i/reuSercu)
Ar. Ach. 561. rovro rjpcord he asked this question (i.e.
TOVTO TO eptoTrjjAa), fj,eyd\a a)<j)6\iv to help greatly, rl
186 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE
CLVTU) what use will he make of him Ar. Ach. 935.
TL KaraKetfjiai ; why am I lying down? Xn. A. 3, 1, 13.
335. Accusative of the Part Affected. Closely allied
with the cognate accusative is the accusative of the Part
Affected, found mostly with passive and intransitive verbs
(see 335 a) : thus ftdfiXijcu tcevecova you are hit in the
belly E 284. ra? <f>peva<$ vyiatveiv to be sound in mind
Hdt. 3, 33. a\yelv rou? Tro'Sa? to have gout Xn. Mem.
1, 6, 6. ri TO Sep//,' ewaOes what's the matter with your
hide ? (lit. what have you experienced in your skin f*) Ar.
Pax 746.
336. Adverbial Uses of the Accusative. From the free
use in Greek of the cognate accusative ( 333), there have
arisen several adverbial uses of the accusative : thus
rrjv Ta%icmjv (sc. 68ov) the shortest ivay (originally with a
verb of motion), rovrov rov rpoirov in this manner, %dpiv
for the sake of (originally an accusative in apposition with
a sentence, 318; e.g. efirjv %dpiv for my sake), Sitcrjv
in the fashion of, like (e.g. TrwXov Si/crjv like a colt*), ov
. . . dpxtfv n t &t att 0- e - n t (to make) even the begin-
ning), fjieya ^jd\a) greatly, TO TTO\V (ra 7ro\\a) for the
most part, Trpwrov at first, Trporepov formerly, TO XOLTTOV for
the future, reXo? finally, and a good many others whose
335 a. " WHOLE AND PART " CONSTRUCTIOX. In Homer (and some-
times also in other poets), an accusative of the part affected often follows
an accusative of the direct object : as rbv 5' &opi ir\rj!-' av^^va him, with
his sword, he smote (in) the neck A 240. y 0-e 7r65as vtyei she shall wash
(for) you your feet r 356. This construction is often explained as
"partitive apposition," but, since the word denoting the part appears
in the corresponding passive construction in the accusative case (while
the other accusative becomes a nominative, 511), it can hardly be an
appositive (see 512).
THE COGNATE ACCUSATIVE 187
meanings will readily suggest themselves. Here belong
also the comparative and superlative of adverbs in -&>?
( 138).
337. Accusative of Specification. The accusative case
of certain much used words like ovo^a name, t/^ro? height,
evpo? width, /^etfo? size (perhaps originally cognate), very
early came to be felt as adverbial, and soon other accusa-
tives came to be used in the same way : thus Trora/jLos
KuSyo? ovo/j,a, eSpo? Svo ir\e9pwv a river, Cydnus by
name, two plethra in width Xn. A. 1, 2, 23. TroSa? aircvs
'A^AAeu? Achilles swift of foot, Hm. rf^Xo? rd r ayra
rov re vovv rd r op par* el blind in ears, and mind, and
eyes, art thou, S. 0. T. 371.
338. Accusative of Extent. The accusative (modifying
a verb) is used to denote the extent of time or space :
thus e/jieivev r;//,e/99 irevre he remained five days Xn. A. 1,
2, 11. aTre^et 77 TlXdraia rwv r)/3a)v o-rabiovs eftBofjLt'j-
Kovra Plataea is seventy stades from Thebes Th. 2, 5.
NOTE. Many accusatives denoting extent can readily be seen to
be cognate: thus eeAawa o-TaOfJiovs rpets he marches (a march
of) three days' journey Xn. A. 1, 2, 5. e/?ia> Irt] e Kat ei/ei/TJ/covra lie
lived (a life of) ninety-six years, Isaeus 6, 18. From such verbs as these
the usage came to be extended to other verbs.
339. Accusative of Limit of Motion. The limit of mo-
tion in Greek is expressed by the accusative (in prose
regularly with the help of a preposition) : thus e%e\avvei
. . . e/? KoXo<rcra? he marched to Oolossae Xn. A. 1, 2, 6.
339 a. In Homer and other poets the accusative alone (without a prepo-
sition) is often used to denote the limit of motion : thus Kvia-r) 5' ovpavbv
we and the fragrance came to the heavens A 317. /j.vr)ffTripas d^f/cero
she came to the suitors a 332. Tr^/'ei yap "Apyos for he will take it
to Argos E. /. T. 604.
188 THE ACCUSATIVE CASE
TWO ACCUSATIVES WITH ONE VEKB
340. Since the cognate accusative may be used with
transitive verbs ( 331), it follows that some verbs may
take two accusatives, one of the object and the other
cognate : thus TOCTOVTOV e^^o? %0aipa) ere with such hatred
do I hate thee S. El. 1034. MeX^ro? /jue eypd-^raro rrjv
ypa(f)r)v ravTrjv Meletus brought this indictment against me
PI. Ap. 19 b. KOjOo? TO (TTpdrev/jLa Kareveipe ScoBe/ca
pepr) Cyrus divided his army into twelve divisions Xn.
Cy. 7, 5, 13. ravra TOVTOV eTrolrjaa this I did to him
Hdt. 1, 115. TOL"? 1&Oplv9iOV<S TToXXa T Kal K CL K CL
e\j he said many bad things of the Corinthians Hdt. 8, 61.
Kvpov alrelv 7r\ola to demand vessels of Cyrus Xn. A.
1, 3, 14. TroXXa bidder/eel, /JL 6 TroXu? /3/oro? long life
teaches me many lessons E. Hipp. 252. avafjiv^aw uyu-a? Kal
Tot/? . . . KivSvvovs I will remind you also of the dangers
Xn. A. 3, 2, 11. atyaipeicrOai, rou? . . . f/ Ei\\r)va<> TTI]V
<yr)v to deprive the Greeks of their land Xn. A. 1, 3, 4.
rrjv /jiev Ovyarepa eicpwirre rov ddvarov TOV dv&pos from
his daughter he concealed her husband's death Lys. 32, 7.
Among these verbs are those meaning to ask, teach,
clothe, remind, conceal, deprive, say (anything) of or do
(anything) to (a person), and many others.
1. When these verbs are used in the passive, the cognate
accusative is retained in the same case ( 512) : thus
TvirrecrOai . . . TrevTiJKovra vrX^^ya? to be struck fifty blows
Aeschin. 1, 139. ^OVO-LK^V . . . TraiSevOeis instructed
in music PL Menex. 236 a. rovro OVK e^revaOr](Tav in
this they were not deceived Xn. A. 2, 2, 13.
341. Predicate Accusative. Verbs meaning to make,
name, appoint, regard, and the like, may have a predicate
PARTICULAR USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE 189
accusative agreeing with the object ( 320): thus arparrj-
ybv avrov aTreoeige he appointed him general Xn. A. 1, 1, 2.
we riOrjaOa you make us wakeful i 404. vo/ju^e
/Jiev Trarpiba ol/cov regard your native land as your
house Xn. Hier. 11, 14.
1. This construction is exactly parallel with o KOpo?
o-Tparrjyos a7re&ei%@r) Cyrus was appointed general, and in
the passive construction both accusatives become nomina-
tives ( 511).
PARTICULAR USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE
342. Subject of the Infinitive. The subject of the
infinitive stands in the accusative case (see 629).
NOTE. Originally the accusative in this construction was probably
a direct object, while the infinitive (a verbal substantive, 628) was
used to define the verb still further, but as the infinitive partook more
and more of the functions of the verb, the origin of the construction
was forgotten, and the accusative came to be used with great freedom
as the subject of any infinitive.
343. Accusative Absolute. The participle of an im-
personal verb ( 305, note), having no grammatical con-
nection with the rest of the sentence, stands in the
Accusative Absolute ( 658).
NOTE. Xo doubt the accusative absolute, like the genitive ab-
solute ( 369), owes its origin to a loosening of its grammatical
connection with the rest of the sentence. So in a sentence like
p\0tv S=' re V^TTIO? eyvco eren a fool can see a thing that's been done
P 32, or SeSoy^ievov Se aurois evOvs fj.v aSvvara yv iTn\f.ip^tv it was
impossible to take up arms at once a thing which had been voted by
them (cf. 318) Th. 1, 125, the participle came to be thought of as
having little or no connection with the rest of the sentence (" when a
thing has been done even a fool can see it" and " it having been voted
by them" etc.), and so such participles came to be freely used as an
independent construction.
190 THE GENITIVE CASE
344. Accusative of Swearing. The accusative is used
in oaths, regularly preceded by vtj or pd : vtj or val yu-a is
always affirmative ; ov //.a or pd alone is negative : thus
vrj Ai'a by Zeus, val pd Aia yes, by Zeus, ov fjud A/a or
fjud A/a no, by Zeus.
345. Accusative with Compound Verbs. Some verbs by
being compounded with a preposition, which can be used
with the accusative ( 346), are thus enabled to take an
accusative which they could not otherwise command ( 324,
2): thus eo-TrXe'ozm rbv y \6viov tc6\7rov (= 7r\eovTi e? rov
. . . /c6\7rov, 398, note 1) to one sailing into the Ionian
Gulf, Th. 1, 24. rov rov $t,a/3afi having crossed this [river]
Xn. A. 1, 2, 6. VTreppri \aivov ov&dv he stepped over the
threshold -of stone, 6 80.
346. Prepositions with the Accusative. The use of the
Accusative to express Extent ( 338) or Limit of Motion
( 339) is often made more clear and definite by the help
of prepositions. The preposition efc into (as well as the
improper preposition 009 to), from its meaning, can be used
only with the accusative ; so also in prose ova up. Other
prepositions used sometimes with the accusative are d^i
about, Sid through, eVt towards, Kara down, //.era after, irapd
to the side of, Trepi round about, TT/OO? towards, vTrep above,
VTTO under. For the details of their use see 400417.
THE GENITIVE
*
347. The uses of the genitive in Greek can be grouped
under two heads : the true genitive and the ablative geni-
tive ( 361), but in many instances the two have become
fused together, and not every use of the genitive can be
THE TRUE GENITIVE (POSSESSIVE) 191
surely referred to one or the other in fact, many uses of
the genitive are very hard to classify: thus Sen-a? olvov
cup of wine may appear to some a partitive genitive ( 355),
to others a descriptive genitive (of material, 352, and
note) ; raim?? TJ?? yeveas elfu lam of this race may appear
to some a descriptive genitive ( 352), to others a genitive
of source ( 365), to others still a partitive genitive ( 355),
and many other examples of a similar sort might be quoted.
A. THE TRUE GENITIVE
POSSESSIVE GENITIVE
348. The genitive limiting a substantive may denote
Possession or Belonging : thus oltcld irarp 09 father's house,
Kv/jiara T?}? Oa\drrrj(; waves of the sea, 'EXeVty fj At 09
Helen the (daughter) of Zeus.
1. The possessive genitive can stand equally well in
the predicate: thus at Kw^ai . . . Hapva-ariSos rjaav
the villages were Parysatis* Xn. A. 1, 4, 9. vo^i^ei vp,a<;
eavrov elvai he thinks you are his own Xn. A. 2, 1, 11.
rwv yap l^dxi) vlic&VT&v KOI TO ap-^eiv ear lv for to rule is
also (the right) of those ivho conquer in battle Xn. A. 2, 1, 4.
NOTE. The possessive genitive is often used with the definite
article when the substantive with which the article would agree can
be easily supplied (see 424) : thus IloXe/xapxo? 6 Ke^aXov Pole-
marchus the (son of) Cephalus, TO. TT/S Tro'Aews the (affairs) of the
State; so also eis TOV dSeXc^ov to my brother's (i.e. to his house).
2. The meaning of the possessive genitive is often made
more clear by the addition of adjectives like TSto? one's
own, oiVeto? belonging to one's house, lepos sacred (to) : thus
t'epo? 6 %%>o? T?}? 'A/ore'/uSo? the place is (a) sacred (place)
of Artemis Xn. A. 5, 3, 13.
192 THE GENITIVE CASE
SUBJECTIVE GENITIVE
349. A genitive limiting a substantive sometimes ex-
presses the relation which would be expressed by the sub-
ject of a verb: thus ^>o/3o? TWV TroXe/jblayv fear of the
enemy (i.e. ol iro\e^ioi (frofiovvrai the enemy are afraid),
evvoua ra)v ITO\ITWV good will of the citizens.
NOTE. The line between the subjective and the possessive ( 348)
genitive is very hard to draw, for the two imperceptibly shade into
each other.
OBJECTIVE GENITIVE
350. The genitive may express the relation which would
be expressed by the object (direct or indirect) of a verb :
thus <o/3o5 TWV 7ro\jjLia)v fear of the enemy (i.e. (f)o/3el-
rai rt? rot/? 7ro\6fjiLov<; some one fears the enemy), evvoia
ITO\ITWV good will toward the citizens (i.e. evvoel TL<$
TroXtrat? some one is well disposed toward the citizens),
T/}? cro^/a? desire for wisdom, TOVTCOV alria the
cause of this.
351. Objective Genitive with Adjectives. Adjectives
kindred to verbs which take an object may be followed
by an objective genitive eTTLo-rrj^wv rrjs re %z^^9 under-
standing the art P t \. Cro. 448 b. o^lri/jLaOr)? r?}?
late in learning injustice PL Hep. 409 b. TOVTWV ai'
responsible for this Ar. Eq. 1356.
DESCRIPTIVE GENITIVE
352. The genitive may describe the substantive which
it limits: thus Trat? Berca erwv a boy of ten years, ^l\ia)v
Spax^wv &i/cr) a thousand drachmae suit, apyvpiov fiva a
silver mina, a/zafat crirov wagon loads of grain, Tpolrjs
TTTo\ieQpov city of Troy (poetic; cf. 317).
THE TEUE GENITIVE (PARTITIVE) 193
NOTE. The descriptive genitive is often subdivided into genitive
of measure, material, value, etc.
1. The descriptive genitive often stands in the predicate
(cf. 348, 1) : thus rjv erwv GO? TpiaKovra lie was about
thirty years old Xn. A. 2, 6, 20. 77 tcpwTrts ecm \i6a)v
the foundation is of large stones Hdt. 1, 93.
NOTE. Here doubtless belongs the infinitive of purpose with rot)
used by Thucydides and later writers ( 639) : as <f>povpiov tV CLVTOV
rjv . . . TOV fj.r) ecrTrXetv Meyapev<n /xrjS' CKTrXeiv /XT/8eV on it there
was a fort so that nothing should sail in or out for the Megarians,
Th. 2, 93.
353. Genitive of Value. With words of valuing, buy-
ing, selling, and the like, the genitive (perhaps originally
a descriptive genitive, 352) is used to denote the value
or price : thus pei^ovos aura rl^vrai they value them
more highly Xn. Cy. 2, 1, 13. S/m^/xr}? irpiacrOai to buy
for a drachma PL Ap. 26 e. rayv TTOVWV TrcoXovaiv rj^lv
Trdvra raydtf ol Oeoi the gods sell all things to us at the price
of toil Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 20 (from Epicharmus). TTOO-QV
SiSdo-Kei ; TrevTe /JLVWV what is his price for instruction?
Five minae PL Ap. 20 b.
NOTE. But if the price is regarded as the means of acquiring a
thing, it stands in the dative (see 387).
1. The genitive of value may be made more clear by the
help of adjectives like dl-ios worthy, avd^ios unworthy, dv-
rfto9 equivalent, etc. : thus agios TTO\\OV worth much,
avd^ia, e'yLtoO (things) unworthy of me PL Ap. 38 e.
PARTITIVE GENITIVE
354. A word denoting anything of which only a part is
considered, stands in the genitive case.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 13
194 THE GENITIVE CASE
355. Partitive Genitive with Substantives. A substan-
tive (or substantive pronoun) may be described by a geni-
tive denoting the whole of which it is a part : thus r w v
7r\rao-ra)v dvtfp a man of the peltasts Xn. A. 4, 8, 4.
r)\6ov e 'E<e<trou r^? 'IcoWd? they came from Ephesus (a
part) of Ionia Xn. A. 2, 2, 6. ol aXoWe? 'E\\ijv(ov
those of the Greeks who were captured Hdt. 7, 175. TroXXot,
err par tear wv many of the soldiers, ou&et? TWV TroXe-
no one of the enemy, e/9 TOO-OVTOV r 0X^77 9 to such a
(point) of boldness Lys. 12, 22.
1. Adjectives or adverbs of the superlative degree are
often followed by a partitive genitive ( 427, 1): thus
ySeXr^cTTo? avOpwTTcov best (man) of men.
Here belong also poetical expressions like Sia yuvaiKwi/ divine
among women 8 305, etc.
NOTE. The partitive genitive with substantives has commonly
the predicate position ( 454).
2. The partitive genitive can stand equally well in the
predicate: thus fjv &e KOI 6 ^.(o/cpdrr)^ TWV a^l M/Xi/TO*
a-rparevofjievcov Socrates also was (one) of those engaged
in military operations around Miletus Xn. A. 1, 2, 3.
e'yLte . . . 0e? rwv 7re7reicrfMva>v put me down as (one)
of the converts PI. Rep. 424 c.
356. Partitive Genitive with Verbs. Any verb whose
action affects the object only in part is regularly followed
by the genitive. Many verbs, from their meaning, are
almost always so used, others only occasionally. Thus,
verbs meaning to share, touch, take hold of, be full of,
begin, aim at, hit, miss, taste of, smell of, enjoy, hear, remem-
ber and forget, care for and neglect, spare, desire, exercise
authority (in some respect) over, and the like, regularly
THE TRUE GENITIVE (PARTITIVE) 195
take the genitive: thus Xa/3oz>ra? rov (BapftapiKov o-rpa-
rov taking (part) of the barbarian army Xn. A. 1, 5, 7.
TT}? 7779 erepov they ravaged (some) of the country Th. 1, 30.
Bel u/m? . . . ra)v Kivbvvwv ^ere^eiv you must share the
dangers Xn. .0e?. 2, 4, 9. crv\\rfao/jLai Be rovSe VOL Kayco
TTOVOV but I too will take part with you in this task E. Med.
946. Xa/3e Trerp^?, r?)? e%ero Ae seized hold of the rock,
and to this he clung e 428. ra 'Avaj;ay6pov ^tjB\ia ye/jiei
TOVTWV TWV \oycov Anaxagoras' books are full of these
subjects PL Ap. 26 d. rov \6yov Se ^/o%ero wSe and
thus he began his speech Xn. A. 3, 2, 7. TrouSo? opegaro
he reached for his child Z 466. vt/cij$ TTv%ijKajj,ev we
have met with victory Xn. (7/. 4, 1, 2. \CDTOLO <j>ayu>v
eating of lotus i 102. o\iyoi . . . atrov eyevcravro few
tasted of food Xn. A. 3, 1, 3. Scuro? ovrjao enjoy the
banquet r 68. TT}? /cpavyfjs yaOovro they perceived the
shouting Xn. Hell. 4, 4, 4. SeSoLfca /JLTJ e7rt\a0cb/jLe0a TT}?
oitcaSe 6Sov I fear lest we forget the homeward way Xn.
A. 3, 2, 25. aeOev 8' 6700 OLW a\,eyla) but I care not for
you A 180. TOVTCOV rcov ^aOrj/^drcov Trakai CTTiOv/JLO)
I have long been desirous of this learning Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 30.
Kpdrovv rrj<; Oa\daa-r]<i they were masters of the sea Th.
1, 30. Xef/3/cro^>o? f)yelro rov arpaTev /^aro? Ohiri-
sophus led the army Xn. A. 4, 1, 6.
NOTE 1. Of com*se, when these verbs affect the object as a whole,
they take the accusative: thus ov /xereAa^Se TO TT^TTTOV /xepos TOOI/
i/'T/^wv he did not get (as his share) the fifth part of the votes PL Ap. 36 a.
Oeov K\vev av&rjv he heard the voice of the god O 270. Trie oivov
drink wine i 347. 2Xa/?ov T>} ? w v 77 s rov 'Op o VT a v they seized Orontas
by the girdle (i.e. they seized Orontas, but took hold of his girdle) Xn.
yl.l, 6, 10. rjv rr/v yf)v OLVTWV re/xw/xev if we ravage their land Th. 1, 81.
NOTE 2. As partitive is to be explained the genitive with verbs
of imploring (poetic) : as c/xe XtoWo-Kero yovvwv she besought me by
(taking hold of) my knees I 451.
196 THE GENITIVE CASE
357. Partitive Genitive with Adjectives. Adjectives
(and sometimes their adverbs) of kindred meaning with
verbs which take the partitive genitive ( 356) may also
be construed with the genitive. See also 351. (Usually
such adjectives stand with a copula, thus forming a cir-
cumlocution equivalent to a verb ; cf. 330): thus /xero^o?
(Tofitds partaking of wisdom, /^ecrro? KCLKWV full of evil,
\r)6rj<; wv TrXe'o)? being full of forgetfalness PL Rep. 486 c.
eVtcrr 77/^77? /eei/o? void of knowledge (but cf. 362, 2 and
347), TrXouovo? (f)povija'(i)5 rich in wisdom, VTDJKOOS TWV
ryoveayv obedient to his parents PL Hep. 463 d. KCLKWV
ayeu0-ro<? without taste of evil S. Ant. 582. a/jLvrj/mwv fca/cwv
unmindful of evil E. H. F. 1397 (but cf. 351).
358. (Partitive) Genitive of Place. The partitive geni-
tive (in prose regularly with the help of a preposition or
adverb, see 398-418) is used to denote the place within
some part of which an action takes place : thus ievai TOV
Trpocra) to go (into any part of the county) ahead Xn.
A. 1, 3, 1. So also Sefm? and dpio-repds (sc. ^etpo?) on the
right and on the left (hand) : TO Se dpiareprjs ^e/oo?
ea-TrjKe and it stands (on a portion of the ground) on the
left Hdt. 5, 77. So Trepl rpoirios about (part of) the keel,
Sia TreSlov through (part of) the plain, Trepdv TOV Trora-
358 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the partitive genitive
of place (without a preposition) is freely used: thus ^ O$K "A.pyeos ^ej> ,-
icas he not (anywhere) in Argos ? y 251. epxovrai wedioio they are
marching along (in) the plain B 801. lev . . . TO%OU TOV ertpoio he
sat (in a part of the space) by the other icall I 219. ear Ids / ae<ro/i0dXon
e'crTTjKej/ 17577 fj.f)\a already stand the victims at earth's central shrine Aesch.
Ag. 1056.
b. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the partitive genitive of
place is occasionally found with adjectives: as tvavTtoi e<rrav 'AxciicD?
they took their stand over against the Achaeans A 214. More commonly
such words are found with a dative ( 376 and 392).
THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE 197
(in some part of the space) across the river, 7r\rja-lov
rov Seo-/jua)Tr)piov (in some part of the space) near the
prison, etc.
Here belong also the adverbs in -ov like TTOV, ovSapov,
etc. ( 137, 1).
359. (Partitive) Genitive of Time. The genitive is
used to denote the time within some part of which an
action takes place : thus /3acrtXeu5 ov ^a^elrai Be/ca rj^epwv
the king will not fight (at any time) within ten days Xn.
A. 1, 7, 18 : so frequently ?$/iepa? by day, VUKTOS by night,
in the icinter, etc.
360. Partitive Genitive with Adverbs. Adverbs of
place and time (rarely others) may be used with a parti-
tive genitive (see 358, 359) : thus TTOV 7/79 where on
earth (Latin ubinam gentium) . ovSa^f} \lyv7rrov noivhere
in Egypt, ov% opas r (v et /ca/cov you see not in ivhat plight
of ill you are S. Aj. 386. Troppco rov ftiov far on in life
PI. Ap. 38 c. 6^6 TT}? r)iJLpds late in the day. TTW? %?
So 77? ; in what state of opinion are you? PL Rep. 456 d.
NOTE. The partitive genitive with adverbs is by some authors used
very freely; as ^p^/xarooi/ tv TyKoi/re? being well off in money Hdt. 5,
62. 'A #771/0.101 GJS TroSaJv tlxov ra.\Lara. IfiorfQeov the Athenians, with all
possible speed of foot, went to assist Hdt. 6, 116.
B. THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE
361. The genitive performs also the duties of the'
original ablative which it has absorbed (see 323).
GENITIVE OF SEPARATION
362. The ablative genitive is used with words denoting
or implying separation : thus
198 THE GENITIVE CASE
1. With Verbs. aTrel^ov r^? 'EXAaSo?, they were dis-
tant from Greece Xn. A. 3, 1, 2. 77 vijaos ov TTO\V Ste'^et
T?;? rjTreipov the island is not far distant from the main-
land Th. 3, 51. volv aBe\(f>oiv eareprjOrj/jiev Svo of two
brothers were we two bereft S. Ant. 13. TOVTOVS . . . ov
Travaa) TTJS p%^9 I shall not depose these from office Xn.
Cy* 8, 6, 3. ovSev Siotcreis Xatpe^xw^ro? you will not
differ at all from Chaerephon Ar. Nub. 503.
2. With Adjectives. <$>l\a)v ayaO&v ep^poi destitute of
good friends Xn. Mem. 4, 4, 24. opfyavos avbp&v bereft
of men Lys. 2. 60. erepov TO rj$v TOV ayaOov the pleasant
is different from the good PL Go. 500 d.
3. With Adverbs. %<0/ot9 T^? 80^779 apart from the
reputation PI. ^t?. 35 b. a^eu TT^OLCOV without boats Xn.
^4. 2, 2, 3. TToppco r^5 TroXeo)? jfar off from the city Xn.
J?eW. 4, 5, 14. Siafapovrcos rwv a\\cov differently from
the rest Xn. Hier. 7, 4.
NOTE. Verbs of depriving sometimes take a genitive of separation
instead of the accusative of 340: thus TWV aXXwv acfxupoviJLCvoi
taking away property from the rest Xn. Mem. 1, 5, 3. TTOO-WV
of hotv much have you been bereft! Dem. 8, 63.
363. Genitive with Comparatives. Adjectives and ad-
verbs of the comparative degree may be followed by a geni-
tive (of separation) of the thing compared (see 426, 2) :
thus ^jot'cro? e Kpeicrcrwv fwpitov \6ya)v gold is more potent
than unnumbered words E. Med. 965. varepw ^povw
TOVTCOV at a time later than these (events) Hdt. 4, 166.
[TTovrjpla] Oarrov Oavdrov del baseness runs swifter than
death PL Ap. 39 a.
362 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the genitive of
separation (or source) is occasionally found (without a preposition) with
simple verbs of motion : thus TraiSds ^S^aro . . . Ktiire\\ov from her son
she took the cup A 596. padpwv iVrao-fle arise from the steps S. 0. T. 142.
THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE 199
364. Genitive with Verbs of Inferiority and Superiority.
Verbs denoting Inferiority or Superiority (or Com-
parison, 363) may be followed by a genitive of separa-
tion : thus rd%6i . . . Trepieyevov avrov you surpassed him
in quickness Xn. Oy. 3, 1, 19. TOVTOV . . . ov% rjTTTj-
cro^eda ev TToiovvres we do not mean to be outdone by him in
kindly deeds Xn. A. 2, 3, 23. rivals TOVTCOV eTrXeovetcreiTe
in honors you had the advantage of these men Xn. A. 3, 1, 37.
'Aftpo/cdfjids Be vcTTeprjcre TT}? fjud^rj^ but Abrocomas was too
late for the fight Xn. A. 1, 7, 12. TJTTWVTO TOV v&aros
they were vanquished by the water Xn. Hell. 5, 2, 5.
NOTE. Observe that the genitive (of separation) with these verbs
differs from the (partitive) genitive of 356 in that the accusative can
never be substituted for it ( 356, note 1).
GENITIVE OF SOURCE
365. The ablative genitive is sometimes used to denote
the source : thus /jidOe Se JJLOV KOI rdSe but learn of me this
also Xn. Cy. 1, 6, 44. C/JLOV aKovaecrBe Trdcrav rrjv d\tf-
deiav from me you shall hear the whole truth PI. Ap. 17 b.
Adpelov teal Hapvo-anSos yiyvovrat, vratSe? Bvo of Darius
and Pary satis were born two children Xn. A. 1, 1, 1.
GENITIVE OF CAUSE
366. The ablative genitive is sometimes used to express
cause : thus ^wo^evo^ yvvaifcds angry because of a woman
A 429. eOavfJLaaa rr}? roX/Ltr?? rwv \ey6vrwv . . . I have
wondered at the effrontery of those who say Lys. 12, 41.
TOVTOVS . . . olfcrfpco T??? aydv ^a\7rrj<; vd&ov I pity them
for their very serious infirmity Xn. Sym. 4, 37. teal cr^ea?
rl/jiwpijcro/jiai T^? evOdSe an it; ios I shall punish them for
their coming hither Hdt. 3, 145. The genitive with eve/co,
200 THE ABLATIVE GENITIVE
concerning, on account of, and ^dpivfor the sake of, is prob-
ably a true genitive ( 347): as e\ev6epia^ Iveica for the
sake of freedom Dem. 18, 100.
NOTE. Genitive of Exclamation. The genitive of cause is also
used alone in exclamations: thus dX\a r^s e/x^s KCIKT/S but (to think
of) my cowardice! E. Med. 1051. </>ev rov avSpos alas for the man!
Xn. Cy. 3, 1, 39.
367. Genitive of the Charge or Penalty. The genitive,
with words of judicial action, is used to denote the Charge
or Penalty: thus Stwfo^a/ ae SeiXlds I'll prosecute you
for coivardice Ar. Eq. 368. Swpcov eKpiOr^crav they have
been convicted of bribery (lit. gifts) Lys. 27, 3. rwv . . .
aSi/crj/judrcov rjvOvvQt) he was acquitted of wrong-doing
Th. 1, 95.
So with adjectives of similar meaning: eW^o? \i7rora-
giov liable for desertion Lys. 14, 5. TJJS ap^
liable to give account of his office Dem. 18, 117.
irporepas o\iyap-^id^ alriwraro^ eyevero he was most
to Uamefor the earlier oligarchy Lys. 12, 65 (cf. 351).
NOTE. The origin of the Genitive of the Charge or Penalty can-
not be surely explained, but most instances can be referred to the
genitive of cause ( 366): as SIWKOO TOVTOV K\07rrj<s I am prosecuting
this man for (i.e. because of) theft. On the other hand a genitive
like 6a.va.rov in Oavdrov rt/xto/xat I set the penalty at death (and so
by extension, 9a.va.rov Kpivtw to try for a capital crime) is almost
certainly in origin a genitive of value ( 35o).
PARTICULAR USES OF THE GENITIVE
368. Two or More Genitives with One Word. It may
happen that more than one genitive limits the same word :
thus TWV y la)v(t)v TTJV rjyefiovtrjv rov Trpo? Adpeiov 7ro\e/Jiov
the leadership of the lonians in the war against Darius
Hdt. 6, 2.
PARTICULAR USES OF THE GENITIVE 201
369. The Genitive Absolute. A substantive and modi-
fying participle having no grammatical connection with
the rest of a sentence stand in the Genitive Absolute (see
657).
NOTE. Xo doubt the Genitive Absolute (like the Accusative Abso-
lute, 343) arose from the gradual loosening of the grammatical
connection of a limiting genitive and participle, until such a genitive
came to be felt as an independent construction. Thus, in sentences
like ovSe TL f*-rJX 0< * pe^^evro? KCLKOV ICTT' OLKOS evpe'/xev and no way is
there to devise a cure for evil done (objective genitive, 350) I 250, or
ok 8' or /caTTi/os twi/ ets ovpavov tvpvv tK-^rai acrreos cu^o/xe'voto as
when smoke rises and reaches to the broad heavens (the smoke) of a
burning city (descriptive genitive, 352) <3> 523, the genitives came to
be felt as independent constructions, and to mean " evil having been
done" "a city being on fire"
370. Genitive with Compound Verbs. Many verbs com-
pounded with prepositions which can be used with the
genitive, are thus enabled to take a genitive which,
unaided, they could not command ( 324, 2): thus exftaiv
aTrijvr)*; (= ftalv ef a-Tr^i/?;?, 398, note 1) step forth from
the chariot Aesch. Ag. 906. irpoBpa/jLovres . . . rwv
67r\lTwv running in advance of the hoplites ( 398, note 1)
Xn. A. 5, 2, 4. r^ireipov 7ri/3r)va.L to set foot on land
(= $r]vai eV rjTrelpov, 408, 1) e 399. Especially Kara
in the sense of against (cf. 409, 1^): TOVTOU SeiXidv
KaTaty7]<f>ie(T0ai ( -v/r^/fecr^afc 8ei\idv Kara rovrov) to
vote cowardice against this man (i.e. to condemn him for
cowardice) Lys. 14,11. /care/Sdwv rwv 'AOrjvalcov they
cried out against (i.e. decried} the Athenians Th. 1, 67.
So KarrjjopM^-eoy) accuse, and similar words (cf. 409,
NOTE. Observe that the genitive with compound verbs may be
either a True Genitive ( 348 if.), or an Ablative Genitive ( 361).
202 THE DATIVE CASE
371. Prepositions with the Genitive. The use of the
Partitive Genitive (of Place or Time, 358, 359) and
the Genitive of Separation ( 362) or Source ( 365) is
often made more clear and definite by the help of prepo-
sitions (see 398). The prepositions avrL instead of,
CLTTO from, ef out of, Trpd before, and almost all " improper "
prepositions ( 418) are used with the genitive only.
Other prepositions used sometimes with the genitive are
a/ji<f>i about, Sid through, Kara down, fierd with, vTrep above,
GTri upon, irapd beside, nrepi around, Trpo? by, at, VTTO under.
For the details of their use see 400-417.
372. The Genitive of Agent. The Agent with passive
verbs ( 516) is regularly expressed by the genitive with
VTTO under, by, sometimes with vr/ao? or Trapd at the hands
of, less often by eV or UTTO from.
THE DATIVE
373. The dative in Greek inherits most of the functions
of three earlier distinct cases (see 323) : the True Dative
( 374), the Locative ( 383), and the Instrumental
( 386).
A. THE TRUE DATIVE
374. The True Dative (which belongs properly Avith
verbs or expressions equivalent to a verb) in general de-
notes that to or for which anything is or is done. (Hence
words denoting persons are more likely to stand in the
dative than those denoting things.) Some words and
phrases require a dative to complete their meaning ; to
others a dative may be added at pleasure.
THE TRUE DATIVE 203
DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT
375. The Indirect Object stands in the dative case :
thus Xi>eWe<7t? eSw/ce Ku/ow %pTJ/j,aTa vroXXa Syennesis gave
(to) Cyrus a great deal of money Xn. A. 1, 2, 27. eiceivw
avrrj r; xwpd . . . eSoBij to him this country had been given
Xn. Hell. 3, 1, 6. TOO ' A a K \ rj TT i o3 6(j)ei\ofjLev a\KTpvbva we
owe a cock to Asclepius PI. Phaed. 118 a. Oeoio-i 8e %e-
pas aveo-)(ov and to the gods they lifted up their hands F 318.
376. Manj" verbs, and circumlocutions equivalent to a
verb (cf. 330), normally require a dative (of the indirect
object) to complete their meaning: thus rot? VOJJLOIS
Treidovrai they are obedient to the laws Xn. Mem. 4, 4, 15.
&dvfid%eov dvrjKovaT)jaavT6s rolai err parr) yolai they
fought, in disobedience to (the orders of) the generals
Hdt. 6, 14. 7TL(TTvov avTa) dl 7ro\L<s the cities had
confidence in him Xn. A. 1, 9, 8. rw ^p^cn^
ewv being confident in the oracle Hdt. 1, 73.
la~)(ypws ru) KXea/j^co they were mightily angry at Cle-
ar chus Xn. A. 1, 5, 11. 67ro\^i TO Z? Spa^i he waged
war with the Thracians Xn. A. 2, 6, 5. f3acri\el
elvau to befriends to the king Xn. A. 2, 1, 20. ov firj
vrjs earj <^tXoi? surely you will not be hostile to your friends
E. Med. 1151. el rot? TrXeocrt apeaKovres eV/zei^, TOterS'
av IJLOVOIS OVK opOws a-rrapeo-KOi^ev if we are in favor with
(lit. pleasing to) the majority, we could not by any right be
in disfavor with these alone Th. 1, 38. TI ovv irpeiret dvSpl
; now lohat is suitable for a poor man ? PI. Ap. 36 d.
In general, verbs (and verbal expressions) meaning please, profit,
trust, aid, beji,t, obey, and their opposites (many of which are rendered
in English by transitive verbs), require a dative to complete their
meaning ; but the exact usage with each word must be learned from
the lexicons.
204 THE DATIVE CASE
NOTE. Only predicate adjectives regularly take a dative of the
indirect object (since an attributive adjective commonly has the
genitive, 351); rarely such a dative is arrogated by an attributive
adjective (or even by a substantive, 393) : thus AioAos . . . <tAos
aOavdro ivt Otolviv Aeolus, dear to the immortal gods K 2.
THE DATIVE OF INTEREST
377. A dative of the Person Interested may be added
to almost any sentence.
NOTE 1. Observe that the dative often adds the idea of personal
interest (Advantage or Disadvantage) to what might otherwise be
expressed by a genitive. Thus, compare the following: Adpeiov
Kat IIapu(raTiSos yi'yi/oi/rcu TratSes Suo of Darius and Pary satis two
children were born ( 365) Xn. A. 1, 1, 1. 5 aav Kpoto-w Su'o TratSes
Croesus was blessed with two children ( 379) Hdt. 1, 34. Aavaaiv
euro Xoiyov d/xwat to keep destruction away from the Danaans II 75.
Aavaoiai . . . Aotyoi/ a/uwov relieve the Danaans of the pestilence
A 456. So Searo ot (TKYJTTTPOV he received the scepter at his hands B 186.
NOTE 2. It is convenient to subdivide the dative of Interest into
" Advantage or Disadvantage " ( 378), " Possession " ( 379), Agent "
( 380), "Reference" ( 382), and the "Ethical" dative ( 381), but
it must be remembered that no hard and fast lines can be drawn
between these various uses ( 324, 3). Thus, in Sta/xeVet In KCU vvv
rots y8acrtXe{)(ri ^ TroAvSwptd the custom of giving cox//// gifts lasts
even to this day for the kings; the dative of Interest (/&unAe{)<n)
may be explained as dative of Advantage, Possession, or Reference.
378. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage. The dative
of interest may imply Advantage or Disadvantage : thus
7ra<? avrjp avrto Travel every man labors for himself S. Aj.
1366. O'L TO Trdyxpuaov Sepos HeX/a fjLerr}\6ov who went
to fetch the golden fleece for Pelias E. Med. 6. a-re^avov-
aOai Trdvras TM #ecG all to be crowned in honor of the god
Xn. Hell. 4, 3, 21. kavaolcn, aeiKea \oiyov afjivvov ward
off vile pestilence from the Danaans A 456. (So with a^vvw
alone: ry Tro'Aet . . . api'veiv KOL Oeols to defend the State
THE TRUE DATIVE 205
and gods Ar. JEq. 577. ) TOU$ 0/93,/ca? rovs ray
6evei varepricravTas the Thracians who came too late for
(i.e. to the disadvantage of) Demosthenes Th. 7, 29.
379. Dative of Possession. The dative of interest (or
advantage) is used with verbs like eifii am, or yiyvo^ai,
become, to denote possession (cf. in Latin est mihi filius) :
thus rja-av Kpotay 8vo vratSe? Croesus had two children
Hdt. 1, 34. elalv e/juol e/cel %evoi I (luckily) have friends
there PI. Crit. 45 c. Otm? efiol y ovoy^a Noman is my
name i 366.
380. Dative of Agent. The dative of interest with the
perfect or pluperfect passive, or with the verbal in -reo<?
( 666), comes even to denote regularly the Agent: thus
iravff ri^ilv TreTTOLrjTai, everything has been done by us Xn.
A. 1, 8, 12. roaavrd (JLOL elprjaQo) let this much have been
said by me Lys. 24, 4. rj^lv . . . irdvra iroirjrea (sc.
e'crrt) everything must be done by us Xn. A. 3, 1, 35.
381. The Ethical (or Emotional) Dative. The dative
of a personal pronoun is often used to denote a lively or
emotional interest which a person may have in something :
thus Kai [AOL /J,rj Oopvft/jaere and do not, I beg you, make
any uproar PI. Ap. 20 e. 'Apra^epvys v plv "TVrao-Treo?
6crrt Trat? now Artaphernes, you must know, is the son of
Hystaspes Hdt. 5, 30. KOI o avrjp aoi 6 veavias e/cetyo?
7rpo6\@(t)v rov \o%ayov Trporepos eTropevero and, would you
believe it, that young fell oiv stepped out in front, and marched
in advance of the captain! Xn. Cy. 2, 2, 7.
382. Dative of Reference. Datives expressing a remote
interest (or merely a point of view) are conveniently
classed as datives of Reference: thus acfxvv IJLGV evro\r)
206 THE LOCATIVE DATIVE
e^et reXo? S>; the command of Zeus so far as touches
you twain, has its end Aesch. Pr. 12. ^.w/cpdrr)? e'8o/m
Tlprjs agios dvai ry TroXe* Socrates seemed to be deserving
of honor from (lit. in reference to) the State Xn. Mem. 1,
2, 62. o\a)\ev co? o\a)\ev rolcriv eiboaiv he's dead as
dead may be for those who know E. I. T. 575. So in
the idiomatic expressions like el KOI eiceivw ^ov\o^evw
ravr eari if this is agreeable to him also (lit. to him
wishing) Xn. Hell. 4, 1, 11. 'ETr/Sa/^o? eV TTO'TU? eV
e%ia e(77r\ovTL rov 'loviov KoXnrov Epidamnus is a city
on the right as one sails (lit. to, or with reference to, one
sailing) into the Ionian Grulf Th. 1, 24. So &>? <rvve\ovTi
elTrelv to speak briefly (lit. to speak from the point of view
of one who has condensed the matter) Xn. A. 3, 1, 38.
NOTE. No hard and fast line can be drawn between the dative
of Reference and the dative of Advantage or Disadvantage, for a
good many datives can be referred to either class.
B. THE LOCATIVE DATIVE
383. As the heir to most of the functions of an earlier
locative case ( 323) the dative is used in expressions of
place and time.
384. Dative of Place. The dative (in prose regularly
with the help of a preposition) is used to denote the place
where (cf. 384 a) : thus eV rfj 7ro\ei in the city.
384 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) the dative of place
without a preposition is freely used : thus r6 W/JLOIO-IV fx uv with the bow
on his shoulder A 45. e?5e /JLVX v K\i(rir}s he slept in a corner of the tent
I 663. TT ed I tf Tr^o-e he fell in the plain E 82. d\X' oik 'Arpeidr) 'Aya/j.^fj.vovi
r/vdave dvjj.^ but it pleased not Agamemnon in his heart A 24. 6'o /cpdros
(TKC fjityio-rov Tracri Kv/cXwTretro-i whose power was the greatest among all
the Cyclopes a 71. otTidavoiai avd<r<reu you are lord among nobodies
A 231. valeiv 8pe<ri to dwell in the mountains S. OT. 1451.
THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE 207
385. Dative of Time. The dative (often with the help
of a preposition) is used to denote time when (cf. 383) :
thus rfj vo-repaia on the following (day), rerdprw erei tlie
fourth year, /jua vv/cri on one night, ev ru> avrw
the same winter Th. 2, 34.
0. THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE
386. The dative performs also the duties (in express-
ing means, manner, cause, accompaniment) of the earlier
instrumental case which it has absorbed ( 323).
387. Dative of Means. The dative may denote the
Means or Instrument: thus Xttfoi? e@a\\ov they pelted
(them) with stones Xn. A. 5, 4, 23. Irja-t, rfj a^ivrj he
threw the axe (lit. with the axe) Xn. A. 1, 5, 12. <yva>crdev-
Te? rfi a/cevf} rcov ojrX&v known by the make of their
weapons Th. 1, 8.
NOTE. The verb XP^P* 11 use 0- e - serve one's self with) regularly
takes the dative of Means: thus Aoyo> xP^rat they use reason Xn.
Mem. 3, 3, 11.
388. Dative of Degree of Difference. The dative of
means with comparatives and expressions implying com-
parison (sometimes also with superlatives) denotes the
Degree of Difference: thus rfj Ke(f>a\fj />te/o> taller by a
(lit. the) head PI. Phaed. 100 e. ov TroXXcu? ///Lie'/oou?
varepov not many days later (lit. later by not many days)
Xll. Hell. 1, 1, 1. TroA-t \oyijjiw rj f E\Xa? yeyove acrOeve-
arepr] Greece has become weaker by one famous city Hdt.
6, 106. Setca erecri Trpo T/;<? eV ^.a\afiivi vav/jLa%La<; ten
years before the sea fight at Salamis PL Leg. 698 c.
TrXeZcrrot by far the most Hdt. 5, 92, 5.
208 THE DATIVE CASE
389. Dative of Manner. The dative may denote
Manner (sometimes with the help of a preposition) : thus
TOVTW rut rpoTTO) e7ropev67)(Tav in this manner they pro-
ceeded Xn. A. 3, 4, 23. Spo/jiw fevro e? rot"? /3ap/3dpov$
on the run they rushed against the barbarians Hdt. 6, 112.
So in several adverbial expressions like ftla with violence,
o-iyfj in silence, rfj d\r)0ia in truth, ra> ovn in reality,
\6yo) in word, epyw in deed, ry e^fj yvw/jir) in my opinion,
ravrrj (sc. o&>) in this way.
390. Dative of Respect. The dative of Manner or
Means is sometimes used to show in what respect a thing
is so (but this usage has been greatly encroached on by
the accusative of specification, 337) : thus evpvrepos
&ILOKTI broader in shoulders F 194. ry (frwvy rpaxys harsh
in voice Xn. A. 2, 6, 9. lo-^yeiv rot? aw^acri to be strong
in their bodies (i.e. with their bodies) Xn. Mem. 2, 7, 7.
yco ovre Troalv el/JLi ra^u? ovre ^epalv la^vpo^ I am
neither swift of foot nor strong of arm Xn. Cy. 2, 3, 6.
391. Dative of Cause. The dative may be used to
denote Cause: thus piyei cnr(o\\v/ji0a we were dying of
cold Xn. A. 5, 8, 2. ovBevl ovra> %aipei<$ GO? <f)t\ois
dyaOols you delight in nothing so much as in good friends
Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 35. ^aXeTrco? (^epw rot? Trapovai TT pay pa at,
I am distressed at the present circumstances Xn. A. 1, 3, 3.
NOTE. The dative usually denotes a more active or immediate
cause than the genitive of cause (
392. Dative of Accompaniment or Association. The
dative (often helped by a preposition) may be used
with words denoting (or implying) accompaniment, asso-
ciation, or likeness : thus
THE INSTRUMENTAL DATIVE 209
1. With Verbs. evQdS* ifcaveis vrjl re KOI erdpotai ; are
you come hither ivith your ship and crew? X 161. crvv vrji
T IjJirj KOI e'/iot9 erdpoicriv e\0a)v going with my ship and
crew i 173. IJJMV efyeiTrovro ol iroKefjuoi KOLI ITTTTLKU) KOI
TreXracTTifcq) the enemy followed us with cavalry and pel-
tasts Xn. A. 7, 6, 29. crvv rfj a\\rj a r pan a et9 'AO/jvds
Kare7r\eu(7 with the remainder of his army he sailed to
Athens Xn. Hell. 1, 4, 10. u>iM\eirr)v avrqy they associated
with him Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 39. a^Lo-^TovfJiev aXX 77X0^9
we dispute with each other PL Phaedr. 263 a. T&> fjye/jio vi
. . . eTreadaL to follow the leader Xn. A. 1, 3, 17. a\\r)-
Xot? er7roi>Sa9 iiToir\(javTo they made a truce with each other
Xn. Hell. 3, 2, 20. e/navrfj Bia \oywv d^l/cojjLrjv I have
been reasoning with myself E. Med. 872. fyiXoo-ofyw
eoi/ca? you seem like a philosopher Xn. A. 2, 1, 13. The
last example may also be explained as a true dative, 376.
NOTE. With words meaning to fight the simple dative means to
fight against; the dative with crvv to fight on the side of: thus 'AOrj-
i/cu'ois /jLa.\f.crOa.L to fight against the Athenians; crvv
IM.Xf.a9ai to fight on the side of the Athenians.
2. With Adjectives. opotos 'A^XXet like Achilles Xn.
Sym. 4, 6. ^ojpav ofjuopov rfj Aa/ceBai/jiovtcov a land con-
tiguous with that of the Lacedaemonians Dem. 15, 22.
ted/Adi ^Kaplrecrcriv oyLolai hair like (that of) the Crraces
(cf. 717, 6) P 51. TroXXot? elfjn, Sid<f>opos with many
I'm at variance E. Med. 579. So with o auro? the same :
TO avro rw r)\i6i(i) the same thing as (lit. with) foolish-
ness Xn. A. 2, 6, 22. GOTrX/cryUeVcH rfo-av rofc aurot? KL-^W
oVXoj? they were armed ivith the same weapons as (those of)
Cyrus (cf. 717, 6) Xn. Cy. 7, 1, 2.
3. With Adverbs. eTro^eVa)? TO> VO/JLO) co) formally to
law PL Leg. 844 e. a-v/j./j,iya rfjcn yvvai^i together with
the women Hdt. 6, 58. a^a rfj i^epa at daybreak (lit.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 14
210 THE DATIVE CASE
along with the day). So with ofiov together with,
next in order.
NOTE. As dative of accompaniment is probably to be explained
the idiomatic use of the dative and avros ( 475, 3, note 2) : as veas
reo-crepas avroicrt rots dvS/oacrt etAov they took four ships men and all
(lit. with the men themselves} Hdt. 6, 93.
PARTICULAR USES OF THE DATIVE
393. Dative with Substantives. The verbal idea in a
verbal substantive sometimes makes it possible to construe
a dative with it: thus rr)v rov Oeov Soaiv V/JLLV Heaven's
gift ' to you (dative of the indirect object, 375) PI.
Ap. 30 d. ire^Oevra ravpcov irvpTrvotov eTrto-rdr^v ev-
j\ai(7L sent to master (lit. as master of) with the yoke
(dative of means, 387) the fiery lulls E. Med. 478.
Koivcovtd ro?9 dv&pdo-i association with the men (dative
of association, 392) PI. Hep. 466 c.
394. Dative with Compound Verbs. Many verbs com-
pounded with eV, crvv, or with other prepositions which
may be used with the dative ( 395), are thus assisted in
taking a dative which the verb of itself could not com-
mand : thus rcu9 opfcois e/iy/.ez'et o 9/109 (= pzvei eV rot?
op/<:of9, see 398, note 1) the people abides by its oaths Xn.
Hell. 2, 4, 43. o-vveTroXe/mei Kvpw he joined with Cyrus
in making war Xn. A. 1, 4, 2. . . . 0)9 e7ri(3ov\evoi avru>
. . . that he was plotting against him Xn. A. 1, 1, 3.
eVeiS?) TTpoafiaXoiev a\\r)\ois when they attacked each
other Th. 1, 49. So likewise denominative verbs ( 298,
note) containing these prepositions : as eTTL^eiprjcrai, aXX?;-
Xoi9 to lay hands on each other Th. 1, 49.
NOTE. Such compound verbs as take the dative ( 394) are
enabled to do so usually by virtue of the meaning of the preposition
alone, but sometimes apparently from the general meaning of the
compound (compare the first two examples above with the fourth).
PLACE AND TIME 211
395. Prepositions with the Dative. The use of the
Locative Dative (of Place or Time, 384, 385), and the
Instrumental Dative (of Accompaniment, 392), and
rarely the True Dative ( 374), is often made more defi-
nite by the help of prepositions. The prepositions ev in,
and <rvv with, are, from their meaning, used with the
dative only. Other prepositions used sometimes with the
dative are : eVt upon, Trapd beside, irepi about, 7r/?o9 at, VTTO
under. For the details of their use see 400-417.
PLACE AND TIME (SUMMARY)
396. 1. Place at which is expressed by the locative
( 76, note) or locative dative ( 384), the latter usually with
a preposition : 'AQijvrjcn at Athens, ev TTJ TroXei in the city.
2. Place within which is expressed by the partitive
genitive (usually with a preposition or adverb, 358) :
r% Sef icis on the right, Sta TreBiov through the plain.
3. Place from which is expressed by the genitive of
separation (usually with a preposition, 362) : e'f aWeo)?
from town.
4. Place towards or to which is expressed by the accu-
sative of limit of motion (in prose regularly with a
preposition, 339) et? rrjv ir6\i,v into the city.
397. 1. Time at which is expressed by the locative dative
( 385) : rfj rpirr) f)^epa on the third day.
2. Time within which is expressed by the partitive
genitive ( 359) : rj^epa^ by day (i.e. at some time within
the day).
3. Time during which is expressed by the accusative
( 338) : rr)V Tj^epdv ravrrjv during (the whole of) this day.
395 a. In poetry dvd np(ori), dufil about (also in Herodotus), and
ivith are also found with the dative.
212 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE CASES
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE CASES
398. The Prepositions were originally adverbs modify-
ing the verb, and serving to define more clearly and
exactly the adverbial uses of the cas.es (see 398 a).
They early came to be united with the verb (Composition,
298), or to be used regularly with such cases as their
meaning would allow ; then by a sort of crystallization
of their usage certain phrases were formed which came to
have special or idiomatic meanings.
For the so-called " Improper Prepositions " see 418.
NOTE 1. The preposition in Greek has sometimes become attached
to the verb where in English it would be rendered with the accom-
panying substantive: as d TT eo-rparoTreSevoi/ro 01 (3dpfiapoL rov 'EXXrj-
VLKOV the barbarians encamped away from the Greek army Xn. A. 3, 4, 34.
NOTE 2. Not infrequently the preposition is used both with the
verb and with the substantive : as TT/JO? TT)V KCO/^V Trpoo-ioWes coming
forward to the village Xn. A. 3, 4, 33. etcr/Sds cis TrAoiov embarking in
a ship Xn. A. 5, 7, 15. Thus the Greek could say J3aiv> eis TJJV Tro'Ati/,
or i<r/3aiVo) rrjv TroAii/, or ei<T/?ouV<o eis rrjv iroXw go into the city, but
the tendency was, wherever possible, to join the preposition with the
verb.
NOTE 3. Greek (like Latin) sometimes differs from English in
the point of view from which it uses the cases and the accompanying
preposition ; especially words suggesting motion (although denoting
rest) are often used with a case and preposition appropriate to motion
(to or from), although not so rendered in English: thus KareoTr/ ets
rr/v (3a<n\.iav 'Apra^'p^s Artaxerxes was established in power Xn. A.
1, 1, 3. rr)v TroAiv e^e'AiTTOv . . . eis ^wptov o^ypov they abandoned the
city (and went) into a stronghold Xn. A. 1, 2, 24. 01 e* r^s dyopas
AcaraAtTrovrts TO. wvia e<j>vyov the people in the market (lit. from the
market) abandoned their wares, and fled Xn. A. 1, 2, 18. So with
398 a. The adverbial use of the prepositions can be seen very clearly
in Homer (see 298 a), and in some phrases such as -rrpbs 8t and besides
(found even in Attic prose), ev dt and amonc/ the number, /ierd dt and
afterwards ; so irtyi exceedingly in Homer is often an adverb.
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 213
corresponding adverbs: ov yap ei^oi/ oiKoOtv for I had none (that I
could bring) from home' Ar. Pax 5'2'2.
GENERAL VIEW OF THE PREPOSITIONS
399. Summary of Usage. In Attic prose the preposi-
tions are used as follows :
With the Accusative only : avd, etV
With the Genitive only : aim, CLTTO, e', Trpo.
With the Dative only : lv and a-vv.
With the Accusative or Genitive : a^(f>i, Sid, /card,
With the Accusative, Genitive, or Dative : eW, ?rapa,
7TpL, TTpO?, U7TO.
For the special functions of the cases which admit
the aid of prepositions see 346, 371, 395.
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
[In the following pages only the general facts about
the meanings and uses of the prepositions (besides a few
special phrases) are recorded ; the exact details about
each preposition are to be found in a lexicon.]
400. OLJI<|>I about (properly on both sides of, Latin amb-) ; see 400 a.
1. WITH THE GENITIVE (in origin a Partitive Genitive of Place,
358) about, concerning (rare in prose, Trept being generally used
instead) d/x<i cJv et^oi/ Sca^epo/xevoi quarreling about what they had
Xn. A. 4, 5, 17.
399 a. In poetry, dvd, d/x0t, and /j-erd are also used with the dative ;
and d/j.<f>l is so used by Herodotus.
400 a. In Ionic and in poetry d/j.<j>t is used also with the (locative,
384) dative, meaning about, and so concerning, because of: d/j.<j>'
&jj.oi.<rii> %ei ffdKos he has his shield about his shoulders A 527. d/x^i
Simts about the eddies E. /. T. 6. d/x0' ^/uoi o-Tems , are you lamenting
about me? S. El. 1180.
214 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
2. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, 338) about.
Place: rtov d/x^>t MtXr/rov crrparevo/xevwv of those engaged in mili-
tary operations about Miletus Xn. A. 1, 2, 3.
Time: d/x<i /meow i^aepas OOM noon Xn. ^4. 4, 4, 1.
Derived Meanings: d/u.<i ra TrevT^/covra about jifty Xn. .4. 2, 6, 15.
IN COMPOSITION : about, on both sides of
401. <*va up (opposed to Kara down) ; see 401 a.
WITH THE ACCUSATIVE :
A. (of Extent, 338) MJO, along.
Place: dva rov Trora/xov up the river Hdt. 2, 96. dva TT)V 'EAA.d8a
throughout Greece Hdt. 6, 131.
Derived Meanings: dva vvVra a/om; (in) the night H 80. dva
i//A6paV ever?/ e?a# Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 8.
5. (of Limit of Motion, 339) upon.
Place : OTJKCV dva fivpucqv he put them up on a tamarisk bush K 466.
Derived Meanings: dva KpaYos up to (his) strength (i.e. at full
speed) Xn. A. 1, 10, 15. dva exa-rov up to a hundred (i.e. by hun-
dreds) Xn. A. 5, 4, 12.
IN COMPOSITION : up, back, again.
402. avrC instead of, for, originally over against (Latin ante} (but
in this use it was supplanted by cvavrt'ov) .
1. WITH THE GENITIVE (in origin a Partitive Genitive of Place,
358).
Derived Meanings only: TO, Trap' e/xoi eAeV$ai dvrt raiv OIKOI to
choose the lot ivith me instead of (i.e. rather than) that at home Xn.
A. 1, 7, 4. dv0' (oj/ ev ITTO.OOV in return for the favors I have received
Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. dvrt ly/xep^? vu lytvf.ro instead of day it became night
Hdt. 7, 37.
IN COMPOSITION : against, instead, in return.
401 a. In Epic and Lyric poetry avd is sometimes found with the
(locative) dative : as xpwty a. v ( 43, note 3) vK-fiirTpv upon a golden
staff A 15.
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 215
403. a-tro from, away from (Latin a&).
WITH THE GENITIVE (of Separation or Source, 362, 365) only :
Place: OLTTO OaXdvo-rjs p.dXXov <*>Kiv6rjcra.v they were, settled rather (at
a distance) away from the sea Th. 1, 7. XVOVTO Se rcv^e O.TT to/x<ov and
they stripped the armor from their shoulders P 318. iOripwev OLTTO LTTTTOV
he used to hunt on horseback (lit. from a horse, 398, note 3) Xn.
A. 1, 2, 7.
Time: d-rro TOVTOV TOV %p6vov from this time Xn. A. 7, 5, 8.
Derived Meanings: of (remote) agency TrAouo-iov yiyveo-$ai OLTTO
Tfjs TroAews to get rich from the state Dem. 24, 124. So, sometimes, in
Thucydides : air avruv by them Th. 1, 17.
IN COMPOSITION: from, away from.
404. 810- through (cf. Latin dis-).
1. WITH THE GENITIVE (originally the Partitive Genitive of
Place, 358) through (some part of) :
Place: eeAawei Sia KctTTTraSo/a'as Ae marched through Cappadocia
Xn. 4. 1, 2, 20.
Time : Sia w/cro's through the night Xn. J. 4, 6, 22.
Derived Meanings: 81' ereW eiKocri through (i.e. at the end of)
twenty years Hdt. 6, 118. eXeye . . . 8t' ep/ATjve'oos 7ie spoke through an
interpreter Xn. ^4. 2, 3, 17. Si a 7roA./xou avrois teVat ^o #0 through war
with them (i.e. to act in a hostile way towards them) ; so 8ta <iAids
lerai ^o ac/ m friendly fashion Xn. ^4. 3, 2, 8. Si a xetpos x etv ^ ^^
through (the grasp of) one's ^and (i.e. in one's power) Th. 2, 13. TOV
Kpov Si a (TTO/xaros eT^ov ^e^/ ^af/ (the name of) Cyrus on (lit. pass-
ing through) their lips Xn. C^. 1, 4, 25. Sia ra^ovs through speed
(i.e. speedily) Th. 2, 18.
2. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, 338) through, throughout,
more often through in the sense of because of.
Place and Time : (3dv p' i/xev . . . S i a vwra /xe'Aaii/av . . . S i a T*
Ivrea Kai /xeAav at/xa ^ey ?re;?^ on ^6/r way through the dark night and
through the iveapons and the black blood K 297.
Cause: 810, Kav/j^a through (i.e. on account of) heat Xn. A. 1, 7, 6.
KO.KOL SOKOV/XCV eivai Sia TOVTOV we appear to be base through (i.e. because
of) this man Xn. A. 6, 6, 23.
IN COMPOSITION : through, also apart (cf. Latin dis-).
216 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
405. els (or e<j, see 405 a) into, to (for *ev : cf. 47 and Latin m
with the accusative).
WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Limit of Motion, 339) only:
Place: Sie/fytrav es ^ixeAidv they crossed over into Sicily Th. 6, 2.
So also with persons : e i s v/xas eicrie'vai to come into the midst of you
PI. ^4j0. 17 c. eXOdv ets 'A^iA^a to come into the presence of Achilles
P709.
Time : Trpoirav rj/Jiap e s ^e'Aiov /caraSwra SatVuvr' // efoi/ /on<7 ^7/
setting sun they feasted A 601. es e/xe to ?n_y fr'???e Hdt. 1, 92. eis TT)V
vorepaiav ofy( jj/cev Ae didn't come the following day ( 298, note 3).
Derived Meanings: ets rerpaKoo-tov? wp to the number of four
hundred Xn. yl. 3, 3, 6. eis ^wvr/i/ SeSoyaevat ^z'yen /or girdle-money
Xn. ^. 1, 4, 9. e s reXos /na% ( 298, note 3).
IN COMPOSITION : in, into, to.
406. v in (Latin en-do, in).
WITH THE (Locative, 384) DATIVE only:
Place: ev ^Traprrj in Sparta Th. 1, 128. ev TroAArf 8^ aTropt'a ^crav
01 "EAAvyves ^Ae Greeks were naturally in much perplexity Xn. A. 3, 1, 2.
ev ffjLOL in me (i.e. in my power) Dem. 18, 193. ev TOIS <t'Aois in (i.e.
among) their friends Xn. yl. 5, 4, 32. ev rots oTrAots in (i.e. under)
arms Xn. ^4.4, 3, 7.
Time: ev Trevre ^/xe'pais in five days Xn. Mem. 3, 13, 5. ev rats
(TTrovSais in (the time of) the truce Xn. A. 3, 1, 1.
IN COMPOSITION : in, on.
407. i (before consonants e/c, 47) out of, from.
WITH THE GENITIVE (of Separation or Source, 362, 365) only :
Place: e/c IIuAov eA0wv going out from Pylos A 269.
Time : e* TrcuSos from a child (i.e. since childhood) Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 2.
ex rov apto-rov from breakfast (i.e. directly after breakfast) Xn. A. 4,
6, 21.
405 a. In the earlier Attic prose ts is more common than et's ; Herodotus
regularly uses es ; the poets use either form at pleasure.
406 a. Homeric and poetical forms are M (the older form of (^, cf .
l, 414 a), and (possibly) clvt.
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 217
Of Source: kat yap T ovap K Atos e<rriv for a dream, too, is from
Zeus A 63. So sometimes of the (remote) agent ( 372) : IK /foo-iAeco?
SeSo/xeVcu yicen from (i.e. by) the King Xn. A. 1, 1, 6.
Phrases: K Sepias on (lit./rom, 398, note 3) t/ie right, e/c TroAAov
a (lit. from, 398, note 3) a great distance, t taov on an equality.
IN COMPOSITION: out of, from, out.
408. *irt w/>on.
1. WITH THE GENITIVE (Partitive Genitive of Place, 358, or
Time, 359) upon (some part of) :
Place: TrapeAawwv e<' appuxros riding by (seated) on a chariot
Xn. A. 1, 2, 16. 7Tt rou CVOWV/AOV (sc. Kepcos) on ^e Ze/f wing Xn.
^4. 1, 8, 9. With words denoting motion, toward (some part of), in the
direction of: ciTrievai . . . CTTI 'Ian/ids to oe going away toward Ionia
Xn. .4. 2, 1, 3.
Time: CTT' etp^vrys in //me of peace B 797. CTTI rail/ ^/xereptov Trpo-
yoi/a)i/ zn ^Ae f/?7ie of our forefathers Xn. Q/. 1, 6, 31.
Derived Meanings : CTT' oAtywv Teray/meVoi drawn up a few deep Xn.
4. 4, 8, 11.
2. WITH THE (Locative, 384) DATIVE upon, at (rarely perhaps
with the True Dative ( 374) toward, against), O.VTOV /AI/XV' CTTI irvpyw
stay here upon the tower (i.e. at this place, cf. 408, 1) Z 431. l<m
. . . ySacrtXeia . . . evrt rat? Tr^yats TOT) Mapcrvov Trora/xov there is a
palace at the source of the Marsyas river Xn. A. 1, 2, 8. CTTI rrj
OaXa.Try at the sea-shore Xn. -4. 1, 4, 1.
Derived Meanings: CTTI TO> dSeA^wo m ^e power of his brother Xn.
^4. 1, 1, 4. TO 7Tt rovVo) f/*e /Am^r (next) M/?O/I (i.e. immediately
following) this PI. yip. 27 b. CTTI rourot? . . . op.oVas having given an
oath upon these terms Xn. A. 3, 2, 4. (So often e<' <J, e<' wre on con-
dition that, 596), eAa/^ov r^? ^tovrys roi/ 'Opoj/rdv e?rt ^avarco ^e?/
sei'zec? Orontas by the girdle upon (determination of) his r/e/A (i.e. as a
sign of condemnation) Xn. A. 1, 6, 10. CTTI rtn /xe'ya ^>poms; on
w^a rfo you /;rzV/e yourself? Xn. S^m. 3, 8.
In expressions like wpcrev CTT* 'Apyeioio-t ^e roused him against the
Argives M 293, the dative seems to be in origin a True Dative ( 374).
3. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, 338) upon (or of Limit
of Motion, 339) toward, 6paon> CTT' aTrec'pora TTOVTOV gazing over the
218 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
boundless deep A 350. rjXOc Ooas CTTI vr)a<s he came to the swift ships
A 12. 7rt TOV LTTTTOV dva/3as mounting upon his horse Xn. A. 1, 8, 3.
7rt /3ao-iAed levat to be going toward (i.e. against) the king Xn. A. 1,
3, 1. eepx ovTat ^ ^ 7 r ty Orjpav aw ^ ^ e # <7^ forth to (i.e. for) ^e
hunt Xn. C'#. 1, 2, 11. CTTI TroAu to a great extent Th. 1, 6.
IN COMPOSITION: t/pan (after), over, against.
409. Kara cfoz^n (opposed to avd up).
1. WITH THE GENITIVE :
A. (of Separation, 362) down from.
Place: W^OVTO KO.TO. TUJV Trerpoiv <epo/u,evoi ^e# we?'e ^rone headlong
down (from) the cliffs Xn. ^4. 4, 7, 14. So KO,T' aKprjs from the top
down (i.e. completely) N 772. Kara vwrov in (lit. c/own from) the
rear Th. 4, 33.
B. (Partitive Genitive of Place) down underneath some part of,
down over some part of, (down) against a person (cf. 370). Kara
xOovos o/x/xara Trr^ds fixing his eyes upon (a part of) the ground T 217.
Kara yrjs opyutas yeveV&xi to 6e (buried) fathoms beneath (a part of)
the earth Xn. 4. 7, 1, 30.
Derived Meanings: /car' e/xavrov epav to &e intending to speak
against myself (cf . 370) PL ^jo. 37 b.
2. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, 338) down over, down
along (or of Limit of Motion, 339), down to.
Place: Kara poov down stream. Hdt. 2, 96. Kara iracrav TYJV yrjv
(down) along over the entire land Hdt. 3, 109. Kara y^v /cat Kara
OaXaTTov along over (i.e. by) land and sea Xn. A. 3, 2, 13. TO K.a.0*
CLVTOVS the part along by (i.e. opposite) themselves.
Time: Kar' e/ceTvoi/ TOV x/odvov along (i.e. at) that time Th. 1, 139
ot KaO* T^/Acts those along (at) owr f/me (i.e. our contemporaries).
Derived Meanings: Kara 7rpf)w on business y 72. Kara <iAtav
/or friendship Th. 1, 60. Kara TOV avrov TpOTrov according to the
same fashion Xn. C^. 8, 2, 5. Kara Kpdros doirn to (the limit of)
strength (i.e. at full speed: cf. dva /cpdVos, 401) Xn. A. 1, 8, 19.
KaTa TOV vo/xov according to law Xn. /7e^/. 1, 7, 5.
IN COMPOSITION: down, against (cf. 370).
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 219
410. [WTO. amid, among (and so often close to, close upon).
1. WITH THE (Partitive, 354) GENITIVE (probably originally of
Place) among, in company with: /A era Boiwraiv e/aa^ovro they fought
among the Boeotians N 700. KOWYJ /xera aov in common along with you
PL Crit. 46 d. /xera TroAAwv Sa/cpvW am/ (i.e. with) many tears PI.
X/>. 34 c.
2. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Limit of Motion, 339) into the
midst of, and so, more frequently, close upon, close after, after: LKOVTO
/A era Tpaias /cat 'A^atou? they came into the midst of the Trojans and
the Achaeans T 264. (3fj 8e p. ex' aAAovs and he went among (i.e. close
after, in pursuit of) others A 292. /caAAicrros /ACT a IlrjAeiWa most
beautiful next (after) Peleus' son B 674. So often /ACT a ravra (close)
a/ter this.
IN 'COMPOSITION : with (of sharing), among, after (in quest of).
Often it denotes change (of state or position) : as /u,eTa/3atV<o go to a
new place, /xeravooi (-e'w) change one's mind, repent.
411. irapd beside.
1. WITH THE GENITIVE (of Separation, 362, or Source, 365)
from beside, from the side of: Trap a 8e /Jao-tAcco? TroAAot Trpos Kvpov
aTT^A^ov /row beside the king many came away to Cyrus Xn. .4.1,9, 29.
ffxicryavov ou epvcro-a/xevos Trap a fjirjpov drawing his sharp siuord from
beside his thigh A 190. Tra/o' AiyvrmW /xe/xa^r/Kei/at to ^ave learned
from the Egyptians Hdt. 2, 104. So of the remote agent ( 372) :
Trap a Travrcov 6/xoAoyetrat zV is agreed on the part of all Xn. ^4. 1, 9, 1.
2. WITH THE (Locative, 384) DATIVE at the side of, at, with.
Place: ^/xeVr; . . . Trap a Trarpt yepovri sitting beside her aged father
A 358. ra Trap a OaXdrrrj ^wpta /7<e places beside the sea Xn. ^4. 7,
2,25.
Derived Meanings: co-rparT/yet Trap a Kvpa> Ae was general beside
(i.e. under) Cyrus Xn. yl. 1, 4, 3.
410 a. In Epic (and rarely in other) poetry /xerd is found with the
(Locative, 384) dative : as 0e6s eo-/cc /xer' avdpd<ri he was a god among
men a 258.
220 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
3. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE :
A. (of Limit of Motion, 339) to the side of (usually of persons) :
Tre/ATret Trap a Hevcx^uWa TOUS 7reA.TcurTas he sent the peltasts to (the
side of) Xenophon Xn. A. 4, 3, 27.
B. (of Extent, 338) along beside, alongside of.
Place: ftfj . . . Trap a Olva. Tie went along beside the shore A 34. fy
Trap a rrjv 6Sov Kptjvr) there was a spring alongside the road Xn. A. 1,
2, 13.
Time: Trap a Travra /xot TOV \povov Trpocr^et along (i.e. during) all
the time he used to come in to see me PI. Phaed. 116 d.
Derived Meanings : So in phrases like trap" ovbsv (lit. alongside of
nothing, i.e.) of no account, Trap a /xt/cpov (lit. alongside of little, i.e.)
nearly, almost, slightly.
Often the idea of passing alongside suggests passing beyond ; so -n-apd
often means beyond, contrary to: as often Trap a TOV vopov contrary to
law, Trap a rrjv 8oav contrary to expectation, etc.
IN COMPOSITION : beside, along by, beyond.
412. rapt about, round about (properly on all sides of, cf. a/jL<f>i, 400).
1. WITH THE. GENITIVE:
A. (Partitive Genitive of Place, 358) about (some part of) : Trept
o-Tre'eos round about (a part of) the cave e 68.
More often in the derived meaning of about, concerning: -jrf.pl rwv
v/xerepwv ayaOwv /xa^ov/xe^a we shall Jight about your goodly possessions
Xn. A. 2, 1, 12. a TIS Trept TWV TOIOVTCOV erodes eo-ri if anybody is
wise about such matters PL Ap. 19 c.
B. (of Separation, 362) all about, surpassing, more than: Trept
TrdvTwv e/x/xevat aAAwv /o &e superior to all others A 287. So often
in prose in phrases like Trept TTO\\OV TroLticrOaL to regard as of great
importance (lit. more than much), Trept ovSevos Trotefo-#at to regard as
of no importance, Trept Travros Troteur0ai to regard as of all possible
importance (as Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 1).
2. WITH THE (Locative, 384) DATIVE about (not frequent in
Attic prose) : e^ovre? . . . crrpeTrrovs Trept rots rpa^Aots ^vV/j necklaces
412 a. For 71-^/34 exceedingly as an adverb, see 398 a.
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 221
about their necks Xn. A. 1, 5, 8. SeStoYes irf.pl rco X W P 1 V feint/ alarmed
about the place Th. 1, 60.
3. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, 338) round aoow^, about.
Place : aTreo-reiXav ras eKarov raw Trepi neA-OTroW^ow /Je?/ sent off
the hundred ships around the Peloponnesus Th. 2, 23. TT ep i 'EAA/^o-Trovroi/
a>v oein<7 aoou (i.e. in the neighborhood of) the Hellespont Dem. 8, 3.
rous Trepc avroF Ilepo-ds ^e Persians about him Xn. yl. 1, 5, 8.
Time: Trepi TOVTOVS TOVS xpoVous oow /^ese times Th. 3, 89.
Derived Meanings : cuei Trepi KetVov oive oe ever troubled about him
F 408. Trepc 0eoi>s pv) o-axfrpovtiv not to be sober-minded about the gods
Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 20.
IN COMPOSITION : around, surpassing (sometimes = Latin per-).
413. """po before (Latin pro-).
WITH THE GENITIVE (of Separation, 362) only :
Place : ?rpo ru>v TnAwv ow in front of the gates Xn. //e/Z. 2, 4, 34.
Time: Trpo r^s fJ-o-X^ oe f ore the battle Xn. ^4. 1, 7, 13.
Derived Meanings: Trpo VJJLUV dypvTrv^o-avra watching in your be-
half (i.e. in front of you as a protection), TOV Se Trpo Se'/ca /uvcov eAot)x^v
av another I would choose rather than ten minae Xn. Mem. 2, 5, 3.
IN COMPOSITION : before (so sometimes in defense of), forward, forth.
414. Tpds a, Z,y, toward (properly in front of).
1. WITH THE GENITIVE (the Partitive Genitive of Place, 358)
in front of (some part of), toward, over against: TO Trpos eo-Trepds
ret^os //ze wa// in front of (i.e. toward) ^e wes< Xn. Hell. 4, 4, 18.
TO, VTro^vyia t^ovre? Trpo? ro{! Trorafjiov with the pack animals on the side
toward the river Xn. A. 2, 2, 4. Trpos TCOJ/ KapSou^wv te'rai /o ^o in
the direction of the Carduchi Xn. A. 4, 3, 26. So by extension Trpos
Trarpds on ^e father's side Hdt. 7, 99. OVK ^v Trpos rot) K^pov rpoTrot;
i^ was no< in keeping with Cyrus' character Xn. ^4. 1, 2, 11. Trpos $ewi>
in ^e si^A/ o/ ^e ^od.s, with words of swearing. So sometimes of the
remote agent ( 272) : o^oXoydraL Trpos Travrcov he .is acknowledged on
the part of all people Xn. A. 1, 9, 20. (Some of these genitives may
be explained as Genitives of Separation, 362.)
414 a. Homer has also irporL (another form of Trp6s) and TTOT* = 7/7)6?.
222 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
2. WITH THE (Locative, 384) DATIVE at: ra Seia rov Keparos
2x<ov Trpos TW Ev<pdr?7 Trora/xa) with the right of the wing (resting) on
the Euphrates river Xn. A. 1, 8, 4. So, figuratively, Trpos TOUTOIS besides
this (as Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 8).
3. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Limit of Motion, 339) to, toward
(properly to a position in front of) :
Place: vTre^wp^o-ai/ Trpos TOV X6<f>ov they retreated toward the hill
Th. 4, 44. Trpos /Soppav toward the north Th. 6, 2. So often of
persons: ep^ovrat Trpos iy/>tas tfiey come to us Xn. ^4. 5, 7, 20. to/at
Trpos TOUS TToAe/uovs to #0 toward (i.e. against) *Ae enemy Xn. ^4. 2,
6, 10. 8ia/2aAAei Kvpoi/ Trpos rov dSeA(6V 7*e slandered Cyrus to his
brother Xn. 4. 1, 1, 3. So often of feeling toward: a.0vp,ov<ri Trpos
T7)v !oSov they feel discouraged in regard to the expedition Xn. A. 7, 1, 9.
Derived Meanings : Often Trpos TO.VTO. in view of this, Trpos X"-P LV
in view of favor (i.e. with a view to please), Trpos ftidv ivith (a view to)
violence, etc.
IN COMPOSITION : to, toward, in addition.
415. o~vv (also vv, cf. Lat. cum) unfA, in company with; see 415 a.
WITH THE DATIVE (of Accompaniment, 392) only: /3curiAeus
o-vi> (TTpaTtvfjiaTL TroAAo) Trpoo-ep^erat ///e Tft'm/ '-? advancing with a great
army Xn. J.. 1, 8, 1. avv $eots M?VA (the help of) the gods Xn. Cy. 6,
4, 19. o-vv TW i/d/ao) (in accordance) -?tVA iAe law Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 17.
IN COMPOSITION : with, together.
416. vire'p oi-er (Latin super).
1. WITH THE GENITIVE (Partitive Genitive of Place, 358) over
(some part of), above: VTrep r^s Kw/xrys yr;Ao<os ^r &ore Me village
tvas a hill Xn. -4. 1, 10, 12. or?} 8' ap' vTrep Kec^aA^s n(/ ^ s/oo^ oyer
Aw Aearf (cf . 358 a, 3d example) B 20.
Derived Meanings : From fighting over comes the derived meaning
in behalf of, on account of. TroveTv VTrep o-ov to toil in behalf of you
Xn. A. 7, 3, 31. vTrep riys eAev^epids v/xas et>Sai/Aon<o I congratulate
you on account of your freedom Xn. A. 1,7, 3. (Later, sometimes, the
meaning m behalf of comes to mean little more than afowf, concerning.)
415 a. The form ^v occurs in the older Attic writers ; the poets use
either form ; elsewhere atv is regularly found.
USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS 223
2. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE (of Extent, 338) over, beyond:
ouSov efirjcrtro he stepped over the threshold rj 135. roTs VTrep
TTOVTOV OLKOVCTI with those who dwell beyond the Hellespont Xn. A. 1, 1, 9.
VTTtp Swa/xiv beyond one's ability.
IN COMPOSITION : over, beyond, in behalf of.
417. viro under (Latin sub).
1. WITH THE GENITIVE :
A. (of Separation, 362) from under: VTT aTnjv^s ^loVous IXvov
they loosed the mules from under the wagon 77 5.
B. (Partitive Genitive of Place, 358) under.
Place: under some part of, TOL VTTO yr)s things under the earth PI.
Ap. 18 b. i<i'8ia VTTO /xaAr/? t^ovras with daggers under their ar?ns
Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 23. vv/x^>a? . . . SaiSaJv VTTO Aa/XTro/xevatov fjyweov dva
a<TTv under (the light of) torches they were leading the brides through
the city 2 492.
Agent : from such examples as the last came the regular usage of
VTTO with the genitive to denote the Agent ( 372), i.e. the person (or
thing) under whose influence an action takes place : Trte^o/xevos VTTO TWV
OIKOI dvTKTTcunamov being hard pressed by his political opponents at home
Xn. A. 1, 1, 10. ev e-rraOov VTT tKeivov I was well treated by him Xn.
A. 1, 3, 4. So not infrequently of things TravreXais av VTTO \lfj.ov O.TTO-
Xot/xe^a we should utterly perish by starvation Xn. A. 2, 2, 11.
2. WITH THE (Locative, 384) DATIVE under, beneath.
Place : et^ov 8e TO, 8/oe7rara . . . VTTO rots 8t^>pots ?/iey Artf/ ^e* scythes
beneath the chariot boxes Xn. A. 1, 8, 10. VTTO rrj aKpoTroAei a^ the foot
of the acropolis Xn. ^4. 1, 2, 8.
Derived Meanings (chiefly poetic) : ot . . . VTTO J3a<n\el ovre? those
under the power of the King Xn. Cy. 8, 1, 6. e/u-w VTTO Sovpl Sa/xtvra
subdued beneath my spear E 653.
3. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE :
A. (of Limit of Motion, 339) to a position under.
Place : avrov O.KOVTL&L ns TraAroJ VTTO rov 6^>9a.X^6v somebody hit him
with a javelin under the eye Xn. A. 1, 8, 27.
Time: VTTO VVKTO. toward (i.e. just before) night (cf. Latin sub
noclem).
224 USE AND MEANINGS OF THE PREPOSITIONS
B. (of Extent, 338) along under.
Place : a.K.pu>v\)\idv opovs, v <' rjv f] Kara/Maoris ^v eis TO TreoYov a spur
of the mountain, along under ivhich was the descent into the plain Xn.
A. 3, 4, 37. ei/ rats VTTO TO 0/305 KW/ACUS in the villages along at the foot
of the mountain Xn. A. 7, 4, 5.
Time : VTTO rrjv Trapoi^o/xevryv VVKTOL along under (i.e. during) the past
night Hdt. 9, 58.
IN COMPOSITION: under, underhandedly, gradually, slightly (cf.
Latin sub-).
IMPROPER PREPOSITIONS
418, Properly the term preposition is applied only to those (earlier)
adverbs which can be compounded with a verb into a single word
( 298), but there are also other adverbs (of varying origin) which,
for one reason or another, are regularly found in company with certain
cases (mostly the genitive) ; to these, as a class, is given the name of
Improper Prepositions (cf. 362, 3). The most important of these
are : avev without, avriov and ei/avnW opposite, e/cros and ^o> outside,
ei/ro? and eto-<o inside, eyyv? and TrX-qviov near, a^pt and fte^pt until,
/xera^v between, Trepav across, irXrjv except, ZVCKO. on account of, l/XTrpoa^ev
in front of, O7rio~0ev behind, ^aptv for the sake of, SIK^I/ in the manner of,
like, XdOpa ivithout the knowledge of, a/aa along with, ws to, and others
(cf. 418 a).
Of these, all except a/xa and o>s are used with the genitive, ajoa is
used with the dative (of Accompaniment, 392) and o>s with the
accusative (of Limit of Motion, 339) of names of persons only : as
to the King.
NOTE. The genitives used with the improper prepositions are of
various sorts. For example, avev is used with the Genitive of Separa-
tion ( 362), eyyv's with the Partitive Genitive of Place ( 358), and
with the Descriptive Genitive ( 352).
418 a. The following improper prepositions are seldom used except in
poetry : tryxoO near, &rep without, dfyas in the form of, like (cf.
418), St'xa apart from, e/cds far from, ZKTITI on account of,
beneath, v6<r(f)i(v) away from, -n-dpos before, rrj\e far off from, and
/miySa or <ry/j.fj.tya (in Herodotus) along icith. The last three are used
with the dative (cf. 392, 3) ; all the rest with the genitive.
SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES 225
SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES
419. Adjectives are used to modify substantives (includ-
ing words used substantively) and substantive pronouns.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES
420. Adjectives (including participles, adjective pro-
nouns, and the definite article, 443 if.) agree in gender,
number, and case, with the substantives which they
modify : thus avrjp croc^o? a wise man, avbpos crofyov of a
wise man, avSpdcri <7o<ot? to wise men, 6 Trapwv Kaipds the
present occasion, oi/ro? o avr^p this man, 6 auro? avrfp the
same man.
NOTE. Since an adjective may be equivalent to the genitive case
of a substantive, it sometimes happens that an adjective is followed by
a genitive case in apposition ( 317) with the substantive implied in
it: as 'AOrjva tos wv TrdXeco? T^S /AeyioTiy? being a man of Athens, a
city the greatest PI. Ap. 29 d.
421. A predicate adjective belonging to two or more
substantives is usually plural (or dual), or it may agree
with one (usually the nearer) and be understood with the
rest: as alel yap roi epis re <f)i\r), TroXe/^ot' re pa^ai
re for always strife, and wars, and battles, are dear to you
A 177. For examples of the plural see 422 below.
422. A predicate adjective belonging to substantives of
different gender is commonly masculine if the substantives
are felt to denote persons, and neuter if they are felt to
denote things : thus w? elBe rrarepa re fcal fJL^repa KOI
? KOI rrjv eavrov ryvvalica at'^ftaXooroL'? yeyevij-
when he saw that both his father and mother and
brother and his own wife had been made captives Xn. Oy. 3,
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 15
226 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES
1, 7. 'Y] TV%rj KOI <&i\i7T7ro<; rjaav TWV epywv /cvpcoi
Fortune and Philip were masters of the deeds Aeschin. 2,
118. e'^ft) avrwv /cal retcva KOI yv valicas . . . (frpovpov-
fjieva I have their wives and children safely guarded (i.e. as
chattels) Xn. A. 1, 4, 8.
423. A predicate adjective may be used substantively
( 424), and is then neuter, although the subject may be
masculine or feminine (cf. 422) : thus repTrvbv . . .
rpdjre^a 7r\rjprj$ a thing of joy is a well-filled board E. Hipp.
109. ryvvi) Se 6r)\v /cajrl Sa/cpvoi? e(f)v but woman is a femi-
nine thing and prone to tears E. Med. 928. So often the
neuter TI: as rt rjv ra Xe^#eWa what was the conversation?
(lit. the things said were what?) PI. Phaed. 58 c.
NOTE. In tragedy when a woman speaks of herself in the plural
( 495, note) she regularly uses the masculine form of the participle :
thus apKov/jiev T^/ACIS ot TrpoOvycrKovTes <rtOcv sufficient am 1 (i.e. Al-
cestis) who am dying in your stead E. Ale. 383.
424. Adjectives Used Substantively. The substantive
which an adjective modifies is often omitted when it is a
common word like man, woman, child, thing, land, road,
day, hand, etc., which can be readily understood. The
adjective alone then acquires the force of a substantive :
thus o cro^o? the wise man (sc. avdpwiros}, f) /ca\r) the beau-
tiful woman (sc. 7^77), ayaOov a good thing (sc. TrpayjjLa),
ol TroXXot the many (sc. avOpwTroi), o Aa/oetbu the son of
Darius (sc. ufe), rj 'Ayape/jivovos the daughter of Agamem-
non (sc. Owydrrfp), ra rr}? TroXeo)? the affairs of /State (sc.
TT pay para), rj e/mavrov my own land (sc. <yfj ), rrjv CTTL
M.yapa the road to Megara (sc. 6SoV), rqv Ta%icrTr)V the
shortest way (sc. 6SoV), TTJ vcrrepaia on the following day
(sc. fjjjiepa), rrj Se^ia with the right hand (sc. %ipf).
THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE 227
NOTE. Numerous adjectives have come thus to be used regularly
as substantives : thus Trarpts fatherland (sc. yfj), Tpirjprjs trireme (sc.
vavs), fjLovcTLKrj music (sc. TC^VT;), etTTrepa evening time (sc. wpa), and
many others.
425. Adjectives with Adverbial Force. Sometimes in
Greek (as is so frequent in Latin) an adjective modifying
a substantive in a sentence may have the effect of modify-
ing the predicate : thus %#?o? eftrj he went yesterday
(i.e. %0e?) A 424, evSov Travvv^iQi they slept all night
long B 2, Tpiraloi acfrttcovro they arrived on the third day
Th. 1. 60, tcarefiaivov . . . atcoTalot they came down in
darkness Xn. A. 4, 1, 10.
THE COMPARATIVE DEGREE
426. The Comparative Degree denotes more than the
positive : as <ro</>&)Te/>o? more wise or wiser. The compara-
tive may be used absolutely, or the person or thing with
which comparison is made may be expressed.
1. The comparative used absolutely means rather, some-
what, and sometimes (by implication) too much : thus
yeXoidrepov rather amusing PI. Ap. 30 e. %eipov<$ rather
bad (i.e. rascals), Lys. 16, 3. OCLTTOV too quickly.
2. When the word with which comparison is made is
expressed it stands either with rj than, or else in the geni-
tive case ( 363): thus o-o^airepos rj eya> or croc^eorepo?
v wiser than I.
NOTE 1. When -tj is used after a comparative, the two objects
compared regularly stand in the same case, unless the second is the sub-
ject of a verb (expressed or understood) ; then it is in the nominative :
thus <f>LXovaa avrov /xoAAov >} rov /3aai\evovTa 'Apra^ep^rjv lov-
ing him more than (she did) the king Artaxerxes Xn. A. 1, 1, 4. iir
a v Spa 5 <TTpaTvecr@ai TTO\V d/xavovas rj ^KvOd<s to march against men
much braver than Scythians ("than against Scythians") Hdt. 7, 10.
Rarely a feeling that the second word is the subject of a verb
228 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES
(expressed or understood) causes it to be put in the nominative :
thus dvSpos TroAv Swarwrepou 77 ey to vlov the son of a man much more
powerful than I (am) Xn. Cy. 5, 2, 28.
NOTE 2. The genitive after a comparative is commonly equiva-
lent to the nominative or accusative with 77 than; less often can it be
said to represent some other case : thus TOVS <opous ouSev TJTTOV rav-
Spos aTreSi'Sou she used to pay in the taxes no less than (did) her husband
(i.e. 77 6 avrjp aTreSi'Sov) Xn. Hell. 3, 1, 12. <rev d/xetVovi <am /xa (e-
o-0ai to /^fa foi'M a 6etfer man than you (are) H. 111. 'Op<eu)s /coA.-
AJoi/ vfjLvrj<ra.L /xeAos to si'm/ a strain more beautiful than (that of) Orpheus
E. A/erf. 543 (cf. 717, 4).
NOTE 3. When two adjectives or adverbs are compared, 77 is
always used, and both stand in the comparative degree : thus TT/OO^/AOS
fjiaXXov 77 (7o<a)Tpd more willing than wise E. Med. 485.
NOTE 4. The neuter comparative TrXeov more, eXdrrov (or /ACIOV)
/ess, when used purely as adverbs, sometimes do not affect the con-
struction of the sentence: thus aTTOKreiVowi ran/ dvSpaii/ ov /xetov
7TvraKO(7tbv5 they killed at least (lit. not less than) five hundred men
Xn. A. 6, 4, 24.
NOTE 5. Comparatives may also be followed sometimes by OLVTL
instead of (. 402), or 77 and the infinitive, with or without cStrre, lit.
than so that ( 645, note), or 77 Kara (w r ith the accusative) than accord-
ing to ( 409, 2).
NOTE 6. A thing may be compared with itself under other cir-
cumstances; such a comparison is expressed by the genitive of the
reflexive pronoun ( 470), often helped by avro? in agreement with
the subject ( 473) : thus lyivovro . . . /xaKpw a/xeivoves avrol
CWVTOJV they far surpassed themselves Hdt. 8, 86. This usage is some-
times found also with the superlative.
THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE
427. The superlative degree means most : as o-o^toraro?
most wise or wisest.
1. The superlative may be used absolutely meaning very,
or it may be followed by a partitive genitive ( 355, 1) :
thus avrjp cro(ft>TaT09 a very wise man, or cro^foraro? a
wisest (one) of men.
SYNTAX OF ADVERBS 229
NOTE. In place of the partitive genitive the words eV rots (lit.
among those who) are also found with the superlative (they do not
affect the construction) : thus ev rots Trpwrot Se 'AOrjvaioi rov (TiBrjpov
KariOwro the Athenians were the first among those who put aside the
wearing of the sword Th. 1,6. ev rots ySapvrar' av evey/<cu/u I should
bear it most heavily among those (who would bear it heavily) PL Crit.
43 c.
428. Strengthened Superlative. The superlative may
be strengthened by o>? or em (less often by 77, olo?, or
other relative words) : thus o>? rd^icrra as quickly as pos-
sible, OTL 7r\elcrTOi as many men as possible, %o)piov olov
%a\7r(i)TaTov an extremely difficult spot Xn. A. 4, 8, 2 (cf.
485, note 2).
NOTE. Probably a word meaning "possible" has come to be
omitted in these expressions, since sometimes such a word is found :
as el<re(f>6pr)(Ta.v ws eSwai/ro TrXelcrra they carried in the most (things)
they could Xn. A. 4, 6, 1.
SYNTAX OF ADVERBS
429. Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, and other ad-
verbs.
1. An adverb in the attributive position ( 451) is
sometimes used with the force of an adjective : thus ol
rore avOpcoTTOL the men of that time.
NOTE. An adverb may be modified by a preposition (see 398) :
as ei? dei" for erer.
430. Comparative and Superlative of Adverbs. In gen-
eral what has been said about the comparative and su-
perlative of adjectives ( 426428) applies also to the
comparative and superlative of adverbs : thus o-o^wrepov
more wisely or rather wisely, cro^corara most wisely or very
wisely, o-o(f)a)Tara jravrcov ( 355, 1) most wisely of all.
230 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS
THE NEGATIVE ADVEBBS ov AND rf
431. Greek possesses two adverbs, ov (OVK, ofy, 46,
an( l M"> meaning not ; of these, ov is used in nega-
tive expressions of fact; in other negative expressions
//,?; is used.
1. Hence it follows that in expressions of negative com-
mand, wish, purpose, condition (including adjectives and
participles which imply a condition, 653, 6), in relative
clauses with indefinite antecedent ( 620 ff.), and with
the infinitive used as a substantive ( 633, 635) ^ is
regularly used.
2. But when the infinitive or participle is used in indi-
rect discourse ( 671), it retains the negative which it
would have had in the direct discourse.
3. A particular word in a sentence may by itself be
modified by ov, even when the sentence as a whole would
require fir) : so often OVK eo> not allow = forbid, ov TroXXot
not many = few, ov (^TJ/JLL deny, etc. : as eav ov (^rjre if you
deny PL Ap. 25 b. (Of. 600, note.)
4. The distinction between ov and /ZTJ applies also to
their compounds : as ouSetV, fjirj&efc nobody ; ovSe, fjLrj&e not
even, etc.
NOTE. Irregularities in the use of ov and p.rfj. Occasionally /AT? is
used where we should expect ov, or vice versa ov where we should ex-
pect iiy. Thus, a participle or adjective depending on a word which
has (or might have) JJLIJ may take /x.?7 by attraction ( 316) : as /ceAevei
O.VTOV /xeii/cu . . . Ctrl TOV Trora/xov /J.YJ 8ia/5avra? lie bade ihem stay rigid
there at the river without crossing (here ov would be proper ( 431, 3),
but the influence of the infinitive, /mvai ( 431, 1), is too strong) Xn.
A . 4, 3, 28. eav TI rotovrov cuaOr) atavrov /* r) eiSo'ra if you perceive your-
self not to be informed on any such matter (here eiSo'ra, being in indirect
discourse ( 431, 2), would naturally take ov, but the influence of the
conditional clause ( 431, 1) permits fjaj to be used) Xn. Mem. 3, 5, 23.
THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS ov AND JJLIJ 231
The infinitive used as a substantive ( 635 if.) sometimes appears to
have ov instead of [MJ ( 431, 1), but in such case the negative probably
did not originally belong with the infinitive, but with the word on
which the infinitive depends: as xp>) 8' ov-rroO' . . . TTCU&XS Tre/ouro-to?
/<SiSao-Keo-0(H <ro<l>ov<s one ought never (or never ought) to have his chil-
dren taught to be too wise E. Me'd. 295.
A few rare examples in Classical Greek of the actual misuse of ov
and py are probably to be explained simply as grammatical mistakes.
432. When one simple negative stands next to another
simple negative, ov ov or prj ^ is never found, but always
fJLT) OV Or OV fJLlJ.
433. Strengthened Negation. In Greek (unlike Eng-
lish) two negatives do not always make an affirmative.
The simple negatives (ou and ^77) usually retain every-
where their separate negative force, but compound nega-
tives following another negative serve only to strengthen
the negation : thus /cal ovSev fJLevrot, ovSe TOVTOV iraOeiv
(f>ao~av, ovB' a\\o<$ 8e . . . ejraOev ovBels ovBev however,
they say that not even this man suffered any harm, nor did
anybody else suffer any harm whatever Xn. A. 1, 8, 20.
434. Sympathetic (or Redundant) Negative. An infini-
tive (more rarely a participle or a finite mood) depending
on a word which is modified by a negative, or which in
itself contains a negative idea (like hinder, forbid, deny,
etc.) often takes an extra negative (^77 or ov) to confirm
the idea of negation : as vra? jap aovco? Svo avSpas e^ei rov
fir) KaraSvvai for each skin will keep two men from sinking
alone might have been used) Xn. A. 3, 5, 11.
vfjL(0v e%co e\7Ti8a /jirj ov Swcretv t'/Ltea? SL/CTJV I have
no expectation that you will not pay the penalty (yiir) Swcreiv
might have been used) Hdt. 6, 11. So also coo-re TTCLO-LV
alo-%vvr)V elvai /JLTJ ov ava-TrovSa^eiv so that all were
232 SYNTAX OF ADVERBS
ashamed not to take hold earnestly (/^ avo-TrovSdfetv alone
might have been used, but alo-^vvrj suggests " thought it
not right," and so prepares the way for the extra negative)
Xn. A. 2, 3, 11. elvdrrj Be OVK e^ekevaeaOau efyaaav f^rj
ov TrX^eo? e'oWo? rov KVK\OV and they said they would not
march out on the ninth if the circle of the moon were not full
(pr) . . . eoWo? alone might have been used) Hdt. 6, 106.
(A negative may also be implied in a question, as in the
second example below.)
435. Double Sympathetic Negative. So also an infini-
tive depending on a word which contains a negative idea
( 434), and which, at the same time, is modified by a
negative, may take two extra negatives (/A?) ou), one in
sympathy with the negative idea in the verb, the other
in sympathy with the negative adverb : thus aXX' ovSev
auTOU? eTTiXverai r) rj\LKLa TO /JLTJ ov%l dyava/creiv but
their age does not prevent them from being distressed PI.
Orit. 43 c. TI fj,7ro8tbv fjbr) ov%l . . . cnroOavelv ; what
is to prevent (i.e. there is nothing to prevent) our being
put to death? Xn. A. 3, 1, 13.
NOTE. Observe that the double sympathetic negative (/x>) ov,
which is not to be rendered at all in English) is found only with an
infinitive dependent on a doubly negative expression ; elsewhere (see
the last three examples under 434) one of the negatives (p.ifj) always
retains its negative force.
THE ADVERB dv
436. The adverb dv generally serves to give a tinge of
indefiniteiiess to the clause in which it stands. It has no
equivalent in English, and often cannot be translated.
(For the sake of completeness a summary of its uses is
here given.)
436 a. In epic poetry KC (enclitic), an equivalent of &v, is also found.
THE ADVERB av 233
437. In independent clauses av is used with the poten-
tial optative ( 563) and the potential indicative ( 565).
NOTE. For the quasi independent use of av with the infinitive
and participle not in indirect discourse see 647 and 662.
438. Iii dependent clauses av is used regularly with the
subjunctive in conditional ( 604, 609) and relative
( 623, 625) clauses.
NOTE. With ei, ore, OTTOTC, eTret, or 7retS?;, the adverb av unites to
form edv (iyv, av), orav, OTrorav, k.irt]v or eTrav (Hdt. evreai/), or CTrciSav
(cf. 439, note 1).
439. In indirect discourse av is retained (even though
the mode is changed) where it originally stood in the
direct form, except when a dependent subjunctive with av
is changed to the optative after a secondary tense ; then
av disappears. See 670, 2 ; 673.
XOTE 1. Position of av. The adverb av never stands at the
beginning of its clause. It may stand next to the verb it modifies, or
it may stand immediately after some other prominent word in the
sentence (as regularly in relative and conditional clauses, 438).
Thus it may stand with the negative (owe av) or with any emphatic
word (TTOJS av, /xaAio-r' av) or even with the principal verb instead of
the subordinate one with which it really belongs: as avv vfuv /u,ev av
ol/zat efvai n/xtos with you I think that I should be honored (i.e. olfwa av
ctvat) Xn. A. 1, 3, 6.
NOTE 2. av Repeated. In a long sentence av is sometimes
repeated: as v/otei? 8* to-w? rax' av a\66^voi . . . Kpou<ravres av /xe
. . . paoYoos av aTTOKTetVare but you perhaps might be vexed . . . and
strike me . . . and easily kill me PL Ap. 31 a.
NOTE 3. Verb Supplied. Sometimes the verb with which av
belongs is to be supplied from the context : as Si/Wws /xcv e'v oAtyapx"*
oY/oyv SOI/TO? . . . SiKat'tos 8' av fv Sry/AOKparta justly did he suffer punish-
ment at the time of an oligarchy, and justly would lie have suffered (sc.
SO'VTOS) at the time of a democracy Lys. 12, 78.
234 CONJUNCTIONS
CONJUNCTIONS
440. Conjunctions may be divided into two classes :
Coordinate and Subordinate. (For " Postpositives " cf .
452, note.)
441. Coordinate conjunctions connect words, phrases,
or clauses which stand in the same construction.
The principal coordinate conjunctions are : ical and
(Latin ef), re and (Latin -que), a\\d, arap but (Latin Bed),
e but (Latin autem), ov&e (/AiySe) nor, not even, rj or, than,
apa, accordingly, so then, yap for, ovv therefore, accordingly
(including ov/covv therefore and ovtcovv therefore not}, ware
so that ( 595), /cal . . . Kai, or re ... re, or re ... icai
both . . . and, el're . . . etre whether . . . or, ovre (fjHjre) . . .
ovre (/^re) neither . . . nor ( 431, 4), T) . . . rj either . . .
or, fjiev . . . Be on the one hand . . . on the other.
NOTE 1. /ecu often has the meaning also or even. The expression
aAAcos re KCU means especially (literally in other ways, and also . . .).
The expression re ... KCU Sr] KOL means and particularly ; thus 8C
epr)/jt,<t)V re TOTTCDV . . . aXXwv Kai Sr; KCU VTTO yrjv through other desert
places and, in particular, beneath the earth PL Phaed. 112 e.
NOTE 2. ya/o (=ye + a/o) is often used (e.g. in wishes and in
questions and answers) merely to show a close relation or sequence
between clauses ; it is then often best rendered by why, why then, then,
etc. The expression Kat yap . . . may often be conveniently translated
' yes, for' and dXAa yap . . . 'no, for" 1 or 'but enough, for.'
441 a. In Epic poetiy re is freely used to indicate the connection of
sentences and clauses where it cannot be rendered in English (it usually
marks the sentence as general or indefinite) : thus 3s /ce 0eo?s eirnreidTiTcu,
/j.d\a T eK\vov avrov whosoever obeys the gods, him they most do hear
A 218. The words oUs re able (lit. of such kind as to}, ucrre so that, e<f>'
$re on condition that, are inasmuch as, are the survivals in Attic Greek
of the Epic usage.
b. Homer has also -fj^ev . . . -f)d (= 7j + ptv or 5f) now . . . and
now, and sometimes 175^ without a preceding r)/j.tv (cf. 5^, 441).
C. Homer has also avrap (= #ra/o) but ; and &p and pa (encl.) = &pa.
THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 6, 77, TO 235
442. Subordinate conjunctions connect subordinate
clauses with the clauses on which they depend.
The following are the more important subordinate con-
junctions (most of them are really relative adverbs) : on
that, because, cb? how, as, that, el, eav ( = el -f- av) if, OTTO)?
how, as, in order that, ware so that, f iva where, in order that,
ore, oTTore when, since, f}viica, oTnyviica at which time, when,
eirei, eVetSrj ( = eirei + &rf) ivhen, since, eare until, eW as
long as, until ( 618, note), />te%/w, a^pi, up to that point,
until, TTpiv before, pr) (after expressions of fear) lest.
NOTE. ovx OTL or pr) on means not only (literally, perhaps, not to
say that . . .).
THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, 0,^x0'
443. Originally o, 77, TO, was a demonstrative pronoun,
meaning this, and in Homer and other early poets ( 443 a)
it commonly has this meaning. In Attic Greek it has come
to mean the, but in Attic its use as a pronoun has survived
in the following phrases :
442 a. In epic poetry are found a few conjunctions which do not occur
in Attic. The most common are evre when, as, y/jios when (with indica-
tive only), 6<j>pa as long as, until, in order that ( 590 a).
b. Homer often has at (af /ce) for Attic el (fav), and yos (often
wrongly written et'ws) for Attic 2ws. (The latter is formed by interchange
of quantity ( 17) from the Epic form.)
443 a. In Homer 6, 17, r6, is generally used as a demonstrative or an-
aphoric pronoun (substantive or adjective) : thus o yap y\de for he (lit.
that man) came A 12. rrj v 5' ^70; otf Aurw ami her I shall not set free A 29.
TOV 5e K\6e 4>o?j3os 'A7r6\Xwj' and him Phoebus Apollo heard A 43. TrcuSa 5'
e/j.01 \v<raL re (f)L\n]v, ra T airoiva 5^%e(T0ai but free my dear child, and accept
this ransom A 20. ws e0ar', eSeurev 5' 6 yepuv thus he spoke, and that
old man (before mentioned) feared A 33. Yet in Homer 6, ^/, r6, is some-
times used in a way that closely approaches the Attic usage : thus ^
TrXTjfli-s the (or this) multitude B 278. rbv Se&bv 'iwirov the (or that)
right-hand horse & 336. rb <rbv yepas that prize of yours (or your prize)
236 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE o, 77, TO
1. o p.V . . . o 8c (in all the cases) the one . . . the
other, this . . . that: as
01 fjiev ejropevovTo, 01 & eiTTOvro the one party proceeded,
and the other followed Xn A. 3, 4, 16. row? pev
cnreKTeive, TOU? ' egefiaXev some he killed and others
he banished Xn. A. 1, 1, 7. eTropevOyo-av ra pev TI
pa%dftev6t t ra Be Kal avaTravd/jLevoi they proceeded,
sometimes fighting a bit, sometimes resting Xn. A. 4,
1,14.
Very often 6 Se . . . but he, and he, is found without a
preceding 6 //.eV; it regularly shows a change in the
subject of the sentence : thus Kpo? SiSwcriv aura)
fjivpiovs SdpeiKOVs o 8e \a/3cov TO ^pvalov aTpaTev/jLa
crvve\e%ev Cyrus gave him ten thousand darics ; and he
took the money, and collected an army Xn. A. 1, 1, 9.
2. TOV Kai TOV this one and that one ; neuter also TO Kal
TO, and TO, Kal TCL : as
Kal a^LKVovfjiai o>? TOV Kal TOV and I came to this man
and that man Lys. 1, 23.
3. Kal TOV and he, Kal TTJV and she with an infinitive : as
Kal TOV euTrelv and he said (cf. also the phrase Kal 6?
ecfrrj and he said, 144 a).
4. irpo TOO) before this.
Often in Homer and Herodotus, and sometimes in Attic
tragedy, 6, 97, TO, is used as a relative pronoun (see
149 a-b).
A 185. rb irpiv the (or that} former time, 'kpyeluv of &PHTTOI the (or
those} noblest of the Argives.
443, 1-3 a. Herodotus has also o 701/0 . . . for he . . ., and /cat r6v in
other cases than the accusative.
o, 77, TO AS AN ARTICLE (THE) 237
6", 77, TO AS AN ARTICLE
444. As the definite article o, 77, TO, ^e usually marks
its substantive as evidently known, or before mentioned :
thus 77 f^dx 1 ! the battle, ot "EXX?;^ the Greeks, ra Betca errj
the ten years (of the Trojan war) Th. 1, 11.
445. So a substantive modified by an attributive (such
as an adjective, adjective pronoun, or a limiting genitive)
may take the article if the speaker feels that the substan-
tive, because of this limitation, is made well known to
his hearers : thus at Trp&rai rdgeis the foremost ranks, 77
el/JLappevrj rj/Jiepd the fated day, 77 T&V TroXXwy Sdga the
opinion of the multitude, OVTOS 6 avr^p this man, o e'/Ao? $1X09
my friend (but </Xo9 e/zo? a friend of mine).
446. Article with Proper Names. So proper names (if
well known or previously mentioned) often take the
article : thus 6 ITXaTco^ Plato (the famous philosopher), ol
'AOyvaioi the Athenians ; ie(3r]<jav et? ^uce\iav . . . e\66v-
Te? &e e? rr/v liucekiav, K.T.\. they crossed to Sicily . . . And
when they had come to (the) Sicily (above mentioned)
Th. 6, 2.
NOTE. Bao-iAeu's (the) King (of Persia) was probably felt by the
Greeks to be a sort of proper name, and so it is often found without
the article.
447. Article with the Force of a Possessive. The arti-
cle modifying a substantive ( 444) may acquire the force
of a possessive pronoun : thus TKTo-cKfrepvrjs Sia/3d\\ei rov
Kvpov 7r/oo9 rov aSeX^ov Tissaphernes slandered Cyrus to
his (lit. the) brother Xn. A. 1, 1, 3. KXeap^o9 . . . e%ei
rrjv Si/crjv Clearchus has his (lit. the) deserts Xn. A. 2, 5, 38.
238 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 6, 77, TO
448. Generic Article. The article is often used to mark
a substantive as belonging to a well-known class : thus o
avOpwTTos OvrfTos ICTTIV man is mortal, ol yepovres the old,
rj a\ij0eia truth. (The fact that the article is generic is
determined by the context.)
449. Article with Predicate Substantive. The predi-
cate substantive (unless previously mentioned or well
known) cannot have the article : thus KXeap^o? Aa/ce$ai-
ftoVto? (frvyas fy Clear chus ivas a Spartan exile Xn. A. \,
1, 9. Odvards eanv YJ fy/jiid the penalty is death Xn. Mem.
1, 2, 62 (but ra<? veas TO %v\ivov ret^o? elvai that the ships
were the wooden wall (mentioned in the oracle) Hdt. 7,
142).
NOTE. Thus ( 449) subject and predicate are clearly distin-
guished in such sentences as vv 17 ^^pr} eyei/ero the day became night
Hdt. 1, 103.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE
450. The article always precedes the word it modifies.
451. Attributive Position. Words or phrases standing
between the article and its substantive (or immediately
after the article, if the substajitive precedes or is not
expressed) are said to have Attributive Position : thus
o ay a bs avrjp the good man (cf. 302).
1. Attributive adjectives ( 302), and adverbs with
adjective force ( 429, 1), and, in general, most attribu-
tive phrases, have attributive position: thus 97 'EXXrjvi/crj
SvvafjLis the Greek force, ol rore av6 pwiroi the men of that
time, ra (riyf) /3ov\evd/jieva the things planned in silence,
TOV e/c rwv'EiXXrfVcov et? Tou? fiapfldpov? <f)d{3ov the fear
inspired by the GrreeJcs in the barbarians Xn. A. 1, 2, 18.
POSITION OF THE ARTICLE 239
452. When article and attributive together are used
with a substantive, three different arrangements are pos-
sible : thus,
(1) 6 ayaObs avijp the good man.
(2) o avrjp 6 ayaOos the man (namely) the good (one).
(3) avrjp 6 ayaOos (a) man (namely) the good (one).
Of these three arrangements the first is ofteuest found,
but the second is by no means uncommon, as eV TTJ ava-
fidcrei rrj per a Kvpov on the march inland with Cyrus
Xn. A. 5, 1, 1 ; the third arrangement is found when the
substantive alone would stand without the article : thus
ffvveifju pew 0eot5, (rvveifJM Be av@po)7rois rot? ayaOols I
associate with gods and with men (that is) the good (men)
Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 32.
NOTE. Postpositives. The words ju,ev, Se, ye, re, rot, yap, 8>/, and
ovv, being " postpositive," cannot stand at the beginning of a sen-
tence; hence they are often found in the attributive position ( 451),
but without being attributives: as 6 /u,v ovv Trptcrfivrcpos Trapwv
eru'yxave now then the elder happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. (In
poetry 8>J sometimes is not postpositive.)
453. Predicate Position of Adjectives. A predicate
adjective ( 302) cannot stand in the attributive position,
but either precedes or follows the article and its substan-
tive : thus ayaObs 6 avr^p or 6 avrjp ay'aOos the man is
good.
1. By using adjectives in the predicate position, the
Greeks were able to express frequent subordinate predica-
tions which are difficult to render into English : thus
tylXrjv %cov rrjv /ce(j)a\r)V with his head (which was) bare
Xn. A. 1, 8, 6. ISpovvri rw tTTTro) with his horse (which
was) in a sweat Xn. A. 1, 8, 1.
240 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 6, 77, TO
PECULIARITIES OF POSITION WITH. THE ARTICLE
454. With [Xox>s, dicpos, etc. The adjectives
middle, a/c/oo? lit. pointed, sharp, e'cr^aro? farthest, IJ/JLICTVS
half, when used in the predicate position ( 453) (often
also without the article) mean middle of, tip of or top of,
end of, half of (cf. Latin summus mons)-. thus /ne'er?; 77
Tro'Xt? or 77 Tro'Xt? /xecr j] the middle of the city (but 77 pear)
TroXt? the middle city), e?r' dicpa) TO) o/oet on the top of the
mountain.
455. With irds and oXos. The adjectives TW (a??,
o-u/zTra?) a?/ and 0X09 whole, when used with the article,
commonly have predicate position ( 453) : thus Tracra rj
Tro'Xt? the whole city, iravres ol TroXmu all the citizens, eV
0X77 rrj TroXet in the whole city.
1. Bat when Tra? and 0X0? are real attributives, mean-
ing the whole collectively, they have the attributive position :
thus 77 Trao- a St/ceXia entire Sicily, ol 7raz>Te? avOpo)7rot
the whole tvorld Xn. A. 5, 6, 7. TO o\ov o-rpdrev/jia the
entire army Xn. A. 6, 2, 10.
456. With Demonstrative Pronouns, etc. A substan-
tive modified by a demonstrative pronoun (ouro?, oSe, e\;et-
or by a/JL<f)Q), a/i^oVe/oo? both, e/cdrepos each (of two),
each (of several) commonly has the article (cf.
445), and the pronoun has the predicate position ( 453) :
thus OUTO? o avrjp this man, 77' &e 77 JVO^/JLTJ this opinion, TO>
TratSe afji(f)OTepa) both the children.
XOTE. But proper names, and substantives modified by numerals
or a relative clause, seldom need the article with a demonstrative :
thus: AuroX^Ko) TOVTW for this Autolycus (here) Xn. Sym. 3, 8.
OVTOI ous opare (3dp/3apoi these barbarians ivJiom you behold. Xn. A. 1,
5,16.
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS 241
>
457. 1. With Limiting Genitives. Genitives of the per-
sonal pronouns (including avros used for the pronoun of
the third person, 475, 3), when used to limit a substantive
with the article, have the predicate position ( 453) : thus
6 rrarrip /JLOV or e/noO o trarrfp my father, ol o-Tpariwrai
avrov his soldiers.
2. Limiting genitives of other (than personal) pronouns
commonly stand in attributive position : thus o e^avrov
trarrip my own father, TO e/ceivcov TrXoiov their boat Xn. A.
1,4,8. '
3. The Partitive Genitive modifying a substantive with
the article nearly always has predicate position ( 453).
458. Predicate Position Modified. Most words which
regularly have predicate position ( 454-457) may, if an
attributive word follows the article, stand between the
attributive and the substantive : thus r) arevrj avrrj 6So?
this narrow way Xn. A. 4, 2, 6.
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS
459. Pronouns (like nouns, 73, 2) may be either sub-
stantive or adjective, and some pronouns (like rls and
auro?) are used both substantively and adjectively.
460. Antecedent. The substantive to which a pronoun
refers is called its Antecedent (from antecedo), since nor-
mally it precedes the pronoun : thus at K&pai ev al?
(TKrfl>ow the villages in which they were encamped Xn. A. 1,
4,9.
461. Antecedent Implied. An antecedent may be im-
plied, instead of being expressed, by some preceding word :
thus e\6a)v et? AatceBa I/JLOVCL eireiOev avrovs crrpaTevcra-
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 16
242 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS
crOai he went to Sparta, and tried to persuade them (i.e.
the Spartans) to take up arms Lys. 12, 58. vav^a^ia
TraXcurdrr) $>v la/jLev a sea fight the most ancient of the sea
fights (i.e. TCOV vavpayitov) of which we know Th. 1, 13.
462. Agreement of Pronouns (general). An adjective
pronoun agrees in gender, number, and case, with the
substantive it modifies (cf. 420); a substantive pronoun
agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, and person
(so far as these are distinguished in its inflection, cf.
314 note), but its case depends on the construction of
the clause in which it stands : thus icelvov & eya) Od^ca
but /(Antigone, nom. sing, fern.) will bury him (Polynices,
ace. sing, masc.) S. Ant. 71.
463. A pronoun referring to two or more antecedents
follows the same principles of agreement as the predicate
adjective ( 421423): as rrj 4>a>vf} re /cal rw rpoTrw . . .
ev ola-Trep ereOpd^^v in the manner of speech and behavior
in which I had been brought up PI. Ap. 18 a.
464. Construction according to Sense. A pronoun some-
times agrees with the real, rather than with the grammati-
cal, gender of its antecedent (see 315) : as fify 'HpatcXeirj
oa-Trep . . . mighty Heracles (lit. might of Heracles} who
. . . Hm. TO 'Ap/caSi/cbv 67r\iTiKov, wv r)p% KXeavcop
the force of Arcadian hoplites whom Cleanor commanded
Xn. A. 4, 8, 18.
1. So a word in the singular may suggest a plural,
or vice versa a word in the plural may suggest a corre-
sponding singular, and the pronoun may agree with the
implied antecedent (cf. 461) : thus rj fjid\a rt? #eo?
evSov, o i ovpavov evpvv e^ovcriv surely a god is within (one
of the gods) who hold the broad heavens r 40 (cf. rt? . . .
PERSONAL PRONOUNS 243
Pporcov o? one of mortals, who Z 142).
rivvcrOov, o r/9 K ejriopKov ofjiocro-rj you punish mankind
(every single one) whoever swears falsely F 279.
465. Attraction. A pronoun may be attracted ( 316)
to the gender and number of its predicate substantive :
thus (TfcoTrelv . . . el 8i/caia \eya) rj pr) BiKaarov /aev yap
avrr) (i.e. for TOVTO*) aperrj to see whether I speak fairly or
not, for this is the merit of a judge PI. Ap. 18 a. (Cf. hoc
opus, hie labor est Verg. Aen. 6, 129.)
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
466. Agreement. A personal pronoun agrees with its
antecedent in person and number ; it has no distinction of
gender, and its case depends on the construction of the
clause in which it stands ( 462): thus crv S' etVe /iot
but do you (Antigone, 2d pers. nom. sing, fern.) tell me
(Creon, 1st pers. dat. sing, masc.) S. Ant. 446.
467. The personal pronouns in the nominative case are
not expressed unless emphatic (see 305).
468. In Attic the pronoun of the third person ou, ot,
etc. ( 139, 2) is always reflexive (see 472); to supply
its place as a personal pronoun of reference the corre-
sponding forms of auro? are used ( 140, 1 and 475, 3).
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
469. Agreement. A reflexive pronoun agrees with its
antecedent in gender, number, and person ; its case
depends on its construction in the clause in which it
stands,
244 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS
470. Direct Reflexive. A reflexive pronoun regularly
refers to the most important word in the sentence usually
the subject : thus yvwOi o-avrov know thyself; KXeap^o?
. . . afajnrevei ejrl rrjv eavrov (r/crjvijv Clear chus rode back
to his own tent Xn. A. 1, 5, 12. TOU? Tre/otot/eof? acfrfjicev
eVt ra? eavT&v Tro'Aet? the perioeci he dismissed to their
own cities Xn. Hell. 6, 5, 21.
471. Indirect Reflexive. In dependent clauses a reflex-
ive pronoun may sometimes refer back to the subject of
the principal verb (cf. se in Latin): thus efiovXero &e KOI
ajrav TO arpdrev/jLa TT/JO? eavrov e%eiv TTJV
moreover, Clear chus wished the entire army to give
its mind to him(self) Xn. A. 2, 5, 29.
1. But auroO, ai/rw, etc., ( 475, 3) is also frequently
found in dependent clauses referring to the subject of the
principal verb (cf. eius in Latin) ; thus T&V Trap eavrw
/3ap/3dpa)v eVeyLteXetro a>? . . . evvolicw e%oiev avrw he was
careful of the barbarians with him(self^) that they should be
well disposed toward him^self) Xn. A. 1, 1, 5.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the reflexive pronoun of the third person is
used in referring to the first or second person (cf. 143 a) : thus evprj-
(TT (r<as avrovs Ty/AaprryKOTas you will find that you have made a
mistake Xn. Hell. 1, 7, 19.
NOTE 2. The plurals of the reflexive pronouns sometimes have
the force of a reciprocal ( 142) pronoun: thus fj/jilv avrots
8iaAeo/x0a we shall converse with one another (lit. with ourselves)
[Dem.] 48, 6.
470 a. In Homer the personal pronouns alone are sometimes used
reflexively ; more often the reflexive meaning is made clearer by the addi-
tion of aur6s in agreement with the pronoun: thus ty&v /* Xvcro/j-ai I
will ransom myself K 378. e 5' avrbv tirorpvvei /ix&racr0cu he rouses
himself to battle T 171.
THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN ai/ro? 245
472. The personal pronoun of the third person (01), ot,
etc.) is in Attic always used as an indirect reflexive
( 471); rarely the personal pronouns of the first and
second persons are so used : thus Xe-yerat 'A7rd\\(ov etcSel-
pai M.ap(rvdv vl/crjads epi&vrd ol irepl ffO<f>tafi Apollo is said
to have flayed Marsyas when he had outdone him in a con-
test with himself in skill Xn. A. 1, 2, 8. So in the phrase
I seem to myself.
473. The use of the reflexive pronouns may be made
more emphatic by adding ai/ro'? ( 475, 2) in agreement
with the subject : thus avrol ev avrols a-racrid^ovTes being
at variance among themselves Xn. Hell. 1, 5, 9 (cf. the
similar use of ipse . . . se in Latin).
THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN ai/ro?
474. Agreement. The pronoun auro? is used both sub-
stantively and adjectively. When used as an adjective it
follows the rules of agreement for adjectives ( 420) ;
when used as a personal pronoun of the third person
( 475, 3) it follows the rules for agreement of such
pronouns ( 462).
475. Uses of O/UTOS. There are three different uses of
auro? as follows :
1. As an adjective in the attributive ( 451) position
auro? means same : thus o avrbs avrip the same man, ravrd
( 43) the same things (sc.
472 a. Homer uses e'o, o?, etc., also as a direct reflexive ; when so used
it regularly has written accent ( 139, 2).
475, 1 a. In Homer aur6s without the article may mean the same :
thus avrrjv 6S6v the same road K 263.
246 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS
2. As an adjective in the predicate position ( 453), or
without the article, ai/ro? means self (myself, yourself, him-
self, etc.) : thus avrbs 6 avijp or o avrjp auro? the man
himself, av avros you yourself, etc.
NOTE. Frequently in the nominative case (less often in the
other cases) the substantive is to be supplied from the context, so
that avros appears to stand alone meaning self, avros re /cat ot <rot
yovoi (you) yourself and your ancestors PI. Crit. 50 e. avrov eAe
(sc. C/AC from the context) pity me myself O 503. KOL 'A&rjvaux 7raA.iv
es Eu^Sotav Sta/^aVre? . . . KaTCcrrpe'^avro Tracrav . . . 'Eorrtaia? 8e eoi-
Ktcravres avrot TTJV yfjv Icr^ov Ae Athenians again crossed over into
Euboea and entirely subdued it . . . and, after driving the Histiaeans
from their homes, took possession of their land themselves Th. 1, 114. So
avros (j>7) he himself (i.e. the master) said it.
3. In cases other than the nominative, avrfa may be
used substantively as a personal pronoun of the third per-
son ( 468) him, her, it, them. In Attic this is the regu-
lar usage : thus avrov a-arpaTrrjv CTTOLrjae he made him
satrap Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. ovSev rj^Oero avr&v TroKepovvrtov
he was not at all disturbed because they were fighting. Xn.
A. 1, 1, 8.
IDIOMATIC USES OF
NOTE 1. With an ordinal numeral avros is best translated with
(n 1) others: thus ypfOrj 7rpeo-/?evr>)s . . . Scicaro? avros he ivas
chosen ambassador with nine others (lit. he himself the tenth} Xn. Hell. 2,
2,17.
NOTE 2. Combined with a substantive in the dative case ( 392,
note) O.VTOS is best translated and all: thus rerrapas vavs t\.a(3ov avrots
avopdai they took four ships, crews and all (lit. with the men themselves)
Xen. Hell. 1, 2, 12.
475, 3 a. In Homer avr6s seldom does duty as a personal pronoun, but
is usually intensive (sometimes only by contrast) : thus a v r o i> s 5 eXwpta
reuxe Kvvevnv and made themselves (i.e. their bodies, in contrast with
their souls) a prey for dogs A 4.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 247
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
476. Agreement. A possessive pronoun is an adjec-
tive, agreeing in gender, number, and case, with the word
it modifies, but its stem conforms to the person and num-
ber of its antecedent. Thus, in 6 e/>to9 Trarr^p my father,
e/Lwfe agrees with Trarrfp in gender, number, and case, but
its stem e/xo- corresponds with that of the pronoun of the
first person singular.
477. An equivalent of the possessive pronoun often
found is the genitive of the personal pronouns pov, crov,
97/*ft>z>, V/JLCOV (and for the third person avrov, aim}?, avrcov,
468), always in the predicate position ( 457, 1): thus
6 Trarrfp pov my father, o aSeX$o? avrov his brother, 6 aSe\-
0o? avTfjs her brother.
NOTE. Since a possessive pronoun is equivalent to a genitive case,
a word in the genitive may stand in apposition ( 317) to a possessive
pronoun: thus 8a>)p avr e/xos covce KvvwTriSos my brother by marriage
ivashealso of shameless me F 180. avrwv yap a<f>Tpr)<Tiv aracrOa-
oXovrofor by their own perversity they perished a 7 (cf. 420, note).
478. The possessive pronouns (except o? and
which are always reflexive) may or may not refer to the
subject of the sentence ; usually in referring to the
subject the genitive of the reflexive pronouns (e/iafToO,
o-eavrov, eavrov, etc.), in the attributive ( 457, 2) posi-
tion, is used. This is the regular prose usage with the
third person singular, since o? is poetic only : thus K.\eap-
477 a. In Ionic eu and a-^^v may be used where Attic would use
, or afiruv (cf. 468).
478 a. In Homer 5s (e6s) usually refers to the subject, hut sometimes
to a more prominent word in the sentence (cf. 470) : as y6ov"EKTopa y
tvl otKi}} they mourned for Hector in his own house Z 500.
248 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS
^o? rou? avrov o-r/)cma>Ta? e/3taero levai Clear chus tried to
force his own soldiers to proceed Xn. A. 1, 3, 1.
479. A possessive pronoun is sometimes made clearly
reflexive by the addition of auro? in the genitive case
(cf. 477 note); in the singular this usage is poetic only,
but in the plural it is very common: thus epbv avrov
%/oeto? my own need B 45. kov avrov %/oeto? his own need
a 409. rot? aolcriv avrov to your own (friends) S. 0. R.
416. curb TT)? 77 /-teredo a? avr&v far from our own (land)
Th. 6, 21.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
480. Agreement. The demonstrative pronouns are
used both adjectively ( 420), as ot>ro? o avjp this man,
and substantively, as ouro? this (maw), Ifcehny that (woman),
rdSe these (things) (cf. 459).
481. Of the demonstrative pronouns ouro? this, that, is
the most general in meaning, and is most frequently used.
v OSe this (here) refers to something near the speaker ;
eVe^o? that (over there) refers to something remote : thus
OUTO? 7* 'Ar/oetS?;? this man (of whom you ask) is Atreus" 1
son F 178. r/ E/cro/3o? r)8e yvvrj this (woman here) is Hector's
wife Z 460. el icelvov . . . ISoiaro if they should see
that man (i.e. Odysseus, who is now far away) a 163.
For the predicate position of demonstrative pronouns
see 456.
482. Generally in referring backward (to something
previously mentioned) ouro? (less often e/celvos) is used,
while in referring forward (to something about to be
mentioned) oSe (sometimes ouro?) is employed : as
RELATIVE PRONOUNS 249
piov Be TOVTOV /cal ro'8e a proof of that (which I have said)
is also this (which I am now going to state) Xn. A. 1,9, 29.
So also TOioOro?, TOCTOUTO?, usually refer back, while
rotocrSe and roa-dcr&e usually refer forward.
NOTE. The demonstrative oSe is often equivalent to a possessive,
or even a personal, pronoun of the first person ; this use is especially
common in tragedy: thus cr/o/TTTpo) TVTTCIS e/c r^crSe ^eipos struck by
the staff held in this hand (of mine) S. 0. R. 811. w ^ evOelaa Se Trap
avSpl ruSe but wedded with this man (i.e. with me) E. Med. 1337.
oSe roc Trapeijiu Here am /, Sir Hdt. 1, 115.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
483. Agreement. A relative pronoun agrees with its
antecedent ( 460) in gender and number, but its case
depends on the construction of the clause in which it
stands : as avrjp o ? rfkdev a man who came, avrjp o v eiSofiev
a man whom we saw.
484. Attraction. 1. A relative pronoun is often at-
tracted ( 316) into the case of its antecedent, especially
from the accusative into the genitive or dative : thus
a^ioi r% e\ev9ep(a$ r/? /ceKTrjo-Qe worthy of the freedom
which you possess (77?, if not attracted, would be jjv) Xn.
A. 1, 7, 3. el T<p fjye/JLovi TTMTTevaofjiev co av KO/oo? SiSq) if
we intend to trust the guide that Cyrus gives (<w, if not
attracted, would be 6V) Xn. A. 1, 3, 16.
2. Much more rarely the antecedent is attracted into
the case of the relative: as Trdvrcov wv Seovrai, Treirpa-
70T69 having accomplished everything that they need (for
Trdvra wv) Xn. Hell. 1, 4, 2 (cf. in Latin urbem quam
statuo vestra est Verg. Aen. 1, 573).
485. " Incorporation. n The antecedent is often made
a part of the relative clause (usually only when the ante-
cedent is indefinite). Both relative and antecedent then
250 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS
stand in the same case: thus afti/cel ^cotcpdrr)? ovs
fj Tro'Xt? vo/jLi^ei #eot>? ov vofjLifav Socrates commits an offense
in not believing in the gods which (or what gods) the State
believes in Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 1. ew Be yv afyticovTO /ccbfjirjv
jjLeydXr) rjv the village at which they arrived was large (i.e.
j] KCD/JLTJ et? TIV) Xn. A. 4, 4, 2. el Se nva opwr] . . . Kara-
cricevd^ovTa 77? apX OL X^pas if he saw anyone improving the
country he governed (i.e. rrjv x^P av fa 484, 2) Xn. A. 1,
9, 19. TOUTOU? /cal apxovras ejroiei 77? /carear pefaro ^o/?a?
these he made rulers of the territory he subdued (i.e. r?}?
r\v, 484, 1) Xn. A. 1, 9, 14. eVopeuero crvv y elp^e
he proceeded with what force he had (i.e. <rw rfj
Svvdpei, fa 484, 1) Xn. Hell. 4, 1, 23.
Observe that attraction into the genitive or into the
dative ( 484) usually takes place if either antecedent or
relative would stand in one of those cases. Cf. in English
" he gave to what persons he could."
NOTE 1. Here belongs the phrase ovSets o<ms ov (lit. nobody
who . . . not=) every one, in which ouSei's is regularly attracted to
the case of the relative (ovSevos orov ov, ouSevt 6Va> ov, etc.) : thus
KAatan/ Kat dyavaKrwv ovSeva. OVTIVO, ov KaT/cAao" by his weeping
and wailing he broke down the fortitude of everybody PL Phaed. 117 d.
So similarly $aiyx,ao-To? 6Vos lit. wonderful how much, Oav/Jiaarov oaov,
etc. (adverbially OavfjLaa-Td<s cos) : as /xera tSpwros Oav/jutarov oaov with
a wonderful amount of sweat ( = 0avyu,ao~r6V ecrrt //.e^' ocrou) PL Hep. 350 d.
This attraction is sometimes (rarely) found with other adjectives.
NOTE 2. A peculiar attraction and condensation commonly takes
place with otos, oo-os, ocmo-ovv, and a few other relatives, by which
both the relative and a following nominative are attracted to the case
of the antecedent: thus x L P L ^l JLevov ^ < J ) " ot dv8pt doing favor to a
man like you (the full form would be roiouYo) olos av el) Xn. Mem. 2,
9, 3. rrjv Se ywatKa evpov ocrrjv T' opeo? Kopvcfrrjv and his wife they
found as huge as a mountain peak K 113. Sometimes even with the
article : rots otots rj/juv to such as we are Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 25. So often
with superlatives (see 428).
RELATIVE PRONOUNS 251
486. Antecedent not Expressed. An antecedent denot-
ing the general idea of persons or things is seldom ex-
pressed, since its gender, number, and case are usually
made clear by the context : thus eya) Be . . . KOI wv eyco
Kparco iJLevovfjiev but I and those (nom. plur. masc.) whom
I command will remain Xn. Cy. 5, 1, 26. cnwy&v i^ev ij
fj,' eri/crev hating her (ace. sing, fern.) ivho lore me E. Ale.
338. el&evai rrjv Svva/jLiv efi ou? av IQHTIV to know the
strength of those (gen. plur. masc.) against whom they are
going Xn. A. 5, 1, 8. Beirai aov rij/jiepov TOVTOV e/CTrielv
crvv ot? fjidXia-ra (f)i\ei<; he desires you to drink this up
to-day in company with those (dat. plur. masc.) whom you
most love ( 484, 1) Xn. A. 1, 9, 25. So with relative
adverbs : da) V/JLCIS evda TO jrpdyfjLa eyevero I will conduct
you to the place where the affair occurred Xn. Cy. 5, 4, 21.
Cf. in English "he gave to ivhom he could."
NOTE. Here belong the phrases <TTLV CHTTIS (or os) . . . there is
some one who (i.e. somebody), eiVti/ ot . . . there are those luho (i.e. some),
but in other cases in the plural regularly co-rtv toy, IOTIV ols. ctrrtv
ou's : thus <TTI 8" OCTTIS KaT\Tr]<f>6i] and one man was taken off
his guard Xn. .4. 1, 8, 20. etcrt Se ot A.e'yovo-1 and some (lit. there
are those ivho) say Hdt. 3, 45. -rrXrjv 'loiji/an/ KOLI 'Axcttoii/ Kat ecrrtv wv
aAAwv iQvwv except the lonians and Achaeans and some other nations Th.
3, 92. Rarely rfv (rjcrav) is found : rjv 8e rovrtov TOJI/ trraO^v ows Traw
fjMKpovs rjXavvev some of these days' marches he made very long Xn. A.
1, 5, 7. So also with relative adverbs : CCTTIV ov (or OTTOV) . . . (lit.
there is ivhere) somewhere* ecrriv OTTWS (lit. there is how) somehow, ecrrtv
ore (lit. there is when) sometimes, etc.
487. Relative not Repeated. In a compound ( 312)
relative sentence the relative (pronoun or adverb) is sel-
dom repeated (cf. 312, 1) with the succeeding verbs :
thus 'A/oiato? 8e, 6 v ^et? rfld\OfJtV jSacriKed KaOiardvai, teal
e$a)Ka/JLev teal e\d/3ofjiev TTicrrd but Ariaeus, whom we wished
to make king and to whom we gave and from whom we
252 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS
received pledges Xn. A. 3, 2, 5. eiTrev on ovbev avra
. . . GTreiBrj TroAAou? ^ev 'AOrjvaicov elBeir) rou? ra 6/jiOia
irpciTTOVTas avrw, BOKOVVTO, Be AvcrdvBpq) /cal A-a/ceBai/JLoviois
\joi, he said that he didn't care . . ., since he knew of many
Athenians who were acting in concert with him and since
what he proposed was agreeable to Lysander and the Spar-
tans Lys. 12, 74.
NOTE. Preposition not Repeated. A preposition belonging with
both antecedent and following relative is seldom repeated with the
relative.
488. Use of Relatives. The indefinite relatives (ocrrt?
oTTo'o-09, 0770609, etc.) are regularly used when the antece-
dent is indefinite, but the simple relatives (09, 00-09, etc.)
not infrequently refer to an indefinite antecedent; as a
fjLrj olBa ovBe oio/juai elBevai whatever) I don't know I don't
even think that I know PI. Ap. 21 d.
NOTE. Relatives in Exclamations. Relatives (otos, oo-os, ok) are
sometimes used in exclamations : as cJ TrctTTTre, o<ra Trpay/xara Xs how
much trouble you have, grandpa ! (lit. so much trouble as you have !
cf. 485) Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 4. cos KaXd? fjioc o vraTTTros how handsome
grandpa is ! Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 2.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
489. Agreement. The interrogative pronouns are used
both substantively and adjectively (see 462) : as ri 9 who?
avrjp what man?
490. Use. The interrogatives (pronouns and adverbs,
151) are used both in direct and in indirect questions, but
in indirect questions the indefinite relatives ( 150-151)
are commonly preferred : as /3ov\eveo-0ai o rt
to consider what must be done Xn. A. 1, 3, 11.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 253
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
491. The indefinite pronoun rt?, rt, is used both sub-
stantively and adjectively (see 462) as rfkOe rt? some-
body came, avijp rt? rj\0 some man came. (Observe that
it does not stand at the beginning of a sentence.)
NOTE 1. The indefinite TIS is often best rendered by i a, an' : as
erepos TIS Swacr-nys another nobleman; sometimes it can be rendered
by "a sort of" or "something like": as TJ ypa(j>rj . . . roiaSe ns rjv the
indictment was something like this Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 1. TpiaKOj/Ta rives
somewhere about thirty. So TI with adverbs : o-^eSov TL pretty nearly.
NOTE 2. Sometimes TIS meaning anybody implies everybody: as
(.v fMtv TL<S Sopu Orjd(r6a) let every one sharpen well his spear B 382;
but usually this meaning is expressed by Tras TIS or eKcurros TL<S.
THE ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS aXXo? AND ere/30?
492. a\Ao? other (of several), and ere/so? other (of two),
are sometimes loosely used, one of them being employed
when we might properly expect the other.
IDIOMATIC USES OF aXXo5 AND ere/305
NOTE 1. By a peculiar idiom in Greek aAAos other, rest, often pre-
cedes that with which it is contrasted : as TO. re a A A. a ert/A^o-e KCU
fivpiovs tScoKe SapeiKous he gave me ten thousand darics and honored me
in other ways Xn. A.. 1, 3, 3.
NOTE 2. Not infrequently aXAos or crepes expresses merely a con-
trast without being strictly logical, and so can be best rendered by
besides: as ou yap rjv xP T s v8e aAAo o^Sei/ SevSpov /or <Aere was no
grass, and not even a tree besides (lit. no grass or other tree) Xn. A. 1, 5, 5.
NOTE 3. aAAos . . . aAAo? (also erepos . . . erepos means one . . .
another (but this is usually expressed by o /xei/ . . . o 8e, 443, 1).
In saying one . . . one . . . , another . . another . . . , the second half
of the expression, being but a repetition of the first half, is left unsaid,
and aXAo? with itself in a different case (or an adverb from its stem)
is sufficient (cf. Latin nliws . . . aliud) : thus aAAos aAXa Ae'yet one
says one thing, another (*?/.<? ) another Xn. A. 2, 1, 15.
254 SYNTAX OF THE VERB
SYNTAX OF THE VERB
493. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs. A transitive
verb can take an object in the accusative case ( 329) ; an
intransitive verb cannot. Thus, fypdcfxt) (eTrto-roX^) I write
(a letter) is transitive ; icaOev&a) I sleep is intransitive.
1. In Greek many transitive verbs are used absolutely
as intransitive : thus XetVo) leave, also fail; e\avvco drive,
also march; e%&> hold, also hold one's self, be.
NOTE. In many of these verbs an object is easily supplied : thus
eXawo) (lirirov) drive (a horse), reXevroi (TOV ft iW) finish (one's life), i.e.
die ; but this is not the case with all.
2. Some intransitive verbs when compounded with a
preposition become transitive (see 345 and cf . 324, 2) :
thus ftaiva) go (intransitive) ; but Sia-Paiva) cross (transi-
tive), 7rapa-@aiva) transgress (transitive).
494. Transitive and Intransitive Tenses In a few verbs
which have at the same time ( 162, 1) both the first and
the second aorist (active and middle), or the first and the
second perfect, the first tenses are transitive, and the sec-
ond intransitive (cf. 207, note 3). The most important
of these are the following (the others are given in the list
of verbs, 729) :
1. PRESENT IST AORIST 2d AORIST
/?cuVa> go c/^o-a caused to go e/fyv went
Suw enter e&vaa caused to enter ISuv entered
cause to stand Itm/tra caused to stand, tcrryv stood
erected
put out, ex- co-/?e<ra put out t<rj3r)v went out
tinguish
<uu) produce Z<f>vo-a produced tyvv grew
NOTE. The future active follows the first aorist in being transitive
(cf. 212) : as /Srjoxo shall cause to go, <vo-o> shall produce.
AGREEMENT OF VERBS
255
2. PRESENT
destroy
TTf-iOa) persuade
IST PERFECT
have destroyed
have persuaded
2D PERFECT
oAwAa am ruined
7T7roi0a trust
3. On the same principle, in some transitive verbs the
perfect (usually the second perfect) is intransitive;
thus :
PRESENT
ayvu/xi break
TTTJyWfJiL fix
d>aiV(o show
2o PERFECT
eaya am broken
TreVryya am fixed
7T<f>r)va have ap-
peared
PRESENT IST PERFECT
cause to e<m)Ka stand
stand
a) produce 7re<v/ca am by
nature
AGREEMENT OF VERBS
495. A finite verb ( 159) agrees with its subject in
person and number ; thus (^/zefc) rj\9ofjiev we came, K0/oo<?
ei;e\avvei Cyrus marches, uo avSpe reOvarov two men are
dead Xn. A. 4, 1, 19.
NOTE. Plural for Singular. In Greek, as in other languages, the
first person plural (modestly) is sometimes used for the singular
(sometimes called in English " the editorial we ") : as ov SIKCUWS, yjv
6dvo), Oavov[jL.Oa unjustly shall I die if I am (lit. we are) put to death
E. Tro. 904.
496. Agreement with Two or More Subjects. Two or
more subjects taken together, of course, count as a plural
(or dual) and so may take a plural (or dual) verb : thus
a r jTo\e\oi r jrd(Tiv ?5//.a? Bezua? /cal TIdcrLcov Xenias and
Pasion have abandoned us Xn. A. 1, 4, 8. r;%t /Soa?
Si/^oet? o-v/jL/SaXXerov r)$e 'ZfcdfjiavSpos where Simois
and Scamander join their streams E 774.
1. But with two or more subjects the verb often agrees
only with the nearer or more important : thus /Sao-tXeu?
/cal ol avv avrw elcnrtTTTei et? TO (rrparoTreBov the king and
his followers forced their way into the camp Xn. A. 1, 10, 1.
you and he (or they) = you
256 SYNTAX OF THE VERB
497. Subjects of Different Persons. When the subjects
are of different persons the verb is of the first person if
possible, otherwise of the second: i.e.
you and I (or we) i
he (or they) and I (or we) I _
you and he (or they) and I f
(or we)
as, KOI 70), e<?;, teal o~v 7ro\\a . . . eijrofjiev Both you and
I, said he, have said a good deal Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 15.
PECULIARITIES IN AGREEMENT
498. Neuter Plural Subject. A neuter plural subject
regularly has a singular verb : thus TOV S' OUTTOTC Kv^ara
this the waves never leave B 396. /ca\a fjv TO,
the sacrifices were favorable Xn. A. 4, 3, 19.
NOTE. A neuter plural subject denoting persons, or used distribu-
tively, may take a plural verb: thus roo-aSe /xev /xera 'AdqvaiW IQvt)
ea-Tpdrevov so many nations were active on the Athenian side Tli. 7, 57 ;
J/crav Tcurra Svo rf.i\r] these were two walls Xn. A. 1, 4, 4.
499. Dual and Plural. A subject in the dual often
takes a verb in the plural ; less often a subject in the
plural, suggesting a dual, takes a verb in the dual : thus
TO) e rax iyyvQev rj\6ov and soon the tivo came near
E 275. at e ol ITTTTOI a/-t<l? 6Bov Spa/Jierrjv and his
steeds ran apart along the way M* 392.
NOTE. Not infrequently dual and plural verbs are found in the
same sentence : thus iKeo-Orjv, TOV 8' rjvpov they came, and found him
1185.
500. Collectives. Words like Tra? everybody, TrXijOo^ a
multitude, 77/109 people, arparo^ army, etc. (collective
nouns, 321), when used to denote persons usually take a
plural verb (cf. 315): thus a>? (frdaav 77 TrXrjOvs thus
VOICE 257
spoke the multitude B 278. o a'XXo? arparo^ aTreftaivov
the rest of the army began to disembark Th. 4, 32.
501. Agreement with Predicate Substantive. The verb
sometimes agrees with the predicate substantive when the
latter is more prominent than the subject (cf. 316) :
thus ajrav Se TO pecov rwv Ti%a)v rjcrav ardSioi rpefc the
entire distance between the walls was three stades Xn. A. 1,
4,4.
VOICE
502. The Greek verb has three voices ( 158): active,
middle, and passive.
THE ACTIVE VOICE
503. The active voice represents the subject as acting
or being : thus Xeyo) say, 7rda-%a) experience, eZ/u go, el fit be.
NOTE. The context may sometimes show that the active voice
means to cause a thing to be done (by others) : as 'Apra^ep^s crvA-
Aa/x/?avei Kvpov Artaxerxes caused Cyrus to be arrested Xn. A. 1, 1, 3.
So often a,7TOKTeiVa> kill or cause to be put to death, afoo&optt build or
cause to be built, and many others.
THE MIDDLE VOICE
504. The middle voice represents the subject as inter-
ested in the action of the verb. It has a variety of mean-
ings which shade off into one another, and may indicate
that the subject acts with or within his own means or
powers, or for himself, or (less often) upon himself : thus
504 a. In Homer (and sometimes in other poets) some verbs are used
in the middle voice (implying an interest on the part of the subject) which
in Attic are regularly used only in the active : thus dKotero he heard (Attic
7?/cove), <t>dro he said (Attic e0??), Idfodau to see (Attic t'5etV).
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 17
258 THE VERB VOICE
\ovofjLai TOW? Tro'Sa? wash (one's own) feet, Tra/oe^o //.at fur-
nish (from one's own resources), Xvo/zat (rti>a) loose for
ones self, ransom (as rj\0e XOo-o/^e^o? Ovyarpa he came to
ransom his daughter A 13), TrepiriOefJiaL put on (one's self),
ayopai yvvalfca marry (i.e. lead to one's own house) a wife,
Trepl TToXXoO Troiov/JLai TI make anything of much importance
(in one's own eyes), Xuo/xat loose one's self (as Trpwros VTT
apveiov \v6/jLrjv, vireXvcra ' eraijpou? first I loosed myself
from beneath the ram, and then I freed my companions
i 463), TpeTrofjLai turn one's self, iravo^ai stop one's self,
cease, TreiOopai (lit. persuade one's self) believe, obey.
505. The middle voice often means to get a thing done
either to one's self or to another person or thing (cf . 503
note) : thus BiSdafcofjiaL get taught, St8acr/co//,at rov vlov
get one's son taught, aTroypd^opai ra? vavs have a list of
the ships made.
NOTE. From this use of the middle it is but a slight step to the
use of the middle as passive ( 514).
506. Active and Middle differently Translated. The
active and the middle voices of the following verbs
usually must be differently rendered in English (other
similar verbs may be found, and they are to be explained
in similar manner) :
cupoi take cupov/xcu choose (take for one's self)
a7ro8i'Sw/ju give back a7ro8t8o/xat sell (give for value re-
ceived)
) fasten aTrro/jiai touch
vw take counsel /?ouA.evo/xai consider one's own plan
marry (of the man) ya^ovfiai marry (of the woman)
write or propose a law ypd<j>ofjL<u indict (i.e. have the suit
entered in writing) '
a loan Savet^o/xat borrow (i.e. have a loan
made to one's self)
va)
THE PASSIVE VOICE 259
ao> judge SiKao/xai go to law
J hold txo/xat (w. gen.) hold to, and so be
close to
sacrifice Ovofjuu sacrifice (for omens)
let fjnaOovfiaL hire (i.e. have let to
one's self)
be a citizen TroAtrevo/xat perform one's duty as a
citizen
) be an ambassador Trpco-^evo/xat negotiate
Tt'077/xt vofjiov establish a law (for Ti'0e/xai vo/xov enacf a /aw (i.e. of the
others to obey) State, for itself)
(j>v\a.TTa) (w. ace.) watch, guard </>vAaTTo/xai (w. ace.) be on guard
against
507. Middle Form in Future only. On account of the
greater natural interest in future events, many active verbs
regularly use the middle voice in the future tense : thus
a/covco hear, future a^oucro/Ltat, aorist ijtcovo-a, etc., a^aprdvw
miss, future a^apr^a-o^ai, aorist TJfjLaprov, etc. (cf. 504 a).
508. Deponent Verbs. Deponent verbs ( 158, 3) show
the various uses of the middle voice, and differ from other
verbs only in having no active forms : thus
(hold one's self under) obligate one's self, promise,
receive (for one's self), alaOdvofMai perceive (with one's
own senses), etc.
THE PASSIVE VOICE
509. The passive voice represents the subject as acted
upon : thus e\vOr)v was loosed, or was ransomed.
1. Observe that the passive voice is the passive of the
middle as well as of the active, and the context must
determine which voice it represents : thus the passive
form e\v0rjv may need to be translated ( 506) was loosed
(Xvco) or was ransomed (Xvo/iat), rjpeOrjv was taken
260 THE VERB VOICE
or was chosen (alpovnai), eypd<f)rjv was written (ypd<f>(o) or
was indicted ("/pd^opai), and so in other tenses (see 510
note).
510. Passive of Deponent Verbs. From the preceding
section it follows that deponent verbs ( 508) may have a
passive : thus rotavra avrols . . . elp^aarai such things
have been done by them (/oyabfuu do) Lys. 12, 1. etc o-ov
fBid^ovrai rdSe this is done with violence ~by you (/3id%ojjiai
act with violence) S. Ant. 1073. ecovrjOrj was bought
buy) Xn. Mem. 2, 7, 12.
NOTE. The passive meaning usually can be determined only by
the context, since there can be no difference of form except in the
aorist and future of middle deponents ( 158, 3).
511. Object of Active Becomes Subject of Passive. The
object of the verb in the active (or middle) regularly
becomes the subject when the verb is changed to the pas-
sive form (but see 515, 3): thus erd^Orjcrav ol tf E\\r)ve<;
the Greeks were drawn up (active erafe row^EXX?; vas).
512. Cognate Accusative Retained with Passive. A cog-
nate accusative ( 331) or an accusative of the part affected
( 335) used with the active is regularly retained in the
same case in the passive form ; see 340, 1 (cf. in Latin
rogatus est sententiam): thus ypafals rov aywva TOVTOV
having been indicted in this suit Dem. 18, 103 (cf. MeX^rd?
/ji eypd^aro rrjv ypa^rjv ravTrjv Meletus brought this in-
dictment against me PI. Ap. 19 a), ot re VTTO rov -^rv^ov^
TOU? SaKTvXovs T<OV TToSwv a7ro<7ecn77rdTe9 and those who
had their toes frozen off by the cold Xn. A. 4, 5, 12.
NOTE. Sometimes intransitive verbs (such as can take only a cog-
nate accusative) are used in the passive; when so used the cognate
accusative of the active becomes the subject of the passive : as 6 KLV-
THE PASSIVE VOICE 261
KivSvi/evcTcu the risk is run, TO. x/ai^uara KivSvi/everai the
money is risked Dem. 34, 28. Often the passive participles of these
verbs are found: as eis lAey^ov run/ avrois y3e^taj/x,vwi/ Karatrr^vai
to submit to an examination of their past lives Lys. 16, 1.
513. Active Forms with Passive Force. The passive
of some verbs is supplied by the active voice of a different
(intransitive) verb : thus :
a7roKTtVo> kill &7roOvrj<TK(i) (die) be killed
ev TTOUO benefit cv Traa^w be benefited
ev (or KaKcos) A.eya> speak well ev (or KCIKWS) d/covw (poetic K\VW)
(or z7Z) of be well (or ^7) spoken of
K/3aAAa> casf ow eKTriTTTO) 6e cas owf or banished
Sico/ceo pursue, prosecute ^>evyw (lit. ./fee) &e prosecuted (a
escape, be acquitted)
1. So also intransitive second aorists ( 494, 1) are often
equivalent to the passive of the corresponding (transitive)
first aorists; as avavTavres VTTO eo-<ra\wv having been
forced to migrate by the Thessalians Th. 1, 12.
514. Origin of the Passive. Greek originally had no
passive voice, and in most tenses the middle voice served
also to express the passive meaning. In the aorist an
originally intransitive form (cf . 494, 1, and 513, 1) of
some verbs came to be felt as a passive, and by analogy
other aorists passive were formed later. The future
passive (with the middle endings) was formed from the
aorist passive by adding the regular future suffix (-cr:):
thus <f)aiva) show, ecfrrjva showed, e^dvr^v appeared, i.e. was
shown, future c^a^TJo-o/xat shall appear or be shown.
515. The statement of 514 will serve to explain the
following facts :
1. The future (rarely the aorist) middle is often used
with a passive meaning : thus a^rj you shall be led Aesch.
262 THE VERB VOICE
Ag. 1632, f) 777 ... ev c^uXaferat the land will be well
guarded Xn. Oec. 4, 9. See 519, note 2.
2. Many (intransitive) verbs which are regularly fol-
lowed by the genitive ( 356) or the dative ( 376) may
be used in the passive voice. In such case the genitive
or dative used with the active voice is represented by
the nominative as subject in the corresponding passive
construction : thus OVKCTI a7rei\ovfjLai aXA,' ijBrj aireCkS)
aXXot? I am no longer threatened, but now I threaten others
(active a7mX&> TLVL) Xn. Symp. 4, 31. fjiavOdvovcnv ap%eiv
re Kal ap^eadai they learn to govern and to be governed
(active
NOTE. A cognate accusative used with the active is retained
in the passive construction (see 512) : thus Trpos vov TO. SetV
threatened by you with those dread threats (active eT
a rij/t) S. Ant. 408.
3. Finally, even an accusative of the direct object is
sometimes retained in the same case in the passive con-
struction, while a genitive or dative denoting a person
becomes the subject of the passive verb : thus ol eVn-e-
rpafJL/jievoi, rrjv <j>v\aKr)V those intrusted with the guard
(active eTriTpeTrco rrjv ^>v\atcijv TLVL) Th. 1, 126. aTrer/Juj-
Orjaav ra? fcecfraXas they were beheaded Xn. Cy. 8, 8, 3
(cf. rov a&e\<f>ov a7reVe/xe rrjv K(j)a\r)V Xn. A.. 3, 1, IT).
NOTE. But of course the accusative may become the subject
(according to 512), while the genitive or dative remains in the same
case | as aTravrwv 0avaros KarcytyvwcrKero the sentence of death was
passed on all Lys. 13, 38. e^uoi . . . (TKrjTTTpov KOLL 8 v vaults Tracra
17 UoXuKpareos eTrtrerpaTrrat to me Polycrates' scepter and power entire
515, 1 a. In Homer, the future middle is (almost) always used also as
passive, and the aorist middle not infrequently has the passive meaning :
as Trap' 8,/j.fjLi 0iX ^<reai with us you shall be welcomed a 123. e/3\7;To was
hit H 753.
USE OF THE TENSES 263
has been intrusted Hdt. 3, 142 (cf . in English " the duty was intrusted
to him" and "he was intrusted with the duty").
516. Agent. The Agent with passive verbs is regu-
larly expressed by the genitive ( 372) with VTTO under,
by ( 417, 1), sometimes with Trpo? ( 414, 1) or Trapd
( 411, 1) at the hands of, more rarely with e'/e ( 407) or
aTro (403) /row.
1. Often with the perfect or pluperfect passive, and
regularly with the verbal in -reo? ( 666), the agent is
expressed by the dative ( 380). With the verbal in
-reo9, the accusative of agent is also sometimes found (see
666, note).
USE OF THE TENSES
517. Primary and Secondary Tenses. The Primary
Tenses are the Present, the Perfect, the Future, and the
Future Perfect.
The Secondary Tenses are the Imperfect, the Aorist, and
the Pluperfect.
1. The Historical Present ( 525) counts as a secondary
tense, and the Gnomic Aorist ( 530) as a primary tense.
The imperfect indicative with av, referring to present
time ( 565), counts as a primary tense.
2. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative modes
( 554; 557; 560) in their independent uses normally
look toward the future and so have in all tenses the value
of a primary tense.
516 a. In Homer and sometimes in other poets (veiy rarely in prose
with names of persons) the agent may be expressed by the dative with vir6 :
as'Axcuol . . . (t>6pr)dev v(f>' "EKTopi the Achaeans were put to flight by
Hector 637.
264 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
518. Special Meanings of Tenses from the Context. -
The context may sometimes add a special meaning to a
tense. Thus, the present or imperfect may be used to
describe an action merely attempted ( 523 ; 527), the
present may be used in describing an action which is to
be completed in the future ( 524), and the aorist may
sometimes express a general truth (Gnomic aorist, 530).
1. Imaginative Use of the Tenses. A tense may refer
to a time other than that which it denotes, if the speaker's
(or writer's) imagination carries him into that time ; so
the present tense may be used in describing events actually
past ( 525), and the aorist or the perfect may be used in
describing events which have not yet taken place ( 531 ;
537).
THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
519. In independent clauses the tenses of the indicative
express time absolutely ; in dependent clauses they express
time relatively to that of the verb on which they depend
(cf. 551, 1).
NOTE 1. The Greeks, unlike the English and, more particularly,
the Romans, were not careful to distinguish with exactness the tem-
poral relations of subordinate clauses (as is done in Latin by the
pluperfect and future perfect), but often employed the same or similar
tenses in both subordinate and principal clauses, leaving the exact
relation of time to be inferred from the context (cf. also 676 a) :
as tr^eSov 8' ore ravra rjv KO! ^Atos eSuero about the time that this was
going on the sun wan setting (i.e. at the same time) Xn. A. 1, 10, 15.
^yeTro 8' aurals Ta/xws . . . l^wv vavs erepas at? eTroXto/o/cet
MtAryrov Tamos conducted them, with other ships with which he had been
besieging Miletus (i.e. at a prior time) Xn. A. 1, 4, 2.
This fact will help to explain the frequent use of the aorist where
we might expect the pluperfect ( 528, 1).
THE PRESENT TENSE 265
SUMMARY
NOTE 2. The tenses of the indicative from the point of view of
time, and the manner of viewing the action, may be grouped as
follows :
PRESENT PAST FUTURE
CONTINUED Present Imperfect Future (active
and middle)
COMPLETED AND LASTING Perfect Pluperfect Future Perfect
SIMPLY BROUGHT TO PASS Aorist Future (passive)
Occasionally the future active shows a distinction between action
' continued ' and action ' brought to pass ' : as e<o shall hold (cf . l^w
hold), cr^T/oxo shall obtain (cf. Itr^ov obtained, 529).
THE PRESENT TENSE
520. The present tense represents an action as going on
at the present time : thus ypd^co I write or I am writing.
1. So the present often expresses a customary action or
a general truth : thus ved yap fypovrls ovtc a\yelv <pi,\e2 the
heart of youth is free from care E. Med. 48.
521. Present Denoting a Continued State. The present
may denote a continued state as well as a single act. So
the present of some verbs may admit two different Eng-
lish translations : thus ffacriXevco rule or be ruler, vl/ca>
conquer or be victorious, favyo) flee or be in exile, aBitcoj
do wrong or be a wrong-doer, alaOdvo^aL perceive or be
cognizant of.
NOTE. : So rjK(a am come, arrive, and ot^o/xai am gone, may regularly
be translated as perfects.
522. Present with Adverbs like irdXai. When adverbs
like 7rd\ai long ago are used with the present tense they
519 a (note 2). Homer occasionally forms a future directly from a
second aorist (reduplicated) stem to emphasize the action as merely
'brought to pass' : thus ire-mdriirw I will persuade him (i.e. convince his
mind once for all) X 223.
266 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
mean that the action is continued from the past into the
present (cf. in Latin iam dudum): as r ira\ai crTrevSofjiev
we have long been eager Xn. A. 4, 8, 14.
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE PRESENT FROM THE CONTEXT
523. Attempted Action. The context ( 518) may
imply that the present denotes only an attempted action
(cf. 527). Thus, MSwfu give may mean also offer,
TreiOto may mean try to persuade : as aol S' ! ' K^a^efivoyv agio,
1 8(0 a L Agamemnon offers you worthy gifts I 261,
77/^0,9 etc rrjo-Se rr}? %&y>d? you are trying to drive
us out of this country Xn. A. 7, 7, 7.
524. Present with Future Meaning. It may be implied
by the context ( 518) that an action expressed by the
present tense will be completed in the future : thus el
avrrj 77 TroXt? \ij(f)6r)o-eTai, e^erai fcal 77 Trdcra 2t/ceXta if this
city shall be captured, all Sicily as well is (i.e. is going to
be) in their power Th. 6, 91 : so airoXXv^ai I am going to be
put to death Lys. 12, 14.
NOTE. The present indicative of ei)u,i am going (and its com-
pounds) regularly has a future meaning. This meaning extends to
other modes when used to represent the indicative in indirect dis-
course, and sometimes also to the participle when used to express
purpose ( 653, 5).
525. Historical Present. In vivid narration the speaker
may for the moment feel that he is living the past over
again, and so may use the present tense in describing
events already past ( 518, 1): thus pao-v/3ov\os . . .
Tr/9 VVKTOS xia>v 7ra/jL7r\Tj6r)s Thrasybulus took (lit. takes)
524 a. In Homer el/u has both the present and the future meaning.
525 a. In Epic poetry the historical present is never found.
THE IMPERFECT 267
possession of Phyle, a stronghold. There came (lit. comes)
on during the night a great snowstorm Xn. Hell. 2, 4, 23.
Adpeiov /cal Hapvo-driSos yiyvovrai, TratSe? Bvo of Darius
and Parysatis were (lit. are) born two sons Xn. A. 1, 1, 1.
NOTE. The historical present is freely interchanged with the past
tenses, and should be regularly translated by a past tense in English :
as /cat 6 Awaos 77 A. a ere re /cat iSan/ aTrayeAAec anJ Lycius rode (away),
and, when he had seen, reported Xn. A. 1, 10, 15.
THE IMPERFECT
526. The Imperfect represents an action as going on
in past time : thus eypafov I was writing.
1. Rence the imperfect often expresses a customary
past action: thus eVeiS?) e avo^B^i^ eiafj/Jiev but when
[the prison] was opened, we used to go in PL Phaed. 59 d.
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE IMPERFECT FROM THE
CONTEXT
527. Attempted Action. The context ( 518) may
imply that the imperfect denotes only an attempted action
(cf. 523) or what was likely to happen : thus KXeap^o?
row avrov (TTpaT(,a)Tds e/3tafero levai ol ' CLVTOV e(3a\\ov
Clearchus tried to force his own soldiers to move ; but they
pelted him with stones Xn. A. 1, 3, 1. e/caivd/jLrjv tyfyei-
aXX* e^eK\e^rev . . . "A/ore/ut? I was like to be slain with
the sword ; but Artemis stole me thence E. /. T. 27.
XOTE. The Imperfect of a truth just realized, and the "Philo-
sophical Imperfect." The imperfect in some expressions may be best
rendered in English by the present: thus KCU TOVT ap yv aX.r)6es,
rjo-tfo/xr/v, <j>i\ai this then is true, as I perceu-e, my friends (lit. was
true, but all the time I did not realize it) E. LT. 351. Sia(#epo/xev
IKZLVO ... o T<3 fJLtv Si/ua> /3e\Tlov eytyvcTo we shall destroy that
which (as we agreed) becomes better by justice PI. Crit. 47 d.
268 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
THE AORIST
528. The aorist (aopicrros undefined) represents the
action as one that simply took place in past time : thus
eypa-fra I wrote.
1. Aorist instead of Perfect or Pluperfect. Since the
perfect and pluperfect in Greek are used only when the
result of the action is lasting ( 534), the aorist is often
used where English would employ the perfect or pluperfect
(especially in relative and temporal clauses): thus TI>
olfcerwv ov&eva tcar^XiTrev, a\\ y airavra TreTrpdicev of his
servants he (has) left not one, but has sold everything
Aeschin 1, 99. Kvpov Be /jLeraTre/jLTreraL CLTTO rfjs apxfy 5?
avrbv o-arpaTnjv eiroir]o-ev he sent for Cyrus from the
government of which he had made (lit. made) him satrap
Xn. A. 1, 1, 2. eVel Se ereXeuT^ere Aa/aeto? but when
Darius (had) died Xn. A. 1, 1, 3.
529. Inceptive Aorist. The aorist of verbs whose
present can denote a continued state ( 521) may express
the entrance into that state : thus {3ao-i\evco rule or be
king, efiacrtXevo-a ruled or became king ; so ecr^ov held or
got possession of (e%o> hold) eSdicpva-a wept or burst into
tears (Satcpvco weep, be in tears).
NOTE. Aorist rendered by the Present. The Greeks sometimes
iised the aorist with an exactness which admits no English equivalent,
and such examples must usually be rendered in English by the present
tense : as OVK av Swat'/x^v, TO 8e TrpoOv/Jiov rjv(ra I could not do it, but I
still approve your zeal (lit. approved at the time you showed your zeal)
E. /. T. 1023. So often rjo-Orjv am pleased (lit. was pleased, eyeXacra
laugh(ed), a>/A(oa lament (ed), and similar words. So also sometimes
in impatient questions: as TL ovv . . . ov KOL TTJV Svva/j.LV eAeas /xot
why don't you tell me (lit. why didn't you tell me) about their force? Xn.
Cy. 2, 1, 4.
THE FUTURE 269
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE AOUIST FKOM THE CONTEXT
530. Gnomic Aorist. From the context the aorist
indicative may often be seen to express a general truth
(" once true always true "): thus TraOwv Be re vrjTrios eyva)
even a fool learns by experience Hes. O.D. 218. 3)v Se -m
TOVTCOV TL TrapafBaivr) fy/jLidv avrols CTreOeaav but if anybody
transgresses any one of these laws they impose a penalty
upon such persons Xn. Cy. 1, 2, 2.
531. Aorist Imagined as Future. The time of the
aorist is sometimes vividly imagined as future ( 518):
thus a Trot) \6fjirj v ap et /-te &rj Xe A/ret? I perish if you leave
me E. Ale. 386.
THE FUTURE
532. The future denotes that an action will take place
at a future time : thus ypd-^co I shall write (or shall be
writing) .
NOTE. For the second person of the future implying a permission
or a mild command see 583, note 1.
533. Periphrastic Future. A periphrastic future (de-
noting a present intention) is formed by combining the
various forms of //.e'XXo) be about to with the present or
future (rarely the aorist) infinitive ( 549, 1): thus ty-ia?
dyetv I am going to lead you Xn. A. 5, 7, 5.
jap v/jias i$d%eiv for I am going to inform you
PL Ap. 21 b.
1. So the past tenses of fteXXw are similarly used to
express a past intention: as Tropevea-Oai eyu-eXXoi^ they
530 a. Homer sometimes uses the (gnomic) aorist in similes : thus
ijpnre 8' ws 6Ve TIS dpvs ijpiTrei> he fell as when an oak falls (lit. felT).
270 THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE
were intending to proceed Xn. A. 3, 5, 17. e/^eXXe /cara-
\veiv he was about to halt for the night Xn. A. 1, 8, 1.
NOTE. The simple future appears from the context sometimes to
be used like the periphrastic future to express a present intention : as
olpe TrXrJKTpov, ei po-xti ra ^ se your spur if you re going to fight Ar. Av.
759. ci ... 7ri<rTvcro/Aev if we are going to trust Xn. A. 1, 3, 16.
THE PERFECT AND THE PLUPERFECT
534. The perfect, in Greek, represents an action as
completed and lasting at the present time ; the pluperfect
as completed and lasting at a past time : thus yeypa^a I
have written (and the writing now stands), eyeypd^rj I had
written (and the writing stood completed). ervy-^ave yap
e<' d/zaf?79 Tropevo/jievos SIOTL ererpcoTofor he happened to
be traveling on a wagon because he had been (and still- was)
wounded Xn. A. 2, 2, 14.
535. Perfect with Present Meaning. In the perfect
system of many verbs the duration of the result ( 534)
rather than the completion of the act is the more promi-
nent, so that the perfect is best rendered in English by
the present (and the pluperfect by the English imperfect) :
thus
j3f/3r)Ka (/3atvu>) be gone or stand (have stepped)
SeSotKo, (root Sot-, Set-, St-) be afraid (have been frightened, cf . 494, 3)
KCKTrj/Jiai (KTw/xat) possess (have acquired)
fjif/jLvrj/JML (/u/xynovco)) remember (have reminded myself)
oTSa (cf. eioW saw) know (have seen or perceived)
<TTr)Ka (to-r^/xt) stand (have set myself, cf. 494, 3)
7T7roi0a (Trei'^w) trust (have persuaded myself, cf . 494, 2)
7T(f)iJKa (<f>v(i)) am by nature (have been produced, cf. 494, 3),
and many others.
536. Periphrastic Perfect. 1. Other forms of the per-
fect, besides those already noted ( 226 ; 227 ; 221, 1),
THE FUTURE PERFECT 271
are sometimes found expressed periphrastically : thus TO
TrpayuL elfj.1 TOVTO SeBpd/ca)? lam the one who has done
this deed Dem. 21, 104.
2. The aorist (rarely the perfect) participle with the
present or imperfect of e^co have is sometimes used as the
equivalent of the perfect or pluperfect : thus 09 <7(/>e vvv
arlfjidcrds e^eu who has now dishonored her E. Med. 33.
TroXXa xprj/jLara e%o/jLev avrj pTra/core^ we have plundered
much property (lit. have, having plundered) Xn. A. 1, 3, 14.
SPECIAL MEANINGS OF THE PERFECT FROM THE CONTEXT
537. Perfect Imagined as Future. The time of the per-
fect is sometimes vividly imagined as future ( 518, 1):
thus KCLV TOVT, 077, vltcw/Jiev, TrdvO* rjjjiiv TreTroirjrai, " if we
are victorious in this," he said, " everything has been accom-
plished (i.e. will have been accomplished) by us" Xn. A.
1, 8, 12.
THE FUTURE PERFECT
538. The future perfect denotes that an action will be
completed (and lasting) at a future time : as yeypa^oDS
eo-0/jLai, I shall have written, <yey paterae it will have been
written (and will stand written).
For the periphrastic forms of the future perfect see
230.
NOTE. The future perfect (as well as the other portions of the
perfect system) may emphasize the duration of the result of an action
( 534) ; hence a good many verbs, because of their meaning, regularly
employ the future perfect instead of the future (see 729) : as i/o/xiere
. . . e/xe KOLTOLKCKoiJ/ea-OaL you must believe that I shall be cut to pieces
Xn. A. 1, 5, 16. orav 8r) p,r) crOevw, TT ?r aver often, i when I have not
strength, then shall I stop S. Ant. 91.
So also commonly with the verbs whose perfect has present meaning
( 535) /txe/xv^cro/juxt shall remember (/xe/xv^/xat remember), ecrr^co shall
stand (ecTTYjKa stand) etc.
272 TENSES OF OTHER MODES THAN THE INDICATIVE
TENSES OF OTHER MODES THAN THE
INDICATIVE
539. The tenses of the indicative mode only (and of
other modes representing the indicative in indirect dis-
course, 551) really denote time ; in the other modes,
the tenses (with the very limited exception of the future,
see 548) do not denote time, but only the manner of
viewing the action, whether continued (present), or com-
pleted (perfect), or simply brought to pass (aorist).
Time may be implied either by the mode (see 554;
557; 560) or by the context (see 541-547, and cf. 519
note 1) but it is not denoted by the tense.
THE PRESENT
540. The present tense in modes other than the indica-
tive represents an action as going on (at any time) ; as
iv to be writing, eav <ypd<f>co if I be engaged in writing,
be writing (in the future, 560), rypdcfxov writing.
TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT
541. Relation of time with the principal verb may be
indicated by the context ( 539): as OTTOTC Ovoi etcdXei
whenever he was engaged in sacrifice he used (i.e. at the
same time) to invite his friends Xn. Mem. 2, 9, 4. el e
Trapa ravra irotolev, ico\deiv but if they act contrary
to this, to punish them (i.e. afterwards) Xn. Cy. 1,
6, 33.
THE AORIST 273
542. Present Participle. Especially with the present
participle the context usually shows that its time is the
same as that of the principal verb : as e^wv orrXmi? aveftri
he went up with (lit. having) hoplites Xn. A. 1, 1, 2.
Trapwv ervy^ave he happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2.
1. But sometimes the context shows that the present
participle refers to a time prior to that of the principal
verb (the so-called " Participle of the Imperfect ") : as
ot Kvpeioi irpdaOev GVV rj/jilv rarro^evoL vvv a$ea-Tr)icacnv
the troops of Cyrus who were formerly marshaled with us
have now deserted Xn. A. 3, 2, 17. irapwv epw since I
was present, I will tell S. Ant. 1192.
THE AORIST
543. The aorist tense in modes other than the indicative
represents the action simply as brought to pass (at any
time) : as ypdtyai to write, eav ypd-^ro) if I write, ypdtyov
write (impv., 560), ypd^ds having written (or writing):
thus eZ-Tre 8' evreff d/j,evo<; he spoke in prayer Z 475. ovro?
ovre TOW? #eou? Cetera? cure KO/oo^ reOvrjKora al&eo-Oels . . .
rj/Aas /ea/ew? Troielv Treipdrai this man, without any fear of
the gods, or respect for Cyrus, ivho is now dead, is trying
to injure us Xn. A. 3, 2, 5. jSovXoifjLijv 8' av . . . \a6etv
avrov a7re\6(i)v I should like to get away without his knowl-
edge Xn. A. 1, 3, 17.
TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT
544. Relation of time with the principal verb may be
indicated by the context ( 539): as T> dvSpl ov av
\rjo-0e Treio-o/jiai I shall obey the man whom you choose
(i.e. shall have chosen) Xn. A. 1, 3, 15.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 18
274 TENSES OF OTHER MODES THAN THE INDICATIVE
e fyaiverai /-tot Kal TO Treio-Qfjvai nvas it seems to me
wonderful too that some people have been persuaded (lit.
the being persuaded of some people) Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 1.
545. Aorist Participle. Especially with the aorist
participle the context often shows that it refers to a time
prior to that of the principal verb: as ravra Se TT 0*770- a?
Sie/3ai,ve when he had done this he proceeded to cross Xn.
A. 1, 4, 17. /cara/3a? Se Sta TOVTOV rov ireSiov TJXaae
when he had come down (from the mountains) he marched
through this plain Xn. A. 1, 2, 23 (but cf. 543, last three
examples).
THE PERFECT
546. The perfect tense in modes other than the indica-
tive represent an action as completed (at any time) : as
j6ypa(f)vat to finish writing, eav yejpd(f>a) if I shall finish
writing, yeypd^Oco let it stand written, yeypacjxt)? having
written, TO, yeypafji^eva the things written, TT}? yap einovcrr]?
VVKTOS Trdvra ravra Set ireirpa^OaL to-night all this must
be completed PL Grit. 46 a.
TIME IMPLIED BY THE CONTEXT
547. It usually happens that an action described by the
perfect as completed has taken place at a time preceding
that of the principal verb (cf. 539) : thus ovSe /3ov-
\evecr6ai en &pd, d\\a (3e{3ov\evo-0ai it is time no
longer to deliberate, but to decide PI. Crit. 46 a. eXeyov
Trdvra ra yeyevr) fjieva they told all that had happened
(i.e. previously) Xn. A. 6, 3, 11 (cf. 546, last example).
THE FUTURE (AND FUTURE PERFECT) 275
THE FUTURE (AND FUTURE PERFECT)
548. The modes of the future (and future perfect) other
than the indicative are devoted almost wholly to repre-
senting the future indicative in indirect discourse ( 551)^
this is the only use of the future optative (which is a
comparatively late development, see 548 a); the future
infinitive is almost always so used, and the future parti-
ciple often. Yet a desire to emphasize the idea of futur-
ity (or present intention) has led to the occasional use of
the future infinitive as a substantive, and, more often,
of the future participle as an ordinary adjective.
549. Future Infinitive as a Substantive. The future
infinitive (denoting future time relative to the principal
verb) is sometimes used as a substantive when it is desired
to emphasize the idea of futurity ; as TroXXoO Seco epavrov
76 a&itcrjo-eiv I am certainly far from intending to wrong
myself PI. Ap. 37 b.
1. With /LteXXft). So often the future infinitive is used
with //.e'XXft) am about to to emphasize the future idea (as
in English many people say incorrectly " I meant to have
written " for " I meant to write " from a feeling that
" meant " does not sufficiently express the past idea) :
thus /xe'XXft) yap v^as Si Sdgeiv for I am about to inform
you PI. Ap. 21 b.
2. With Verbs of Promising, etc. So with verbs (and
verbal expressions) meaning to hope, expect, promise, swear,
and the like, the idea of a future realization of the hope
or promise often leads to the use of the future infinitive.
Both the present and aorist, however, are also found with
these verbs. The negative is regularly w ( 431, 1) : thus
548 a. In Epic poetry the future optative is never found.
276
TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
r]fjLi6\iov 7rd(n Sdxreiv he promised to give to all
half as much again Xn. A. 1, 3, 21. rbv IK Troia? 7ro'Xea>?
o-rparrjybv Trpoa-Sofca) ravra irpa^eiv from what city is the
general to come whom I expect to do this? Xn. A. 3, 1, 14.
rwyvaro fjirj&ev aurou? /cafcbv TreicreaOai he pledged himself
that they should suffer no harm Xn. A. 7, 4, 13. e'XTrtSa?
e'^et tfaXa>9 eaeo-Oai he has hopes that all will be well Xn.
A. 4, 3, 8. (Cf. fjiid [e\7rt9] acoOrjvai, one hope of being
saved Xn. A. 2, 1, 19.)
NOTE. The future infinitive with verbs of. promising, etc. ( 549, 2)
is often explained as indirect discourse ( 671), but the fact that it
takes M as its regular negative points to its use here as the ordinary
object infinitive.
550. Future Participle. The future participle is used
only when it is desired to emphasize the idea of future
time (or present intention, 533, note) relatively to the
principal verb : thus ^X#e . . . Xucro/Lte^o? re dvyarpa he
came to ransom his daughter (lit. about to ransom) A 13.
o 777770- o//,ei>o9 ouSet? ecrrai there will be nobody who will
lead us Xn. A. 2, 4, 5.
TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
551. When the optative, infinitive, or participle stands
in indirect discourse ( 670 ff.), each tense represents the
same tense of the direct discourse, except that the present
infinitive or participle may stand for the imperfect indic-
ative, and the perfect infinitive or participle for the
pluperfect indicative, since those tenses have only the
indicative mode ; cf . also 675, note : thus (PRESENT)
eyvaxrav . . . on, icevbs 6 c^oySo? 6^77 they learned that their fear
was groundless (i.e. ecm) Xn. A. 2, 2, 21. aTnevai ^TJCTLV
he says he is going away (i.e. aVet/it) Xn. A. 2, 2, 1.
lacrOai auro<? TO rpav^d (frrjcriv he says that he himself treated
USES OF THE FINITE MODES 277
the wound (i.e. la^v, impf.) Xn. A. 1, 8, 26. rj/cova-e
Kvpov ev K.i\iKLa ovra he heard that Cyrus was in Oilicia
(i.e. ecrri) Xn. A. 1, 4, 5. olSa Se fcaiceiva) aco^povovvre
eare ^coKpdrei o-vvrjo-rijv I know that even they two kept within
bounds so long as they associated with Socrates (i.e. ecrcocfrpo-
veLrrjv, impf.) Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 18.
(AoRIST) MeWw Se teal Swpa eXe^yero Tre^-^rai he was
said actually to have sent presents to Menon (i.e.
Xn. A. 1, 4, 17.
(PERFECT) 'O/JioXoyeis ovv irepl epe a&ifcos
do you admit that you have been a wrong-doer against me f
(i.e. yeyevrjaai) Xn. A. 1, 6, 8. KaraXafji^dvovat . . .
ra 7r\el(7ra SirjpTraa-iJLeva they found that most things had
been plundered (i.e. SirjpTracrTai,) Xn. A. 1, 10, 18.
(FUTURE) e\e^ev on rj 0809 ecrotro TT/OO? (3aai\ed fjieyav
he said that the advance would be against the great king
(i.e. eVrafc) Xn. A. 1, 4, 11. rjyelro jap ajrav iroirjo-eiv
avrbv ei Ti? apyvpiov SiSoirj for he thought that \_Theognis~]
would do anything, if anybody offered him money (i.e.
TTot^cret, edv rt? . . . StSw he will do, if anybody offers Lys.
12, 14.
1. When verbs stand in indirect discourse they denote
the same time relatively to the verb on which they depend
as was denoted by the tense ( 539) of the direct dis-
course which they represent. See the preceding examples.
USES OF THE FINITE MODES
552. In the following pages the various uses of the
finite modes are described in detail, but, for the sake of
completeness, a brief summary of the uses of each mode
is here given.
278 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
THE INDICATIVE MODE
553. The indicative mode is used in statements of fact :
thus ySacriXeuo) I am king, Aa/oeto? ycrOevei Darius was ill.
1. A fact may be assumed for purposes of argument :
thus teal &r) reOvacn (suppose that) they are dead E. Med.
386. So regularly in conditions elirep fy avrjp a>ya66<s if
(i.e. assuming that) he was a good man, etc. Lys. 12, 48.
For the semi-dependent indicative in object clauses and
clauses of fearing see 593 and 594, 1.
2. The past tenses of the indicative, probably from their
use in conditions contrary to fact ( 606) (although
there was originally no stich idea in the usage, cf. 553, 1),
have come to be used also to express hopeless wishes ( 588)
and unaccomplished purpose ( 590, note 4).
3. Further, av (or ice) may be added to the past tenses
of the indicative to give them a potential meaning ( 565).
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE
554. The Subjunctive mode looks always toward the
future (thus having the value of a primary tense, when
it is used independently, 517, 2).
555. The uses of the subjunctive may be grouped under
two great divisions : the Volitive Subjunctive (which
expresses an action as willed), and the Anticipatory Sub-
junctive (which anticipates an action as an immediate
future possibility), a use in which the subjunctive is closely
related to the future indicative (see 562 a and compare
563 a ; 576 a ; 594, 1 note).
No hard and fast line, however, can be drawn between
these two uses of the subjunctive.
THE OPTATIVE MODE 279
NOTE. In the earlier language (i.e. in Homer) the anticipatory
subjunctive (with or without /ce or av) was not infrequently used in
independent clauses ( 562 a), but in this use it was soon crowded
out by the future indicative, and only a few relics of this use are to
be found in Attic Greek, but in dependent clauses (e.g. conditions
and relative clauses) it continued to be regularly used.
556. The uses of the subjunctive may be summarized
as follows :
INDEPENDENT
In exhortations ( 585) and prohibitions ( 584).
In deliberative questions ( 577).
In cautious future assertions with ^ and fir) ov ( 569, 1).
In strenuous future denials with ov ^ ( 569, 2).
DEPENDENT
In purpose clauses ( 590).
After words of fearing ( 592).
In the protasis of a future more vivid ( 604) or a
present general condition ( 609).
In relative clauses of anticipation (future, 623 ; 526-7)
or of general possibility (present, 625).
THE OPTATIVE MODE
557. The optative mode may be briefly characterized
as a more remote subjunctive. Hence, in its independent
uses, and in most of its dependent uses, it commonly looks
toward the future, but more remotely than the subjunctive,
and often from the point of view of past time (cf. 517, 2).
556 a. For the independent use of the (anticipatory) subjunctive in
Homer see 562 a.
280 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
558. The uses of the optative may be grouped under
three heads : (l)'the Optative of Wish (corresponding to
a remote volitive subjunctive, 555) which expresses an
action as desired, but not actually willed to happen ;
(2) the Potential Optative (corresponding to a remote
anticipatory subjunctive, 555), which expresses what
the speaker regards as a more or less remote possibility
(see note 1) ; (3) the Optative in Indirect Discourse,
which is a development peculiar to Greek.
NOTE 1. In earlier Greek the simple optative could be used
potentially, but very soon the adverb av (epic KC) came to be regularly
used with it, and the use of the potential optative was extended far
beyond its original bounds (cf . 563 and the examples).
NOTE 2. The name optative comes from the use of the mood in
wishes (Latin opto wish).
559. The following are the various uses of the optative
in Attic Greek :
INDEPENDENT
In wishes ( 587).
Potential optative with av (or /ce) ( 563).
DEPENDENT
In future less vivid conditions ( 605).
In past general conditions ( 610).
In relative clauses of remote possibility (future, 624 ;
626-7), or of general possibility (past, 625).
In indirect discourse (including indirect questions) after
a secondary tense ( 673).
In purpose clauses after a secondary tense ( 590).
In clauses of fearing after a secondary tense ( 592).
559 a- For the potential optative without /ce or av in Homer, see 563 a,
THE IMPERATIVE MODE 281
THE IMPERATIVE MODE
560. The imperative mode (in all tenses) refers always
to the future. It is used in commands ( 583) and pro-
hibitions ( 584).
STATEMENTS
561. 1. Statements of fact (what is, was, or will be)
stand in the indicative mode.
2. Statements of opinion (what may be, can be, might be,
could have been, and the like) stand in the optative mode
with av, or in a past tense of the indicative with av.
The details of usage are given in the following sections
( 562-568).
NOTE. Two special forms of statement are described in 569.
562. Statements of Fact. A statement of fact is in
the indicative mode; the negative is ou : thus avaftaivzi
6 KO/009 Cyrus goes up, fjedevei Aa/?eo9 Darius was ill,
(7rat Girl ra> a8e\,</>a> he will be in the power of his brother,
OVK rjo-OdveTo he did not perceive.
563. Potential Optative. A statement of a future pos-
sibility, propriety, or likelihood, as an opinion of the
562 a. In Homer the subjunctive is sometimes used like the future
indicative (cf. 555) in (anticipatory) statements of fact (negative oy) :
thus ou ydp TTW rolovs tdov avtpas ovdt Zdw/j-ai for never yet did I see such
men, nor shall I ever see them A 262.
563 a. The epic language is very rich in forms of future statement, for
besides the future indicative and the optative with &v (or /ce) we have also
the subjunctive alone, the optative alone, the subjunctive with *e (or 5i>),
and even sometimes the future indicative with e (or &v~). By this
variety many shades of meaning are expressed which have no equivalent
in English. The subjunctive in this use comes very close to the future
indicative ( 562 a), but seems rather to anticipate the future possibility
282 USES OF FINITE MODES
speaker, stands in the optative mode with dv (Potential
Optative); the negative is ou: thus TroXXd? av evpois
Wxavas many devices you could find E. And. 85. to-o)? av
ovv Sdgeiev droTrov elvai now perhaps it may seem strange
PL Ap. 31 c. OVK av ovv Oav^d^oL/jLt, now I shouldn't
wonder Xn. A. 3, 2, 35. OVK av /jLeOeifjirjv rov Opovov I
couldn't (i.e. won't) give up the throne Ar. Ran. 830.
The apodosis of a future less vivid condition ( 605) is
regularly expressed by the potential optative.
NOTE. Observe that the potential optative may express all shades
of opinion, from mere suggestion of possibility to ideal certainty, and
the English rendering should be made to suit the context.
564. But a statement of a future (or present) possi-
bility, necessity, or likelihood, can be expressed more
exactly as a fact ( 562) by a present or future tense of
the indicative of a verb meaning be possible or necessary,
and a dependent infinitive denoting what is possible or
necessary to be or to be done : thus ^vvapai crvvetvai
rofc ir\ov(nwTdroi^ I can associate with the very richest
(but as an opinion crvveirjv av) Lys. 24, 9. e^eanv V/JLLV
TTiarrd \afielv Trap rjfjL&v it is possible for you to receive
pledges from us (Xdftoire av) Xn. A. 2, 3, 26. vfias S' av
rj/jilv Serjcrei o/jiocrai it will be necessary for you to swear
to us (oyotocratre dv) Xn. A. 2, 3, 27.
than to state the future fact. Examples are : (Fut. indie.) &s Trore? rts
thus some one shall say Z 462. (Fut. indie, with *e) KO.L K rts cJ5' epeei
and thus some one may say A 176. (Subjunctive) KO.L irort TIS etTrrjo-iv
and some day some one may say Z 459. (Subjunctive with /ce or &v) KO.I
dt K TOI etTT-go-c and he will tell to you d 391. (Optative) ou /j.tv yap n
KaK&repov &\\o Trd6ot.fji,i for nothing else more sad could I endure T 321.
(Optative with *e or &v} fyol 5t r6r' &v TroXu Ktpdiov etr] but for me then
'twould be better far X 108.
563 b. The optative without &v in a potential use is rarely found in
other poets besides Homer : see S. Ant. 605.
STATEMENTS 283
NOTE 1. Observe that the difference between l^eori o-ot iSeti/ and
18015 av you can see is that the former states the possibility as a fact,
the latter states what the speaker thinks is a possibility.
NOTE 2. Observe that if av is used with the optative of a verb
denoting possibility, propriety, or the like, it shows that the possi-
bility or propriety is stated as something which, in the opinion of the
speaker, might or could exist (cf. 567 note) : as OVK av 8vvcu/xe0a
avtv TrAotW Siafifjvai we could not have the power to cross (i.e. could not
possibly cross) without boats Xn. A. 2, 2, 3.
565. Potential Indicative. A statement of a past or
present possibility or necessity, as an opinion of the
speaker, stands in a past tense of the indicative with av
(Potential Indicative) ; the negative is ov : thus Oarrov 3)
<&? rt? av were quicker than anybody would have thought
Xn: A. 1, 5, 8. VTTO /cev ra\aa-i(^povd Trep &eo? el\ev fear
might have seized even a stout-hearted man A 421. e/3ov-
\o/jL7]v av I could wish.
The apodosis of a condition contrary to fact ( 606) is
regularly expressed by the potential indicative or an
equivalent statement ( 567).
566. But a statement of a past possibility, necessity, or
likelihood, can be expressed more exactly as a fact ( 562)
by a past tense of the indicative of a verb meaning be pos-
sible or necessary and a dependent infinitive denoting what
was possible or necessary to be or to be done : thus eSei
po(f)ovvTa TTiveiv (ocnrep ftovv it was necessary to drink in
gulps like an ox Xn. A. 4, 5, 32. xpfjv yap K.av$av\rj
yevecrOai tcafca)? for Candaules was bound to get into trouble
565 a. In Homer the context sometimes shows that the potential opta-
tive, usually with the help of an adverb, may be used in stating a past
possibility (which in Attic would be expressed by the potential indicative,
565) : as ei/0' OVK d.i> ftpi^ovra fSots ' Aya/jLt/j-vova Siov then you could not see
(i.e. would not have seen) god-like Agamemnon slumbering A 223. (Cf.
606 b.)
284
USES OF THE FINITE MODES
Hdt. 1, 8. &ia<l>vyeiv ovtc e&vvaro he could not escape
Lys. 1, 27.
567. But nine times out of ten the existence of a past
possibility or necessity is stated only to show that what
" might have been " or " ought to have been done " did
not actually take place ; hence such statements usually
imply a " contrary to fact " idea (as, " he might have
gone," but the fact is he did not go). (Such a statement
is often used as the apodosis of a condition contrary to
fact, 606): thus rq> Be 'Eparoo-Qevei, egijv elirelv on
ovtc aTrrjvrrjo-ev it was possible for Eratosthenes to say (i.e.
" Eratosthenes might have said ") that he had not met him
Lys. 12, 31. ^Xpn v TOV ^^Kpdrrjv //.?) Trporepov ra 7ro\iTi/ca
SiSdo-/ceiv roi>9 Gwovras rj aco^povelv /Socrates ought not to
have taught his associates politics in preference to self-control
Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 17. XP^1 V V^P <*XXo0eV TroOev pporovs
TraZ&a? reKvovaOau mortals ought to beget children from some
other source (but they do not) E. Med. 578.
Observe that in such expressions the aorist infinitive
refers always to a single act (usually in past time), while
the present infinitive refers to continued or repeated action
either present or past (cf. 539).
NOTE. Observe that the mere statement of a past possibility or
necessity may always suffice to imply that the possible or necessary
event did not occur : as eTSes av you might have seen (if you had been
present), or erjv iSeTv it was possible to see (if you had been present).
If av is used with a past tense of the indicative of a verb denoting
possibility, propriety, or the like, it shows that the possibility or pro-
priety is stated not as a fact, but as something which might or could
have existed (cf. 564 note 2) : as efjv av iSeiv it would (or might)
have been possible to see. Compare OVK av trepan/ eSet crot uapTvpw
you would not have any need of other witnesses (but as it is, you do need
them) Lys. 7, 22, and CITTC/O fjv avrjp dya$6s, t\p-r)v av . . . fjJrj Trapa-
ap^eo/ if he had been a good man, he would have had to rule with-
STATEMENTS 285
out transgressing the laws (but a bad man is under no such obligation)
Lys. 12, 48, with \prfv 8' avrov . . . 7rpo0i>/uav ZX LV ^ e OU 9^ fo have
had zeal (but did not have) Lys. 12, 50.
1. The expressions which may be used to denote a past
possibility or necessity (without av) are very numerous ;
some of the most common of them are the following : e'Set,
Xpfjv or e^prjv it was necessary, etVco? fjv it was likely, Trpoa-
rjK, eV/oeTre it was fitting, egfjv it was possible, epeXXov was
likely to, and many adjectives with rjv, such as &i/caiov rjv
it was just, afyov j]V it ivas proper, ala^pov rjv it was shameful,
olo? r' fjv was possible, and many others (cf. oportebat,
decebat, and the like, in Latin).
568. Statements of Past Recurrent Action. A state-
ment of an indefinitely recurrent past action, which would
take place only under certain circumstances, stands in a
past tense of the indicative with av : thus ava\a/jL/3dva)v
ovv avr&v ra TroirjfjLaTa . . . Snypwrcov av avrovs TI \eyoiev
so, taking up their compositions, I would ask (if ever an oppor-
tunity occurred) them what they meant PL Ap. 22 b. d
rt? avTto So/cotrj . . . /3\dfceveiv, e/cXeydfjievos rov eTTiTijBeiov
ejraicrev av if any one seemed to .him to be lazy, he would
pick out the proper man, and strike him Xn. A. 2, 3, 11.
NOTE. Observe that this form of statement does not necessarily
express the occurrence as a fact, but only as what could or would take
place (and undoubtedly did take place) if circumstances demanded.
Hence it is easily explained as a special use of the potential ( 565)
indicative.
569. 1. Subjunctive with JITJ and ^t\ ov. In Plato, and sometimes
in other writers, a cautious suggestion is occasionally expressed by the
subjunctive with ^rj (negatively M ov, 432) : thus py w? aXrjOus
ravra (T/ce/x/xaTa y rcov paSo? aTTOKTLvvvvTMV may not these really
prove to be the considerations of those who thoughtlessly put men to death f
PI. Crit. 48 c. aAAa /AT; ov TOUT' y xaAeTroV but possibly this may not
be so difficult PI. Ap. 39 a.
286 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
In origin these expressions are doubtless questions ( 576 a), but
they are usually printed without the mark of interrogation.
2. ov jj/tfj with the Subjunctive (or Future Indicative). An emphatic
future denial (which sometimes borders on a prohibition, 584) may
be expressed by the subjunctive (or rarely the future indicative) with
ov p,7j : thus ov/ceri fjirj 8vvr)Ta.L /JcwriAevs i^aas Ka.TaAa/3eu> the king
will no longer be able to overtake us Xn. A. 2, 2, 12. ov /w,^ Svoyxevr/s
I cry <f>L\ois you shall not be hostile to your friends E. Med. 1151. ov yap
(jir) a-Trwo-erai for she will not possibly reject it Hdt. 1, 199.
QUESTIONS
DIRECT QUESTIONS
570. Direct Questions may be divided into two classes :
(1) 4 Yes ' or ' No ' Questions, in which the question is
asked by the verb, and (2) Word Questions, in which the
question is asked by some interrogative pronoun, adjec-
tive, or adverb. The latter class cannot be answered by
4 yes ' or 4 no.'
4 YES' OB 4 NO' QUESTIONS
571. A 'yes' or 4 no' question may sometimes have
the same form as a statement, and the fact that it is a
question is determined wholly by the context : thus ecrriv
o TL ere rj&iKijo-a ; is there any matter in which I have wronged
you? Xn. A. 1, 6, 7.
1. More often the interrogative meaning is made clearer
by means of certain adverbs (17, apa): thus 97 /cal irepl
ITTTTOVS ovrco VOL So/eel %LV ; Do you really think this is the
case also with horses? PI. Ap. 25 a. ap* elaiv; ap ov/c
eia-i; Are they (living}? Are they not? E. LT. 577.
571 a. In Homer the regular interrogative word in ' yes ' or ' no ' ques-
tions is ^ : thus ^ in Kal xpixrov twtdefaai ; Do you yet lack for gold
besides ? B 229.
DIRECT QUESTIONS 287
Such questions merely ask for information and do not
imply any previous assumption on the part of the speaker.
572. Questions with o\> and JJLTJ. The negative adverbs
ov and ^77 ( 431) either alone or combined with other
interrogative adverbs are used also in questions.
1. A question introduced by ov (or by ap ov or OVKOVV)
asks whether a fact is not so, and expects the answer 4 yes':
thus ov% ourft)? e'^et; Is it not so? (i.e. "I think it is so ;
pray tell me if it is not so") PL Ap. 27 c. OVK eXo?;
Won't you move on? (i.e. "I think you will") Ar. Nub. 1298.
2. A question introduced by ^77, apa urj, or p&v ( = /x?)
ow>), implies uncertainty (or even apprehension) on the
part of the speaker: thus apd ye /JLTJ ejnov TrpofjLrjOfj; Are
you not perhaps concerned for me? (i.e "I don't think
you ought to be, but I have a feeling that you possibly
are") PL Grit. 44 e. p&v Trpoo-ijice croi ; Is it not perhaps
possible that he was related to you? E. I. T. 550.
NOTE. When ov is used in a question introduced by py it modi-
fies some particular word ( 431, 3): thus /MOV ov 7T7roi0as; Is it
possible that you don't believe me ? E. Med. 732.
573. Rhetorical Questions. The context often shows
that a question is asked merely for effect, with the knowl-
edge that the answer must be 'no.' Such questions are
often (but not always) introduced by fjnj: as prj avrbv
ofy <f>povT&rai Oavdrov /cal /avSvvov ; Think you that he con-
sidered death and danger ? (" Of course you do not ")
PI. Ap. 28 d. aXXot Se apa aura? oiaovai paStax: ; Will
others then bear them easily ? ("Far from it ! ") PL Ap. 37 d.
NOTE. The words aAAo n 77 (or sometimes only aAAo TI, the r;
being omitted), meaning literally (7s if) anything else than, are not
infrequently used to introduce a question which the speaker feels must
be answered by ' Yes ' : thus aAAo TI rf ovSev KooAvec Trapievcu ; There's
288 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
nothing to stop our passing along, is there? Xn. A. 4, 7, 5. aAAo TI
</>iA.aTai VTTO TWV 0ea>i/ ; Isn't it loved by the gods ? PI. Euthyphro 10 d.
ALTERNATIVE QUESTIONS
574. Direct alternative questions are commonly intro-
duced by Trorepov (Tro're/oa) . . . TJ (Latin, utrum . . . an)
whether ... or, or separated by rj alone: thus irorepov
ea? ap^eiv f) a\\ov tcaBbmfi ; Do you let him rule or do
you appoint another? Xn. Oy. 3, 1, 12. $779 rj ov ; Do
you say yes or no ? PI. Ap. 27 d.
NOTE. The first part of a double question is sometimes omitted
(cf . Latin an in questions) : thus eTriorra/xcvos TraAcu a7rKpv7rrov r)
oKveis, <>;, apat ; " You have been concealing your knowledge this long
time. (Is there some hidden reason for this) or do you hesitate to
begin ? " said he. Xn. Mem. 2, 3, 14.
WORD QUESTIONS
575. A question may be expressed by any interroga-
tive pronoun, adjective, or adverb: thus r/<? ayopeveiv
{3ov\Tai ; who wishes to speak ? T i elire ; what did he say ?
eveica /caXel /JLG TLS ; what will anybody invite me for?
trvftfJM%&K SeofjieOa ; what kind of alliance do we
want? IT ore rfkOev ; when did he come?
NOTE 1. In Greek, unlike English, the interrogative word is often
connected with some subordinate word of the sentence instead of with
the principal verb: thus TOV CK Troias TroAews (rrpar-qyov Tr/ocxrSoKui
ravra 7r/oaav ; From what sort of a city must the general be whom 1
expect to do this f (lit. the general from what sort of a city do I expect
will do this?) Xn. A. 3, 1, 14. For TI /xa0o>i/ and TL Trajan/, see
653, note 4.
574 a. Homer, in alternative questions (both direct and indirect) uses
1) (17^) . . . Jj (^e) (never Trbrepov . . . ^) ; and ^ (^e) may also be used
alone : thus $ pd TI tdpev tvi (f>pe<Tiv, ^e Kai ovxt ; Do we know at all, or do
we not? d 632. i/'ei5<ro / ucu ^ ervfjiov eptu shall I speak falsely or speak the
truth ? K 534.
MODES IN DIRECT QUESTIONS 289
NOTE 2. Greek sometimes condenses two interrogatives into one
sentence: thus TIS troBev eis avSp&v ; Who are you, and from where
among men do you come? a. 170. Trois CK TI'VOS j/ews . . . ^/cere; In
what way and from what ship have you come? E. Hel. 1543.
MODES IN DIRECT QUESTIONS
576. Questions are distinguished from statements usually
by some interrogative word, but sometimes only by the
context ( 571) ; hence the modes used in statements
are used also in questions : thus (INDICATIVE) crol So/eel;
Do you think so? TICTOL Bo/cel; What do you think? ov croi
So /eel; Dont you think so? pr) croi So /eel; Is it not per-
haps possible that you think so? (POTENTIAL OPTATIVE)
rt? OVK av 6fJLo\oyr)<rei,v ; Who would not admit? Xn.
Mem. 1, 1, 5. (POTENTIAL INDICATIVE) TTW? av 7ro\\ol
fjiev 7reOvfj,ovv rvpavvelv ; How could many wish to rule?
Xn. Hier. 1, 9. TTW? av . . . eya) ri cf rjSi/crjcra; How
could I have done you any wrong? Dem. 37, 57.
577. Deliberative Questions. Questions expressing
doubt or deliberation stand in the subjunctive mode
(Deliberative Subjunctive). The negative is pr). Such
questions are often made more explicit by the addition of
/3ov\rj or /3ov\ecr6e do you wish? thus Trot rpaTrco^aL; TTOL
Oco; whither shall I turn? whither go? E. Hec. 1099.
TI TWV el(D0oT(t)v, w BedTTOTa ; Shall I make one of the
stock jokes, Sir? Ar. Ran. 1. wft edv TI wvw^ai . . .
epco/jLai OTTOO-OV ircoXel; And, if I am marketing, am I not
to ask the price of anything? Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 36. j3ov\rj
576 a. In Homer the anticipatory subjunctive is also found in ques-
tions (cf. 562 a) : as & /JML ey u>, rl Trd0w; Alas ! what will become of me?
e 465. /XT? TI xoXwo-d/iej'os ptri KdKbv vlas 'AxaicDj'/ may he not, perhaps, in
anger, harm the sons of the Achaeans? B 195.
BABBITT'S OH. GRAM. 19
290 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
Shall we consider, if you please? Xn. Mem.
2, 1, 1.
INDIRECT QUESTIONS
578. Indirect 4 yes' or 'no' questions are introduced by
el whether, if (sometimes by apa or ^77) : thus rjpaJTrjcrev
el 77877 ajroKefcptfjievoL elev he asked if they had already given
their answer Xn. A. 2, 1, 15.
579. Alternative indirect 'yes' or 'no' questions are
introduced by irorepov (-TroYe/oa) ... 77 or by et ... 77 or
by eire . . . elVe; as &i7)pa)Ta rbv K.vpov Trorepov (Soiikoiro
fjueveiv 77 {uneven, she asked Cyrus whether he wanted to stay
or to go back Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 15. e/3ov\evero . . . el 7re/jL7roiev
Tivas 77 jrdvres toiev he considered whether they should send
some, or all should go Xn. A. 1, 10, 5.
580. In indirect word-questions ( 575) the interroga-
tive of the direct form may be retained (T/?, TTOV, etc.),
or it may be represented by the corresponding indefinite
relative (6'cm9, OTTOV, etc., 490): as (Sov\evecr6ai o n %/OT)
Troieiv to consider what must be done (direct ri %/o^ iroielv ;)
Xn. A. 1, 3, 11.
MODES IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS
581. Indirect questions follow the rules for indirect
discourse ( 673 ff.); after a secondary tense their verbs
may be changed from the indicative or subjunctive to the
optative of the same tense, or they may be retained in
their original mode. For examples see 673.
579 a. In Homer, alternative indirect questions are introduced in the
same way as direct alternative questions (see 574 a).
COMMANDS AND EXHORTATIONS 291
COMMANDS AND EXHORTATIONS
582. The modes used in expressing commands and
exhortations are the imperative and the subjunctive. In
the first person the subjunctive is used (since there is no
imperative of the first person) ; in the other persons the
imperative is commonly used (but see 584).
NOTE. a-yc, Wi, <j>'p > etc. Commands and exhortations are often
preceded by aye (ayere), ei 8' aye, WL, <epe, come now (often with 877 or
j/w), and sometimes by 8evpo or Seure (lit. hither}: as aye 817 . . .
tiTre' come now, tell us Xn. A. 2, 2, 10. <e'p' 1800 come, let me see Ar.
Nub. 21. These words are often used without regard to the person
and number of the accompanying imperative or subjunctive (as aye
come stay B 331).
583. Commands. A command is regularly expressed by
the imperative mode: thus efjiol TreiOov /cal ora>0rjTi take my
advice, and be saved PL Crit. 44 b. Oeol & y f)iuv ^dprvpe^
ea-Tcov and let the gods be our witnesses Xn. Cy. 4, 6, 10.
rocravrd /JLOI elprjaOo) let so much have been said by me
Lys. 24, 4. (The perfect active or middle imperative is
rare.)
XOTE 1. In Greek, as in English, a polite command (or request)
may be implied in a future statement: as Travrws 8e TOVTO Spdo-ets
at all events you will do this (i.e. " you will be kind enough to do this ")
Ar. Nub. 1352. ^(oporsaveicrco you might go within (i.e. "go within")
S. El. 1491.
NOTE 2. Infinitive in Commands. A command may be suggested
by the infinitive used independently ( 644). A person addressed
stands in the vocative case, but a predicate word referring to this
vocative is in the nominative (cf. 631) ; otherwise the subject is in
the accusative ( 629) : as TratSa 8' e'/ixot X vcr at re <f>L\7jv, ra r aVoira
8e^eo-^at a6/aevcu AIOS viov but set my dear child free, and take
this ransom, in holy fear of Zeus' son A 20. d/covere Xeoj- TOVS
yetopyovs aTrteVat Oyez, Oyez, Oyez! the husbandmen (are) to de-
part Ar. Pax 551.
292 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
NOTE 3. A command is sometimes expressed by OTTWS (negative
OTTO>S /AT7, 431, 1) and the future indicative, or (less often) a subjunc-
tive : thus OTTWS ovv Zo'ecrOe. av8pes aioi TYJ<; eXtvOepids rj<s KeKTrj&Oe
prove yourselves men worthy of the freedom which you possess Xn. A.I.
7, 3. OTTO)? /AT) (f>rj(Ty TIS (take care to) let no one say Xn. Symp. 4, 8.
584. Negative Commands (Prohibitions). A negative
command is expressed regularly by 7-177 ( 431, 1) with the
present imperative or the aorist subjunctive (the present,
as usual, referring to a continued action, while the aorist
represents a single act, 539): thus (PRES. IMPV.) /JLTJ
ovv o'iov now don't entertain the idea Xn. A. 2, 1, 12.
fjirj K reive Kpolaov (stay) don't kill Croesus (i.e. don't
continue what you are now doing) Hdt. 1, 85.
(AoK. SlTBJ.) fjirj TTCU 770-779 ravra don't do this Xn. A.
7, 1, 8. fjirjSevl TOVTO 7rapa<TTr) let not this occur to the
mind of anybody Lys. 12, 62.
NOTE. The third person of the aorist imperative is occasionally
found in prohibitions (e.g. /ArjSeis . . . Trpoa-SoKrja-aTO) let nobody expect
PI. Ap. 17 c) ; other exceptions to the rule of 584 are very rare.
585. Exhortations. Exhortations are expressed by the
first person of the subjunctive mode ; if negative, by the
subjunctive with ^77 ( 431, 1) : thus icofjiev let us go, $ep
to> come, let me see Ar. Nub. 21. (JLIJ ^e\\w^ev let us
not delay Xn. A. 3, 1, 46.
WISHES
586. Wishes are either hopeful or hopeless.
587. Hopeful Wishes. A hopeful wish (future) stands
in the optative mode, and may be introduced by eWe or el
586 a. In Homer (and less often in other poets) wishes are sometimes
preceded by ws : as w s w^eXes avr66' 6XeV0cu would you had perished there
T428.
WISHES 293
yap : thus TOUTOU? ^ev ol 6eol ajroTeicraiVTo these may
the gods repay Xn. A. 3, 2, 6. eWe crv . . . <t'Ao? fjfuv
yevoio would that you might become a friend to us Xn.
Hell. 4, 1, 38. So often O\OLTO curse him (lit. may he
perish).
NOTE 1. A wish (future) may be expressed in a roundabout way
by (3ov\oi(Jir)v (e^e'Aoi/xi) av I could wish with an infinitive (cf. 588,
note) : as /^ovAoi/xryv /xev ovv av TOVTO ouro> yeveo-#ai / could wish
that this might so happen PI. Ap. 19 a.
NOTE 2. A wish (future) may sometimes be implied in a ques-
tion asked by the potential optative ( 576) : as THUS av oXoiarfv how
might I die (i.e. ' I wish I might die ') E. Supp. 796.
NOTE 3. The infinitive used independently ( 644) may suggest
a wish (the construction is rare in prose) : as Ztv Trarcp, y Klavra
Aa^eii/ -TI TuSeos viov Father Zeus, may Ajax get the lot, or Tydeus'
son! H 179. ai Zev, e/c-yeveor^at /xot 'A&yvcuous ruvavOai Grant me,
Zeus, to take vengeance on the Athenians Hdt. 5, 105.
588. Hopeless Wishes. A hopeless wish (present or
past) is expressed either (1) by a past tense of the indica-
tive with eWe or el yap, or (2) by some form of wfaXov
(aorist indicative of oc^eiXo) owe) with the present or aorist
infinitive : thus
(1) eWe <7<H, co Hepi/c\eis, rore avve^evo^riv I wish,
Pericles, that I had been with you then Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 46.
eW r)v 'Opeo-TTjs 7r\r]o-iov would that Orestes were near!
E. El. 282.
(2) 'AAV coc^eAe ^ev Kvpov %r)v Would that Cyrus were
587 a. In poetry, wishes are sometimes introduced by alone (e.g. e?
fjioi ytvoiro I wish I might have E. Hec. 836). In Homer at6e and at yap
(cf. 600, 1 a) are also found.
588 a. In Homer a hopeless past wish is expressed only by w0eAo>
(sometimes also the imperfect aJ0e\Xoj>). A hopeless present wish is some-
times expressed also by the optative (cf. 606 b) : as ft 6' &s -r)pdoi(j.i,
piy dt fj.oi e/x7re5os eft) I would that I were young again, and that my strength
were sound H 157.
294 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
alive ! (lit. Cyrus ought to be alive) Xn. A. 2, 1, 4. Such
wishes also may be preceded by eWe or el yap: el
w(f>e\ov, co K/HTcoz', OIOL r elvai ol TroXXot TO,
Ka/ca epydeo-0ai would that the common herd, Crito, ivere
capable of doing the greatest harm PL Crit. 44 d.
Observe that the aorist in hopeless wishes refers to a
single act (in past time), while the imperfect refers to a
continued act (in present, seldom in past, time). Gf. 606.
The same principle applies to the present or aorist infini-
tive with w(f>e\ov. Cf. 567.
NOTE. A hopeless wish is sometimes expressed in a roundabout
way by e/SovAo/^v (or 7/0eA.ov) av I could wish (cf. 587 note 1) : as
fftovXoiJLrjv av avrovs a\r)0f) Aeyeu/ / could wish that they spoke the
truth Lys. 12, 22.
589. Negative Wishes. All negative wishes take the
negative ^ ( 431, 1). (This is true even with axf)e\ov,
where we should expect ou; cf. 431 note) : thus a)? &) ^
V'LKCLV would that I had not been victor X 548. Zeu,
' elr)v may I no longer live, Zeus E. Hipp. 1191.
NOTE. With u><eAov the negative ^ probably belonged originally
with the infinitive ( 431, 1), but later came to precede the whole
sentence (cf. 431 note).
FINAL CLAUSES
PURPOSE
590. Purpose Clauses. Purpose clauses regularly take
the subjunctive after a primary tense and the optative (or
subjunctive, 674) after a secondary tense. They are
introduced by iva t <?, or OTTW? that, in order that, and if
590 a. Homer has also 8<t>pa (sometimes also 2ws, 626 a) in purpose
clauses: as Karaj/etfao/tai &<ppa Treiroidris I will bow my head SO you
shall not doubt A 524.
PUKPOSE 295
negative they add the negative ^ ( 431, 1) : thus Et?
Kaipov rjiceis, e<f>r), OTTO)? rr)? SiKffi a KOVCT 77 9 "you have come
in good time" he said, " that you may hear the trial " Xn.
Cy. 3, 1, 8. SiavoeiraL avrrjv XOcrat . . . a)? pr) BLa/3fjre
he has in mind to destroy it [the bridge] so that you may
not cross Xn. A. 2, 4, 17.
Xaftcov vfias eTropevo^v iva . . . <b(f>e\o irjv avrov I pro-
ceeded with you in order to help him Xn. A. 1, 3, 4. TTJV
Be 'RXkrjvLKrjv Svva/Jiiv rjdpoi^ev a><? /jLaXio-ra eSvvaro eTTi/cpv-
TTTOyLte^o?, OTTO)? OTL uTTapao-KevoTaTOV \d(3oi {3acri\ed he col-
lected the G-reek force as secretly as possible, so as to take the
King completely unprepared Xn. A. 1, 1, 6.
a ... tcare/cavaev Iva fJirj KO/oo? Si>a/3y which [vessels]
he had burned, so that Cyrus should not cross Xn. A. 1,
4, 18.
PECULIARITIES IN PURPOSE CLAUSES
NOTE 1. Optative by Attraction. A purpose clause depending on
an optative (potential or of wishing) commonly stands in the opta-
tive by attraction ( 316) : thus /3curiA.ei>s ^as aTroAe'o-ai 7Tf.pl Travros av
TTonycrcuTO Iva. KCU rois aAAois "EAAvyo-t <f>6/3os etr; the king would regard
our destruction as all important, so that the rest of the Greeks may be
afraidXu. A. 2, 4, 3.
NOTE 2. av The adverb av is sometimes used with a>? or OTTWS
and the subjunctive probably a survival from the time when the
purpose clause partook somewhat of the nature of a relative clause of
anticipation ( 623): thus ws 8' av fidOys . . . dvraKovow but in
order that you may learn, listen to the other side of the case Xn. A. 2, 5, 16.
NOTE 3. Future Indicative. The future indicative with OTTWS is
sometimes found in purpose clauses (cf. 593 and 555).
NOTE 4. Unattained Purpose. When a purpose clause depends on
an expression which shows that the purpose was not attained, it
takes a past tense of the indicative : thus e8ei ra eVe'xvpa T0 ' re Aa/?etv,
ws /xryS' ei e/?ovA.TO eSvvaro e^aTrarav security ought to have been taken
590 b (note 2). In Homer 6<ppa KC (or &v~) is not infrequently found
in purpose clauses,
296 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
at the time so that he would not have been able to play false, even if he
had wished to do so Xn. A. 7, 6, 23.
591. Relative Clause of Purpose. A relative clause with
the future indicative may be used so as to express pur-
pose (negative ftij): as rjyefjidva alrelv Yivpov OVTLS . . .
a Travel to demand of Cyrus a guide who will lead us back
Xn. A. 1, 3, 14. Kpvtyco ro'S' e'7%0? . . . ev0a fJLij rt?
o-^rerai I'll hide this sword where none shall see it S.
Aj. 658.
592. Infinitive of Purpose. Purpose may be expressed
also by the infinitive ( 640), but usually only with words
which can take an indirect object ( 375) : as TO Be TJ/M&V
/careXiTre <t>v\a,TTt,v TO arparoTreBov the other half (of the
army) he left to guard the camp Xn. A. 5, 2, 1. ravrrjv
rrjv x&pdv eirerpe-fye ^iapirdaai rot? "EXXrjaiv this country
he turned over to the Greeks to plunder Xn. A. 1, 2, 19.
For purpose suggested by the infinitive with oWe see
595, note. For the participle see 653, 5.
593. Object Clauses. An object clause differs from a
purpose clause in being in apposition with the object (or
subject) of a verb denoting care, attention, or effort.
Object clauses take the future indicative with OTTO)?
(rarely after a secondary tense the future optative,
677) ; a negative clause adds the negative fjLtj ( 431, 1) :
as OTTO) ? Be teal vpels e^e eiraiveo-ere efjLol /jLeXrjaei it shall be
my care that (lit. how that) you, in turn, shall commend me
Xn. A. 1, 4, 16. TOVTO Bel nrapao-Kevdcrao-Oai, OTTW? &>?
this we must arrange, namely now we
593 a. Homer does not distinguish so closely as Attic between pur-
pose and object clauses, and he often uses the subjunctive with cos or STTCUS
(often with KC also) in object clauses : as ^pao-crercu a!y *e j^r/rcu he will
contrive (how) that he shall return a 205.
PURPOSE 297
shall best fight Xn. A. 4, 6, 10. (Fux. OPT. ; rare) &e-
Trpdrrovro OTTOD? eV ry eavrwv e/caa-roi rjyijaoiVTO they
arranged that they should be severally leaders in their own
countries Xn. Hell. 7, 5, 3.
1. The (present or aorist) subjunctive or optative
( 677) is sometimes found in object clauses instead of
the future indicative (cf. 555): thus opd . . . OTTO)? pr)
Trapa Bo^av 6/10X07779 see to it that you do not make any
admission contrary to what you really think PI. Crit. 49 c.
ajretcptvaro on avry peXoi OTTG)? #aX&)? ^X OL ae replied that
he was taking care that all should go well Xn. A. 1, 8, 13.
NOTE. Instead of OTTW? /xrj, sometimes /xij is found with the sub-
junctive after words like opoi and O-KOTTU) see to it.
594. Clauses of Fearing. A fear that something may
happen (in the future), depending on words of fearing and
the like, is expressed by the subjunctive with fjnj after a
primary tense and the optative (or subjunctive, 674)
with /LI?) after a secondary tense. If negative, ov is added
(432): thus &eSoitca . . . [JLTJ 7ri\a0(0fJie0a rfc ot/caSe
oSov I fear we may forget the homeward way Xn. A. 3, 2, 25.
ov TOVTO SeSot/ca pr) OVK e%a) o TI Sw I am not afraid that
I shall not have anything to give Xn. A. 1, 7, 7.
eSeurav ol "EAA^e? fir) Trpoo-dyoiev TT/JO? TO /cepas the
G-reeks were in terror lest they should lead against their
flank Xn. A. 1, 10, 9.
vTrepe^o/Belro /AT) ol 6 TraTTTro? ajroOdvrj he was more than
afraid that his dear grandfather might die Xn. Cy. 1, 4, 2.
NOTE. Rarely the future indicative is found after words of fear-
ing; sometimes also OTTWS /XT; (instead of /A?/) with the future indicative
or the subjunctive (cf. 593 and 555).
1. A fear concerning the present or past stands in the
indicative, with [JMJ or /JLTJ ov : as (f>o{3ov/jL0a prj afjL^orepwv
298 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
we fear-that we have failed of both at
once Th. 3, 53. SetSco (JLTJ Srj Trdvra Oea vrjueprea elir ev
I fear that all the goddess said is true e 300.
NOTE. The construction after words of fearing ( 594) is best
explained as derived from the use of ^ in questions ( 572, 2) with
the indicative or the anticipatory subjunctive ( 576 a). Thus,
originally Se'SoiKa [M] e/ox erat ( or 5^0ev) ; meant / am afraid; may he
not possibly be coming (or have come) f, and SeSotKo, JJUYJ e\.0rj ; meant
/ am afraid ; may he not perhaps come ? Later the second clause came
to be regarded as dependent on the first.
As fears mostly concern the future rather than the present or past,
the subjunctive is of course much more common than the indicative.
The optative after a secondary tense is due to the influence of the
principle of indirect discourse ( 677).
RESULT
595. Clauses of result are regularly introduced by ware
so that (sometimes by <w? or an equivalent relative). If
the result is regarded purely as result (without stating its
actual attainment), the infinitive mode is used ( 645) ;
if the attainment of the result is emphasized, the indicative
mode (or some other form of independent sentence) is
employed : thus (INFINITIVE) T& oimw? earl Setz'o? \eyeiv
coo-re o~e Trelaai ; ivho is so clever at speaking as to persuade
you? Xn. A. 2, 5, 15. rjXavvev CTTL roi)? MeVw^o?, wcrr' e/cet'-
vovs e/c7re7r\f)'%0ai, he advanced against Menoris soldiers so
that they were panic-stricken Xn. A. 1, 5, 13. evervyxavov
KOI av\a)cnv uSaro? 7r\rjp(Tiv, <w? /mrj SvvaaQai $ia-
they came upon ditches and conduits full of water, so
that they were (lit. so as to be) unable to cross Xn. A. 2, 3, 10.
(INDICATIVE) ^ /MJrrjp a-vv^n-pdrrev avTw ravra' coo-re
/3a<7iXei>9 Tr)V fjiev TT/OO? eavrov eTTiffovXrjv ov/c rjdOdvero his
mother cooperated with him in this, so that the King was not
aware of the plot against him Xn. A. 1, 1, 8.
CAUSAL CLAUSES 299
(POTENTIAL OPTATIVE) nr\ola $ vfjilv Trdpecmv coo- re
av j3ov\r]crOe e%ai$vr]s av eTrnreaoLre you have boats,
so that you could make a sudden descent on any place you
choose Xn. A. 5, 6, 20. So also the imperative as well as
other forms of statement, wish, question, etc., are occa-
sionally found with iocrre.
NOTE. A result not yet attained, expressed by wore and the infini-
tive, may sometimes come very near denoting purpose : as yu^xarat
TroAAm eurtv . . . coo-re Sia<J>evytiv Oa.va.rov there are many devices
so as to escape (i.e. for escaping) death PI. Ap. 39 a.
596. <|>'(S, <|>'(0T (and JXTTC). A clause introduced
by e<'&>, e'0' core (and sometimes coo-re) on the ground that
with the infinitive or (less often) the future indica-
tive, regularly implies a proviso : as alpedevres Se e<' core
%vyypdtyai VO/JLOVS but having been chosen so that ("with
the proviso that") they should compile laivs Xn. Hell. 2,
3, 11. Troiovvrai, Koivfj o/jLoXoyidv . . . coo-re 'AOtjvaioLS JJLCV
e^eivai povXevaai they made a general agreement, so that
(i.e. "with the proviso that") the Athenians should be
allowed to consider measures Th. 3, 28.
597. Relative Clause Implying Result. Result may
also be implied by a relative clause with the indicative
( 619, note) : as rt? ovrco fjiaiverai ocrris ov /3ov\erai CTOL
</Xo? elvai ; who is so mad as not to (lit. who does not)
wish to be a friend to you? Xn. A. 2, 5, 12.
CAUSAL CLAUSES
598. Causal clauses are introduced by on (Sm) because;
less often by eTrei (eVe^^) or ore ivhen, since (cf. the Latin
598 a. Homer has also 8 and & re ( 441 a) in the sense of the Attic
STI because.
300 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
own), a)<? as, since, or by a relative pronoun ( 619,
note).
The mode of the verb in a causal clause is regularly the
indicative (although a potential form of statement is some-
times possible) : as eVet rjcrOero . . . real on . . . rjicove
since he had learned, and because he heard Xn. A. 1,
2,21.
Cause may also be implied by a circumstantial parti-
ciple (see 653, 4, and 656, 1).
NOTE. After a secondary tense causal clauses are subject to the
principles of indirect discourse, and may have the optative ( 677).
1. i after words of wondering, etc. After words ex-
pressing surprise, joy, sorrow, anger, and the like, a cause
is sometimes more delicately put as a mere supposition :
as ov OavfjLaa-Tov ' el Tore ra? fJLOptas e^eicoTrrov it's not
wonderful that (lit. if) at that time they destroyed the sacred
olive trees Lys. 7, 7.
CONDITIONS
599. 1. In Greek, as in other languages, a simple condi-
tion (in which nothing is implied as to the fulfillment)
stands in the indicative mode ( 602).
2. A condition in which something is implied as to the
fulfillment (i.e. as not likely to take place, not taking
place, or not having taken place) has in Greek, as in
other languages, a special conditional form. See Future
Less Vivid ( 605) and Contrary to Fact Conditions
( 606).
3. In addition to the conditional forms common to other
languages, Greek has also a special form of future condi-
tion ( 604), and in present and past time a special form
for general conditions ( 608).
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 801
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
600. A conditional sentence consists regularly of two
parts : the Protasis (or Condition), which states the con-
dition, and the Apodosis (or Conclusion), which states
what happens (or would happen) under that condition.
1. The protasis is introduced by some word meaning or
implying if (el, edv, or a relative, 620) ; the regular
negative of the protasis is fitf ( 431, 1).
(For el after words of wondering, etc., see 598, 1.)
NOTE. If ov is used in the protasis, it usually modifies some par-
ticular word of the protasis (cf. 431, 3) : thus ei rot's Oavovras OVK
eas 6a.TTTf.Lv if you don't allow (i.e. forbid) the burial of tJie dead S. Aj.
1131.
601. In classifying conditional sentences, it is conven-
ient to refer them to certain normal forms which repeatedly
occur, but the Greek did not hesitate to employ that form
of protasis or apodosis which should best express his mean-
ing (see 612).
NOTE. Apodotic Sc. Originally the two parts of a conditional
sentence were coordinate, and could be connected by coordinate con-
junctions (like Sc'and dAAa). Traces of this earlier usage still appear
sometimes in the use of Se (rarely dAAa) in the apodosis, as if to con-
nect it with the protasis : thus eav T' av Aeyw on /cat rvy^ai/et peyurrw
dyaOov ov avOpwTrto TOVTO . . ., ravra 8' In YJTTOV 7reib~eo'$e if, on the
other hand, I say that this happens to be the greatest good for a man, then
you will even less believe this PL Ap. 38 a.
602. Simple Conditions. In Greek, as in other lan-
guages, a simple condition (in which nothing is implied as
to the fulfillment) takes the indicative mode in both prota-
sis and apodosis: thus el Be rt? oterat eva atperbv elvai
600, 1 a. Homer sometimes has cu for el (cf. 587 a).
302 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
ftaai\el, ov/c opOws oierai but if anybody thinks
that one chosen man is Eye for the King, he doesn't think
rightly Xn. Cy. 8, 2, 11. el fJLev Oeov rjv, OVK r]V . . .
ala^po/cepS^ if he was a god's son, he was not basely greedy
of gain PI. Rep. 408 c. el rl/jicopija-eis HaTpdtc\<p . . .
rov <povov tcal^JL/CTOpa aTTOKrevels, auro? aTroOavfj if you
avenge the murder of Patroclus, and slay Hector, you your-
self shall die PI. Ap. 28 c.
1. Protasis and apodosis need not be in the same tense :
thus el . . . e\ve ra? o-Trovbas, TTJV Sitcrjv e%ei, if he broke
the truce, he has his deserts Xn. A. 2, 5, 41.
NOTE 1. Equivalents of the Indicative in Simple Conditions.
Equivalents of the indicative may be substituted for it in the apodosis
(and rarely in the protasis). Thus, the optative of wishing (- eA7rio>
I hope, 587), the imperative (= KeAevw / command, 582), the sub-
junctive of exhortation (= Sa or xprj it is necessary or proper), or
even the potential optative or indicative ( = e/xot SoKet it seems to me)
( 563, 565) may stand for the indicative : as trot 8' et Try aXXrj Se'So-
KTat, Ac'ye Kal Si'8a<TKe but if you have come to any different conclusion,
(I beg you) speak and explain PI. Crit. 49 e. KCU etre /x^Se/u'a al<rOr)<rk
eo-riv . . . Oavfjida-Lov /<ep8o? av et rj 6 0awros and if it is unconscious-
ness, (it seems to rne) death would be a wondrous gam PI. Ap. 40 c.
NOTE 2. Future Indicative in Present Conditions. Rarely the
future indicative is used in the protasis with the force of a periphras-
tic future (see 533 note) to express a present intention. Such condi-
tions are better classed as present conditions : thus et Br) O/JLOV TroXe/xos re
8a/x,a KCU Aoi/xos 'A^atovs if tear and plague together are to lay the Achae-
ans low A 61. So ei . . . TTI crrevo-o/Aev if we are going to trust Xn.
A. 1,3, 16.
FUTURE CONDITIONS (MORE VIVID AND LESS VIVID)
603. In future conditions the Greeks usually preferred
not to assume the condition as a fact ( 602), but to an-
ticipate it as a more or less remote possibility (cf. 555,
558) ; hence we find two special forms of future condi-
tions, the Future More Vivid and the Future Less Vivid.
FUTURE CONDITIONS 303
604. Future More Vivid. A Future More Vivid Con-
dition, anticipating an immediate future possibility, has:
In the protasis,
the subjunctive with eav (j)v or av).
In the apodosis,
the future indicative (or its equivalent) :
thus rjV yap TOVTO \d/3a)fjiev, ov Swrja-ovrai, peveiv for
if we capture this, they will not be able to stay Xn. A. 3,
4, 41. eav o-co^povrjre, ov TOVTOV aXV V/JL&V avrwv $ei-
crecr#e if you are discreet, you will spare not him, but your-
selves Xn. Sell. 2, 3, 34.
NOTE. Equivalents of the future indicative, such as the impera-
tive,, hortatory subjunctive, subjunctive with ov fiy ( 569, 2), and
the like (cf. 602, note 1) may take the place of the future indicative
in the apodosis : as KOL XP^ o^roTs eav 807 TL and use them, if you need
them at all Xn. Cy. 5, 4, 30. KOLV <cui/uj/Ae$a aSiKa avra epyao//,evoi,
fjirj ov 807, KT\. and if we shall appear to do this unjustly, will it not per-
haps be necessary, etc., PI. Crit. 48 d.
605. Future Less Vivid. A Future Less Vivid condi-
tion, implying that the supposition is a somewhat remote
possibility, has:
604 a. In Homer, and sometimes in the Attic poets, a future more
vivid condition is expressed by the subjunctive with d alone (without &v
or Ke, cf. 623 a ; 609 a) : as otf TOI eri drjpbv ye <j>l\i)S dtrb irarpldos CUTJS
co-o-erat ou5' ct irtp e ffid-^pca S&r/uar' <EX'O ffiV l> e sure that not for long will
he be absent from his native land, no, not if bonds of iron restrain him
a 204. So net ns rj <ro06s even if one be wise S. Ant. 710.
b. Homer uses in the apodosis also the other forms of future statement
(such as the subjunctive with or without &v or KC) described in 563 a ;
as et 5^ Ke M Buya-iv, ^70? 5^ xev avrbs Xw/xcu and if he do not give her, then
I myself may seize her A 324.
605 a. Homer sometimes uses et /ce (instead of et) with the optative in
the protasis of a future less vivid condition : as et 5e Kev "A/ryos iKoi/j.ed'
. . . and if ever we should come to Argos I 141.
304 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
In the protasis,
the optative with el.
In the apodosis,
the potential optative (i.e. optative with av, 563):
thus oSoTTOirjo-eie 7' av aurot? ical el avv reOpLTTTrois
POV\OLVTO airievai lie would make roads for them even if
they should want to depart with chariot-and-four Xn. A.
3, 2, 24. e$' bv e\6oire av, el rov r 'A.\vv Sia/SalTe to
which [i.e. the Parthenius] you would come, if you should
cross the Halys Xn. A. 5, 6, 9.
NOTE. Observe that the less vivid condition of future time cor-
responds to the contrary to fact condition of present or past time.
CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT
606. In a condition contrary to fact the supposition
stated in the protasis is contrary to the existing facts.
Such conditions have :
In the protasis,
a past tense of the indicative with el.
In the apodosis,
the potential indicative ( 565) (i.e. a past tense
of the indicative with av), or its equivalent
( 566).
606 a. In Homer the imperfect in a condition contrary to fact refers
always to past time.
b. In Homer a condition contrary to fact is sometimes thought of
as still possible, and so is expressed as a future less vivid (opt. with ei,
opt. with &v ( 565 a) ; cf. the similar use of the present subjunctive in
earlier Latin). Usually only the apodosis is expressed in this form: as
ov KC 6av6vTi 7re/> dSd' d/cax ol^y v, et /aera ofs erdpottrt ddfj.'r) Tpduv tvi 5r)fjU{)
I should not have been (lit. could not be} so distressed at his death, if he
had perished with his companions amidst the people of the Trojans a 236
(cf. also 588 a).
CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT 305
The aorist in these conditions denotes a single act, and
hence refers regularly to past time ; the imperfect denotes
a continued action (or state), and refers either to present
or to past time ; the pluperfect is used only when the
completion and continuance of the result of the act ( 534)
are emphasized, and refers usually to present time. Prot-
asis and apodosis need not stand in the same tense: thus
Aorist (PAST TIME) ovtc av eTroiwaev 'Ayacrids ravra,
el arj eya) avrov etceXevcra Agasias would not have done this,
if I had not told him to Xn. A. 6, 6, 15. KOI taw av &a
Tavr cnredavov, el fjirj f) ap%r) 8ia ra^ecov Kare\v6r) and
perhaps I should have been put to death for this, if the gov-
ernment had not soon been overthrown PL Ap. 32 d. (An
aorist (Jav . . . etTre?) of a single act in present time (rare)
is in PL Rep. 337 b.)
Imperfect (PRESENT TIME) raura e OVK av e&vvavro
TTOielv, el fjir) Kal Stairy perptif e^pa)vro they would not have
the power to do this, if they did not also lead a temperate life
Xu. Cy. 1, 2, 16.
(PAST TIME) OVK av ovv vrjcrwv . . . efcpdrei, el /JLIJ TL Kal
vavriKov el%ev now he would not have been master of islands,
if he had not possessed also some naval force Th. 1, 9.
Pluperfect (PRESENT TIME) with aorist (past time) el
rpiaKO-vra udvat {jLerenreaov rwv TJnj^cov, a7re7re(f>vyr) av
if only thirty of the votes had been cast on the other side,
I should (now) be free PL Ap. 36 a.
Aorist (PAST) and Imperfect (PRESENT) el ^ vuels
7J\0ere, eTropevo/jieOa av enl fiacri\d if you had not come
we should (now) be marching against the King Xn. A. 2, 1, 4.
Imperfect (PAST) and Aorist (PAST) el pev TrpdaOev
r)7ri(TTdfjLvv, ov& av av vrj K o\o vdrj ad voi if 1 had under-
stood this before, I should not have followed with you Xn. A.
T, 7, 11.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 20
306 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
607. In place of the potential indicative in the apodosis
of a condition contrary to fact may be substituted a state-
ment of fact expressed by the imperfect indicative (without
av) of a verb denoting possibility, propriety, necessity, and
the like (efr)z>, e'Set, XPW etc.). See 567 and note: thus
WITH AORIST INFINITIVE (past time) ef rjv aoi (frvyrjs
rlfJujaacrOai,, el e{3ov\ov it was possible for you to propose
the penalty of exile, if you so desired PL Crit. 52 c.
WITH PRESENT INFINITIVE (present time) XPV V ff '
eiTrep rfdda /AT) /ca/eo?, Treia-avrd pe yapelv ydjjiov roV8' you
ought, if you were not so base, to win my sanction to contract
this marriage E. Med. 586.
WITH PRESENT INFINITIVE (past time) e^p^v W>
, eiirep V/JLCOV cve/ca eTTpdrrov ravra, <t>aiveo-0ai, rr}?
fjLrjs TroXXa? rj^epa^ I JT<D\OVVTQ$ for, if they were doing
this on your account, they ought to have been observed to sell
at the same price for many days Lys. 22, 12.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
608. In present and past time the Greeks had a special
form for a general condition (to state what always happens
(or happened) if the condition is (or was) ever fulfilled).
609. Present General. In a Present General condition
the usage is :
In the protasis,
the subjunctive with edv (jfv or av).
In the apodosis,
the present indicative (or the equivalent) :
609 a. In Homer, present general conditions usually have in the prota-
sis the subjunctive with el alone (without KC or &v, cf. 604 a ; 625 a): as
ou 5^ TIS rj/juv dak-jrwp'fi, ei irp TLS . . . <t>rj<riv tXevcreaOai and to us it is no
joy if (ever) some one say that he will come a 167. This usage is some-
times found in other poets.
GENERAL CONDITIONS 307
thus rjv S' 6771)9 \0rj Odvaros, ovSels /SouXerat
if Death comes near, nobody wants to die E. Ale. 671.
ra? Se amSa?, av rt? Ta^u aviary, ecrrt \a/Ji/3dveiv it
is possible to catch bustards if one starts them up suddenly
Xn. A. 1, 5, 3.
NOTE 1. In place of the present indicative in the apodosis may
be substituted the gnomic aorist ( 530). See 530 and the second
example there quoted.
NOTE 2. Observe that the present general condition differs from
the future more vivid ( 604) only in the apodosis, which states what
always takes place (instead of what will take place), in case the antici-
pation expressed in the protasis is realized.
610. Past General. In a Past General condition the
usage is :
In the protasis,
the optative with el.
In the apodosis,
the imperfect indicative (or the equivalent) :
thus ei TTOV TL opwr) /SpcoTov, SteStSou if he saw anywhere
anything eatable, he distributed it Xn. A. 4, 5, 8. et n
a\\o TrparreLv /3ou\(uz>TO, icvpioi rjcrav (f(ever) they wished
to do anything else, they had authority Lys. 12, 44.
NOTE 1. As an equivalent of the imperfect indicative in the
apodosis, the imperfect or aorist indicative with av ( 568), or the
aorist modified by " never," "often," and the like may be used : as ei 8e
TIVO? TOV K\rjpov 6 TTora/Ao? TL 7ro.peA.oiTO, eA^cuv av Trpo? avrov eVr;-
jucuve TO yeyevry/xeVoi/ if (ever) the river carried away any portion of a
man's lot, he would come before him [the king] and relate what had hap-
pened Hdt. 2, 109. For an example of the aorist with av as the apodosis
of a past general condition, see 568. For the aorist with a negative
see Xn. A. 1, 9, 18.
610 a. In Homer there is but one example of the optative in a past
general condition, namely fi 768 ef rts . . . ivitrroi., . . . KctrfyuKes if ever
any one spoke harshly . . . you restrained (him) .
308
USES OF THE FINITE MODES
NOTE 2. Observe that the past general condition differs from the
future less vivid ( 605) only in the apodosis, which states what regu-
larly took place (instead of what would take place), in case the possi-
bility suggested in the protasis came true.
SUMMARY OF CONDITIONAL FORMS
611. The normal usage in conditions may be summarized
as follows :
TIME FORM
PROTASIS
APODOSIS
{Simple (or most
Fut. Indie, with ei
Fut. Indie, (or equivalent)
vivid)
More Vivid
Subj. with e&v
Fut. Indie, (or equivalent)
Less Vivid
Opt. with ct
Opt. with &v
Simple
Pres. (or Perl) Indie.
Pres. (or Perf.) Indie, (or
4?
with ei
equivalent)
G
General
Subj. with eav
Pres. Indie, (or equivalent)
s
Contrary to Fact
Imperf. (or Pluperf .)
Imperf. (or Pluperf.) Indie.
PH
Indie, with el
with &v (or equivalent,
566-567)
Simple
Past tense of Indie.
Past tense of Indie.
with el
49
General
Opt. with ei
Imperf. Indie, (or equiva-
I'
lent)
HH
Contrary to Fact
Aorist or Imperf. In-
Aorist or Imperf. Indie.
die, with el
with &v (or equivalent,
566-567)
VARIATIONS FROM THE NORMAL FORMS OF
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
612. Besides the combinations given above, other com-
binations are not infrequent. The most common are :
1. Protasis Simple ( 602) or More Vivid ( 604) with
Apodosis Less Vivid ( 605). aSi/coiijv JJLGV av el /AT)
a7ro&a)crc0 unjustly should I act if I do not restore her E.
Hel. 1010. ov&e yap dv vroXXcu yetyvpai wviv,
CONDITIONS VARIATIONS FROM NORMAL FORMS 309
av OTTOI (f)vyovT<? ?7/^efc9 awQw^ev for not even if there be
many bridges, should we have anyivhere to escape and save
ourselves Xn. A. "2, 4, 19.
2. Protasis Less Vivid ( 605) with Apodosis Simple
( 602). TOVTO j pot, Sotcel /ca\bv elvai, et rt9 olds r eirj
TraiBeveiv avdpunrovs this certainly seems to me to be a fine
tiling, if anybody should be able to educate men PI. Ap. 19 e.
TI TO) TrXrjOei TrepiyevrjcreTai el Troirjo-ai/JLev a eicelvoi
TrpoaTaTTova-iv ; what advantage will result for the people,
if we should do what they insist on ? Lys. 34, 6.
NOTE. Potential Optative or Indicative in Protasis. Rarely a po-
tential optative or indicative is used in a protasis, retaining, of course,
its regular force: as e? ye fjirjSc. 8ov\ov oxparr) Secu/A0' av if we
would not take even a slave who is intemperate Xn. Mem. 1, 5, 3.
613. The protasis sometimes depends remotely on an
idea contained in the apodosis, in which case it is best
translated " in case that " or " on the chance that " : as opa Se
Srj TT)? cr/cex/rectf? rrjv ap%rjv, lav croi i/cavw \eyrjrat now
consider the beginning of our investigation, in case it be stated
to your satisfaction PI. Grit. 48 e.
614. Implied Conditions. A condition may be implied
in a participle ( 653, 6), adverb, or adverbial phrase, or a
relative clause ( 621 ; 622) : as avv vplv fiev av ol^ai
elvai rt/uo? . . . vfjLwv Be epij/Jios fav OVK av l/cavbs elvai
ol/jiai our' av <pi\ov oD(f)e\f)o-aL ovr av e%0pbv a\e%a<jdai with
you (i.e. el crvv vfuv eir^v if I should be with you) I think I
should be honored (i.e. eiwv aV), but deprived of you (i.e.
el VJJLWV eprj/jios e'lijv) I think I should not be able (i.e. elvv
av) either to help a friend or to defend myself against a
foe Xn. 1, 3, 6.
615. Verb not Expressed. The verb in the protasis or
apodosis sometimes is not expressed if it can be readily
310 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
felt from the context : as el rt? real aXXo? avrjp, KOI
KO/oo? ato? eVrt Oavfid^eadai if any other man is worthy to
be admired, Cyrus, too, is worthy to be admired Xn. Cy.
5, 1, 6. el Brj TO) o-o(f>a)Tepds rov <f>airjv elvai, rovra) civ if I
should say that I am wiser than anybody in any respect, it
would (I should say) be in this respect PI. Ap. 29 b.
616. From the regular suppression of the verb of the
apodosis have arisen the following idiomatic expressions :
1. cl fJLTJ if not, i.e. except: as ov yap Brj . . . opwfiev el
fir] oX^yovf TOVTOVS avOpMTTovs for we do not see any one
except (lit. if not) these few men Xn. A. 4, 7, 5.
2. el |ii] 8ici if not on account of, i.e. except for : as aTroXe-
<rai Trapeaicevd^ovTO rrjv 7ro\iv, el fir] Bi avBpas ayaOov? they
were making ready to destroy the State (and they would
have destroyed it) if it had not been for some good men
Lys. 12, 60.
3. el 8e \LT\ but if not, i.e. otherwise (a supposition con-
trary to what immediately precedes) : as aTr^ret ra . . .
Xprj/jiaTa el Be fir], TroXe/irjaeiv e(f>7] aurofc he demanded
restoration of the property ; otherwise (lit. but if they should
not restore it) he said he should make war on them Xn.
Hell. 1, 3, 3. So also el Se fir] is used even when the
preceding clause is negative : as firj Troirjo-ys ravra el Se
fir], . . . alridv e%eis dont do this; otherwise (i.e. if you
persist in doing it) you will be blamed Xn. A. 7, 1, 8. So
also el Be fir) is regularly used where eav Be fir} (owing to
a preceding eav) would be more logical.
4. oxnrep dv el just as would be if, i.e. like as: thus
o re avrov wajrep av el rt? TrdXai avvTeOpajjLfie'vos . . .
he greeted him just as one would greet another
if he should greet him after being long associated with him
Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 2.
CONCESSIVE CLAUSES 311
CONCESSIVE CLAUSES
617. Concessive clauses are introduced by el icai (eav /cat)
if even or KOI el (/cat edv, and by crasis 43 KCLV) even if;
otherwise they do not differ from conditional clauses : as
licavoL elcrL . . . TOU? /jLi/cpovs Kdv ev Seivols wai, aw^eiv evTre-
T<w? they (the gods) are able easily to save lowly men, even
if (i.e. although) they are in great straits Xn. A. 3, 2, 10.
Concession may also be implied by the circumstantial
participle ( 653, 7).
RELATIVE (AND TEMPORAL) CLAUSES
618. Relative clauses are introduced by relative pro-
nouns (substantive and adjective) and relative adverbs.
NOTE. ^ws means both "while" "so long as" and " all the while
till," i.e. until : as IwcrTrep e/XTrvew . . . ov/tia) Travcro/oat so long as I live
and breathe, I shall not stop PI. Ap. 29 d. ^XP L Y-P TOVTOV i/o//,i<o
^pr}va.L Ka.Tr)yopLV, e<os O.V Oavdrov $6rj T<U (frevyovTi dta tlpydcrOai for
so far do I think one should continue his impeachment, until it shall appear
that acts deserving death have been committed by the defendant Lys. 12, 37.
1. Negative Relative Clauses. A relative clause that
states a fact, if negative, takes the negative ov ( 431, 1) :
other relative clauses (of anticipation, purpose, etc.) take
the negative pj ( 431, 1).
EELATIVE CLAUSES WITH DEFINITE
ANTECEDENT
619. A relative clause whose relative refers to a definite
antecedent may have any of the constructions of an inde-
pendent sentence (statement, question, wish, command,
562-589).
618 a (note). 6(j>pa in Homer (like 2ws in Attic, 618 note) means
both while and until. He has also ets 6' /ce = until.
312 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
NOTE. Such clauses containing a statement in the indicative may
imply cause ( 598) or result ( 597) ; if negative, they have ov.
RELATIVE CLAUSES WITH INDEFINITE
ANTECEDENT
620. Relative clauses in which the relative refers to
an indefinite antecedent take the same modes as the
protases of conditional sentences ( 602-610). If nega-
tive, they have always ^77 ( 431, 1).
621. A relative clause containing the indicative may
sometimes imply the protasis of a simple condition (negative
fjLij): as a pr) olSa ov&e oio/jbai elbevat, what (ever) I don't
know I dorit even think that I know PI. Ap. 21 d. o'l fj,rj
TV%ov ev rat? Ta^ecnv 6Vre?, e& ra? rafet? eOeov those who
did not happen to be in line ran to their lines Xn. A. 2, 2, 14.
NOTE. More commonly such clauses are conceived as general in
nature, and so take the subjunctive or the optative according to 625.
622. Rarely a relative clause containing a past tense of
the indicative is so used as to imply the protasis of a
condition contrary to fact ( 606) : as /cal oTrorepa rovrwv
eVotr/cre^, ouSei'o? av TJTTOV ' A.6r)vai(0v TrXoixnoi, r)crav and
ivhichever of these he did (i.e. assuming that he had done
one of them, 553, 1) they [the children] would have been
as rich as any one of the Athenians Lys. 32, 23.
623. A relative clause which merely anticipates a future
event or a future possibility has the subjunctive with av
(cf. the future more vivid condition, 604): thus o n av
623 a. Often in Homer, and not infrequently in other poets, a relative
clause of anticipation has the subjunctive alone (without /ce or #jO;cf. 555,
note, and 604 a ; 625 a.
RELATIVE CLAUSES 313
TreiaojjLai I will endure whatever may be necessary Xn.
A. 1, 3, 5. TO) avBpl ov av eXqaOe Treio-o/jLai, I will obey
ivhatever man you shall elect Xn. A. 1, 3, 15. eTrei&av Se
SiaTTpd^co/jiaL a Scopa^ TJ^CO as soon as I shall have accom-
plished my purpose I shall return Xn. A. 2, 3, 29.
ea-r av eyco e\6co wait till I come Xn. A. 5, 1, 4.
624. A relative clause which anticipates a more remote
future possibility has the optative (cf. the future less
vivid condition, 605) : thus o/cvofyv pev av ek ra TrXola
e/jL/Baiveiv a f)/JLtv &OLTJ I should hesitate to go on board the
vessels which he might gine us Xn. A. 1, 3, 17. a\\' ov
TroXt? <7T7;c7et, TovSe %prj /cXveiv but whomsoever the State
might set in station o'er us, him we must obey S. Ant. 666.
625. Relative clauses which suggest a general or repeated
possibility have the subjunctive with av when dependent
on a present (or future) tense, and the optative when
dependent on a past tense (cf. the general conditions
609-610): thus
Present G-eneral. eo>5 pev av Trapy TW, %/oco/>tafc as long
as any one is present, I avail myself of his services Xn. A.
1, 4, 8. 09 K Oeols eTTiTreLOijTai, poKa r eicXvov ( 530)
avrov whosoever obeys the gods, him they most do hear A
218.
Past Greneral. o-foSpbs [fy Xatpe^xwz'] e<* o n op^a-eLe
Chaerephon was very enthusiastic in ivhatever he undertook PL
Ap. 21 a. eOtjpevev CLTTO ILTTTTOV OTTO re yVftvturcu /3ouXotro
eavrov re Kal rou? linrovs he hunted on horseback whenever
625 a. Usually in Homer, and not infrequently in other poets, general
relative clauses (present) have the subjunctive alone (without Ke or &v}.
Compare 623 a and 609 a : thusrd Qpdfrai 0-<r'ldlXg<r0a you consider
whatsoever you desire A 554.
314 USES OF THE FINITE MODES
he wanted to exercise himself and his horses Xn. A. 1, 2, 7.
Trepie/jLevopev ovv e/cdo-rore ecu? avoi^Oeir] TO Bea/jLCDT^piov '
. . . e Tret ST) Be avoL^Oeiri, elo-yfjiev so we waited each time
until the prison should be opened ; and when (ever) it was
opened we went in PL Phaed. 59 d.
NOTE. b Ti jjuf| and oo-ov ji^ . o n ^rj and oow /xiy are used
elliptically, like d ^rj ( 616, 1), in the meaning except: as ov -n-ap-
ey tVovro o TL jJiTfj 6X.LJOL they were not present, with the exception of a few
(lit. what was not the few who were present) Th. 4, 94.
626. Temporal Clauses with Words Meaning " until." -
Temporal clauses introduced by words meaning "until"
are sometimes used so as to imply purpose (cf. 624
and 625 last example). The suggestion of purpose
makes no difference in the mode of the verb, which is
regularly the subjunctive with av in connection with
a primary tense, and the optative in connection with a
secondary tense ( 624,' 625).
NOTE. Rarely, for the sake of vividness (cf. 674) the subjunc-
tive is used in a temporal clause after a secondary tense : as eo>s 8' av
ravra SiaTrpa^wi/rat (pvXaK-qv . . . KaTtXnrehe left a garrison until
they [the people] should carry out these measures Xn. Hell. 5, 3, 25.
627. irpiv. The temporal conjunction nrpiv (in origin
a comparative adverb from the root of Trpo before) meaning
sooner than, before (until) is used with the indicative (619),
626 a. In Homer tfws (fy>s), like 60/oa ( 590 a) is sometimes used in a
purpose clause where it is better translated "in order that' 1 ' 1 : as 5&Kev . . .
\cuov ^os xvrAwa-cuTo [her mother] gave her oil that she might bathe and
anoint herself f 80.
627 a. In Homer irpiv (likewise Trdpos before) is used regularly with
the infinitive after both negative and affirmative sentences. Rarely irpiv
6're (irpiv y or #/), literally before the time when, is found with the indica-
tive (or subjunctive). Rarely also irpiv is found with the subjunctive
(without K or d?), but only after a negative clause.
THE INFINITIVE 315
subjunctive ( 623 ; 625), and optative ( 624) in the
same way as other relative adverbs of time, but usually
only after a negative sentence ; after an affirmative sen-
tence, irpiv is commonly used with the infinitive ( 645) :
thus
(INDICATIVE) oure ro're . . . levai rj6e\e Trplv f] yvvrj
aurbv eVeto-e and he was not then willing to go until his
wife persuaded him Xn. A. 1, 2, 26.
(SUBJUNCTIVE) Selrat avrov /AT) Trpocrdev Kara\vcrai, . . .
Trplv av avro) av^^ovXevo-rirai he desires him not to come
to terms before (i.e. until) he shall advise with him Xri. A.
1,1,10.
(OPTATIVE) e'6Yozm> //,?) ajreXOelv Trplv aTraydyoi TO
o-Tpdrevpa they wanted him not to go away before (i.e. until)
he should lead back the army Xn. A. 7, 7, 57.
(INFINITIVE) Sidffrja-av Trplv TOW a'XXou? aTroKptvaadai
they crossed before the rest replied Xn. A. 1, 4, 16.
NOTE. The adverbs Trpoo-Oev or Trporepov are sometimes used in
the principal clause as forerunners of -irpiv (see the second example
in 627). Both Trplv TI and Trportpov rj sooner than are sometimes used
like ir/xv.
THE INFINITIVE
628. The infinitive is a verbal substantive (originally
a dative or a locative case). It retains its verbal char-
acter, however, in so far that it has voice and tense, is
modified by adverbs (not by adjectives), and takes its
object in the same case as a finite verb.
SUBJECT OF THE INFINITIVE
629. Subject Accusative. The subject of the infinitive,
if expressed, is always in the accusative case ( 342 and
note). A predicate substantive or adjective belonging to
316 THE INFINITIVE
the subject then agrees with it in case : as rou<? c
e/ceXev&e avv avrq> crrpareveaOai he bade the exiles take the
field with him Xn. A. 1, 2, 2. ov oiero TTKTTOV ol elvai
whom he thought to be faithful to himself Xii. A. 1, 9, 29.
vo/JLi^o) yap v/Lta? ejjLol elvai ical Trarpi&a Kal c/u'Xou? teal
crvfjkpd%ov<ifor I think you are to me both country, friends,
and allies Xn. A. 1, 3, 6.
NOTE. So also predicate words referring to an indefinite subject
(not expressed) stand in the accusative case: as a CCOTIV apiOfjLrj-
(ravras . . . eiSerot things which it is possible (for people) to know by
counting Xn. Mem. 1, 1, 9.
630. Subject not Expressed. If the subject of the infini-
tive is expressed or indicated in connection with the word
(or words) on which the infinitive depends, it is not ex-
pressed again with the infinitive ; as tyrj eOeXew he said
he was willing (but in Latin dixit SE velle) Xn. A. 4, 1, 27.
VO/JLL&I VTT e'/xof) rjbi/cricrOai he thinks he has been wronged by
me Xn. A. 1, 3, 10.
NOTE. Exceptions to the rule of 630 are comparatively rare, but
if the subject is again expressed with the infinitive, it of course stands
in the accusative ( 629).
631. Agreement of Predicate Words. When the sub-
ject of the infinitive is expressed or indicated not with
the infinitive, but in connection with the word on which
the infinitive depends ( 630), a predicate substantive or
adjective commonly stands in the same case with the sub-
ject as expressed: thus (NOMINATIVE) Hepa-rjs pev e<f>r)
he said that he was a Persian Xn. A. 4, 4, 17. rovro
IK TOV ^aXeTro? elvai he accomplished this by being
severe Xn. A. 2, 6, 9.
(GENITIVE) rwv (fraa/cdvTcov Sifcao-Twv elvai of those who
say that they are judges PL Ap. 41 a. TLvpov e&eovro o><?
USES OF THE INFINITIVE , 317
TrpoOvfjiordrov TT/JO? rbv TrdXe/Jiov yeveaOai, they begged
Cyrus to become as zealous as possible toward the war Xn.
Hell. 1, 5, 2.
(DATIVE) eSoge rofc crrpaTrjyols ffovXevo-ao-Oai <rv\\e-
yeio-iv it seemed best to the generals to meet together and
consider Xn. A. 4, 8, 9.
(ACCUSATIVE) iravra^ ovrw &art0et9 aTreTre^Trero ware
avTo) fjLa\\ov <j)i\ovs elvai T) ftacriXel he sent them all back,
so disposing them that they were more friendly to himself
than to the King Xn. A. 1, 1, 5.
1. Sometimes, however, the influence of the infinitive
causes a predicate noun referring to a genitive or dative
(rarely a nominative) to stand in the accusative (cf . 316) :
as *A.Or)V&{&v eBetfOrjcrav a^io-i ftorjdovs jeveaOat they
wanted the Athenians to come to their assistance Hdt. 6, 100.
aeviq . . . rjKeiv TrapayyeXXei \a(36vra rou? aXXof? he sent
instructions to Xenias to take the rest of the men, and come
Xn. A. 1, 2, 1.
USES OF THE INFINITIVE
632. The infinitive has two distinct uses : (1) as a sub-
stantive (not in indirect discourse), and (2) in indirect
discourse.
NOTE. The use of the infinitive (with subject accusative) was
developed from its substantive use, thus dyye'AAa> Kvpov i/t/cav origi-
nally meant / report Cyrus in regard to being victorious, which amounts
to saying 7 report that Cyrus is victorious, and (Kvpov) vlxav is felt to
represent (Kupo?) vt*a, the present indicative (cf. 342, note).
633. Negative with the Infinitive. The infinitive used
as a substantive has regularly as its negative ^77 ( 431, 1);
the infinitive in indirect discourse retains the negative of
the direct discourse (usually ou, 431, 2).
318 . THE INFINITIVE
634. Personal and Impersonal Construction. In Greek,
as in English, both the personal and the impersonal con-
structions are found with words of saying and the like.
Thus, the Greeks said both K0/>o? \eyerai ava$r\vai Cyrus
is said to have gone up, and XeyeTcu Kvpov avaftr]vai it is
said that Cyrus went up, but the tendency was to employ
the personal construction more freely than in English.
Hence some of the Greek personal constructions (espe-
cially with 77X05 evident, Sfaaios just, and the like) have
to be rendered in English as impersonal : thus 77X05 rp
avlcbfjLvo$ it was evident that he was distressed (lit. he was
evident) Xn. A. 1, 2, 11.
THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE
635. The use of the infinitive soon extended far beyond
its original bounds (as a dative or locative case) and it
was felt that the infinitive could stand in any case (nomi-
native, genitive, dative, or accusative), but unless it is
modified by the article ( 636) it is often impossible to
say definitely in what case the infinitive stands.
636. Articular Infinitive. The infinitive may be modi-
fied by the neuter of the definite article, TO, roO, rq>
( 444); when so modified, its substantive character
appears even more clearly.
637. Infinitive as Subject. The infinitive (with or with-
out the article) may stand as the subject of a verb (or as
a predicate substantive): as KOCT/JLO^ /caX&>? roOro Spdv to
perform this as it should be done is a credit Th. 1, 5. TO
<ydp roi Odvarov SeSievai . . . ovSev aXXo larlv TJ &o/ceiv
636 a. Homer never uses the article with the infinitive.
THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE 319
(70(j)bv eivai pr) ovra for to fear death is nothing else than to
seem to be wise when one is not PL Ap. 29 a.
If the infinitive is the subject of a finite verb, it is of
course in the nominative case; if it is the subject of an
infinitive, it is of course in the accusative case.
1. Infinitive as (Apparent) Subject. With many im-
personal verbs and similar expressions, such as Bel or ^prj
it is necessary, Sofcel it seems best, e&Ti it is possible, efeo-rt it
is allowed, Trpeirei or Trpocnj/cei it is fitting, Ka\6v ecrn it is a
fine thing, Sitcaiov it is right, and the like, the infinitive stands
in the relation of subject or <?mm'-subject (cf . 305, note) :
as wSe ovv ^prj iroielv thus then we must act Xn. A. 2, 2, 4.
TL Sel avTov alrelv ; ivhy must he make demand? Xn. A. 2,
1, 10. e^eariv opav it is possible to see Xn. A. 3, 4, 39.
e'Sof ev ovv auTot? . . . Trpoievat, so it seemed best to them
to proceed Xn. A. 2, 1, 2. Siicaiov yap a7r6\\vcr6ai, TOVS
eTTiopKovvras for it is right for perjurers to perish Xn. A.
2, 5, 41. For the personal construction, instead of the
impersonal, in examples like the last see 634.
Here belongs also the infinitive in indirect discourse
( 646) with passive verbs of saying and thinking, like
\eyerai, vofjL^erai, etc. (cf. 634).
638. Infinitive as Object or Cognate Accusative. The
infinitive with or without the article is used with great
frequency as an object ( 329) or cognate accusative ( 331).
When used as a cognate accusative it is often called the
Complementary Infinitive. Examples are: r)0e\ov avrov
aKoveiv they ivere willing to listen to him Xn. A. 2, 6, 11.
ov Swdfjievoi /cadevSeiv not being able to sleep Xn. A. 3, 1, 3.
ovfc el%ov licavfa [^^tatjoa?] evpelv they had not (the power)
to find enough [goats] Xn. A. 3, 2, 12. navOdvovaiv
re /cal ap^ecrdai they learn to govern and to be
320 THE INFINITIVE
governed Xn. A. 1, 9, 4. rfv^ovro avrbv evrv^rja-at they
prayed for him to have good luck Xn. A. 1, 4, 17. row
pev oTrXtra? avrov e/ceXevcre pelvai he bade the hoplites
remain on the spot Xn. A. 1, 5, 13. OUK eVooXue /3ao-iXeu9
TO Kvpov (TTpdrevfjia Siafiaiveiv the King did not hinder
Cyrus' army from crossing Xn. A. 1, 7, 19. SieTrpagaro
irevre iiev o-Tparrjyovs levai he managed to have jive generals
go Xn. A. 2, 5, 30.
Here belongs also the infinitive in indirect discourse
after verbs of saying and thinking ( 669). For the
infinitive with verbs of promising and the like see 549, 2.
(WiTH THE ARTICLE) fyopov^evoi ofy fjpfa HOVQV, a\\a
ical TO KaraTreo-elv in fear not only of ws, but also of fall-
ing off Xn. A. 3, 2, 19.
(WiTH PREPOSITIONS) TT/OO? TO /-teT/nW SelcrOai TreTrai-
Sev/j,evo<: trained to having only moderate wants Xn. Mem.
1, 2, 1.
639. Infinitive in the Genitive Case. The infinitive
(usually with the article) may stand in the genitive case :
as ol Se fftWe? CUTUH davelv the living are the cause of his
death S. Ant. 1173.
(WiTH THE ARTICLE) TOU jrtelv eiriQv^La the desire to
drink Th. 7, 84. a/zeX^o-a? ToO av\\e^/eiv TrXota having
neglected to collect vessels Xn. A. 5, 1, 15. ap^avres rov
Siafiaiveiv taking the lead in crossing Xn. A. 1, 4, 15.
(WiTH A PREPOSITION) avrlrovrol^TrXeioai ireiOeadai
instead of obeying the majority Xn. Hell. 2, 3, 34.
NOTE. For the infinitive with rov expressing purpose (mostly in
Thucydides) see 352, 1, note.
640. Infinitive in the Dative Case. The infinitive (with
or without the article) is often found in the dative case :
as TO e a<j</>aXe? /cal /Jievetv . . . teal a,7re\9elv at vfjes
THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE 321
-i security both for staying and for going away, our
ships will provide Th. 6, 18. Here doubtless are to be
classed the infinitive expressing purpose (see 592) and
the infinitive with most adjectives and substantives (see
641).
(WlTH THE ARTICLE) Mevcov ^ydXXero TW egaTrarav
&vvao-0ai Menon rejoiced in being able to deceive Xn. A. 2,
6,26.
(WlTH PREPOSITIONS) ev yap TW /cparelv ecm teal TO
\afji{3di>eii> ra rwv rjTrdvcov in being victorious is included
also the right to take the property of the vanquished Xn.
A. 5, 6, 32.
641. Infinitive with Adjectives and Substantives. -
Adjectives (adverbs) and substantives, denoting ability,
fitness, power, sufficiency, and the like, and their opposites,
may be followed by the infinitive : as SvvaTrjv /cal VTTO&-
yioi? 7ropeveo-0ai, 6Bdv a road practicable even for pack
animals to travel Xn. A. 4, 1, 24. OTTOCTOL licavol r^aav ra?
aKpoTrdXeis (f)V\a,TTeiv as many as were sufficient to guard
the citadels Xn. A. 1, 2, 1. Seivbs \eyeiv clever at speak-
ing PI. Ap. 17 b. %aXe?ra evpelv hard to find PL Rep.
412 b. o lot re eaeaOe r^uv av/jiTrpat; ai you will be able
to cooperate with us Xn. A. 5, 4, 9.
(Dpa airievai it's time to go away PL Ap. 42 a. avdy/crj
ecrrl /jid^ecrOaL it is necessary to fight Xn. A. 4, 6, 10.
o/cvos rjv aviaraaO ai there was a disinclination to get up
Xn. A. 4, 4, 11. Oav^a ISeaQai a wonder to behold
(9366.
NOTE. As in English, the active infinitive is commonly used with
adjectives and substantives, even though the meaning may be passive :
as aios Oav/j.da-(u ivorth admiring, worthy to be admired Th. 1, 138. Cf.
in English " a house to let."
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 21
322 THE INFINITIVE
642. Adverbial Use of the Infinitive. The infinitive
(with or without the article) may be used adverbially, like
the dative of Respect ( 390), or the Adverbial Accusa-
tive ( 336) : as TO Se [Bid irdXlroyv Spav efyvv apfyavos
but as for acting in defiance of the State, I am too weak for
that S. Ant. 79. ob? . . . o")^o\7j rj r^fjilv TO Kara TOVTOV
elvai that we may have freedom so far as this man is con-
cerned Xn. A. 1, 6, 9.
1. With the article TO the adverbial infinitive is most
frequently found after words denoting hindrance and the
like ( 643); without the article it is most frequently
found in certain set phrases (often preceded by eb?) : <?
or a)? eVo? euTrelv as one might say, (&>?) vvve\6vTi
( 382, last example) to speak concisely, (<w?) e/zot
Sotcelv as it seems to me, eicwv elvai willingly (lit. in respect to
being willing), 6\iyov Selv or pi/cpov Selv almost (lit. in regard
to lacking little).
NOTE. The infinitive SeTv is often omitted from oAtyou 8e?v and
fMKpov SeTv, leaving oXtyov or fUKpov alone to mean almost: as oXtyov
cfjMVTov 7rt\a06[Jir)v I almost forgot ivlio I ivas PI. Ap. 17 a.
643. Construction after Words of Hindering. Words
meaning (or suggesting) hinder may be followed by either
(1) the simple infinitive ( 638), or (2) the infinitive with
TOV ( 639), or (3) the simple infinitive with fiij ( 434) or
(4) the infinitive with TOV fjnj ( 434), or (5) the infinitive
with TO pi) ( 642, 1 and 434). Thus, lie hinders me from
speaking may be expressed in Greek by (1) icwXvei pe
Xeyeiv, (2) K(0\vei JJLC TOV \eyeiv, (3) rco)\vei /-te firj \eyeiv,
(4) KO)\V6i fJL TOV /JL7J \<yLV, (5) K(D\VL /* TO fJLTJ \6ylV.
If the word of hindering is itself modified by a negative
(see 435), we may have also (6) ov tccoXvei /JLE ^ ov \eyeiv,
and (7) ov tccoXvet pe TO /JLTJ ov \eyeiv. For other examples
see 434-5.
THE INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 323
644. Infinitive of Suggestion. The infinitive may be
used independently to suggest an action, but without stat-
ing it as a fact. An infinitive so used may suggest a wish
(see 587 note 3), or command (see 583 note), or it
may be used as an exclamation (usually with the article) :
as TT)? fjLcopias ' rb A to, VO/JLI^CLV Stupidity! to think of
having a belief in Zeus! Ar. Nub. 819.
NOTE. Some of the so-called independent infinitives, it can be
seen, were earlier dependent on words like 86s grant (that) or c8oe
it was voted (that) and the like.
OTHER USES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE INFINITIVE
645. The infinitive is used with &Vre (sometimes with
&)?), e</>' <, (/>' core, to denote result (see 595 ; 596), and
with Trpiv meaning before (see 627).
NOTE. The infinitive, with or without axrre or a>s ( 595) is some-
times used with 77 after a comparative ( 426, note 5) : as vocrrj/Jia
/Atov rj <j>ptiv a disease too great to bear S. O.T. 1293. cXarrco
l^ovra 8wa/xiv 17 wcrre rovs <i'Aous ox^eAeiv having a force too small
to (lit. smaller than so as to) help his friends Xn. Hell. 4, 8, 23.
THE INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
646. When the infinitive is used in indirect discourse,
each tense represents the same tense (of the indicative
or optative) of the direct discourse (the present including
also the imperfect, and the perfect the pluperfect; see
551 and 671). If av was used in the direct discourse,
it is retained in the indirect ( 439): thus (/>?; ede\eiv
he said he was willing (i.e. e6e\w I am willing) Xn. A. 4,
1, 27. IdcrOat ai/ro? TO rpav/jid (frr/ai he says that he him-
self treated the wound (i.e. ICO/JMJV I treated) Xn. A. 1, 8, 26.
oiofjLe0a av KOI Trj apery %prjcr0ai we think we could make
some use also of our valor (i.e. ^pw/jLeda av we could use)
324 THE PARTICIPLE
Xn. A. 2, 1, 12. Xeyerat ol/co&o/jirio-ai he* is said to have
built (i.e. (OKoSoprio-e he built) Xn. A. 1, 2, 9. For addi-
tional examples see 551 and 671.
647. Infinitive with civ. The infinitive with av usually
represents in indirect discourse a potential optative or
indicative of the direct discourse (646), but the infinitive
used as a substantive may sometimes take av to give it
a potential meaning (cf. 436): as Travrajracnv cnreo-Te-
prj/cevai . . . prj av en cr<a9 aTTOTet^tVat-^o have deprived
them completely of any possible power of walling them in
Th. 7, 6.
THE PARTICIPLE
648. The participle is a verbal adjective ( 159, 1), and
follows the same principles of agreement as other adjec-
tives ( 420-423).
649. The uses of the participle may be classed under
three heads : Attributive, Circumstantial, and Supple-
mentary, but these uses shade off into one another, and
the same participle may sometimes be referred to two
classes. Thus, in /Jba^o^evoi SiereXecrav they continued
fighting, ^a^o^evoi is supplementary to SiereXeo-av, but it
also denotes the circumstances under which they continued.
A. THE ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE
650. The participle is used to modify a substantive
exactly like any other adjective ( 419): thus Tro'Xt?
ol/covfjievrj an inhabited city, 6 Trapaiv /caipds the present
occasion, 6 /ZT) Sapels avOpwrros ( 431, 1) the unflogged man.
1. The substantive which a participle modifies may be
omitted, and the participle alone then has the value of a
THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 325
substantive (cf. 424): thus ol irapovres the persons
present, TO pe\\ov the future (lit. the thing about to be),
TO Oapaovv courage (lit. the thing not afraid) Th. 1. 36.
T&V epryaa-opevwv evdvTcov since there were in the country
those who would cultivate it Xn. A. 2, 4, 22. eVXet . . .
eVt TroXXa? vavs tce/cTrjfJLevovs he sailed against men pos-
sessed of many ships Xn. Hell. 5, 1, 19.
NOTE 1. A participle, like any other adjective ( 424), used sub-
stautively, may sometimes be modified by a genitive, if its verbal
force is no longer felt: as /foo-iAeoos Trpoo-r/Kovre's rives some relatives
of the king Th. 1, 128.
NOTE 2. Greek uses the participle much more freely than Eng-
lish does, and the attributive participle must often be rendered in
English by a substantive or a relative clause: as ot TrcTreio-fiei/oi
(lit. the persuaded persons) those who have been persuaded or the converts,
the inhabitants Xn. A. 1, 5, 5. 6 rrjv yvco/xryv ravrrjv
the man who advanced this opinion Th. 8, 68. TO. Se'oi/ra the
duties, etc.
651. Participle as a Predicate Adjective. The participle,
like any other adjective, may stand in the predicate with
a copula ( 307): as cure yap Opacrvs OVT ovv Tr/ooSetVa?
dpi for I am neither bold nor timorous S. 0. T. 90. Many
other examples are to be seen in the mass of periphrastic
forms in the perfect system ( 226; 227; 221, 1; 230;
536).
B. THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE
652. The participle may serve to define the circum-
stances under which an action takes place : as Trpo? 8e
/SacrtXea Tre/jLTrwv rj^iov sending to the king he demanded
Xn. A. 1, 1, 8. o-f XXe'fa? crTpdrevfjia eTroXidptcei MiX^ro^
collecting an army he besieged Miletus Xn. A. 1, 1, 7.
rot? o-TpaT^yol^ raOra e'Sofe TO
326 THE PARTICIPLE
avvayayelv when the generals heard this, they decided to
marshal their forces Xn. A. 4, 4, 19.
653. In Greek circumstantial participles are many times
as frequent as in English, and very often they cannot be
properly translated by a corresponding English participle;
usually they are best rendered by an English clause or
phrase expressing time, means, manner, cause, purpose,
condition, concession, or merely an attendant circumstance,
as best accords with the Greek context : thus
1. Time. aicovads ravra e'Xefez/ when he had heard this,
he said Xn. A. 1, 7, 6. en irals wv while still a boy Xn.
A. 1, 9, 2 (see also 655).
2. Means. \r)6fjLevoi ^WCTL they live by plundering
Xn. Cy. 3, 2, 25.
3. Manner. 7raptf\avvov reray fievoi they marched by
in order Xn. A. 1, 2, 16. (Cf. also 655, 1.)
4. Cause. j) MTTJP vTrrjp^e TO* Kvpy <f>i\ov(ra avrov
fjia\\ov f) TOV /BacnXevovra 'Apra^ep^rjv Cyrus' 1 mother took
his side, because she loved him more than she did the king
Artaxerxes Xn. A. 1, 1, 4. rj%(ov aSeXc^o? wv avrov he
demanded on the ground that he was his brother Xn. A. 1,
1, 8. (Cf. also 655, 1 and 656, 1.)
5. Purpose. To express purpose the future participle
is regularly^used, but the present is sometimes found (cf.
524): thus irep-tyai &e KOI 7rpo/caTa\r)tyoiJievovs ra a/cpa
to send men to occupy the heights in advance Xn. A. 1, 3, 14.
amo-ravro ot /JLCV . . . Xefo^re? a eyiyvcoafcov, 01 Be . . . eTTi-
Bei/cvvvres old eirj f) cnropid some arose to tell what they
thought, and others (with the purpose of) pointing out what
the difficulty was Xn. A. 1, 3, 13. (Cf. also 656, 3.)
6. Condition. ovBe ^p^ara JJLGV \afJi(Sdv(DV 8ia\eyo/jLai,
pr] Xafjifidvcov 8' ov moreover, I do not converse on condition
THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 327
of receiving money, and refrain from conversation if I receive
none PL Ap. 33 a.
Observe that if a participle implying a condition is
negatived, fjnj is always used ( 431, 1).
7. Concession {"although"). fjieaov TWV eavrov e^cov
rov Kvpov eucovv/jLov e^co r}v although he commanded the
center of his own forces, he was beyond Cyrus' left wing
Xn. A. 1, 8, 13. ovSev VTT e/uoO aSucovnevos . . . /ca#<w?
eVotet? TTJV eprjv %a)pdv although you were in nowise wronged
by me, you did damage to my land Xn. A. 1, 6, 7. (Cf.
also 655, 1 and 656, 2.)
8. Any Attendant Circumstance. cruXXefa? a-rpdrev^a
7ro\i6p/cei M.L\rjrov having collected an army he laid siege
to Miletus Xn. A. 1, 1, 7. Such participles are often best
rendered in Engl ish by a coordinate verb : as tcaTaTnjSijo-ds
curb rov apparos rbv Ocopd/ca eveSv he leapt down from his
chariot, and put on his breastplate Xn. A. 1, 8, 3.
NOTE 1. It is important to remember that these relations (of
time, manner, etc., 653, 1-8) are not expressed by the participle,
but only implied by the context. Often the same participle may be
rendered in English in several different ways. Thus eTroAe/xet IK
Xeppovr/crou op/xoj/xevos (lie waged war, using the Chersonese as a base
of operations Xn. A. 1, 1, 9), taken by itself, might be rendered he waged
war while using the Chersonese, eto. (time, 653, 1) or he waged war by
using the Chersonese, etc. (means, 653, 2) or he waged war, thus using,
etc. (manner, 653, 3) or he was enabled to wage war because he used,
etc. (cause, 653, 4), or he waged war with the idea of using, etc.
(purpose, 653, 5), or he did wage war, if he used, etc. (condition,
653, 6), or he waged war although he used, etc. (concession, 653, 7),
or he waged war with the Chersonese as a base of operations (attendant
circumstance, 653, 8) ; but in every case that form .of English
translation should be chosen which best suits the Greek context.
NOTE 2. Some idiomatic uses of the circumstantial participle are
often best rendered by a different idiom in English. Thus, dp^o/xevo?
(lit. beginning} is often best rendered at first, in the beginning, reAevroiv
328 THE PARTICIPLE
(lit. ending} finally, l^oov (lit. holding on) persistently, dvwrds (lit. having
completed) quickly, Oappwv boldly, Aa0wv (lit. escaping notice) secretly,
Xaipwv (lit. rejoicing) with impunity, /cAcuW (lit. weeping) to one's sorrow,
<f>6dcrd<> (lit. anticipating) before. (Many of these are to be explained
as adjectives used with adverbial force, 425) : thus o?rep apxop-evos
eyto IXeyov as I said in the beginning PI. Ap. 24 a. avoty' dvvcrds make
haste and open Ar. Nub. 181.
NOTE 3. Participles like c^wi/ having, aycoi/ leading, <cpa>v carry-
ing, xpw/zevos using may often be rendered "with": as |X<DV
a thousand hopliies Xn. vl . 1, 2, 9. TTOLO. Swa/xei
with what force as allies Xn. ^4. 2, 5, 13.
NOTE 4. The phrases TL (o TL) traO^v (lit. having experienced
what 1 ?), and TI (o TL) fjua.6wv (lit. having learned what?), are best trans-
lated " what possessed you to . . . " (Trao-^w) or " what put it in your head
to . . . " (fjavOdvu), or loosely " why in the world": as TI 7ra06vT
what has possessed us to forget? A 313.
ADVERBS WITH THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE
654. The relations of time, manner, cause, etc., often
implied in the circumstantial participle ( 653), may be
made clearer (1) by means of adverbs modifying the prin-
cipal verb, or (2) they may be definitely stated by means
of adverbs modifying the participle itself.
655. Adverbs Modifying the Principal Verb. The ad-
verbs evOvs straightiuay, avri/ca immediately, apa at the
same time, rore (evravOa) then, rj&rj already, elra then,
GTreira thereupon, and a few others, modifying the princi-
pal verb, often serve to make clearer a temporal relation
implied in the participle. Cf. 653, 1. (The first four
are often more closely connected in sense with the partici-
ple than with the principal verb) : thus TO) Seftoi /cepd rcov
'A0r)vaia)i> evOvs aTro^e^Tj/con . . . erre/ceiVTO they attacked
the right wing of the Athenians as soon as it was disem-
barked (lit. when the right icing was disembarked, they
straightway attacked i) Th. 4, 43. e^d^ovro a pa Tropevo-
THE CIRCUMSTANTIAL PARTICIPLE 329
they fought and marched at the same time Xn. A. 6, 3,
5. 7roXXa^oO Bij fjie eVecr^e \eyovra fjiera^v it often checked
me in the very act of speaking PL Ap. 40 b. e/ceXevaev
avrov o-vvSiafldvTa e Tret TO. OUTCO? a7ra\\dTTea6ai he advised
him to cross with the rest, and then withdraw Xn. A. 7, 1, 4.
1. In like manner O/AO)? nevertheless, % otmw? thus, eZra, or
eVetra, with the principal verb, may help a participle
implying concession ( 653, 7), o#ro>? may help a partici-
ple implying manner ( 653, 3), and ovrcos or Sia ravra
(TOUTO) may help a participle implying cause ( 653, 4) :
as cLTreipoi oire? avrwv . . . o/Lto)? eYoX/irjo-are . . . levai
t? aurou? although you knew nothing about them, yet you
dared to go against them Xn. A. 3, 2, 16. VO/JLICOV a/jieivovs
fcal tcpeiTTOV? TroXXwy ftapfBdpwv v^ta? elvai, Sia TOVTO Trpoa-
e\afSov because I thought you better and braver than many
barbarians (for this reason) I enlisted you Xn. A. 1, 7, 3.
656. Adverbs Modifying the Participle. The following
adverbs modify the participle itself :
1. The adverb are (also olov, ola) inasmuch as ( 441 a)
gives the participle a causal meaning : thus o Se Kvpos are
TTCU? &) v . . . TjSero TTJ a-ro\y and Cyrus, inasmuch as he was
a child, was pleased with the equipment Xn. Cy. 1, 3, 3.
are 6ea)fjLeva)v r&v eraipwv inasmuch as their companions
were looking on Xn. A. 4, 8, 28.
2. Kafcep although (sometimes also KCLI or KOI ravra,
312 note) gives the participle a concessive meaning : thus
656, 1 a. In Herodotus wVre is used with participles meaning inasmuch
cts (like Attic #re): as wore 8 ravra vo^ifav but inasmuch as he believed
this Hdt. 1, 8.
656, 2 a. In Homer (and sometimes in tragedy) KO.L and irep (cf. 71
note) are often separated by the participle or other emphatic word : as ot
5/caJ &xv6fjievoi TT e p eir' avr^ i)5ti ye\a<r<rai> but they, though troubled,
laughed joyously at him B 270 ; sometimes Trep alone means although : as
ep although distressed K 174.
330 THE PARTICIPLE
/cal rore Trpocrefcvvrjcrav tcaiTrep etSore? on evrt Odvarov dyoiro
even then they did homage to him, although they knew that
he was being led to death Xn. A. 1, 6, 10.
3. 'fl? shows that the participle states the reasons of
somebody else without implicating the speaker or writer.
(The context sometimes shows that the reason is only
pretended) : thus Upo^evov . . . e/ceXevcre . . . Trapayeve'crOai,,
ft)? et? Ilto-tSa? /3ov\6fjievos o-TpareveaOai, <w? TT pay fjiara
Trape^ovTtDv TWV YllaiSwv rfj eavrov %ft)/?a he bade JProxenus
join him, on the (pretended) ground that he wished to
undertake an expedition against the Pisidians, since the
Pisidians (as he said) were causing trouble for his territory
Xn. A. 1, 1, 11. ravrrjv TTJV %(i)pav eTrerpe^re StapTrdcrai
rot? "E\\r](riv &)? 7ro\6fjiLdv ovaav this country he turned over
to the G-reeks to plunder since (in his opinion) it tvas hos-
tile Xn. A. 1, 2, 19. av\\a/jL/3dvei, Kvpov &)? cnroicTevwv
he arrested Cyrus with the (avowed) intention of putting
him to death Xn. A. 1, 1, 3.
NOTE. oxrTrep as, just as, with the participle (as elsewhere) merely
denotes comparison : as KaraKet/xc^a wcnrep e6v rjorv^av ayetv we lie
inactive as though it were possible to take our ease Xn. A. 3, 1, 14.
wcrTrcp TraAiv Tov OToAov Kvpov 7r o Lov fjiiv ov as if Cyrus were moving
backwards on his expedition Xn. A. 1, 3, 16. Cf. aio-Trep op-yfj eWAewe
he ordered, just as if in anger Xn. A. 1, 5, 8.
GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE
657. Genitive Absolute. A substantive (noun or pro-
noun) and modifying participle having no grammatical
656, 3 a. In Homer o>'s re, ws el, and ws e? re are used with the parti-
ciple with much the same meaning as wcnrep (or ws) in Attic: thus KipK-rj
tirrjia ws re Kra^evai /m.e vea Ivu v I sprang upon Circe as if I meant to
slay her K 322. 6\o(f>vp6[ji.evoi ws et davarbitde Klovra. bewcdling him as
though he were going to death 327.
GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE 331
connection with the rest of the sentence stand in the
Genitive Absolute ( 369): as aveftri errl ra oprj ovSevos
KcoXvovros he went up on the mountains, no one hindering
Xn. A. 1, 2, 22. o-Treia-a^evov Kvpov erria-reve /JirjSev
av Trapa ra? aTrovbas TraOelv when Cyrus made a treaty [an
enemy] was confident that he should experience nothing con-
trary to its terms Xn. A. 1, 9, 8.
1. The genitive absolute can seldom be rendered in
English by a corresponding nominative absolute ; usually
it must be translated like other circumstantial participles
( 653, 1-8) by some phrase or clause which best accords
with the Greek context: as ave/Brj . . . ovSevos KCO\V-
ovros he went up, since no one hindered, or without opposi-
tion Xn. A. 1, 2, 22. /ca/eco? yap TWV rj/jLerepcov
Trdvres ovrot . . . /3dp/3apoi 7ro\e/jLLO)Tpoi
for if our mutual relations are unpleasant, all these barba-
rians will be more hostile to us Xn. A. 1, 5, 16. ovBe
VTWV 7repdv, ovftels a
ye<f>vpd<; moreover, though there be many
on the opposite bank, not a single soul will be able to come to
their aid if the bridge is destroyed Xn. A. 2, 4, 20.
NOTE 1. Substantive not Expressed. The substantive in the
genitive absolute sometimes is not expressed when it can be easily
supplied from the context (cf. 305) : as IvrevOtv Trpo'Lovrwv e^>at-
vf.ro ix vr ] wTraiv as they (i.e. the Greeks) were proceeding from that place,
there appeared the tracks of horses Xn. A. 1, 6, 1. ovrw 8' e^dvrwi/ since
(the above-mentioned) things are so Xn. A. 3, 2, 10. rWros while it
was raining (cf. 305) Xn. Hell. 1, 1, 16.
NOTE 2. The genitive absolute is sometimes employed when its
use is not strictly logical: as IK Se TOVTOV Oarrov TrpotovTcov . . .
Bpofjios lyivtro rots (TTpartwrat? thereupon, as the soldiers advanced
faster and faster, they fell to running Xn. A. 1,2, 17. 8iaj8e/?^KOT05
r)8rj IlepiKAe'ous . . . rjyytXOr) avrw . . . when Pericles had already
crossed over, the news was brought to him Th. 1, 114 (cf. also 661,
note 4) .
332 THE PARTICIPLE
658. Accusative Absolute. The participle of an imper-
sonal verb having no grammatical connection with the
main construction of the sentence stands in the Accusa-
tive Absolute ( 343) : as a\\a ri Srj, fyia? ef ov (nroKeaai,
ou/c eVt TOVTO 7J\Oo/jLev but why, when it was in our power to
destroy you, did we not proceed to do so? Xn. A. 2, 5, 22.
otrii/e? are ov^l eaa)aa/jiev ouBe crv aavrov, olov re ov /cal
Svvarov for we did not save you, nor did you save yourself ,
although it was possible and practicable PL Grit. 46 a.
SrjXov yap OTL olcrOa, peXov ye aoi for of course you know,
since it is a matter of interest to you PI. Ap. 24 d.
NOTE. After w? or wo-Trep ( 656, 3, and note) the accusative
absolute is sometimes found where we should expect the genitive : thus
TOV<; wets 01 Trare/oes CITTO TCOI/ Trovrjpwv avOp<*)Tr<av eipyovo-w, ob? TYJV
fjilv ro>v xpr7<TTcov 6/u,iXi'dv acrKrjvw ovcrav rf)<; experts fathers keep their
sons away from base men with the idea that association with the good is a
training in virtue Xn. Mem. 1, 2, 20. Rarely without a preceding ws or
uxTTrep : as So^avraSe ravra but when this had been decided on Xn.
Hell. 3, 2, 19.
0. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE
659. The circumstantial participle sometimes forms an
essential part of the predicate, which, without it, would
hardly be complete. A participle so used is called Sup-
plementary. Verbs whose meaning is of a general nature
may take a supplementary participle to define a particular
thing to which their action relates.
The supplementary participle may belong either to the
subject or the object, as shown by its agreement ( 648).
I. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE NOT IN INDIRECT
DISCOURSE
660. The supplementary participle may be used with
words meaning begin, continue, endure, cease, happen, escape
THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE 333
notice, anticipate, and the like: ap^erai aTroXetVotxra it
[the soul] begins to leave Xn. Cy. 8, 7, 26. i^a^o^evoi,
biereXecrav they continued fighting (i.e. "fought continu-
ously") Xn. A. 4, 3, 2. ovjrore eTravd/jirjv rjnas fMev ol/crtpwv
I never ceased pitying ourselves Xn. A. 3, 1, 19.
NOTE. With some verbs, especially rvy^avw (poetic Ki>pa>) happen,
\avOdva) escape notice, <J>Odv(D anticipate, the supplementary participle
is often best rendered in English by a finite verb, while the finite
Greek verb is translated as an adverbial modifier: thus Trapcov eYvy-
Xave he was by chance present, or he happened to be present Xn. A. 1, 1, 2.
Tpe<o/xei/ov eA.av0a.vei/ avraJ TO crTpareiym ?Ae army was secretly sup-
ported for him (lit. escaped notice being supported) Xn. ^4. 1, 1, 9.
<f>@dvov(riv 7rt TO) a/cpo) yevo/xevot TOVS TToXe/Atov? //*e# reached the height
before the enemy (lit. ^e?/ anticipated the enemy in reaching the height)
Xn. !4. 3, 4, 49. So likewise S>;Aos rjv dvtco/xevos 7<e w;as evidently dis-
turbed Xn. A. 1,2, 11 (634).
1. Verbs expressing emotion (vexation, anger, trouble,
shame, joy, displeasure, or disgust, and the like) may be
supplemented by a participle implying the cause ( 653, 4) :
thus TJSofjLai . . . a/covcov aov (fypovLfuovs \dyovs I am pleased
at hearing sensible remarks from you Xn. A. 2, 5, 16.
eXe^^ofievoi fyOovro they were vexed at being exposed Xn.
Mem. 1, 2, 47. oure vvv [AOL /Ltera/^eXet oimw? aTroXoyrjcra-
fjievw and I do not now repent of having made (i.e. " because
I made ") such a defense PL Ap. 38 e. /cal rovro pev ov/c
alcryyvQiLai \eyo)v and I am not ashamed to say this Xn.
Cy. 5, 1, 21.
NOTE. With some of the verbs which take the supplementary
participle the infinitive may also be used, but commonly with a dif-
ference of meaning (cf. 661 note 3), the participle implying that
the action takes place, while the infinitive implies that it has not yet
taken place (and perhaps never will occur) : thus aio-^wo/xat (or
aiSoti/Aou) Xeywv / am ashamed to say (what I am saying),
Xc'yetv / am ashamed to say (and so shall not say).
334 THE PARTICIPLE
II. THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE
661. When the participle is used in indirect discourse
(after words meaning know, perceive, hear, remember, for-
get, appear, announce, etc., 669, 3) each tense represents
the same tense of the indicative or optative of the direct
discourse ( 551), the present representing also the imper-
fect indicative, and the perfect the pluperfect indicative.
If av was used in the direct discourse, it is retained also
in the indirect ( 439).
(The participle may belong either to the subject or
object, as shown by its agreement, 648) : thus ov yap
jjSecrav avrbv TeOvrj/cora for they did not know that he was
dead (i.e. reOvyicev) Xn. A. 1, 10, 16. -rJKovae Kvpov ev
KtXt/aa ovra he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (i.e. eVrt)
Xn. A. 1, 4, 5. 10-61 petrol avorjro^ wv know, however, that
you are a fool (i.e. avdrjros eZ) Xn. A. 2, 1, 13. avrw Kvpov
eTTLarparevovTa TT^WTO? tfyyeiXa I was the first to announce
to him that Cyrus was marching against him (i.e. eTrio-rpa-
reuet) Xn. A. 2, 3, 19. eTriffovXevwv r^uv (fravepds eanv
he is plainly plotting against us (i.e. eTnftov\evei, cf. 634)
Xn. A. 3, 2, 20. evpLo-fcco Se &8e av yivdfjieva ravra el
Xa/3ot? rrjv e/jirjv a/cevrjv I find that this would thus come to
pass if you should take my garments (i.e. JLVOITO av) Hdt.
7, 15. (Other examples in 551 and 671.)
NOTE 1. The participle in indirect discourse is plainly, in origin,
a circumstantial participle. Thus such a sentence as eyvwv yap /xtv
. . . oicovoi/ edvra/br / knew him being, as he was, a bird of omen o532
(in which //.u/ is the object of eyi/an/, and edvra a circumstantial parti-
ciple agreeing with /xiv), soon came to be felt to mean "I knew the
fact of his being (i.e. that he was) a bird of omen." With this meaning
established it is but a slight step to such expressions as T^CIS dSwaroc
opcu/xev ovre? we see that we are unable ("being unable, we see that
fact"), where the participle may truly be said to represent e'oyxeV.
THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 335
Hence it cannot always be determined with certainty whether a
participle is, or is not, in indirect discourse, but the context will
usually decide. With some verbs (d/couoo hear, irvvOavofuu, perceive)
the participle in indirect discourse is regularly in the accusative, while
the ordinary participle with these verbs stands in the genitive : as ws
1-rrvOovTO rfjs IIuAov /caretAr;/x/Xvr;s when they heard of the capture of
Pylus Th. 4, 6. on TTU&HTO ... TO HXv^vpLov . . . eaAeoKOs that
he had heard that Plemmyrium had been captured Th. 7, 31.
NOTE 2. Construction with <rvvoi8a. When o-w/otSa or crvyyi-
yvajo-Kco be conscious is used with a reflexive pronoun the participle may
be either nominative, agreeing with the subject, or dative, agreeing
with the reflexive pronoun : as eyw yap Sr) oure /xeya ovre o-fjiiKpov
u?ot&a e/zavru) ao^o? tov for I am not conscious to nit/self of being wise
in either great or small degree PL Ap. 21 b. e/xavra) yap vvrj$r] ouScv
eTTio-Ta/xei/a) for I was conscious to myself of possessing no knowledge
PI. Ap. 22 d."
NOTE 3. Infinitive instead of Participle. Some of the verbs which
regularly have the participle in indirect discourse ( 661) are used also
with the infinitive with little, if any, difference of meaning (cf. 660, 1
note) : as d/couco Se /cat aAAa. eOvrj TroAAa rotaOra etvac / hear that there
are also many other such nations Xn. A. 2, 5, 13. ^acVo/xai appear with
the participle usually means to appear to be (what one is), and with
the infinitive to appear to be (what one perhaps is not) : as ewoos
e<aiWro ewv he icas plainly well-disposed Hdt. 7, 173. /cAateiv e^atVero
he appeared to be weeping (but really was not) Xn. Sym. 1, 15.
(But when with these verbs an object infinitive ( 638) is used, the
meaning is of course different (cf. 660, 1, note) as fj.dOov e/x/xei/at
tcr8\6<s I have learned to be brace Z 444. p.e(j.vr)aOu> avrjp dya$os eZVat
let him remember to be a brave man Xn. A. 3, 2, 39.)
NOTE 4. a>s with the Participle in Indirect Discourse. With the
participle in indirect discourse o>? as may be used with the same mean-
ing as with any circumstantial participle ( 656, 3), but it is often hard
to render in English: thus SfjXos r)v Kvpos ws o-TrevScov Cyrus made
it evident that he was in haste Xn. A. 1, 5, 9 (but 8*7X05 rjv crTreuoW
was evidently in haste). So the genitive absolute with o>s is sometimes
used as a practical equivalent of the participle in indirect discourse
(sometimes even with verbs which could not take such a participle,
cf. 657, note 2) : as o>s TroXe/zov OVTOS Trap* v/uun/ aTrayyeAoi; shall I
report from you (on the assumption) that there is war? Xn. A. 2, 1, 21.
336 THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES
o)S e/xov ovv IOVTOS 07777 av KOLL v/xets, OVTO> rrjv yvw/JLrjv X T ( on ^e
assumption) that I am going wherever you go you can make up your minds
(i.e " be sure that I am going wherever you go ") Xn. A. 1, 3, 6.
662. " Av with the Participle. The adverb av may be
used with the participle, not in indirect discourse, to give
it a potential meaning (cf. 436): thus ew Be TO TroXto-aa
av yevduevov OUK eftovXovro arparoTreSeveo-OaL but the
soldiers were unwilling to encamp on ground which might
be made a city (i.e. o av yevoiro 563) Xn. A. 6, 4, 7.
av cKfreOels . . . TT/ooetXero jjLaXXov rot? vo/jiois
aTroBavelv although he might easily have been ac-
quitted, he preferred to abide by the laws and be put to death
(i.e. afyeQj) av, 565) Xn. Mem. 4, 4, 4. alrel avrov ew
fei/ow . . . a>9 ovrco Trepiyevduevos av TO>V
he asked him for two thousand mercenaries
on the ground that he could thus get the better of his oppo-
nents Xn. A. 1, 1, 10.
THE VERBAL ADJECTIVES
THE VERBAL IN -reo?
663. The verbal adjective in -reo?, -red, -reov ( 235),
is passive in meaning, and expresses necessity (like the
Latin gerundive). It is used with a copula, dpi ( 307),
in either a personal or an impersonal construction.
NOTE. The copula (ecrrt, eicri) is often omitted ( 308).
664. Personal Construction. In the personal construc-
tion the verbal agrees with the subject in gender, number,
and case : as Trora/xo? 8' el uev rt? /cal a'XAo? apa fjfuv earn,
ovtc olSa ivhether we must cross any other river I
THE VERBAL IN -TO? 337
do not know Xn. A. 2, 4, 6. ox^eX^rea crot 77 Tro'Xt?
must be aided by you Xn. Mem. 3, 6, 3.
665. Impersonal Construction. In the impersonal con-
struction (which is the more common) the verbal stands
in the nominative neuter (usually singular, but sometimes
plural), and takes an object (or cognate accusative) in the
same case which would follow any other form of the same
verb : thus rrjv ir6\iv ox^eX^reoz/ the State must be aided
Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 28. TWV /Boater) par cov eTri/neXrjTeov the
flocks and herds must be taken care of Xn. Mem. 2, 1, 28.
Tropevre'ov 8' fj^lv TOU? TT^COTOU? crraO /xou? <w? av Swca/jLeOa
/jLatcporaTovs we must make the first days'' marches as long as
we can Xn. A. 2, 2, 12. ou? ov TrapaSorea rot? *A.6r)vafois
eVrtV who must not be surrendered to the Athenians Th. 1, 86.
NOTE. Observe that verbals of intransitive verbs can be used in
the impersonal construction only.
666. Agent with Verbals in -TGOS. The agent (i.e. the
person on whom the necessity rests) with verbals in -reo?
stands regularly in the dative case ( 380).
NOTE. The accusative of the agent is sometimes found with the
impersonal construction ( 6G5). It seems to denote rather the person
to whom the necessity extends rather than on whom it rests : as ovStvl
rpOTTcu (frajjitv Koj/Ta? aftiKrjTeov eti/at ; do we say that it in no way
devolves on us to do wrong willingly ? PL Crit. 49 a.
THE VERBAL IN -TO?
667. The verbal adjective in -TO'?, -TrJ, -rov ( 235, 2),
denotes both what has been done and (more often) what
m.ay be done : as ap ovv jBiwrov rtfuv eari ; is life endurable
for us? PL Crit. 47 e.
Many verbals in -TO? have acquired an independent
existence as adjectives, as Oav^aaro^ (admired, admirable)
wonderful.
BABBITT'S OR. GRAM. 22
338 INDIRECT DISCOURSE
INDIRECT DISCOURSE
{Oratio Obliqua)
668. A direct quotation repeats the exact words of the
speaker : as Kal ravr, e$r], TTOL^O-CD " This, too, I will do"
said he; TI TCQI^CTW^V, Xeyere " What shall we do ? " you say.
An indirect quotation adapts the words of the speaker to
the construction of the sentence in which they stand : as
e'^?; ical ravra TroirjcreLv he said that he would do this also,
o TI TroitfcraiTe you asked what you should do.
669. Indirect discourse is introduced by some word or
expression meaning say, know, think, perceive, and the like
(verba sentiendi et declarandi).
1. Of the three common verbs meaning say, when used
to introduce indirect discourse
<j>r)iiC is followed by the infinitive,
elirov is followed by on or <w? with a finite verb,
\<yo) admits either construction, but in the active voice
it is more often followed by on or o>? and a finite
verb.
NOTE. When earov is used with the infinitive it regularly means
command, order, advise: thus eiTre . . . o-TpaTrjyovs fj.lv e
he advised them to choose other generals Xn. A. 1, 3, 14.
2. Most verbs meaning think or believe (i/o/u^co,
fjyovpai, SOKCO seem, and the like) are followed by the
infinitive.
3. Most verbs meaning knoiv, perceive, hear (oZSa, alcrdd-
afcova), also ayye\\(o announce, 8fj\ds eljju be evident,
669, 1 a. Homer sometimes uses simple 6' (Attic 6'rt) meaning that.
b. In poetry ovveKa and odotveKa (lit. wherefore') are sometimes used
to mean that.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE GENERAL PRINCIPLES 339
and the like) are more frequently followed by the parti-
ciple ( 661), but any of them may take on or o>? with a
finite mode, arid some of them may take the infinitive
( 646) with little, if any, difference of meaning (cf.
roughly in English " I know of its being good," " I know
that it is good," " I know it to be good ").
For the future infinitive after verbs of promising, hoping,
and the like, see 549, 2.
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF INDIRECT
DISCOURSE
670. In changing from direct to indirect discourse, the
MODE may be changed, but not the TENSE.
1. Verbs may be changed to the optative only after a
secondary tense ( 517). Only a principal verb of the
direct discourse may be changed to the infinitive or parti-
ciple ( 671).
2. If the adverb av ( 436-439) was used in the direct
discourse, it is retained also in the indirect, except when
a dependent subjunctive with av is changed to the opta-
tive after a secondary tense ( 439).
3. The same negative (ou or ^77) which stood in the direct
discourse is retained in the indirect ( 431, 2).
PRINCIPLES OF INDIRECT DISCOURSE (IN
DETAIL)
THE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE
671. After a word which takes the infinitive or participle
( 669, 2-3) the principal verb in indirect discourse is
changed to the infinitive or participle of the same tense, the
present including also the imperfect, and the perfect the
340 INDIRECT DISCOURSE
pluperfect (see 551). If av was used in the direct dis-
course, it is retained also in the indirect: thus airievai
(frrjcriv he says he is going away (i.e. a Tret /At lam going away)
Xn. A. 2, 2, 1. e<f)7) ftovXeaBai e\6elv lie said that he
wanted to go (i.e. ySouXo/xat e\6elv I want to go Xn. A. 1,
3, 20. ov fJie^vriaecrOai ae fyaa-iv they say you will not
remember (i.e. ov pe^v^o-p you will not remember) Xn. A.
1, 7, 5. ou jap rjSea-av avrov reOvij/cdra for they did not
know that he was dead (i.e. reOvrj/cev he is dead) Xn. A.
1, 10, 16. (ivv vfjLiv fjiev av ol/jiai elvai rt/uo<? in your com-
pany I think I should be honored (i.e. eirjv av I should be)
Xn. A. 1, 3, 6. opco Se KOI aol TOVTCOV Seijcrov and I see
that you, too, will have need of these (i.e. Serjcrei there will
be need) Xn. Mem. 2, 6, 29.
NOTE. Sometimes a relative or temporal clause is felt to be of
equal importance with the principal clause, and so has the infinitive
where we might expect a finite mode : as ... ort TroAAots <f>airj 'AptaTos
ivaL Ilepous cavrov ySeXriovs, ov<s OVK av avaa-\(rOaL avrov (3a(ri-
Aewvro? that Ariaeus said there were many Persians better than himself,
who would not endure his being king Xn. A. 2, 2, 1.
672. After a primary tense ( 517) all verbs of indi-
rect discourse, unless changed to the infinitive or partici-
ple (according to 671), are retained (with change of
person, if necessary) in the mode and tense of the direct
discourse : thus Xeyet 5' 0)5 vlSpiarrj^ el/ju he says that I am
an insolent person (i.e. v/3/oto-r^? el you are an insolent per-
son} Lys. 24, 15. OVK olSa o TI av TIS xpijo-airo avrols
I don't know what use anybody could make of them (i.e. TI
av rt? xptfa-airo what use could anybody make?) Xn. A.
3, 1, 40. /3ov\evofjiai ye OTTCOS ere aTro&pw I am planning
how I can run away from you (i.e. TTW? ore aTroSpw ; how
shall I run away, deliberative subjunctive, 577) Xn. Cy.
1, 4, 13.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE OPTATIVE 341
OPTATIVE
673. After a secondary tense ( 517) any indicative not
changed to the infinitive or participle ( 671), or any sub-
junctive of the direct discourse, may be changed to opta-
tive of the same tense, unless the change would cause
ambiguity : thus (OPTATIVE FOR THE INDICATIVE) aTrtjy-
ye\\ev on a-TrevBoiro he announced that he made a truce
(i.e. crTre'vBofjLai, I make a truce) Xn. A. 2, 3, 9. rot? Be
vTro^Ca fjiev rjv on a jot, TT/OO? /3a<rtXea the others had a suspi-
cion that he was leading them against the King (i.e. ayei, is
leading) Xn. A. 1, 3, 21. eXeyev on rj 6809 e trot TO Trpbs
/3acn\ed peyav he said that the advance would be against
the great King (i.e. ecrrai will be) Xn. A. 1, 4, 11. elirev
on Ae'ftTTTTOZ' pev ov/c eTraivot'rj el ravra TreTrotT/tfw? etrj
he said that lie did not approve Dexippus if he had done this
(i.e. OVK eTraivS), el TreTroirjice I do not approve if he has
done this) Xn. A. 6, 6, 25.
OPTATIVE FOR A DEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE (av dis-
appearing, 670, 2) ^jelro yap aTrav'Troi^o-eiv avrbv, el rt?
apyvpLov SiSoirj for he thought that [Theognis~\ would do
anything, if anybody offered him money (i.e. eav rt? SiSa if
anybody offers) Lys. 12, 14. w/jLoaev *Ayecn\dq) el airei-
eft)? e\0oiev ou? ire^^reie TT/DO? ySacrtXea ayye\ovs,
daL, /c.r.X. he sivore to Agesilaus that if he would
make a truce until the messengers that he should send to the
King should arrive, he would bring it about, etc. (i.e. eav
o-Treio-r) ea>9 av e\0a)cri,v 01)5 av Tre^-^ra) if you will make
a truce until the messengers that I send arrive) Xn. Ages.
1, 10.
673 a. In Homer the use of the optative in indirect discourse is
practically unknown, except sometimes in indirect questions. See
676 a.
342 INDIRECT DISCOURSE
Indirect Questions. OPTATIVE FOR THE INDICATIVE.
jjpero . . . el rt? e'/noO ei-rj o-ocfxorepos lie, asked whether there
was anybody wiser than I (i.e. eVrt -m is there anybody?)
PL Ap. 21 a. rfpayrrjcrev el TjBrj aTTOKe/cpifjievoi, elev he
asked if they had already given their answer (i.e. cnroice-
KpLaOe have you given your answer?) Xn. A. 2, 1, 15.
OPTATIVE FOR THE (DELIBERATIVE) SUBJUNCTIVE.
e/3ov\evTO . . . el ire^Troiev nvas rj Trdvres toiev he de-
liberated 'whether they should send some, or whether all should
go (i.e. Trdrepov ire/jiTrcj/jLev . . . rj imfjiev had we better
send or go?) Xn. A. 1, 10, 5.
674. The change to the optative mode after a secondary
tense ( 673) is never obligatory, and, for the sake of
vividness, an indirect quotation of this sort can always
be expressed in the mode employed by the original speaker.
Not infrequently both forms of quotation are found in
the same sentence : as ovroi eXeyov on Kpo? /juev reOvrjicev,
'A/otato? Be Trecfrevycos ev TO) araOfjia) etrj these said that Cyrus
was dead, and that Ariaeus had fled, and was at the halting
place Xn. A. 2, 1, 3.
675. In order to avoid ambiguity ( 673), the follow-
ing forms of expression are not changed to the optative
after a secondary tense :
1. The imperfect and pluperfect indicative are seldom
changed to the optative in indirect discourse, since if they
were changed to the present and perfect optative respec-
tively, it could not be told that they did not represent
the present or perfect indicative or subjunctive of the
direct discourse: thus el%e <yap \eyeiv teal on /AOVOI rwv
'EXX^o)^ ftacriXei crvvefJid'^ovTO ev TlXaratat?, ical on
vcrrepov ovBeTrcoTrore o-rparevcraLvro ejrl (3acri\ed for he teas
able to say that they alone of the Greeks had fought on the
INDIRECT DISCOURSE OPTATIVE 343
side of the King at Plataeae, and that never since then had
they made a hostile move against him (observe that the
imperfect, crvve^d^ovro for avvefia^ojjLeda of the direct
discourse, remains unchanged, while the aorist, o-rparev-
aaivro for earparevcrdiJieOa, is changed to the optative)
Xn. Hell. 7, 1, 34.
NOTE. Rarely, when no possible ambiguity could arise, an imper-
fect indicative is changed to the present optative ( 673) : as eXeyov
on KartSoiei/ orparev/Aa, KM, vvKTwp TroXAa Trvpa. <CU'VOITO they said that
they had caught sight of an army, and that at night many watchfires had
been visible (i.e. Kari8o/xi/ we caught sight of, aorist, and e</>cuVero were
visible, imperfect) Xn. A. 4, 4, 9. Still more rare is the use of the
perfect optative to represent the pluperfect indicative.
2, The potential indicative with av ( 565) cannot
be changed to the optative in indirect discourse, since then
it could not be distinguished from the potential optative
( 563) : as aTreXoyovvro ? ov/c av TTOTC ovrco /jicopoi, r^aav
. . . el y 8 e a a v they said in their defense that they should
never have been so foolish if they had known (i.e. ov/c av
rjfjiev, el rjo-fjiev we should not have been, if we had known,
606 ; whereas OVK av elev, el el&eiev would represent ov/c
av eluev, el elSel/jiev we should not be, if we should know,
605) Xn. ffell. 5, 4, 22.
3. The aorist indicative in a subordinate clause is not
changed in indirect discourse, since if it were changed
to the aorist optative, the optative might be thought to
represent an aorist subjunctive of the direct discourse :
thus e\e*yov <w? 6 lEievotywv OI%OITO co? ^evOijv ... a
vTrea^ero avrw \rj^o/jLevo<; they said that Xenophon had
gone to Seuthes to receive what he had promised him (the
optative vTroo-^oLro would mean ivhat he might promise him,
representing a av vTroo-^rjrai, ( 673) of the direct dis-
course) Xn. A. 7, 7, 55.
344 INDIRECT DISCOURSE
676. Inserted Statements of Fact. Statements or expla-
nations of fact in the indicative mode may be inserted by
the writer, even though the rest of the sentence stands in
indirect discourse : as e/ceXevae GVV avrw arpareveo-Oai, VTTO-
o-^o'/nez'o? avrois, el /caXco? /caraTTpa^eLev e$> d earparevero,
pi) TrpoaOev TravcrecrOai irplv, KT\. he bade them join his
expedition, promising them that if he should successfully
accomplish the object for which (as I say) he was making the
expedition, not to stop until, etc. Xn. A. 1, 2, 2. ev 7ro\\rj
&r) aTropia rja-av ol "EXX^i^e?, evvoov^evoi pev on eVt rat?
/3acrtA,e'a>? Qvpcus rjcrav the Grreeks were naturally in great
perplexity, reflecting on the fact that they were (as I say) at
the King's gates Xn. A. 3, 1, 2.
677. Implied Indirect Discourse. In Greek (as in
Latin) a clause expressing the thought of another person
may take the construction of indirect discourse (i.e. the
optative after a secondary tense) although not formally
introduced by any words of saying, thinking, or the like :
01 &' w/crlpov el d\(D(ToivTO others pitied them if they should
be captured (i.e. el dXaxrovrat, if they are going to be cap-
tured)Xn.A. 1, 4, 7. ear par ever a ^ev Be eV avrov o>9 . . .
aTTOKrevovwres, el Svvai/jieOa but we have proceeded against
him with the avowed intention of killing him if we could
(i.e. eav SwcD/jueOa if tve can) Xn. A. 3, 1, 17. (nrovbas
, eW a.7raj<ye\6eir] ra \e-)(devra they made a
676 a. In Homer, where the use of the optative in indirect discourse
after a secondary tense is practically unknown (except sometimes in in-
direct questions), facts are regularly stated from the point of view of the
speaker, and it is left to be inferred that they may have been at the same
time the thought of another: as ytyvuo-Kov 6 dij /ca/cot /t^Sero 5al/j.uv 1
knew some power was planning ill (Attic eytyvua-Kov 6'ri fcava /x^Sotro, or
/u^Sercu) 7 166. f?5ee yap Kara OV/JLOV d5e\0eoj' ws tiro veir o for he knew
in his heart full well how his brother was toiling B -409.
INDIRECT DISCOURSE SUMMARY 345
truce (which they agreed should last) until what had been
said should be reported (i.e. etw? av aTrayyeXdfj until it
is reported) Xn. Hell. 3, 2, 20.
It is on this principle that the optative is used in final
clauses dependent on a secondary tense ( 590-594).
SUMMARY OF THE USAGE OF INDIRECT
DISCOURSE
678. For the sake of completeness for reference a sum-
mary of the regular usages of indirect discourse is here
given:
OPTATIVE (after secondary tenses) l
IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE OF DIRECT DISCOURSE
f Pres. indie, (independent or dependent)
Pres. opt. may represent ! Pres. subj. w. Av (dependent)
I Pres. (interrog.) subj. (independent)
{Aorist indie, (independent)
Aorist subj. w. &v (dependent)
Aorist (interrog.) subj. (independent)
f Perf. indie, (independent or dependent)
Perf. opt. may represent -I Perf. subj. w. Av (dependent)
v Perf. (interrog.) subj. (independent)
Fut. opt. represents Fut. indie, (independent or dependent)
INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE
IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE OF DIRECT DISCOURSE
Pres. infin. or partic. - j Pres " indic " ( 5nde P endent ) or
I Imperf. indie, (independent)
Pres. infin. or partic. w. 4v = { Pres " &' w " *' (independent) or
I Imperf. indie, w. Av (independent)
1 Any optative with Av is unchanged from the direct discourse (in
which it was originally independent, 563) .
346 INDIRECT DISCOURSE SUMMARY
IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE Or DIRECT DISCOURSE
Aorist infin. or partic. = Aorist indie, (independent)
Aorist infin. or partic. w. to = { Aorist indic w - &v (independent) or
I Aorist opt. w. &v (independent)
Perf. infin. or partic. = { PerL indic ' (^dependent) or
I Pluperf. indie, (independent)
Perf. infin. or partic. w. d, = { Perf ' ^ w ' " (independent) or
C Pluperf. indie, w. &v (independent) J
Fut. infin. or partic. = Put. indie, (independent)
NOTE. The imperative is regularly represented in indirect dis-
course by the substantive infinitive ( 638) dependent on a word
meaning command, order, or the like: as r//ceiv TrapayyeAAet he bids
him come (i.e. TJKC come} Xn. A. 1,2, 1. Rarely can it be said that the
imperative is changed to the infinitive in indirect discourse : as IXeye
Oappeiv he told him not to be alarmed (i.e. Odppei don't be alarmed)
Xn. A. 1, 3, 8.
1 Rarely.
APPENDIX A
VERSIFICATION
679. Greek verse was dependent on the quantities
( 52-54) of the syllables, and not, like English, on
word-accent or on rhyme.
680. Kinds of Poetry. Greek poetry in general may
be grouped under two heads : (1) that which was recited
(Recitative), and (2) that which was sung (Lyric), but
it should always be remembered that recited poetry was
developed from poetry composed to be sung.
NOTE. The Doric of the Drama. The Lyric portions of the
Attic drama, out of regard for its Doric origin, were regularly com-
posed in a conventional Doric dialect, formed by writing a. for 77 in
all words in which the Attic rj represents an original d ( 15) : as
K\vov <<ovaj/, ZK\VOV Sc /?oai/
ra? Svaro.vov. E. Med. 131.
681. Metre ^erpov measure) is the measurement of
verse by feet, lines, strophes, etc.
682. In treating of metre it is customary and con-
venient to employ certain arbitrary signs as follows :
1. w indicates a short syllable (also called a mora, assumed to be
347
equal to ).
348 FEET
2. _ indicates a long syllable (= two morae, or J).
3. i (triseme) indicates a long syllable prolonged to equal three
morae (i.e. __ w or J e ).
4. i_i (tetraseme) indicates a long syllable prolonged to equal four
morae (i.e. or I).
5. > (irrational syllable) indicates a long syllable used in the place
where a short normally occurs.
6. ww indicates two short syllables used in the place where one
short normally occurs : thus _ ^w (cyclic dactyl) indi-
cates a dactyl used as an equivalent of a trochee _ w
( 705); so also ww _ (cyclic anapaest) indicates an
anapaest used in iambic rhythm. (These are also written
w w and \j w .)
7. | | short perpendicular lines are used to indicate the divisions
between the feet ( 683).
8. || indicates the divisions between cola ( 686).
9. A indicates a pause at the end of a verse equal to one mora (w).
10. 7\ indicates a pause at the end of a verse equal to two morae ( ).
(So also ^- indicates a pause of three morae, and ^ of
four morae.)
11. || standing below the line is used to indicate a caesura ( 690).
A comma ( , ) is sometimes used for the same purpose.
12. ^ is used to indicate a diaeresis ( 690).
13. I is used to indicate anacrusis ( 706).
FEET
683. A group of syllables having a fixed metrical form
is called a foot. The most common kinds of feet are the
following :
FEET OF THREE MORAE (f time)
Trochee __ w, J J^ XetTre
Iambus w _ ^J Xeyw
Tribrach w w w ^ Xeyere
FEET
349
Dactyl
Anapaest
Spondee
Cretic
Bacchms
FEET OF FOUR MORAE (f time)
JJ
FEET OF FIVE MORAE (f time)
JN
w __ JJJ
Aeyerco
FEET OF SIX MORAE (f time)
Ionic a minore w w JV^ J J
Ionic maiore w w J J J^ J^
Choriambus _ w w _
1. Many other kinds of feet J are mentioned by the
ancient grammarians, but they may all be explained as
variations of the forms already described (cf. 685).
684. Thesis and Arsis. That part of the foot on which
the ictus or rhythmical accent falls is called the Thesis ;
the rest of the foot is called the Arsis.
685. Substitution. In many kinds of verse two short
syllables (w w) may be substituted for a long (_), or a
long syllable may take the place of two short syllables.
NOTE. When a long syllable in the thesis is resolved into two
short ( 685), the ictus properly belongs to the two, but is usually
placed on the first.
1 For example: Proceleusmatic w w w wi First Paeon w w w
Fourth Paeon w w w __, Molossus _ _, etc.
350 THE VERSE
COLA
686. Colon. A group of feet (never more than six) is
called a Colon, or a Rhythmical Series.
1. A colon of two feet is called a Dipody, of three feet
a Tripody, of four feet a Tetrapody, of five feet a Pen-
tapody, of six feet a Hexapody.
2. But trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic rhythms are
measured not by single feet but by the dipody ; hence
four feet of such a rhythm form a Dimeter, six feet a
Trimeter, and eight feet a Tetrameter.
THE VERSE
687. The Verse. A verse is composed of one, two, or
even three cola ( 686), and is usually written and printed
as a single line.
688. Syllaba Anceps. The last syllable of any verse
may be counted as long or short, as the rhythm may
demand, without any regard to its actual quantity.
NOTE. In the metrical schemes given below the existence of the
syllaba anceps is taken for granted.
1. Hiatus ( 42) is allowed only at the end of a
verse (but cf. 2 a).
689. Catalexis. A verse in which the last foot is in-
complete is said to be Catalectic (tfaraX^/mtfo? stopping
short). A verse in which the last foot is complete is
called A catalectic.
1. A part or the whole of the last arsis is omitted in
catalexis. If the omitted arsis formed the last part of the
STROPHE AND SYSTEM 351
foot its place is filled by the pause (A, 682, 9-10); if it
formed the first part of the foot its place is filled by pro-
longing ( 682, 3-4) the thesis of the preceding foot : as
\v\L^-\ for | w _ w _ | .
690. Caesura and Diaeresis. A Caesura (lit. cutting)
occurs whenever a word ends inside a foot. A Diaeresis
occurs when the end of a word coincides with the end of
a foot.
1. The principal caesura or The Caesura is one which
marks also a break in the sense, and which occurs repeat-
edly at a fixed point in the verse.
NOTE. In antiquated language a caesura in the second foot is
sometimes called tritkemimercd, because it comes after three half-feet
(TpiO-rjfjiL-fjitpT/js of three half-portions), a caesura in the third foot
penthemimeral, etc.
For the Masculine and Feminine Caesuras see 701,
note.
STROPHE AND SYSTEM
691. Strophe. A group of lyric verses recurring in
fixed form is called a Strophe. An Antistrophe is a
corresponding strophe immediately following. Strophe
and Antistrophe are sometimes followed by an Epode
(not metrically corresponding).
692. System. Verses are sometimes arranged in a
system, in which the syllaba anceps and hiatus are allowed
only at the end. Such a system may be regarded as one
long verse. For examples see 696 ; 703, 2.
352
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS
RHYTHMS
693. Rhythms are named (trochaic, iambic, dactylic,
etc.) from their fundamental feet.
TROCHAIC RHYTHMS
694. Trochaic rhythms are usually measured by dipodies
( 686, 2) consisting of two trochees | z, \j _ ^ I, and they
admit the irrational syllable (>, 682, 5) in the second
foot of any dipody. Moreover two shorts may be sub-
stituted ( 685) for the long syllable of the trochee in
any foot except the final foot of the verse.
695. Trochaic Tetrameter. The most common trochaic
rhythm (used by the line) is the Trochaic Tetrameter
catalectic (consisting of two cola, 686). Its scheme
according to ( 694) is as follows :
^^ _A
as:
ts 8' 17 /xets e<ro/xe0a. 1 1 raAAa 8' ov Xe
#
yovo-' o/uw? x
^l w _A
dAXa fJLra/3ov\\.v(r6fjLcrOaL. \\TOVTO 8' ow /ca Xois
"Tell me not in | mournful numbers, # life is but an | empty dream."
NOTE. Rarely in proper names a cyclic dactyl (_ ^w, 682, 6) is
used in place of a trochee. More freedom of substitution is usual in
the first colon than in the second.
. I.T. 1232.
2 E. Or. 152G.
IAMBIC EHYTHMS 353
696. Trochaic rhythms are also found sometimes in
systems ( 692) ending in a catalectic dimeter ; as
Z-\j \j ./- \j \j
ravra /u,e
/ \j \j
VOW C^OI/TOS
TToAXo,
For lyric trochaic rhythms see 707, 2.
IAMBIC RHYTHMS
(Of. 706, note)
697. Iambic rhythms are usually measured by dipodies
( 686, 2) consisting of two iambi | w _ w _ I, and they
admit the irrational syllable (>, 682, 5) in the first foot
of any dipody. Moreover, two shorts may be substituted
( 685) for the long syllable of the iambus in any foot
except the final foot of the verse.
Iambic Trimeter. The most common iambic
rhythm (used by the line) is the iambic trimeter. The
iambic trimeter of tragedy is metrically much more strict
than that of comedy, and, although the irrational syllable
is frequent, the resolution of the long syllable ( 697) is
comparatively infrequent. In comedy, however, not only
are resolutions numerous, but an anapaest (cyclic, 682, 6)
may stand in place of the iambus in any foot except the
last, and the apparent dactyl (> 6 w) may stand in the
fifth foot as well as in the first and third.
The principal caesura usually comes in the third foot.
1 Ar. Ban. 534-6.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 23
354
IAMBIC RHYTHMS
The scheme of iambic trimeter (showing all possible
variations) is as follows:
W Z. W ^_
/
W /- W
w./
Tragic .
> 6 w
^> w w
>z
Comedy
allows also
WW _^- WW
WW -^- WW .
> w w
NOTE. Iu proper names the tragedians sometimes allow the cyclic
anapaest ( 682, 6) in other feet than the first.
Examples of iambic trimeter are :
( /
eA' 'Ap -yovs fj.rj SiajTTTacr&u o-/ca</>os
es at ai/ Kvaveas
Tragic
Comic
*O Zitv
> . w_
i/VKToiv ocrov
W J. W -
> WWW
w 7roAe/xe, TroA
AOJV
Which, like a woundjed snake, drags its | slow length along.
NOTE. The Choliambus, or "limping trimeter"
spondee instead of an iambus in the last foot.
has a
699. lajnbic Tetrameter Catalectic. The iambic tetram-
eter catalectic, consisting of two cola ( 686), is often
used in comedy. Its scheme
W |W_W II V^
#
1 E. Med. 1-2.
2 Ar. Nub. 2, 3, 6.
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS 355
admits the same variations as the iambic trimeter ( 698) :
thus
eyu> yap
\\/ O ' 3 V /%
raw jtxev Aoyos 06 airro TOUT
ev rotcrt </>poi/
Ticrraun on
w
_A
votjcra
#
s s s r
"A captain bold | of Halifax, # who lived in conn | try quarters."
1. Iambic rhythms are sometimes found in system
( 692). For lyric iambic rhythms see TOT, 2.
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS
700. The fundamental foot of dactylic rhythms is the
dactyl (_ w w), but the spondee ( ) may be substituted.
701. Dactylic Hexameter. The hexameter is the most
common dactylic rhythm. It contains six feet,. of which
the last is always a dactyl lacking the last syllable, _ ^ A
( 689). The fifth foot is usually a dactyl, but may be a
spondee, in which case the verse is called Spondaic. The
other feet may be either dactyls or spondees, but dactyls
predominate.
1. The principal caesura is usually in the third foot,
less often after the thesis in the fourth foot (in which
case there is often a corresponding caesura in the second
foot). A diaeresis at the end of the fourth foot (Bucolic
Diaeresis) is also very common.
NOTE. Masculine and Feminine Caesuras. A caesura immediately
following the long syllable of the ^es/s is called masculine , a caesura
between the two short syllables of the arsis is called feminine.
i Ar. Nub. 1038-9.
356
DACTYLIC RHYTHMS
2. The scheme of the dactylic hexameter is as follows
_00|Z.OO|Z.OO|.00|-^OOI.^.WA
Examples are :
a etSe,
. rj L
Movaa,
os /xaXa
TroXXa
TL7TT ttVT,
cuyio xoio At
OS TKO?
tAry Xov^as ;
. 3
8' a
a KOVO- a/xa
TOto-t yv
VTJ KLV.
avrap 'A
For the synizesis of ea> in the first example see 19, note 2 ; for the
shortening of JJLOL in the second see 52 a. Observe that the third
example is a spondaic line, and the fourth shows the bucolic diaeresis.
For explanations of some other peculiarities of the Homeric verse
see 2 a; 13 a; 22 a; 36 a; 44 a; 44, 2 a; 53, a, 'b; 54 a.
702. The Elegiac Distich. The Elegiac distich consists
of a dactylic hexameter followed by two catalectic dactylic
tripodies (which form the so-called pentameter).
The scheme entire is as follows :
._ 00 i JL
#
^Low | Z.OO I ^. \j
| v w I Z. A
/
NOTE. In the pentameter the end of the first tripody always
coincides with the end of a word, and neither hiatus ( 668, 1) nor
syllaba anceps ( 688) is allowed at this point. Observe also that the
second tripody does not admit spondees.
1. The Elegiac distich is a favorite metrical form for
gnomic and didactic poetry. It is but once used in the
1 A i.
2 al.
3 A 202.
A 348.
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS
357
extant tragedy, the first two lines of the passage being as
follows :
WW _i J_
aiTrei i/a
ayayer
ov
aAAa nv arav
.. A
#
ei? OaXd /xov? 'E At veil/.
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS
(Cf. 706, note)
703. The basis of anapaestic rhythms is the anapest
(w w Z.), but for this the spondee (__^) or even the dac-
tyl (__ w w) may be substituted. A dactyl (or the last
of two or more dactyls) is regularly followed by a spon-
dee (_ w w ), since a dactyl followed by an anapaest
(_ w w w w _) would bring four short syllables together.
1. Anapaestic rhythms are usually measured by dipodies
( 686, 2), and the most common forms are the monometer
(of two feet), the dimeter (of four feet), and the dimeter
catalectic or Paroemiac. The schemes are as follows :
f W W j. W W
(Monometer) J
(Dimeter)
Cf. " And the olive of peace || sends its branches abroad."
(Paroemiac)
Cf. " The Lord is advan ||cing. Prepare ye ! "
2. Anapaestic Systems. Anapaestic rhythms were
much used by the dramatists in systems ( 692), a system
1 E. And. 103-104.
358
ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS
consisting of a series of anapaestic monometers (usually
printed as dimeters, with an occasional monometer) end-
ing with a paroemiac ( 703, 1). Hiatus and the syllaba
anceps are allowed only at the end of the system (i.e. the
last syllable of the paroemiac). There is usually a diaer-
esis ( 690) at the end of each monometer.
The following is a short anapaestic system :
dAAa <r 6 Maids
TreXacreie
/
CTTtVotav
yevratos
Aiyev, Trap* 6/xot
NOTE. Observe that the last syllable in the second line (short by
nature) is long by position ( 53), owing to the following consonants.
704. Anapaestic Tetrameter. The anapaestic tetrame-
ter, consisting of one anapaestic dimeter followed by the
paroemiac, is much used by the line in comedy.
The scheme is as follows :
' \j \j
Examples are
W \J
rots dOa.va.Tois
, rots aiev eovai,
Toi?
/
rolcrtv
TOI? a<f)6iTa fir) So/xe'voicrtv.
1 E. Med. 750-703.
2 Ar. Aves, 688-689.
LYKIC RHYTHMS 359
For lyric anapaestic rhythms (which usually admit
more freedom of substitution) see 709, 2.
LYRIC RHYTHMS
705. Lyric rhythms in general differ from recitative
rhythms only in allowing much greater freedom of substi-
tution. Their most notable characteristic is the Procrus-
tean habit of frequently employing feet which are either
longer or shorter than the fundamental foot of the verse,
but which, by an arbitrary shortening or lengthening,
are made to fit the rhythm (cf. 682, 3-6). Thus, a
long syllable of two morae (_) by being lengthened (i_),
or a dactyl (_ w w) of four morae by being shortened
(_ ww) is often employed in a rhythm whose fundamental
foot is the trochee (_ w) of three morae. Likewise a
trochee (_ ^) of three morae may be used in a dactylic
(_ w w) rhythm of four morae (as i_ w). But the char-
acter of the rhythm may always be determined by the
preponderance of the fundamental foot.
706. Anacrusis. In the lyric rhythms each line does
not always begin with a complete foot. The extra sylla-
ble (or syllables) at the beginning of such a line has
received the name of anacrusis (avd/cpovcri? upward beat).
1. The anacrusis must not be greater than the arsis.
Hence we may have w or > or ^ as the anacrusis of a
logaoedic verse ( 707, 1) and w w, or _, or w, as the ana-
crusis of a dactylo-epitritic verse ( 709).
Anacrusis is indicated by i .
NOTE. Some writers on meter recognize only those feet in which
the ictus falls on the first part of the foot (i.e. trochees, dactyls, etc.).
By this theory an iambic verse (w _ | w _) is regarded as a catalectic
trochaic with anacrusis (w : _ w | _ A), an anapaestic verse as a
360 LYRIC RHYTHMS
catalectic dactylic with anacrusis, etc. But the ancients recognized
rhythms in which the ictus falls on the second part of the foot, as well
as the other kind, and such rhythms are often constructed on a differ-
ent principle from the others. Hence it seems best to limit anacrusis
to the strictly lyric rhythms, where the great variety and complexity
of the verses demand the adoption of some simple w r orking hypothesis,
although it is not certain that such rhythms were so treated by the
ancients.
LYRIC RHYTHMS IN 4 TIME
o
707. The fundamental foot of lyric rhythm in | time
is the trochee (_ w), but in place of the trochee may be
substituted the tribrach (w w w), the irrational trochee
(_ >, 682, 5), the cyclic dactyl (_ w , 682, 6), or the
triseme (L_, 682, 3). The cyclic dactyls are found before
or between trochees, but trochees are not found between
dactyls in the same verse. Anacrusis ( 706) is frequent.
1. Logaoedic Rhythms. Rhythms in | time containing
both trochees and (cyclic) dactyls have received the name
of Logaoedic (Xcfyo? speech, prose, aoi$ij song} .
2. Occasionally lyric verses in f time are found without
cyclic dactyls or trisemes, and such verses by themselves
might be explained as lyric trochaic, or (if they have ana-
crusis, cf. 706, note) as lyric iambic rhythms ; but
since such verses are seldom found except in connection
with other, logaoedic, verses, it is better to treat them all
under one general head.
NOTE 1. " Basis." The first foot of a logaoedic verse allows great
freedom. It may be a trochee (_/_ w), a tribrach (w w w), an irra-
tional trochee (Z. >), or even an apparent iambus (6 _) or anapaest
(6w >). For an example see 708, 6.
NOTE 2. Logaoedic Rhythms are measured by the single foot.
Some of them have acquired special names, which, however, are not
particularly important, for a verse can always be described as a dipody,
tripody, etc., according to the number of feet it contains.
LYRIC RHYTHMS IN f TIME
361
708. It follows from 707 that the lyric rhythms in |
time may have great variety of form. Some examples of
single verses are given below, but it must be remembered
that these verses are thus severed from their connection in
strophes of which they are an integral part.
1. DIPODY (LOGAOEDIC)
<3 TOV *A <Wiv (Adonic)
2. TRIPODIES
Trochaic tripody (with resolved foot) :
\pii)^ a\Kov<rrj I
Trochaic tripody with anacrusis ( 706) :
TA.O5 Od
l/Ol/Xt
KO.VTOS
Trochaic tripody catalectic, with anacrusis (" Iambic," see 707, 2) :
TI TuivS a vev KO. KCOI/ ;
Trochaic tripody catalectic, with anacrusis, containing a triseme
( 682, 3) :
^A
M
Logaoedic tripodies :
fivpo-QTolvov Kv\K\(t)fj.a (First Pherecratean)
\j\ f\
rj <f>i\\(*)v 6 (First Pherecratean catalectic)
^w
drav 7 (Second Pherecratean)
Logaoedic tripody (containing two dactyls) catalectic, with ana-
crusis :
~> / /
7ru)s ow if. poiv Trora
1 S. 4;. 626. 3 Aesch. Ag. 211.
2 S. 4f. 390. 4 Aesch. ^cpc, 901.
5 E. Bacchae, 123. 7 S. 4;. 643.
6 E. Med. 847. 8 E. J/ert. 846.
362
LYRIC RHYTHMS
Logaoedic tripodies containing a triseme ( 682, 3) :
. v~ I A
KttKttV
/ .
01-
-/ A
The last example might be scanned as a dipody (Adonic \^w | w),
but the scansion of such lines is determined by the character of the
strophe in which they stand.
3. TETRAPODIES
The following will serve as examples of tetrapodies,
although many more varieties are found :
Zw ./
/3ais ei
v^
8' '
Zw
r>yTv
/nos 3
Z. ww
vw yap
Z W _
1 /tXOt //, X
/ vx
l X
/ w
pevaaL 4 (First Glyconic)
^L VA> JL
Svpo/xev a
1 W
OTOV
^.v
W
/ ZA
E rdv 5 (First Glyconic catalectic)
Zw Z ^
Z. W
^A
rjvpov oi
;8e rt
(bdpLLOL
KOV 6 (Second Glyconic catalectic)
w : w
trXd oe
Z.V.
^*
t Zww
/xr;Xovo
ZA (Third Glyconic catalectic,
/AXS 7 with anacrusis)
w :Z. ^
/xevet 8' (
I KOV C
rat' 7
^ ZA
i /xov 8
/novoTTais
dXX'
/X
Tras. 9
4.
PENTAPODIES
jL > Z. ^w
ev /x.v/3 rov KXa8t
TO ^
t ^>os </>o pvjcru) 10
rav 6 /ae
yas
(jivOos a
^ei. 11
1 S. ^lj. 606. * S . 4;. 701.
2 E. ^fed. 865. 5 E. Med. 159.
3 Aesch. Ag. 477. 6 E. ^IZc. 966.
7 E. ^IZc. 573. 10 Scolhtm.
s Aesch. ^(7. 459. S. Jj. 226.
E. ylZc. 906.
5.
LYRIC RHYTHMS IN | TIME
HEXAPODIES
ouri
363
ots yap
/- >
:i/ So'/aos
ou8ev
eAXet
Tret yeve a? tin
rds
e/OTTOJ/.
6. Some verses contain more than one colon. Examples
are :
(EUPOLIDEAN)
01 KdT pOJ
Trpos
os v
/xas e
OVTd)
VLK-fJ
(TdLfJil T C
ya>
V
-/A
Observe the basis ( 707, note 1) at the beginning of the second
colon of the first line.
(GREATER ASCLEPIADEAN)
^ V-
aXXo
7. The following examples show lyric verses in f time
combined to form a strophe ( 691) :
/, TTOTVt
'Apyet
TTCVTr) KOVTOpOS
av p
ovpet
Ha
ras
vos
4.4.4.4
1 S. Ant. 582-5. 2 Ar. JVwft. 518, 520. 3 Alcaeus. 4 E. LT. 1123-7.
364
LYRIC RHYTHMS
arv 8', <3 TaXav,
121 A
TV pa
KTiv
ov
(0?
^ W -C v,
/3to|ra Tr/aoa-ayeis dAo ^a) re 1 1 <ra OTvyepov Oa.va.rov.
o-ov Trap 01
34.4.43 + 6
DACTYLO-EPITRITIC RHYTHMS (f TIME)
709. The fundamental foot of the dactylo-epitritic
rhythm is the dactyl (_ w w) or its equivalent spondee
( ), occurring commonly in groups of two dactyls and
a spondee (_ w w _ \j \j ) . The lengthened trochee
(L_ w, 682, 3) is also found, followed always by a spondee,
the two together forming the so-called Epitrite (i_ w ).
Either of these two combinations may be catalectic ( 689),
and anacrusis ( 706) is frequent. Occasionally the tetra-
seme (i_i , 682, 4), occupying the time of a whole foot, is
found.
An example of this rhythm is :
Aveo TTora fj.a)v ic poiv ^w
.! -L- \J \j
KOI 8l KO. KO.I TTQVra. TTO. \IV
iryat,
W W _
rat/
1. Other lyric dactylic rhythms are occasionally found,
but they require no further explanation than has already
been given.
2. Lyric anapaests also sometimes occur, but they may be
explained as dactylic verses with anacrusis (see 706, note).
1 E. Med. 990-5.
E. Med. 410-11.
OTHER RHYTHMS IN | AND f TIME
365
OTHER RHYTHMS IN f AND f TIME
710. Chor iambic Rhythms. The fundamental foot of
choriambic rhythms is the choriambus (./.
rhythms are rare. An example is :
/_ w
Sava.
Such
J_ \J \J Jl_WW
ow, Seij/a rapda era cro<6s ol\<avoOTa.<;. 1
711. Ionic Rhythms. Ionic rhythms have the ionic
( W w) as their fundamental foot, for which occasion-
ally L_J w w ( 682, 4) is found. Such rhythms are regu-
larly catalectic ( 689) with anacrusis ( 706), and by some
they are explained as ionic a minore (see 706 note).
An example is :
w w _
OT/OCXTOS eis a.vriiro\pov yctroi/a
JL _A
NOTE. Anaclasis. The last long syllable and the first short syl-
lable of any foot may be transposed. This is called anaclasis (dva-
breaking up) : thus
i8tot?
(instead of
\^y y^,/ , ^ j
vo/xots Kpa TVVWV '
' I ^- A)-
712. Dochmiac Rhythms. In some of the lyric por-
tions of tragedy, where great excitement is expressed, a
peculiar but unmistakable rhythm, called dochmiac, is
often found. The exact nature of this is very uncertain,
but it is based on a dipody w Z. _ w ^, which is thought
to have a broken rhythm, with alternating | and | time.
1 S. O.T. 484.
2 Aesch. Persians, 65-6.
3 Aesch. Persians, 71.
4 Aesch. Pr. 403.
366 OTHER RHYTHMS IN f AND f TIME
It allows the irrational long ( 682, 5) in place of either
of the two short syllables, and also freely resolves any one
of the three long syllables into two shorts. Hence many
variations are possible, but only nineteen are actually
found, and some of these very seldom. The following are
the most common forms :
WWW _ w __
2
W W - \J _
> 6 w_ > ^
<3
w w w w
(XTTO
Dochmiacs are often found in systems ( 692). A good example is
E. Mcd. 1258-60.
713. Bacchlac Rhythms. Bacchiac Rhythms (based on
the bacchms, w _/. _) are seldom found except in connec-
tion with other rhythms (usually dochmiac). An example
is in Aesch. Pr. 115.
714. Cretic Rhythms. Cretic rhythms occasionally
occur with the cretic (_/_ w _) as the fundamental foot,
which may be resolved ( 685) into Z. w w w (first paeon)
or 6 w w _ (second paeon). An example is
OCTT19 T) /XO>V
_:_ w ww
1 E. I.T. 872. 3 E. I.T. 830. 5 E. I.T. 829. 7 Ar. Adi. 835.
2 E. /.r. 643. 4 E. /. T. 650. 6 E. I.T. 291.
APPENDIX B
TABLE OF VOWEL CONTRACTIONS
715.
a + a = a ( 18, 2)
a + at = at( 19; 88)
a + a =a ( 19)
a + e = a ( 18, 6)
a 5 a (real) - ( 19)
( et (apparent) = a ( 19)
a 4- r) = a (18, 6, rarely rj,
170, 2)
a + rj = a ( 19, rarely 3, 170,
2)
a + t = at (18,1)
a + i = a ( 18, 1)
a + o = eo ( 18, 4)
a + ot = a> ( 19)
a 4- ov (apparent) = co ( 19)
a + a> = w ( 18, 4)
e + a = 77 ( 18, 6, sometimes a,
91,1; 106,2; 118,1; 120,3)
c + at = y ( 19, rarely at, 118,
1 ; or , 170, note 3)
e + e = et ( 18, 3)
e + et = a ( 19)
e + rj = r) ( 18, 2)
^ + 1? = ( 19)
e +t = a (18,1; cf. 6, 3)
e + o =ov( 18, 5)
e + ot = ot ( 19, 1)
c + ov = ov ( 19)
"*"
e + v = cv ( 18, 1)
e + w = a> (18, 4)
e + a> = a> (19)
?? + 01 - y ( 19)
r; + e = ^ ( 18, 2)
(real) = g ( 19)
(apparent) = rj ( 19)
77 +i =0 (18,1)
i +t = I ( 18, 2)
o + a = w ( 18, 4, rarely a,
H, 1)
o + e = ov ( 18, 5)
5 a (real) = ot (19,2)
| (apparent) = ov ( 19, 2)
o + rj = CD ( 18, 4)
o + 77 = ot ( 19, 2 ; rarely o>,
170, 2)
o + t = ot ( 18, 1)
o+o = ov ( 18, 3)
o +ot =ot ( 19,1)
o + ov = ov ( 19)
o + o> = co ( 18, 2)
o +co =co (19)
v +i =v ( 211, 2 a)
to + a =a> ( 18, 4)
o)+ e = w ( 18, 4)
w + t = co ( 18, 1)
co + o = co ( 18, 2)
367
APPENDIX C
THE PRONUNCIATION OF GREEK PROPER
NAMES IN ENGLISH
716. Nearly all Greek proper names came into the
English language through the medium of Latin. Hence
the following rule for pronouncing such names :
Write the Grreek name in the equivalent Latin letters
(see 1) and pronounce as an English word 1 with Latin
accent.
NOTE. In addition to the equivalents given in 1, the following
should be mentioned :
Gk. Lat. Gk. Lat. Gk. Lat.
cu = ae (ai) ev = eu Final -os, -ov )
\_ 1 1 ^
et = I (or e) ov = u of 2d decl., > ~
ot = oe (oi) y nasal ( 11, 1) = n p with rough ) _
av au Final -01 = -i breathing (p) f ~
Examples are :
Atyu/a = Ae-gl'-na
= A-the'-ne
Botam'd = Boe-o'-ti-a
Budimov = By-zari -ti-um
Adpeto? Da-rl'-us
i = Del' -phi
= Di-os-cu'-ri
= Eu-ro'-tas
= Thu-cyd'-i-des
Mi A^ros = Mi-le'-tus
= O-dys'-seus
v = Xen'-o-phon
= Sphinx
Tl/xo^eo? = Ti-mo'-lJie-us
Xapcov = Cha'-ron
1 See Bennett and Bristol, The Teaching of Latin and Greek, pp. 237-9.
368
APPENDIX D
SOME ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL TERMS
717. The following grammatical terms are still occa-
sionally employed by editors. Most of them explain them-
selves, but for completeness they are here catalogued.
1. Anacoluthon occurs when the construction of a sentence is
changed from that with which it began : as Kal SiaAeyo/xevos avrw,
cSo^e fjiOL OVTOS 6 avrjp etvai <TO<OS and conversing with him, this man
seemed to me (instead of " I thought him ") to be wise PL Ap. 21 c.
2. Aphaeresis. If the second of two words between which synize-
sis ( 43, note 2) takes place begins with e-, some editors regard the c
as elided, and so indicate it : as ^ 'yw for /xr? eyoi.
3. Asyndeton is the omission of conjunctions between connected
words or phrases. It is comparatively rare in Greek, a language in
which conjunctions were very numerous.
4. Brachylogy (brief expression) makes one word do double duty :
as KOJJUU Xapireo-crti/ 6/xotat hair like (the hair of) the Graces P 51.
coTrAioyxevot rjo-av rots aurot? Kvpa> oTrAois they were armed with the same
weapons as (those of) Cyrus Xn. Cy. 7, 1, 2.
5. Chiasmus (from the letter ^) inverts the , ,
order of the second pair of two pairs of words : P a cvsraya.
as pcunXris r lyoBte Kparepo's j al XM r^ a
goodly Icing and warrior bold T 179.
6. Ellipsis (lack) is the omission of words which would be requi-
site for a full logical expression of the thought. A good example is
w(T7rep a.v et just as (one would do) if, etc. Other examples of ellip-
tical expressions are mentioned in 439, note 2; 615; 616; 625,
note.
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 24 369
370 SOME ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL TERMS
7. Hendiadys (one through two') is the use of two coordinate words
to express what might have been expressed by one word and an attrib-
utive : as Kpdrr] KOL OpovoL power and throne (i.e. throne of power) S.
Ant. 173.
8. Hypallage (interchange} gives to the less important of two words
the construction appropriate to the more important : as 6&vvy<n TreXa-
av to bring him upon troubles (instead of 'bring troubles upon him ')
E776.
9. Hyperbaton (overstepping} is a transposition (for the sake of
emphasis) of the natural order of words: as Trap OVK etfe'Awv e#e
Xovcrr) unwilling by her willing side 2 155.
10. Hypotaxis (opposed to parataxis) is the subordination of one
construction to another (cf. 594, 1 note).
11. Hysteron proteron is 'putting the cart before the horse': as
ei/ActTa T' a/Ji<f>U(Td(Ta. $u(o8ea KCU Aoeadcra having clothed him in fragrant
garments and given him a bath e 264.
12. Litfltes (plainness) and Meiosis (lessening) are forms of under-
statement : as ou TroAAoi not many (i.e. = oAtyot a few).
13. Metonymy (change of name} is the use of one word in place of
another which it suggests : as do-Trts fjivpLO. ten thousand shield (i.e.
soldiers, or men with shields) Xn. A. 1, 7, 10.
14. Oxymoron (keen foolishness) is a combination of apparently
contradictory terms such as 'painful pleasure ' or ' living death ' : thus
i//ev(ra/xevov TTIOTOI/ ycveaOai to be believed for his falsehood ! Th. 3, 43.
15. Parataxis (opposed to hypotaxis) is the use of coordinate con-
structions (cf. 594, 1 note).
16. Paronomasia is a play on words of similar sound: as 7ra-
veo-rrjaav /xaAAov ^ aTT^arrjo-av they have revolted rather than
rebelled Th. 3, 39.
17. Pleonasm is unnecessary fullness of expression : as Trapacro/xai
TO) TraTTTTO), . . . KpaTicrros a>v iTTTrevs, crv/x/jux^etv avra) to my grand-
father I shall try, by being a very good horseman, to be an ally to him Xn.
Cy. 1, 3, 15. Other examples are mentioned in 434; 601 note;
657, note 2.
18. Prolepsis (anticipation} is properly the use of an adjective which
by its meaning anticipates the action of the verb : as StKcuW dSiVovs
Operas TrapacrTras you lead astray the unjust minds of righteous men, i.e.
" so that they become unjust " S. Ant. 791.
More commonly prolepsis is used of the position of a substantive or
SOME ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL TERMS 3J1
a pronoun, which is transferred (usually with a change of case) from
a (later) subordinate clause to an (earlier) principal clause : as rJSee
yap Kara. OV/JLQV aSeA^eov cos CTTOVCITO for he knew in his heart full well
how his brother was toiling (lit. " knew his brother how he was toil-
ing") B 409. rjBu avrov on /xe'croj/ e^oi he knew that he commanded
the center Xn. A. 1, 8, 21.
19. Zeugma (yoking} is the forcing of one verb to do the duty of
two (dissimilar) verbs : as oure (fxDvyv ovre TOV /jLop<j>r)v /?/OOTOJV cw^ry you
shall not (hear) the voice or see the form of any mortal man Aesch.
Pr. 21.
APPENDIX E
WEIGHTS, MEASURES, AND TIME
718. LINEAR MEASURE
EQUIVALENT
(finger breadth) = almost | inch
j (palm) = 2.9+ inches
(span) = 8.73 inches
4
3 TroAatarat
4 TT^eis (or 6
16$ opyvuu (or 100 TrdSes) =
TTOVS (foot) = 11.65 inches
7rfjx v< > (cubit) = 17.46 inches
opyvid (fathom) = 5 feet, 10 inches
irXiOpov (plethrum)= 97+ feet
= 1 o-raStov (stade) = 582 + feet
9 o-rdStoi = 1 mile ( + 7 feet)
30 oraStoi = 1 Trapao-ayyr;? (para-
sang) = 3| miles
719. SQUARE MEASURE
The Greeks measured small areas by the square foot, aud
larger areas (like land) by the square plethrum ( = 10,000
square Tro'Se?, i.e. 97+ x 97+ = 9412 sq. feet, or a little
over one-fifth of an acre).
720. LIQUID MEASURE
U. S. LIQUID MEASURE
1 6^a<^>ov = 0.144+ pint
4 6v/3a<f>3, = 1 KorvXr) = 0.578 pint
12 KorvXai = 1 xovs 3.468 quarts
12 xoes = 1 ci/x<opis /xeTpr/Tijs = 10.4 + gallons
372
WEIGHTS AND MONEY 373
721. DRY MEASURE
U. S. DRY MEASURE
1 Kva0os = .08 + pint
6 KvaOot = 1 Korv\.rj = | (0.49 + ) pint
4 KorvXai - 1 xoiw = 1 (0.99 + ) quart
4 x<>tnK9 = 1 jjfMitKTov i (0.49 + ) peck
2 T7/XiKTtt = 1 KTVS = 1 (0.99-f ) peck
6 eKTts = 1 /AC&/XI/OS = 1^ (1.49 + ) bushels
NOTE. Both the liquid and the dry KorvXr) had the same value,
but the difference between liquid and dry measure in the United
States causes the apparent difference in the tables.
WEIGHTS AND MONEY
722. The tables of Greek weights and of money are
identical, coins being named and valued by the weight
of silver (or gold) that they contained, ^he standards,
however, were considerably different in different parts of
Greece.
In Attica two standards were in use, corresponding to
our Troy and Avoirdupois weights. The former consti-
tutes the basis of the Attic coinage, and it was used also
in weighing precious metals, drugs, etc. The second was
used in ordinary commercial transactions. The approxi-
mate values of these were as follows :
723. TABLE OF WEIGHTS
ATTIC COMMERCIAL OR
AEGINETAN
1 0/SoA.O? ^o OZ.
6 o/?oAoi' = 1 Spa-XM TU 7 " ?o oz -
100 Spax/W = 1 /xva = 15.4+ oz. 1 Ib. 6| oz.
60 /xvat - 1 ToXavrov = 58 Ibs. 83 Ibs.
374 WEIGHTS AND MONEY
724. TABLE OF ATTIC MONEY
VALUE IN U.S. MONEY
8 xaA.Kot (copper) = 1 6(3o\6s (obol) $ .03
6 6(3oXoL = 1 SpaXf^rj (drachma) .18
100 Spax/Acu - 1 /xva (mina) 18.00
= 1 raXavrov (talent) 1080.00
NOTE. These values are only approximate, and are determined
by the value (in gold) of the weight of the silver in the coins. The
present great depreciation in the value of silver is not considered, but
it is reckoned as being to gold as 16 : 1. The purchasing power of
money was much greater in antiquity than at present. Cf. Xn. A. 1,
3, 21, where the pay of the soldiers (already very high) is raised from
4 obols ($0.12) to a drachma ($0.18) a day.
1. The Attic coins (with the exception of the
which was of copper) were made of unalloyed silver, and
ran from the 4 obol to the four-drachma piece (rerpd^pa^-
pov). The daric (Sapet/eo?), a Persian gold coin containing
about 125.5 grains of gold, circulated at the value of
20 drachmae. The Cyzicene stater (of electrum, a mix-
ture of gold and silver) was regarded as equivalent to
28 drachmae.
GREEK CHRONOLOGY
725. The Era. Any particular year was known at
Athens by the name of the Archon Eponymus (and in
other places by the name of some other important civil or
religious official).
Later came the general practice of numbering the years
by Olympiads (periods of four years each), the first year
of the first Olympiad (Ol. 1, 1) beginning in the middle
of the summer of 776 B.C.
GREEK CHRONOLOGY 375
NOTE. Observe that the first half of Ol. 1, 1 falls in B.C. 776, and
the second half in B.C. 775 : thus
01. [ 1,1 | 1,2 | 1,3 | 1,4 | 2,1 [2,2 | 2,3
B.C. | 776 | 775 | 774 | 773 | 772 \ 771 | 770 |
1. Hence the following rule for changing Olympiads
into years B.C. : multiply the number of the Olympiad by
4, and subtract the product from 780. The remainder,
will be the year B.C. in which the first year of that
Olympiad began.
726. The Year. Besides the ordinary divisions of the
year into spring (^>), summer (0e/oo?), autumn (o7ra>/od),
and winter (j^et/ucoz'), the year was divided into twelve
months, containing alternately 30 (pfjves TrX^joet?) and 29
(yur^e? /coZXot) days each. But such a year ((6 x 30) +
(6 x 29) = 354) had only 354 days, and hence was roughly
11^ days too short. In eight years (8xll^ = 90) the
difference would amount to 90 days, or three months of
30 days each. So in every cycle of eight years (eV^eaer?/-
p<f<?) an extra month of 30 days (Tloo-^iSecov Seure/?o?) was
inserted in the 3d, 5th, and 8th year, thus making those
years to contain 384 days. The slight error remaining
was variously equated.
1. The year in Attica began theoretically with the sum-
mer solstice (June 21), although actually it varied from
the middle of June to the first week in August. The
months followed one another in the following order :
1. 'EKaro/x/fcueov (about July)
2. MerayeiTviwi/ (August)
3. Bo^Spo/xiwv (September)
4. Hvavoif/iwv (October)
5. WaL/jLaKTrjpnav (November)
6. IIoo-(e)tSe<joi' (December)
(6 b . IIo(7()i8e(ov Sevrepos, in leap
years only)
7. Fa/xT/Xtwv (about January)
8. 'Av$(m7pi(ov (February)
9. 'EX.a<j>r)(3o\L<i)v (March)
10. Movvixiwv (April)
11. apy^Aion/ (May)
12. ~2<Kipo<f>opiwv (June)
376 GREEK CHRONOLOGY
NOTE. The names of the Attic months in their order may be
readily recalled by the following nonsense : Hector Met a Boy with a
Pie. " My Poor Gamin!" A ns wered with A^laugh "Money, T%ere,
Skip \ "
727. The Month. The days of the month were usually
reckoned as follows :
I. vovfjirjvia.
2-10. Sevrepd (rptriy, etc. 1 152) cora/Aevov, S^KOLTTJ tcrra/xe'vov.
II. fv8f.KO.Tr)-
12. SeooWTTj.
13-19. TpiTrj (etc. 152) CTTI Sera cran; rt Sera.
20. ei/cas, or SeKany Trporepa.
21. SeKar>7 <0iVovros or SeKarrj v<rrepa.
22-29. eVaTT? (078077, etc. 1 152) <0iVoi/ros Sevre'pa <j>OivovTO<>.
30. ei^ Kat vea.
In the months of 29 days the Sevrepd <f>6wovTo<; was omitted.
NOTE. Later the days 22-29 were also designated as Sevrepa
(TpiY?7, etc.) /ACT' ei/caSas.
728. The Day. The Greeks had no accurate divisions
of the day (which was reckoned from sunrise to sunset),
but employed the usual rough divisions of morning (TT/OWI"),
mid-day (^e<777/^pia), and afternoon (oVX?;). Other desig-
nations such as 0/00/00? daivn^ Trepl r jr\r)0ov(7av ayopav about
the time the market place' is crowded (10 or 11 o'clock),
Trepl dpicrTov about lunch time, etc., were also used.
The early part of the night was called eo-Trepd evening,
and midnight was pecry vv%.
For measuring a definite lapse of time (as in the law
courts) the water clock (/cAe-^uS/oa) was employed.
In Attica rer/xis was commonly employed instead of rerdpTt] fourth.
APPENDIX F
729. LIST OF VERBS
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
In the following list, as a rule, only those tenses are given which actually
occur in the works of the classical writers which have been preserved, but
there is good reason to believe that, in most verbs, the other tenses, not listed
here, were also in use ; but, by chance, no instance of such use happens to
survive. Nor is it at all certain that some of the verbs classed as poetic or
Ionic may not have been used also in prose. Such a classification is neces-
sarily arbitrary, and it is made only for convenience.
d-ydXXw (dyaA-, 195, 3) adorn, fut. d-yaXw, 1st aor. i)yi|Xa.
admire, aor. i\^a.a-Qi\v ( 158, 3), vbl. d-ycurrds ( 189).
(dyyeA-, 195, 3) announce, fut. dyycXw, 1st aor. rjyyciXa, 1st
peri. T]YY ^ Ka > perf. mid. TJ-yyeXiicu, 1st aor. pass. TJyyeXO-nv.
d-yefpw (dyep-, 195, 4, cf. dyopa) collect, 1st aor. tfyeipa.
a-y-vv-ju ( 196, 5, theme dy-, for /ray-, 2 a) break (in composition
also d Y vv), fut. (Kar)da>, 1st aor. (Kar)4oga ( 172, 2), 2d pf.
(Kar)^a ( 180; 494, 3), 2d aor. pass. (/car)a W ( 172, 2).
( 193) lead, fut. a (cf. 515, 1), 2d aor. tfra-yov ( 208, 1),
2d perf. rjx a ( 219, 1), perf. mid. -HYU^ 1 st aor. pass. f{\9r\v, vbl.
[d(w] harm, infatuate (da-), epic and poetic only, 1st aor. 8.0.00, aud d
1st aor. pass. dd<T0r}v.
a.ya.fj.a.1, epic fut. ayd(r(<r}ofj.a.i, epic 1st aor. 'fjya<r(<r)dfj.'rjv.
dydo(j.ai (epic) = &ya/j.ai. Homer has also dycu'o/wu envy.
dydpu, Homer has 2d aor. 3d sing, tfypero (Mss. eypero), 3d pi.
(Mss. dytpovro}, infin. dypfodcu (Mss. dy^peo-^at), partic. dyp6/j.evos
( 208), plpf. mid. 3d pi. dyyytpaTo ( 226 a), 1st aor. pass,
For dyeptdovrai (Mss. ^7-) and rjyeptdovTo, see 191 a.
&yu, Homer has 1st aor. impv. fi^ere, infin. d^/xej/cu. See 201 b.
377
378 LIST OF VERBS [729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
d^wvCtojjiai ( 292, 6) contend (middle deponent, 158, 3), fut. a-ywviov-
fiai ( 215), 1st aor. Try ci>vt<r 'K' 1 l v > pevf. Tpywvi(r|j.cu, vbl. d i ya>vi<rTos.
a8- (aS-, 193) sing, fut. acrojiai ( 507), 1st aor. Vfo-a, 1st aor. pass.
TJ'<T0T]V, Vbl. 00-T60S.
alSov|A<u (-eo/xai) (cuSeo--, 188) fear, respect, fut. alSeVojiai and al8e-
o-0TJ<ro[i(u (see 519, note 2), aor. TJ8o-0T)v (less often r/Seo-a/x^i/,
158, 3), perf. tfSco-nai.
atonal ( 292, 6 ; middle deponent, 158, 3) outrage, fut. alKiov(xai
(215), aor. flKi<rd|ii]v, perf. gKio-fjiai, 1st aor. pass. TJK(o-0iiv (510).
atvw (-e-o), 188) praise (usually in composition), fut. alveVco, and also
fut. mid. -alve'o-ojiai ( 507), 1st aor. -gvco-a, perf. -Tj'veica, perf. pass.
TJVTJIXCU ( 188, 1), 1st aor. pass. TJV^TIV, vbl. atvere'os.
alpw (-0)) (aipe-, 193) take (mid. choose}, fut. alpV ( 187), aor.
supplied ( 164) by 2d aor. elXov ( 172, 2, from stem eA.-, subj.
IAo), opt. IAoi/xt, etc.), 1st perf. T]pT]Ka, perf. mid. np T H JLat > 1 st a r.
pass. TJp^v ( 188, 1), vbl. alper&s ( 188, 1).
al'pw (for *ap-iw (ap-) 195, 4) raise, fut. apw ( 213), 1st aor. T|pa
(subj. apw, opt. apat/xt, etc.), perf. -^pKa, perf. mid. npjiai, 1st
aor. pass. IjpOiiv (fut. pass. ap0TJ<ro(iai), vbl. dprt'os.
ato-0-dv-ojxai ( 196, 2, theme aio-0-) perceive (middle deponent, 158,
3), fut. alo-0TJ<ro[iai, 2d aor. ^'<r06|it]v, perf. TJ'O-OTJUCU.
alo-xvvw ( 292, 9; 195, 4, theme cuo-;(w) disgrace (mid. feel
ashamed), fut. aUrxww, 1st aor. ff<rxvva (perf. mid. partic. epic
r/cr^v/AjueVos), 1st aor. pass. Tj<rxvv0iiv, vbl. alo-x^vreos.
alTia>p,<u (-ao/xat, 193) blame, fut. atrido-o^ai, etc. ( 187), middle
deponent ( 158, 3) regular.
[root d5e-] be sated, epic aor. opt. a5ij<me, pf. partic.
^5w, Ionic and poetic det'Sw.
[root de-], 1st aor. (epic) deva and a<ra slept.
d&jw, see aij^di).
&-TJ-/J.I ( 193; theme de-, d??-) blow (poetic, mostly epic), pres. 3d dual
ArjTov ( 200 a), 3d pi. de?o-t ( 200 b), impf. 3d sing. &T), infin.
and d^^at ( 200 a), partic. det's (-e^ros), impf. rnid. 3d sing.
( 200 a), partic. d^ei/os ( 200 a).
afpw, Ionic and poetic defyw, 1st aor. Tjeipa, 1st aor. pass. -?}{p9r)v, plpf. mid.
3d sing, dw/oro (or SO/JTO).
ai/)tD, Herodotus has 1st pf. dp-aip-rjKa, and pf. mid. ap-aiprjuai ( 179).
(Ionic and poetic), impf. dl'ov, 1st aor. eTr-iJicrcu
729] LIST OF VERBS 379
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
(-eo/tai, 188, theme cUea-) heal (middle deponent, 158, 3),
aor. T]Kcrd(j.T]v. vbl. duco-ros ( 189).
( 193) hear, fut. mid. aKovoro|iai ( 507), 1st aor. TJKOVO-CL, 2d
perf. dic/JKoa ( 179; for *a.KrJKopa, 21), 1st aor. pass. TjKovo-0t]v
( 189), vbls. dKovo-ros, -T'OS.
(-ao/xai, 193) listen, fut. aKpoacrofiai ( 187), etc., middle
deponent ( 158, 3) regular.
dXaXdo> ( 195, 2, dA.aA.ay-) raise the war-cry, fut. dXaXdop.ai ( 507),
1st aor. T|XdXaa.
( 193, 2; theme dA<-, dAi<-, 14, 2) anoint, fut. dXetyw,
1st aor. -n\uK 2d perf. d\^Xi<j>a ( 179, 219, note 2), perf. mid.
dX^XifijAcu ( 247), 1st aor. pass. T|XC<j>0T]v, vbl. dXeiirr&s.
( 193; theme dAef, dAe/<-, dAic-, 14, 1) fut. dX^o^at, 1st aor.
roll, 1st aor. -qXura, 1st perf. rjXiKa, perf. pass. part. T|Xiv8Ti-
lUvot ( 190).
dX-Co-KO|xat ( 197, theme a'A-, a'Ao-) be taken (used as pass, of aipo>),
fut. dXwcroiJLai, 2d aor. toXwv or iiXwv ( 172, 2, subj. aAoi, etc.,
opt. dXoirjv, etc., inf. dXwvat, partic. aAovs, 256), 1st perf. ea
or rjXwKa, vbl. dXwros.
292, 6; reduplicated ( 179 a) theme from root d*-) pain,
distress. Other presents of similar meaning from the same root are
dx-e^w, dx-^w, &X-O/-UH, &x-w-/j.ai be distressed. All other tenses are
formed from the theme d/cax- or d/caxe- ( 190) ; thus fut.
( 519 a), 1st aor. (rare) dxax^cra, 2d aor. Tj/caxoy, pf. mid.
be distressed ( 535, doubtful is dKrix^S-arai 3d pi.), partic. as adj.
distressed. (Doubtful is dn7x^ tevos O
(epic pf. partic. from root dx-) sharpened.
&\8alvw and dX5di/a> nourish (poetic only), impf. (or 2d aor. ?) tfXdavov.
d\e'|oj, Ionic and poetic are fut. dXe^trw and d\etf<TOfj.ai, 1st aor. ^Xe'^aa,
epic 2d aor. &\O.\KOI> ( 208).
(poetic), mostly in mid. d\evo/j.at. and dX^o/xai ( 21) avoid,
1st aor. d\evd/j.rjv ( 207, note 1) and dXed^j/ ( 21).
, see 6fXw.
&\do/j.ai be healed (Ionic and poetic), fut. dX^cro/icu ( 190).
d\ia Ko/jiai, Epic 2d aor. subj. dXww, dXw7?s, etc.
d\iT-alvo(j.ai ( 196, 2 ; 195, 4) sm (poetic, mostly epic), 2d aor. T/XITOJ',
pf. partic. d\irri[j.fvos ( 190).
380 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
dXXdrTtt ( 195, note 2; dXXay-) change, fut. dXXda>, 1st aor. ijXXoga,
2d perf. -fjXXaxa ( 219, 1), perf. mid. tiXXa-yjiai, aorists pass.
T|XXdx0Tiv (1st) and TjXXd-yTiv (2d), vbl. dXXaKre'os.
aXXo|A<u ( 195, 3, theme ciA.-) leap, fut. dXovficu. 1st aor. T|\d|U|v ( 204).
dXoui (-da), 193) thrash, 1st aor. T|X6Tjora, perf. mid. r)X6r|pai.
dXai (-ea>, 188) grind, fut. dX ( 212, 1), 1st aor. ijXco-a ( 188),
pf. mid. dAijAe(o-)/xai ( 179).
d^aprdvci) ( 196, 2; theme dpapr- and a/xapre-, 190) err, fut. dp.apTTJ-
erofiai ( 507), 2d aor. -qjiaprov, 1st perf. i\\ia.pri\Ko., perf. mid.
f]|AapTTi}iai, 1st aor. pass. Tj|xapT^6T]v, vbls. -a|i,dpTT]Tos, -re'os.
djipX-to-Kw ( 197, a.p~j3\- and ap.j3\o-) miscarry, 1st aor. -^npX<ra, 1st
perf. -^jupXwica, perf. mid. nfxpXwp.ai [1st aor. pass. rftJLftXMjv, late].
d djjnr-t<rxw (d/x^>t + l^o), 40) /mi'e about, pn1 about, clothe, like
* and l'o-x, q.v., but for the augment (^Treixo^v) see 175, note.
( 195, 4; O./JLVV-) ward q^(mid. defend, 506), fut. d}tvva>, 1st
aor. tjnvva, vbl. djivvreos. For rjp.vva.6ov see 191 a.
( 195, 1 ; d/xv^-) scratch, fut. djivgco, 1st aor. TJp.va.
dfi4>i-yvoaJ (-ea>, 193) doubt, regular, but impf. ^/x^eyvdovv ( 175,
note), 1st aor. TUJK^e-yvo-riora ( 175, note).
d|j.()>ivvv|ii clothe, see CVVV/AI.
d|jt<|>i<rpTiTw (-COD, 193) dispute, regular, but impf. rj^eo-ftiJTovv ( 175,
note), 1st aor. t|fi<|><rprfJTT](ra ( 175, note).
dvaivojiai ( 195, 4) refuse, mostly poetic ; see below.
aXXo^cai, epic 2d aor. without vowel ^ ( 207 a) dXo-o, a\fo, partic. ctX/xe^os.
dXotD, poetic aXoidw.
O.\VKT(O (-^w) and dXu/crdfw be troubled, pf. mid. dXaXikr^Gu ( 179 a).
cw ( 197) avoid (poetic), other tenses from dXi;*-, fut. dXtfw, 1st
aor. ^Xf^a.
( 196, 2) acquire (poetic), epic 2d aor. $\<poi>.
(-do/xai) wander, epic impv. 2d sing. dXdou (Mss. dX6w, 199 b),
pf . dXdXTj/icu ( 179 b and 535) . Otherwise regular, but mostly poetic.
u), epic 2d aor. -rj^porov (for ^^(jS)poroi/, 14 ; 38, with sympa-
thetic , as in jSXtrrw and /3Xu>(r/ca>) .
(for *dfjiep-L( t ), 195, 4) and dfttpdu (cf. e^Sw) deprive (poetic), 1st
aor. tf/j.ep(ra ( 204 a), 1st aor. pass. i]^pQt]v.
<i} ( 197) err (poetic), 2d aor. ijfjLir\aKov, partic. dfj.-rr\aKwv (also
written 'air\a.Kuv metri gratia), pf. mid. i^orXd/cTj/uu ( 190).
dva.ivofj.ai, 1st aor. fivrjvd/j.tjv (poetic).
729] LIST OF VERBS 381
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
dvdX-Co-Ktt (for ava-paX-urKw, 2 a ; theme ctvdA.-, 197), also dvdXw
(-oo), theme dvdA.0-) expend, fut. dvdX<oo-o>, 1st aor. <xvT]Xwcra, 1st perf.
dvTJXaxca, perf. mid. dvTJXwfxai, 1st aor. pass. a.vr\\u>Qi\v, vbl. dvdXum'os.
dvBdvw ( 196, 2 ; theme a'S- for *o-/ra8-, 36 a), mostly epic and Ionic
(see below), but partic. ourpcvos pleasing is much used as an.
adjective.
dve'xw hold up, dvexopai endure, like \, but for the augment (fyuxo-
see 175, note.
open, see oiyo>.
(-o>) meet, beseech, often has two augments ( 175, note), as
1st aor. TJvTef36\T)<ra.
(-ea>) be a defendant, sometimes has two augments ( 175,
note), as 1st aor. T|VT8iKTi<ra.
avv-w ( 193) and dvvrw ( 194) accomplish, fut. dvvo-o, 1st aor. rjvvo-a,
1st perf. TJvvica, perf. mid. r^vvo-n-ai, vbl. dvv<rr6s.
airrw ( 194 ; theme a<-, 25) fasten, kindle, fut. &\J/w, 1st aor. rj\|/a,
perf. mid. iffifxai, 1st aor. pass. T\$Qr\v.
dparrw ( 195, note 2; theme d/oay-) strike, fut. dpdga>, 1st aor. tipaa,
1st aor. pass. Ti
), impf. edj/Saj/oi/ ( 172, 2), &v8avov ( 171 a), and ijvdavov (Hdt.).
Homeric Mss. give (probably wrongly) e^vSavov for tdvdavov, and ^i5a-
i/oj' for avdavov, fut. adri<ru ( 190), 2d aor. ^aSov (Hdt.), epic ddov
( 171 a) and evadov (for *t<rf:a8ov, *tf/:a5oj>), 2d pf. ftiSa ( 180).
grows or grew? (epic 2d pf.),
avtu, epic future d^w ( 216).
&vw (poetic) = d^w.
&vuya, epic 2d pf. command ( 535), 1st pi. &v<i)y/j.ev, impv.
(with middle endings), 3d sing, dj/wx^ 2d pi. A^WX^, plupf.
Also pres. d^7w to which all forms with the variable vowel ', in-
cluding the subj. dvtiyu, and the opt. dvAyoifju, are to be referred ;
fut. dvut-w, 1st aor. tfvut-a.
d7r-a<j>-lffKw ( 197) deceive (poetic), 2d aor. ^ira<t>ov (partic. dira<t>&v}.
dir^pwv (contr. from -aoi/), epic impf. took away, partic. curoi/pas are
probably traditional Mss. readings embodying dir-tfpwv and Airo-ppd*
( 2 a).
dp-ap-i<rKw ( 197, 1 ; 179 ; theme dp-} fit (poetic), 1st aor. (trans. 494, 1)
flpcra ( 204 a), 2d aor. (trans, and intrans.) ypapov, partic. mid.
vos fitting ( 210 a), 2d pf. Apapa ( 179) (Ionic Ap-rjpa, 15 a).
382 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
dpe'-o-Kw ( 197 ; theme ape-, 188) please, fut. dpe'o-w, 1st aor. TJpeo-a, vbl.
(->, 188) assist, suffice, fut. dpice'o-w ( 188), 1st aor.-fipKco-a ( 188).
TTco ( 195, note 2, ap/xoy-), also dp/x,o<o ( 195, 2, ap/xoS-) _^,
fut. app-oo-w. 1st aor. tjpp,o<ra, perf. mid. tjpp.o(rnai ( 189), 1st aor.
pass. f]pfjLO<r0T)v ( 189), vbl. dpnoo-reos.
dpvov(j.cu (-eo/xai, 187) deny ; passive deponent ( 158, 3) regular.
dpird<i> ( 195, 2; theme dpiray-, but see 195, 2 a) seize, snatch, fut.
dpirdo-ofxai ( 507), seldom dp7ra<ra>, 1st aor. -qpirao-a, 1st perf.
qpiraKa, perf. mid. or pass, qpircwrp.cu, 1st aor. pass. fipirdo-Otjv.
(dprww) dpTv-w ( 193) prepare, fut. dpTv<ro>, 1st aor. TjpTtio-a, 1st perf.
-fjprvKa, perf. mid. i^prvfjiai, 1st aor. pass. -i\priQ-r\v.
dpv-o) ( 193) and apv-rw ( 194-) draw (water), 1st aor. rjpvo-a, 1st
aor. pass. ypvOyv, vbl. -apvo-rfos ( 189).
apx-w ( 193) begin, command, fut. ap|&>, 1st aor. -qpla, 2d perf.
perf. mid. -np-yjiai, 1st aor. pass. r\p\Qi\v, vbl. dpKTt'os.
dpw (-oci), 188) jofow, 1st aor. tipoo-a ( 188), 1st aor. pass, ^
( 188).
dp|icu (-dofJMi, 187) pray (middle deponent, 158, 3), fut. -apa<rop.cu,
1st aor. T|pa<rdnT]v, perf. -^papai.
avaivw (for *cu>av-ta>, 195, 4) dry, fut. avavw, 1st aor. TjvTjva, 1st aor.
pass. T)vdv6T]v.
avXitojiai encamp (middle and passive deponent, 158, 3), aor. Tjv\<r0tiv
and -qvXio-djjfqv.
av|dvci> ( 196, 2, av-) and av|-<o (. 193) make to increase, grow, fut.
avIV ( 190), 1st aor. T]vT]cra ( 190), 1st perf. I^KCL ( 190),
perf. mid. ipgTjfjicu, 1st aor. pass.
(epic pf. mid. partic.) oppressed (derivation unknown).
i, also as middle deponent ( 158, 3), poetic and Ionic.
&p-w-fji.a.i ( 196, 5 ; theme dp-) win, fut. dpoD/xcu, 2d aor. fjpbp.tjv (infin.
.
j, epic fut. apirdfa ( 195, 2 a) and 1st aor, usually ijp-n-a^a ( 195, 2 a).
a<Ta, see [daw] ; d<ra / u,ei', see [de-].
ai/^w, epic and Ionic present also d#?w.
d0da-(rw feel, 1st aor. ij(paaa (Ionic).
aQfoffw dip up (poetic), fut. d0tfw, 1st aor. ^0u<ra (from d0i/w).
[root a-] satiate, satiate one's self (epic), pres. infin. a/xemi, fut. infin,
dcreiv, 1st aor, subj. aa-r], 1st pi. '^/^GV? Si'c), opt, aeraiyUi, infin, a<rat.
729] LIST OF VERBS 383
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
( 193, theme a\0- and dx^eo--) be oppressed in spirit, displeased
(passive deponent, 158, 3), f ut. dxOe'o-o^ai ( 188) and
pai ( 519, note 2), 1st aor. i\\Qi<rQr\v ( 188).
Pa8t (cf. 292, 6) go, fut. paSiovpiai ( 215 and 507), vbl. paSio-reov.
pcUvw (for */?av-iw, 195, 4 ; theme /3a-, in the present fia-v-, 196)
go, fut. p^o-ofxai ( 507), p^jo-w shall cause to go (cf. 494, 1, note),
1st aor. pTi<ra caused to go ( 494, 1), 2d aor. pt]v went ( 494),
1st pf. ppT]Ka, pf. mid. Pcpapai, 1st aor. pass. -IpdOr^v, vbls. PO.TOS,
-pare'os.
Pd\\a> (for */3aA-ia>, 195, 3, theme /foA-) throw, fut. p<xX (rarely
(3a.\\-rj<w ( 190) of continued action ; cf. 519), 2d aor. pa\ov,
1st pf. pp\T]Ka ( 218, 3), pf. mid. p^pXT^ai ( 224, 1), 1st aor.
pass. cpX^v ( 231, 2), vbl. P\TITOS.
pdir-Tw ( 194 ; theme /?a<-) dip, fut. pd\|/a>, 1st aor. pai(fa, pf. mid.
2d aor. pass. pd<j>Tjv, vbl. Pairr6s.
force, middle deponent ( 158, 3), regular, has also aor. pass.
was forced ( 510).
pip<xt make go, fut. Pipd<rw and Pipw ( 212, 1), 1st aor. ipipcura, vbl.
pipao-Tos.
( 197, 1 ; theme /3pw-) eat, 1st pf . fc'ppwKa (2d pf. partic.
, 220), pf. mid. Pe'ppcop.ai / other forms supplied from
q.v.
ptw (-aw, 292, 1) live, fut. piwo-ojiai ( 507), 2d aor. epv (rarely 1st
aor. e/3t(D(Ta), 1st pf. Pcptwica, pf. mid. pcpCcofiai, vbls. PKOTOS, PICOTCOS.
(/3iw-o-Ko/xai) dva-piwo-KOfxai ( 197) revive, 1st aor. dvpiwo-d|XT]v ( 207,
note 3), and 2d aor. dvcpiwv ( 207, note 3).
P\dirTa> ( 194; theme pXafi-) hurt, fut. p\dx|/w, 1st aor. KpXaiK 2d pf.
pp\a<{>a ( 219, 1), pf. mid. pepXajijiai, aorists pass. pXd<j>0t]v (1st)
and ipxdp^v (2d).
pXao-ravw ( 196,2; theme /3Aao-r-) sprout, 2d aor. cpXao-rov, 1st pf.
ppXdo-Tt]Ka ( 190) and sometimes IpXdo-TTiKa (cf. 178, 1).
/3dfa> speak (poetic), fut. /Sd^w.
fiaivw, Homer has 1st aor. with variable vowel ^^a-ero ( 201 b) ; also a
pres. /Sd-cr/cw ( 197) = /SatVw.
/3d\\w, epic 2d aor. forms p\-/i-T-r}v, /SX^-ro ( 207 a).
/3t-/3d-w, j3f-/37j-/At ( 193, 3 ; /3a-, epic = /SatVw gro), pres. partic. /3i/3dj.
;, epic poetry has also 2d aor. e/3pwp, 1st aor. pass,
384 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
P\ir- ( 193) see, fut. P\e\|/o|wu ( 507), 1st aor. p\x|/a.
PXTTO> (for */x(^)AtT-tw, 195, l,.from therne /xAir- (/xe'A.i, /meAir-os
honey} with sympathetic (3, before which /u, disappears) take honey,
1st aor. pXi<ra.
poo-Kw/eed, fut. POO-K^<TO> ( 190), vbl. POO-KTJT&S ( 190).
povX-o|jLai ( 193; theme /3ovA- and /JouAe-, 190), passive deponent
( 158, 3) will, wish, fut. povX^jo-ojiai ( 190), 1st aor.
and T|povX^j0iiv, perf. ptpovX^cu, vbl. pouXtjrds.
POU (-aw, 292, 3) cry out, fut. Po^o-ojj-ai ( 507), 1st aor.
(-ve-a>, 196, 4 ; theme J3v-) stop up, fut. ptxrw, 1st aor. p{J<ra,
pf. pass. ppv<r|wu ( 189), vbl. pvo-ros.
ft) (-ceo, 190; 193) mam/ (see 506), fut. ^ajjUo ( 213), 1st aor.
cytjtia, pf. yc-yan 1 !* 01 ( 190), pf. mid. and pass. yry*F L1 lH tc u ( 190),
vbls. yap.erds ( 188, 1) and ya-nTp-c'os.
(-ao>, 193) laugh, fut. -yeXeuroficu ( 188 ; 507), 1st aor. t^'Xao-a
( 188), 1st aor. pass, ^ao-e^v ( 189).
-<TK-o) ( 197 ; for /*()Xw-<r/cw, from theme AtXw- ( 38, 1) with sympa-
thetic j8, before which ^i is lost ; theme /j.o\- or /x(jS)Xw-) ^o (poetic),
fut. /w)XoO/uat, 2d aor. e/ioXoi/, 1st pf. /^-/x/3Xw-Ka (with sympathetic /3).
, Homer has also j86Xo/tat and a 2d pf. act. Trpo-pt-pov\-a prefer.
/Sow, epic and Ionic fut. jSwo-o^at, 1st aor. e/3o><ra, pf. mid. /S^/Sw^at, 1st aor.
pass. tfiAae-nv ( 189).
[root pax-] only 2d aor. e/3/mxe resounded (infin. ppaxeiv'), epic.
/3/o^w slumber (epic), 1st aor. ep<a (cf. 195, 2 a).
[root j8po%] swallow (epic), 1st aor. e/3poa, 2d pf. /S^Spoxa, 2d aor. pass.
partic. -/Spoxcis.
(-cio/iai) roar (poetic), 1st aor. mid. ejSpux^A"?"* 1st aor. pass.
partic. /fyux^efs, 2d pf. (from theme Ppvx-
yd-vv-/j.ai ( 196, 5) rejoice (poetic), the epic fut. yavfovonai (cf. 201 a)
retains -w- of present stem.
yt-ywis-a 2d pf. as pres. ( 535) shout (poetic), only partic. yeywvus
(cf. &v<j)ya). Other forms are from pres. yeyuvu or yeywvtu, fut.
yeyuvritTto, 1st aor. tyeyJ)vrj<ra. Also a present yeyuv-[<rKw ( 197).
yelvo/j.cu ( 195, 4) be born (poetic), deponent, but 1st aor.
begat, bore (see 508).
seized, epic 2d aor.
729] LIST OF VERBS 385
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
S) (-too)) rejoice (cf. 190), 2d pf. ^60, ( 535).
( 197) and Yqpw (-ao>, 292, 3) grow old, fut. yr]pdo-o|j.(u
( 507) rarely yr/pdo-w, 1st aor. e-yTJpdcra, 1st pf. -ye-y^paKa.
y(--yv-ofuu ( 193, 3; theme yoi/-, yev-, yv-, 14) become, be, fut. ytvi\-
o-onai ( 190), 2d aor. l^vopiv ( 158, 3), pf. ^^VTJJICU, 2d pf.
^ova ( 494, 2).
yi--yvw-a-Kw ( 197, 1 ; yi/w-) know, fut. yvwo-oixai ( 507), 2d aor. ihyvwv
(subj. yvui, opt. yvoi'r/v, irnpv. yv&Oi, inf. yi/uivcu, partic. yvovs, cf.
256), 1st pf. fyvwica, pf. mid. '^vota-y.ai ( 189), 1st aor. pass.
fyvwo-erjv ( 189), vbls. -yvftXTTds, -yvwo-reos ( 189).
>- grave, regular, but pf. mid. -yfykvmjicu and -y\vn[Acu (cf. 178, 1).
( 193) write, fut. ypaxj/a), 1st aor. e-ypcuj/a, 2d pf. ytypafya, pf.
mid. -Ye-ypa^iiai, 2d aor. pass. l-ypd^Tiv, vbl. ypdirrd^.
v^w ( 195, 2 ; y/avy-) ^rwn^, fut. -ypvlo^ 1 (rarely ypv&o, 507), 1st
aor.
8dK-vw ( 196, 1 ; theme &XK-, 8r/K-, 13) bite, fut. S^nai ( 507), 2d aor.
eSaKov ( 208), pf. mid. Bc'S^H-cu, 1st aor. pass.
777^0), in poetry also fut. yrjd-^a-u, and 1st aor.
yiyvo/j,ai, Ionic yivopai. For the forms of the 2d pf. (ye-yd-tiri,
yc-ya-vTa, etc.) with the weak root ya- (for *yi>-, 14 note) see
219 a. Ionic has also an aor. pass, fyen^i/ ( 510).
yiyvuvKw, Ionic ylvw<rKw, Herodotus has 1st aor. avtyvwa convinced.
yodu bewail (epic), fut. yo^ffo/j.ai ( 507), 2d aor. (from theme 70-) 760^
( 171 a).
[root 5a-] teach (poetic, cf. 5i-5c-<r/ca>), 2d aor. dtdaov ( 208, 1 a) and
Hdaov (infin. deSatedai, 208, 1 a; 199 b), 1st pf. deddrjKa ( 190),
and 2d pf. partic. 5e5ac6s ( 220), pf. mid. SeSd^at ( 190), 2d aor.
pass, as intrans. (see 514) eddrjv learned, fut. pass, as intrans.
8a'/i<ro(j.ai shall learn ( 514).
Satfa ( 195, 2; 5ai7-) rend (epic and lyric), fut. dcuo>, 1st aor. e5cua,
pf. mid. 5eddiy/j.ai, 1st aor. pass. tSaWnv-
Sai-vv-fjii ( 196, 5) entertain (poetic), mid. feast (for opt. daivvro see
211, 2 a), fut. 5cu'<rw, 1st aor. eSauro, 1st aor. pass, partic. 5cu<r0eis
(189).
5aio/uu divide (epic, cf. 5aT^o/u), pres. subj. 5d(i)^rai, pf. mid. 5^5cu/u.
(for *5a/r-ta>, 2 a ; 195, 4) kindle (poetic), 2d pf. 5^57;a blaze
( 494, 3).
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 25
386 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
Sajidtw (cf. 292, 6) subdue, 1st aor. ISdjiao-a, 1st aor. pass. !8a(jid(r0Tjv.
(Sap0-av-w) ( 196, 2) sleep (usually Kara-8ap0dv), 2d aor. Kar-e'8ap0ov,
1st pf. partic. Kara-SeSapOTjicws ( 190).
(Sare'o/Acu) (cf. Sat'o/xai) divide, 1st aor. mid. (dv^Sao-dfiiiv, pf. mid.
(dva)8'8a<rK.cu ( 189), vbl. (dva)ScurTos.
Se'SoiKa be afraid, see [8o].
SeCK-vv-jjti ( 196, 5) show (also Sa/cvvV), fut. 8w, 1st aor. e8ia, etc.,
regular. See 254.
(also SeCpw, 195, 4; theme Sep-, Sap-, 14, 1) flay, fut. Scpw, 1st
aor. eSeipa, pf. mid. SeSappai ( 224, note), 2d aor. pass. ISdprjv
( 232, 2).
ofiai ( 193) receive, fut. 8^o|xai, 1st aor. I8|d|njv, rarely eSex^v
( 158, 3). pf. Sc'Se-ynai, 1st aor. pass. ( 510) e8e'x0T]v (usually in
composition), vbl. SEKTCOS.
(for *8e/r-o>, 2 a, 193, 2 note) need, lack (cf. 199, 2), fut.
8^o-w ( 190), 1st aor. IS^o-a ( 190), 1st pf. SeS^Ka ( 190),
pf. mid. 886]ji<u ( 190), 1st aor. pass. 8^0T]v ( 190). Im-
personal 8ei it is necessary.
rw (-aw, 193) regulate (life), arbitrate, fut. 8iaiT^<ra>, 1st aor. 8iT)'-
TTjcra and -eSiTj'TTjcra ( 175, 1 and note), 1st pf. SeSiTjT^Ka ( 181),
pf. pass. 88iT)'TT]|xai, 1st aor. pass.
5dfj.-vr)-iJ.i ( 196, 3) and (doubtful) 5a/xmw subdue (poetic), pf. mid.
5t-dfj.r)-/j.ai ( 38. 1), 2d. aor. pass. tdd/j.r}v and rarely 1st tSwQ'nv
( 38, 1). Other forms are supplied from 5a^dfw ; as fut. 5a/xdw or
w ( 212, 1), 1st aor. tSanaaa. or epic tddna<r<ra ( 201 a), etc.
, Homer has 2d aor. eSpaBov (38).
dar^ofj.ai, Homer has also fut. dd(ro/j.ai and 1st aor. tSaaffawv ( 201 a).
dtarai appears (epic), 1st aor. ^Sodo-o-aro.
5t5ta (epic 5et'5ta) fear. See [5t'w].
delKvvfju, Ionic is fut. Sc'^w, 1st aor. eSc^a, etc.
5^/x-w ( 193) build (Ionic and poetic), 1st aor. eSet^a, pf. mid. S^-S/xij-^at
( 38, 1).
Styx-opal ( 193 ; theme SO/HC-, 8epK-, dpaK-, 14, 1 ; 38) look (poetic),
2d aor. e5pa/cov ( 208), 2d pf. dt-dopK-a ( 219, 3), aorists pass, with
active meaning (1st) edtpxe-rjv, and (2d) t$pdKT)v ( 232, 2).
5^w need, epic usually fctfo/icu, fut. devrj(TOfj.ai, 1st aor. tdeviqcra.
5tjpidofj.ai (active rare) contend. Other tenses from 8-rjpio/j.ai, fut. drjpicro-
ytxat, 1st aor. edrjplffd/j.rjv, and 1st aor. pass. eSrjpivdTjv (as if from *dr)pivw').
729] LIST OF VERBS 387
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. loiiic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
8i-8d-<rKft> ( 197, 1 ; root 6V, q.v., but the present theme (StSax- ?, cf.
OLOaxrj teaching) has been carried into the other tenses) teach, fut.
8i8d, 1st aor. I8i8aa (see 515, 1), 2d pf. SeSiSaxa, pf. mid. 8e-
SiSa-yjiai, 1st aor. pass. eSiSdxOTjv, vbls. 8i8aKTos, 8i8aKT&>s.
Si-Spa-o-Kta ( 197, 1 ; theme Spa-), only in composition, run away, fut.
8poUro(i<u ( 507), 2d aor. eSpav (subj. -Spw, -as, -a, etc., opt. -Spat'i/p
(like crnu'ip', 257), infin. -Spavat, partic. -Spas, -Sou, -av), 1st
pf . -Se'Spaica.
8-8-fjn ( 193, 3 ; for the inflection see 252) give, fut. 8o-&>, aor.
eSwKci ( 211, 3 ; for the inflection see 256), 1st pf. S&uica, pf. mid.
8'8o|xai ( 188, 1), 1st aor. pass. IS60i|v ( 188, 1), vbls. Soros, SOT&S.
[oYw] theme Sot-, Set-, Si-, 14, 2 (for *S/rot-, etc.), 1st aor. tScio-a, 1st
pf. 8'8oiica, and 2d pf. &8ia, rare in the singular (cf. 219 a ; 220 ;
and the inflection of rraToi/ 258) .
8iK- ( 193) pursue, fut. 8icof| or 8i|o|xai ( 507), etc., regular. For
Sio)Ka0a> see 191 a.
SOKW (-e'w, 190) seem, think, fut. 86, 1st aor. eSoga (1st pf.
pf. mid. Se'So'yp.ai, 1st aor. pass. ISoxOtiv.
8pw (-aw, 193) do, fut. Spacrw, etc., regular, but 1st aor. pass.
( 189), vbl. Spatrre'os ( 189).
Svva-fiai ( 193) be able (augment sometimes -rj- ; for accent of pres.
opt. see 200 note), fut. 8w^o-oficu, aor. pass. ISvv^Otjv (and rjSvvrj-
, pf. SeSvvtuxai, vbl. Svvar6$.
5^w, epic fut. ( 216) shall learn; cf. [5a-].
di.dpa,<TKu, Ionic StSp^jtr/cw, 8p-f\crofjiai, e5pi\v, etc. ( 15 a).
dtdw/ju, Homer has an unexplained fut. 8i5u><rw.
8lr)-/j.ou seek (Ionic and poetic) keeps 77 throughout the present (cf. 200 a),
fut. Sityiro/jLCu, 1st aor. 8ift<rd/j.r)v.
\_dirj- fj.i~\ make flee, act. only in impf. 3d pi. tv-dle<rav set on ; mid. flee,
pres. 3d pi. Sievrai, subj. Signal (cf. 200 note), opt. 3d sing. Bioiro
( 170, 4), infin. 5k<r0at.
[root 5i/c-], only 2d aor. ediKov threw.
[8tw] fear (epic), impf. dlov ( 171, a), epic 1st aor. e55fra ( 22 a),
epic 1st pf. delSoiKa (for *5e-/ro t -Ka, 16), 2d pf. 8ddia ( 16).
8oicu>, poetic forms are fut. do/ofa-w, 1st aor. <?56/o7<rct, pf. mid. 8eS6KT)fj.ai,
1st aor. pass. ^80^6^ (see 190).
^w) sound (mostly poetic), fut. SOUTT^O-W, etc. regular ( 187), 2d
pf. StSovira. (Originally *ySovTr&, as shown by epic aor.
388 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
SB-CO ( 193) cause to enter, enter ( 493, 1) (also rarely 8u-vw ( 196, 1)
sink), fut. Sforw, 1st aor. cSvo-a (trans., 494, 1), 2d aor. eSvv
(intrans. 494, 1, for the inflection see 257), 1st pf. Se'SvKa ( 494,
3), sometimes also Sc'SuKa transitive, pf . mid. Se'Sufiai, 1st aor. pass.
48v0tiv, vbl. 8xn-os.
8w (Sew, 199, 2 note) bind, fut. 8^|<rw, 1st aor. eSTjo-a, 1st pf. Sc'SeKa
( 188, 1), pf. mid. Se'Sejiai (fut. pf. Seo^o-ojum, 228), 1st aor. pass.
( 188, 1), vbls. SCTOS, STJTOS ( 188, 1) and Serbs'.
(for *eyep-o, 195, 4 ; theme eyop-, eyep-, eyp-, 14) wake, rouse,
fut. |Y P"- 1st aor. T]-yeipa. 2d aor. mid. T|-yp6p.T)v awoke, 2d pf. fyp-fj-
yopa (with sympathetic p for *cy-rryopa, 179), 1st aor. pass.
r\yepQi\v, vbl. eyepreos-
eyKb>}ud(i> praise, takes its augment and reduplication after the prepo-
sition ( 175, 1).
CYX 1 P"> attempt, l-yx l P^ w />"' * one's hands, augment after the prepo-
sition ( 175, 1) : as ei/ex^p^o-a.
[root eS for *o-e8-, 36] etofxai si/, usually Ka0'to}iai, fut. Ka98ov}iai (cf.
212, 1), [1st aor. elo-a] 1st aor. mid. elo-dpjv ( 172, 2).
eOe'X-w ( 193), or less often 0e'X- wish (irnpf. ffOtXov), fut. I0e\^cro> or
( 190), 1st aor. t|0e\T]<ra ( 190, but subj. eOtXrjvu or
, opt. fOfXrjaraL/jiL or 6\r)a-aL/M, etc.), 1st pf. T|0\i]Ka ( 190).
0it ( 292, 6; theme o-/re0-, 36 a) accustom, fut. 40iw ( 215),
1st aor. eWto-a ( 172, 2), 1st pf. el'0iica ( 180), pf. mid. eWwrnai
( 189, note), 1st aor. pass. et0o-0T]v ( 172, 2).
[#0) (for *(rpt@(i), 36 a)] be accustomed, 2d pf. ei'coOa /n accustomed
(for *o-e-o-/ro0a, cf. 16; 36 ; 37; 219, 3), 2d plupf. duBy.
elSov saw (2d aor.), see [18-] .
ed<f>dr), epic 1st aor. pass., probably from root pair- ( 172, 2) teas tumbled.
eyelpw, Homeric forms of 2d pf. are 3d pi. indie. typrjy6p8aai (?), 2d pi.
hnpv. mid. typ-fjyopde (for *-yop<T0e, 35), infin. mid. typ-rjydpOai (for
*-yopff6ai, 35).
cSw ea^, poetic for ta-diu, q.v., 2d pf. partic. td-rjdds.
[root e5] epic fut. infin. e<r<re<70cu, 1st aor. elaa or ^o-o-a ( 201 a). See also
pres. only in partic. e#wv being accustomed (epic), efada, epic and
Ionic also ew0a.
seem (poetic), 1st aor. eicrd/jL-^v and eetvawv ( 172, 2).
729] LIST OF VERBS 389
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
tlKd^w liken, guess (regular) augments usually to y- (cf. 173, 1).
ctKoj yield (regular). For uKaOov see 191 a.
[root i/c-, also IK- and otV, 14, 2 (for *ptLK-, etc., 2 a)], fut. etgw (cf.
519 note 2), 2d pf. HKCI ( 180) with 3d pi. etd<n = eoiiccuri, 2d
plupf. e'coKr; (for *l-pe-poLKrj) and 77/07 (cf. plupf. of ol&x, 259).
eiXXco see tXXw.
(etAoj(-e'w)) press hard, drive together, 1st aor. pass. (av-)ti\-f\Qi\v.
ct|u #0, see 261 ; tlpL be, see 262.
ttirov said (2d aor.), see [r-].
rfpyu ( 193) s/m in or OM, also ctpyvvpi and (rarely) lpyvvo> (196, 5)
s^w in, fut. etplw, 1st aor. etpfja, pf. mid. ctpYfiai, 1st aor. pass. dp\-
Qr\v, vbls. cipKTos, cIpKTc'os. With a rough breathing (cipy-) the
word is said to mean shut in, and with a smooth breathing (eipy-)
shut out, but the distinction is not always observed.
(ei/oo/xat) ask, fut. Ip^o-opai ( 190), 2d aor. -r\p6\i.t]v.
(eipw) theme ep- (for */r P"> 2 a) and prj- (for */r/o>7, 38, 1) say, fut.
pw, aor. supplied by etirov 6'aw/, 1st pf. etpTjica ( 178, 2 for *yre-
pprj-Ka, 16), pf. pass. eKpimai (fut. pf. etp^o-ofjtai), 1st aor. pass.
lppif|0T]v (fut. pass. pri0T|<ro|Jiat), vbls. pt]r6s, -reos-
etpw ( 195, 4 ; theme ep- for *aep-) intV, jom, 1st aor. -ctpa, 1st pf . -
pf. mid. etpjiai ( 180).
t<o call an assembly, augment rj/cKXry- and etK\rj- ( 175, 1).
[root CIK-] fut. ef^w ( 519, note 2) shall resemble. For epic
etc., see 219 a. Herodotus has also ol/ca = eotKa.
et'Xo-a> ( 193) ro/Z (poetic), fut. ei'Xoa-w etc. regular, but 1st aor. pass.
ci\fa6iiv ( 189).
eiXw and ef\w (poetic, mostly epic). Other tenses from root /reX- point to
*/reXXw as perhaps the proper epic form ; 1st aor. eXo-a (eeXo-a)
( 204 a), pf. pass. ceX/xat, 2d aor. pass. ed\rjv ( 232, 2). Herodotus
has 1st aor. -etXr/o-a, pf. mid. -e/X^/xat, 1st aor. pass. -eiX-rjdrjv.
ei[j.apTai. it is fated. See /meipofjiai.
eipyu, epic pres. always ttpyw shut in or out, other tenses from stem epy-,
*fcpy-, 2 a). For pf. mid. epx-arat, plupf. (e)e/>x-aro, see 226 a.
For etpyaOov, see 191 a. Herodotus commonly has epyu.
eipo/j.a.1 ask (Ionic), fut. et/>?7<ro/xcu ( 190) ; cf. tp4w.
etpu say (epic only), fut. ep^w, also 1st aor. pass, dp-fjd-rjv ( 172, 2).
dpu join, epic 1st aor. fyxrct ( 204 a), epic pf. mid. partic.
eTo-a. See -.
390 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
IXavvw (for *e'Aa-vv-a>, 196, 5, theme e'Aa-) drive, fut. &fi (212, 1), 1st
aor. ij\a<ra, 1st pf. IX^Xaxa, pf. pass. cMj\a|icu, 1st aor. pass.
T|\d6T]v, vbl. eXarc'os.
( 193) examine, confute, fut. eXfy|<i>, etc., regular, but pf. mid.
Xwi ( 179, 247).
Sw raise the war-cry, 1st aor. T|\'\ia.
eXiTTw, elXCTTw ( 195, 1 ; eAtK-) roll, fut. IXtt-w, 1st aor. el'Xiga ( 172, 2),
pf. pass. ctXi-yiuu, ( 180), 1st aor. pass. etXCxOtiv ( 172, 2), vbl. IXiKros.
eXK-a> ( 193), draw, fut. Xf;a>, other tenses from theme eA.*v-, 1st aor.
iXKv<ra ( 172, 2), 1st pf. e'iXicvKa ( 180), pf. mid. ciXKvo-nai
( 180; 189), 1st aor. pass. 6iXKveret]v ( 172, 2 ; 189), vbls. !XKT&>S,
[root IXvO-, eA.0-, 20], only 2d aor. ^X0ov (impv. e'A0e, 210, note),
and 2d pf. 4X^Xv0a ( 179). See lpxo(iai.
efjLw (-ceo) vomit, fut. l|jioi)|iai ( 507; 212, 1), 1st aor. tijieo-a ( 188).
ev-eSpeviw, waylay, lie in ambush, augment eV-TjS- ( 175, 1).
[root eve*-] -qve-yKa, cv-^voxa, cv^jve-yfiai, etc., cf. <f>e'p<i>.
4v0v|i.ovjjLai (-co/>uxi) consider, augment cv-eOvjj.- ( 175, 1).
196, 5, note) in prose regularly an<j>i'vv\5|u clothe, fut. dfw}>iw,
1st aor. T|p,<}>i<ra ( 174, 1), pf. mid. t|p.<J)ieo-(Jiai ( 181).
. See alpQ>.
turn round (poetic), 1st aor. &Ata ( 171 a), 1st aor. pass.
( 171 a).
Afrrw, Ionic t\lff<rw and eX*<r<rw ( 22).
e\7rw cawse to hope (mid. hope} epic, 2d pf. eoXTra (for */re-/roX7r-a, 180 ;
219, 3), 2d plupf. ^XTrea (for *e-yre-/:oX7rea, 17).
[root Av0-], poetic 2d aor. yXvdov (cf. 20), epic 2d pf. et'X^Xov^a and
t\-n\ovea ( 219 note 1), Ionic and poetic fut. AJ<ro/xat (507, for
*^\ve-ffOfMi 30; 186, 2).
( 195, 4 ; ^vap-) kill (poetic), 2d aor. ijvapov.
and tv-vtirw ( 193 ; theme o-eTr-, O-TT-, 14) tell, say (poetic), fut.
twn-?, ( 406 a ; 38, 1), 2d aor. tvi-airov ( 406 a ; 208 ; 171 a),
subj. tvl-ffTTw, opt. ^-(TTroijUt, impv. ivl-a-ires ( 170, note 1,
2d pi. impv. eo-Trere (for *^v-<nreTe, 34), infill. evL-airelv.
( 195, 1) also tv-lir-Tw ( 194) cft?Y?e (epic), 2d aor.
( 208, 1 a, Cf. 181) and rivi-rra-n-ov.
, epic fut. tffcru, 1st aor. 'taaa. ( 171 a) and ?ecra (for *^-/recr(7a, 172,
2), pf. mid. 2o>ccu and efyuu (partic. el^vos also in Attic tragedy).
729] LIST OF VERBS 391
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
ivo\\u> (-o>), harass, augment usually ^-w^- ( 175, note).
HKCI am like, see [CIK-].
eoprdtw keep a festival, augment eeop- (for yap-, 17).
[root eV- (for /re7r-, 2 a)] say, only 2d aor. elirov ( 208, 1), or (seldom
in prose) etira ( 207, note 1), subj. ei7ra>, opt. CITTOI/U, impv. cure
( 210, note), infin. diriw, partic. eiTrwv.
cirCo-rafjiai ( 193) know, understand (impf. ^Tmrra/A^v ; for accent of
pres. opt. see 200, note), fut. eiri<rTTJ<ro(j.ai, aor. TJiri<rr/j6T|v
(158,3).
irio-TaTw (-w) oversee, augment eVeor- ( 175, 1).
practise, augment eVerT/- ( 175, 1).
w be a guardian, augment eTrerpoTr- ( 175, 1).
ir-onai ( 193; theme CTT- for *<re7r-, 36, and O-TT-, H), follow (impf.
aTro/xrjv, 172, 2 with irregular breathing), fut. \J/op.ai. 2d aor. lo-iro-
P.TJV ( 208, with irregular breathing, subj. O-TTW/XCU, opt. (nroLfjLrjv, etc.).
irpid|ri]v bought, see [vrpta-].
(epa-/xat, 193 ; deponent passive, 158, 3), present in prose supplied
by 6pw(-ao>) love, 1st aor. ripdo-O-qv, fell in love ( 529), fut. epcur-
OTJO-OIACU shall fall in loce ( 519, note 2), vbl. epao-ros.
( 292, 6; theme /repy-, 2 a) worA;; augment et- ( 172, 2)
rarely ^-; reduplication always et- ( 180), 1st aor. elp-ycurdnTjv, pf.
( 189), 1st aor. pass. elp-ydo-Oiiv ( 510), vbl. ep-ycurrc'os.
^TTW be busy about, handle (Ionic and poetic), fut. tyw, 2d aor.
(subj. O-TTW, etc., infin. o-7ret', partic. rir&r). For 2d aor. mid., subj.,
opt., etc., Homeric Mss. often have &T7ru>/u, cffirot/j.ijv, etc., following
an elided vowel, but these can always be read <T7rtD/u, aTrolwv, with-
out the preceding elision ; as &/j.a <nrfodai for (L^ e<rirt(T0ai. Some
editors contend for a reduplicated aorist without augment, *<re-<T7r-,
giving e<T7r-. Homer has 2d sing. impv. 0-7reto(?). Herodotus has 1st
aor. pass, irepi-tyd-riaav ( 171 b).
fpa/j.a.1 love (poetic), in poetry also aor. mid. f]pa<r(ff'}a.^T]v.
. See dpyw.
w ( 195, 2, for * F epy-M = *pepfr (i.e. */rep<r5o>, 11) = /rfySw, 35)
do (Ionic and poetic, cf. /Wfw), fut. fyfa, 1st aor. tpta ( 171 a), 2d pf.
copy a (for */re-/ro/o7-a, 180), 2d plupf. Mpyea (for *t-pe-popyea, 17).
id-u ( 193) support, prop (mostly poetic), regular, butpf. mid. tp--/ipeL<r-
/*eu ( 179, 189), Homeric 2d pi. ep-TjpiS-arai ( 226 a), plupf. tp-rjptd-
OLTO (Mss. ipviptSaTai, -tdaro ; see 219 a).
392 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
6pir-i> creep (impf. ctpTrov 172, 2), fut. p\|/.
epp-to ( 193), go away, perish, fut. cpprjo-w ( 190), 1st aor. tjppT]<ra
( 190), 1st pf. (etV-)*|ppT)Ka ( 190).
epXOficu ( 193) go, come, only in pres. and impf.; fut. supplied ( 164)
by pres. of etju go ( 261, 2), aor. supplied ( 164) by 2d aor.
TJ\0ov, and pf. by 2d pf. \^\v0a. See
[root ep-] ask, see (ctpo/xat).
<r0ia> (probably for *eS-0i-o>, 26; 191 a; 195) eat (impf. rj
fut. 8o|icu ( 216), aor. supplied by 2d aor. e^a-yov, 1st pf. l8TJ8oKa
( 179), pf. mid. I8t|8(r|jiai, 1st aor. pass. ri$ta6r)v, vbls. ISeo-ros,- TOS.
<TTIW (-au>) entertain, augments to ct- ( 172, 2).
(ev>So>, 193) usually Ka0-v8o>, sleep (impf. KaOrjvSov and eKaOtv&ov,
174, 1), fut. Ka0v8V ( 190), vbl. KaOevSrjTeov ( 190).
V c <-co ( 197; tvp-, evpe-, 190) find, fut. vp^<r ( 190), 2d aor.
tjvpov (impv. i>pe, 210, note), 1st pf. r\vpr\Ka. ( 190), pf. mid.
cv'pTjucu ( 190), 1st aor. pass. vp 0T lv ( 188, 1), vbls. evperos, -re'os
( 188, 1).
V(j>paivco ( 195, 4; etx^pav-) cheer, fut. v<f>pavci>, 1st aor. rju<|)pava
( 204, note 2), 1st aor. pass. Tjv<|>pa,v0iiv.
( 193, 2) tear (Ionic and poetic) 1st aor. ypeiZa, also 2d aor. (both
trans, and intrans., 207 note 3) ypLKov, pf. mid. ^p--rjpiy-/j.ai ( 179 ;
219 a).
iVw overthrow, epic 2d pf. tp--/ipnra ( 179; 219, note 2), pf. mid..
3d sing, tp-tpnrro ( 179 a).
ffvu ( 195, 1 ; e/oer-) row (poetic) epic 1st aor. ^/>e<7(<r)a.
w ask (epic).
( 195, 2 ; epi5-) contend, epic 1st aor. ypi<r((r)a ( 201 a).
poetic also epirvfa, 1st aor. eipTrvva ( 172, 2).
v-w ( 196, 2) eruct, 2d aor. ypvyov.
epwu ( 193) and tpvK-av-w ( 196, 2) hold back, epic 2d aor. -fipvKaKov.
pv-/j.ai and tpv-/j,ai (for *e/rpu,ucu) protect, watch (Ionic and poetic), pres.
3d pi. dpv-arai ( 167 d), impf. elpvaro ( 167 d), fut. e(i~)pv<r((T')o[j.ai,
1st aor. e(l)pv(r((T^dfji.'rjv. Forms often coincide with those of tpvu.
tpt-w ( 193 ; theme fepv-, 2 a) draw (Ionic and poetic), fut. epvw ( 216),
fut. mid. epv<r<rofj.ai, 1st aor. etpvva ( 172, 2) and epva-a ( 171 a), pf.
mid. etpvucu and eipv<r/j.ai ( 189), 3d pi. eipt-arcu ( 226 a). Forms
often coincide with those of epD/xcu.
, poetic for ecrtftw ea^, epic 2d pf. partic.
729] LIST OF VERBS 393
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
ux-op.ai (193, v\~) P ra y-> boast, middle deponent ( 158, 3), fut. vojicu,
1st aor. T)va.)iT]v, pf. ^{ry^ou.
(eX&o) hate (dir-)x0-avo-[iai ( 196, 2) make oneself hated (middle de-
ponent, 158, 3), fut. (dir-)ex VH ai ( 190), 2d aor. (dir-)Tj X e6-
R v, pf. (du-^X^F" ( 190).
KX- ( 193, stem e x -for *^X^ 3G 5 40 > X-, 14 > W* 8S ) ^ aye (impf.
etX w ' 172 ' 2 )' fllt '^ w or <OCV ( 519, note 2), 2d aor. <r X ov
( 208, subj. (T^w, opt. o-^or/xt or (rxotrjv, impv. 0-;^ 170, note 1,
infin. o'xeu', partic. trxwv), 1st pf. fcrxiiKa, pf. mid. crxTifJ.ai, as aor.
pass, w-xopp i s use( i ( 515, 1), [1st aor. pass. l<T\iOv)v, late],
vbls. KTOS, <rxT6s, and IKTCOS, (TXCTCOS.
^w ( 193) cook, fut. l/^<r ( 190), 1st aor. -n\|nio-a ( 190), vbl.
!4>06 S (for *e^-T05, 35), tyrjTos ( 190).
iw (-aw, 193) /e< alone, allow, fut. lourw ( 187; for eao-o/xai as pass.
see 515, 1 ; 519, note 2), 1st aor. ctdo-a, etc., regular, but aug-
ment and reduplication cl- ( 172, 2 ; 180).
ev-y-vv-ju ( 196, 5; theme evy-, vy-, 14, 2), yo&e, join, fut.
1st aor. e5v|a, pf. mid. ^evyp-ai. 2d aor. pass. liY r l v ( - ; ^-? 2).
tew ( 199, 2) boil, fut. t&n ( 188), 1st aor. <ra ( 188).
t &, & etc '' 199 3 ) live > fut Wr (and ^<ro/u, 507). Other
forms supplied ( 161) by (3iw /z't?e.
(6v-vv-|it ( 196, note) <7?W, 1st aor. e't&xra, pf. mid. a>pai.
(-ao>) be vigorous, also Tjpa-o-KO) ( 197) to come to man's estate, fut.
TiP^crw, etc. regular.
( 193) 6e pleased, 1st aor. 4j<r<V ( 1 58 > 3 ) fut - 'no- ^ (ro J iai
( 158, 3).
T)\0ov cwc, see [A.v^-] .
sit, see 265.
say, see 266.
Sore, cf. [CVCK-] and <j>^pw.
(-ao/xat) ?>e vanquished, regular passive deponent (158, 3) ; fut.
both T]TT^(rop.ai and T]TTT^0T|<ropLai ( 519, note 2).
pres. e?w (doubtful) occurs in Homer according to the Mss.
wAtt, 1st aor. pass, (mostly poetic and Ionic) efrtxQ-nv.
(-dw) 6e vigorous. Homer has r?/3<iw with long a. (See 199 b.)
Herodotus has effcroO/xat (i.e. -6o,ucu), etc.
394: LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
0<xir-Tft> ( 194; theme 0a<-, 41) bury, fut, 0dx|/a>, 1st aor. e0ax|/a, pf.
mid. T0ajijjLai, 2d aor. pass. 4rd<|>tjv, vbl. Oairr&s.
0au|Ad ( 292, 6) admire, fut. 0av|iatro|*eu ( 507), otherwise regular.
0\w w/sA, see 0e'\.
0p|A<uva> ( 195, 4) tvarm, regular, but 1st aor. lOepjiTjva ( 204, note 2),
0a> ( 193, note) run, fut. 0v<rojiai ( 507), other forms supplied by
other verbs ( 164).
0\ip-a> ( 193, 1) press, fut. 0\tx|/, 1st aor. i6\u|ra, 2d perf. T0\i<J>a
(219, 1), (pf. mid. Te'flAZ/x/xcu) , 1st aor. pass. e0XC<J>0T]v.
(d7ro-)0VT)<rK ( 197, suffix -IO-K- contrary to 197; theme Oav-, Ovr)-,
38, 1) die, fut. (a.7ro-) 0avovp.<u, 2d aor. (d?r-)0avov, 1st pf.
T^OvijKa, but often 2d pf. -H-Ova-rov, etc., see 220 (2d pf. partic.
renews is for Te-0i/r/-ws, cf. 17), fut. pf. T0v^ ( 230). In
prose regularly aTroOvyo-Kw, but pf. rffoqica.
0paTT ( 195, 1 ; Opa^-), disturb, 1st aor. c0pa|a, 1st aor. pass. 40pdx0T]v ;
see rapaTTO).
0pav-co ( 193) bruise, fut. 0pavo-a>, 1st aor. eOpavtra, pf. mid. T0pavp,ai.
and reOpavo-jjiai ( 189), 1st aor. pass. 40pav<r0T]v ( 189).
0pe|op.ai, see Tp'x.
0pvir-T ( 194; theme Opvcf>-, 41) crush or weaken, fut. mid. 0pv\|/op.<u
(1st aor. Z0pv{j/a), pf. mid. i^Opv^ai, 1st aor. pass. 40pv4>0Tjv.
( 197, suffix -IO-K- contrary to 197; theme Oop-, Opo)-, 38, 1)
leap, fut. Oopovfiai ( 507), 2d aor. 60opov.
( 195, 3), bloom (poetic), 2d pf. rlftqXa be in bloom ( 535). For
Oa\-t0w see 191 a.
, 1st aor. pass. tdaQdyv, rarely in Herodotus.
Oclvw ( 195, 4; Oev-} smite (poetic), fut. 0ev&, 1st aor. H8eiva (epic), 2d
aor. edevov.
6 1 papai warm one's self (poetic), fut. etp<rofj.ai (cf. 213 a), 2d aor. pass.
as intrans. ( 514) $8tp-nv (only subj. deptw, 233, 1 a).
[root #77-] milk, only pres. infin. Ofjcrdai ( 200 a) and 1st aor. cdrjo-d/jL-rjv.
6-rjeofj.aL gaze at, admire (epic for flew/xcu (-do/zcu)), fut. 6r)-/i<roiJ.ai, 1st aor.
6i.yy-di>-(*) ( 196, 2 ; #17-) touch (poetic, rare in prose), fut. dO-opai ( 507),
2d aor. eOiyov.
6\u>(-d<i)} bruise (Ionic and poetic), 1st aor. e0\a<ra, pf. mid. re
( 189), 1st aor. pass. ^OXd^v ( 189).
, Homer has 2d aor. pass. trptQ-riv ( 41).
729] LIST OF VERBS 395
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
06o> ( 193, 1) sacrifice, i\it. 0co-&>, 1st aor. 0vo-a, 1st pf. re'Ovica, pf. mid.
T0v|xcu, 1st aor. pass. Tv0t]v ( 40).
[root 18- for * F i8, 2 a) see, 2d aor. elSov saw (for *e / riSov, 172, 2;
impv. I8e, 210, note), 2d pf. ol8a know (018-, eiS-, 18- ; for the in-
flection see 259), fut. eta-opai, vbl. Urre'os.
I8pw(-oo)) sweat, sometimes contracts to <o instead of ov (as partic. dat.
sing. iBp&vri), fut. I8ptt<rtt, etc., regular.
Hc-pai ( 193, theme *fle-, cf . Latin in-yi-tus) strive, desire, usually in
composition as Trap-te/xat leg. Its forms cannot be distinguished
from those of rr^u.
l' (for *<ri-o-8w, 193, 3) usually Ka0-ico, seat or sit (impf. e/ca^ov,
174, 1), fut. Ka0i ( 215), 1st aor. Ka0i<ra and Ka0i<ra ( 174, 1).
ifrjp.1 (for *(n-(rrf-fJiL, 193, 3) send; for the inflection see 260, fut. -HO-W,
aor. Tpca (see 211, 3), 1st pf. ettca ( 180), pf. mid. cljjtai ( 180),
1st aor. pass. i0T]v ( 172, 2).
(d<-) iKvov(j.cu (-e'o/xou) ( 196, 4; IK-) come (middle deponent, 158, 3),
fut. (<i<j[>-)iop.<u, 2d aor. (d<-)iKOfn]v, pf. (d<^-)l-YfJiai.
t\d-o-KO(iai ( 197) propitiate (middle deponent, 158, 3), fut. iXd.o-ofi.cu.
1st aor. tXcurdnnv, 1st aor. pass. t\d<r0Tjv ( 510).
I'XXw ( 195, 3) roll, 1st aor. tXa (sometimes printed etAAco and eTAa).
l'o-Tt](xi ( 193, 3 ; for *cn-cm7-/Ai, 36) set, place (for the inflection see
253), fut. o-TTJo-a>, 1st aor. m]<ra caused to stand ( 207, note 3),
2d aor. w-rrjv stood ( 207, note 3 ; inflection 257), 1st pf. i(o-riKa
(for *<re-<rTr7-Ka, 36; plupf. do-rrJKr) for *-cr-a-Tr)K-rj), with 2d pf.
&TTO.TOV, etc. ( 258), 1st aor. pass. lo-rdOtiv, vbls. o-raros, o-rareos.
and 66vw ( 196, 1) ri<s/i (poetic).
, Attic idXXw ( 195, 3) put forth, send (poetic), fut. mXa), 1st aor. fyXa.
(for */rte/uat) desire. In Homer always with long t and almost always
with initial p, (epic) 1st aor. (tyei<rd[j.T)v.
ir)/j.L (see 260 a), for Ionic ^.e/iert^j/os see fj.ediy/j.1.
iKvov/j.a.1, poetic are also t'/cw and ix-a. ( 196, 2), epic 1st aor. lov ( 201 b).
tXd<r/co/uai, epic is also pres. tXdoyuat (and possibly i'Xa/icu), 1st aor. tXatro-d/xTyv
( 201 a), 1st pf. "\rjKa ( 494, 3) be propitious, 2d pf. impv. only
220).
( 195, 1 ; i/xavr-) epic 1st aor. ifj.a<ra ( 171 a) and t^tacrcra ( 201 a).
ifj.dpu ( 195, 4 ; i^ie/o-) long for (Ionic and poetic), also deponent 1/j.elpo-
fj.at, aor. ifj.eipdfj.rjv (epic), aor. i^Q-r\v (Ionic) ; see 158, 3.
396 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
l<rxvcuvo> ( 195, 4) make lean or dry, fut. l<rx.avw, 1st aor.
( 204, note 2), 1st aor. pass, lo-xvdvO^v.
( 193, 3, for *o-i-o-x-w, 36, 40) have, hold, cf. X o>.
( 195, 4; Ka$ap-) purify, fut. Ka0apu>, 1st aor. Ka6i]pa and
K<x6apa ( 204, note 2), pf. mid. KCKaOap^ai, 1st aor. pass.
Ka0dp0T]v.
xa6 e'ofjLcu sit down, see ?OJJL<U; for impf. cKa&tofj/qv see 174, 1.
Ka0-vSa> sleep, see v8w.
Ka0-a> set, sit, see ta>.
xatvco ( 195, 4; theme KOV-, KOV-, 14, 1) killjfnt. KO,VW, 2d aor. eicavov,
2dpf. K^Kova ( 219, 3).
KaCa> (for Kap-ua, 195, 4; theme /cav- or /ca/r-, 2 a), also KO.W ( 21)
burn, fut. Kavtrw, 1st aor. tKCUxra, 1st pf. Kc'icauica, pf. mid. KCKavfiai.,
1st aor. pass. Kav0T]v.
Ka\iv8ovp.ai (-eo/xat) wander about, cf. Ku\iv8a>.
KoXvir-Tw ( 194; KaA.u/?-) cover, fut. KaAvvJ/co. 1st aor. cKoLXv\)/a, pf. mid.
KKd\vfjL|i.ai, 1st aor. pass. K<x\v<|>0t]v.
Ka\w(-eo>) call, fut. Ka\ ( 212, 1), 1st aor. !ii\<ra ( 188), 1st pf.
KtKX^Ka ( 218, 3),pf. mid. K^XT^CU ( 224, 1), 1st aor. pass. CKX^J-
e^v (38, 1), vbls. KXTJTOS, KX^TWS.
Kdji-vw ( 196, 1 ; Ka/x-) labor, fut. Ka^oO^ai ( 507), 2d aor. cKajjiov, 1st
pf. K^K|XT|Ka (218, 3).
( 194 ; Ka//,7r-) 6enrf, fut. Kan\|/w, 1st aor. Kica|A\|/a, pf. mid. K^-
( 247), 1st aor. pass. KoLfji<|)0t]v, vbl. Kajjur-Tos.
(-eco) accuse, for the augment Karri- see 175, 1.
Ki-|i(u ( 193) lie (for the inflection see 264), fut. Keio-ojiai.
Ktpco ( 195, 4; theme Kep-, /cap-) shear, fut. Kpw, 1st aor. eKeipa, pf.
mid. KKapp.ai ( 224, note), 2d aor. ^ass. IKO-P^V ( 232, 2).
Kai-vv-fji.ai ( 196, 5) excel (poetic), pf. K^/cao>tcu ( r>3">).
Kale*, epic 1st aor. e/cT/a (i.e. *e-K-r)f-a< 204) and 1st aor. partic. /cf'as
(poetic), also 2d aor. pass, as intrans. ( 514) ^0,77^ burned (epic and
Ionic).
fw split (epic), fut. *e(i<r<ra>, 1st aor. e/c^a(r(o-)a.
, epic 1st aor. e/cepo-a ( 204 a), also poetic 1st aor. pass. <?/c<?p07?i>.
/ce-/ca5oj', epic 2d aor. ( 208, 1 a) only partic. act. KeKaS&v depriving,
and 3d pi. mid. as pass. ( 515, 1 a) KeKddovro were made to retire.
Fut. from aor. stem ( 519 a) /ce-Ka5^-<rw ( 190) shall deprive.
729] LIST OF VERBS 397
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
K\v- ( 193) command, fut. KcXcvcru, 1st aor. eto-'Xevo-a. 1st pf. KK-
XevKa. pf. mid. KeKe'XevcrpLcu ( 189), 1st aor. pass. eK\v<r0^v ( 189).
Kpdv-vu-(u and Kepav-vv-w ( 196, note; theme /cepa-, possibly for
*/cepao--) mix, 1st aor. cicc'pao-a, pf. mid. KKpap.ai ( 38, 1), 1st aor.
pass. cKepdo-O-qv, and Kpd0i]v ( 38, 1).
Kp8aiv ( 195, 4) gain, fut. Kp8avw, 1st aor. K'p8ava ( 204, note 2).
KTjpt>TT<o ( 195, 1 ; KrjpvK-) proclaim, fut. Kt]pv|, 1st aor. 4idjpua, 2d
pf. KK^pvxa, pf. mid. KeK^pvyfAai, 1st aor. pass. tKi\pv\Qi\v.
KI-XPT]-|U ( 193, 3; xpa-> XPT> 13 ) lend (mid. borrow, 506), fut.
XP^(TW, 1st aor. 'xpTi<ra, 1st pf. K\pt]Ka. pf. inid. Ke'xpT]|jLcu.
K\dta) ( 195, note 1; /cAayy-) also KXayy-dvu ( 196, 2), resound,
scream, fut. K\<ryw, 1st aor. IicXa^o, 2d pf. KCKXa-y-ya.
K\aa> (for */cAa/r-ta>, 195, 4; theme /cAxxv- or K\ap-, 2 a), also K\dw
( 21) weep, fut. K\av<ro}xai ( 507) rarely /cXavo-ov/xat ( 214) or
( 190) ; 1st aor. c'tcXavo-a, pf. mid. ice'icXavficu.
195, 3) ZarccZ (of ships) ; poetic for (kc'XXw, fut. fcAerw ( 213 a),
1st aor. KKeX<ra ( 204 a).
KfXo/u order (poetic = KeXetfw), fut. KeX^<ro/iat ( 190), 1st aor. ^iceXTjcrd^v
( 190), and epic 2d aor. e-Ke-K\-6/j.r}i> ( 208 ; 208, 1 a).
Kci/r(3(-^w) prick (with a goad) Ionic and poetic ; fut. Kevr^a-w, etc., regu-
lar, but Homer has 1st aor. infin. K^va-ai (for *Kevr-(ra.i, cf. 204 a).
Kepdvw/j.1, Ionic and poetic also Ktp-vrj-fu and ^^(-dw) and epic pres. impv.
/c^/ocue.
Kepdaivw Ionic 1st aor. tK^pd^va (cf. 204, note 2). Herodotus has also
forms from a stem fcepSe- ; as fut. Kep5r)cro/Mii ( 507), 1st aor. eKfydrjo-a.
KetOw ( 193) hide (poetic), fut. Keuaw, 1st aor. c/ceutra, 2d aor. cKvdov,
with subj. /ce/ci5^w ( 208, 1 a), 2d pf. /c<?-/cev0-a ( 219, note 1) with
pres. meaning ( 535).
Kr)5u make concerned (poetic), mid. be concerned, fut. K^STJO-W ( 190) and
KeKadriffw ( 519 a), 1st aor. 6x778770-01 ( 190) and aor. mid. (once)
( 188), 2d pf. /c<?-/c7?5-a ( 535) be concerned ( 494, 3).
( 196, 2 ; theme /%-), also epic Ktx&vw come upon, reach (poetic),
fut. Kixticrofj.ai ( 190 ; 507), 2d aor. ZKIXOV, also 2d aor. pass, as
intrans. ( 514) Mx"n v (subj. Kixtfu, pi. Kix^o/j-ev, etc., 233, 1 a ;
Mss. /a^eta, etc.). A mid. partic. Kix^fJ-evos is perhaps to be referred
to a theoretical *K/x 7 7A* t -
Kidvrifu scatter = ffKldvyfu, q.v.
Kipvrjfj.1. See Kepdwvfju.
fr, poetic 2d aor. e K \ayov, poetic 2d pf. Kt K \-r)ya ( 219, 2).
398 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
K\ir-T0) ( 194; KAOTT-, K\7T-, KAttTT-, 14, 1) Steal, flit. K\\|/W. 1st aOl*.
K\\|/a, 2d pf. K6KXo<|>a ( 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. ice'icXc^ou, 2d aor.
pass. lK\dirT)v ( 232, 2).
K\TJ'-W, later K\(W ( 193) shut, f ut. K\T|O-W, 1st aor. eicX-no-a, 1st pf . KK\TiKa,
pf. mid. KK\TKJ.aL. 1st aor. pass. iK\T|'<r0T)v ( 189).
K\tvw (for *K\iv-ita, 195, 4) bend, incline, flit. icXivw ( 213), 1st aor.
cK\lva ( 204), pf. mid. KKXi|xai, 1st aor. pass. iKXiOijv, and some-
times 2d aor. pass. |K\IVTJV.
K\W (-aw) break, (fut. KAao-co), 1st aor. cKXewa, pf. mid. KKXa<r(i<u
( 189), 1st aor. pass. licXac-e^v ( 189).
KVCUCO ( 193) scrape, fut. KVCUO-W, 1st aor. cxvaio-a, 1st pf. KCKVCUKO,, pf.
mid. -KKvcuo-fAcu ( 189), 1st aor. pass. -Kvai<r6T]v ( 189).
, Kvfj, etc., 199, 3) = Kvat'oo scrape, 1st aor. Kvtj<ra, pf. mid.
( 189), 1st aor. pass. 6Kv^j<r0Tiv ( 189).
tw ( 195, 2 ; Ko/xiS-) care for, carry, fut. KO|II ( 215), 1st aor. IKO-
jiio-a, 1st pf. KK6(jiiKa, pf. mid. KK6fj.i(r|iai ( 189, note), 1st aor.
pass. KO(jtC<r8t]v ( 189, note).
( 194 ; KOTT-) cut, fut. KO\}/W (but fut. pf. KKo\|rop.ai is often used
instead, 538, note), 1st aor. co\|/a, 2d pf. KKo<t>a ( 219, 1), pf.
mid. K^Koiiptai, 2d aor. pass. iKoirtjv.
( 195, 2; Kpay-, Kpdy-, 13) cry out, 2d aor. Kpa<yov, 2d pf.
, fut. pf. K6Kpa|o)xai ( 538, note).
, 1st aor. pass. tK\t<t>6rjv (Ionic and poetic).
o; (epic KXTjifw) celebrate in song (poetic), fut. /cXrjVw, 1st aor. K\ri<ra,
rarely <?/cX^a ( 195, 2 a).
hear (poetic), 2d aor. CK\VOV (impv. K\v6i, /cXOre; see 210 a) : also
reduplicated aor. impv. (epic) /c6cXv0t, K^/cXure ( 208, 1 a).
Kop4v-vv-(ju ( 196, note) satiate (Ionic and poetic ; rare in prose), fut.
Kopfoo) ( 188) and (epic) icopeu ( 37), 1st aor. ^/c6/oe<ra ( 188), epic
2d pf. partic. KeKoprjus satisfied ( 494, 3), pf. mid. K6/c6/>e<r,ucu ( 189)
and (epic) Kcripimat ( 188, 1).
( 195, 1 ; Kopvd-} equip (poetic), 1st aor. partic. mid.
fj.evos ( 201 a), pf. mid. partic. KKopv6/j.evos.
be angry (epic), 1st aor. (?/c6Te<ra ( 188), and 2d pf. partic.
( 195, 4) and Kpaatvw ( 195, 4, Mss. Kpaiaivu'} accomplish (poetic)
are from theme Kpav- and xpaav- (see the declension of Kap-q, 115,
9 a, and cf. 292, 8 note) ; fut. Kpav&, 1st aor. etcpava, epic eKpyva and
(Mss. eKp^Tji/a), pf. mid. 3d sing. Kf-Kpav-rat, ( 247) and epic
i, 1st aor. pass. tKpdve-rjv and tKpddi>6iiv.
729] LIST OF VERBS 399
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the'
bottom of the page.]
Kpe'na-H' 011 ( 193) hang (used as a passive of Kpe/xavvu/xi)? fu
<ro|iai. (For accent of pres. opt. see 200, note.)
Kpejidv-vv-jxi ( 196, note) suspend, fut. KpcpM ( 212, 1), 1st aor.
jiao-a, 1st aor. pass. iKptudo-OTjv ( 189), vbl. Kp^ao-Tos ( 189).
Kptvw (for *Kpiv-o, 195, 4) judge, fut. Kpivw ( 213), 1st aor. i'
( 204), 1st pf. KCKpiica ( 218, 1), pf. mid. K^cpipai, 1st aor. pass.
Kpl0T]V.
Kpov-w ( 193) beat, regular, but 1st aor. pass. Kpovo-0T]v ( 189).
Kpvir-Tw ( 194 ; *pv<-) conceal, fut. Kpv\|/o>, 1st aor. Kpu\|/a, pf. mid.
KKpv(j.fj.ai. 1st aor. pass. lKpv<j>0T]v, vbls. Kpvirros, icpvirreos.
(a7ro-)KTiv (for *KTv-iw, 195, 4; theme KTOV-, KTCV-, KTO.V- ( 14, 1)
kill, fut. (d7ro-)KTv<S, 1st aor. (d7r-)eKTiva, 2d pf. (a7r-)KTova
(219, 3). For the passive, (a7ro-)6vrj<TKQ) is regularly used ( 513).
(a7ro-)KT(vv(it and (a7ro-)KTavvo> = (a7ro-)KTCvw kill. (These are some-
times printed jerciyyv/u, -vw, or KTiwvfU, -vw.)
KT(o|iai (-ao/xai) acquire, fut. KT^a-opiai, 1st aor. KTT]<rd|it]v ( 158, 3), pf.
(reduplication contrary to 178, 1) possess ( 535) (fut. pf.
shall possess, 538, note), 1st aor. pass. e*T-f]Qi\v ( 510).
( 193) roll (cf. KaAu/Sofywu), 1st aor. !icv\io-a ( 34), pf. mid.
KKv\io-ncu ( 189), 1st aor. pass. !Kv\i<r0T]v ( 189). From IKV-
Xlcra a present KvAfw was later formed.
TW ( 194 ; Kv(f>-) stoop, fut. KtuJ/w, 1st aor. !ion|ra, 2d pf. KKv<j>a.
i also Kpl/j.v-rjiJ.1 (mid. Kpl^va^ai be suspended), usually printed
( 195, 2 ; K/M7-) creaA;, squeak, 2d aor. c/cpt/coi/ (cf. 195, 2, note 2),
2dpf. /c^/cyot7a ( 219, 2).
, poetic 2d aor. pass, (rare) Kp6<pr]v.
vu, Ionic fut. Krevtw (Mss. sometimes /cra^w), 2d aor. (poetic) iK.ro.vov
and e/crai/ (for *-KTV-V, 14, note), exras, etc. (subj. Mss.
211, 1 a-b, infin. tfrd/j-evai, partic. /eras), 1st aor. pass, (epic)
(for *e-KTv-6r]v, contrary to 231, 4). Homer uses the fut. mid. and
aor. mid. as passive also ( 515, 1 a).
( 292, 6) found, epic2d aor. partic. as pass. ( 515, 1 a)
(-4(0) resound (poetic), regular, but 2d aor. KTVTTOI>.
i, Ionic perf. mid. e-xrij/xat ( 178, 1).
(-&>) kiss, fut. Kwri<Tw, etc., regular, but poetic 1st aor.
( 193) meet with, happen (poetic), fut. Ktpaw ( 213 a), 1st aor.
( 204 a). xvpG) (-^w) = KO/JW, fut. Kvp-f)<ru, etc., is regular.
400 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
\tryx<xva> ( 196, 2; theme Aa^-, AT^-, ^) obtain by lot, fut. X^ofjiai
( 507), 2d aor. 5fXa X ov ( 186, 1), 2d pf. c^a ( 178, 2), pf. mid.
etXiTyH-ai, 1st aor. pass. cX^x^ 1 !^ vbl. X^KTCOS.
Xajjtpdvw ( 196, 2 ; theme Xa/3-, Ar?/?-, 13) take, fut. Xrf|i|/o|iai ( 507),
2d aor. cXapov ( 186, 1 ; impv. Aa/3e, 210, note), 2d pf.
( 178, 2), pf. mid. cfXiuijiai, 1st aor. pass. iX^j<f>6T)v, vbls.
-T60S.
Xd|Air- ( 193) shine, fut. XdjuJ/w, 1st aor. eXa|i\|/a, 2d pf. XcXafi/ira.
XavOdvw ( 196, 2; theme XaO-, \r)0-, 13) lie hid, escape notice (mid.
forget, usually eVi-Aav0avo/xai), fut. X^<r, 2d aor. c'XaOov ( 186, 1),
2d pf. X&itOa, pf. mid. X&t|<r|uu ( 189).
\fy-w ( 193, 2) say, fut. Xe|w, 1st aor. &cga, pf. act. supplied ( 164)
by etp-r|Ka. pf. mid. XcXe-yp-ai (but StaAe'yo/xai, converse, has Siet'Aey-
^tat, cf. 178, 2), 1st aor. pass. IX^y.
Xey ( 193, 2) select, count, gather, fut. X^o>, 1st aor. cXti-a, 2d pf.
elXoxa ( 178, 2; 219, 3), pf. mid, etXe^ai and sometimes XeXt^-
jiat, 1st aor. pass. eXs'xOtjv and rarely 2d aor. pass. IXe'^v.
Xtiir-w ( 193, 2 ; theme AOITT-, ACITT-, AITT-, 14, 2) leave, fut. XCt|/o>, 2d
aor. i'Xiirov ( 208), 2d pf. X&onra ( 219, 3), pf. mid. X&ci|i|i<u,
1st aor. pass. 6Xi4>9tiv.
Xcv-w ( 193) .s/one, fut. Xtvo-w, etc., regular, but 1st aor. pass. IXv<r0T]v
( 189).
, Ionic fut. Xd^o/xat, epic 2d aor. subj. XeXdxw ( 208, 1 a), Ionic
and poetic 2d pf. \t\oyx a ( 219> 3 ).
195, 2; theme Xcry-, cf. Xa/3-) and Xd^/xai = \a.fj.fiavw take.
\afjLpdvu, Ionic forms are fut. \dfj.\f/ofjiai (better Xd^o/xai) , 1st pf. XeXd/S^a
( 190), pf. mid. XAa/*/iai, 1st aor. pass. eX</*0^j'. Epic 2d aor. mid.
infin. \c\aptff8ai ( 208, 1 a). Poetic pf. mid. XA^A"t.
\avddvw, epic 2d aor. \t\a6ov ( 208, la; 171 a) and pf. mid. XAao-Mcu
( 27, 3 ; 219 a).
Xcicr/fw (for *XaK-o-Kw, 197) speaA: (poetic), fut. Xa/eijeroMai ( 190; 507),
2d aor. ^Xa/coi/ (epic mid. XeXa/c6/x?7J>, 208, la; 171 a), 2d pf. X^-
Xr?K-a ( 219, 2) with fem. partic. \c\aicvia ( 219 a).
[root Xe%-, cf. X^xos bed] only in epic poetry, 1st aor. eXea laid to rest,
mid. tXeZawv went to rest (impv. Xeeo, 201 b), 2d. aor. A^^"
(207 a) went to rest (impv. X^o (i.e. *Xex-<ro), infin. X^x^' (for
*\cx-ffdai, 35), partic., X^y-)itews, 207 a).
(poetic) = \av6dvw escape notice.
729] LIST OF VERBS 401
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
Xtftw ( 292, 6) plunder (fut. Ag'cro/Aat), 1st aor. mid. \T)(roLHT]v, pf.
mid. XeXtjo-fjiai ( 189). (The active is rare.)
Xifxirdvo) ( 196, 2 ; AITT-) = Xtfrirw leave.
Xov-w ( 193) wash, often drops v ( 21) before a short vowel and is
then contracted like SijAw ( 250) : as AoC/xev (for Ao(u)o/xei/),
XovcrOai (for Ao(u)e<70ai) ; otherwise the verb is regular; fut.
Xovo-d), 1st aor. tXovo-a, etc.
Xi-a> ( 193; theme Av-, Av-, 13), fut. Xoo-w, 1st aor. eXvo-a, 1st pf.
Xc'XvKa, pf. mid. X&v|iai, 1st aor. pass. Xv0t]v.
HaCvw ( 195, 4; theme /mv-, /JLTJV-, 13), madden (mid. be mad, fut.
mid. /xai/oi)/u,ai), 1st aor. efujva, 2d pf . ji(jtTjva aw mar/ ( 494, 3), 2d
aor. pass. t\Lo.vr\v (see 514).
dvw ( 196, 2; /xa0-) /earn, fut. fiaeVjo-onai ( 190; 507), 2d aor.
Ha0ov, 1st pf. nnd9T]Ka ( 190).
( 195, note 2, theme /nay-) knead, fut. }id|w, etc., regular, but
2d pf. n-|iax-a ( 219, 1) and 2d aor. pass. p.<ryT|v.
ojiai ( 193) ^/^ (middle deponent, 158, 3), fut. }iaxovp.ai (for
190, 212, 1), 1st aor. p.axo-dnT]v ( 190), pf.
( 188, 1).
( 197) make drunk, 1st aor. |ie'0uo-a. 1st aor. pass.
<r6riv became drunk.
>, Ionic and poetic is X^fw.
( 195, 1 ; Xir-) rarely \Lro/j.ai supplicate (mostly epic, rare in
prose), epic 1st aor. AXto-d^y ( 172, 1 a). An epic 2d aor. t\iTt>wv
is doubtful.
Xoj5w, epicX6w(21) andXo^w (190), fut. \ofoff<a (201 a), 1st aor. eX6eo-<ra.
Xow, epic also with C. Epic 2d aor. A^i/ ( 209).
(theme ACCKT-?) seeA:, s/rj'we (poetic), fut. /j.d<r(ro/j.at, 1st aor. tfj.aff<ra.-
MV (201 a).
yi.ap-va-jj.ai. ( 196, 3) fight (poetic), only pres. and impf. ; pres. subj.
(cf. 200, note).
( 194 ; /j.apir-) seize (poetic), fut. fjAp\f/u, 1st aor. /j.ap\f/a (epic
2d aor. e/xapTroi'), 2d pf. /j.t/j.apTra.
ij.dxo/j.ai, epic is also /j.ax^ofj.ai ( 190) and fj.axfiofj.ai ( 292, 2 a), fut.
fj.axeffaofj.ai. (MsCK.ftlSO fJ.ax'flGo/J.aC) , 1st aor. /J.axeffffd/j.r)v ( 201 a).
fj.e6 irjfj.i send aicay, like ?7;/it, but Herodotus has pf. inid. partic.
( 181).
BABBITT'S GR. GUAM. 26
402 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
|ie6v-a> ( 193) be drunk, only pres. and impf. Other tenses supplied
from /jLt@v(riD
|Ai-y-vu-p.i ( 196, 5 ; theme /xety-, /xty-, 14, 2) mix, f ut. (utga, 1st aor.
, pf. mid. lUpciy-iuu, 1st aor. pass. k^L\Qi\v, 2d aor. pass.
( 232, 2), vbls. P.CIKTOS, IXCIKTCOS. (Sometimes wrongly
written /uyvu/u.)
( 195, 4 ; theme pop-, /xep-, /nap-, 14, 1, probably for oyxop-,
etc.) obtain part in, pf. mid. 3d sing, eipaprai (for *(re-o-/xap-rai,
224, note, = *eo-/xa/oTat, 36, = et/xaprai, 16) & is fated.
intend, fut. |AcXX4<n ( 190), 1st aor. l|i&\T|<ra ( 190), seldom
augments to rj-.
jjitX-w ( 193) concern, care for, 3d sing, impersonal ficXci zV z's a care, fut.
[icX^jo-w ( 190), 1st aor. ip&T|<ra ( 190), 1st pf. |ic|fc&T|ica ( 190),
pf. mid. |xfjL\Ti|jLai ( 190), 1st aor. pass. i|icX^6T]v ( 190), vbl.
jjt\TiTos ( 190). Also e7rt-/xeAo)U,at and 7ri-/xeAov/>tat (passive de-
ponents, 158, 3) care for.
fiev-o) ( 193) remain, fut. ptevw, 1st aor. cpciva, 1st pf. |i(i.Vi]Ka ( 190).
jiiaivw (for *jMiav-na, 195, 4 ; theme /xtav-) stain, fut. jiiavw. 1st aor.
( 204, note 2), pf. mid. (jip.iao-p.ai ( 247), 1st aor. pass.
( 197, suffix -IO-K- contrary to 197) remind (mid. remember),
fut. nvtfjo-w, 1st aor. nvti<ra, pf. mid. \i.{\i.vi\[i.o.i remember ( 535; for
the subj. and opt. see 227, note) (fut.pf. |in.v^aron<u shall remember,
538, note), 1st aor. pass. ^Wjo-V ( 189) mentioned ( 158, 3).
epic 2d aor. 3d sing. e-fjuK-ro ( 207 a).
lj.elpofj.ai obtain part in (epic), 2d pf. efj.fj.ope ( 219, 8, for *e<rfwpe?, cf.
178, 1) have a share in ( 535).
/uAw epic 2d pf. /j.e-fj.T)\-a ( 219, 2). Homer has also pf. mid. 3d sing.
fj.e/j.p\eTai and plupf. /x^SXero (for */ie-/x\erat and */j.e-/j.\eTo, with
sympathetic )3).
fj.evoivdu be eager (epic). See 199 a-b.
nep/j.r)pifa ponder (poetic), epic fut. -fw and epic aor. -t^a ( 195, 2 a).
fj.ri8ofj.ai ( 193), contrive (poetic), fut. /wjo-o/ieu, 1st aor. Ifivjffdfji^v ( 203).
[root /^K-, Mdf- ( 13)] &Zet (A present ^c7?/cw/iat is doubtful.) Epic
2d aor. partic. /j.aK-<J!)v, epic 2d pf. partic. /xe/x^/cws (fern. fj.e-fj.aK-v'ia,
219 a), 2d plupf. with variable vowel (e)fj,e'/j,riKoi>.
fj.r)Tid() plan (poetic), other tenses from fj.riTiofj.ai.; as fut. /^ruro/uxu, 1st
729] LIST OF VERBS 403
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
|xva> ( 195, 2 ; fJivy-) grumble, mutter, 1st aor. p.va.
|ivKp.ai (-aojuai) bellow, 1st aor. n\JKT]<rd|iT)v ( 158, 3).
fi,t>a> shut the lips or eyes, 1st aor. cpuo-a, 1st pf.
( 193, 2) distribute, fut. VCJJMO, 1st aor. e'veina, 1st pf.
( 190), pf. mid. vV>T]nai ( 190), 1st aor. pass. 4vjiT|0Tiv ( 190).
vcw ( 193 note; theme vev-, 21), szw'ra, fut. vev<ro|uu ( 507) or
vv<rovfi<u ( 214), 1st aor. cvevo-a, 1st pf. vcvexiKa, vbl. vevo-reos
( 189).
veto ( 193; 199, 2) Acap wp, 1st aor. VTi<ra, pf. mid. V&TUUU.
vCa> (for *viy-o, 195, 2) wash ; other tenses from a stem vifi- (which
give a later pres. vnr-ro), 191), fut. vtyw, 1st aor. cvixj/a, pf. mid.
vcvijinai ( 27, 1 ; 247), vbl. VIITTOS.
vojxCtw ( 292, 6) think, fut. vojudi ( 215), 1st aor. voni<ra, 1st pf.
vevop-iKa, pf. mid. vcvop-io-jjiai ( 189), 1st aor. pass. vop.o-0Tiv
( 189), vbl. vofuo-Wos.
vw (v^?, v t ^, etc.. 199, 3) spin, fut. v^<rw, 1st aor. VT)<ra, 1st aor. pass.
-ta ( 193, 3) remain (poetic) = ^vu.
u) (for */j.iy-<TKw, 197 ; cf. Trdcrxw) mix (Ionic) (j.elyvv/ju.
ptfa suck, has epic 1st aor. ^utfityra ( 190).
[root /xfK- (cf. /iD/ctD^cat)] bellow, epic 2d aor. ^/cov ( 171 a), epic 2d pf.
( 219, 2).
vaiu (for *j/ao--tw, 195; 37) dwell (poetic), 1st aor. va<r<ra (epic) set-
tled (trans., cf. 494, 1), 1st aor. pass, tv&vd-riv ( 189) was settled or
dwelt ( 514).
( 195, 1), Ionic j/da-<rw ( 22) stuff (mostly poetic and Ionic), 1st
aor. fvafa, pf. mid. v^vaff/mai. (rarely vtvay/jiai').
w or veiKelw ( 292, 2 a ; theme WKT-) chide (Ionic, mostly epic), fut.
( 188), 1st aor. erekecra ( 188), or 4vciKc<r<ra ( 201 a).
, come (poetic), only pres. and impf. The present sometimes
has future meaning ( 524).
vlfa, Homer has a doubtful pres. mid. infin. cbropiTrTeo-flcu.
vi(rofj.ai (for *vi-v<r-ofMi, 193, 3; theme ve<r- t JHT-, 14) go (poetic), only
pres. and impf. The present often has future meaning ( 524).
vo& (-&>) think, perceive (regular in Attic), in Ionic contracts -OT?- to w ;
as 1st aor. eixaaa (Attic tvoi\(rcC), 1st pf. vtvuica. (Attic vev6i\Ka), etc.
404 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
lew (usually contracted to o>, etc., 199, 2, note ; theme e- for *e<r-)
scrape (1st aor. e|ecra, 188), pf. mid. e<r|j.ai ( 189), vbl. eo-ToV
( 292, 8; cf. ^pds dry) dry, fut. frpavw ( 213), 1st aor.
( 204, note 2), pf. mid. ^pa<rnai ( 247), 1st aor. pass.
6-o> ( 193) polish, 1st aor. ev<ra, 1st aor. pass. iM-r\v ( 189).
otto ( 195, 2 ; 08-) smell, fut. ojtf <ro> as if from *6e'<o, 1st aor.
oiy-w ( 193), oiy-vv-fu ( 196, 5), usually dv-otyw, dv-otyvvfu o/>e?*, fut.
dv-oi, 1st aor. dv-o>i a ( 172, note 1), 2d pf . dv-Ya (dve'w^a) , pf .
mid. dv-wYH Lat ( 180), 1st aor. pass. dvew'xOTjv ( 172, note 1).
ot8a (2d pf.) know ( 259). See [IS-].
ol8w (-ew) swell, 1st aor. w8ii<ra, 1st pf. (p'S^Ka.
oLKTipw ( 195, 4; oiKTip-) pity, 1st aor. wKTipa ( 204).
ol'o[i.cu ( 193), 1st per. often olfiai, impf. w'^-qv (probably pf. and
plupf .), think, fut. ot^<ro|jiai ( 190), 1st aor. pass, w^v ( 158, 3).
oforw shall bear. Cf. 4>e'p.
( 193) be gone, fut. olx^jo-ofjiai ( 190), 2d pf. oxKa ( 179;
40).-
( 195, 3; oKeX-) rwn a.sAore, 1st aor. Ki\a ( 204).
oXio-e-dv-w ( 196, 2 ; oA.to-0-) slip, 2d aor. \io-eov.
(a7r-)o\\vfjii (for *oX-vi}-/xi, 196, 5 ; theme oX- and oAc-) also dir-oXXvw
destroy, lose (mid. perish), iut. (a7r-)6\w (212, l,for oAeo-w, 188),
1st aor. (d7r-)w\<ra ( 188), 2d aor. (a7r-)X6fjiT]v perished, 1st pf.
(a7r-)6XwXKa, 2d pf. (a7r-)oXa>Xa be lost, perish ( 494, 2).
6Xo4>6pon.cu ( 195,4) bewail, fut. 6Xo<J>vpoiijiai, 1st aor. &>Xo4>vpd(XT]v ( 158,
3), 1st aor. pass, partic. 6Xo<J>vp06is made to lament ( 510).
&;, epic 1st aor. ee<ro-a ( 201 a).
[root 68v- (for 65u<r-)] enrage (poetic), only 1st aor. raid. d)dvffdfj.-r]v
(wdv<r<rdfji.r]v, 201 a) was enraged, and pf. mid. 65-^5uo--/xai ( 179;
189).
6fa, poetic 2d pf. 6d~w8-a ( 179), plupf. 66681) ( 171 a).
oF-yc.;, poetic fut. o?w, 1st aor. wi'^a and ya (or ol^a, 171 a).
oi5-dv-w ( 196, 2) swell (poetic) = oi'StD.
^w) pour wine, in Homer augments to t-oiv- (for t-foiv-, 172, 2.
Mss. tyi,-).
i, Homer often has 1st sing, otu (6iw), and mid. 6iofj.ai, 1st aor. dicrd-
( 171 a), 1st aor. pass. SAaQtiv ( 189).
729] LIST OF VERBS 405
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
6|jL-vv-p.t and oji-vu-w ( 196, 5 ; theme o/x- and O/MO-) swear, fut. ofiovpiai
( 507, for 6>do-o/xai, 212, 1; 188), 1st aor. fyo<ra ( 188), 1st
pf. 6|i(o|jLOKa ( 179; 188); pf. mid. 6|i(op.o((r))iai, 1st aor. pass.
( 196, 5) wipe, fut. 6jj.6pop.cu, 1st aor. ai|j.op(;a, 1st aor. pass.
o-vi-vr\-[ii ( 193, 3; reduplicated without regard to the o; theme OVYJ-,
ova-, 13) benefit, fut. 6vr|<rw, 1st aor. wvqo-a, 2d aor. mid. d>vTJ|it]v
derived benefit (opt. oVat/x^v, 211, note, infill. ora<r0ai), 1st aor.
pass. vTJ0iiv.
66vtt ( 195, 4) sharpen, usually in the compound irap-o|6va> provoke,
irritate, fut. (7rap-)ovv ( 213), 1st aor. (7rap-)|vva ( 204),
pf. mid. (7rap-)wv|j.p,<u ( 33), 1st aor. pass, (nap-) <avvQi\v.
[root OTT-] see, fut. o\|/oji.ai ( 507), pf. mid. &PJUU, 1st aor. pass. <j>0ijv,
cf. 6po>.
op-yio> ( 292, 6, cf. opyrj anger} enrage, regular, with fut. mid. op-yiovjxcu
( 215), fut. pass. 6p-yi(r0TJ<rofiai (cf. 519, note 2).
( 193) reach, fut. opt'^w, 1st aor. wpef-a, 1st aor. pass. wpe'xOtiv.
( 195, 1 ; theme opv^-) dig, fut. 6pvo>, 1st aor. wpv|a, 2d pf.
6p-wpvx-a ( 179), pf. mid. opwpvYnai, 1st aor. pass. o>pvyQi\v.
6p(-ao>) ( 164) see (impf. ewpwv, 172, note 1), fut. supplied by
6x|/ofiai [OTT-], aor. supplied by 2d aor. etSov [18-], 1st pf. wpaica
(plupf. ecupaKry. for i^op-, 17), pf. mid. wpap.ai, or supplied by
wfijiai [OTT-], 1st aor. pass, (supplied) &$Qi\v [OTT-], vbl. oparos or
(supplied) OTTTC'OS.
6vo-jj.au ( 193; oj/o-), inflected like dido/j.ai ( 252) with pres. opt. 6voiro
( 170, 4) insttft (Ionic and poetic), epic fut. 6v6<r<ro/j.a.i ( 201 a), 1st
aor. wvoaawv, also aor. pass, subj., in same sense, Kar-ovoo-efis (Hdt.).
[root (5?r-] 2d pf. (Ionic and poetic) fa-wir-a. ( 179).
oirviu take to wife (poetic), fut. OTTOO-W.
optyu, epic also optyvvfu ( 196, 5), epic pf. mid. dp-upey-nai ( 179) with
3d pi. opupex-arai, plupf. 6pwp<?x-aTo ( 226 a).
6p-vv-/j.t ( 196, 5, 6/>-) ro?.se (poetic), fut. 6p<rw (mid. o/aoO/xat, 213), 1st
aor. <3/3<ra ( 204 a, with impv. 6p<reo, 201 b), 2d aor. (trans, and
intrans.) tipopov ( 208, 1 a), 2d aor. mid. wpb^v (but several forms
without variable vowel, 207 a ; as 3d sing, wpro, impv. 6p-<ro, infin.
6p-6cu for *6p-<r6ai, 35, partic. 8p-fji.evo^, 2d pf. 6p-up-a ( 179) a?n
aroused ( 494, 3;, pf. mid. 3d sing, dpuperat (epic).
406 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
6o-4>pavo|icu ( 292, 8 ; 6ff<j>p-) smell, fut. 60-<j>pTJ<ro|iai ( 190), 2d aor.
mid. axr<|>p6|AT]v, 1st aor. pass. awr^pdvO^v.
ovpw (-ew, 292, 2) mingo, fut. ovp^o-ojxai ( 507), 1st aor. owpT)<ra
( 172, 2), 1st pf. lovprjKa ( 180).
6<J>CX ( 195, 4; 6<J>eA-) owe, fut. 6<J>iXVj<ra> ( 190), 1st aor. <f>eXTi<ra
( 190), 2d aor. otycXov (see 588), 1st pf. <|>c(\i|Ka ( 190), 1st
aor. pass, partic. 6<|>iXi]0s ( 190).
6<|>X-i<rK-dv-a> ( 197 ; 196, 2 ; o<A-) be guilty, incur, fut. 6<|>\^<ra) ( 190),
2d aor. w<j>\ov (1st aor. w<j>\Y)(ra is doubtful), 1st pf.
iraitw ( 195, 2 ; 7rai8-) sport (fut. iraio-ojjiai, 507), 1st aor. irai<ra, 1st
pf. iriraiica, pf. mid. irirai<rjjiai ( 189).
iraXaCw ( 193) wrestle, regular, but 1st aor. pass. iraXato-9iiv ( 189).
irapa-vo|iw(-eo)) transgress law, augments to Trap-ev- ( 175, 1).
irapoivw(-eV) commonly has double augment and reduplication ( 175,
note ; 181) ; as 1st aor. l-irap-o>Vq<ra, 1st pf . ire-irap-w'vTjKa.
irao-x ( 197 ; for *7ra0-o-Ka), 30 ; the 6 leaves its aspiration with the
K; theme irovO-, irtvO-, iraO-, 14, 1) experience, suffer, fut. imo-onai
(for *7Tv^-o-o ) aat, 34), 2 aor. eiraOov, 2 perf. irirov0a ( 219, 3).
( 193) stop, cause to cease, regular, but vbl. iravorTos ( 189).
( 193, 2 ; theme TroiO-, 7m0-, mO-, 14, 2) persuade, fut. imo-w,
1st aor. eircwra, 1st pf. trfimica ( 494, 2), 2d pf. iriroi0a, trust
( 494, 2), pf. mid. irjm<rjiai ( 189, note), 1st aor. pass. eirio-0tiv
( 189, note), vbls. TTKT-TOS, imer-rcos.
w, epic pres. usually 60AXw.
[root ?ra-] acquire (poetic, but used by Xenophon), fut. Trdo-oyucu, 1st aor.
tTrci(rdfji.r)v ( 158, 3), pf. 7r^7rct/zcu possess ( 535).
strike, regular, has poetic fut. Tranjo-w ( 190 ; cf. 519, note 2).
195, 3 ; ?raX-) brandish (mostly poetic), 1st aor. firrjXa ( 204,
note 2), 2d aor. partic. (epic) (d / u-)7re-7raXwj' ( 208, 1 a), 2d aor.
mid. 3d sing, (epic) e-TraXro ( 207 a), pf. mid. n-^iraXfj.ai.
, for epic 2d pf., 2d pi. irtiravde (for *7re-7ra0-Te, cf. ird<rxu for *irad-
<TK(a), partic. fern. TreTraBvia, see 219 a.
Tra.Ttofj.ai ( 193 ; TTO.T-, 190) eat (Ionic and poetic), fut. 7r<<ro/xcu, 1st aor.
tirao-dfj.'rjv, epic plupf. Trt-iracr-wv ( 171 a ; 189, note).
TTCITTW ( 195, 1, TTCIT-), Ionic Traffffu ( 22), sprinkle (mostly poetic), fut.
Trdo-w, 1st aor. 7rao-a, 1st aor. pass, iirdud^v ( 189, note).
7rei'0w, poetic 2d aor. (e}wi.dov (mid. tTri06fj.r)i>) with subj. ireirldw, opt.
729] LIST OF VERBS 407
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
(-775, -fj, etc., 199, 3) hunger, fut. imvrfj<r, etc., regular.
( 193, 2; theme TTO/ATT-, TTC/XTT-, 14), send, fut. ire'pl/w, 1st aor.
eirp.\J/a, 2d pf. irirofjL<j>a ( 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. ir^ir(ji|xai, 1st aor.
pass. 4ir^4>6T]v, vbls. irejxirTOs, -Tre|jfirTos.
irtiraCvw ( 292, 8) make soft, 1st aor. reirava ( 204, note 2), 1st aor.
pass. irirdv0T]v.
irc'irpwrai it is fated, see [Trop-J.
irepaiva) ( 292, 8, cf. Trepas end) accomplish, fut. irepavw, 1st aor. lire'pava
( 204, note 2), pf . rnid. ireirepao-fiai (247), 1st aor. pass. cirpdv0T]v,
vbls. irepavros, irepavrcos.
-irepS-ojiai ( 193 ; iropS-, TrepS-, TrapS-, 14, 1) pedo, fut. irap8^<ron<u
( 190 ; 507), 2d aor. rap8ov ( 208), 2d pf. ireiropSa ( 219, 3).
ircrdv-vv-fu ( 196, 5, for *7reTacr-n}/u). usually dva-irT<xvvvni expand,
fut. ire (cf. 212, 1), 1st aor. iireVao-a, pf . mid. ire'irrancu (redupli-
cation contrary to 178, 1), 1st aor. pass. irT<x<r6Tiv ( 189, note).
8oifj.i, etc. ( 208, 1 a), fut. from aor. stem ( 519 a) Tre-Tri/Mo-w shall
persuade, epic 2d plupf., 1st pi. e-irt-Tn.d-fj.ev ( 219 a), impv. -jr^-trur-di
(Aesch.). Also a fut. TTI^O-W shall obey and aor. partic. 7rt^<rds obey-
ing, trusting, as if from a pres. *iri6tw obey.
( 193; probably for *ir<-Kpu, 16) comb, shear (poetic), also a
denominative ( 292, 2) Tre/trw (-<?<>), 1st aor. eTrc^a, 1st aor. pass.
( 195, 4 ; theme 7re/>-, Trap-, 14, 1) pierce (Ionic and poetic), 1st
aor. cireipa., pf. mid. Trt-Trap-ftai ( 224, note), 2d aor. pass. tTrdprjv
( 232, 2).
292, 6 ; cf. TrAas wear) bring near (Ionic and poetic), fut.
and TreXcD ( 212, 1), 1st aor. eTrAao-a, also epic 2d aor. mid.
3d sing. e-ir\rj-fo and 3d pi. 6-^X17-1/7-0 ( 207 a) approached, pf. mid.
Tr{-ir\r}-fj.ai (cf. 38, 1), 1st aor. pass. (?7reXctcrlV ( 189) and
twXAeriv ( 38).
7reX-w ( 193 ; TreX-, ?rX-, 14) and Tr^Xo/xat (lit. go, come) be (poetic equiv-
alent of el/j.1 or yiyvo/j.ai), 2cl aor. etr\ov, mid. eir\6fj.Tiv ( 208).
Trtpe-u ( 193 ; theme ?rep0-, 7rpa6-, 14, 1 ; 38) sack (poetic), fut. TT^O-W
(with W/XTO/ACU as pass., 515, 1), 1st aor. eTre/xra (for *e-irep6-<ra,
203), 2d aor. eirpadov ( 38). (Doubtful is infin. Tr^pBai, for *Trepd-
<rcu ? ( 30 ; 35).
( 196, 3; Trepa<r- ?) seZZ (poetic), fut. Tre/aciw (cf. 212, 1), 1st
aor. e7r^paa-(o-)a ( 201 a), pf. mid. partic. TreTrp^j/os ( 38, Mss.
408 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
ire'T-ofjiai ( 193, 2; theme TTCT-, TTT-, 14) fly, fat. irr^o-ojiai ( 38), 2d
aor. eirronTiv ( 208).
irTT ( 195, 1 ; TTCTT-) cook, fut. irt|/o), 1st aor. ir\|/a, pf . mid. irir|Aficu
( 27, 1 ; 247), 1st aor. pass, lire'^eriv, vbl. ireirros.
( 196, 5; theme 7077-, Tray-, 13), Jix, fut. irrj^w, 1st aor.
, 2d pf. irinf|'ya be fixed ( 494, 3), 2d aor. pass, as iutrans.
(of. 514) iirfryi|v ( 232, 1).
iriaivw ( 292, 8) fatten, fut. mavw, 1st aor. liriava ( 204, note 2), pf.
mid. irira<r(i<u ( 247).
(e/x-)iri-|A-ir\Ti-fu ( 193, 3; for *7rt-7rAr^-/xi with sympathetic /x; theme
TrAr/-, TrAa-, 13) ///, fut. (e/x.-)ir\^or&>, 1st aor. (ev-)ir\tio-a, lit
pf. (e/x-)irir\T]Ka, pf. mid. (fjL-)irtir\i\<r\i.a.i ( 189), 1st aor. pass.
(ev-)4ir\Vj<rfrlv ( 189), vbl. (e/^irXtjo-Tfos ( 189).
(e/x-)iri|iirpT]ju ( 193, 3; for *7ri-Trprj-fj.i with sympathetic /x; theme
Trpr/-, TTpa-, 13) ftwm, fut. (e/A-)irp^jo-a>, 1st aor. (ev-)eirpT]o-a, pf.
mid. (e/x-)ire'irpT]nai, 1st aor. pass. (v-)irpT|<r0T]v ( 189).
irt-v-o) ( 196, 1 ; theme TTI-, also related theme TTO-, TTOO-, 13) drink,
fut. irio|xai ( 216), 2d aor. ciriov, 1st pf. ireirwKa, pf. mid. irTrop,ai
( 188, 1), 1st aor. pass. 1^66^ ( 188, 1), vbls. TTO-TOS, iroreos
( 188, 1).
iri-irpa-o-Kw ( 197, 1; 7T/oa-) sell, 1st pf. ireirpaKa, pf. mid. irirpafj.ai,
1st aor. pass. !irpaJ0Tiv, other forms supplied by other verbs ( 164).
irf-irT-w ( 193, 3 ; theme (TTOT-), TTCT-, TTT-, 14, and TTTO)- (TTTY)-), 38, 1)
fall, fut. ir<rovnai (for *7rereo/xat), 2d aor. eirco-ov (for *e7reroi/), 1st
pf. ir-irTtt-Ka (reduplication contrary to 178, 1).
i, poetic fut. TTT-ri<TOfj.aL ( 190), 2d aor. ^rt]v (as if from stem TTTO-,
inflected like Zarrjv, 257) and mid. tirTd/j.r)v (like tirpiawv, 257) ;
poetic also are Trordo/aai and Tror^o/xat ( 292, 2 and 3), regular.
( 193, 2) learn (poetic) = irvv66.vona.i.
slew, see [0ep-].
indicated, see <f>pdfa,
, epic 2d aor. 3d sing. KaT-t-irrjK-To ( 207 a), poetic is. 1st aor.
pass. eTr^x^v.
Trl\-vr)-/ju ( 196, 3) approach (epic), only pres. and impf. =
7riw-<r/cw ( 197 ; theme ir(0"i'-> cf. TT^W) ??i^e rozse, epic 1st aor.
( 201 a), pf. mid. Trtirvv/j.ai am wise ( 535) with partic. Trfirvv^vos irise.
, epic 2d pf . partic. Tre-Ti-TTj-ws ( 220), in Attic poetry contracted to
29] LIST OF VERBS 409
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
( 195, 1 ; TrAar-) mold, form (fut. 7rAao-eo), 1st aor. eirXcura,
pf. mid. ire'irXao-jiai ( 189, note), 1st aor. pass. 4irXd(r0T]v ( 189,
note), vbl. irXao-Tos ( 189, note).
irXeW ( 193; theme 7rAo/c-, TrAt/c-, TrAa*-, 14, 1) plait, knit (fut.
7rAea>), 1st aor. cirXef-a, 2d pf. ire'irXoxa ( 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid.
ire'irXe^cu, 1st aor. pass. eirXe'x0T]v, 2d aor. pass. eirXaKTjv ( 232, 2).
irX&> ( 193, note; 199, 2; TrAev-, TrA^, 14, 2; 21) sail, fut. ir\cv<ro|iai
or irXevo-oiinai ( 214), 1st aor. eirXevo-a, 1st pf. ire'irXevKa, pf. mid.
n-e'irXXKr|ji<u ( 189) (1st aor. pass. eVAevo-^v, 189, late), vbl.
irXevo-reos (189).
irXifJTTw ( 195, note 2 ; theme TrAr/y-, vrAay-, 13) strike, fut. irX^jw, 1st
aor. irXT)a, 2d pf. irfirXTfya, pf. mid. irir\T|-y|iai, 2d aor. pass.
4irMj'Y T |v (contrary to 232, 1), but in composition regularly
-TrXdYT,v ( 232, 1).
n-Xiivw ( 195, 4) wash, fut. irXvvw, 1st aor. eirXvva ( 204), pf. mid.
irc'irXvfJLai, 1st aor. pass. 6irXii0Tjv.
( 193, note; 199, 2; TTVCV-, TTVV-, 14, 2; 21) breathe, blow,
fut. irvv<roncu and -irvcvo-ovjiai ( 214), 1st aor. eirvcvora, 1st pf.
irvf-y-w ( 193; irvly-, irviy-, 13) choke, fut. irv|<o, 1st aor. cirvi^a, pf.
mid. ir&rviypai, 2d aor. pass. lirv(^T\v ( 232, 1).
wo6(-w) desire, has forms both with e and rj (cf. 188), as fut.
iro0T|<ra> or iroOeVojxai ( 507), 1st aor. lir60T]<ra or ir60<ra.
196, 3) spread (poetic) =
TTLT-VW ( 196, 1) fall (poetic) = Triirrw.
TrAcifw ( 195, note 1) cawse to wander (Ionic and poetic), fut. mid. 7r\dy-
ZO/ULCLI shall wander, 1st aor. tTrXayfc, 1st aor. pass. tir\dyxO r 1 v wan-
dered ( 158, 3).
TrXdrro;, Ionic tr\a(T<TU ( 22), epic 1st aor. e7r\a<r<ra ( 201 a).
, epic also ?rXe/w. Ionic and poetic TrXcico, fut. TrXwcro^at ( 507),
1st aor. eTrXoxra, 2d aor. eTrXwf ( 209), 1st pf. Tr^TrXw/ca, vbl. TrXwros.
, epic plupf. with variable vowel (^n-ArXiryop, poetic and rare is
1st aor. pass. Tr\rjx^' r l v -
ew, epic also -rrvelw, epic 2d aor. 3d sing. &/J.-TTVVTO ( 209) and irnpv.
(MSS. &/J.TTVV).
do, poetic is TTOO) ( 21).
[root Trop-, irpu-, 38, 1] give, allot (poetic), 2d aor. e-rropov, pf. mid. 3d
sing. TT^r/awrat it is fated, and partic.
410 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
irpdrTw ( 195, note 2; Trpdy-) do, fut. irpoa>, 1st aor. eirpafja, 2d pf.
irc'irpaYa, rarely ireirpaxa ( 219, 1), 1st aor. pass, cirpdxe^v, vbl.
irpaK-T&s ( 25).
[root 7r/oia- (cf. Trepi/ry/xi)] &M#, only 2d aor. eirpidjjLt]v (see 257 and
211, note).
irpto> ( 193) saw, 1st aor. eirpwra, pf. mid. ir^irpio-fiai ( 189), 1st aor.
pass. rpf<r0tiv ( 189).
irrdp-vv-(icu ( 196, 5) sneeze, 2d aor. eirrapov.
ITT^O-O-W ( 195, 1 ; theme TTT^K-, TrraK-, 13) cower, 1st aor. eim^a, 2d
pf. limixa ( 219, 1).
irrvo-o-o) ( 195, 1 ; TTTVX-) fold, fut. irrfgtt, 1st aor. lirrvga, pf. mid.
eimryjuu ( 247), 1st aor. pass. eirrvx^Tiv.
irvv0dvon<u ( 196, 2 ; theme TrevQ-, 7rv0-, 14, 2) '/earn, inquire, fut.
irevo-ofiai (for *veu$-aofuu, 30), 2d aor. irv06|iTjv ( 158, 3), pf.
ire'irvo-jiai ( 189, note), vbl.
pair- ( 194 ; pa<jf>-) stitch, fut. pcu|/, 1st aor. ppa\|/a, pf. mid. cppajijiai
( 27, 1), 2d aor. pass. Ippd^v, vbl. pairros.
pdrrw = apdrrw q.v., fut. pd|w, 1st aor. eppoa, 1st aor. pass. ppdx6T]v.
p'o> ( 193, note ; theme pev, pv-, 14, 2 ; 21) y?ozo, fut. pcvo-ojiai and
pv-rja-o/juu (- 519, note 2), 1st pf. IppvTjKa ( 190), 2d aor. pass, as
intrans. ( 514) ippvi\v, vbl. pvros.
TT/odrTw, Ionic irp-f)<Tff(a ( 15 a; 22).
TTT-ffffcrd} (Ionic and poetic also TTT^OTO-W), poetic 2d aor. eirraKov ( 208).
Homer has also from theme wra-, 2d aor. dual TTT^-T^J/ ( 209) and
2d pf. partic. -n-e-Trr^-ws ( 220).
pound (Ionic, poetic, and late), 1st aor. eTrrto-a, pf. mid. e7TTta-/xai
( 189 note), 1st aor. pass. lirTlaQ-riv ( 189, note).
paivu (for *pav-iu), 195, 4) sprinkle (Ionic and poetic), fut. pavw, 1st aor.
epava ( 204, note 2), pf. mid. eppafffj-ai ( 247), 1st aor. pass. eppdv6r]j>.
Homer has also forms as if from root paS- : 1st aor. eppava-a, and pf.
3d pi. fppdS-arai, plupf. tppddaro ( 226 a).
pat-(t) ( 193) strike (poetic), fut. pa&rw, 1st aor. eppai<ra, 1st aor. pass.
tppalffd-nv ( 189).
p^w ( 195, 2 ; for *(fipcy-iu, 2 a, cf. e^Sw and 6^70^ work) do (poetic),
fut. p^|w, 1st aor. cppei-a and 6/>ea, 1st aor. pass, partic. pex#ei's, vbl.
729] LIST OF VERBS 411
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
[root pry-] pf. tpT]Ka have said, pf. mid. ctpiuiai. 1st aor. pass. ippT\Qi\v,
see etpco.
pr^-vv-iu ( 196, 5 ; theme prry-, pay-, 13, and a stronger form pwy-)
break, fut. pVjgw, 1st aor. cpp-r]ga, 2d pf. cppwya m broken ( 494, 3),
pf. mid. (rare) epprwiuu, 2d aor. pass, cppd-ytiv ( 232, 1).
pi-yw(-do>?) shiver, in pres. contracts to to and o instead of ou and 01;
as opt. piyonyv, infin. piyo>i/, cf. SriAw ( 250), fut. pi-y<r, 1st aor.
ippi-yoxra.
ptiTT-w ( 194; plTT-; pW-, 13) and piirrw (-e'o>, 190) throw, fut. ptyw,
1st aor. cppuK 2d pf. <i'ppi<j>a ( 219, 1), pf. mid. tppiixjuu ( 27, 1),
2d aor. pass. IppC^v.
PWV-VV-JJLI ( 196, note) strengthen, 1st aor. Ippoxra, pf. mid. eppcojicu
(partic. eppco/xeVos strong, as an adjective), 1st aor. pass. ppw-
o-erjv ( 189).
o-aipw ( 195, 4 ; theme vrjp-, <rap-, 13) clean off, 2d pf. <r^<nipa ( 535)
show the teeth, grin.
<ra\irio> ( 195, note 1 ; <ra\7nyy-) sound a trumpet, 1st aor. io-dX.in.-yga.
O-O.TT&) ( 195, note 2; <ray-) pack, load, 1st aor. co-oga, pf. mid. o-cVa-yncu.
<rpv-vv-jjLt ( 196, note) extinguish, fut. <rf&ra> ( 188), 1st aor. eo-peo-a
( 188), 1st pf. (dTr-)eo-pTiKa ( 218, 2) intrans. have gone out
( 494, 3), 1st aor. pass. lo-peVOriv, and 2d aor. pass, as intrans.
( 514), (dTr-^o-ptjv went out.
>) shudder (poetic), fut. pry^a-w, 1st aor. tppiyr)<ra, 2d pf.
( 190 ; 535).
ptTTTw, poetic 1st aor. pass. tpptyByv.
p6ofj.ai ( 193) defend, protect (poetic) = epv/j-ai, q.v., fut. pv<ro/j.ai, 1st ?.or.
fppi><rd/j.7)v, 2d aor. mid. 3d sing. tp(p)vro ( 209), 3d pi. pt-aro
( 167 d ; 171 a), pf. mid. etpv/jiai ? (referred also to UpvfMt).
pvir6u soil, epic pf. mid. partic. pe-pvirta-^vos (contrary to 178, 1). Also
a pres. pvirdw be dirty (cf. 292, 1 and 3).
( 195, 4 ; (TOP-) fawn upon (poetic), 1st aor. eo-Tjm ( 204, note 2).
(ra6w ( 292, 1 ; cf. crdos safe) save (poetic), fut. trawcrw, 1st aor. t<rduo-a, 1st
aor. pass. taaA6-r}v (epic. pres. subj. 2d sing. <ra$s (cf. 170, 2 ; Mss. 0-67/5,
<r6ois), 3d sing, o-ay (cf. 170, 2 ; Mss. <r6w, 0-677, o-dot), 3d pi. o-awa-t
(Mss. (r6wo-t, cf. 199 b), epic. impf. 3d sing, adov ( 171 a ; Mss. o-dw,
cf. 199 b), epic impv. 2d sing. <rdov (for *o-aoe ; Mss. <rdw, cf. 199 W.
412 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
(T/3-(D ( 193) more often <r'po|i.<u ( 158, 3) revere, 1st aor. r'<j>0T]v
( 158, 3).
o-ei-co ( 193) shake, fut. creitrco. etc., regular, but pf. mid. cr<ri<rnai
( 189) and 1st aor. pass. eo-t<r0Tiv ( 189).
<rt)|iaCvtt ( 292, 8; cf. o-^/xa sign) shoiv, fut. o-tijiavw ( 213), 1st aor.
<TT)nt]va ( 204, note 2), pf. mid. <r<nf)jiao-fi.ai ( 247), 1st aor. pass.
(TT|[J.dv9T|V.
o-^ir-w ( 193, 1 ; theme 0-7777-, aa-rr-, 13) rot (fut. tnji/>a>), 2dpf. <r^<ririra
be rotten ( 494, 2), 2d aor. pass, as intrans. ( 514) eo-dirqv.
o-KoLir-Tw ( 194; O-K<X<-) c%, fut. O-K<X\|/W, 1st aor. c<rica\|/a, 2d pf. rKcu|>a
( 219, 1), pf. mid. o-Kafjtp.ai ( 247), 2d aor. pass. (KUT-)<TKCU|>T]V.
o-KeSdv-vv-ju ( 196, note) scatter, fut. o-iceSw (cf. 212, 1), 1st aor.
co-K&cura, pf. mid. e<ri'8a<rnai ( 189), 1st aor. pass. eo-KtSdo-Oriv
( 189).
o-icir-Tonai ( 194 ; O-KCTT-) view (in Attic prose the present is usually
supplied ( 164) by <rKoirw(-co), regular), fut. <rKoJ/o[iai, 1st aor.
<TK6x|/d|JLTlV ( 158, 3), pf. <TK(Jt|Jtat ( 247), Vbl. <TKirTOS.
o-KT|ir-Tw ( 194; o-Kr/TT-) prop, fut. o-K^\I/ft>, 1st aor. eo-KTj^a, pf. mid.
( 247), 1st aor. pass. <rK^4>6tiv.
( 194; O-KWTT-) jeer, fut. <TKw\|/o|iai ( 507), 1st aor. rK&>\|/a
(pf. mid. o-/co)^/>iat, 247), 1st aor. pass. <rKw<}>0Tiv.
, 0-^77, etc., 199, 3) smear, otherwise regular, fut. (r^o-co. etc.
( 193 ; theme o-eu-, au-, 14, 2) dm'e on, ?/r^ (poetic), aor. eacreva.
( 172, 1 a ; 207, note 1), aor. mid. 2d sing. <r<rvo, 3d sing. ta<rv-ro
(o-i/ro), and partic. <rv-/jLevo<s ( 211 a), pf. mid. ecrcrvAuu be in haste
( 535), 1st aor. pass. kvvi^i\v or ^0-^177 rushed (cf. 514). Also a
pres. ffov/j.ai (from *<ro^o/xai ?), etc., impv. <rou, o-ofodw, infin. o-ovcrOai.
(For o-eO-rat, assumed to be a -/it form, perhaps o-oOrcu should be
read. )
<rivo/jLou ( 195, 4 ; o-u/-) injure, 1st aor. ^a-lvdfjt.'rjv (Ionic).
( 195, 3 ; ajccX-, cr/cXa-, 14, 1 ; 38) dry up (Ionic and poetic),
epic 1st aor. eo-^Xa (with r;. 204), 2d aor. intrans. ( 294, 1),
( 207 a ; 209), 1st pf. ^K^-KCL ( 218, 3).
make ready, regular, Herodotus has pf. 3d pi. to-KevdS-aTcu, plupf.
( 226 a).
193, 3) scatter (poetic) = <ri<eddvvvfju, q.v.
(Ionic and poetic, = o-^<3), 1st aor. ea^r^a, 1st aor. pass,
<Tovfj.ai.
729] LIST OF VERBS 413
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
o-Teipw ( 195, 4; theme o-Trep-, (nrap-, 14, 1) sow, fut. o-irepw, 1st aor.
eo-impa, pf. mid. fenrapiuu ( 224, note), 2d aor. pass, co-irdprjv
( 232, 2), vbl. o-irapros.
<rirvS-<0 ( 193), pour libation, fut. oroCcru (for *cr7rcj/8-o-a>, 34), 1st
aor. fern-euro, pf. mid. riri<r(xcu ( 189, note).
<rirw(-aoj, 188) draw, fut. <rird<r, 1st aor. fern-euro,, 1st pf. feriraica,
pf. mid. ferircur|iai ( 189), 1st aor. pass. <rird<r0T]v ( 189), vbl.
<nrcurT6s ( 189).
<rTX\ ( 195, 3; theme crreA.-, oroA.-, 14, 1) send, fut. O-T\ ( 213),
1st aor. rTi\a ( 204), 1st pf. eo-raXKa ( 218, 4), pf. mid.
ferraXjicu ( 221, note), 2d aor. pass. lo-rdXr^v ( 232, 2).
crrevattt ( 195, 2 ; (rrevay-) groan, fut. o-Tvda>, 1st aor. eo-rt'vaga. -
O-TC'PY-" ( 193, 2 ; theme o-ropy-, arepy-, 14) love, fut. o-T*po>, 1st aor.
rT P a, 2d pf. 2o-Top^a ( 219, 3).
(d7ro-)o-Tpw (-w, 292, 2) and <rTcp-<rKa) ( 197) deprive, also a pres.
mid. o-Tpojjiai be deprived, be in want, fut. <rT6p^<r, etc., regular.
<rTio> ( 195, 2; o-Tty-) prick, fut. <TT, 1st aor. co-riga, pf. mid.
<TTl-y|JLai, Vbl. (TTIKTOS ( 25).
<rT6p-vv-|xi ( 196, 5) spread, in prose usually <rrpiovvv|jii ( 38, 1) q.v.,
fut. o-Topco (for o-TOpe'o-co, 212, 1), 1st aor. lo-rdpeo-a ( 188).
<TTp<|>-w ( 193, 2; theme o-rpo^>-, (rrp<-, o-rpa<jE>-, 14, 1) turn, fut.
o-Tp\|o, 1st aor. <TTp\|/a, 2d pf . o-Tpo<|>a ( 219, 3), pf . mid. Ka-Tpap.-
jiat ( 224, note), 1st aor. pass. o-Tp<j>9T]v (mostly epic, rare in
prose), usually 2d aor. pass, as intrans. ( 514) o-Tpd<|>Tjv ( 232, 2),
vbl. o-Tpeirros.
o-rpcov-vv-ju ( 196, note) aprend (cf. o-T6pvv(u), fut. o-rpwo-w, 1st aor.
TTpa>o-a, pf. mid. eo-rptopiai, 1st aor. pass. !(rrpw0T)v.
fa ( 195, 2 ; 0-707-) drop (Ionic and poetic, rare in prose), [fut.
<TT<|W], 1st aor. ecrra^a, pf. mid. earay/jiai, aorists pass, fffrdxdrjv (1st)
and foTdy-rjv (2d).
w ( 193, 2) n?d (mostly poetic), fut. o-ret^w, etc., regular. Also
o-Tt/SiS (-&<0, pf. mid. ^o-ri/S^at.
-w ( 193, 2 ; o-retx-, <rrix-, 14, 2) march, 1st aor. eo-ret^o, and epic
2d aor. intrans. eo-Tixo" ( 208).
, poetic 2d aor. pass. tvTtpriv (contrary to 232, 2).
cu, ffrevvrai., and trreOro (poetic) se^ owe's self at, promise, threaten
(only pres. and impf.).
414 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
o-vpCTTw whittle, see (rvpia> below.
<H>p- ( 193) draw (fut. <7upu>), 1st aor. eo-vpa, 1st pf. <re<rvpica, pf. mid.
<r&r\>pn<u [2d aor. pass, cavprjv, late].
o-<aw ( 195, 2 ; o-</>ay-), in prose commonly <r<j>dTT ( 195, note 2)
slay, fut. <r<j>a|a>, 1st aor. r<J>a|a, pf. mid. <r<j>a-yjjtai, 2d aor. pass.
4<r4>dyqv, vbl. CTCJXXKTOS.
o-<t>d\\ ( 195, 3; o-<aA-) trip, deceive, fut. <r<|>aXw, 1st aor. w^Xa
( 204, note 2), pf. mid. <r<t>a\|Acu, 2d aor. pass. io-^dXTjv.
<ra>'t (for *o-a)-iw, 292, 6 ; cf. o-ois safe) save, fut. <r<r (contr. from
o-awcrco, see o-aoco), 1st aor. co-wo-a (and eo-oxra, contr. from eo-ao>o-a,
see o-aow), pf. <ro-a>Ka (and <r<ro>Ka, from o-aow), pf. rnid. a-co-wo-nai
( 189, and o-eo-wp-ai, contr. from o-eo-aw/xat, see o-aocu), 1st aor.
pass. <rw0Tiv (contr. from eo-aw^r/i/, see aaoco), vbl. <TWO-TOS ( 189).
Tapdrrw ( 195, 1; ra/oax-) rfi^urft, fut. Tapda> (fut. mid. often pass.,
515, 1), 1st aor. rdpa|a, pf. mid. TCTapa-yiuu, 1st aor. pass.
( 195, note 2 ; ray-) arrange, fut. rdf-w, 1st aor. irai-a, 2d pf.
( 219, 1), pf. mid. Wra^jiai, 1st aor. pass. tTO.\Qi\v, vbls.
TttKTOS, TttKTeOS ( 25).
( 195, 4; theme rev-, ra-, 14, note) stretch, fut. TVW, 1st aor.
6Tiva, 1st pf. Tt'raKa ( 218, 4), pf. mid. rerajiai ( 224, note),
w, 190) hate (Ionic and poetic), fut. mid. (as pass. 515, 1)
ffTvyri<rofji.ai, 1st aor. to-rijyrja-a, and trans. e<7Tva made hateful, 2d aor.
(epic) evTvyov, 1st pf. ^rijyrjKa ( 535), 1st aor. pass. ^a-Tvy/id-rjv.
( 195, note 1 ; o-vpiyy-), Attic CTU/JITTW ( 195, note 2) whistle, 1st
aor. <rvpia.
w, Ionic and poetic is the rare 1st aor. pass. e<r<t>dx6r]v-
etc. See %&>.
[root T07-] only epic 2d aor. partic. Tcraydv seizing ( 208, 1 a).
TO.-VV-W ( 196. 5, for *TV-W-U, 14, note ; cf. re/i/w) stretch (poetic and
Ionic) , also pres. mid. rd-w-fj-ai (pres. theme is carried into the other
tenses), fut. ra^w ( 216), 1st aor. erdwa-a and erdwa-a-a ( 201 a),
pf. mid. TeTdvva-/j.ai, 1st aor. pass, ^ravixrd^v.
Tapdrru, Ionic ra/xWw ( 22), epic 2d pf. in trans. ( 494, 3) T
( 38) be disturbed.
[root TOK- (for *0a0, 41), Brjir- ( 13)] (poetic), only 2d aor.
2d pf. Ttdyira ( 219, 2), epic plupf. ^re-^Trea ( 222 a).
729] LIST OF VERBS 415
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
1st aor. pass. Ta6Tjv (for *c-Tv-6r)v, 14, note, contrary to 231, 4),
vbls. Tares, Tare'os ( 14, note).
TK|xaCpojj.aiyw(/r/e, infer, t'ut. TCKp-apovficu. 1st aor. eTKfj.T]pdnT]v ( 158, 3).
(dm-)T'XXa> ( 195, 3 ; theme reA.-, raA.-, 14, 1) cause to rise, rise, 1st
aor. (dv-)6TiXa, pf. mid. (ei/-)Te'Ta\(xai ( 224, note).
T\W (-o for *TeAeo--tw, 292, 2 ; cf . re'Aos end) Jinish, f ut. reXw ( 212, 1),
1st aor. T\<ra ( 188), pf. rc-HXcKa ( 188), pf. mid. TereXeo-jicu
( 189), 1st aor. pass. IreXco-etiv ( 189), vbl. rctarrfos ( 189).
Tc'ii-vw ( 196, 1 ; re//,-, ret//,-, 14, 1) cut, flit. TCJJIW, 2d aor. erejiov, 1st
pf. T^TjiTjKa ( 218, 3), pf. mid. T6T|)|iai ( 224, 1), 1st aor. pass.
T|i^9T|v ( 38, 1), vbl. T|U|-r<os ( 38, 1).
Tpir-o> ( 193, 2 ; repTT-, rapTT-, 14, 1) delight, fut. Tp\j/w, 1st aor.
1st aor. pass. Tp<|>8Tiv.
TTpaivo) ( 195, 4, rerpav-) Z'ore ; also tenses from theme rep-,
38, 1, 1st aor. IWrpava ( 204, note 2), also erprjo-a, pf. mid.
TTpTi|iai (rprj-).
TTJK-W ( 193, 1 ; theme TTJK-, raK-, 13) melt, fut. TTJ, 1st aor. TT]a,
2d pf. TcVtiKa am melted (491, 2), 2d aor. pass, as intrans. ( 514),
( 232, 1) melted, vbl. TTJK-TOS.
TKfj.alpo/j,ai, act. TeK(j.a.lpw set a mark is poetic.
[root re^t-, r/i-] encounter, only epic 2d aor. e-re-r / u-oi' ( 208, 1 a) and
r^-TfjL-ov ( 171 a).
, Ionic and poetic rd/j-vw, 2d aor. era/jiov ( 208). See also T/r^w.
, epic 2d aor. mid. Te-Tapir-6iJ.rit> ( 208; 208, la; 171 a), subj.
rercipTrw/xai and Ta/37rwjua, 1st aor. pass, also ^Tdp^dijv, and 2d aor.
pass. (cf. 514) tTdp-n-rjv, with subj. 1st pi. rpair-fjo^v ( 38 ; 233,
1 a; Mss. Tpa-rreio/j-ev^).
( 195, 4) dr?/, epic 1st aor. T^p<rr]va ( 171 a).
(poetic) become dry, 2d aor. pass, as intrans. ( 514) tTtpa-rjv
became dry.
having seized. See [rory-].
TTir)(rOoi>, rert^ws, TeTirj^vos. See ["rte-].
See [re^t-].
-w (193, 2; theme rei^-, TWX-, 14, 2) make ready (poetic), fut.
rei5w, 1st aor. ere^a, 2d aor. infin. (from theme TUK-) TeTVKetv, 3d pi.
mid. TeTtKovTo ( 171 a), 2d pf. r^reuxa 6e rea^ ( 494, 3), pf. mid.
T{-Tvy-/j.ai ( 224, note ; for 3d pi. Teri5x- ara 5 Terrix-a, see 226 a),
epic 1st aor. pass. ir^Q-^v (contrary to 231, 4). Cf. Tvyx*-
, rare and mostly poetic is 1st aor. pass, er^x^ 7 ?" W( * s melted.
416 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
TC-0TJ |u ( 193, 3; theme Orj-, Oe-, 13) put (inflection 251), fut. Q^o-a,
aor. 0TjKa ( 211, 3, inflection 255), 1st pf. T^KO,, pf. mid. re'Oei-
jjtai, but usually supplied by KCIJUU ( 264), 1st aor. pass. eriQr\v
( 40), Vbls. 06TOS, 0TOS.
TIKTW (for *TI-TK-O>, 193, 3 ; theme TOK-, TCK-, TK-, 14) beget, briny
forth, fut. rlg<0, 2d aor. TOKOV, 2d pf. TCTOKCI ( 219, 3), 1st aor.
pass. iri\Qi\v.
H-vtt ( 196, 1 ; theme r-, TI-, 14, 2) pay, fut. reto-w, 1st aor. emo-a,
1st pf. TTiKa, pf. mid. TT6io-fiai ( 189), 1st aor. pass. Tl<r0T]v
( 189), Vbl. T6UTT60S ( 189).
Ti-Tpw-o-Kco ( 197, 1; rpo)-) wound, fut. rpcoo-ca, 1st aor. crpoxra, pf. mid.
TTpa>n<u, 1st aor. pass. Tpw8tjv.
Tpir-a> ( 193, 2; theme T/OOTT-. rpen-, rpaw, 14, 1) (urn, fut. Tps'xJ/w,
1st aor. Tp\|/a. 2d aor. mid. eTpairojiiiv ( 208) turned, fed, 2d pf .
T^Tpo<J>a (sometimes possibly reVpa^a), pf. mid. rerpanfjiai ( 224,
note), 1st aor. pass. Tp&|>0T]v and 2d aor. pass, usually as intrans.
( 514) iTpdm^v ( 232, 2) turned, vbl. rptirre'os.
Tp<j>-co ( 193, 2; theme rpo<-, rpe<^>-, rpa<^>-, 14, 1 ; for *0po(f>-, etc.,
41) support, feed, rear, fut. P \|/a> ( 41), 1st aor. P x|ra ( 41),
[root rte-] only epic 2d pf. partic. rert^s troubled, dual. mid.
mid. partic. reTi'^j'os troubled.
rtXXw (195, 3 ; rtX-) pZwcA: (mostly poetic) fut. n\w, 1st aor. ertXa, pf.
mid. T^rtX/iat, 1st aor. pass. lTL\dt]i>.
rlva, Homer has rivw (with long t) ; in pres. and iinpf. rl-w ( 193) ^we
what is due, honor (poetic) , fut. rftrw, 1st aor. crlcra, pf . mid. rert/^j/os.
Ti-ralvu ( 195, 4 ; theme rav- reduplicated ; cf. rdvu} stretch (epic), 1st
aor. tTlr-nva ( 204).
[root r\rj-, r\a-, rciXa-] endure (poetic), fut. TX^a-o/uai, 1st aor. rdXao-<ra
(raXa-), 2d aor. T\rjv (like eo-r^i/, 257), 1st pf. T^-rXrj-Ka, also 2d pf.
without suffix ( 220 ; 258) r^rXa/xei/, opt. rerXa^j/, impv. T^r\a6i, etc.
r/i^a; ( 193, 1 ; T/-077-, T/tcry-) CM (poetic = Tfyvu), fut. T^W, 1st aor.
er/xij^a, 2d aor. fTfjiayov ( 208), 2d aor. pass, to-fidy-iiv ( 232, 1).
ToptD(-6w) pierce (poetic), fut. ropri<rw, and from redup. aor. stern ( 519,
note 2) Teroprio-w, 1st aor. trbptitra, 2d aor. eropoi/ (cf. 190).
TP^TTW, Ionic has sometimes rpdirw, poetic 2d aor. act. erpairov, Homer
and Herodotus have 1st aor. pass. ^Tpd<p6^v.
w, epic 2d aor. (intrans.) erpcupov grew up ( 494, 1), poetic 1st
aor. pass.
729] LIST OF VERBS 417
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
2d pf. T6T P o4a ( 219, 3), pf. mid. rttpa|i|iai ( 224, note), 2d aor.
pass, ^rpd^v ( 232, 2).
TPC'X-W ( 193; theme @ptx~i 41) rim; other tenses supplied ( 164)
from theme 8pa/u-; fut. 8pap.ov(iai, 2d aor. eSpa^ov. pf. SeSpdpjKa
( 190), pf. mid. StSpdfju^ai ( 190), but vbl. e P KTos.
Tp ( 199, 2) tremble, 1st aor. erp<ra ( 188).
193; rpl(3-, rpift-) rub, fut. T P tya>, 1st aor. Srpu|/a, 2d pf.
TTpi<|>a, pf. mid. Terpip-iiai ( 247), 1st aor. pass. Tptj>0T]v, but
more often 2d aor. pass. Irpip^v.
xw(-oa)), and rpv-w wear away, exhaust, all regular, but see
164.
-w ( 193 ; rpwy-, Tpay-) </naw, fut. Tpop.ai ( 507), 2d aor. Tpa-
yov, pf. mid. TCTpwyK- 111 ? vbl. rpwKros.
( 196, 2; theme rev^-, rv^-, 14, 2) hit, happen, fut. revf-onou
( 507), 2d aor. 6Tv X ov ( 208), 1st pf. r^rv\r\Ka ( 190).
Tvir-T ( 194; TVTT-) strike, fut. rvmVw ( 190; 519, note 2), other
tenses usually supplied ( 164) from ira or irardo-o-w; pass.
supplied from irX^JTrw.
Tt4>-w ( 193 ; theme 6v<f>-, 41) raise smoke, smoke, pf. T^6vn(iai, 2d aor.
pass, as intrans. ( 514)
viri(rx-vov|jiai (-eo/xat, 196, 4) promise ( 508), fut. vjro<rx^(ro(iai, 2d
aor. virccrxojrtiv, pf. vir<rxil|Jtai ; cf. e\o> and t<rx<>-
v<j>aivw ( 195, 4 ; v<aj/-) weave, fut. v<j>avw, 1st aor. v$r\va ( 204,
note 2), pf. mid. v<j>a<rfi<u ( 247), 1st aor. pass. t4>dv6Tjv, vbl.
v- ( 193) rain, fut. v<rw, 1st aor. v<ra, pf. mid. vo-piai ( 189), 1st
aor. pass. \><rQr\v ( 189).
ptx<, poetic fut. dp^o^i ( 507), 1st aor. tepefr ( 41).
( 195, 2 ; rply-} squeak (Ionic and poetic), 2d pf. re-rply-a ( "K
with Epic partic. rerptyuJs, -ywros, fern, rerplyvla.
w wound (epic, rare) = TITPW&KU.
i epic also 1st aor. eri/x^a, Ionic and late is 2d pf.
Homer often uses rtrvy/jLai, ^ri/x^" (from rev^u) in almost the sense
Of TTU%7;/fa, T\>X.OV.
, epic and Ionic 1st aor. erv\f/a, poetic 2d aor. ervirov, pf. mid. (Ionic
and poetic) Teru/^cu ( 27, 1), poetic 2d aor. pass.
vfMi., Ionic and poetic usually uTri
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 27
418 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
4>cuv (for *<av-i<o, 195, 4; theme <av-) show, fut. 4>avu>, 1st aor.
j>Tiva ( 204, note 2), 1st pf. irc'^a-yKa, 2d pf. ir&jnjva have appeared
( 494, 2), pf. mid. ir<j>ao-(jLai (see 247), 2d aor. pass, as intrans.
( 514) e4>dvT]v appeared.
<|>d-<rK-&> ( 197) say, only pres. and iinpf. ; see <J>TIH--
<J>eC8-o|jLai ( 193, 2 ; theme <a8-, <i8-) spare, fut. <j>c(<ro|iai (for *<a8-
o-o/xat, 30), 1st aor. j>iorci|ju]v, vbl. <j>i<r-Tos ( 26).
<j>p- ( 193, 2) carry (see 164), fut. supplied by ofcrw, aor. supplied
by Tivc^ica ( 207, note 1) or 2d aor. rjvryKov (theme eveyK-), 2d pf.
Iv-^vox-a ( 179; 219, 1 and 3), pf. mid. Iv-^vev-jiai ( 224, note),
1st aor. pass. -{\vt\Qi\v, vbls. oUrros, olo-Tos. Cf. [eve/c-].
( 193, 2; fovy-, <uy-, 14, 2), also rarely <j>v^av ( 196, 2)
flee, fut. <j>voji<u or ^ovjuu ( 214), 2d aor. c^ov ( 208),
2dpf. ire'<|>VYa ( 219, note 1).
( 193; ^, </>a-, 13) say (inflection 263), fut. ^o-, 1st aor.
(J>r|o-a. vbls. <j>ar6s, <|>aTOS.
<j>0d-vw ( 196, 2; ^0^, <^>0a-, 13) anticipate, fut. ^OTJo-ojiai ( 507;
doubtful is (f>Od(T(t)) , 1st aor. e<t>6acra, 2d aor. }>0T]v (like lo-rr;v,
257).
<|>0(pa) ( 195, 4 ; theme <j>0op-, <t>0ep-, <f>0ap-, 14, 1) corrupt, fut. <f>0epJ),
1st aor. (|>0ipa, 1st pf. <|>0apKa ( 218, 4), but commonly 2d pf.
8i-<|)0opa ( 219, 3), pf. mid. <t>0apjjiai ( 224, note), 2d aor. pass.
(cf. 514), ^OAp^v ( 232, 2).
(j>alvw, epic also <f>aelvw appear, shine, 1st aor. pass, ^a^vd^v (Mss. e
^T/V, cf. 199 b). Homer has also from shorter root <f>a- 2d aor. 0de
( 171 a) appeared, and fut. pf. 7re077<rerai. For ^dveaKov see 191 b.
4>efSoM<u, epic 2d aor. Tre^b^v ( 208 ; 208, la; 171 a), fut. from aor.
stem ( 519 a) Tre0t5?7(ro/<uu.
[root 0e*>-, 0j>-, 0a (for $v-, 14 note)] MZ (epic), 2d aor. f-ire-^v-ov ( 208 ;
208, 1 a) and irtyvov ( 171 a) slew, pf. mid. ir<?-0a-Atcu ( 224, note),
fut. pf. 7re0T7<ro/u ( 228).
>, epic 2d pi. impv. <t>tpre (for 0^pere), for 1st aor. impv. oltre see
201 b. (Herodotus has (once) 1st aor. infin. dv-oi<rai.') Ionic forms
from theme tveiK- are 1st aor. ^vet/ca ( 207, note 1), 2d aor. yveiKov, pf.
mid. tvrjvety/j.a.1, 1st aor. pass. -^velxO^v.
w, epic pf. mid. partic. ire-<t>vy-ij.tvos ( 219 a), and pf. act. partic.
e-0i;f-6Tes (as if from *0i5f-w).
, epic 2d aor. mid. partic. 00a/xej'os ( 211 a).
729] LIST OF VERBS 419
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
<j>0i-vco ( 196, 1), waste, decay, fut. <j>0i<r, 1st aor. |>8ura, 2d aor. mid.
e4>0i(AT|v perished, pf. mid. <{>0ip.cu.
<j>iXw(-a>) love (inflection "249), fut. <J>i\^o-w, etc., regular.
<|>p<ry-vu-[u ( 196, 5) fence = <|>pdTTa>, q.v.
4>pdi> ( 195, 2 ; <f>paS-) point out, declare, tell (mid. consider), fut.
<j>pa<ra> ( 30), 1st aor. f>pcura, 1st pf. ir<J>paKa, pf. mid. ire'4>pa<rfjiai
( 189, note), 1st aor. pass, <|>pd<r0Tiv ( 189, note), vbl. <J>pao-Tos
( 189).
<j>paTTw ( 195, 1; theme <f>pa.K- and <t>pa.y-, 195, note 2) fence [fut.
<|>pda> or <j>dp ( 38)], 1st aor. |>paa or j>apfja ( 38), pf. mid.
ire<j>pa*y|Jiai or irc<|>ap-yp.ai ( 38), 1st aor. pass. <J>pdx0iiv, vbl. 4>paK-r6s
or <J>apK-r6s ( 38).
<|>piTTw ( 195, 1; <piK-) shudder [fut. <pta>], 1st aor. f>pi|a, 1st pf.
ir<j>plKa am in a shudder ( 535).
( 193) roast, fut. <l>ptia>, 1st aor. t>pva, pf. mid. ir'<j>pv-yn<u, vbl.
<|>u\dTT&) ( 195, 1 ; <f>v\ai<-) guard, fut. <|>v\d|a), 1st aor. 4>v>\aa, 2d pf.
ire4>v\axa, pf. mid. ir<j>v\a-Yfj.ai, 1st aor. pass. l^vXdx.O'nv, vbl.
.
4>cp-a> ( 193) mix, pf. mid. Tre'<J>vpp.cu ; also <f>vpw(-aw) regular.
<|>c-a) ( 193; (f>v-, <v-, 13) produce, fut. <|>6<ra>, 1st aor. e4>v<ra, 2d aor.
|>Uv grew, be by nature ( 491, 1), 1st pf. ir^xJKa be ( 494, 3),
vbl.
(j>6ivw, Homer has 00zi/w with long t. (Two supposed occurrences of a
pres. 00/w in Homer (<f>dirjs, '4$6t.v) are easily corrected to the cor-
responding forms ((j)6teai, e00tro) of the aor. mid.) For the epic
2d aor. opt. (ftdiwv, etc. (for *(j>6i-i-/j,-r)i>') see 211, 2 a. For pf.
3d pi. e-00t-aro see 226 a. Epic 1st aor. pass. eQdidvjv (3d pi. e<0t-
6e V , 233 a).
0tX<S, epic 1st aor. mid., from stem 0i\- (cf. 190), t-QiK-awv ( 204).
For epic pres. infin. ^tXTj-^emi see 199 d.
( 191 a) burn (poetic) = 0X^ya>.
w, epic 2d aor. e-ire-cfrpad-ov ( 208, 1 a) or TrtypaSov ( 171 a).
, aorists pass. (Ionic and late) ^p^^'n v l gt ? typvyyv 2d.
, epic 1st aor. H(pvp<ra ( 204 a), poetic 1st aor. pass, e^pdrjv.
;w, in Homer usually with v, in epic also 2d pf. ( 220) 3d pi. 7re-0tf-a<n,
partic. 7re-<t>v-(t)$ (fem. fy-Tretpwia) , 1st plupf. with variable vowel
420 LIST OF VERBS [ 729
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
(dva-)xa-o> ( 195, 2; ^a8-) withdraw (fut. ^ao-o/xat, 507), 1st aor.
exo-o-a. The verb is mostly poetic ; cf . /ceKaSov.
Xcupoo ( 195, 4; x a /~) re joice, fat. x - 1 ? 1 ! " 40 ( 190), 1st pf. Kcx^p^Ka
( 190), pf. mid. Ke'xapficu and Kcx^pi^xai ( 190), 2d aor. pass, as
intrans. ( 514) ex < *P T l v rejoiced, vbl. x a P T s-
XaX.w(-aco, 188) loosen, 1st aor. Ix^cura, 1st aor. pass. exa\dor0T]v
( 189).
X^t w ( 195, 2 ; theme xoB-, x ^~' 14) caco, fut. x " ^H tai> (f r *X ^~
oroujom, 30; 214), 1st aor. x<ra, rarely with variable vowel
(cf. 201 b) ex<rov, 2d pf. Kc'xo 8 " ( 219, 3).
X&o ( 193, note; 199, 2; theme xeu- xy-, 14, 2) joowr, fut. x'
( 216), aor. xa ( 207, note 1), 1st pf. KC'-XV-KO,, pf. mid.
( 224, note), 1st aor. pass. e\vQi\v, vbl. X^TOS.
Xp^j it is necessary, see 267.
193) anoint, sting, fut. XP^" W > 1st aor. cxpura, pf. mid.
1st aor. pass. cxpto-O^v ( 189), vbl. xprT6 s ( 189).
p't" (for xpw-i^w, 292, 6, cf. \pw-s complexion") color, stain, pf. mid.
Kc'xpwo-Hiai ( 189), 1st aor. pass. IXPS^V ( 189).
w ( 199, 3) give oracles, fut. \pi\<ra>, 1st aor. cxp^ora, 1st pf. Ke'xpT|Ka.
pf. mid. K'xpri|jLai, 1st aor. pass. 6XP^" eT l v ( 189). diroxpw be suffi-
cient (usually impersonal a-jro-^pfj) , like XP^-
c -' ^^? ^) use ( m iddle deponent, 158, 3),
, epic 1st aor. mid. 3d sing, x^paro ( 204 ; 171 a), epic 2d aor.
mid. Kexap^rjv ( 208, la; 171 a).
( 196, 2 ; theme xo^S-, x ei/ 5-, x a ^- (for x"5-, 14, note) contain
(Ionic and poetic), fut. x^" eTat (f r *x ei '5 " erai 5 34), 2d aor. exaSov,
2d pf. /c^x"5a Mss. (better /c<?x"Sa, 219, 3).
xa0-/ca> (for *x a "- <r ' ca> ?> 197 ; theme x"n v ~i X av -t 13) gape (Ionic and
poetic), fut. xetpoGjucu, 2d aor. ex avov -> 2d pf. K^x'n va be agape ( 535).
X^w, epic pres. rarely x" w > e Pi aor - ^ so *X eva > f r e pi 2d aor. mid.
as pass. ex VTO see 211 a ; 515, 1.
[root xP ai<T ^~] help, avert (epic), only 2d aor. XP aLff f J ' ov > a l so from
X/sato-jue- ( 190), fut. xpor/i^<rw, 1st aor. ex/ )a ^"/ U7 ? (ra -
yfa, poetic xpot'^w.
, xP^Atai, in Ionic contract to a where Attic has 77 ; as 3d sing, xparat,
infin. xp&vfah etc - 5 P res - sub J- xpfafu'ui etc. (cf. 199 c) ; partic.
f. 199 c).
729] LIST OF VERBS 421
[Attic principal parts in full-faced type. Ionic and poetic forms at the
bottom of the page.]
fut. XRTJO'OH.CU, 1st aor. e\pT\<ra.\iT\v, pf. K'xpT]jicu, 1st aor. pass.
( 510) 4 X pW ( 189), vbls. XPIO-TOS, XP1<rrfo ( 189).
\<o (-oco) heap up, fut. \(a<r<a, 1st aor. ex<i><ra, 1st pf. Ke'xwKa. pf. mid.
Kexwo-p-ai ( 189), 1st aor. pass. x<o<r9iiv ( 189), vbl. x wo "s
( 189).
\J/v8-w ( 193, 2) deceive (mid. lie), fut. \|/vo-w ( 30), 1st aor. o|/v<rct
( 30), pf. mid. &|rcv<r|Mu ( 189, note), 1st aor. pass. IxJ/evo-e^v
( 189, note).
\|/t>X- ( 193) coo/, fut. t|/t>ci>, 1st aor. e\|/vga, pf. mid. exj/u-yp-ai, 1st aor.
pass. 6\|/fy(6 T l v an( i 2d aor. pass, as intrans. ( 514) \|/IIXT]V cooled.
j/'w (/n?s, ^07, etc., 199, 3) rub (usually in composition : as diro-ij/w),
fut. \|nr|o-w, etc., regular; pf. mid. usually supplied from
(regular),
tZ>9w (-ceo, 190; theme a>0-, for ^w^-, 2 a) ^w.sA (impf.
172, 2), fut. <rw (for *o)0-o-<o, 30), 1st aor. 6<ra ( 172, 2), pf.
mid. WH.CU ( 180; 189, note), 1st aor. pass. cwo-Oriv ( 172, 2;
189, note), vbl. wrreos ( 189).
o>vov|iai (-eo/xat) owy (impf. eaivov/Jirjv, 172, 2), fut. cw^o-opai, aor. sup-
plied ( 164) by lirpux^v ( 257), pf. <&vr]fi.<u ( 180), 1st aor.
pass. 6v^9i]v ( 172, 2), vbls. WVTJTO'S, w
<2, poetic fut. sometimes w^o-w ( 190), Ionic 1st aor. (contracted)
wcra, pf. mid.
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
Verb forms, as a rule, are not listed in the Greek index, but they are
to be sought in the List of Verbs ( 729).
Ablative genitive 361 ff.
Absolute construction, accusative
343, 658 ; genitive 360, 657.
Abstract for concrete 322 ; substan-
tive suffixes 282.
Acatalectic verse 689.
Accent 55 ff. ; position of 57 ; rules
for 58 ff . ; recessive accent 64 ;
accent of contracted syllables 65 ;
of elided words 66 ; proclitics 69 ;
enclitics 70 ; accent in declension
77 ; stems of one syllable in 3d
decl. 100; of neuter participle 129,
2-3 ; of adjectives 117, 2 ; 118, 3 ;
119, 1 ; 120, 1-2 ; 122, 2 ; of per-
sonal pronouns 139, 1-2 and notes
1-2 ; of the verb 184 ; of infini-
tive, participle, and verbals 185 ;
of contract verbs 185 note ; of tarl
262, 1.
Accompaniment, dative of 392.
Accusative, singular of Attic 2d decl.
92, 3 ; in 3d decl. 97 ; of -oi-stems
in Hdt. 112 a; Epic -e?a for -w
123 a; plural of 1st decl. 84 note ;
of stems in -i- and -v- 110, 4;
110 e; plural of /3oGs 111 c; of
comparatives 121, 2.
Accusative case, syntax of 328 ff. ;
d irect object 329 ff. ; cognate 331 ff.;
of part affected 335; "whole
and part" 335 a; adverbial uses
336 ff. ; of specification 337 ; of
extent 338 ; of limit of motion
339 and a ; two accusatives with
one verb 340 ; predicate accusative
341 ; subject of infinitive 342 and
note ; 629 ; of swearing 344 ; with
compound verbs 345 ; prepositions
with 346 ; 399 ; with verbs that
usually take genitive 356 note 1 ;
by attraction from genitive or
dative 631, 1 ; accusative absolute
343 ; after ws and &<nrep instead of
genitive absolute 658 note.
Action, suffixes denoting 279.
Active infinitive with passive mean-
ing 641 note.
Active voice 503 ; endings of 166, 1 ;
167 ; 170 notes 1 and 2.
Acute accent 56 ; changed to grave
67.
Adjectives, declension of 116 ff. ; of
1st and 2d decl. 117; contract 118 ;
of two endings 119; of 3d decl.
120 ff. ; of 1st and 3d decl. 122 ff. ;
stems in -v- 123 ; stems in -vr-
125 ; of one ending 126 ; of irregu-
lar declension 127-128 ; compari-
son of adjectives 132 ff. ; in -wv
and -ovs 133 ; by /uaXXoi/, /maXia-ra
135 ; irregular comparison 136 ;
422
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
423
correlation of pronominal adjec-
tives 151 ; numeral adjectives 152;
formation of adjectives 287-289 ;
syntax of adjectives 419 ff. ; agree-
ment of 420 ff. ; predicate 421 ff. ;
used substantively 424 ; with ad-
verbial force 425 ; comparative
426 ; superlative 427 ; position of
with article 451 ff . ; objective geni-
tive with 351 ; 367 ; partitive geni-
tive with 357 ; genitive of sepa-
ration with 362, 2 ; dative with
376 note ; 392, 2 ; infinitive with
641.
Adonic verse 708, 1.
Advantage, dative ^of 377 note 1 ; 378.
Adverbial use of prepositions in
Homer 398 a ; adverbial force of
appositive 318 note ; adverbial
accusative 336 ff. ; adjectives with
adverbial force 425 ; adverbial in-
finitive 642.
Adverbs, form of 137 ; comparison
of 138 ; correlation of pronominal
151 ; numeral adverbs 152 ; for-
mation of 290.
Adverbs, syntax of 429 ff . ; attribu-
tive = adjective 429, 1 ; 06 and ^
431-435; Av 436-439; use of tf
with comparative adverbs 426 note
3 ; 430 ; partitive genitive with 360
and note; genitive of separation
with 362, 3 ; dative with 392, 3 ;
adverbs with circumstantial par-
ticiple 654 ff.
Aeolic dialect, Introduction, page
12 ; Aeolic forms in Homer 139 a ;
199 d.
Agent, suffixes denoting 278 ; geni-
tive of 372 ; 516 ; dative of 380 ;
516, 1 ; 516 a ; accusative of 516, 1.
Agreement 314 ; of substantives
317 ff. ; of adjectives 420 ff. ; of
pronouns 462 ; personal 466 ; re-
flexive 469 ; our6s 474 ; possessive
476 ; demonstrative 480 ; relative
483 ff. ; interrogative 489 ; indefi-
nite 491 ; agreement of verbs 495.
Alphabet 1.
Alternative questions, direct 574 and
a ; indirect 579 and a.
Anaclasis 711 note.
Anacoluthon 717, 1.
Anacrusis 706.
Analogy, in word formation 275 ;
283, 1 ; 284, 1 ; 287, 5 ; 292.
Anapaest 683 ; anapaestic rhythms
703 ff. ; 709, 2.
Anastrophe 68.
Antecedent 460 ; implied 461 ; not
expressed 486.
Antepenult 51.
Anticipatory subjunctive 555 note ;
562 a ; in questions 576 a.
Antistrophe 691.
Antonomasia 322.
Aorist tense 161 note : First aorist,
formation of 201 ft'. ; inflection of
206 ; in -a in Homer 195, 2 a ; in
-ova, in Homer 201 a ; with varia-
ble vowel 201 b ; in -p<ra in Homer
204 a : Second aorist, reduplica-
tion of 183 ; 208, 1 a ; formation
of 207 ff. ; inflection of 210 ff. ;
207 note 1 ; epic peculiarities
207 a; 208, la; 210 a ; 211 a ;
subjunctive of, in Homer 211, 1 a ;
in Herodotus 211, 1 b; epic opta-
tive of -i- and -u-stems 211, 2 a :
First aorist passive, formation of
231; inflection of 233; 245:
Second aorist passive, formation
of 232 ; inflection of 233 ; 246.
Aorist, use of 528 ff. ; inceptive 529 ;
rendered by present 529 note ;
gnomic 530; of the future 531;
in other modes than indicative
543 ff. ; in indirect discourse 551 ;
424
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
aorist middle as passive 515, 1 and
a ; aorist indicative in subordinate
clauses not changed in indirect
discourse 675, 3.
Aphaeresis 717, 2.
Apocope 43 note 3.
Apodosis 600 ; apodotic 5<? 601 note.
Apparent compounds 297.
Apposition 317 ff. ; genitive case in
apposition with adjective 420
note; with possessive pronoun 477
note.
Arsis 684.
Article, 6, ^, r6, declined 144 ; epic
forms of 144 a.
Article, syntax of 443 ff. ; use as
a demonstrative 443 ; in Homer
443 a ; with proper names 446 ;
with possessive force 447 ; generic
448 ; with predicate substantive
449 ; position of article 450 ff. ;
attributive 451 ; predicate 453 ;
with /^cros, dKpos, etc. 454 ; with
Tras and #Aos 455 ; with demonstra-
tive pronouns 456 ; with limiting
genitive 457 ; predicate position
modified 458.
Articular infinitive 636 and a.
Asclepiadean verse 708, 6.
Aspiration, rejection of 40 ; 44, 4 a ;
transfer of 41 ; in Ionic 41 a ; in
elision 44, 4.
Assimilation of consonants 25 ; 27 ;
31 ; 33 ; in contracted verbs in
Homer 199 b-c.
Association, dative of 392.
Asyndeton 717, 3.
Attempted action 523 ; 527.
Attic dialect, Introduction, page 12 ;
77 for original a in 15 ; Attic 2d
decl. 92 ; in Ionic 92 a ; Attic re-
duplication 179 ; augment of 176 a ;
Attic future 215.
Attraction 316 ; of adjectives 631, 1 ;
of pronouns 465 ; 484 ; of verbs
501 ; 590 notes 1 and 4.
Attributive, the 302 ; adverb - ad-
jective 429, 1 ; attributive posi-
tion of adjectives 451 ff. ; of atrds
475, 1 ; attributive participle 650 ;
rendering of 650 note 2.
Augment 171 ff. ; omission of 171 a ;
syllabic 172 ; doubling of liquids
after 172, 1 a ; temporal 173 ; of
compound verbs 174 ; of denomi-
native verbs 175 ; double augment
172 note 1 ; 175 note ; of pluper-
fect 176.
Bacchius683 ; Bacchiac rhythms 713.
Basis (metrical) 707 note 1.
Brachylogy 717, 4.
Breathings 8 ; smooth for rough in
Ionic 8 a ; always rough with p
and v 9 ; 10.
Bucolic diaeresis 701, 1.
Caesura 690; masculine and femi-
nine 701 note.
Case endings 76 ; Homeric 76 a-c.
Cases, formation of in 3d decl. 95 ff.
Cases, syntax of 323 ff . ; nominative
325 ; vocative 327 ; accusative
328 ff ; genitive 347 ff. ; dative
373 ff. ; prepositions with the
cases 398 ff.
Catalexis 689.
Causal clauses 598.
Cause, genitive of 366 ; dative of
391 and note ; implied by circum-
stantial participle 653, 4.
Charge or penalty, genitive of 367.
Chiasmus 717, 5.
Choliambus 698 note.
Choriambus 683 ; choriambic
rhythms 710.
Chronology 725 ff.
Circumflex accent 56.
ENGLISH INDEX
425
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
Circumlocution in wishes 587 note 1 ;
588 note.
Circumstantial participle 652 ff. ;
translation of 653 ; adverbs with
654 ff. ; in genitive and accusative
absolute 657-658.
Cognate accusative 331 ; retained
in the passive 340 ; 512 ; 515 note.
Cognate mutes 12, 2.
Collectives 315 ; 321 ; agreement of
verbs with 500.
Colon 686.'
Commands 582 ff. ; in indirect dis-
course 678 note.
Common Greek (Koivfy Introduction,
page 12 ; common, quantity of
syllables 54 ; gender 78 note.
Comparative degree, syntax of 426.
Comparatives, declension of 121 ;
genitive with 363 ; 426, 2.
Comparison of adjectives 132 ff. ; by
-repos, -raros 132 ; by -tajj/, -KTTOS
134 ; by fj.a\\ov, /xdXtara 135 ;
irregular comparison 136 ; com-
parison of adverbs 138.
Compensative lengthening 16.
Complementary infinitive 638.
Complex sentences 313.
Compound negatives 433.
Compound sentences 312.
Compound verbs, augment of 175,
1 ; reduplication of 181 ; accent
of 184, 1 ; accusative with 345 ;
genitive with 370 ; dative with
394 ; some transitive by composi-
tion 493, 2.
Compound words, formation of
294 ff. ; inflection of 294, 1 ; ap-
parent compounds 297 ; compound
verbs 298 ; meaning of compound
words 300 ; accent of 300 note.
Concession, implied by circumstan-
tial participle 653, 7.
Concessive clauses 617.
Conclusion (of condition). See
Apodosis.
Conditions 599 ff. ; simple 602 ;
more vivid 604 ; less vivid 605 ;
contrary to fact 606 ; general
608 ff. ; summary of conditions
611 ; variations in 612 ; implied
conditions 614 ; implied in parti-
ciple 653, 6.
Conjugation of -w verbs 237 ff. ; of
-lit verbs 251 ff. ; of irregular
verbs 258 ff.
Conjunctions, syntax of 440 ff.
Conjunctive mode.. See Subjunctive.
Consonants 12 ; sounds of 11 ; all
sounded 11 note ; double conso-
nants 12, 3 ; consonant changes
22-37 ; doubled consonants 22-24 ;
in Homer 22 a ; with vowels 38-
39; with i 39 ; final 48.
Construction according to sense 315 ;
with collective substantives 321 ;
500 ; with neuter words, etc. 422 ;
464.
Context, meanings of tenses from
518 ; 523 ; 524 ; 527 ; 530 ; time
implied by 541 ; 544 ; 547.
Contract adjectives 118 ; participles,
declined 130.
Contract verbs, accent of 185 note ;
inflection of 199 ; in Homer 199
a-d ; in Herodotus 199 e ; para-
digms of 248-250 ; contraction of
verbs of two syllables in -tw 199, 2.
Contracted substantives in 1st decl.
88 ; in Ionic 88 a ; in 2d decl. 91.
Contracted syllables, accent of 65.
Contraction of mode suffix. See
160, 2.
Contraction of names in -K\er)s 108
and a.
Contraction of vowels 18 ; table of
715; contraction of three vowels
19 note 1.
426
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
Co-ordinate mutes 12, 2.
Copula 307 ; omission of 308.
Coronis 43.
Correlation of pronouns 151.
Crasis 43 ; accent in 66 note.
Cretic 683 ; Cretic rhythms 714.
Customary action 520, 1 ; 526, 1 ;
568.
Cyclic feet 682, 6.
Dactyl 683 ; dactylic rhythms 700 ff. ;
709, 1 ; dactylo-epitritic rhythms
709.
Daric, value of 724, 1.
Dative case, accent of 77, 2 ; in Attic
2d decl. 92, 1 ; dative plural, end-
ing of in Homer 76 b ; 99 a ; of
1st decl. in Ionic 84 b ; of 2d decl.
in Homer 90 c ; of 3d decl. 99 ;
Homeric 99 a ; 106 b-c ; of /Sous
111 c.
Dative case, syntax of 373 ff. ; indi-
rect object 375 ; of interest 377 ;
of advantage or disadvantage 378 ;
of possession 379 ; of agent 380 ;
ethical (or emotional) 381 ; of
reference 382 ; of place 384 and a ;
of time 385 ; instrumental 386 ;
of means 387 ; of degree of dif-
ference 388 ; of manner 389 ; of
respect 390 ; of cause 391 ; of
accompaniment 392 ; with sub-
stantives 393 ; with compound
verbs 394 and note ; prepositions
with 395 ; 399.
Days, names of 727 ; divisions of 728.
Declension of nouns 75 ; of substan-
tives 78 ff. : First declension 80 ff. :
Second declension 89 ff. ; Homeric
peculiarities 90 a-c : Third declen-
sion 93 ff. ; irregular declension
114-115 ; declension of adjectives
116 ff. ; of pronouns 139 ff. ; of
numerals 155.
Degree of difference, dative of 388.
Deliberative questions (subj.) 577.
Demonstrative pronouns 144 ff. ;
adjectives and adverbs 151 ; pro-
nouns, syntax of 480 ff. ; article
with 456 and note.
Denominative verbs 165 ; 291-292 ;
formation of 292 ; not compounds
298 note.
Denominative words 269.
Deponent verbs 158, 3 ; 508.
Depriving, genitive after words of
362 note ; two accusatives after 340.
Derivative words 269 ff. See Suffix.
Descriptive genitive 352.
Desiderative verbs 293.
Diaeresis 7 ; in versification 690.
Dialects, Introduction, pages 11-12.
Digamma. See Vau.
Dimeter 686, 2.
Diminutives, suffixes forming 283.
Diphthongs 5 ; improper 5, 1 ;
sounds of 6, 1-3 ; interchange of
14, 2 ; contraction of 19 ; how
augmented 173, 1 ; diphthong
stems in 3d decl. 111.
Dipody 686, 1.
Direct questions. See Questions.
Disadvantage, dative of 378 ; 377
notes 1 and 2.
Dochmiac rhythms 712.
Doric dialect, Introduction, page 12;
of the drama 680 note ; Doric
future 214.
Double consonants 12, 3.
Doubled consonants 22-24.
Drama, Doric of 680 note.
Dry measure 721.
Dual, forms of 74 note 1 ; ending
of genitive and dative of 2d decl.
in Homer 90 b ; accent of nomi-
native in 2d decl. contracts 91, 2 ;
epic form of in genitive and dative
3d decl. 99 b ; feminine of 117, 3.
ENGLISH INDEX
427
Elegiac distich 702.
Elision 44 ; in Homer 44 a ; 44, 2 a ;
in formation of compounds 295, 1 ;
accent of elided words 66 ; half
elision 52 a.
Ellipsis 717, 6.
Emotional dative 381.
Enclitics 70 ; accent when retained
71 ; enclitic forms of personal
pronouns 139, 1.
Endings, personal. See Person.
Epic case endings 76 a-c.
Epic dialect, peculiarities of. See
footnotes throughout the book.
Epic Shortening 52 a.
Epitrite 709.
Epode 691.
Era, the. See Year.
Ethical dative 381.
Eupolidean verse 708, 6.
Exclamations, genitive in 366 note ;
use of relatives in 488 note.
Exhortations 582 ff.
Expectation, future infinitive with
verbs of 549, 2.
Extent, accusative of 338.
Fact, statements of 562 ; in indirect
discourse 676.
Fearing, clauses of 594.
Feet 683.
Feminine caesura 701 note.
Figures of syntax 717.
Final clauses 590 ff . ; purpose 590 ff . ;
fearing 594 ; result 595.
Finite modes 159 ; uses of 552 ff.
See Modes.
First person. See Person.
Fullness, suffix -evr- denoting 289, 1.
Future conditions 603 ff. ; forms of
in Homer 604 a, b ; 605 a.
Future passive, formation of 234 ;
inflection of 234, 1 ; 245 ; 246, 1.
Future perfect, formation of 228 ;
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
inflection of 229 ; 244 ; future per-
fect active 230 ; use of 538.
Future tense (active), formation of,
212 ff. ; of liquid verbs 213 ; Doric
214 ; Attic 215 ; without suffix
216 ; inflection of 217 ; 238-239.
Future, use of 532 ff. ; implying
permission or command 583 note
1 ; periphrastic 533 ; future mid-
dle as passive 515, 1 and a ; aoristic
future 519 note 2 ; 519 a : future
indicative in present conditions
602 note 2 ; future and future
perfect in other modes than in-
dicative 548 ff. ; in indirect dis-
course 551.
Gender, general rules for 78 ; indi-
cated by 6, 17, r6 79 ; rules for, in
3d decl. 94.
General conditions 608 ; forms of, in
Homer 609 a ; 610 a.
Generic article 448.
Genitive absolute 369 ; 657 ; trans-
lation of 657, 1 ; substantive not
expressed with 657 note 1 ; irregu-
lar use of 657 note 2.
Genitive, accent of 77, 2 ; in Attic
2ddecl. 92, 1 ; singular of 1st decl.
masculine 87 note ; in Homer
87 a ; of 2d decl. in Homer 90 a ;
of steins in -v- 110 d ; genitive
(and dative) dual, ending in 2d
decl. in Homer 90 b ; in 3d decl.
99 b ; genitive plural 1st decl. ac-
cent of 84 ; ending in Homer 84 a ;
of stems in -i- and -v- 110, 3 ; of
adjectives in Ionic 117, 1 a ; accent
of, in adjectives in -us 122, 2 ; of
ai)r6s in Ionic 140 a.
Genitive case, syntax of 347 ff. ;
possessive 348 ; subjective 349 ;
objective 350 ; descriptive 352 ; of
value 353 ; partitive 354-360 ; of
428
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
place 358 and a-b ; of time 359 ;
with adverbs 360; of separation
362 and a ; with comparatives
363 ; with verbs of inferiority and
superiority 364 ; of source 365 ;
of cause 366 ; of exclamation 366
note ; of charge or penalty 367 ;
two or more genitives with one
word 368 ; with compound verbs
370 ; prepositions with 371 ; 399 ;
of agent 372 ; article with limiting
genitives 457.
Gentile (or place name) suffixes 286.
Glyconic verses 708, 3.
Gnomic aorist 530; in Homeric
similes 530 a.
Grave accent 56.
Half elision 52 a.
Hendiadys 717, 7.
Herodotus, dialect of. See foot-
notes throughout the book.
Hexameter, dactylic 701.
Hexapody 686, 1.
Hiatus 42 ; in verse 688, 1.
Hindering, construction after words
of 643.
Historical present 525.
Homer, books of, how numbered
156 note. See also Epic.
Hoping, future infinitive with verbs
of 549, 2.
Hortatory subjunctive 585.
Hypallage 717, 8.
Hyperbaton 717, 9.
Hypotaxis 717, 10.
Hysteron proteron 717, 11.
Iambus 683 ; Iambic rhythms 697 ff. ;
707, 2.
Ictus 684.
Imperative mode, endings of 167 and
note 4 ; perfect imperative 221, 2 ;
aorist passive imperative -TI for -0i
233, 3 ; uses of the imperative 560 ;
in commands 583 ; in prohibitions
584 ; imperative in indirect dis-
course 678 note.
Imperative, tenses of 539 ff. ; pres-
ent 540 ; aorist 543 ; perfect 546.
Imperfect, formation of. See Pres-
ent system ; augment of 171 ; use
of 526 ff. ; of customary action
526, 1 ; of attempted action 527 ;
translated by present 527 note ; in
condition contrary to fact 606 ; in
Homer 606 a ; not changed to
optative in indirect discourse
675, 1.
Impersonal construction, origin of
305 note; with infinitive 634;
with verbal adjective 665.
Improper diphthongs 5, 1 ; sounds
of 6, 1.
Improper prepositions, use of 418 ;
genitive with 418 note.
Inceptive aorist 529.
"Incorporation," with relative pro-
nouns 485 ; with ovdels fans ov
and davftao-Tos 6Vos 485 note 1 ;
with ofoj, &ros, etc. 485 note 2.
Indefinite pronouns 148 ; 150 ; ad-
jectives and adverbs 151 ; pro-
nouns, syntax of 491.
Indicative mode, endings of 166, 2 ;
uses of 553 ; in statements of fact
562; potential indicative 565;
future with ov ^ 569, 2 ; in ques-
tions 576 ; potential in questions
576 ; indicative in hopeless wishes
588 ; with &v (potential) of re-
current action 568 ; simple indica-
tive instead of potential optative
564 ; instead of potential indica-
tive 566-567 ; future indicative in
purpose clauses 590 note 3 ; past
tense in unattained purpose 590
note 4 ; future in relative clause
ENGLISH IX I) EX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
429
of purpose 591 ; in object clauses
593 ; in clauses of fearing 594
note ; present or past in clauses
of fearing 594, 1 ; origin of this
construction 594 note ; in result
clauses 595 ; 597 ; in causal clauses
598 ; in simple conditions 602 ; in
more vivid conditions 604 ; in con-
ditions contrary to fact 606 ; with-
out & v in conditions contrary to
fact 607 ; in general conditions
608 ff. ; in relative and temporal
clauses 619 ; 621 ; 622 ; past tenses
of, not changed in indirect dis-
course 675 ; equivalents of indica-
tive in simple conditions 602
note 1.
Indirect discourse 668 ff. ; princi-
ples of 670 ff. ; infinitive in 551 ;
646 ; 671 ; participle in 551 ; 661 ;
671 ; optative in 673 ; verbs not
changed to optative 674 ff. ; in-
serted statement of fact 676 ; im-
plied indirect discourse 677 ;
summary 678.
Indirect questions 578 ff. ; ' yes ' or
' no ' 578 ; alternative 579 ; word
580 ; modes in 581 ; 673 ff. See
also Questions.
Indo-European group of languages,
Introduction, page 11.
Infinitive 159, 1 ; endings of 167 ;
epic 167 e ; accent of 185, 1 ; ac-
cent of epic form 185, 1 a ; tenses
of 539 ff. ; present 540 ; 541 ;
aorist 543 ; perfect 546 ; 547 ;
future 548 ff. ; future infinitive as
substantive 549 : Uses of 628 ff . ;
subject accusative 342 ; 629 ; sub-
ject not expressed 630 ; agreement
of predicate words 631 ; negative
with 633 ; personal and imper-
sonal construction 634 ; use as a
substantive 635 ff. ; in commands
583 note 2 ; in wishes 587 note 3 ;
of purpose 592 ; of purpose with
TOU 352, 1 note ; 63i), note ; with
adjectives and substantives 641 ;
adverbial use 642 ; after words of
hindering 643 ; of suggestion 644 ;
with wo-re 595 ; with l<$ y, e<f>' $re
596 ; with irpiv 627 ; after a com-
parative 426 note 5 ; 645 note ; in
indirect discourse 646 ; 671 ; with
&v 647 ; instead of participle 660,
1 note ; 661 note 3 ; in relative
clause in indirect discourse 671
note.
Inflection, general 73 ; of nouns
(general) 74 ; of substantives
78 ff. ; of adjectives 116 ff. ; of
pronouns 139 ff. ; of verbs 157 ff. ;
of compound words 294, 1.
Inseparable prefixes 299.
Instrument, suffix -rpo- denoting
281, 1.
Instrumental dative 386 ff.
Intensive pronoun avr6s. See avrbs
in Greek Index.
Interchange of vowels 13 ; 13 a ; 14 ;
of diphthongs 14, 2 ; of quantity 17.
Interest, dative of 377.
Interrogative pronouns 148 ; adjec-
tives and adverbs 151 ; pronouns,
syntax of 489 ff.
Intransitive verbs 493 ; tenses 494.
Ionic dialect, Introduction, page 12 ;
?/ for a in 15 a ; contraction infre-
quent in 18 a ; aspiration in 41 a ;
44, 4 a.
Ionic feet 683 ; rhythms 711.
Iota class of verbs 195.
Iota subscript 5, 1 .
Irrational syllable 682, 5.
Irregular substantives 114-115 ; ad-
jectives 127 ; comparison 136 ;
verbs 164 ; conditions 612.
Iterative forms 191 b.
430
Koppa 156.
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
Labial mutes 12, 2 ; before ^ 27, 1 ;
with a 28 ; labial stems in 3d decl.
101 ; labial verbs, formation of
tenses of 203 ; 219, 1 ; 231, 1 ;
247, 1.
Linear measure 718.
Lingual mutes 12, 2 ; before another
lingual 26 ; before /* 27, 3 ; before
a 30 ; assimilated in Homer 30 a ;
lingual stems in 3d decl. 102-103 ;
lingual verbs, formation of tenses
of 203 ; 218, 1 ; 231, 1 ; 247, 3.
Liquids 12, 1 ; doubled after aug-
ment 172, 1 a ; liquid stems in
3d decl. 104 ; liquid verbs, present
of 195, 3-4 ; 1st aorist of 204 ; in
Homer 204 a ; epic 2d aorist of
207 a ; future of 213 ; in Homer
213 a ; 1st perfect of 218, 3 ; in-
flection of future 239.
Liquid measure 720.
Litotes 717, 12.
Local adverb endings 137, 2 and a.
Locative case 76 note ; locative
dative 383 ff.
Logaoedic rhythms 707, 1.
Lyric rhythms 705 ff.
Manner, dative of 389 ; implied by
circumstantial participle 653, 3.
Masculine for feminine in first per-
son plural in tragedy 423 note ;
masculine caesura 701 note.
Material, adjective suffixes denoting
288 ; genitive of 352 note.
Means, suffix -rpo- denoting 281, 1 ;
-10- 284, 1 ; dative of 387 ; implied
by circumstantial participle 653, 2.
Measure, genitive of 352 note.
Measures 718 ff.
Metathesis 38 ; of quantity 17.
Metonymy 717, 13.
Metre 681 ff.
Middle mutes 12, 2 ; middle depo-
nents 158, 3.
Middle voice, ending of 166, 1 ; 167 ;
170 note 3 ; 504 ; translation of
506 ; in future only 507.
Mode of the verb 159. See Indica-
tive, Subjunctive, Optative, Im-
perative, Infinitive, and Participle.
Mode suffixes 160 and a ; contracted
with vowel of stem 160, 2 ; 170,
2-3; 200, 1 ; 211, 1-2 ; 233, 1-2.
Modes, uses of the finite 552 ff. ; of
infinitive 628 ff . ; of participle
648 ff.
Modern Greek, Introduction, page 12.
Molossus 683 footnote.
Money, table of 724.
Months, names of 726, 1 ; divisions
of 727.
Mood. See Mode.
Mora 682, 1.
Movable consonants 45-47.
Mutes, classified 12, 2 ; changes in
25-34 ; mutes before mutes 25-
26 ; smooth in Herodotus 44, 4 a.
Mute verbs. See Labial, Lingual,
Palatal.
Negatives 431 ff. ; strengthened 433 ;
sympathetic 434-435 ; negative
wishes 589 ; negative with infini-
tive 633 ; in indirect discourse
670, 3.
Neuters, nominative, vocative, and
accusative alike 74 note 3 ; neu-
ter words of 3d decl. 95 ; neuter
plural, agreement of verb with
498.
Nominative singular in -TO. (1st decl.)
85 a ; in 3d decl. 96.
Nominative case, syntax of 325-6 ;
in address and exclamations 326
note.
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
431
Nouns (substantives and adjectives),
inflection of 74 ff.
Noun stems, changes of, in derived
words 274.
Nu class of verbs 196.
Number of the verb. See Singular,
Dual, Plural.
Numerals 152 ; declension of 155 ;
notation 156.
Object, direct 329 ; indirect 375 ff. ;
direct object sometimes retained
with passive 515, 3.
Object clauses 593 and a.
Objective genitive 350.
Olympiad 725.
Optative mode, suffix of 160 ; end-
ings of 166, 4 ; 170 notes 2-3 ;
accent of, see 160, 2 ; optative of
2d aorist of -t- and -u- stems 211,
2 a ; of the perfect 221, 1 ; 227 ;
of the aorist passive 233, 2.
Optative mode, uses of 557 ff. ; po-
tential (with &v~) 563 ; without &v
in Homer 563 a, b ; optative in
wishes 587 ; in hopeless wishes
(epic) 588 a ; in purpose clauses
590 ; by attraction 590 note 1 ; in
object clauses 593 ; in causal
clauses 598 note ; in conditions
605 ; 610 ; in relative and tem-
poral clauses 624-627 ; in indirect
discourse 670, 1 ; 673.
Optative, tenses of 539 ff. ; present
540 ; aorist 543 ; perfect 546 ; fu-
ture 548 ; in indirect discourse
551.
Oxymoron 717, 14.
Oxytone 62.
Paeons 683 footnote.
Palatal mutes 12, 2 ; before fj. 27, 2 ;
with ff 29 ; palatal stems in 3d
decl. 101 ; palatal verbs, forma-
tion of tenses of 203 ; 219, 1 ; 231,
1 ; 247, 2.
Parataxis 717, 15.
Paroemiac 703, 1.
Paronomasia 717, 16.
Paroxytone 62.
Participles 159, 1 ; declension of
129 ; endings of 167 ; accent of
185, 1 ; tenses of 539 ff. ; present,
540 ; 542 ; aorist 543 ; 545 ; per-
fect 546 ; future 548 ; 550 ; in in-
direct discourse 551.
Participle, syntax of, 648 ff. ; attrib-
utive 650 ; as predicate adjective
651 ; circumstantial 652 ff. ; ad-
verbs with 654 ff. ; genitive and
accusative absolute 657-658 ; sup-
plementary participle 659 ff. ; in
indirect discourse 661 ; 671 ; with
&v 662 ; with e X w = perfect 536, 2.
Partitive apposition 319.
Partitive genitive 354 ff. ; of place
358 ; of time 359 ; with adverbs
360 and note; predicate position
of 355 note.
Passive aorists and futures 231 ff.
Passive deponents 158, 3.
Passive voice, endings of 166, 1 .
Passive voice, uses of 509 ff. ; of de-
ponent verbs 510 ; object of active
becomes subject of 511 ; cognate
accusative retained with 512 ; 515,
2 note ; supplied by active verb
513 ; origin of 514 ff. ; middle
as passive 515, 1 ; of intransitive
verbs 515, 2 ; agent with 516.
Patronymics 285.
Pause (metrical) 682, 9-10.
Pentapody 686, 1.
Penult 51.
Perfect active participle, declension
of 131.
Perfect (and pluperfect), use of
534 ff. ; perfect with present mean-
432
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
ing 535 ; periphrastic 536 ; of fu-
ture time 537 ; in other modes
than indicative 546 ff . ; in indirect
discourse 551.
Perfect middle system, formation
of 224 ; inflection of 225 ; 244 ;
247 ; Ionic, 3d plural 226 a.
Perfect, reduplication of 178 ff. ;
first perfect system, formation of,
218 ; inflection 221 ; 242-243 ; sec-
ond perfect system, formation of,
219 ; without suffix 220 ; inflec-
tion 221 ; 243 ; 258.
Periphrastic perfect 536 ; future
533.
Perispomenon 62.
Person of the verb 166 ; personal
endings 167 ; First person, singular
endings 167 ; 170 a ; 170 notes
1-2 ; dual endings 167 and note 1 ;
plural endings 167 and note 2 ;
Second person, singular endings
167 ; 167 a ; 170 notes 1 and 3 ;
170 c ; dual endings 167 ; plural
endings 167 ; Third person, singu-
lar endings 167; 170, note 1;
170 a ; dual, endings of 167 , 167 b ;
plural, endings of 167 and notes
3-4 ; 167 c-d ; 170 notes 1-2 ; of
perfect and pluperfect 226 and a.
Personal construction with infini-
tive and participle 634; with
verbal adjectives 664.
Personal pronouns, declension of
139 ; in Homer 139 a ; in Herodo-
tus 139 b ; syntax of 466 ff . ; some-
times not expressed in nominative
467 ; sometimes reflexive in Homer
470 a ; genitive case of = pos-
sessive 477.
Pherecratean verses 708, 2.
Philosophical imperfect 527 note.
Place, suffixes denoting 284 ; how
expressed 396 ; genitive of 358 ;
dative of 384 ; place toward which
339 ; locative case 76 note.
Pleonasm 717, 17.
Pluperfect active, formation of 222
and a ; inflection of 223 ; 226 and
a ; 242-243.
Pluperfect, augment of 176.
Pluperfect, use of 534 ff .; not changed
to optative in indirect discourse
675, 1.
Plural for singular, first person 495
note.
Poetry, kinds of 680.
Position, syllables long by 53.
Possession, dative of 379.
Possessive genitive 348 ; substantive
sometimes omitted with 348 note ;
possessive force of article 447.
Possessive pronouns 143 ; syntax of
476 ff.
Postpositive words 452 note.
Potential indicative 565; in ques-
tions 576 ; as apodosis of con-
dition contrary to fact 606 ; in
protasis 612 note ; not changed
to optative in indirect discourse
675, 2.
Potential optative 563 ; 565 a ; with-
out &v 563 b ; in questions 576 ;
implying wish 587 note 2 ; as apo-
dosis 605 ; in protasis 612 note ;
in indirect discourse 671 ; 678, 1.
Predicate 302 ; of sentence 306 ;
verb omitted 308 ; predicate en-
larged 311 ; not repeated in com-
pound sentence 312, 1 ; genitive
in predicate 348, 1 ; 352, 1 ; 355, 2.
Predicate adjective 421 ff.
Predicate position of adjectives
453 ff. ; of aur6s 475, 2.
Predicate substantive, agreement of
320 ; agreement of verb with 501 ;
article with 449.
Predicate words, agreement of 631.
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
433
Prefixes, inseparable 299.
Prepositions, apocope 43 note 3 ;
anastrophe 68 ; originally adverbs
298 a.
Prepositions with the accusative
346 ; 399 ; with the genitive 371 ;
399 ; with the dative 395 ; 399 ;
with adverbs 429 note.
Prepositions with the cases 398 ff. ;
attached to verb 398 note 1 ; re-
peated with verb and substantive
398 note 2 ; peculiarities in the
use of 398 note 3 ; adverbial use
of, in Hoiner 398 a ; infinitive with
638-640.
Present tense, reduplication of 182 ;
193, 3 ; 197, 1 ; formation of 192 ff . ;
simple class 193 ; r class 194 ; i
class 195 ; v class 196 ; an class
197 ; inflection of present 198 ;
-w form 198 ; contracts 199 ; -/jn
form 200 ; paradigms 237 ; 248-254.
Present tense, use of 520 ff. ; of a
continued state 521 ; with adverbs
like ir<Xcu 522 ; of attempted ac-
tion 523 ; with future meaning
524 ; historical 525 ; in other
modes than indicative 541 ; in in-
direct discourse 551.
Primary tenses 161, 1; 517; end-
ings of 166, 2 ; 170 notes 1-3.
Primitive words 269 ; primitive verbs
165 ; 291 ; formation of tenses of
186 ; 193, 1-3 ; 218, 4 ; 219, 2-3 ;
219 a ; 224 note ; 231, 4 ; 232, 1-2.
Principal parts of verbs 162, 2.
Proceleusmatic 683 footnote.
Proclitics 69.
Prolepsis 717, 18.
Prolonged syllables 682, 3-4.
Promising, future infinitive with
verbs of 549, 2.
Pronouns, declension of 139 ff. ; per-
sonal pronouns 139 ; in Homer
BABBITT'S GR. GRAM. 28
139 a ; in Herodotus 139 b ; ai>-
r6s 140; reflexive 141 ; reciprocal
142; possessive 143 ; demonstrative
144 ff. ; interrogative and indefinite
148 ; relative 149-150 ; correlation
of pronouns 151.
Pronouns, syntax of 459 ff. ; agree-
ment of (general) 462 ff. ; at-
traction 465 ; personal pronouns
466 ff. ; reflexive 469 ff. ; aur6s474-
475 ; possessive 476 ff. ; demon-
strative 480 ff. ; relative 483 ff. ;
interrogative 489-490; indefinite
491 ; aXXos and Vepos 492.
Pronunciation 4 ; 6 ; 11 ; of Greek
proper names in English 716.
Proparoxytone 62.
Properispomenon 62.
Protasis 600.
Punctuation 72.
Purpose, how expressed 590 ff. ; by
participle 653, 5.
Quality, suffixes denoting 282.
Quantity 52-54 ; in Homer 53 a, b ;
54 a ; interchange of 17.
Questions, direct 570 ff. ; yes or no
571 ; rhetorical 573 ; alternative
574 ; word 575 ; modes in direct
576 and a ; deliberative 577 ; indi-
rect 578 ff. ; modes in indirect
581 ; 673 ff. ; use of relatives in
indirect 490 ; 580.
Recessive accent 64 ; in adjectives
120, 1-2 ; 121, 1 ; in verbs 184.
Reciprocal pronoun 142.
Recurrent action 568.
Reduplication 177 ff. ; of the perfect
178 ; Attic 179 and a ; with e- be-
fore a vowel 180 ; of compound
verbs 181 ; of the present 182 ;
193, 3 ; 197, 1 ; of the 2d aorist
183 ; 208, 1 and a.
434
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
Reference, dative of 382.
Reflexive pronouns 141 ; in Homer
141 a.
Reflexive pronouns, syntax of 469 ff. ;
in Homer 470 a ; direct 470 ; in-
direct 471 ; 3d person for 1st or 2d
471 note 1 ; plural for reciprocal
471 note 2; avr6s with 473.
Relative clauses 618 ; expressing
purpose 591 ; implying result 597 ;
implying cause 598 ; implying con-
dition 621 ; 622 ; of anticipation
623 and a ; 624 ; general 625 ;
625 a.
Relative pronouns 149 ; adjectives
and adverbs 151.
Relative pronouns, syntax of 483 ff. ;
attraction of 484; "incorpora-
tion " of 485 ; antecedent not ex-
pressed 486 ; relative not repeated
487.
Respect, accusative of 337 ; dative
of 390.
Result, how expressed 595 ff.
Result of action, suffixes denoting
280.
Rhetorical questions 573.
Rhythmical series 686.
Rhythms 693 ff.
Romaic, Introduction, page 12.
Roots 270 ; changes of, in derived
words 272.
Rough breathing 8.
Rough mutes 12, 2.
Sampi 156.
Second aorist. See Aorist.
Second perfect. See Perfect.
Second person. See Person.
Secondary tenses 161, 1 ; 517 ; end-
ings of 166, 2 ; 170 notes 1-3.
Semivowels 12, 1.
Sentences 303 ff . ; simple 309 ff . ;
compound 312 ; complex 313.
Separation, genitive of 362.
Sibilant 12, 1.
Singular verb with plural subject
496, 1 ; 498.
Smooth breathing 8.
Smooth mutes 12, 2 ; for rough 40 ;
41 ; 44, 4 a.
Source, genitive of 365.
Specification, accusative of 337 ; da-
tive of 390.
Spondee 683 ; spondaic verse 701.
Square measure 719.
Statements 561 ff. ; in epic poetry
563 a.
Stater, value of Cyzicene 724, 1.
Sterns 73, 1 ; of pronouns 139 note ;
of verbs 163 ; changes of stems in
derived words 273-274.
Strophe 691.
Subject of sentence 304 ; not ex-
pressed 305 ; enlarged 310 ; not
repeated in compound sentence
312, 1 ; in nominative case 325 ;
agreement of verb with 495 ff.
Subject of infinitive 629; not ex-
pressed 630 ; agreement of predi-
cate words with 631.
Subjective genitive 349.
Subjunctive mode 159; sign -w- or
-T\- 160 ; with short vowel in
Homer 160 a; 211, 1 a; endings
of 166, 3; of 2d aorist in Homer
211, 1 a ; in Herodotus 211, 1 b ; of
the perfect 221, 1 ; 227 ; of aorist
passive 233, 1 ; 233, la: Tenses of
539 ff . ; present 540 ; aorist 543 ;
perfect 546 : Uses of 554 ff . ; with
/u,?? and fj.r) ov 569, 1 ; with ov ^
569, 2 ; in deliberative questions
577 ; in prohibitions 584 ; in ex-
hortation 585 ; in purpose clauses
590 ; in object clauses 593, 1 ; in
clauses of fearing 594 ; in con-
ditions 604 ; 609 ; in relative and
ENGLISH INDEX
435
[THE REFERENCES
temporal clauses 623 ; 625-627 ;
changed to optative in indirect dis-
course 673.
Substantives, declension of 78 ff. ;
formation of 276-286; have no
distinction of person 314 note :
Syntax of 317 ff. ; apposition
317 ff . ; predicate substantive
320 ; 326 ; 341 ; peculiarities in
the meaning of 321-322 ; genitive
with 348-355; dative with 393;
infinitive with 641.
Substantive use of adjectives 424.
Substitution (metrical) 685.
Suffixes, substantive 277-286 ; ad-
jective 287-289 ; adverb 290 ; verb
292-293.
Suggestion, infinitive of 644.
Superlative degree, syntax of 427 ;
genitive with 355, 1.
Superlative ending -raros 132 ; -to-ros
134.
Supplementary participle 659 ff.
Suppositions. See Conditions.
Swearing, accusative of 344 ; fu-
ture infinitive with verbs of
549, 2.
Syllaba anceps 688.
Syllables 49 ; division of words into
50 ; quantity of 52-54 ; Homeric
peculiarities 53 a, b ; 54 a ; pro-
longed 682, 3-4.
Syncope 20.
Synizesis 19 note 2 ; between two
words 43 note 2.
Syntax 301 ff. ; of substantives
315 ff. ; of prepositions 398 ff. ;
of adjectives 419 ff. ; of adverbs
429 ff. ; of conjunctions 440 ff. ;
of the article 443 ff. ; of pronouns
459 ff. ; of verbs 493 ff.
System, tense 162 ; metrical, 692 ;
trochaic 696 ; iambic 699, 1 ; ana-
paestic 703, 2.
ARE TO SECTIONS]
Tau class of verbs 194.
Temporal clauses 618 ; 626 and a ;
627 and a.
Tenses of the verb 161 ; primary
and secondary 161, 1 ; tense sys-
tems 162 ; formation of 186 ff.
Tense stems 162 ; formation of 186 ff .
Tenses, use of 517 ff. ; primary and
secondary 517 ; meanings of from
context 518 ; tenses of indicative,
present, future, etc. 519 ff. ; of
other modes 513 ff. See Present,
Future, Aorist, Perfect, Pluper-
fect, Future Perfect.
Tetrameter 686, 2 ; trochaic 695 ;
iambic catalectic 699 ; anapaestic
704.
Tetrapody 686, 1.
Tetraseme 682, 4.
Theme of verbs 163.
Thesis 684.
Third person. See Person.
Time, how expressed 397 ; accusa-
tive of 338 ; genitive of 359 ;
dative of 385 ; implied by cir-
cumstantial participle 653, 1 ;
reckoning of 725 ff.
Tmesis 298 a.
Transitive verbs 493 ; tenses 494.
Tribrach 683.
Trimeter 686, 2 ; iambic 698.
Tripody 686, 1.
Triseme 682, 3.
Trochee 683 ; trochaic rhythms
694 ff. ; 707, 2.
Ultima 51.
Unreal conditions. See Conditions
contrary to fact.
Value, genitive of 352 note ; 353.
Variable vowel 169.
Vau 2 and 2 a. See also p in the
Greek Index.
436
ENGLISH INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
Verbal adjectives 159, 2 ; accent of
185, 2 ; formation of 235 ; syntax
of 663 ff. ; agent with 666.
Verbs 157 ff . ; voices 158; deponent
verbs 158, 3; modes 159; tenses
161 ; principal parts 162 ; irregu-
lar verbs 164 ; primitive and
denominative verbs 165 ; 291-292 ;
person and number 1 66 ; personal
endings 167 ; forms of inflection
168 ff. ; augment 171 ff. ; redupli-
cation 177 ff. ; accent 184-185 ;
formation and inflection of tense
stems 186 ff. ; synopsis of TrcuSetfw
236 ; paradigms of -w verbs 237 ff . ;
paradigms of -/u verbs 251 ff. ; ir-
regular -fj.i verbs 259 ff . ; formation
of 291-292 ; desiderative 293 ;
compound 298 ; verb of predicate
omitted 308 ; verb has no dis-
tinction of gender 314 note ; not
expressed in conditions 615 ; 616.
Verbs, syntax of 493 ff. ; transitive
and intransitive 493 ff . ; agreement
495 ff. ; voice of 502 ff. ; use of
tenses 517 ff. ; uses of finite modes
552 ff. ; infinitive 628 ff. ; parti-
ciple 648 ff. ; verbal adjectives
663 ff. ; list of verbs 729.
Verse 687 ff.
Versification 679 ff.
Vocative, often like nominative 74
notes 2 and 3 ; sing, in 1st decl.
masculine 87 ; in 3d decl. 98 ; like
nominative 98, 1 ; peculiar voca-
tives 104 note ; 107, 1.
Vocative case, syntax of 327.
Voice of the verb 158 ; 502 ff. ;
active 503 ; 'middle 504 ff. ; pas-
sive 509 ff. See Active, Middle,
and Passive.
Vowels, short and long 3 ; sounds
of 4 ; 4, 1 ; interchange of short
and long 13 ; long for short in
Homer 13 a ; interchange of short
14; contraction of 18; table of
contractions 715 ; contraction of
three vowels 19 note 1 ; omission
of 20 ; 21 ; long form before a
suffix 274 note ; lengthened in
forming compounds 296.
Vowel verbs, formation of tenses of
187-189 ; aorist of 202 ; 207 ; per-
fect of 218, 2 ; future perfect of
228 ; aorist passive of 231, 2 ; in-
flection of 236 ff.
Waterclock 728.
Weights, table of 723.
' Whole and part ' construction 335 a.
Wishes 586 ff.
Words, formation of 268 ; derivative
269 ff. ; word groups 271 ; com-
pound words 294 ff. ; word ques-
tions. See Questions.
Year, name of 725 ; divisions of 726.
' Yes or no ' questions. See Ques-
tions.
Zeugma 717, 19.
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
Verb forms, as a rule, are not listed in this index, but they are to be
sought in the List of Verbs ( 729).
a, sound of 4 ; developed from ad-
jacent consonants 14, 1 ; vowel
equivalent of v 14 note ; short in
1st decl. 82 ; absorbs short vowel
117, 1.
d-privative 299, 1.
d-conjunctive 299, 2.
a, = 77 in Attic 15 ; a in Ionic 15 a ;
for a by compensation 15, 1 ; in
1st decl. after e, t, or /> 83 ; 86 ; in
fern, of adjectives 117, 1.
-a-, substantive suffix 277, 2.
-a declension 80 ff.
, sound of 6, 1.
ay ad6s, compared 136.
Aye, dyere, with subj. and impv. 582
note.
Ayvvfj.1., augment 172, 2 ; redupli-
cation 180 ; perfect intransitive
494, 3.
ayxov 418 a.
.-a5d-, -a5-, patronymic suffixes 285, 2.
-afw, formation of verbs in 195, 2 ;
292, 6.
A0ij?afe 137, 2.
at, sound of 6.
at (for ei) in Homer 587 a ; 600, 1 a.
at', af K e (Epic)= et', &v 442 b.
-at final, effect on accent 63 ; elision
of 44 a.
at'5t6s, declined 109.
Ai'0io7TT}as 114, 2 a.
-ati/w, formation of verbs in 292, 8.
-atos, as suffix 275.
aipovfjia.i choose 506.
al<T0dvo/j.at, construction with 669, 3.
at'<rx/>6$, compared 134.
ata-xflro/tat, with partic. 660, 1 ; with
infin. 660, 1 note,
-a/cis, adverbial suffix 290, 4.
d/cotfw, construction with 669, 3 ; with
genitive 356 ; e5 (xaKws) d/coua> 513.
&Kpos, position of article with 454.
a\yeiv6s, compared 136.
dXXd in apodosis 601 note.
dXXd ydp 441 note 2.
d\\r]\wv, declined 142.
d"XXo0i 137, 2.
<SXXos, declined 140 ; idiomatic uses
of 492 notes.
d"XXo rt ?; in questions 573 note.
d"XXws re Kat 441 note 1.
&>, as improper preposition 418;
with circumstantial participle 655.
d/xaxet 137, 1.
d/j.eiv<}v 136.
&fjL/j.es 139 a.
d>6s 143 a.
d/xovw, construction with 378.
afjL<f>l, use of 400 and a.
av for dj/ci 43 note 3.
&v, use of 436 ff. ; position of 439
note 1 ; repeated 439 note 2 ; with
future indicative (Hm.) 563 a ; not
used with e5et, \pr\v, etc. 567 ; 607 ;
in purpose clauses 590 note 2 ;
437
438
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
not always used with dependent
subj. 604 a ; 609 a ; 623 a ; 625 a ;
with infinitive 647 ; with participle
662 ; in indirect discourse 439 ;
670, 2.
dv = tdv 438 note.
dv-, inseparable prefix 299, 1.
-av%-, present suffix 196, 2.
dvd, use of 401 and a.
dvdjKTj eo-ri with infinitive 641.
avddvu, augment 172, 2 ; reduplica-
tion 180.
Avev 418.
dvtx<>>, augment of 175 note.
, declined 105 and a.
, augment 172, 2 and note 1 ;
reduplication 180.
dvrl, use of 402 ; after comparative
426 note 5 ; dvrlov 418.
dvixrds quickly 653 note 2.
o>w, compared 138, 1.
<5lios with genitive of value 353, 1.
do becomes ew 17.
ao, aw, sometimes changed to eo, ew,
in Herodotus 199 e.
d7r6, use of 403.
d7ro5t'5o/u sell 506.
, vocative 104 note.
touch 506.
dpa in questions 571, 1.
dp??j/, declined 115, 2.
"Ap^s, declined 115, 1 and a.
dpi-, inseparable prefix 299 a.
136.
as adverb 336.
653 note 2.
dV<rct 148 a.
oVtra (relative) 150 a.
&<TTV, declined 110 and d.
-area, -arc, 3d plural ending 167 d ;
200 c ; 226 a.
oVe 441 a ; with participle expressing
cause 656, 1.
d>ep 418 a.
148 note 1.
au, sound of 6.
avTf], See o&ros.
auri/ca with circumstantial participle
655.
avr6s, declined 140 ; as 3d personal
pronoun in Attic 140, 1 ; syntax
of 474 ff. ; with reflexives 470 a ;
473 ; in Homer 475, 1 a and 3 a ;
idiomatic uses 475, 3 notes ; in
genitive case with possessive pro-
nouns 479.
141, 1.
418.
-dw, formation of verbs in 292, 3.
-aw, verbs in (Homeric) 199 b ; 292,
3 a.
P, sound of 11. See Labial Mutes.
/Satpw, /3a.Tov 211 a ; 1st and 2d
aorist of 494, 1 ; future transitive
494 note ; plp-qica. 535.
/3a<riXetfs, declined 111 and a; with-
out article 446 note.
/SeXrW, jSArio-ros 136.
BoppSs, declined 88.
/SouXetfw, meaning of middle 506.
/Sous, declined 111 and c.
y, sound of 11 ; 7 nasal, sound of
11, 1. See also Palatal Mutes.
7dXa 103.
7a/i<, meaning of middle 506.
7dp, Kal ydp, dXXa 7dp 441 note 2.
7a0-T?7p, declined 105 and a.
-77-, present of verbs with themes
in 195 note 1 ; perfect middle
247, 2.
yeydr-rjv 219 a.
7epcu6s, comparison of 132, 2.
-71- apparently = -TT- 195 note 2.
yiyvonai as copula 307.
7i/-, reduplication of 178 note.
76, declined 115, 3 and a.
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
s, declined 111 and b.
7pd0oyu.cu indict 506.
declined 115, 4.
8, sound of 11. See also Lingual
Mutes.
daveifrfj.a.1 borrow 506.
5s, declined 115, 5.
5<? in apodosis 601 note.
-5e, adverbial ending 137, 2.
dtdotica fear 535.
delKvv/j.1, inflection of 254.
SetVo, 148 note 2.
like 418 a.
106 c.
114, 2 a.
5^, 5?) Trore, added to indefinite rela-
tives 151 note.
577X65 et'/At, construction with 669, 3 ;
personal 634 ; 660 note.
-Sip, adverbial suffix 290, 2.
did, use of 404.
dia yvvaiKuv 355, 1.
StSwjut, inflection of present 252 ; of
aorist 256 ; contract forms 5i8ov,
tdidovs, etc. 170, 4 ; 170, 4 a ; 5t-
dova-i 200 b ; 56s 170 note 1.
SiKtifw, meaning of middle 506.
8iK-nv 336 ; 418.
5t6n in causal clauses 598.
5t' X a 418 a.
5/tu>s, declined 115, 7.
5oto, 5otc 155 a.
5o/c<2, construction with 669, 2.
-So?, adverbial suffix 290, 1.
d&pv, declined 115, 6 and a.
56s 170 note 1.
SOT;, dv/j.ev (optative) 211, 2 a.
Si^a/xcu, accent of optative 200 note.
5tfo, declension of 155 ; dvo'icri 155 b.
SIKT-, inseparable prefix 299, 3.
Sow, inflection of 2d aorist edvv 257 ;
5077 211, 2 a ; 1st and 2d aorist of
494, 1.
439
', 5iw5e/ca 155 a-b ; 152 b.
5w, contraction of 199 note.
, sound of 4 ; absorbed before 01
19, 1 ; in tense formation 190.
139.
-<fo for -eta in Herodotus 123 a.
ea for rja 17.
ea contracted to a 91, 1 ; 106, 2.
eat contracted to at 118, 1 ; 120, 3.
t&v = el &v 438 note ; use of in con-
ditions 600, 1.
eavrov 141 ; syntax of 469 ff.
tyyvs 418.
<?7u>, declined 139.
?5, without S.v 567, 1 ; 607.
%dvv. See 5oo>.
ee, contraction of 18, 3.
e 139 a.
^s 149 a.
Wtv 139 a.
^0i'o>, augment 172, 2 ; reduplica-
tion 180.
et, sound of 6 and 6, 3 ; for e by
compensation 16, 1.
et, in wishes 587 a ; after words of
wondering 598, 1 ; in conditions
601 ; with subjunctive in Homer
604 a ; 609 a.
6* ydp in wishes 587 ; 588.
el 5t n-h 616, 3.
elSov, augment 172, 2.
eWe in wishes 587 ; 588.
i\-r]\ov6a 219 note 1.
e?A770a, eZXyxa, cfXo%a, et/xaprat 178,
2.
etXoi', augment 172, 2.
ei pfi 616, 1 ; et /XT) 5tct 616, 2.
e!/u.i, inflection of 261 ; future mean-
ing of present 524 note ; in Homer
524 a.
et>t, inflection of 262 ; accent of
262, 1.
etVctKis, efraros 152 a-b.
440
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
tivi 406 a.
elo 139 a.
-etos, as suffix 275.
elTrov 208, 1 ; construction with in
indirect discourse 669, 1 ; with
infinitive 669 note.
etprjKa 178, 2.
efs, declined 155.
ei's, use of 405 and a ; sometimes
accented in Homer 68 a ; ets 8
KC - until 618 a.
eto-a, augment 172, 2.
efo-w 418.
elra with circumstantial participle
655.
-etw, formation of verbs in 292, 2 a.
efos 442 b.
e*/c. See #.
e/cds 418 a.
e/ceZVos, declined 146 ; use of 480 ff.
e^n 418 a.
418.
, declined 129 ; eK&i> eivat 642, 1.
d.TTWv, e*Ad%t<rTos 136 ; eXarrorwith
comparatives 426 note 4.
= march 493, 1.
, augment 172, 2 ; reduplica-
tion 180.
>, augment 172, 2 ; reduplication
180.
efJLdVTOV 141.
eVtfep 139 a.
e>6s 143.
e>ou 139.
/j.7rpo<r0et> 418.
eV, use of 406 and a ; sometimes
accented in Homer 68 a ; e> rots
427 note.
fvavrlov, eveKa 418.
<^ep0e(>) 418 a.
evdavra 41 a.
M 406 a.
-err- adj. suffix (fullness) 289, 1.
e^ros 418.
^|, <?/c 47 ; use of 407 ; sometimes
accented in Homer 68 a.
ttfv, without Av 567, 1 ; 607.
^w 418.
eo, contraction of 18, 5 ; contracted
to eu in Hdt. 170 c.
eo, cou, contraction of in Ionic 18 a.
eo, eo>, from ao, aw, in Hdt. 199 e.
eot 139 a.
e6s 143 a.
, eir^v, tireiddv 438 note.
, in causal clauses 598.
with circumstantial partici-
ple 655.
, use of 408.
^o-Tci/iou, accent of subj. and opt.
200 note.
, augment of 172, 2.
, augment 172, 2 ; redupli-
cation 180.
e>7rw, augment 172, 2 ; reduplica-
tion 180.
-e<r-, substantive suffix 277, 3 ; adjec-
tive suffix 287, 2.
-eo-t, dative plural ending (epic) 99 a.
eo-<n(i'), dative plural ending (epic)
76 b ; 99 a.
t<rTafj.ei> 220.
stand 535.
, accent of 262, 1.
(VO or 486 note.
w, augment of 172, 2.
s, declined 131 and note.
os, article with 454.
, idiomatic uses of 492 notes.
eu, sound of 6.
-eu-, stems in 111 and a ; contracted
111, 2.
eD (Ionic), use of 477 a.
-eu-, substantive suffix (agent) 278,
1 ; gentile suffix 286, 1.
eufltfs with circumstantial partic. 655.
eure 442 a.
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
441
-6i/w, formation of verbs in 292, 4.
^0' yre 441 a ; t<p' y, ^0' yre, use of
596.
, compared 134.
yv 267 ; without &v 567, 1 ; 607.
e%w, augment of 172, 2 ; meaning
of middle 506 ; with participle =
perfect 536, 2 ; = be 493, 1.
exo>v persistently 653 note 2 ; with
653 note 3.
ew for do or 770 17.
-^w, formation of verbs in 292, 2.
<?<2, augment 172, 2.
2u>s 618 note.
p 2 and 2 a ; prevents elision in
forming compounds 295, 1.
(numeral) 156.
I 12, 3 ; sound of 11.
fa-, inseparable prefix 299 a.
Zetfs, declined 115, 8 and a.
f<3, contraction of 199, 3.
t], sound of 4 ; as long form of a 13
note ; Attic = original a 15 ; in
Ionic 15 a.
-77 in 1st decl. 83 ; Ionic 83 a ; -rj in
feminine of adjectives 117, 1.
77 from a in 1st aorist of liquid verbs
204 note 2.
-7?-, subjunctive sign 160.
TI in questions 571, 1 ; 571 a ;
574 a.
77, use of with comparative 426, 2
and notes ; interrogative 574 a ;
7} /card 426 note 5.
77, ijde. See 6 and 86e.
77, sound of 6, 1.
7] 151 ; with superlative 428.
770 becomes ed 17.
-7701 contracted to -77 in Hdt. 170 c.
iiyovfjuii, construction with 669, 2.
77^77 with circumstantial partic. 655.
775^5, compared 134.
77^, 776, in questions 574 a.
77X^0$ 151.
T7/xcu, inflection of 265.
^0.0 103, 1.
77/xets 139.
-fl^v . . . r}5t 441 b.
137, 2 a.
143.
lid 266.
77/xt-, inseparable prefix 299, 4.
^t^, T^WI/ 139 note 2.
T^ato-us, article with 454.
7^/ios 442 a.
T> = tdv 438 note.
Tjvlica. 151.
T7J/IOX6V- in Homer 114, 2 a.
770 becomes ew 17.
yos 442 b.
7>ap 103, 1.
'RpaK\rjos 108 a.
77/3ws 113 and a.
-775, adjectives in 120 and a.
777-1?. See &rrts.
T^TTWJ/ 136.
771;, sound of 6, 2.
r)x<4 H2.
77165, declined 109 a.
0, sound of 11. See Lingual mutes ;
6 in tense formation 191 a.
6a.v6.rov Kpiveiv 367 note.
41.
&v boldly 653 note 2.
134.
-fop, case ending in Homer 76 a ;
adverbial ending 137, 2.
-0i, adverbial ending 137, 2 ; im-
perative ending 167 ; 200 c.
43.
41 ; declined 101.
, declined 105 and a.
vw, meaning of middle 506 ;
40.
442
i, sound of 4 ; subscript 5, 1 ; con-
traction of 18, 1 ; dropping of .21 ;
with consonants 39, 1-4.
-i, locative ending 76 note.
-i- stems in 3d decl. 110 ; proper
names 110, 2.
-i-, optative suffix 160, 1 (cf. 199 ;
233 note).
i class of verbs 195.
-i%-, denominative verb suffix 292.
-i, added to demonstrative pronouns,
147.
fa one 155 a.
-m-, -m-, substantive suffixes 282, 1-2.
-id-, gentile suffix 286, 1.
-i5d-, -id-, patronymic suffixes 285, 1.
tdios with possessive genitive 348, 2.
idpds in Ionic 102 a.
tep6s with possessive genitive 348, 2.
-tfw, formation of verbs in 195, 2 ;
292, 6 ; future 215.
-177-, optative suffix 160, 1 (cf. 199
note ; 233 note).
Irifjii, augment of 172, 2 ; reduplica-
tion of 180 ; inflection of 260.
t6i with imperative 582 note.
-t/co-, adjective suffix 287, 6.
t'Xews, declined 119 and a.
iva in purpose clauses 590.
-iro-, adjective suffix (material)288, 2.
-to-, diminutive suffix 283, 1 ; place
suffix 284, 1 ; adjective suffix 287, 5.
-KTKO-, HTKO.-, diminutive suffixes 283, 2.
-w/c%- present suffix 197.
i<TT-r)/j,i, i(TTa<Ti 167 note 3 ; (rrrjerov
211, 1 a ; ffrfafjiev 211, 1 b ; inflec-
tion of present 253 ; of 2d aorist
257; 1st and 2d aorist of 494, 1 ;
perfect intransitive 494, 3.
s, superlative ending 134 ; more
frequent in poetry 134 b.
^w, declined 110 and e.
uv, comparative ending 134 ; more
frequent in poetry 134 b.
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
K, sound of 11 ; for IT in Herodo-
tus 151 b. See also Palatal
Mutes.
, 1st perfect suffix 218 ; in aorist
205.
e-nfMi, inflection of 265, 1.
J, icai 5^ /cdf, meaning of 441 note
1 ; Kal yap 441 note 2.
, /cd/7re/3, Kal ravra with participle
expressing concession 656, 2 and
a ; Kal rauTd 312 note ; /ecu rbv
443, 3.
, compared 136.
Kd\os 92 a.
*d\6s, compared 136.
KO.V for KO.I tv 43 note 1.
KO.V for KO.I tav 617.
Kdpa, icdprj declined 115, 9 and a.
, use of 409.
with genitive 370.
, inflection of 264. ,
146 a.
K^KT-r}fj.ai possess 535.
, declined 115, 10; 103, 2 and
a; 106.
41 a.
KIS, declined 110, 2.
K\aiuv to one's sorrow 653 note 2.
K\<?d 106 a.
-K\^;S, names in 108 and a.
K 66ev 151 b.
Kotfi? (common dialect), Introduc-
tion, page 12.
KOIOS 151 b.
ripvs, declined 115, 11 a.
:6<ros, /COT^, KOV 151 b.
KpelrTuv 136.
Kpt/j.afj.a.1, accent of subjunctive and
optative 200 note.
icupcS, supplementary participle with
660 note.
Ktiwv, declined 115, 12.
106 C.
151 b.
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
443
X, sound of 11. See Liquids.
\ct76s, \cryw6s 92 a.
Xo7x a " w ) Xa/A/3dj>a>, reduplication of
perfect 178, 2.
\6.9pq. 418.
\avdavw, supplementary participle
with 660 note ; \aduv = secretly
653 note 2.
Xa6s 92 a.
Xos, declined 115, 13.
X^yaj (collect), reduplication of per-
fect 178, 2.
X^yw (say} construction with, in in-
direct discourse 669, 1 ; e5 (KO/CWS)
Xfya> nvd 330.
Xe/ fail 493, 1.
\i8oj36\os, Xt06/3oXos 300 note.
-XXw, formation of verbs in 292, 7.
-Xo-, adjective suffix 287, 9.
\oyoypd<f>os, \oyoiroi6s 300.
136.
jx, sound of 11. See Liquids.
-/to-, substantive suffix 280, 3.
-/tafrw, verbs in 292, 8 note.
,udXo, comparison of 138, 2.
/xaXXov, fj.d\HTTa, in comparison of
adjectives 135.
/id/??, declined 115, 14 and a.
-/tar-, substantive suffix 280, 1.
/x<fyos, declined 127 ; compared 134.
-/j-effov, dual ending 167 note 1.
/xeiW 136 ; /tetbi' with comparatives
426 note 4.
/tAos, declined 124.
/iAi 103.
/iAXw with infinitive 533 ; with
future infinitive 549, 1.
/j.t/j.vrjfjLa.1 remember 535 ; subjunctive
and optative of 227 note.
-(j.evcu, -fj.ev, infinitive ending (epic)
167 e ; accent of 185, 1 a.
-[jLtff8a, 1st plural ending 167 note 2.
JUNTOS, position of article with 454.
/terd, use of 410 and a.
/xeTou 418 ; with circumstantial par-
ticiple 655.
418.
, syntax of 431 ff. ; instead of oi>
431 note ; ^ (apa ^77, yuwi>) in
questions 572, 2 ; ^ in wishes
589 ; after 6/>w, O-KOTTW, etc. 593
note ; 6'n /XT?, offov w 625 note ;
/*7j 6n 442 note ; /^ oy 432 ; 435
and note.
, declension of 155, 1.
, declined 105 and a.
fj.rjTpoKT6vos, /jL-rjTpbKTovos 300 note.
-fMi personal ending 167 ; 170 a ; 170
note 1.
-/xt verbs, inflection of 170 ; para-
digms 251 ff. ; irregular 259 ff. ;
like contract verbs 170, 4 and a.
/jiLa. See els.
/niya, /jLiyda 418 a.
/u/cp6s, compared 136 ; /xtKpoO (5etV)
= almost 642, 1 and note.
fjnv 139 b.
fju<rdov/j.ai hire 506.
-/to-, substantive suffix 280, 2.
-/j.oi>-, adjective suffix 287, 3.
fjiov 139.
-/t?r-, perfect middle of themes in
247, 1.
/j.>i> in questions 572, 2 ; /tcDi/ ov 572
note.
v, sound of 11 (see Liquids) ; re-
placed by a 14 note ; changes in
before other consonants 31-34 ;
assimilated 33 ; dropped before <r
34 ; dropped in dative plural 3d
decl. 99 ; v movable 45.
-v 3d plural ending for -vav 167 c ;
170 b ; 233 a.
v class of verbs 196.
j/a, vt]- present suffix 196, 3.
va.vs, declined 111 and b.
444
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES
V f%-, present suffix 196, 4.
VT\-, inseparable prefix 299 a.
1/7765 92 a.
j/TjCs, i>T)6s 111 b.
VLV 139 note 1.
-j/o-, adjective suffix 287, 7.
-j>%-, present suffix 196, 1.
j/o/xi'^u, construction with 669, 2.
v6cr<t>i(v} 418 a.
J/T dropped in dative plural 3d decl.
99, 1.
-J/T-, adjective stems 125.
-W-, present suffix 196, 5.
v& 139 ; vutrepos 143 a.
| 12, 3; sound of 11.
%uv. See fl-i/p.
w, contraction of 199 note.
o, sound of 4; absorbed before 01
19,1.
-o-, substantive suffix 277, 1 ; adjec-
tive suffix 287, 4 ; adjective suffix
(material) 288, 1.
6- relative stem 151.
6, 77, r6, declined 144 ; demonstrative
in Homer 144 a ; in Herodotus
144 b ; as relative in Homer 149 a ;
in Herodotus 149 b ; use with ap-
positive in Homer 31 7 a ; epic uses
of 443 a ; as a relative 443 b ; o
likv . . . $ dt 443, 1. See Article.
6', 6 re in causal clauses (epic) 598 a.
oa contracted to a 118, 1.
65e, declined 145 ; use of 480 ff . ; = a
possessive 482 note.
65ous 102.
oe, contraction of 18, 5.
oet, contraction of 19, 2.
077, contraction of 19, 2 ; 170, 2.
SOcv 151.
oQotveKa, introducing indirect dis-
course 669, 1 b.
ot, sound of 6 ; absorbs e or o 19, 1.
ARE TO SECTIONS]
-ot final, effect on accent 63.
-oi-stems 112 and a.
of (pron.) 139 ; ol (adv.) 151.
otyu. See dvoiyu.
o?5a, inflection of 259 ; meaning of
535 ; construction with 669, 3.
Oidlirovs, declined 115, 15 and a.
-ouv in dual of 2d decl. (Homer) 90 b.
of/caSe 137, 2.
ot/cetos with possessive genitive 348, 2.
137, 2.
137, 2 a.
of/cot 137, 1.
-oio, ending of genitive singular 2d
decl. in Homer 90 a.
ofo/xcu, construction with 669, 2.
ofos 151 ; with superlative 428 ; at-
traction of 485 note 2 ; of6s re
441 a ; of OP, of a, with participle
expressing cause 656, 1.
ois, declined 115, 16 and a.
OK66ei>, 6/rotos, 6/c60-os, &'KOV, OKWS 151 b.
6Xt-yoi; (5etv) = almost 642, 1 and
note.
flXXu/iu, 1st and 2d perfect of 494, 2.
5Xos, article with 455.
ofjiws with circumstantial partic.655, 1.
, accent of 211 note.
- 114, 2.
oo, contraction of 18, 3.
-oo, ending of genitive singular 2d
decl. in Homer 90 a.
dlo (flow) 149 a.
6^77, 07T77X//COS, OTTTji^/ca, oirdOev. STTO,
OTroZbs, 67r6<ros, 67r6re, OTTOU 151.
6irLff8ev 418
O'TTTTOIOS, btnr()re\ etc. 151 a.
151 ; with subjunctive or future
indicative in commands 583 note
3 ; with future indicative in pur-
pose clauses 590 note 3 ; in object
clauses 593 ; oVws /XT?, instead of
fj.^ 594 note,
ts, declined 115, 17.
GREEK INDEX
445
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
6pu>, augment of 172, 2 and note 1 ;
reduplication of 180 ; with ^ and
subjunctive 593 note,
os, 77, 6' (relative) 149.
6s as demonstrative 144 a.
6s (possessive) 143 and 1 ; use of
143 a ; 478 and a.
6s, 6<ros, etc., referring to indefinite
antecedent 488.
60-os 151 ; attraction of 485 note 2 ;
foov (J.-/I 625 note.
6a"m, declension of 150 ; ovdels 6<rris
ov 485 note 1.
&TO.V 438 note.
6re 151.
6rt, with superlative 428 ; in causal
clauses 598 ; introducing indirect
discourse 669 ; 6n ^ 625 note.
6rts, 6Veo, 6rrt, etc., in Homer and
Herodotus 150 a-b.
o'rou, 6ry 150, 1.
ou, sound of 6 and 6, 3 ; for o by
compensation 16, 1.
ou, owe, oux 46 ; ou, syntax of 431 ff. ;
instead of /*ij 431 note ; ou (ap ou,
OVKOVV) in questions 572, 1 ; ou /j.rj
432.
o5, of, I, declined 139 ; accent of 139,
1-2 ; use of, in Attic 468 ; 472 ; in
Homer 472 a.
oB (where) 151.
ov5a/jt.ov 137, 1.
ouSei's, declension of 155, 1 ; ouSets
6(ms ou 485 note 1.
oijdeos 106 c.
GUI', added to indefinite relatives 151
note.
oiW/ca, introducing indirect discourse
669, 1 b.
ous, declined 115, 18 and a.
ouros, declined 145 ; use of 480 ff. ;
/ecu ouros 312 note.
OUTWS, with circumstantial participle
655, 1.
60/xx 618 a ; 8<j>pa and 6<ppa Ke in pur-
pose clauses 590 a, b.
ou% 6n 442 note.
-6w, formation of verbs in 292, 1.
IT, sound of 11 ; doubled in general
relatives in Homer 151 a. See
Palatal Mutes.
Trdtfos 14 note.
TTCUS, declined 115, 19.
TrciXcu with present tense 522.
Trapti, use of 411.
7rci/>os 627 a.
?ras, declined 125 ; article with 455.
7ra<ra 125 note 1.
dcrxv 513.
, declined 105 and a.
- in Homer 1 14, 2 a.
112.
, 1st and 2d perfect of 494, 2.
Iletpcueus, declined 111, 2.
, declined 110.
219 a.
trust 535.
?rep with participle 656, 2 a.
irtpav 418.
103, 2.
, use of 412 and a.
am 535.
7T7?, 7TT7 151.
jrriyvv/ju, perfect intransitive 494, 3.
TTTjXl'/COS, Tlfvllftl 151.
7T77XUS, declined 110 and d.
irLcrvpes 152 a.
TrX^a feminine of TrX^ws 119, 2.
TrXetW (TrX^wv), TrXeto-ros 136; TrXe'oi/
with comparatives 426 note 4.
, contraction of 199, 2.
, ir\-rjffiov 418.
|, declined 115, 20.
TTO- interrogative stem 151.
irbdcv, irodtv 151.
TTOl 137, 1.
TTOi, TTOt, TTOiOS, TTOtOS, 151.
446
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES
7roi<2, e5 TToitD nva, etc. 330.
?r6Xts, declined 110 and a-c.
TroXireuw, meaning of middle 506.
A 137, 1.
.tfs, declined 127 and a ; com-
pared 136.
I16(7ei5ov, vocative 104 note.
7r6cros, 7ro<r6s, 7r6re, TTOT^ 151.
TTOT* 414 a.
TTOU 137, 1 J 7TOU, TTOV 151.
>, declined 128.
negotiate 506.
s, declined 115, 21.
627 and a ; irpLv $ 627 note.
t, Trpial/j.r)v, accent of 211 note.
wp6, use of 413 ; irpb TOV 443, 4.
7r/o6s, use of 414 and a.
irpbadev . . . irplv, irpbrepov . . . irpLv,
irpbrepov % 627, note.
irporL 414 a.
TTPV 137, 1.
TTU/J, declined 115, 22.
7TUJS, 7TWS 151.
q 9 156.
p, sound of 11.
p (initial), sound of 11, 2; rough
breathing of 9 ; doubled 23. See
Liquids.
pg.8ios, compared 136.
-po-, adjective suffix 287, 8.
pp for ps 24.
<r, s, form of 1, 2 ; sound of 11 ;
disappearance of 35-37 ; changed
to rough breathing 36 ; doubled in
future and aorist in Homer 201 a.
-s imperative ending 170 note 1.
<r in perfect middle and aorist pas-
sive 189.
-a- stems in 3d decl. 106-109 ; in
Ionic 106 a-c ; 108 a ; 109 a.
(TO.VTOV 141, 1.
ARE TO SECTIONS]
, 1st and 2d aorist of 494, 1.
(reavrov 141.
<r/r, lost at the beginning of some
words 36 a.
-<r0a, personal ending 167 a.
-<rdu<ra.v, imperative ending 167 note 4.
-<ri, locative ending 76 note ; dative
plural ending 99 and a ; 3d person
ending 167 ; 170 a ; 170 note 1.
-<ri-, substantive suffix (action) 279, 2.
-o-m-, substantive suffix 279, 3.
0-tros, (TITO. 114, 3.
-0-K%-, iterative suffix 191 b.
<r/co7rcD with yd] and subj. 593 note.
<r/c6Toj, declined 114, 1.
o-6s 143.
(T-jrovdrj 137, 1.
<r(r, in Homer 30 a ; 35 a ; in 1st
aorist 201 a.
ffrddiov, ffrddioi 114, 3.
crtf, declined 139.
ffVfjLfjuya 418 a.
tri/j/, use of 415 and a.
-0-vra-, substantive suffix (abstract),
282, 4.
ffvve\6m diretv 382 ; 642, 1.
o-i^j/otSa, construction with 661 note 2.
o-Gs, declined 110.
0-06 139 note 1.
a-0ets 139.
o-0^repos 143 ; use of 478.
<r<t>t<av (Ionic), use of 477 a.
<r06s 143 a.
<r<j>6 139.
143 a.
170 note 1.
, declined 107 ; 114, 1.
, vocative 104 note.
T, sound of 11. See Lingual Mutes.
-T final dropped 95.
T class of verbs 194.
-ret, nominative ending of 1st decl.
in Homer 85 a.
GREEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES ARE TO SECTIONS]
447
-ret-, substantive suffix (agent) 278, 4.
-ra-, gentile suffix 286, 2.
raL 144 a.
TdXas, declined, 124.
-TCITOS, superlative ending 132.
43.
s, compared 134.
144 a.
re, epic use of 441 a.
-re, adverbial suffix 290, 3.
Tedvavai. 220.
retv 139 a.
-retpa, feminine substantives in 282, 2.
TeXeuTwi/ finally 653 note 2.
Teo, TeWi, reu, etc. 148 a.
T<?OS 143 a.
-Te'os, ending of verbal adjective 235.
Te'pas, 103, 2 and a.
-Tepos, comparative ending 132.
reV trapes, TeV<repes 152 a-b.
TeYrapes, declension of 155.
TeV TeW, etc. 148 a.
TTJ-Se, TT/Xt/coCros, TrjXt'Kos, TTjXiKxScrSe,
Tt]V\.KO., TT]l>iKd5e, TTJVLKaVTa 151.
T?)Xe 418 a.
-T7JP-, substantive suffix 278, 2.
-Tiptop 284, 1.
T 7)0-4 144 a-b.
-TTJT-, substantive suffix 282, 3.
Tt. See TS ; rl na.6(S)v, rl iraduv 653
note 4.
-TI-, substantive suffix (action) 279, 1.
-TiS-, substantive suffix (agent) 278,
4 ; gentile suffix 286, 2.
Tidrjfju, inflection of present 251 ; of
aorist 255 ; contract forms erl-
0eis, Tc0otro, etc. 170, 4 ; 170, 4 c ;
200 a; TiMo-t 200 b;
40.
T/S, TIS 148 ; accent of 148, 1 ; TIS,
added to relatives 150 and note ;
use and rendering of 491 notes.
TO-, demonstrative stem 151.
T6, T65e. See 6 and 6'5e.
T60et> 151.
Tot (dative singular) 139 a.
rot (nominative plural) 144 a.
Toti>, Toto 144 a.
TO?OS, Toi6(rSe, TOIOUTOS 151 ; use of
482.
-Top-, substantive suffix (agent) 278,
3 ; To/<r5e<rt, Toi(T5eo'<ri, rouride 145 a.
TOitrt, rria-t 144 a-b.
rbv Kal rbv 443, 2.
-TOS, ending of verbal adjective 235.
T6<ros, T0(r6<r5e, TOO-OUTOS 151 ; use of
482.
T6Te 151 ; T6Te with circumstantial
participle 655.
TOO zz TtWS 148.
TOUTO. See OIJTOS.
Tpeis, declension of 155.
Tpe"0w 41.
Tpia, Tpiwi', rpiffi 155.
-Tpt5-, substantive suffix 278, 4.
Tpixos 41.
-Tpo-, substantive suffix 281, 1.
Tpbirov (adverbial accusative) 336.
Tpcis, declined 115, 23.
TT = Ionic cro- 22 ; apparently from
7t 195 note 2.
-TTW, formation of verbs in 195, 1 ;
292, 5.
rvyxdvoj supplementary participle
with 660 note.
Ttfj/Tj 139 a.
Tip = TlVt, TLvL 148.
TWS 151.
-TWO-O.V, imperative ending 167 note
4.
v, sound of 4 and 4, 1 ; initial al-
ways with rough breathing 10 ;
dropping of 21 ; contraction of
18, 1.
-u-, adjective suffix 287, 1.
-v- stems in 3d decl. 110, 1.
vSup, declined 115, 24.
448
GKEEK INDEX
[THE REFERENCES
vi, sound of 6.
vt6s, declined 115, 25 and a.
fats 139 ; v/ias, vfuav 139 note 2.
143.
139 a.
s 143 a.
, formation of verbs in 292, 9.
, use of 416.
V7r6, use of 417.
<|>, sound of 11. See Labial Mutes.
0aj>o>, inflection of perfect middle
247 ; perfect intransitive 494, 3 ;
Qalvofjiai as copula 307.
with imperative 582 note.
i, inflection of 263 ; accent of
263, 1 ; construction with in in-
direct discourse 669, 1.
00dj>o>, supplementary participle with
660 note; 00d<ras = before 653
note 2.
001/0?*', 00tVo (optative) 211, 2 a.
-0i(i'), epic case ending 76 c.
0t\os, comparison of 132, 2 ; 135.
0uX<iTTa>, meaning of middle 506.
0tfw, 1st and 2d aorist of 494, 1 ;
future transitive 494 note ; per-
fect intransitive 494, 3.
0<Ss 103, 2 and a.
X, sound of 11. See Palatal Mutes.
with impunity 653 note 2.
ivfor the sake 0/336 ; 418.
, declined 115, 26 and a.
^w, CXVTO 211 a.
ovs, declined 111.
pt 267 ; xPW without &v 567, 1 ;
607.
ARE TO SECTIONS]
X/ow/tai, contraction of 199, 3 ; dative
with 387 note ; xp^/xei/oj with 653
note 3.
X/9c6s in Ionic 102 a.
4* 12, 3; sound of 11.
w, sound of 4.
-w- stems in 92 ; -w- (or w/r) stems
113 and a.
-w-, subjunctive sign 160.
V, sound of 6, 1.
-w verbs, inflection of 169 ; synop-
sis of 236 ; paradigms of 237 ff.
o0ui, augment of 172, 2 ; reduplica-
tion of 180.
#*, declined 129.
-wv-, place suffix 284, 2.
ws 151 ; sometimes accented in
Homer 68 a ; as improper prepo-
sition 418 ; with superlative 428 ;
in wishes 586 a ; in purpose clauses
590 ; in causal clauses 598 ; accu-
sative absolute after 658 note ; ws
with participle 656, 3 ; with par-
ticiple in indirect discourse 661
note 4 ; introducing indirect dis-
course 669 ; ws 7Tos etVefV 642, 1 ;
ws ct, ws ef re with participle in
Homer 656, 3 a.
tiffirep with participle 656 note ; ac-
cusative absolute after 658 note ;
&<rirep &v el 616, 4.
&<TTf 441 a ; expressing result 595 ff. ;
with participle in Herodotus 656,
1 a.
wu, diphthong in Herodotus 5 a.
wur6s 140 a.
#0eXoi> in wishes 588 and a.
Babbitt PA
258
A grammar of Attic and .B25<
Ionic Greek.
